IPC Definitions - February 7, 2013

A01 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this class, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Plant

Any of a kingdom (Plantae) of multicellular eukaryotic mostly photosynthetic organisms typically lacking locomotive movement or obvious nervous or sensory organs and possessing cellulose cell walls.

A01B - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Seat constructions

A47C

Wheels

B60B

Shelters for drivers

B60J

Seats specially adapted for vehicles, arrangement or mounting of seats in vehicles

B60N 2/00

Wheel scrapers

B60S 1/68

A01D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods, apparatus or hand tools for

Hand rakes.

Forks.

Non-abrasive sharpening devices for scythes, sickles or the like.

Containers for whetstones for use during harvesting.

Machines specially adapted for binding of harvested hay, straw or similar crops in the field.

Arrangements for making or setting of stacks, used in connection with harvesting.

Vehicles specially adapted for carrying harvested crops with means for self-loading or unloading.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Combined or convertible apparatus

This subclass covers mowers combined with apparatus performing additional operations (e.g. threshing) while mowing, mowers convertible to apparatus for purposes other than mowing (e.g. for sweeping snow), and mowers capable of performing operations other than mowing (e.g. soil-working). The non-mowing parts of such mowers are only covered by this subclass if they are immediately associated with the mowing parts or the mowing process. Otherwise they are covered by the places for the non-mowing operations.

This subclass covers digging harvesters (e.g. for root crops) combined with apparatus performing additional operations (e.g. topping, separating or planting) while harvesting. The non-harvesting parts of such combinations are only covered by this subclass if they are immediately associated with the harvesting parts or the harvesting process. Otherwise they are covered by the places for the non-harvesting operations.

Hand tools for soil working

This subclass covers hand tools for soil working when specially adapted for harvesting, for example of root crops. This subclass also covers rakes and forks. A01B covers hand tools for soil working in general, e.g. spades, shovels or hoes, with the exception of rakes and forks.

Binding

This subclass covers apparatus specially adapted for binding of harvested hay, straw or similar crops, with the exception of stationary apparatus or hand tools, which are covered by A01F 1/00, and binding apparatus specially adapted for baling presses, which is covered by A01F 15/14. Binding in general is covered by B65B, for example B65B 13/00 and B65B 27/12.

Shredding or pulverising

This subclass covers the shredding or pulverising of stubble or other vegetation in situ, e.g. for the purpose of producing mulch, but does not cover other mechanical destruction of unwanted vegetation, which is covered by group A01M 21/02.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Soil working tools or machines for weeding or thinning

A01B

e.g.

A01B 1/16, A01B 39/18, A01B 41/00

Transplanting

A01C 11/00, A01G 23/04

Machines for cutting sods or turf from lawns or meadows

A01B 45/04

Cutting implements specially adapted for horticultural purposes, e.g. flower shears, fruit shears, secateurs or hedge shears

A01G 3/00

Delimbing of standing trees

A01G 3/00

Uprooting or felling of trees

A01G 23/02

Tapping of tree juices

A01G 23/10

Apparatus for destruction of unwanted vegetation

A01M 21/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Machines that pick up mown material from the ground and bale it

A01F 15/00

Machines that pick up mown material from the ground and cut it, e.g. field choppers

A01F 29/01

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Agricultural soil working in general

A01B

Gatherers for removing stones, undesirable roots or the like from the soil

A01B 43/00

Parts, details or accessories of agricultural machines in general

A01B 51/00-A01B 76/00

Threshing

A01F 5/00-A01F 12/00, A01F 17/00-A01F 21/00

Baling of hay, straw or the like

A01F 13/00-A01F 21/00

Stacks for storing of harvested products

A01F 25/04

Cutting machines specially adapted for hay, straw or the like

A01F 29/00

Floral handling

A01G 5/00

"Harvesting" of oysters, mussels, sponges or the like

A01K 80/00

Treatment of harvested fruit or vegetables, not otherwise provided for, e.g. extracting juice, cleaning of vegetables or topping of onions

A23N

Preparation of tobacco

A24B

Making harvesting tools

B21

e.g.

B21D 53/68, B21D 53/72, B21H 7/08, B21H 7/10, B21K 11/08, B21K 11/14, B21K 19/00

Sharpening of cutting edges in general

B24B, B24D

e.g.

B24B 3/00, B24D 15/06

Handles for hand implements in general

B25G

Hand-held cutting tools in general

B26B

Cutting in general

B26D

Wheels

B60B

Vehicles specially adapted for load transportation, or for transporting, carrying or comprising special loads or objects, in general

B60P

Wheel scrapers

B60S 1/68

Conveyers in general

B65G

Hoisting or lifting in general, e.g. hay hoists

B66

e.g.

B66C 11/24

Removing undesired matter from land, not otherwise provided for

E01H 15/00

Dredging or soil-shifting in general

E02F

e.g.

E02F 3/28, E02F 5/28

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Combine (noun)

Harvester or mower combined with a threshing device.

Fork

Hand tool having two or more tines that are used for lifting, digging or pitching.

Harvest (verb)

Perform one of the methods defined in the definition statement in order to make use of the separated, mown or gathered plantmaterial.

Hay

Mown forage crop in a dry or partially dry state.

Haymaking

Working on mown forage crop lying on the ground with the intention to make hay.

Mow (verb)

Cut down grass, cereals or other standing plants.

Thresh (verb)

Separate grains or seeds from harvested plants or plant parts (e.g. cereals, maize/corn, peas, beans or pine cones) by mechanical action (e.g. shaking, stamping, rubbing, beating or applying intermittent pressure).

A01D 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Abrasive or similar sharpening devices

B24D 15/06

A01D 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Whetting implements

B24D 15/00

A01D 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Haymakers, crop conditioners

A01D 76/00-A01D 84/00

A01D 23/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processing of harvested produce in bulk

A01F 29/00, A23N

A01D 37/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Features relating to mowing only

A01D 34/00

Features relating to binding only

A01D 39/00

A01D 41/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Threshing devices for combines

A01F 7/00-A01F 12/00

A01D 59/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bundling articles for packaging in general

B65B 13/00

A01D 59/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Twine balls or their manufacture

B65H

A01D 61/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Conveying in general

B65G

Hoisting, lifting, in general

B66

A01D 75/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sharpening machines or devices per se

B24B, B24D

A01D 75/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Safety devices in general

F16P

A01D 75/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Safety devices in general

F16P

A01D 87/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Loading in general

B65G, B66

A01D 90/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Load transporting vehicles modified to facilitate loading, in general

B60P

Bucket cars, i.e. having scraper bowls

E02F 3/64

A01F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

The scope of this subclass is composed of five separate parts, relating to the five parts of the subclass title. For ease of reference each section of these definitions is separated under five corresponding simplified headings: "Threshing", "Baling", "Bundling", "Cutting" and "Storing".

Threshing (relating to main groups A01F 5/00-A01F 12/00 and A01F 17/00-A01F 21/00):

Methods and apparatus for separating grains or seeds from harvested plants or plant parts by mechanical action.

Baling (relating to main groups A01F 13/00-A01F 21/00):

Methods and apparatus for forming bales of straw, hay or like harvested products of plant origin.

Bundling (relating to main group A01F 1/00):

Stationary apparatus or hand tools for forming or binding bundles of straw, hay or like harvested products of plant origin.

Cutting (relating to main groups A01F 3/00 and A01F 29/00):

Apparatus specially adapted for cutting or disintegrating straw, hay or like already harvested products of plant origin.

Storing (relating to main group A01F 25/00):

Mechanical aspects (e.g. materialhandlingaspects) of apparatus (e.g. silos) or methods that are specially adapted for storing harvested agricultural or horticultural crops.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Threshing

Main groups A01F 5/00-A01F 12/00 and A01F 17/00-A01F 21/00 provide for threshing devices and for accessories that are directly connected with threshing. Combines, and details of combines that are not directly connected with the threshing action (e.g. mowing, feeding or vehicular features) are covered by A01D.

Baling

Main groups A01F 13/00-A01F 21/00 are application-oriented places for methods or apparatus for baling that are specially adapted for straw, hay or like harvested products of plant origin. Baling of compressible fibrous material in general is provided for in B65B 27/12. Baling presses in general is provided for in B30B 9/30. Bales of material are provided for in B65D 71/00.

Bundling

Main group A01F 1/00 is an application-oriented place for stationary apparatus or hand tools for bundling, which are specially adapted for straw, hay or like harvested products of plant origin. Binding of harvested products by mobile apparatus in the field is provided for in A01D, for example in A01D 37/00, A01D 39/00 and A01D 59/00. Bundling of compressible fibrous material in general is provided for in B65B 27/12. Bundling of articles in general is provided for in B65B 13/00.

Cutting

Main groups A01F 3/00 and A01F 29/00 are application-oriented places for apparatus or methods that are specially adapted for cutting up or disintegrating straw, hay or like already harvested products of plant origin. Mowing and other cutting down of standing plants is covered by A01D and A01G. Cutting in general is covered by B26. Disintegrating in general, e.g. by rotating knives, is covered by B02C.

Storing

Main group A01F 25/00 is an application-oriented place for mechanical aspects (e.g. materialhandlingaspects) of apparatus or methods that are specially adapted for storing harvested agricultural or horticultural crops. Containers for storage of articles or materials in general is covered by B65D. Storing and associated handling of bulk material or articles in general is covered by B65G. Civil-engineering aspects of silos or similar bulk storage containers are covered by section E, for example E04H 7/00.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Threshing

Separation of grains or seeds from plants in the place where they grow

A01D

e.g.

A01D 41/08, A01D 45/00, A01D 46/00

Combines

A01D 41/00, A01D 45/00, A01D 57/00, A01D 61/00-A01D 75/00

Field threshers with windrow pick-up apparatus

A01D 41/10

Pick-ups for harvested crop

A01D 89/00

Coring or stoning of fruit

A23N 3/00, A23N 4/00, A47J 23/00, A47J 25/00

Removing seed-containing sections from fruit

A23N 4/00, A23N 7/08

Hulling, husking or cracking of nuts

A23N 5/00, A47J 43/26
Baling

Arrangements for making or setting stacks

A01D 85/00

Pick-ups for harvested crop

A01D 89/00
Bundling

Arrangements for making or setting stacks in connection with harvesting

A01D 85/00
Cutting

Cutting or disintegrating in combination with mowing

A01D 43/08

Pick-ups for harvested crop

A01D 89/00

Shredding tea leaves

A23F 3/12

Fodder mashers for preparing animal feeding-stuff

A23N 17/02

Cutting tobacco

A24B 7/00

Spice mills

A47J 42/00
Storing

Arrangements for making or setting stacks, used in connection with harvesting

A01D 85/00

Devices for preserving flowers

A01G 5/06

Arrangements in barns for treatment of tobacco

A24B 1/02

Suspending devices for tobacco leaves

A24B 1/08

Cabinets for perishable goods

A47B 71/00

Fruit or potato storage cabinets, racks or tray for domestic use

A47B 75/00

Closed containers for foodstuffs

A47J 47/02

Drying or storing hops

C12C 3/02, C12C 3/04

Civil engineering aspects of bulk storage containers, e.g. silos

E04H 7/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:
Baling

Vehicles for carrying harvested crops with bale-forming means additionally used for loading

A01D 90/08

Packing or pressing tobacco

A24B 1/10
Bundling

Apparatus for binding bouquets or wreaths of flowers

A01G 5/02

Packing or pressing tobacco

A24B 1/10

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Threshing

Separating solids using pneumatic tables or jigs

B03B

Separating solids from solids by dry methods, in general

B07B

Hulling, husking, decorticating or removing awns otherwise than in connection with threshing

B02B 3/00

Conveying in general

B65G
Baling

Forming of bundles of straw, hay or like material of plant origin

A01D 37/00, A01D 39/00, A01D 57/00-A01D 75/00, A01F 1/00

Loaders for bales

A01D 87/12, A01D 90/08

Baling of compressible fibrous material in general

B65B 27/12

Baling presses in general

B30B 9/30

Bales of material

B65D 71/00

Conveying in general

B65G
Bundling

Mobile binders for use while harvesting

A01D 37/00, A01D 39/00, A01D 57/00-A01D 75/00

Loaders for sheaves

A01D 87/12

Forming of bales

A01F 13/00, A01F 15/00

Bundling of compressible fibrous material in general

B65B 27/12

Bundling of articles in general

B65B 13/00
Cutting

Mowing

A01D

Cutting implements specially adapted for horticultural purposes, e.g. flower shears, fruit shears, secateurs or hedge shears

A01G 3/00

Apparatus for destruction of unwanted vegetation

A01M 21/00

Household implements for mashing potatoes or other foodstuff

A47J 19/04

Disintegrating in general

B02C

Hand-held cutting tools

B26B

Cutting in general

B26D

Conveying in general

B65G
Storing

Protecting growing plants

A01G 13/00

Preservation of plants or parts thereof

A01N 3/00

Preserving flour by storage in an inert atmosphere

A21D 4/00

Preservation of fruits or vegetables

A23B 7/00

Preservation of edible seeds

A23B 9/00

Preservation of edible oils or fat

A23D 7/06, A23D 9/06

Preservation of materials to produce animal feeding stuff

A23K 3/00

Preservation of foods or foodstuffs in general

A23L 3/00

Containers for storage of articles or materials in general

B65D

Storage and associated handling of bulk material or articles in general

B65G

Conserving hops

C12C 3/04

Refrigerators, cold rooms, or the like

F25D

Drying in general

F26B

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Bale (noun)

A compressed, solid package of harvested material, which is either held together by thread or webs or formed by the material itself (with or without additives) to maintain its shape.

Bundle (noun)

A relatively loose package of harvested material, normally consisting of straws or stalks that are oriented in parallel to each other. It can either be held together by thread or webs or be formed by the material itself.

Combine (noun)

Harvester or mower combined with a threshing device.

Harvest (verb)

Separate useful parts from growing plants in situ, mow plants, or gather whole plants or their useful parts from the ground or from where the plants grow, with the intention to make use of the separated, mown or gathered plantmaterial.

Mow (verb)

Cut down grass, cereals or other standing plants.

Threshing

Separation of grains or seeds from harvested plants or plant parts (e.g. cereals, maize/corn, peas, beans or pine cones) by mechanical action (e.g. shaking, stamping, rubbing, beating or applying intermittent pressure).

A01H - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

New plants (including multicellular algae, multicellular fungi and lichens).

Processes for modifying genotypes or phenotypes.

Plant reproduction by tissue culture techniques.

Methods or apparatus for producing changes in chromosome number.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Unicellular algae

C12N 1/12

Fungal micro-organisms

C12N 1/14

Specific mutations prepared by genetic engineering on plant cell or plant tissues

C12N 15/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Influencing the growth of plants without producing new plants, non-chemically.

A01G 7/00

Influencing the growth of plants without producing new plants, chemically.

A01N 25/00-A01N 65/00

A01K 5/00 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Stock

Animals kept or raised for use or pleasure

A01K 7/00 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Stock

Animals kept or raised for use or pleasure

A01K 9/00 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Stock

Animals kept or raised for use or pleasure

A01M 29/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Stationary means for catching or killing insects by using illumination

A01M 1/04, A01M 1/08

A01M 29/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Poisoning, narcotising, or burning insects

A01M 1/20

Fumigators; Apparatus for distributing gases

A01M 13/00

A01M 29/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Flame-throwers

A01M 15/00

A01M 29/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Beater rattles for hunting

A01M 31/04

A01M 29/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Beater rattles for hunting

A01M 31/04

Special rules of classification

A01M 29/16 takes precedence.

A01M 29/24 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus for the destruction of noxious animals, other than insects, by hot water, steam, hot air, or electricity

A01M 19/00

Electric traps

A01M 23/38

Electrified wire fencing

A01K 3/00

A01M 29/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Killing insects by electric means

A01M 1/22

A01M 29/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fencing, e.g. fences, enclosures, corrals

E04H 17/00

A01M 29/34 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Adhesive bands or coatings for trees

A01M 1/18

A01N - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Compositions, physical forms thereof, and the application or method of use of specific materials, compositions, or single compounds for the following purposes:

Compositions used to protect the wound and scions of newly grafted plants or to cover the wounds on pruned plants (i.e. grafting wax).

Chemical agents used for the sexual sterilization of invertebrates (e.g. insects).

Relationship between large subject matter areas

While substances that chemically modify a plant's metabolism are classified in A01N, compositions that affect the growth of a plant solely by supplying nutrients ordinarily required for growth, e.g. fertiliser, plant food, are classified in C05. Materials used to prevent or cure mineral deficiencies in plants, such as iron chelates used to cure iron chlorosis, are also classified in C05.

The activities (e.g. rodenticidal, herbicidal) of biocidal, pest repellent, pest attractant or plant growth regulatory preparations must also be classified in A01P, when such activities are determined to be invention information.

When biocides, pest repellents, pest attractants or plant growth regulators are compounds or contain compounds which are determined to be invention information, the compounds must also be classified in C01, C07, C08, or C12N. When these compounds are considered to be of interest for search purposes, they may also be classified in C01, C07, C08, or C12N.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Apparatus therefor

A01G 5/06

Preservation of food or foodstuff, e.g. pasteurizing, sterilizing

A23B, A23K 3/00, A23L 3/00

Preservation or chemical ripening of harvested fruits or vegetables

A23B 7/00

Compositions for medical, dental or toilet purposes which kill or prevent the growth or proliferation of unwanted organisms

A61K

Sex sterilants for animals other than invertebrates

A61K

Mixtures of pesticides with fertilisers

C05G

Fungicidal, bactericidal, insecticidal, disinfecting or antiseptic paper

D21H

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Plant grafting

A01G 1/06

Devices for preserving flowers

A01G 5/06

Electric or magnetic treatment of plants for promoting growth

A01G 7/04

Sterilising soil by steam

A01G 11/00

Protecting plants (e.g. protective covers; devices for generating heat, smoke or fog; devices protecting against animals)

A01G 13/00

Means for catching or killing insects

A01M 1/00, A01M 5/00

Apparatus for destroying vermin in soil or food stuffs

A01M 17/00

Apparatus for the destruction of vegetation

A01M 21/00

Scaring devices e.g. bird-scaring apparatus

A01M 29/00

Hunting decoys

A01M 31/06

Methods or apparatus for disinfection or sterilisation of materials not characterized by the agent employed

A61L 2/00, A61L 12/00

Paints containing biocides, e.g. fungicides, insecticides, pesticides

C09D 5/14

Anti-fouling paints and underwater paints

C09D 5/16

Soil-conditioning materials or soil-stabilising materials

C09K 17/00

Undifferentiated human, animal or plant cells or tissues and their cultivation and maintenance

C12N 5/00

Biocidal agents (e.g. fungicidal, bactericidal, or insecticidal agents) which are in or on paper

D21H 21/36

Special rules of classification

In groups A01N 27/00-A01N 65/00, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place for an active ingredient.

A composition, i.e. a mixture of two or more active ingredients is classified in the last of groups A01N 27/00-A01N 65/00 that provides for at least one of these active ingredients.

Any part of a composition which is not identified by classification according to the last appropriate place of an active ingredient, and which itself is determined to be novel and non-obvious, must also be classified. The part can be either a single ingredient or a composition in itself.

Any part of a composition which is not identified by the classification according the last appropriate place, and which is considered to represent information of interest for search, may also be classified. This can for example be the case when it is considered of interest to enable searching of compositions using a combination of classification symbols. Such non-obligatory classification should be given as "additional information".

Where a compound is described as existing in tautomeric forms, it is classified as if existing in the form which is classified last in the system.

Compounds that are covered by different main groups because of alternatively specified functional groups or other structural features of their formulae are classified in each relevant main group.

Salts formed between two or more organic compounds are classified as the compound providing the essential ion and is also classified as the compound providing the other ion.

Salts or metal chelates of an organic compound are classified as the compound.

In this subclass, a foodstuff is not considered to be an active ingredient.

Different materials applied in sequence, at different times, are considered to be a mixture of all materials employed.

Synergistic or potentiated compositions are classified as if the synergist or potentiator is an active ingredient.

In groups A01N 25/00-A01N 65/00, the symbol X means nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or a halogen; Y means nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur. A dotted line between atoms indicates an optional bond, e.g. .... indicates one or two single bonds or a double bond.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Acaricide

Any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing or destroying mites and ticks or making them less harmful.

Alkali metal

One of the following elements: Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr.

Alkaline earth metal

One of the following elements: Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra.

Arthropodicide

Any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing or destroying arthropods, e.g. insects, arachnids, crustaceans or making them less harmful.

Biocide

Any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing, destroying, or mitigating any living organism (e.g., plant, animal). Examples of a biocide are: acaricide, arthropodicide, fungicide, insecticide, molluscicide, rodenticide (see Synonyms and Keywords).

Disinfectant

Any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing, destroying, or mitigating microorganisms.

Fungicide

Any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing or destroying moulds and fungi or making them less harmful.

Halogen

One of the following elements: F, Cl, Br, I, At.

Heavy metal

A metal other than light metal.

Herbicide

Any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing or destroying plant life or making it less harmful.

Insecticide

Any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing or destroying insects or making them less harmful.

Light metal

One of the following elements: alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, Be, Al, Mg.

Metal

An element other than non-metal.

Molluscicide

Any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing or destroying molluscs, e.g. snails, clams or making them less harmful.

Non-metal

One of the following elements: H, B, C, Si, N, P, O, S, Se, Te, noble gas, halogen.

Pesticide

Any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing or destroying any pest (e.g., insects, rodents) or making it less harmful.

Plant

A young tree, shrub, vegetable, or flower newly planted, or intended for planting

Plant growth regulator

Materials which alter the plant or may affect plant growth through a chemical modification of the plant metabolism, such as auxins.

Rodenticide

Any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing or destroying rodents, e.g. rats, mice or making them less harmful.

A01N 25/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus for the destruction of noxious animals or noxious plants

A01M

A01N 25/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fumigators

A01M 13/00

A23B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods for preserving meat, sausages, fish, fish products, eggs, egg products, fruit, vegetables (preservation of raw potatoes) or edible seeds by heating, drying, freezing, irradiating, smoking, using chemicals or micro-organisms, etc. and compositions therefor.

Apparatus for preserving meat, sausages, fish, fish products, eggs, egg products, fruit, vegetables or edible seeds using liquids, solids or gases.

Apparatus, methods, and compositions for coating meat, sausages, fish, fish products, eggs, egg products, fruit, vegetables or edible seeds with a protective layer.

Apparatus for compressing sauerkraut.

Chemical ripening of fruit or vegetables with liquids, solids or gases.

Preserved, ripened or canned products (i.e., meat, sausages, fish, fish products, eggs, egg products, fruit, vegetables or edible seeds), per se.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Preservation of foods or foodstuffs in general is classified in group A23L 3/00 while A23B includes the methods of preserving meat, sausages, fish, , fish products, eggs, egg products, fruit, vegetables or edible seeds as well as the chemical ripening of fruit or vegetables. A classification in A23B is proper if the preservation method is for specific types of foods which are covered in A23B. If a food in general is being preserved by a specific preservation method it is classified in A23L 3/00.

Preserving, protecting, or purifying packages or package contents in association with packaging and apparatus therefor are classified in B65B 55/00. Preserving meat, sausages, fish, fish products, eggs, egg products, fruit, vegetables or edible seeds and apparatus therefor not restricted to packaging are classified in A23B.

B65D 81/00 deals with containers, packaging elements or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents. More specifically, B65D 81/28 deals with applications of food preservatives, fungicides, pesticides or animal repellants to the container or the packaging material, per se to prevent deterioration or decay. A23B deals with preserving meat, sausages, fish, fish products, eggs, egg products, fruit, vegetables or edible seeds, per se.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Marmalades; Jams; Jellies; Other similar fruit or vegetable compositions; Simulated fruit products; Their preparation or treatment

A23L 1/06

Preparation of cooked potatoes

A23L 1/216
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Applying food preservatives in packages

B65D 81/28

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preparation of fruits or vegetables

A23L 1/212

Preparation of fruits or vegetables by pickling, e.g. sauerkraut

A23L 1/218

Preserving foodstuffs in general

A23L 3/00

Machines for washing or blanching fruits or vegetables in bulk in combination with subsequent drying

A23N 12/06

Machines for drying or roasting fruits or vegetables in bulk

A23N 12/08

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Egg product

All or portion of the contents found inside eggs separated from the shell and that may be pasteurized in a food processing plant, with or without added ingredients, intended for human consumption, such as dried frozen or liquid eggs. Egg products do not include food which contains eggs only in a relatively small proportion, such as cake mixes.

Fish

Any fish, including shellfish and crustaceans, and marine animals (marine being defined as "of, found in, produced by the sea"), and any parts, products or by-products thereof.

Fish product

A product containing a predominant amount of fish

A23B 4/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Acid fermentation

A23B 4/12

A23B 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preserving dough or bakery products

A21D

A23B 7/154 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Acid fermentation

A23B 7/10

A23D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Edible oil or fat compositions containing an aqueous phase, e.g. margarines, and their working-up and the preservation of finished products.

Other edible oils or fats, e.g. shortenings, cooking oils, microbial oils and their working-up and the preservation of finished products.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Foods or foodstuffs containing edible oils or fats are classified in the relevant parts A21D, A23G, A23L. Fats derived from milk are classified in A23C (e.g. A23C 13/00 and A23C 15/00).

C07C covers acyclic and carbocyclic compounds, e.g. esters of carboxylic acids (C07C 69/00), but not their use in food stuff which is covered by A23D.

C11B covers the production and purification/refining of oils and fats as well as their recovery from waste material, but not limited to those oils and fats which are suitable for use in foodstuffs. C11B does not cover mixtures of fats or oils with water or other edible oils or fats, which are covered by A23D.

C11C covers fatty acids that are not or no longer esterified with glycerol (although the process or esterification of said fatty acids with glycerol is covered) and their modifications, as well as candles.

A23L 1/29 covers food with modified nutritive qualities, e. g. dietetic food, functional food.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Animal-feeding stuff

A23K 1/00

Use of substance as emulsifying, wetting, dispersing or foam-producing agents

B01F 17/00

Mineral oil (kerosene, paraffin waxes, petroleum, gasoline, diesel), biodiesel

C10

Preparation of fats or fatty oils by using microorganism or enzymes

C12P 7/64

Investigating or analyzing edible oils or fats by specific methods

G01N 33/03

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Oil

An oil is a substance that is in a viscous liquid state ("oily") at ambient temperatures or slightly warmer, and is both hydrophobic (immiscible with water) and lipophilic (miscible with other oils, literally). This general definition includes compound classes with otherwise unrelated chemical structures, properties, and uses, including vegetable oils, petrochemical oils, and volatile essential oils. Oil is a nonpolar substance.

The word "oil" is used for any substance that does not mix with water and has a greasy feel, such as petroleum (or crude oil) and heating oil, regardless of its chemical structure.

Edible oil

Edible or cooking oil is fat of plant, animal or microbial origin, which is liquid at room temperature and is suitable for food use.

Some of the many different kinds of edible vegetable oils include: olive oil, palm oil, soybean oil, canola oil, pumpkin seed oil, corn oil, sunflower oil, safflower oil, peanut oil, grape seed oil, sesame oil, argan oil and rice bran oil. Many other kinds of vegetable oils are also used for cooking.

The generic term "vegetable oil" when used to label a cooking oil product refers to a blend of a variety of oils often based on palm, corn, soybean or sunflower oils.

Edible oil of animal origin is e.g. fish oil. Microbial oil are also encompassed.

Fat

Fats consist of a wide group of compounds that are generally soluble in organic solvents and largely insoluble in water. Chemically, fats are generally triesters of glycerol and fatty acids. Fats may be either solid or liquid at normal room temperature, depending on their structure and composition. Although the words "oils", "fats", and "lipids" are all used to refer to fats, "oils" is usually used to refer to fats that are liquids at normal room temperature, while "fats" is usually used to refer to fats that are solids at normal room temperature. "Lipids" is used to refer to both liquid and solid fats, along with other related substances.

Fats form a category of lipid, distinguished from other lipids by their chemical structure and physical properties. This category of molecules is important for many forms of life, serving both structural and metabolic functions. They are an important part of the diet of most heterotrophs (including humans). Fats or lipids are broken down in the body by enzymes called lipases produced in the pancreas.

Shortening

is a fat used in food preparation, especially baked goods, and is so called because it promotes a "short" or crumbly texture (as in shortbread). The term "shortening" can be used more broadly to apply to any fat that is used for baking and which is solid at room temperature, such as lard, but as used in recipes it refers to a hydrogenated vegetable oil that is solid at room temperature. Shortening generally has a higher smoke point than butter and margarine, and it may have 100% fat content, compared to about 80% for butter and margarine.

A23D 7/05 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Essential cooling

The cooling is an essential, i.e. indispensable characteristic of the working-up.

A23F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Tea.

Tea substitutes, e.g. mate, lemon balm, rose hips.

Extracts or infusions of tea and tea substitutes.

Tea flavour, tea oil.

Methods of manufacturing, preparing and modifying tea and tea substitutes, e.g. oxidation, fermentation, removing caffeine, extraction, drying, concentrating, flavouring.

Coffee.

Coffee substitutes, e.g. grain coffee.

Extracts or infusions of coffee and coffee substitutes.

Coffee flavour, coffee oil.

Methods of manufacturing, preparing and modifying coffee and coffee substitutes, e.g. treating green coffee, roasting, grinding, removing caffeine, extraction, drying, concentrating, flavouring.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass does not cover chemical compounds, e.g. alkaloids such as caffeine, theophylline, theobromine, or their preparation as such, which subject matter is covered by classes C07 (organic chemistry) and C08 (organic macromolecular compounds).

Physical or chemical processes or apparatus in general, e.g. boiling, extraction or filtration, are covered by class B01.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Picking of tea

A01D 46/04

Picking of coffee

A01D 46/06

Synthetic tea flavours

A23L 1/226

Synthetic coffee flavours

A23L 1/234

Machines for cleaning, blanching, drying or roasting fruits or vegetables, e.g. coffee

A23N 12/00

Coffee mills

A47J 42/00

Medicinal preparations containing plantmaterial from tea or tea substitutes or from coffee or coffee substitutes

A61K 36/00

e.g.

A61K 36/74, A61K 36/82, A61K 36/28

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Chocolate, confectionery or ice-cream containing coffee or tea

A23G

Preservation of foods or foodstuffs, in general, e.g. freeze-drying or spray-drying

A23L

Shaping or working of foodstuffs, not fully covered by a single other subclass, e.g. agglomerating, granulating or tabletting

A23P

Coffee or tea pots

A47G 19/14

Tea infusers, e.g. egg-shaped infusers

A47G 19/16

Tea or coffee pot cosies

A47G 19/20

Apparatus for making beverages, e.g. coffee or tea

A47J 31/00

Packaging of substances, e.g. tea, which are intended to be infused in the package, i.e. filling tea bags

B65B 29/02

Attaching, or forming and attaching, string handles or tags to tea bags

B65B 29/04

Disposable containers or packages with contents which are infused or dissolved in situ

B65D 85/804

Disposable tea bags

B65D 85/808

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Alkaloid

The stimulant xanthine drugs caffeine, theobromine and theophylline contained in coffee beans and/or tea leaves.

Coffee

Stimulant product or beverage made from roasted seeds, commonly called coffee beans, which come from a plant of the genus Coffea, e.g. Coffea arabica or Coffea canephora.

Coffee substitutes

Coffee substitutes (solid or liquid) are non-coffeeproducts normally without caffeine, used to substitute coffee while preserving its taste. Grain coffee and other substitutes can be made by roasting or decocting various organic substances. Common ingredients include acorn, barley and malt, beech nut, chicory root, corn, fig and rye.

Decaffeination

Process of removing the alkaloid caffeine from coffee beans or tea leaves.

Herbal tea, tisane, ptisan

Any Camellia sinensis-free product or beverage prepared by hot water infusion of plantmaterial, usually leaves but also including fruits, flowers and possibly even bark or other parts. Herbal teas are belonging to the group of tea substitutes.

Tea

Stimulant product or beverage made from the leaves of the traditional teaplant (Camellia sinensis).

Tea substitutes

Tea substitutes (solid or liquid) are non-teaproducts, i.e. not coming from the traditional teaplant (Camellia sinensis), e.g. mate (Ilex paraguariensis), lemon balm (Melissa officinalis), rose hips (Rosa canina), etc.; cf. herbal tea.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the words "Lyophilisation" and "freeze-drying" are often used as synonyms.

A23J - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Obtaining of protein compositions for foodstuffs, e.g. from meat, fish or sea animals, blood, eggs, hair, cereals, leguminous or other vegetable seeds, waste water, yeasts or milk.

Bulk opening of eggs and separation of yolks from whites.

Working-up of proteins for foodstuffs, e.g. by texturising using freezing, extrusion, expansion, coagulation from or in a bath; by hydrolysis using chemical agents or enzymes.

Phosphatide compositions for foodstuffs, e. g. lecithin.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Phosphatides in oils or fats are classified in C11B

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Treatment of flour or dough by adding proteins before or during baking

A21D 2/26

Dairy products, e.g. milk, butter, cheese; milk or cheese substitutes; making thereof 

A23C 9/00, A23C 11/00, A23C 17/00-A23C 23/00

Cocoa products

A23G 1/44

Sweetmeats, confectionery or marzipan

A23G 3/44

Chewing gum

A23G 4/14

Frozen sweets containing peptides or proteins

A23G 9/38

Food or foodstuffs containing proteins as gelling or thickening agents

A23L 1/0562

Dietetic products containing proteins as additive

A23L 1/305

Proteins as adding ingredients for non-alcoholic beverages

A23L 2/66

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Animal feeding-stuff

A23K 1/00

Protein compositions or phosphatide compositions for pharmaceuticals or cosmetics

A61K 8/64, A61K 9/38, A61K 9/64

Phosphatides per se

C07F

General processes for the preparation of peptides

C07K 1/00

Peptides e.g. oligopeptides, proteins

C07K 4/00-C07K 14/00

Immunoglobulins

C07K 16/00

Carrier-bound or immobilised peptides and preparation thereof

C07K 17/00

Hybridpeptides

C07K 19/00

Macromolecular materials from blood

C08H

Preparation of glue

C09H

Gelatin not for foodstuffs

C09H 1/00-C09H 9/04

Analysis of food

G01N 33/02

Enzymes and preparation thereof

C12N 9/00

Preparation of peptides or proteins using fermentation or enzymes

C12P 21/00

Use of substances as emulsifying, wetting, dispersing or foam-producing agents

B01F 17/30

Special rules of classification

In groups A23J 3/04-A23J 3/20, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

Subject matter classified in groups A23J 3/22-A23J 3/30 is also classified in groups A23J 3/04-A23J 3/20, if the nature of the protein is of interest.

A23K - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Feeding-stuffs that are specially adapted, processed or formulated for non-human animals;

Processes that are specially adapted for production of such animal feeding-stuffs;

Processes that are specially adapted for preservation of materials (e.g. grass or roots) in order to produce such animal feeding-stuffs.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Animal feeding-stuffs

This subclass only covers feeding-stuffs that are disclosed as being specially adapted, processed or formulated for non-human animals. Foods or foodstuffs that are of unspecified use or specially adapted for human beings are covered by other subclasses for foodstuffs (see the references below), for example the other subclasses of A23.

Production of animal feeding-stuffs

Processes for production of foods or foodstuffs that are of unspecified use, or specially adapted for human beings, are covered by the relevant subclasses therefor, see the references below.

Apparatus that is specially adapted for production of animal feeding-stuffs is covered by A23N 17/00.

Mechanical aspects that are of general utility are covered by other subclasses, see the references below.

Preservation of materials in order to produce animal feeding-stuffs

This subclass only covers processes for preservation that are specially adapted for production of animal feeding-stuffs. Preservation of foods or food-stuffs that are of unspecified use or specially adapted for human beings, are covered by the relevant subclasses therefor, for example A23Band A23L 3/00 (see the references below).

Mechanical aspects of processes for preservation of materials in order to produce animal feeding-stuffs are classified in other subclasses, for example A01F 25/00 and F26B(see the references below).

Haymaking

Haymakers, i.e. apparatus for working on mown forage crop lying on the ground with the intention to make hay, are classified in A01D 76/00-A01D 84/00. Haymakers may include means for mechanical treatment of mown crops in the field, for example for crop-conditioning.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Mechanical aspects of methods that are specially adapted for storing agricultural or horticultural crops (e.g. in silos)

A01F 25/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus specially adapted for cutting or disintegrating straw, hay or like harvested products of plant origin

A01F 29/00

Manufacture of dairy products

A01J

Animal husbandry; Care of birds, fishes or insects

A01K

Preparation of bait for angling

A01K 97/04

Preservation of plants in general

A01N 3/00

Biocides, pest repellants or pest attractants

A01N 25/00-A01N 65/00

Machines or equipment for making or processing doughs

A21C

Treating of flour or dough

A21D

Processing meat, poultry or fish

A22C

Preserving meat, fish, eggs, fruit, vegetables or edible seeds; The preserved products

A23B

Dairy products; Making dairy products

A23C

Edible oils or fats

A23D

Protein compositions for foodstuffs; Working-up proteins for foodstuffs; Phosphatide compositions for foodstuffs

A23J

Foods or foodstuffs not covered by subclasses A23Bto A23J Their preparation or treatment

A23L 1/00

Preservation of foods or foodstuffs in general

A23L 3/00

Machines or apparatus for treating harvested fruit or vegetables in bulk, not otherwise provided for

A23N 1/00-A23N 15/00

Apparatus specially adapted for preparing animal feeding-stuffs

A23N 17/00

Shaping or working of foodstuffs

A23P

Veterinary methods

A61D

Medicinal preparations

A61K

Mixing in general

B01F

Disintegrating in general

B02C

Granulating materials

B01J 2/00

Cutting in general

B26D

Presses in general, e.g. for making briquettes

B30B

Polysaccharides; Derivatives thereof

C08B

Derivatives of natural macromolecular compounds

C08H

Producing animal or vegetable oils, fats, fatty substances or waxes

C11B

Preparation of fats, oils, or fatty acids

C11C

Micro-organisms or enzymes; Compositions thereof

C12N

Fermentation or enzyme-using processes to synthesise a desired chemical compound or composition

C12P

Sugar industry

C13

Drying solid materials

F26B

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expressions "feed" and "feedstuff" are often used instead of "feeding-stuffs", which is used in the classification scheme of this subclass.

A23K 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Detoxicating or removing bitter tastes from seeds, e.g. lupin seeds for fodder or food

A23L 1/211

A23K 1/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Proteins from blood

A23J 1/06

A23K 1/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preserving food

A23B, A23L

A23K 1/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Milk Substitutes

A23C 11/00

A23K 3/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Silos

E04H

A23L - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Any foods, foodstuffs or non-alcoholic beverages that are not covered by the following subclasses:

Examples of foods, foodstuffs or non-alcoholic beverages covered by this subclass are:

Preparation or treatment of the above foods, foodstuffs or non-alcoholic beverages provided for in this subclass, including:

Modification of such foods or beverages to change their nutritional content for dietary reasons, and these modified foods or beverages per se.

Preservation of foods or foodstuffs in general, e.g. by pasteurising, sterilising, heating, freezing, drying, pressurising, irradiation or treatment with chemicals, specially adapted for foods or foodstuffs.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In relation to foods, foodstuffs or non-alcoholic beverages per se, and in relation to their preparation and treatment including physical treatment, this subclass is residual to subclasses A21D, A23B, A23C, A23D, A23F, A23G or A23J. These subclasses relate to flour or dough (A21D), dairy products (A23C), edible oils or fats (A23D), coffee, tea or their substitutes (A23F), cocoa, chocolate, confectionery or ice-cream (A23G) and protein compositions (A23J).

In relation to preservation of foods or foodstuffs in general, this subclass is the primary home for this subject-matter. However, preservation subject matter specifically adapted for certain foods can also be found in any of the above subclasses. For example, preservation of flour or dough or bakery products is subject-matter for subclass A21D, and preservation of meat, fish, eggs, fruit, vegetables and edible seeds e.g. cereals is subject matter for subclass A23B. Preservation of milk or milk preparations is subject matter for subclass A23C.

In relation to preservation, deciding between this subclass and the other subclasses listed above is generally a matter of function or application (see Guide Paragraphs 85-87). Where the particular preservation technology is the main point of interest classification is made in this subclass, and where the application to particular foodstuffs is the main interest classification is made in the subclasses listed above. Some double-classification is evident.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Treating harvested fruit or vegetables in bulk

A23N

Machines or apparatus for extracting juice

A23N 1/00, A47J 19/00

Shaping or working of foodstuffs not fully covered by this or a single other subclass

A23P

Preserving foods or foodstuffs in association with packaging

B65B 55/00

Packages for foodstuffs with provision for absorbing fluids

B65D 81/26

Preparation of malt for brewing

C12C

Preparation of non-alcoholic beverages by removal of alcohol

C12H 3/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Edible extracts or preparations for medicinal purposes

A61K
Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

See above.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apiculture

A01K 47/00-A01K 59/00

Machines for making

A21C

Enriched flour

A21D 2/00

Processes specially adapted for particular foods or foodstuffs

A23

Milk products

A23C

Milk preparations

A23C 9/00

Milk substitutes, coffee whitener compositions

A23C 11/00

Coffee, tea or their substitutes

A23F

Natural coffee or tea flavour

A23F 3/40, A23F 5/46

Working-up proteins for foodstuffs

A23J 3/00

Animal foods

A23K

Apparatus for baking, roasting, grilling or frying

A47J 37/00

Emulsifiers in general

B01F 17/00

Purifying water, e.g. by ion-exchange

C02F, C02F 1/42

Essential oils in general

C11B 9/00

Preservation of alcoholic beverages

C12H

Devices for drying foodstuffs

F26B

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Food, foodstuffs

In addition to the commonly accepted foods or foodstuffs, the term in this subclass also extends to cover less traditional items such as thickening agents (e.g. starch), flavouring agents, artificial sweeteners, food colouring agents, etc.

A23L 1/222 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Essential oil

A concentrated, hydrophobic liquid containing volatile aromatic compounds from plants

A23L 1/307 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Nutritive value

The nutritive value represents the energetic or calorific content of nutrition

A44B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

The following fasteners or their essential parts:

Making slide fasteners, touch-and-close fasteners (e.g. VELCRO®, hook-and-loop, barb-and-pile fabrics), and other fasteners of this subclass.

Accessories or ancillary devices for the fasteners of this subclass when they are used exclusively with one of the varieties of fasteners (e.g. button cards) or have their operations either influencing or being influenced by the operation of the fastener (e.g. slide fastener pulling cords).

The following additional devices associated with either the fasteners of this class or accoutrements, garments, and haberdashery:

Note

The only "other types" of fasteners appropriate for this subclass are those that are capable of use with or actually used with accoutrements, garments, or haberdashery. Therefore, it must be either a commonly known practice to use a particular type of fastener with accoutrements, garments, or haberdashery (e.g., snap fasteners) or the patent documents for a particular type of fastener must frequently disclose their use with accoutrements, garments, or haberdashery. However, it is not required that all, or even the majority, of the fasteners covered by a particular category of fastener be specially adapted for use, or disclose their intended use, with accoutrements, garments, or haberdashery.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

General relationship of A44B with F16B

Fasteners per se that either (a) require a tool for completing their normal fastening (e.g. screws, nails, stitches) or (b) are destroyed or destructively deformed to fasten or unfasten (e.g. staples, rivets) are excluded from A44B. These fasteners per se

However, when F16B types of fasteners or other tool driven or deformed fasteners are used to mount fasteners or fastener components appropriate for A44B, and are attached to or cooperate with at least one of their components, they are properly classified within A44B as an additional feature of the fasteners with which they are utilized.

General relationship of A44B with subclasses for accoutrements, garments, or haberdashery

Fasteners appropriately classified within A44B are often broadly claimed or disclosed in combination with the structure they secure or fasten. If the detail of the structure they secure or fasten specifies only the portion of the structure (e.g. dress belt tip or holes) necessary for either completing the fastening operation or mounting the fastening means, the combinations are proper for A44B.

If the details of the accoutrements, garments, or haberdashery being secured are more than that needed to complete the fastening operation or mount the fastener, then the combination is appropriate for the accoutrements, garments, or haberdashery subclasses (e.g. A41D, A41F).

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Fastening devices specially adapted for specific types of garments

A41F

Buttonholes or eyelets for buttonholes

A41F 1/02

Corset fasteners

A41F 1/04

Glove fasteners

A41F 1/06

Garter fasteners

A41F 1/08

Belts, girdles, or waistbands for trousers or skirts

A41F 9/00

Thumbtacks

B43M 15/00

Devices for fastening or securing constructional elements or machine parts together

F16B

Hand-manipulated hooks or eyes (e.g. swivel hook for dog leash)

F16B 45/00
Places covering apparatus or methods for making, or for positioning on the structure being fastened, fasteners or components of fasteners appropriate for this subclass

Appliances or methods for marking-out, perforating, or making buttonholes

A41H 25/00

Appliances or methods for setting fasteners on garments

A41H 37/00

Processing sheet metal, tubes or profiles to make haberdashery

B21D 53/46

Processing sheet metal, tubes or profiles to make buttons

B21D 53/48

Processing sheet metal, tubes or profiles to make metal slide fasteners parts

B21D 53/50

Wire-working to produce devices for fastening (e.g. slide fastener elements, buttons)

B21F 45/16

Pressure or injection die casting of slide fasteners and slide fastener parts

B22D 17/16

Producing slide fastener elements from plastic or other substances in a plastic state

B29D 5/00

Producing buttons or semi-finished button parts from plastic or other substances in a plastic state

B29D 19/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For garments in general

A41D

For protective aprons having fastening devices

A41D 13/04

For neckties having fastening or holding devices associated with the knot or collar

A41D 25/00

For hats having fastening devices

A42B 1/00

For head covering fastening means other than hatpins

A42B 7/00

For laces in general and for footwear having fastening devices

A43C

For machines, tools, equipment, or methods for setting fasteners on footwear

A43D 100/00

For brooches or clips having decorative or ornamental aspects

A44C 1/00

For medals or badges having pin fastening devices

A44C 3/00

For hair-holding devices

A45D 8/00

For work bench type holding clamps

B25B 5/00

For paper clips or like paper fasteners for temporarily attaching sheets together

B42F 1/02

For elements specially adapted for fastening, fixing, or finishing upholstery

B68G 7/12

For sewing apparatus or machines with mechanism for lateral movement of the needle or the work or both for making ornamental pattern seams, for sewing buttonholes, for reinforcing openings, or for fastening articles (e.g. buttons) by sewing

D05B 3/00

For sewing needles

D05B 85/00

For hand operated latches or bolts for doors or windows (e.g., door hooks)

E05C

Special rules of classification

Decorative mock-fastening devices that do not function as fasteners (e.g. ornamental buttons on coats, fake zippers on clothing), but that look like the fasteners or one of their essential parts covered by A44B, are classified within the main groups of this subclass that provide for the fasteners they are intended to resemble.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Button

A hand manipulated fastener that includes a rigid or semirigid portion (i.e. button) which is attached (e.g. sewn) to the structure it is intended to fasten or secure (e.g. clothing) in a manner that allows its reorientation by either movement about its attachment or movement of the structure it secures. A button is intended to be used with a complementary opening having a flaccid portion (e.g. buttonholes, looped cords) that forms the second essential part of the fastener.

Buckle

A hand manipulated fastener including engaging or holding means and structure for guiding during fastening, which can selectively hold a cooperating strap or belt that is either the structure secured (e.g. end of a dress belt) or a second portion of the fastener (e.g. securing strap of a backpack flap).

Pin

A hand manipulated fastener that includes both (1) a portion specifically shaped (e.g. pointed) to facilitate impaling of and penetration into the structure fastened or secured and (2) a remaining portion (e.g. head) intended to be manually pushed on that does not penetrate the structure fastened or secured.

Slide fastener

A hand manipulated fastener that includes (1) two, opposed, elongated, configured surfaces that are each attached by mounting means to a secured structure and are intended to directly contact and interlock with each other when fastened and (2) a sliding device that is much shorter in length than the surfaces and which travels along their length to forcibly shift them into or out of interlocking engagement.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the words slide fastener and zipper are often used as synonyms.

In patent documents the words cufflink and sleeve-link are often used as synonyms.

A44B 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Setting on garments

A41H 37/10

Setting on footwear

A43D 100/08

Processing sheet metal, tubes or profiles to make buttons

B21D 53/48

Producing buttons or semi-finished parts of buttons from plastic or other substances in a plastic state

B29D 19/00

Special machines for making cotton buttons

D05C 7/12

A44B 9/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Other fastening means for head coverings

A42B 7/00

A45B - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tables with means for holding umbrellas

A47B 37/04

A45D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Processes of waving, straightening or curling hair;

Hair-curling or hair-waving appliances, e.g. curling-tongs;

Devices for heating or accessories for hair curling appliances;

Hair holding devices;

Devices for washing or colouring the hair or scalp;

Hair drying devices or accessories therefor;

Devices for removing superfluous hair, e.g. tweezers;

Hair combs or accessories therefor;

Shaving accessories;

Manicuring or pedicuring implements;

Artificial nails;

Containers, casings or accessories for handling toilet or cosmetic substances;

Sachet pads for liquid substances;

Hand, pocket, or shaving mirrors;

Hairdressers’ equipment, e.g. protecting mantles, stands for performing hairdressing work, specially adapted furniture;

Other toilet or cosmetic equipment.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Removing hair using electrosurgical instruments

A61B 18/04

Removing hair using electrosurgical instruments

A61B 18/18

Preparations for care of the hair

A61Q 5/00

Preparations for removing hair or for aiding hair removal

A61Q 9/00

Devices for sharpening razor blades

B24D 15/06

Scissors combined with auxiliary implements, e.g. manicure instruments

B26B 13/22

Hair-trimming devices using a razor blade

B26B 21/00

Devices for dispensing new razor blades

B65D 83/10

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Receptacles in general, e.g. etuis for traveling

A45C 11/00

Hairdressers’ chairs

A47C 1/04

Handbags or purses with mirrors

A45C 15/04

Cabinets for shaving tackle

A47B 67/02

Mirrors as household equipment

A47G 1/02

Devices for collecting used scalpel blades

A61B 17/3217

Chiropodists’ instruments

A61B 17/54

Wigs, toupees or the like

A61G 3/00

Guards or sheaths for hand cutting tools

B26B 29/00

Sample tables or the like

G09F 5/00

A45D 2/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Base clamps per se

A45D 6/08

A45D 2/34 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Base clamps per se

A45D 6/10

A45D 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preparations for waving or straightening the hair

A61K 8/00, A61Q 5/04

A45D 27/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cabinets for shaving tackle

A47B 67/02

Containers in general

B65D

A45D 27/42 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Masks for marking lips or eyelashes

A45D 40/30

Ear, face or lip protectors for other toilet or cosmetic purposes

A45D 44/12

A45D 29/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Chiropodists' instruments

A61B 17/54

A45D 29/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hand cutting tools with two jaws which come into abutting contact

B26B 17/00

A45D 29/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Files in general

B23D 71/00

A45D 29/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Receptacles for travelling or like purposes

A45C 11/00

A45D 33/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For applying therapeutic or disinfecting substances

A61M 35/00

A45D 40/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For applying liquid paint

A45D 34/04

A45D 42/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mirrors as household equipment

A47G 1/02

A45D 44/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hairdressers' coats

A41D 13/00

A45D 44/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Combined with chairs

A47C 1/10, A47C 7/36

A47B - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Storing articles in warehouses or magazines

B65G 1/00

Built-in cupboards as part of a building

E04F 19/08

Step-stools

A47C 12/00

Furniture joints

F16B

A47J - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Devices for domestic (or restaurant) use for preparing, cooking, or warming food or for making beverages. Storing and handling arrangements for these devices. Devices for storing food.

Preparing, cooking, or warming food refers to the various possible stages when preparing a meal:

Devices for preparing, cooking, or warming food therefore include:

Domestic implements or machines for preparing food, e.g.

Domestic cooking implements, e.g.

Devices for warming drinks or food

Warming vessels containing drinks or food

Heat insulated chambers to warm or to keep food warm

Devices for gripping, lifting or supporting above devices (pincers, pads)

Culinary hand implements for handling or supporting food during preparing/cooking/warming

Making beverages refers to:

Devices for making beverages therefore include:

Storing and handling of devices for preparing, cooking, or warming food or for making beverages refer to:

Storing and handling arrangements therefore include:

Storing food refers to:

Devices for storing food therefore include:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass is primarily intended for domestic kitchen equipment for preparing/cooking/warming food. Preparing/cooking/warming foodstuff on an industrial scale is not covered by this subclasses and will be classified in the following places:

Implements for table use will be classified in A47G.

Subclass A47J further covers the domestic making of (hot) beverages, in particular the preparing of tea or coffee by extraction with hot water. Other apparatuses and methods for preparing beverages mostly on industrial scale are classified in the following subclasses:

In relation to the subclasses that cover domestic stoves or ranges for solid or liquid fuel in general, this subclass is an application place. Features of stoves or ranges which are of general interest should be classified in the relevant general place, such as F24B, F24C.

Storing arrangements in A47J does not cover cabinets or racks in general even with provision for attachment of kitchen implements. This subject matter is classified with the subclass for cabinets or general details of furniture A47B. Devices for fastening household utensils are classified in A47G. Storage containers (both thermally insulated as without thermal insulation) in general are classified in B65D.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Apparatus for treating milk in dairies, e.g. appliances for preventing or destroying milk foam, aerating or de-aerating milk

A01J 11/00

Hand devices for forming slabs of butter in dairies

A01J 19/00

Machines for forming slaps of butter in diaries

A01J 21/00

Apparatus for smoking food

A23B 4/044

Machines or apparatus for treating harvested fruit or vegetables in bulk

A23N

Machines or apparatus for extracting juice

A23N 1/00

Machines for coring or stoning fruits in bulk

A23N 3/00

Machines for stoning fruits or removing seed containing sections

A23N 4/00

Peeling vegetables or fruit in bulk

A23N 7/00

Machines for removing stalks from fruit

A23N 15/00

Making ice cream

A23G 9/00

Washing or rinsing machines for crockery or table-ware

A47L 15/00

Apparatus or implements used in manual washing or cleaning of crockery, table-ware, cooking-ware or the like

A47L 17/00

Drying devices for crockery or table-ware, e.g. tea-cloths

A47L 19/00

Polishing of table-ware, e.g. knives, forks, spoons

A47L 21/00

Table devices or equipment, e.g. table ware

A47G

Brewing of beer

C12C

Preparation of wine or other alcoholic beverages

C12G

Traveling cookers heated by gaseous fuels

F24C 3/14

Domestic stoves or ranges

F24B, F24C

Microwave ovens

F24C 7/02, H05B 6/64

Induction heating hobs

H05B 6/12
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Lunch boxes, picnic boxes or the like

A45C 11/20

Table service

A47G 19/00

Vessels or pots for table use

A47G 19/12

Coffee or tea pots

A47G 19/14

Tea infusers, e.g. tea eggs

A47G 19/16

Table ware

A47G 21/00

Devices for fastening household utensils, or the like, to tables, walls, or the like

A47G 29/087

Weighing spoons

G01G 19/56

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bakers’ ovens, non-domestic baking apparatus or equipment

A21B

Machines or equipment for making or processing dough; handling baked articles made from dough

A21C

Provers, i.e. apparatus permitting dough to rise

A21C 13/00

Preparation of non-alcoholic beverages, e.g. by adding ingredients to fruit or vegetable juices

A23L 2/00

Machines for roasting coffee in bulk

A23N 12/08

Racks or shelf units

A47B

Kitchen cabinets

A47B 77/00

Disintegrating, e.g. mincing

B02C

Spouts in general

B05B 1/22

Hand-held cutting tools not otherwise provided for

B26B

Cutting characterised by the cutting member or nature of the cut performed; Details of apparatus for severing

B26D

Containers with thermal insulation in general

B65D 81/38

Dispensing beverages on draught

B67D 1/00

Removing cooking fumes from domestic stoves or ranges

F24C 15/20

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

cooking

boiling, braising, steaming, pressure cooking, frying, baking, roasting, grilling or barbecuing food

note: in A47J/27 cooking includes only boiling, braising, steaming and pressure cooking

boiling

cooking food by submerging it in boiling water, or other water-based liquid (stock, milk); keeping liquid foodstuff (or water) at a boiling temperature

braising

cooking food with moist heat , e.g. stewing, pot roasting

steaming

cooking food in an atmosphere with hot steam

pressure cooking

cooking food at a pressure different than that of the atmosphere

super-atmospheric cooking

pressure cooking at a pressure higher than that of the atmosphere

note: often called "pressure cooking"

sub-atmospheric cooking

pressure cooking at a pressure lower than that of the atmosphere, e.g. by using a pump to remove the air from the cooking environment

note: sometimes called "vacuum cooking", although "vacuum cooking" refers more often to vacuum flask cooking

vacuum flask cooking

cooking food inside a removable pot sealed inside a vacuum flask for prolonged heating with minimum heat loss

frying

Cooking food in hot oil or fat, e.g. pan frying, deep frying

Frying inside a frying pan or wok, or on a griddle or grill pan

cooking food on a hot surface such as a frying pan, wok, griddle or grill pan, usually in a thin layer of hot oil or fat

note:

frying pan: called skillet in American English

griddle: a sheet of metal of appropriate thickness with a flat frying surface

grill pan: frying pan which has raised metal ridges for the food to sit on (often used for "frying" without the use of oil or fat, to get a pattern similar than that achieved by direct barbecuing, called "grilling" in American English)

deep (fat) frying

cooking food by submerging it in hot oil or fat

baking

cooking food by dry heat acting by conduction

note: normally in an oven, but also in hot ashes, or on hot stones; baked food products are dough-based products like pastries, cakes or bread, or baked potatoes, baked apples, baked beans,...

roasting

cooking food with dry high heat, in an oven or near hot coals

note: usually resulting in a caramelised surface; the food surface is often basted during roasting

grilling

applying direct dry high heat to food, most commonly from above, with heat transfer primarily via thermal radiation, e.g. by using the upper heating element of an electric oven, or inside a drawer below the flame of a gas oven

note: grilled food products are for instance the grilled cheese on top of lasagna or the caramelised surface of crème brûlée; grilling is called "broiling" in American English

barbecuing

cooking food with a "barbecue" by the heat and hot gases of a fire, smoking wood or hot coals of charcoal, or of an electrical heating element

note: depending on the heat source, the barbecues are called gas barbecues, electrical barbecues or charcoal barbecues

barbecuing, direct method

barbecuing food directly over high heat, e.g. food is cooked on a grate directly over hot charcoal, or food is cooked in a frying vessel on a grate directly over hot charcoal

note: this method is sometimes called "grilling" in American English; meat is often marinated before direct barbecuing

barbecuing, indirect method

barbecuing food using indirect heat and/or hot smoke, i.e. a slow barbecue-cooking process, e.g. food is cooked on a grate with the coals dispersed to the sides of the food, or at a significant distance of the food

note: this method is sometimes called "barbecuing" in American English

smoking

flavoring, cooking or preserving food by exposing it to the smoke from burning or smoldering plant materials, most often wood

note: smokers are not classified in A47J, only smoking inserts as accessories for a barbecue

cooking by smoking on a barbecue

very slow cooking of food on a barbecue with hot smoke which is drawn past the food by convection

toasting

browning sliced bread by exposure to dry radiant heat, i.e. grilling of sliced bread on both sides

warming

raising temperature of food, not cooking it

grating

disintegrating e.g. cheese with tool with several sharp protrusions; different from slicing, no specific shape of cut particles of food

A47J 27/05 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tier cooking-vessels in general

A47J 27/13

A47J 27/082 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Inserts for cooking-vessels in general

A47J 36/16

A47J 27/212 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Signalling milk-boiling vessels

A47J 27/57

A47J 27/56 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preventing foaming in boiling in general

B01B 1/02

A47J 31/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Infusing bags

A47G 19/16

A47J 33/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Other travelling cookers heated by petroleum, gasoline, spirit, or the like

F24C

A47J 36/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Spouts in general

B05B 1/22

A47J 36/38 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Removing cooking fumes from domestic stoves or ranges

F24C 15/20

A47J 41/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Containers with thermal insulation in general

B65D 81/38

A47J 42/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

As part of universal or multi-purpose machines

A47J 43/04, A47J 44/00

Grinding or pulverising in general

B02C

A47J 42/48 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Attachment of household machines in general to tables, walls, or the like

A47J 45/02

A47J 42/52 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Coffee-roasting devices per se

A23N 12/00

A47J 45/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For household utensils

A47G 29/087

A47J 45/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Of detachable type

A47J 45/07

A47L - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pneumatically taking-up undesirable matter from roads or like surfaces

E01H 1/08

A61B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus, instruments, implements, or processes that are either specially adapted or intended to be solely utilized for evaluating, examining, measuring, monitoring, studying, or testing particular characteristics and aspects of either living or dead human and animal bodies for medical purposes (i.e., diagnosis). Diagnosis consists of scrutinizing the following characteristics or aspects of bodies:

Apparatus, instruments, implements, or processes that are either specially adapted or intended to be solely utilized for medical procedures employing physical actions (e.g., laser cutting, pressure of fluid) on portions of human or animal bodies to correct, enhance, or inspect (e.g., autopsies) them for medical purposes (i.e., surgery). Surgery consists of the following medical procedures:

Apparatus, instruments, implements, or processes that are either specially adapted or intended to be solely utilized in procedures for identifying individual human beings (e.g., finger printing, by recognition of shape or dimension of body part) using unique characteristics of their bodies (i.e. identification).

Adjunct or supplementary means specially adapted for use in, or intended for exclusive use in, diagnosis, surgery, or identification. These adjunct or supplementary means contribute to the effectiveness (e.g., surgical drapes) or safety (e.g., operating gloves) of a medical procedure, but may or may not (e.g., protective covers for scalpels) themselves involve any direct contact with a body.

Components of diagnosis, surgery, or identification means with structural features limiting their usefulness to medical procedures.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Several subclasses provide for subject matter that is used for 'diagnosis'. The relationship between these subclasses with regard to the type of 'diagnosis' covered by each is as follows:

Subclass A61B provides for diagnosis in general.

A61B also provides for any surgical or identification apparatus or methods when

A61B additionally provides for any diagnostic apparatus or methods combined with therapy apparatus or method normally covered by subclass A61H or A61N when

Subclass A61H provides for diagnostic means or steps that are combined with massage and physical therapy apparatus or methods used for the treatment of disease or disability (i.e., an abnormal condition of the body) by utilization of direct mechanical energy; when the diagnostic means or step is used solely for operational feedback purposes to enhance therapy.

Subclass A61N provides for diagnostic means or steps that are combined with medical treatment therapy apparatus or methods used for the treatment of disease or disability by utilization of forms of energy other than direct mechanical energy; when the means or step is used solely for operational feedback purposes to enhance therapy.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Tools or instruments for operating on the mouth portion of a human being (e.g., tooth saws)

A61C 3/00

Saliva removers combined with instruments for opening or keeping open the mouth (e.g., mouth props, tongue guards, tongue depressors, cheek spreaders)

A61C 17/10

Medical instruments, implements, tools, or methods specially adapted so as to limit their usefulness to only animals

A61D

Methods or devices for treatment of eyes, putting in contact lenses, eye surgery, or correcting squinting

A61F 9/00

Ear surgery

A61F 11/00

Physical therapy apparatus that includes diagnostic feedback means for influencing operation

A61H

Syringes and suction, pumping or atomizing devices for medical use (e.g. cups, breast relievers, irrigators, sprays, powder insufflators, atomizers, inhalers), apparatus for general or local anesthetics, devices or methods for causing a change in the state of consciousness, catheters, dilators, and apparatus for introducing medicines into the body other than orally

A61M

Non-surgical treatment of medical conditions or physical injuries by utilization of forms of energy not directly generated by mechanical apparatus, devices, or means that includes diagnostic feedback means for influencing its operation

A61N

Clinical thermometers for measuring the temperature of body parts

G01K 5/00

Methods or arrangements for reading or recognizing patterns, e.g. fingerprints

G06K 9/00

Recognizing, identifying, or verifying the identity of human beings by analyzing their voice or speech

G10L 17/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Operating tables and auxiliary devices for these tables

A61G 13/00

Operating chairs

A61G 15/00

Apparatus for artificial respiration or heart stimulation

A61H 31/00

Containers specially adapted for medical or pharmaceutical purposes

A61J 1/00

Devices for administering medicines orally

A61J 7/00

Materials for surgical sutures or for ligaturing blood vessels

A61L 17/00

Surgical adhesives or cements and adhesives for colostomy devices

A61L 24/00

Materials for colostomy devices

A61L 28/00

Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes or micro organisms

C12Q 1/00

Analyzing samples of biological material

G01N

Obtaining records using waves other than optical waves and viewing such records by using optical means

G03B 42/00

A61B 1/24 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mouth openers for animals

A61D 15/00

A61B 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for treatment of the eyes

A61F 9/00

Exercisers for the eyes

A61H 5/00

Optical systems in general

G02B

A61B 3/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Lenses per se

G02C 7/02

A61B 3/125 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Contact lenses per se

G02C 7/04

A61B 5/0215 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Solid probes

A61M 23/00

Catheters

A61M 25/00

A61B 5/025 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric stethoscopes

A61B 7/04

A61B 5/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrically conductive preparations for use in therapy or testing in vivo

A61K 50/00

A61B 5/055 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements or instruments for measuring magnetic variables involving electronic or nuclear magnetic resonance, in general

G01R 33/20

A61B 5/103 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring aids for tailors

A41H 1/00

A61B 5/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring of work or force, in general

G01L

A61B 6/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

X-ray contrast preparations

A61K 49/04

Preparations containing radioactive substances

A61K 51/00

X-ray photographic processes

G03C 5/16

X-ray apparatus or circuits therefor

H05G 1/00

Irradiation devices

G21K

Radiation therapy per se

A61N 5/00

A61B 6/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Stereoscopic photography

G03B 35/00

A61B 6/03 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Data processing equipment for medical or biological purposes

G06F 17/00, G06F 19/00

A61B 6/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Protection against dangerous radiation in general

G21F

A61B 8/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ultrasound therapy

A61N 7/00

Systems using the reflection or reradiation of acoustic waves, e.g. acoustic imaging

G01S 15/00

A61B 8/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring volume flow in general

G01F, G01F 1/66, G01F 1/72

Measuring speed of fluids in general

G01P 5/00

A61B 10/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Vaccination prophylaxis, vaccination therapy

A61B 17/20

Menstruation tables

G06C 3/00

A61B 17/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Drainage appliances for wounds

A61M 27/00

A61B 17/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Suture materials

A61L 17/00

A61B 17/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Nerve needles for teeth

A61C 5/02

A61B 17/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Containers, packaging elements or packages specially adapted for particular articles or with special means for dispensing contents

B65D 83/00, B65D 85/00

A61B 17/12 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Specially adapted for vas deferens or fallopian tubes

A61F 6/20

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Materials for ligaturing blood vessels

A61L 17/00

A61B 17/135 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For measuring blood pressure

A61B 5/022

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Inflatable pressure pads

A61F 5/34

A61B 17/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Diagnosis by vaccination

A61B 10/00

A61B 17/22 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For biopsy

A61B 10/02

Gynaecological or obstetrical instruments or methods

A61B 17/42
Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Dilators

A61M 29/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ultrasound therapy

A61N 7/00

A61B 17/225 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ultrasound therapy

A61N 7/00

A61B 17/42 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Dilators

A61M 29/00

A61B 17/425 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Specially adapted for use with animals

A61D 19/00

A61B 17/46 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For animals

A61D 1/10

A61B 17/50 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Locating otherwise

A61B 5/06

Locating by radiation

A61B 6/00

A61B 17/56 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Orthopaedic methods or devices for non-surgical treatment of bones or joints

A61F 5/00

A61B 17/60 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bandages, dressings or absorbent pads

A61F 13/00

A61B 18/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrically conductive preparations for use in therapy or testing in vivo, e.g conductive adhesives or gels to be used with electrodes

A61K 50/00

A61B 18/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hyperthermia using electric or magnetic fields, radiation or ultrasound

A61N

A61C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus (i.e. instruments, implements, machines, structures, tools) or processes that are specially adapted for, or limited to use in, creating artificial teeth, mounting artificial teeth, supporting artificial teeth, or repairing artificial teeth or their supports (e.g. denture articulators), and wherein the dental prostheses made or fixed by the apparatus or process are used exclusively for humans or both humans and animals.

Apparatus or methods utilized to prevent, discourage, or cure oral diseases (i.e. diseases occurring exclusively within the oral cavity such as enamel caries or periodontitis) in humans or both humans and animals.

Apparatus, devices, or methods used for one or more of the following:

Apparatus (i.e. instruments, implements, machines, structures, tools) or processes that are specially adapted for, or limited to use in, the treatment, reconstruction, removal, insertion, replacement, repair, transfixing or testing of either natural teeth, artificial teeth that are permanently affixed within the oral cavity, gums, or other portions of the oral cavity having an effect on their operation (e.g. portions of jawbone supporting teeth), and wherein the apparatus or processes are used exclusively for humans or both humans and animals.

Apparatus, devices, or methods used for

Dental prostheses devices or artificial dental implant devices per se or their components (e.g. artificial teeth, mounting or attaching means for artificial teeth, devices for supplementing jawbones, crowns) used within the oral cavity.

Dental implants formed from biological material or consisting of oral cavity parts originating either from a donor source or from the patient that are intended to be introduced, or reintroduced, into the patient’s oral cavity to correct a dental or oral hygiene problem (e.g. modified natural teeth or jawbone material from a donor).

Adjunct, auxiliary, or supplementary means or structures that contribute to the effectiveness or safety of dental procedures or their products and are specially adapted to be used either:

Specially adapted components of apparatus having structural features limiting them to use with at least one of the dental apparatus types specified above (e.g. dust collectors, illumination devices).

Accessories specially adapted for use with at least one of the above types of apparatus, means, or structures (e.g. devices for measuring the length of the root canal of a tooth).

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Subclass A61C(this subclass) provides for devices used by others to clean an individual’s teeth. It also provides for devices used by individuals upon their own teeth to remove foreign matter from the surface of their teeth or enhance the appearance of their teeth when the device is not specifically provided for elsewhere.

Subclass A46Bcovers manually moved or powered brushes, and in particular toothbrushes, used for cleaning that are not specifically provided for elsewhere. It also covers arrangements of brush bristles per se and the handle structure for brushes.

Subclass A61Dcovers devices used by individuals to remove foreign matter from the surface of the teeth of animals or enhance the appearance of the teeth of animals when the device is not specifically provided for elsewhere and is limited to use solely on animals.

Subclass A61Kcovers preparations that are used for medical, dental, or cosmetic purposes in the oral cavity.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Manual toothbrushes

A46B

Positioning or arrangements of toothbrush bristles per se for manual or powered toothbrushes

A46B 9/04

Instruments for depressing the tongue

A61B 13/00

Tongue scrapers

A61B 17/24

Dental apparatus and methods peculiar to animals

A61D 5/00

Preparations used in dentistry for purposes other than cleaning

A61K 6/00

Preparations used for cosmetic cleaning of teeth or mouth

A61K 8/00

Dental or operating chairs

A61G 15/00

Dental work stands

A61G 15/14

Dental hypodermic syringes

A61M 5/178

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Non-dental implants or prostheses

A61F

Apparatus for passive exercising

A61H 1/00

Gum massage

A61H 13/00

Exercising apparatus specially adapted for particular parts of the body

A63B 23/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Oral cavity

The part of human or animal mouth that includes the inside lining of the lips and cheeks (buccal mucosa), the teeth or their artificial permanently affixed replacements, the gums, the front two-thirds of the tongue, the floor of the mouth below the tongue, the bony roof of the mouth (hard palate), and the area immediately behind the wisdom teeth (retromolar trigone).

A61C 1/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Flexible shafts in general

F16C

Clutches in general

F16D

A61C 13/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Kilns for artificial teeth

F27B

A61C 13/225 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bases for prostheses

A61C 13/01

A61C 13/38 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Implanting tools

A61C 8/00

A61C 17/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mouth opening devices per se

A61B 1/24

Tongue depressors per se

A61B 13/00

A61D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus (i.e. instruments, implements, machines, structures, tools) or processes for enhancing or controlling the breeding of companion, domesticated, exotic, or wild animals (e.g. artificial vaginas, uterus disinfecting means), wherein the apparatus or processes are specially adapted to be only usable with animals.

Apparatus (i.e. instruments, implements, machines, structures, tools) or processes limited to use in the treatment, reconstruction, removal or replacement of the teeth, gums, or other parts within the mouth of companion, domesticated, exotic, or wild animals for medical purposes (i.e. dentistry), wherein the apparatus or processes are specially adapted to be only usable with animals and for dental procedures.

Apparatus (i.e. instruments, implements, machines, structures, tools) or processes for introducing medication (e.g. vaccines) or other material having an effect on bodily functions (e.g. seminal fluids, euthanasia poisons, stimulants) into or onto the bodies of companion, domesticated, exotic, or wild animals, wherein the apparatus or processes are specially adapted to be only usable with animals and for medical purposes.

Apparatus (i.e. instruments, implements, machines, structures, tools) or processes for medical procedures that employ physical actions on portions of companion, domesticated, exotic, or wild animal bodies to correct, enhance, inspect, or treat them (i.e. surgery), wherein the apparatus or processes are specially adapted to be only usable with animals and for medical procedures. Animal surgery consists of the following medical procedures:

Apparatus (i.e. instruments, implements, machines, structures, tools) or processes for evaluating, examining, measuring, monitoring, studying, or testing particular characteristics and aspects of the bodies of companion, domesticated, exotic, or wild animals (i.e. diagnosis), wherein the apparatus or processes are specially adapted to be only usable with animals and for medical purposes. Animal diagnosis consists of scrutinizing the following characteristics or aspects of animal bodies:

Implements, devices, or materials that are:

Adjunct, auxiliary, or supplementary structures or means (e.g. operating tables, clean rooms) that are specially adapted to be only usable with companion, domesticated, exotic, or wild animals during their diagnosis, dentistry, surgery, or for other medical purposes. These adjunct, auxiliary, or supplementary structures or means contribute to the effectiveness (e.g. washing devices) or safety (e.g. handling gloves, mouth openers) of medical procedures, but may or may not themselves involve direct contact with the animal's body (e.g. thermometer holder).

Specially adapted components of apparatus having structural features limiting them to use with diagnostic, dental, or surgical apparatus for animals.

Accessories specially adapted for use with the above types of apparatus, means, or structures.

All other types of apparatus (i.e. instruments, implements, machines, structures, tools) or processes that are not specifically provided for in another subclass which are

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Embodiments of apparatus, instruments, implements, structures, tools, or processes that are used on both humans and animals (i.e. have a more general utility) for maintaining their health or for other medical purposes are classified in another subclass based on their human usage and not in subclass A61D.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Apparatus or methods normally used by non-medical personnel in the care of animals to maintain their health e.g. animal husbandry

A01K

Animal feed bags

A01K 5/00

Sucking apparatus for young stock

A01K 9/00

Animal dehorners

A01K 17/00

Apparatus to help wean animals

A01K 19/00

Devices for assisting or preventing mating

A01K 21/00

Animal feeding-stuffs with antibiotics

A23K 1/17

Mouth openers for use on humans and animals

A61B 1/24

A61D 1/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Milking catheters

A01J 3/00

A61D 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus for fettering animals to be slaughtered

A22B 1/00

A61D 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Syringes

A61M

A61D 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fetlock-joint protecting rings

A01K 13/00

A61D 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Accessories for milking machines for treating of udders or teats

A01J 7/04

A61D 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fetlock-joint protecting rings or devices to prevent crib-biting

A01K 13/00

A61F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus, devices or methods for physically correcting or altering the body of patients or disabled persons that are directly and for prolonged periods of time (i.e. not just during acute exceptional circumstances) used on or in the body of the patient or the disabled person:

Methods or devices (e.g. head or eye-gaze-direction actuated control devices, oral communication actuated control devices) for enabling patients or disabled persons to operate independent apparatus or machines (i.e. apparatus such as room lights or doors that is not a part of, or used in conjunction with the functioning of, artificial or natural parts of their body) without the application of direct force from the part of the human body that would normally be used by individuals for controlling operation of the independent apparatus or machine such as a hand, foot or their artificial equivalents.

Contraceptive devices for males (e.g. condoms, vas deferens occluders) or females (e.g. pessaries, intra-uterine type, fallopian occluders).

Devices for medical or hygienic care of living individuals that are worn by the individual or directly contact the body of the individual during their care:

Heating or cooling devices for medical or therapeutic treatment of the human body and for body cavities, e.g. compresses, warming pads, pans or mats, hot water bottles, ice bags.

Protective devices for the eyes, e.g. goggles, eye-masks worn to prevent particulates or chemicals from striking the eyes.

Devices for inserting contact lenses.

Protective devices for the ears, e.g. ear plugs or earmuffs.

Auxiliary appliances for wound dressings; dispensing containers for dressings or bandages; packages or wrapping arrangements for used pads, e.g. for disposal.

Containers having various emergency medical supplies such as bandages, simple medical tools, and medicines (i.e. first-aid kits) that are intended to be used for administering initial treatment to injured or sick individuals.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

If an apparatus, method, device, or material is usable for both humans and animals for the same purpose and in the same manner, and it is otherwise proper for this subclass, classification is made only in subclass A61F. Similar devices or processes to those covered by subclass A61F that are usable exclusively for animals or are used in animals in a different manner or for different purposes than for humans, are classified in subclass A61D.

Surgical apparatus or processes in general are covered by subclass A61B.

Subclass A61H provides for massage, chiropractic, or physical therapy apparatus or processes used for the treatment of disease, injuries or disability (i.e. an abnormal condition of the body) by utilization of direct mechanical energy.

Chemical and materialaspects of prostheses, structures inserted into tubular structures of human bodies, bandages, dressings, absorbent pads or surgical articles are covered by subclass A61L.

With regard to human organs and their parts, the exact distinction between the artificial devices implantable into human bodies that are proper for subclass A61F and those proper for subclass A61M is somewhat imprecise. Therefore, for analogous situations that are not specifically covered by existing groups of these subclasses, the following listings are intended to provide guidance.

Subclass A61F provides for the following replacements or substitutes for internal body organs or their parts: hollow or tubular parts of organs (e.g. bladders, tracheae, bronchi, heart valves and blood vessels, bile ducts), structural supporting or maintaining devices for such parts (e.g. stents), artificial eyes and artificial ears.

Subclass A61M provides for the following replacements or substitutes for internal body organs or their parts: artificial hearts (based on catchword index), artificial livers, artificial lungs, artificial pancreas, artificial kidneys and catheters in general.

Devices for introducing media into or onto the body, devices for taking media from the body are also covered by subclass A61M.

Spectacles, sunglasses, contact lenses or goggles insofar as they have the features of vision correction or protection against high levels of visible and ultraviolet light are covered by subclass G02C.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Brassieres

A41C 3/00

Cosmetic articles, e.g. wigs, hair pieces

A41G

Caps with means for protecting the eyes or the ears

A42B 1/06

Ordinary arch supports for shoes

A43B 7/14

Artificial nails

A45D 31/00

Heating or cooling means in connection with bedsteads or mattresses

A47C 21/00

Surgical instruments

A61B 17/00

Devices for closing wounds, or holding wounds closed

A61B 17/03

Dental prostheses

A61C 13/00

Chiropractic methods or devices

A61H 1/00

Appliances for aiding patients or disabled persons to walk

A61H 3/00

Massage of the genitals

A61H 19/00

Chemical aspects of contraception

A61K

Chemical aspects of, or use of materials for, bandages, dressings or absorbent pads

A61L 15/00, A61L 26/00

Adhesives for costolomy devices

A61L 24/00

Surgical adhesives or cements

A61L 24/00

Materials for prostheses

A61L 27/00

Materials for costolomy devices

A61L 28/00

Artificial hearts, kidneys

A61M 1/00

Irrigators

A61M 3/02

Drainage appliances for wounds

A61M 27/00

Dilators

A61M 29/00

Valves specially adapted for medical use

A61M 39/00

Making artificial eyes from organic plastic material

B29C, B29D 11/02

Arm rests for use as writing aids

B43L 15/00

Arrangements of tyre-inflating valves to tyres or rims

B60C 29/00

Safety devices for welding in general

F16P 1/06

Removable contact lenses

G02C 7/04

Sunglasses or goggles having the same features as spectacles

G02C

Electric heating elements

H05B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Undergarments

A41B 9/00

Baby linen

A41B 13/00

Corsets or girdles

A41C 1/00

Surgical drapes

A61B 19/08

Transdermal drug delivery patches

A61K 9/70

Exercising apparatus specially adapted for particular parts of the body

A63B 23/00

Goggles for swimming

A63B 33/00

Diving masks

B63C 11/12

Materials for prostheses

A61L 27/00

Balloon catheters

A61M 25/10

Dilators

A61M 29/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Absorbent articles

Articles adapted to absorb liquid excreted by the body.

Dilator

A (surgical) device or instrument used to dilate, distend, enlarge, expand, stretch an opening, organ, passage, tube, canal or cavity of a human or animal body (e.g. urethrotomy, tracheotomy, nasal, anal or cervix (Hegar's dilator) or vaginal dilation, bougienage, percutaneous dilation of tissues (Byrd dilator), whereas stents are not dilators but prostheses for providing patency, or preventing collapsing of tubular structures of the body.

Disabled person

A human being that is unable to do certain basic physical tasks (e.g. walking) due to a physical or mental impairment/condition.

Patient

A human being awaiting or undergoing any form of (a) medical care (e.g. testing) or treatment by medical staff (e.g. doctors, dentists, midwives, chiropractors), or (b) physical tending (e.g. feeding) by care giver (e.g. hospice or nursing home staff) due to impairment.

Stent

Balloon- or self-expandable tubular device for use in the treatment of duct-like organs typified for example by a blood vessel, biliary tract, urinary tract, digestive tract, and the like providing patency.

Stent graft

Stent with a tubular member made of a synthetic resin affixed to the inside or outside of the stent.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expression "device for fluid management" is often used with the meaning of incontinence article.

A61F 2/07 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Stent-grafts for blood vessels. Stent-grafts are tubular grafts with stents embedded therein or attached to the graft material. The stent-graft for blood vessels is usually deployed within an aneurysm. The stent anchors the graft to the blood vessel wall. The graft is usually made from fabric material.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Stent-grafts for tubular structures of the body other than blood vessels

A61F 2/04

A61F 2/82 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Stents with tubular structures deployed within a stenosis in order to widen and support the vessel. The stent is usually made from a rigid material, e.g. metal or polymer.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Instruments for closing wounds, or holding wounds closed

A61B 17/03

Dilators

A61M 29/00

Stent-grafts for tubular structures of the body other than blood vessels

A61F 2/04

Stent-grafts for blood vessels

A61F 2/07

Instruments for placement or removal of stents or stent-grafts

A61F 2/95

A61F 2/856 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Single tubular stent with a passage in side of the stent for allowing access to secondary lumen (see passage 60 in the example drawing).

A61F0002856000

A61F 2/89 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Stent rings which are connected in order to allow flexibility of the whole structure (see connectors 4 between stent rings 2 in the example drawing).

A61F0002890000

A61F 2/90 - Definition fr

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the words "net", "net-like", "mesh" and "mesh-like" are often used as synonyms.

A61F 2/91 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Net- or mesh-like stents made from perforated sheet material or tubes. Perforated sheet material or tubes are created by methods including, for example, laser cutting, etching or some other techniques.

A61F0002910000

A61F 2/915 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Stents having a meander or wave-like pattern. The stent comprises several meander bands. Each meander band forms peaks and throughs. The bands are connected to each other by struts (see connector 50 between bands 40 and 60 in the example drawing) or directly connected without struts.

A61F0002915000

A61F 2/92 - Definition fr

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the words "rolled-up" and "coiled" are often used as synonyms.

A61F 2/95 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Instruments for closing wounds, or holding wounds closed

A61B 17/03

Catheters; hollow probes

A61M 25/00

A61F 5/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arm-rests for use as writing aids

B43L 15/00

A61F 5/34 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connection of valves to inflatable elastic bodies

B60C 29/00

A61F 5/458 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connection of valves to inflatable elastic bodies

B60C 29/00

A61F 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric heating elements

H05B

A61F 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Appliances for aiding patients or disabled persons to walk

A61H 3/00

A61G - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Specially adapted vehicles (e.g., ambulances), handling apparatus (e.g., wheelchair lifts), or methods or devices (e.g., stretchers) for moving patients or disabled persons who are passive participants in their relocation (e.g., the persons are handled in a manner similar to loads).

Personal conveyances

Specially adapted structures (e.g., hospital or treatment rooms for medical purposes, baby incubators) or devices (e.g., bedpans, hospital beds, trapeze or pull-up bars) used

Specially adapted supporting surfaces for sustaining patients in a recumbent or seated position during recovery, surgery, dental work, or similar types of medical treatment.

Funeral devices

Auxiliary appliances (e.g., trolleys for medicine) or accessories (e.g., prescription list) specially adapted for use with the other invention information covered by this subclass.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

General relationship of A61G with subclasses for care or alteration of the human body

A61G does not cover apparatus or methods that are directly used on an individual's body to perform medical care and therapy or to alter it after death. The types of medical care, therapy, and body alterations not covered by A61G consist of:

Subclasses A01N, A61B, A61C, A61F, A61H, A61K, A61M, A61N, and F23G provide appropriately for apparatus or methods for medical care, therapy, or body alterations of these types. The specific classifications that are of interest for search purposes are specified in the references of A61G or its groups.

However, A61G does provide for specific structural modifications that merely facilitate the use of apparatus or methods of these types for medical care or therapy when in combination with subject matter that is otherwise appropriate for this subclass (e.g., special supports for patients with burns).

A61G also provides for life supporting or sustaining devices that control the local environment during treatment or recovery of patients (e.g., baby incubators).

General relationship of A61G with vehicles adapted for use by disabled

A61G covers personal conveyances and "vehicle-like" conveyances (e.g., wheelchairs, stretchers) that are explicitly designed for use by only a single patient or disabled person and intended to normally travel relatively short distances along the ground or similar support surface (e.g., hallway).

The subclass for a specific type of standard roadway vehicle (i.e., vehicles designed and intended for general thoroughfare usage over long distances, such as B62K for cycles) covers their vehicles that have been specially adapted for use by a disabled operator.

The subclass for a specific type of "special-utility" vehicle (i.e., vehicles that have another primary purpose other than transport, such as riding lawn mowers or forklifts) covers their vehicles that have been specially adapted for use by a disabled operator.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Devices per se for enabling disabled persons to operate an apparatus or device not forming part of the body

A61F 4/00

Restraining devices for the body or for body parts and restraining shirts that are used for non-surgical treatment of patients' bones or joints

A61F 5/37

Equipment for beds, treatment tables, floor frames or the like for extending or stretching

A61F 5/045

Appliances for aiding invalids to walk about

A61H 3/00

Bathing devices for special therapeutic or hygienic purposes

A61H 33/00

For bicycles specially adapted for disabled riders

B62K 3/16

Inclined lifts associated with stairways for transporting disabled persons or wheelchairs

B66B 9/08

Illumination of operating tables

F21L, F21S, F21V

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For preserving of the dead bodies of humans, animals, or the parts thereof

A01N 1/00

For sanitary equipment not otherwise provided for

A47K

For body washing or cleaning implements

A47K 7/00

For sanitary closets or urinals without flushing and chamber pots

A47K 11/00

For appliances for supporting or fettering animals during operations

A61D 3/00

For vehicles adapted to transport meat

B60P 3/05

For vehicles adapted to transport refrigerated goods

B60P 3/20

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Disabled person

a human being that is unable to do a basic physical task (e.g., walking) due to a physical or mental impairment/condition.

Funeral device

apparatus associated with (e.g., coffin) or for performing (e.g., casket lowering device) activities connected with the burial, cremation, entombment, or other methods of honoring or disposing of (e.g., freeze drying) the remains of the body of a deceased individual.

Patient

a human being awaiting or undergoing any form of (a) medical care (e.g., testing) or treatment by medical staff (e.g., doctors, dentists, midwifes, chiropractors) or (b) physical tending (e.g., feeding) by caretakers (e.g., hospice or nursing home staff) due to impairment.

Personal conveyance

a vehicle-like device (e.g., wheelchairs) that is:

not specifically adapted for traveling significant distances (e.g., between cities) along thoroughfares (e.g., railways, roads, sidewalks) with normal traffic (e.g., trucks),

explicitly designed (i.e., not merely adaptations of a standard production vehicle) for carrying, and intended to be limited to use by, a single patient or disabled person at any given time, and

potentially capable of having either its movement controlled or powered by the patient or disabled person carried by it.

A61G 1/003 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices in general for lifting patients or disabled persons

A61G 7/10

A61G 1/007 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ski vehicles

A63C 5/00

A61G 1/01 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Restraining devices used in nursing

A61F 5/37

A61G 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Chairs with toilet conveniences

A47K 11/04

Running gear or propulsion features

B60K

A61G 7/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Chair beds

A47C 17/04

A61G 10/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Dust-free laboratory rooms

B01L 1/04

Decompression arrangements

B63C 11/32

Arrangements or adaptations in aircraft

B64D 13/00

Air-conditioning in general

F24F

A61G 12/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Service or tea tables, trolleys or wagons

A47B 31/00

A61G 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Adjustability of tables in general

A47B 9/00

A61G 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Barbers' chairs

A47C 1/04

A61G 17/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Columbaria

E04H 13/00

A61H - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus or processes which are not used for surgical purposes utilizing mechanical energy transmitted by direct physical contact with the external surface of the thorax portion of human bodies to induce or supplement normal breathing (e.g. iron lungs).

Apparatus or processes, which are not used for surgical purposes that are specially adapted to improve or promote the optical functioning of individuals (e.g. rectify defective vision, improve the natural operation of their eyes) by:

Apparatus or devices that are explicitly designed for use by a single patient or disabled person for the purpose of helping them overcome a physical condition that impairs their ability to walk unassisted across the ground or similar support surface (e.g. crutches).

Apparatus or processes utilizing mechanical energy directly applied upon human bodies for therapy (e.g. massage). These therapy apparatus and processes are intended to facilitate the healing of diseases, promote or assist normal operation of a malfunctioning body part, reduce the impact of injuries, or beneficially influence the condition of disabled body parts either by the physical movement of body parts (e.g. devices for exercising a passive body member) or other types of physical stimulation (e.g. touching) transmitted though contact with:

Apparatus or processes which are not used for surgical purposes utilizing mechanical energy directly applied to human bodies by physical contact therewith (e.g. chiropractic) to treat, alleviate the effects of, or prevent disease or bodily malfunctions (e.g. misalignments of bone, aberrant joint) solely by manipulation, adjustment, or realignment of at least a portion of the skeletal system of the body (e.g. bone joints, tendons, spinal columns) by either:

Apparatus or processes which are not used for surgical purposes utilizing mechanical energy directly applied upon human bodies by physical contact (e.g. massage) to rub, stroke, knead, tap, vibrate, or otherwise move a portion of the external surface of human bodies, or the surfaces of their naturally occurring body cavities, to either:

Apparatus or processes which are not used for surgical purposes (e.g. baths) that are specially adapted for covering, soaking, or immersing human bodies, or portions of bodies, within fluids (e.g. steam, water) or fluent materials (e.g. sand, mud) in a manner that is distinct from the common bathing process for cleaning human bodies and is intended to either:

Apparatus or processes (e.g. breast baths) specially adapted for covering, soaking, or immersing only one particular part of the human body within fluids (e.g. steam, water) or fluent materials (e.g. sand, seaweed) .

Articles of clothing (e.g. sweating suits for therapy) that at least partially enclose human bodies for the primary purpose of increasing the local temperature (e.g. insulated, include heating elements) or humidity (e.g. constructed of partially air tight material) of the portion of the human bodies covered to a point where the localized temperature or humidity is beyond the range that human beings normally consider physically comfortable (i.e. creates localized sauna-like environment) for therapy.

Specially adapted components for the above types of apparatus.

Auxiliary appliances or accessories specially adapted for use with any of the above types of apparatus or process (e.g. reflex point locators).

Other types of apparatus or processes which are not used for surgical (e.g. acupuncture devices) purposes that utilize mechanical energy directly applied to human bodies by physical contact for improving their functioning that are not specifically provided for elsewhere in another subclass.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

When used with animals

If an apparatus or process is usable for both humans and animals for the same purpose and in the same manner, and it is otherwise proper for this subclass, classification is made only in subclass A61H. Similar devices or processes to those covered by subclass A61H that are usable exclusively for animals, or are used in animals in a different manner or for different purposes than for humans, are classified in subclass A61D.

When used for physical relaxation

Subclass A61H covers apparatus or processes that are specially adapted to physically relax or stimulate individuals due either to

Subclass A61M covers devices or processes which are specially adapted to cause or precipitate a change in the state of consciousness of humans (e.g. induce sleep, awaken), or to increase or decrease the mental activity of humans while awake, which may also involve relaxing or stimulating individuals.

Medical Treatment

Several subclasses provide for apparatus or processes that are used for treating humans for medical conditions. The relationship between these subclasses is as follows:

Subclass A61B provides for surgical apparatus or processes in general.

Subclass A61B also provides for surgical apparatus or processes when

Subclass A61H provides for massage, chiropractic, or physical therapy apparatus or processes used for the treatment of disease, injuries, or disability (i.e. an abnormal condition of the body) by utilization of direct mechanical energy.

Subclass A61N provides for apparatus or processes used for the treatment of disease, injuries, or disability by utilization of forms of energy other than direct mechanical energy.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Training or exercising equipment for animals

A01K 15/02

Garments with controlled internal environment

A41D 13/002

Ventilating, cooling or heating means in connection with bedsteads or mattresses

A47C 21/04

Apparatus for helping babies to walk

A47D 13/04

Baths; Showers; Appurtenances therefor for merely cleaning human bodies

A47K 3/00

Body washing or cleaning implements for merely cleaning human bodies

A47K 7/00

Dental implements for therapeutic treatment

A61C 19/06

Orthopedic devices or methods

A61F 5/00

Devices for treatment of the eyes

A61F 9/00

Means for washing bed-ridden persons

A61G 7/00

Beds for promoting or observing sleep

A61G 7/043

Blood pumps or devices for mechanical circulatory assistance

A61M 1/10

Subaquatic intestinal cleaning

A61M 9/00

Devices for influencing the respiratory system of patients by gas treatment, e.g. mouth-to-mouth respiration

A61M 16/00

Devices for producing or ending sleep by mechanical, optical, or acoustical means (other than alarm clocks or the like)

A61M 21/00

Electrotherapy, magnetotherapy, radiation therapy, ultrasound therapy

A61N

Electromedical massage devices applying continuous direct current by contact electrodes

A61N 1/26

Electrotherapy devices applying alternating or intermittent currents by contact electrodes

A61N 1/32

Applying ionized fluids to the human body for therapy

A61N 1/44

Exercising apparatus specially adapted for conditioning the cardio-vascular system, for training agility or co-ordination of movements

A63B 22/00

Exercising apparatus specially adapted for particular parts of the body

A63B 23/00

Exercising devices for feet or toes

A63B 23/10
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Accessory implements for clippers or shavers carrying out massage or other functions than cutting hair

B26B 19/48

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Methods or devices enabling patients or disabled persons to operate an apparatus or a device not forming part of the body

A61F 4/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Therapy

Any medical treatment of an abnormal condition of a human or animal body (e.g. disease, impaired organ, injured limb) by means, instruments, devices, or methods that utilize forms of energy (e.g. mechanical energy) and which is not used for surgical purposes. In general, the treatment time for therapy is long-term relative to that for surgery which usually has a much more immediate effect on the body.

Disabled person

A human being that is unable to do a basic physical task (e.g. walking) without assistance due to a physical or mental impairment/condition.

Patient

A human being awaiting or undergoing any form of (a) medical care (e.g. testing) or treatment by medical staff (e.g. doctors, dentists, midwives, chiropractors) or (b) physical tending (e.g. feeding) by care providers (e.g. hospice or nursing home staff) due to impairment.

A61H 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Percussion or vibration massage

A61H 23/00

A61H 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Exercising apparatus for the feet or toes

A63B 23/10

A61H 3/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Walking sticks

A45B

A61H 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Brushes in general

A46

Bathing sponges, brushes, gloves or similar cleaning or rubbing implements not specially for massage

A47K 7/02

Suction devices for nursing

A61M 1/06, A61M 1/08

A61H 33/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hair-driers

A45D 20/00

Body-drying devices

A47K 10/48

Electric heating elements

H05B

A61H 33/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Production of ozone or hydrogen

C01B, C25B 1/02

A61H 39/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Locating by bioelectric signal detection

A61B 5/04

Locating by using electric currents or magnetic fields

A61B 5/05

A61H 39/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Massage or pressure on general areas

A61H 9/00-A61H 23/00

A61H 39/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Heating or cooling appliances for medical treatment of general areas of the human body

A61F 7/00

A61J - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus, devices, or methods specially adapted for changing or fashioning bulk medicines, or their essential constituents, into pharmaceutical products having specific physical forms designed to either:

Apparatus, devices, or methods specially adapted for administering medications or pharmaceutical products to humans though their oral cavity.

Receptacles that are not designed to be ingestible and are specially adapted for holding or containing medicines or pharmaceutical products prior to their usage or consumption by humans.

Receptacles specially adapted to hold, contain, or transport pharmaceutical, surgical, or therapy related materials other than medicines or pharmaceutical products (e.g., containers for storing blood).

Hollow flexible conduits specially adapted, or solely intended, for the purpose of providing nutriments in fluid or fluent forms to humans by insertion of the conduits into an orifice of their bodies (e.g., enteral feeding using functioning gastrointestinal tract).

Containers specially adapted for holding water or nutriments in fluid or fluent forms (e.g., feeding bottles) that is withdrawn by the sucking of infants, young children, or other humans (e.g., patients, disabled persons) on orally engaged portions or subcomponents of the containers.

The orally engaged subcomponents per se of the containers of the preceding paragraph (e.g., compressible rubber teats for feeding bottles) which are specially adapted for infants, young children, or other humans to suck upon to withdraw water or nutriments in fluid or fluent forms from the containers.

Other types of apparatus or devices specially adapted for orally administering only nutriments in fluid or fluent forms to infants, patients or disabled persons.

Devices that are not designed to be ingestible and are specially adapted, or solely intended, for either:

Devices or receptacle specially adapted, or solely intended, for receiving spittle, phlegm, or other forms of naturally occurring oral discharge from humans.

Devices specially adapted to prevent irritation of the teat portion of the mammary gland of humans from abrasive or rubbing contact.

Specially adapted subcomponents or steps for the above types of apparatus, containers, devices or methods of the preceding paragraphs that are not provided for in another subclass.

Auxiliary appliances or accessories specially adapted for use with the apparatus, containers, or devices of the preceding paragraphs to facilitate either:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

When used with animals

If an apparatus, device, or method is usable for both humans and animals for the same purpose and in the same manner, and it is otherwise proper for this subclass, classification is made only in subclass A61J

Similar apparatus, devices, or methods to those covered by subclass A61Jthat are usable exclusively for animals, or are used in animals in a different manner or for different purposes than for humans, are classified in subclass A61D

Baby comforters, food, and toys

Devices that may be interesting to a baby (e.g., they have a specific shape such as an animal that the baby may manipulate) and are intended to serve to relieve a physical craving, irritation, or inflammation of the baby are covered by subclass A61J

Devices that are primarily intended to be played with by a baby to entertain it, but might also incidentally emotionally calm it (e.g., stuffed bear at bedtime), are covered by subclass A63H

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Infusion devices

A61M 5/14

Syringe ampoules or cartridges

A61M 5/28

Time release microcapsules for introduction of media into body and other devices for introducing or retaining media in cavities of the body

A61M 31/00

Time release medication patches for application to human bodies

A61M 35/00

Tubes, tube connectors, valves or tube couplings specially adapted for medical use

A61M 39/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Foods, foodstuffs, or their preparation or treatment

A23L 1/00

Spoon type tableware

A47G 21/04

Drinking vessels used for table service

A47G 19/22

Protective casings or covers for appliances or instruments

A61B 19/02

Medical preparations characterized by special physical form

A61K 9/00

Suppositories

A61K 9/02

Capsules

A61K 9/48

Devices for introducing media into or on the body

A61M

Droppers or containers for laboratory use

B01L 3/00

Containers for storage or transport of articles or materials in general or their accessories, closures, or fittings

B65D

Containers specially constructed to be opened by cutting or piercing, or by tearing of frangible member or portion

B65D 17/00

Details of bottles or jars not otherwise provided for

B65D 23/00

Dropper type dispensers for closing containers

B65D 47/18

Closures for containers with means for discouraging their opening or removal without authorization or required level of physical aptitude

B65D 50/00

Blister packages

B65D 75/36

Applying closure members to bottles, jars, or similar containers

B67B

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Medicine, Medication

Chemical or biological substance intended to be used for the diagnosis, treatment, mitigation, alleviation, or prevention of diseases, disorders, injuries, or any other abnormal physical or mental state in humans.

Pharmaceutical product

Man made or natural medicines specially adapted by manufactures or pharmacies into forms that facilitate their internal or external usage by humans.

Patient

Human being awaiting or undergoing any form of (a) medical care (e.g., testing) or treatment by medical staff (e.g., doctors, dentists, midwives, chiropractors) or (b) physical tending (e.g., feeding) by care providers (e.g., hospice or nursing home staff) due to impairment.

Disabled person

A human being that is unable to do a certain basic physical task (e.g., walking) without assistance due to a physical or mental impairment/condition.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following expressions/words "teat" and "nipple" are often used as synonyms for the orally engaged portion of feeding bottles.

In patent documents the following expressions/words "feeding bottle", "nursing bottle", and "baby bottle" are often used as synonyms.

In patent documents the following expressions/words "spittoon", and "cuspidor" are often used as synonyms.

A61J 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Antithrombogenic treatment of articles for conditioning blood

A61L 33/00

Devices for introducing media into or onto the body

A61M

A61J 3/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Pulverising in general

B02C

A61J 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Calibrated capacity measures for fluids or fluent solid material

G01F 19/00

A61J 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric heating elements

H05B

A61J 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Breast-pumps

A61M 1/06

A61J 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Drinking tubes as table-ware

A47G 21/18

A61K - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Compositions which are:

Used as preparations for dentistry, e.g. for artificial teeth, for filling or for capping teeth, or for taking dental impressions.

Used for cosmetic purposes for treating the skin, hair, nails, teeth or oral cavity with a view to cleaning them, changing their appearance, correcting body odours, protecting them or keeping them in good condition.

Used for medicinal purposes, e.g. drugs, biological compositions, when they are capable of:

Processes

Relationship between large subject matter areas

A01N covers the preservation of bodies of humans or animals or plants or parts thereof; biocides, e.g. as disinfectants, as pesticides, as herbicides .

Compounds per se are classified in C01, C07 or C08.

C08K covers the use of substances as compounding ingredients.

Compositions per se containing polymers are classified in C08L.

Micro-organisms per se are classified in C12N.

Multiple classification

The therapeutic activity of medicinal preparations is further classified in A61P.

The use of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations is further classified in A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Sex sterilants for invertebrates per se

A01N

Artificial nails per se

A45D 31/00

Devices or methods specially adapted for bringing pharmaceutical products into particular physical or administering forms

A61J

Disinfections, sterilisation or deodorization of air; Chemical aspects of, or use of materials for, bandages, dressings, absorbent pads or surgical articles

A61L

Essential oils, perfumes

C11B 9/00

Detergent compositions

C11D

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Biocides, pest repellants or attractants per se

A01N 25/00-A01N 65/00

Wigs

A41G 3/00

Hair pieces, inserts, rolls, pads or the like

A41G 5/00

Processes of waving, straightening or curling hair

A45D 7/00

Containers or accessories specially adapted for handling toilet or cosmetic substances

A45D 34/00

Diagnosis; Surgery; Identification

A61B

Dentistry

A61C

Electrotherapy; Magnetotherapy; Radiation therapy; Ultrasound therapy

A61N

Mixing, dissolving, emulsifying, dispersing

B01F

Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes or micro-organisms; Compositions or test papers therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions; Condition-responsive control in microbiological or enzymological processes

C12Q

Investigating or analysing materials by determining their chemical or physical properties

G01N

Special rules of classification

Attention is drawn to the definitions of groups of chemical elements following the title of section C.

In this subclass, with the exception of group 8/00, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

Attention is drawn to the Notes in class C07, for example the Notes following the title of the subclass C07D, setting forth the rules for classifying organic compounds in that class, which rules are also applicable, if not otherwise indicated, to the classification of organic compounds of A61K.

A composition, i.e. a mixture of two or more ingredients is classified in the last of groups A61K 31/00-A61K 47/00 that provides for at least one of these ingredients.

Any part of a composition which is not identified by classification according to the last appropriate place of an active ingredient, and which itself is determined to be novel and non-obvious, must also be classified. The part can be either a single ingredient or a composition in itself.

Any part of a composition which is not identified by the classification according the last appropriate place, and which is considered to represent information of interest for search, may also be classified. This can for example be the case when it is considered of interest to enable searching of compositions using a combination of classification symbols. Such non-obligatory classification should be given as "additional information".

A61K 6/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Dentistry

A61C

A61K 6/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Alloys per se

C22C

A61K 6/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cements per se

C04B

A61K 6/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Resins per se

C08

A61K 6/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Impression methods

A61C 9/00

A61K 8/00 - Definition fr

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Casings or accessories for storing or handling of solid or pasty toilet or cosmetic substances are classified in A45D 40/00

A61K 9/00 - Definition fr

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Nuclear magnetic resonance contrast preparations or magnetic resonance imaging contrast preparations are classified in group A61K 49/18

Praparations containing radioactive substances are classified in group A61K 51/12

A61K 9/68 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Non-medicinal aspects, preparing chewing gum

A23G 4/00

A61K 9/70 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bandages, dressings or absorbent pads

A61F 13/00

A61K 50/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrodes specially adapted for electrocardiography

A61B 5/0408

Electrodes specially adapted for foetal cardiography

A61B 5/0448

Electrodes specially adapted for electroencephalography

A61B 5/0478

Electrodes specially adapted for electromyography

A61B 5/0492

Electrodes for electrotherapy

A61N 1/04

A61L - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus or methods specifically adapted for use in treating air either:

Apparatus or methods of general applicability for use in destroying noxious micro-organisms on or otherwise rendering completely aseptic articles or materials (e.g., destroying bacteria or fungus).

Apparatus or methods that are not covered as a whole in another subclass and are specially adapted for use in destroying noxious micro-organisms on or otherwise rendering completely aseptic specific articles (e.g., contact lenses) or specific materials (e.g., refuse).

Materials that are specially adapted for devices that are to be affixed to, placed on, placed within, or cover either:

Chemical compounds or compositions that are used in conjunction with, or compose a portion of, the above type of specially adaptive devices or their materials and increase their effectiveness by:

Materials specially adapted to be used in devices that:

Adhesives specially adapted for surgical uses.

Materials specially adapted for forming devices used as substitutes for a part of the body that is missing or non-functional or materials specially adapted for coating these devices (e.g., skin grafts).

Materials specially adapted to be used in:

Materials specially adapted for use within the structure of hollow flexible tubes that are intended to be:

Materials specially adapted to be used for other surgical uses or devices (e.g. stents, materials for adhesion prevention).

Materials specially adapted for use as antithrombogenic treatments for at least one of the above type of devices or materials or the chemical compounds or compositions that form, or compose a portion of, these antithrombogenic treatments.

Specially adapted components or steps for at least one of the above types of apparatus, methods, or devices.

Auxiliary appliances or accessories specially adapted for use with at least one of the above types of apparatus or devices (e.g., devices for testing effectiveness of sterilization).

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Preservation of bodies or disinfecting characterised by the agent employed

A01N

Shape or structure of prostheses

A61F 2/00

Shape or structure of bandages, dressings, or absorbent pads

A61F 13/00

Preparations for medical, dental or toilet purposes

A61K

Shape or structure of catheters

A61M 25/00

Sterilisation of packages or package contents in association with packaging

B65B 55/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Sterilising food or foodstuffs

A23

Preservation of milk, milk preparations, or dairy products by sterilization

A23C 3/00

Devices specifically adapted for cleaning or disinfection shavers or razors

A45D 27/46

Apparatus or methods for destroying solid waste or transforming solid waste using sterilization into something useful or harmless

B09B 3/00

Devices for adding disinfecting agents to lavatories

E03D 9/02

Pasteurisation, sterilisation, preservation, purification, clarification, or ageing of alcoholic beverages

C12H 1/00

Air conditioning systems including air purification or sterilisation means

F24F 3/16

Sanitary or hygienic devices for transducer mouthpieces or earpieces

H04R 1/12

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Surgical instruments

A61B 17/00

Operating gloves

A61B 19/04

Surgical drapes

A61B 19/08

Dental prosthetics

A61C 9/00

Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents

A61F 2/82

Bandages, dressings, or absorbent pads

A61F 13/00

Tracheal tubes

A61M 16/04

Catheters

A61M 25/00

Tubes, valves

A61M 39/00

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substance

A62D 3/00

Preparation of ozone

C01B 13/10

Special rules of classification

Sets of groups wherein Last-place rule is applied

Within each one of the following sets of groups, at each hierarchical level, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place:

A61L 15/08-A61L 15/12

A61L 15/18-A61L 15/40

A61L 17/04-A61L 17/14

A61L 24/02-A61L 24/04

A61L 27/02-A61L 27/40

A61L 29/02-A61L 29/12

A61L 31/02-A61L 31/12

A61L 33/02-A61L 33/18

Secondary classification based on use of materials characterised by particular function or physical properties when of interest

When the inventive thing is classified based upon its chemical composition within one of the sets of groups A61L 15/08-A61L 15/12, A61L 15/18-A61L 15/40, A61L 27/02-A61L 27/40, A61L 29/02-A61L 29/12, or A61L 31/02-A61L 31/12; classification of this subject matter is also made to cover its function or physical properties for each set of groups into their corresponding group, (i.e., respectively group A61L 15/14, A61L 15/42, A61L 27/50, A61L 29/14, or A61L 31/14) when this aspect is of interest.

Secondary classification based on use of materials with antithrombogenic properties

When the inventive thing is fully provided for and classified within groups A61L 17/00, A61L 24/00, A61L 26/00, A61L 27/00, A61L 28/00, A61L 29/00, and A61L 31/00 classification should also be made within group A61L 33/00 if a material used is antithrombogenic in nature.

Use of indexing codes

When classifying in group A61L 2/00-A61L 12/00, it is desirable to add the indexing codes of group A61L 101/00, relating to the chemical composition of materials used in disinfecting, sterilising or deodorising.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Antithrombogenic

A substance, composition, or material that prevents or reduces coagulation, clotting, depositing, or precipitation of blood, plasma protein, or a component of blood (e.g., anticoagulant).

A61L 2/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For contact lenses

A61L 12/00

A61L 2/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Methods involving enzymes or micro-organisms

C12Q 1/00

A61L 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Body deodorants

A61K 8/00, A61Q 15/00

Separating dispersed particles from gases or vapours

B01D 45/00-B01D 51/00, B03C 3/00

A61L 9/015 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Production of ozone

C01B 13/10

A61L 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Surgical adhesives

A61L 24/00

Surgical instruments, devices or methods for suturing or ligaturing

A61B 17/04, A61B 17/12

Supports or packages for suture materials

A61B 17/04

A61M - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Devices or processes specially adapted to be used to insert or place media into human bodies (e.g., pumps, syringes, atomisers, insufflators, inhalers) and that do so either

Devices or processes specially adapted to be used to place media upon human bodies (e.g., percutaneous devices, radioactive dressings) and that do so either

Devices or processes which are specially adapted to be used to direct, lead, convey, or carry media up to, away from, or within human bodies (e.g., tubes for carrying oxygen, medical pumps, artificial hearts, mechanical blood circulatory assistors, blood oxygenation devices, devices for artificial respiration by treatment with gas or air) and that do so either

Devices or processes specially adapted to be used to remove, eject, or expel media from human bodies (e.g., suction type breast relievers, discharge draining devices for wounds) and that do so

Devices or processes specially adapted to cause or provoke a change in the state of consciousness of humans (e.g., induce sleep, fully awaken) and that do so in a manner other than one which commonly occurs (e.g., falling asleep on a good mattress, physical exhaustion).

Devices or processes specially adapted to increase or decrease the mental activity of humans while awake (e.g., relax, stimulate) and that do so in a manner other than that which commonly occurs (e.g., creating boredom, reading long definitions).

Accessories specially adapted for use with at least one of the above devices and that contribute to the effectiveness or safety of the device or its use.

Specially adapted components having structural features limiting them to use with a device of one of the types specified above.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

When used with animals

If a device or process is usable for both humans and animals for the same purpose and in the same manner, and it is otherwise proper for this subclass, classification is made only in subclass A61M Similar devices or processes to those covered by subclass A61Mthat are usable exclusively for animals, or are used in animals in a different manner or for different purposes than for humans, are classified in subclass A61D

When used with living or dead human bodies

Patent documents for general-purpose medical devices or processes that are otherwise proper for subclass A61Mare classified in subclass A61Mwhen they either disclose only being used on living human bodies or broadly disclose being used on humans. Patent documents for general -purpose medical devices or processes that are otherwise proper for subclass A61Mand fully identified as being used on both living and dead human bodies are classified in subclass A61Mand subclass A01Nor A61B Patent documents for similar devices or processes to those covered by subclass A61Mthat are specially adapted for use exclusively on dead humans are classified only in subclass A01Nor A61B

Implantable prostheses or artificial organ replacements

With regard to human organs and their parts, the exact distinction between the artificial devices implantable into human bodies that are proper for subclass A61Fand those proper for subclass A61Mis somewhat imprecise. Therefore, for analogous situations that are not specifically covered by existing groups of these subclasses, the following listings are intended to provide guidance.

Subclass A61Fprovides for the following replacements or substitutes for internal body organs or their parts: artificial hollow or tubular parts of organs (e.g., bladders, tracheae, bronchi, hearts valves and blood vessels, bile ducts), structural supporting or maintaining devices for such parts or their natural equivalents (e.g., stents), artificial eyes, and artificial ears.

Subclass A61Mprovides for the following replacements or substitutes for internal body organs or their parts: artificial hearts, artificial livers, artificial ventilators, artificial pancreas, and artificial kidneys.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Applications or methods that use specific materials, compositions, or single compounds for the preservation of human bodies or for the preservation of living parts of human bodies

A01N 1/00

Devices or methods for handling cosmetic or toilet substances

A45D

Surgical introduction or removal of body parts or their substitutes

A61B

Devices specially adapted for taking blood samples

A61B 5/15

Devices specially adapted for vivisection or autopsy

A61B 16/00

Devices or methods for introducing solid, liquid, or gaseous remedies or other materials into or onto the bodies of animals

A61D 7/00

Prostheses implantable into a human body

A61F 2/02

Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form

A61K 9/00

Chemical aspects of bandages, dressings, absorbent pads, or other surgical articles placed upon into human body

A61L

Electrotherapy, e.g. producing anaesthesia by the use of alternating or intermittent currents

A61N 1/34
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Prostheses implantable into human blood vessels

A61F 2/01

Means for inserting tampons

A61F 13/26

Means for withdrawing tampons

A61F 13/34

Absorbent pads having means integral therewith for supplying media to the absorbent material

A61F 13/40

Devices for orally administering food or medication

A61J

Containers for collecting, storing or administering blood, plasma or medical fluids

A61J 1/05

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices worn by patients for reception of urine, faeces, catamenial, or other bodily discharges

A61F 5/44

Application swabs

A61F 13/15

Devices for receiving spittle

A61J 19/00

Special rules of classification

When a device or method covered by subclass A61Mincludes a separating process for body-liquids that utilizes chromatography, and features of general interest related to chromatography are usefully disclosed but not claimed, the features should also be non-obligatorily classified within group B01D 15/08.

Main group A61M 36/00 takes precedence over all other main groups of subclass A61M

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Media

Solid, liquid, or gaseous substances or devices (e.g., medicine, food, in vivo testing material, catheters) which are either used by or within human bodies for medical or physical purposes, components of or substances naturally within human bodies (e.g., artificial heart, blood, insulin), or bodily discharge or waste created by human bodies or medical processes taking place within human bodies (e.g., urine).

A61M 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Implements for holding wounds open

A61B 17/02

Pumps in general

F04

A61M 1/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Feeding-bottles

A61J 9/00

A61M 1/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Artificial heart valves

A61F 2/24

A61M 1/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes of separation using semi-permeable membranes

B01D 61/00

A61M 5/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Suction in pumping blood transfusion

A61M 1/02

A61M 5/24 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ampoules or cartridges

A61J 1/06

A61M 5/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Dialysis systems, blood oxygenators

A61M 1/14

Hemofiltration equipment

A61M 1/34

A61M 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sprayers or atomisers specially adapted for therapeutic purposes in general

B05B

A61M 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For the destruction of noxious animals or noxious plants

A01M

A61M 16/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Respiratory apparatus in general

A62B

Respirators for working under water

B63C 11/00

A61M 16/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Catheters in general

A61M 25/00

A61M 16/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cartridges with absorbing substances for respiratory apparatus

A62B 19/00

A61M 19/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Syringes therefor

A61M 5/00

Cooling blood in a bypass of the arterial system

A61M 1/36

A61M 25/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Dilators

A61M 29/00

A61M 29/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Instruments for performing visual medical inspections of cavities or tubes of the body

A61B 1/00

A61N - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Specially adapted apparatus, instruments, devices, or processes for the following types of therapy:

Components having specialized structural features that limit their use to the apparatus, instruments, or devices for the types of therapy appropriate for this subclass.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Several subclasses provide for subject matter that is used for therapy. The relationship between these subclasses in regard to the type of therapy covered by each is as follows:

Subclass A61N provides for medical treatment-type therapy by apparatus or methods utilizing forms of energy other than direct mechanical energy when they are not used for surgical purposes and they are intended to either

In particular, subclass A61N covers implanted devices, when the implanted device is not a replacement or supplementation of an actual portion of the organ or part, utilizing forms of energy other than direct mechanical energy to stimulate organs or body parts in a manner that facilitates, regulates, or improves their normal functioning.

Subclass A61H provides for massage and physical-type therapy apparatus or methods for the treatment of disease or disability (i.e., an abnormal condition of the body) by utilization of direct mechanical energy. The apparatus or methods appropriate for this subclass do not surgically alter any portion of the bodies during treatment. Usually, the massage and therapy apparatus and methods of this subclass are intended to facilitate the healing of diseases, reduce the impact of injuries, or beneficially influence the condition of disabled body parts by physically moving a part of a body (e.g., devices for exercising a passive body member) solely by direct physical contact with, or stimulation of, external surfaces of the body or naturally occurring cavities in the body. However, stimulation of internal organs or body parts, such as artificial respiration and stimulation of the heart, when it is done by direct mechanical energy is also considered proper for this subclass.

Subclass A61K and Subclass A61P provide for drug-type therapy using chemical compounds or medicinal preparations specially adapted for use in healing, benefiting, or destroying abnormal conditions of the body (e.g., diseases, birth defects) and the specific therapeutic activities that the chemical compounds and medicinal preparations are used for.

Subclass A61B provides for surgery and surgical-type therapy that alters or repairs organs and body parts. It also provides for any surgical or diagnostic apparatus or methods that would otherwise be proper for subclass A61H or A61N when the apparatus or methods are used for both purposes or combined together. In particular, subclass A61B provides for surgical instruments, devices, or methods for transferring non-mechanical forms of energy to or from the body (e.g., electromagnetic radiation surgery) to alter or repair it.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Apparatus for diagnosis or surgery combined with, or applicable also as, therapy apparatus

A61B

Apparatus for radiation diagnosis

A61B 6/00

Surgical instruments, devices or methods for transferring non-mechanical forms of energy to or from the body (e.g., radiation surgery, electro-surgery)

A61B 18/00

Instruments, implements, tools, or methods specially adapted so as to limit their use to only animals

A61D

Apparatus or methods utilizing direct mechanical energy in therapy intended to treat disease or disability

A61H

Percussion or vibration massage apparatus (e.g. using supersonic vibration)

A61H 23/00

Apparatus or methods for stimulating specific reflex points by heating or cooling within the cell-life limits

A61H 39/06

Devices for applying radioactive material to the body

A61M 36/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring bioelectrical signals of the body or body parts

A61B 5/04

Surgical accessories

A61B 19/00

Artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body

A61F 2/00

Heating or cooling appliances for medical or therapeutic treatment

A61F 7/00

Saunas

A61H 33/06

Radiopharmaceuticals

A61K 51/12

Anaesthetic apparatus in general

A61M

Artificial hearts and circulatory assistance means intended for implantation

A61M 1/12

Pressure infusion pumps

A61M 5/142

Devices or methods to cause a change in the state of consciousness by mechanical, optical or acoustical means, e.g. audiovisual stimuli

A61M 21/00

Therapeutic chemical compounds or medicinal preparation used to treat sicknesses or abnormal conditions of the body

A61P

Measurement of nuclear X-radiation

G01T

Techniques for handling of particles or electromagnetic radiation

G21K

Incandescent lamps having general utility

H01K

Infrared radiators for heating

H05B

A61N 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Irradiation apparatus

A61N 5/00

A61N 1/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring electric variables

G01R

Control of generator output in general

H02P, H03L

A61N 1/38 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For producing shock effects in general

H05C 1/00

A61N 1/40 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Microwave apparatus

A61N 5/00

A61N 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ultrasound therapy

A61N 7/00

A61P - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Therapeutic activity of chemical compounds or medicinal preparations.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

For medicinal, dental or cosmetic preparations to be appropriate for this subclass, it must also be appropriate for one of the following: subclasses A61K or C12N, or classes C01, C07, and C08.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preparations brought into direct contact with the skin for affording protection against external influences

A61Q 17/00

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, all of the different therapeutic activities stated in the claims or significantly disclosed as examples in the disclosure are classified in all appropriate places.

The classification symbols of this subclass are not listed first when assigned to patent documents.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Drug(s)

includes chemical compounds or compositions with therapeutic activity, i.e. having the ability to cause a physiological, pharmacological or biological effect.

A61Q - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

The use of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

For a cosmetic or similar toilet preparation to be appropriate for this subclass, it must also be appropriate for one of the following: main group A61K 8/00 , subclasses C07C, C07D, C07F, C07G, C07H, C07J, C07K, C11D and C12N or classes C01 and C08.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Deodorisation of air

A61L 9/00

Drugs for dermatological disorders

A61P 17/02-A61P 17/16

Essential oils or perfumes per se

C11B 9/00

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, all uses of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations stated in the claims or significantly disclosed as examples in the disclosure are classified in all appropriate places.

The classification symbols of this subclass are not listed first when assigned to patent documents.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Cosmetics or similar toilet preparations

include compositions or preparations for the skin, hair, nails, teeth or oral cavity which are used to clean them, change their appearance, correct body odours, and protect or keep them in good condition.

A61Q 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preparations with therapeutic activity

A61P 17/14

A61Q 13/00 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Essential oil

A concentrated, hydrophobic liquid containing volatile aromatic compounds from plants

A61Q 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Drugs for treating burns

A61P 17/02

A61Q 17/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Pest repellants

A01N

A62D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Compositions:

Use of chemical substances in extinguishing fires.

Chemical, bio-chemical or physico-chemical processes for chemically altering harmful chemical substances into safe or less dangerous substances.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Fire prevention, fire containment or fire fighting, e.g. portable extinguishers or fire-fighting vehicles

A62C

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fireproof paints

C09D 5/18

Fireproofing materials

C09K 21/00

A62D 3/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Processes for chemically altering harmful chemical substances into safe or less-dangerous substances.

These processes can be chemical, bio-chemical or physico-chemical processes, e.g. use of special chemical reagents for chemical fixing, which result in the decomposition or transformation of the harmful chemical substances into harmless or less harmful substances because of a change in their chemical structure.

These processes can comprise the step of dissolving or dispersing the harmful chemical substances in water for the purpose of treating them, or the step of producing, for treatment, a gaseous product from a non-gaseous harmful chemical substance.

The harmful chemical substance can be one component of a mixture, e.g. a component in contaminated sludge.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

The disposal of solid waste or the reclamation of contaminated soil is classified elsewhere, i.e. in class B09. However, the treatment of a specific harmful chemical substance in solid waste resulting in the change of its chemical constitution to make it harmless or less harmful is covered by A62D.

In the same way, treatment of sludge is not classified here with the exception of the treatment of a specific harmful chemical substance in the sludge, e.g. in residues from industrial processes (excluding contaminants from municipal sewage treatment) resulting in the change of its chemical constitution to make it harmless or less harmful.

Preventive chemical treatments, e.g. to prevent the formation of harmful chemical substances are classified elsewhere, depending on the kind of treatment and/or the context of application.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Detoxification of foods or foodstuffs

A23L 1/015

Apparatus for chemical, physical or physico-chemical processes in general

B01

Treatment of gases, e.g.:

Chemical or biological purification of smoke or fumes, e.g. flue gas

B01D 53/34

Purification or modifying the chemical compositions of combustible gases containing carbon monoxide

C10K

Exhaust or silencing apparatus having means for purifying, rendering innocuous, or otherwise treating exhaust

F01N 3/00

Consuming noxious gases by combustion

F23G 7/06

Chemical processes resulting in the production of a useful product, e.g.:

using untreated contaminated fly ash as raw material in the manufacture of cement

C04B 7/26

metals obtained from residues or scrap

C22B

Treatment of radioactively-contaminated waste

G21F 9/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Treatment of waste water, sewage or sludge

C02F

Making explosives harmless by detonation

F42D 5/04

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Disinfection or sterilizing methods specially adapted for refuse

A61L 11/00

Waste or refuse as compounding ingredient for glass, cement, mortar, concrete, artificial stone or ceramics

C03, C04B

Materials for absorbing liquids to remove pollution, e.g. oil, gasoline, fat

C09K 3/32

Destructive distillation of carbonaceous materials

C10B

Destructive hydrogenation of carbonaceous materials

C10G 1/06

Micro-organisms, enzymes or compositions thereof

C12N

Consuming waste by combustion

F23G

Removal or treatment of combustion products or combustion residues

F23J

Special rules of classification

In this main group, at each hierarchical level, in the absence of an indication to the contrary classification is made in the first appropriate place.

When classifying in groups A62D 3/00 to A62D 3/40, a harmful chemical substance which is considered to represent information of interest for search, may be indexed in one or more of groups A62D 101/00 to A62D 101/49.

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Catalyst

Substance which either increases or decreases the speed of a chemical reaction, without itself undergoing a permanent chemical change.

Catalyst

Catalyst

Chalcogen

Also known as chalcogenides, specifically O, S, Se, Te.

Harmful

Directly toxic to living organisms, with the exception of toxic to plants only.

Harmful chemical substances

Chemical waste substances which are too hazardous or toxic to be discarded in an ordinary municipal landfill.

Halogens

The elements F, Cl, Br ,I , At.

Physico-chemical

Having at least one chemical step and one physical step.

Sludge

Residue (normally viscous) from an industrial, residential, or agricultural process.

A62D 3/11 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances, including at least one eletrochemical step, e.g. electrodialysis, electrophoresis or electro-osmosis.

A62D 3/13 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances, including at least one step utilizing wave energy in the form of pressure waves moving through a gaseous medium.

A62D 3/15 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances, including at least one step utilizing particle type radiation, i.e. the radiation of energy by means of small fast-moving particles that have energy and mass such as molecules, atoms, protons, and electrons.

A62D 3/19 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances, including at least one step utilizing the chemical action of the substance with either:

A62D 3/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances, including at least one step utilizing the thermal property of water and heat, e.g. vapor and hot air mixture, hot water, super critical water, super heated water, or steam, directly on the harmful chemical substance to cause chemical change.

A62D 3/30 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances, including at least one step where at least one distinct chemical material is added to the environment of the harmful chemical substance to react with it.

The actual harmful chemical substances being treated by the process may be combined within a mixture of waste including in addition non-hazardous or nontoxic substances. However, to be proper for this group, the harmful chemical substances must react with the added chemical agents to render it harmless or less harmful, or be an intermediate step in rendering the substance harmless or less harmful.

A62D 3/32 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances, wherein the harmful chemical substances react with a distinct chemical reagent which is normally a solid at room temperature but is added to the environment where the reaction takes place in its molten state or is caused to become molten for reaction with the harmful chemical substance.

A62D 3/33 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances, including a process step wherein a distinct chemical material is added which either

A62D 3/34 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances, wherein the harmful chemical substances include halogen and wherein the process includes a process step in which a distinct chemical material (e.g. alkali metal alcoholates, etc.) is added which reacts with the harmful chemical substance in a manner that removes the halogen from the harmful chemical substance.

The removal of halogen from the harmful chemical substance may render it harmless or less harmful, or be an intermediate step in rendering the substance harmless or less harmful.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Electrolytic degradation of harmful substances

A62D 3/115

Dehalogenation in molten chemical reagents

A62D 3/32

A62D 3/35 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances, including a process step wherein a distinct chemical material is added which contains water in its ionic form that chemically reacts with the harmful chemical substances to decompose it.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Electrolytic degradation of harmful substances

A62D 3/115

A62D 3/36 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances, including a process step wherein a distinct chemical material is added, which is an acidic or basic reagent that chemically reacts with the harmful chemical substance to render it harmless or less harmful by changing its composition.

The acidic or alkaline reagent may either react with the harmful chemical substance to render it harmless or less harmful, or be an intermediate step in rendering the substance harmless or less harmful.

A62D 3/37 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances, including a process step wherein a distinct chemical material is used in a reductive-type reaction with the harmful chemical substance, i.e. to decrease the positive valence (oxidation state) of the harmful chemical substance.

The reduction reaction splits up the harmful chemical substance into two or more of its components) which is caused by the transfer of one or more electrons from the distinct chemical material to the substance, i.e. the distinct chemical material is oxidized (loses electrons) and the harmful chemical substance is reduced (gains electrons).

A62D 3/38 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances, including a process step wherein a distinct chemical material is used in an oxidative-type reaction with the harmful chemical substance, i.e. to increase the positive valence (oxidation state) of the harmful chemical substance.

The reduction reaction splits up the harmful chemical substance into two or more of its components which is caused by the transfer of one or more electrons from the harmful chemical substance to the distinct chemical material, i.e. the harmful chemical substance is oxidized (loses electrons) and the distinct chemical material is reduced (gains electrons).

A62D 3/40 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances, including at least one step that uses heat and the thermal properties of the harmful chemical substance to effect the chemical degradation of the harmful chemical substance.

A62D 7/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Materials for minimising adherence of ice or water to surfaces

C09K 3/18

A62D 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Production of oxygen-generating compounds in general

C01B 13/00

Processes for the production of oxygen from chemicals in general

C25B 1/02

A62D 101/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Specific harmful chemical substances made harmless, or less harmful , by effecting chemical change by processes which as such are already classified in main group A62D 3/00

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Group A62D 101/00 is used to index the harmful chemical substances, if of interest, in order to allow the search of combination of process with substances. This indexing scheme can be used only in combination with group A62D 3/00

Special rules of classification

When indexing a substance in groups A62D 101/02-A62D 101/08, indexing according to its chemical structure is also made in one or more of the groups A62D 101/20-A62D 101/40 of interest.

A62D 101/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

These substances include nerve, blister, vesicant, blood, and pulmonary affecting substances.

A62D 101/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Harmful chemical substances intended to prevent, repel, destroy, or mitigate pests.

A pest is a plant or animal which is detrimental to humans or human concerns, e.g. agriculture or livestock production.

A62D 101/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Harmful chemical substances consisting of chemical compounds or mixtures that are explosive, e.g. bombs or TNT, a chemical reaction propellant, e.g. for rockets or bullets, or a pyrotechnic, e.g. fireworks, flares or napalm.

A62D 101/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Harmful chemical substances consisting of chemical compounds that are by-products of combustion or can be components of mixtures that are by-products of combustion.

A62D 101/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Harmful organic chemical substances containing halogens, i.e. fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, or astatine.

A62D 101/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Harmful organic substances containing one or more metals other than: Lithium (Li), Sodium (Na), Potassium (K), Rubidium (Rb), Cesium (Cs), Francium (Fr), Calcium (Ca), Strontium (Sr), Barium (Ba), Radium (Ra), Beryllium (Be), Magnesium (Mg), and Aluminum (Al).

The harmful chemical substances may contain lithium (Li), sodium (Na), Potassium (K), Rubidium (Rb), Cesium (Cs), Francium (Fr), Calcium (Ca), Strontium (Sr), Barium (Ba), Radium (Ra), Beryllium (Be), Magnesium (Mg), or Aluminum (Al) if they also have a metal appropriate for this group.

A62D 101/41 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Harmful inorganic substances containing one or more components that are fibrous.

The fibers may be naturally occurring or man-made from inorganic substances, e.g. made primarily from rock, clay, slag or glass.

A62D 101/43 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Harmful inorganic substances containing one or more metals other than: lithium (Li), sodium (Na), Potassium (K), Rubidium (Rb), Cesium (Cs), Francium (Fr), Calcium (Ca), Strontium (Sr), Barium (Ba), Radium (Ra), Beryllium (Be), Magnesium (Mg), and Aluminum (Al).

The harmful chemical substances may contain lithium (Li), sodium (Na), Potassium (K), Rubidium (Rb), Cesium (Cs), Francium (Fr), Calcium (Ca), Strontium (Sr), Barium (Ba), Radium (Ra), Beryllium (Be), Magnesium (Mg), or Aluminum (Al) if they also have a metal appropriate for this group.

A62D 101/49 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Harmful inorganic substances containing a halogen, i.e. fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, or astatine.

A63B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Gymnastic or exercising apparatus or equipment, of which examples are:

Climbing or mountaineering apparatus, including apparatus for climbing trees or poles.

Swimming aids or equipment, e.g. flippers, goggles.

Balls for ball games including:

Rackets, bats or other striking implements for ball games, e.g. tennis rackets and similar, golf clubs, baseball bats, cricket bats, hockey sticks.

Accessories for golf; accessories for other ball games.

Targets or goals for ball games; tennis and similar nets and accessories therefor.

Implements for throwing, e.g. darts, javelins, spears, throwing-hammers, boomerangs, discus discs, quoits, juggling clubs.

Miscellaneous sporting games, e.g. miniature golf, juggling, curling, badminton, shuttlecock or like games, games using a hockey puck; projectiles for these games which do not fall into the above category of balls for ball games.

Training appliances for particular sports, e.g. for fencing, riding, skiing, rowing, punching-balls for boxing, golf swing trainers, artificial mountain slopes.

Other games or sports accessories, e.g. indicating or scoring devices, body protectors.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Some sporting subject matter is to be found in other subclasses of class A63. Skates, skis and their bindings, roller skates, skate-boards and the design or layout of playing-courts, rinks, bowling-greens or water-skiing areas or the like are classified in A63C. Bowling-alleys, bowling-games and equipment for bowls (but not the balls which are in A63B) and billiards or snooker are classified in A63D. Merry-go-rounds, swings, rocking-horses, toy animals for riding, chutes, switchbacks, water roundabouts, helter-skelters or the like are classified in A63G. Toys are in A63H. Racing, riding sports and equipment and accessories therefore, including race-courses and race-tracks, are in A63K.

In relation to apparatus or methods for manufacturing balls, it should be borne in mind that working of plastics or substances in a plastic state is classified in class B29 and the chemical or compositional aspects of balls is in Section C, e.g. compositions for making golf balls are usually in subclass C08L.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Protective equipment in the form of clothing or garments for sporting purposes

A41D 13/00

in the form of caps or hats

A42B 1/08

Helmets

A42B 3/00

Apparatus for passive exercising or massage

A61H

Unicycles

B62K 1/00

Vessels or like floating structures for pleasure or sport

B63B 35/71, B63B 35/73

Life-saving in water

B63C 9/00

Breathing aids for swimming, e.g. snorkels

B63C 11/12

Divers' sleds or like craft

B63C 11/46

Training of parachutists

B64D 23/00

Archers' finger tabs

F41B 5/16

Traps for clay-pigeon targets

F41J 9/18

Devices for exercising or strengthening of fingers or arms in teaching music

G09B 15/06
In relation to climbing or mountaineering equipment:

Non-skid devices or attachments for footwear, e.g. crampons

A43C 15/00

Breathing masks or helmets for use at high altitudes

A62B 18/00

Safety belts for climbers

A62B 35/00

Picks

B25D 7/00

Ladders attached to fixed structures

E06C 9/04

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring muscular strength

A61B 5/22

Connecting valves to inflatable elastic bodies

B60C 29/00

Throwing weapons

F41B

e.g. sling-weapons

F41B 3/00

Stop watches

G04F

Timing devices

G07C

A63B 41/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Valves, e.g. self-closing valves

F16K

A63B 41/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Air pumps per se for flowing up balls

F04

A63B 55/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Running gear or propulsion features for wheeled carriers for golf bags

B60

A63C 10/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Bindings for monoskis

A63C 9/00

Water skis or wakeboards

B63B 35/81

Special rules of classification

When classifying in this group, classification is made in all appropriate subgroups.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expression/word "step-in" is often used with the meaning "mechanism that ensures that, when pressing the shoe on the binding, the shoe will be automatically locked to the holder".

A63C 10/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Snowboard bindings particular suited for soft boots for encompassing the shoe from the upper side and tighten it against the boot. Most of the shoe holders are made from a strap or soft cover. This group further comprises:

A63C0010040000

A63C 10/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Details of straps which encompass the shoe from upper side, e.g. structure of the strap, tensioning means for the strap, cushioning of the strap, relative arrangement between front and rear strap.

A63C0010060000

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Clamp-buckle fastenings; Fastenings with toggle levers

A43C 11/14

A63C 10/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Snowboard bindings dedicated to hard boots, i.e. to boots whose structure is rigid enough to hold the foot tight and transmit front to rear holding forces. Consequently only a small part of the boot is held by a stirrup (ref. 5 on the example drawing) or a clamp (ref. 6,7 on the example drawing).

A63C0010080000

A63C 10/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Step-in snowboard bindings where a part, or several parts, of the shoe are specially adapted to interact with specific parts of the binding. In general this part is made out of rigid material (ref. 20 in the example drawing) which is fastened to the outsole of the boot. This kind of bindings usually allow easy fastening and manual release of the boot and are particular suited for a semi-rigid boots.

A63C0010100000

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Safety ski bindings using parts which are fixed on the shoe of the user and are releasable from the ski bindings

A63C 9/086

A63C 10/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Calf or heel supports which are mostly used for non-rigid type boots, where the back part of the shaft is soft and pliable. These types of supports are mostly found in combination with the bindings of groups A63C 10/04 and A63C 10/10. Calf and heel support allow the transmission of forces pointing to the heel when riding on the back edge of the snowboard. A calf support is usually called high back (ref. 30 in the first example drawing, ref. 2 in the second example drawing). Heel supports are usually in the form of a heel loop (ref. 56 in the first example drawing, ref. 17 in the second example drawing).

A63C0010240000
A63C0010240000

A63C 10/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Skis or snowboards ; Vibration dampers

A63C 5/075

A63D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Bowling alleys and boccia courts, including features such as portability, form or material of the surface, stands for players and tracks for returning or circulating the balls;

Table alleys, miniature bowling-alleys and accessories therefor;

Pins; games of pins, e.g. ninepins, with tethered balls;

Bagatelle and similar games e.g. children’s bagatelle;

Billiards, similar games such as snooker and pool, and pocket billiards, including tables and accessories therefor, e.g. cushions, cues, means for roughening cue-tips and scoring or registering devices.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

All aspects of these games are covered by this subclass except for the balls, which are covered by A63B, and devices for propelling, projecting or rolling-off balls which are covered by A63F 7/24.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Billiard tables convertible into beds

A47C 17/62

Indoor games using small moving playing bodies, e.g. balls

A63F 7/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Balls

A63B

Devices for propelling, projecting or rolling-off balls

A63F 7/24

Counting mechanisms in general

G06M

Coin-freed mechanisms e.g. for releasing balls for use

G07F

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Bagatelle

A modification of billiards in which the players’ object is to strike the balls so that they, and perhaps other balls, shall fall into numbered holes that determine the score. Usually the bagatelle table has a rounded far end and a channel on the right hand side along which the balls are propelled.

Boule-type games

Games, for example bowls, pétanque and boccia, with the general object of throwing or rolling balls or similar rolling objects in order for them to knock, or come to rest as close as possible to, a target. The target may be a smaller ball, commonly known as a ‘jack’. These games can be played by individuals or teams, indoors or outdoors on a range of surfaces, including gravel, grass or specially built courts. The balls can be made from a variety of materials and are generally spherical or ovoid in shape.

A63H - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Toys of the following types:

Special methods or compositions for the manufacture of dolls, toy animals, toy figures or parts thereof.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Toys are often imitations or miniatures of "genuine", "full-size" working devices, machines or apparatus with a practical use. However toys normally have structural details that make them unsuitable for operation similar to that of a full-size equivalent. For the full-size working device, the relevant subclass should be consulted, for example "proper" vehicles, aircraft, etc. should be classified in classes B60-B64 and gearing in general (instead of gearing for toys) is in subclass F16H. In borderline cases where it is difficult to distinguish between a toy and a full-size working device, it may be necessary to classify in several places.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Blowing smoke-rings

A24F 13/30

Dolls' footwear

A43B 3/28

Changeable or secret pictures

B44F 1/10

Firecrackers

F42B 4/04

Hand-thrown impact-exploded noise makers

F42B 4/16

Kaleidoscopes

G02B 27/08
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Throwing toys as part of a game

A63F 9/02

Traffic games with figures moved by players

A63F 9/14

Spring toy guns

F41B 7/08
Examples (not mentioned above) of devices, articles or apparatus which are applicable to humans instead of toys, or of "full-size" working devices or machines with a practical use:

Eyelashes, eyebrows for humans

A41G

Artificial eyes for humans

A61F 2/14

Picture books

B42D 1/00

Parachutes for aeronautics

B64D

Ultra-small engines, e.g. for driving models

F02B 75/34

Models or scenery for general purposes

G09B

Music, sound or noise production in general

G10

Transformers

H01F

Electric motors per se

H02K

Converters

H02M

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Toy

A plaything to be actively played with by children or others; something contrived for amusement rather than for practical or serious use.

Toy figure

A toy that is a caricature or a stylised or symbolic form of a human being, animal, cartoon, fictional character or mythological being.

A63H 3/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connection of valves to inflatable elastic bodies

B60C 29/00

A63H 3/42 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Artificial eyes for human beings

A61F 2/14

A63H 3/44 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Wigs, eyelashes, eyebrows for humans

A41G

A63H 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Music, sound or noise production in general

G10

A63H 17/385 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Remote-control arrangements specially adapted for toys

A63H 30/00

A63H 19/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Models or scenery for general purposes

G09B

A63H 27/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connection of valves to inflatable elastic bodies

B60C 29/00

A63H 27/127 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Flying discs

A63B 65/10

A63H 27/24 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ultra-small engines per se, e.g. for driving models

F02B 75/34

Electric motors per se

H02K

A63H 30/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transformers

H01F

Converters

H02M

A63H 31/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Gearing in general

F16H

A63H 33/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Parachutes for aeronautics

B64D

A63H 33/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Savings boxes

A45C 1/12

Toy ticket punches

G07B 9/02

A63H 33/38 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Picture books

B42D 1/00

A63H 33/42 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Models or scenery for general purposes

G09B

A63J - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Devices for theatres, circuses or the like places for public entertainment or amusement, e.g. cinemas;

Conjuring appliances or the like appliances for performing magic or illusionary effects;

Stage arrangements;

Equipment for, or arrangement of, circuses or arenas;

Auxiliaries for producing special effects on stages, or in circuses or arenas;

Auxiliary apparatus for artistes;

Centrifugal tracks, loop-the-loops, or the like;

Labyrinths;

Panoramas, dioramas, stereoramas, or the like;

Peep-shows; Kaleidoscopic or the other opalescence exhibitions;

Apparatus for performing colour-music;

Puppet, marionette, or shadow shows or theatres;

Conjuring appliances; Auxiliary apparatus for conjurers;

Equipment specially adapted for cinemas.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

General relationship of A63J with E04B and E04H.

E04B covers general building constructions; walls, e.g. partitions; roofs; floors; ceilings; insulation or other protection of buildings. For example, E04B 7/00 covers typical arena roof construction.

E04H covers buildings or like structures for particular purposes; swimming or splash baths or pools; masts; fencing; tents or canopies, in general. For example, E04H 3/00 covers buildings or groups of buildings for public or similar purposes and their constructional features; E04H 15/00 covers tent types.

General relationship of A63J with A63G and A63H

A63G covers devices for public for public amusement, especially rotating or rocking devices for fun-fairs. A63H covers toys for similar amusements, toy scenery, or hand puppets used by artists for their performance.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Chutes; Helters-skelters

A63G 21/00

Vehicles adapted to transport, to carry or to comprise theatres or stages

B60P 3/025

General building constructions; walls; roofs; floors; ceilings; insulation or other protection of buildings

E04B

Buildings or like structures for particular purposes; swimming or splash baths or pools; masts; fencing; tents or canopies, in general

E04H

Buildings or groups of buildings for meetings, entertainments, or sports

E04H 3/10

Theatres; Concert halls; Studios for cinematography, constructional features of stages or auditoriums in theatres or the like

E04H 3/22

Tents in general, e.g. circus tents

E04H 15/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Conjuring

The art or skill of performing tricks or illusions for entertainment.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following terms "conjuring", "prestidigitation" and "sleights of hand" are often used as synonyms. Also, these terms can be used as keywords.

In patent documents the following terms "track", "path", "raceway", "racetrack", are often used as synonyms. Also, these terms can be used as keywords.

A63J 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for drawing domestic curtains

A47H 5/00

Fire-proof curtains

A62C 2/10

Capstans; winches; tackles

B66D

Fabrics for theatre decorations, for costumes, for curtains

D03D

Structural arrangements of stage or theatre

E04H

Models of scenic effects, e.g. trees, rocks, water surfaces other than for stage purposes

G09B 25/08

A63J 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Circus buildings

E04B

Buildings or like structures for particular purposes; swimming or splash baths or pools; masts; fencing; tents or canopies, in general

E04H

A63J 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Lifts in, or associated with, buildings

B66B 9/00

Platform lifts

B66F 7/00

Shiftable or portable platforms of stages

E04H 3/28

Lighting arrangements for stages, or in circuses or arenas, e.g. for producing special lighting effects

F21S

Electrophonic musical instruments; instruments in which the tones are generated by electromechanical means or electronic generators, or in which the tones are synthesised from a data store

G10H

Electric lighting not otherwise provided for; Circuit arrangements for electric light sources in general; Controlling

H05B 37/02

A63J 5/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Elevators, escalators or moving walkways

B66B 9/00

A63J 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Masks for theatrical use

A41G 7/00

Hand-puppets

A63H 3/14

A63J 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Looping-the loop swings for public amusments

A63G 9/08

Chutes for public amusement

A63G 21/00

A63J 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Model railway units in combination with scenics for toy purposes

A63H 19/36

Toy models or toy scenery not otherwise provided for

A63H 33/42

Models for full-sized devices for demonstration purposes, for surveying or for geography, e.g. relief models

G09B 25/00

A63J 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Optical, colour, or shadow toys

A63H 33/22

Kaleidoscopes

G02B 27/08

A63J 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Controlling arrangements in circuits for electric light sources, in general

H05B 37/02

Electrophonic musical instruments; instruments in which the tones are generated by electromechanical means or electronic generators, or in which the tones are synthesised from a data store

G10H

A63J 19/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hand-puppets

A63H 3/14

Jumping jacks

A63H 3/18

B01D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Processes and apparatus for evaporation, distillation, sublimation, crystallisation, solvent extraction, chromatography, sedimentation, filtration, dust precipitation, gas cleaning, absorption, adsorption, separation of isotopes.

Cold traps, cold baffles.

Treating liquids by displacement, adsorption, separation or degasification.

Treating gases or vapours by separation, recovering, chemical or biological purification of waste gases.

Separation using semi-permeable membranes, dialysis, osmosis, ultrafiltration.

Separation of suspended particles from liquids by sedimentation, flocculation, settling, filtration or other processes.

Separation of dispersed particles from gases or vapours, by filtration, gravity, inertia or centrifugal forces, or using liquid as separating agent.

Similar processes which are not concerned with, or limited to, separation.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

For apparatus used in drying or evaporation, F26B takes precedence over this subclass.

Separation of isotopes of the same chemical element is covered by group B01D 59/00, whatever process or apparatus is employed; this group therefore takes precedence over other subclasses of class B01.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Separating solids from solids by wet methods

B03B, B03D

Separating solids from solids using liquids or using pneumatic jigs or tables

B03B

Magnetic or electrostatic separation of solid materials from solid materials or fluids, separation by high-voltage electric fields

B03C

Flotation, differential sedimentation

B03D

Separating solids from solids by dry methods, e.g. sieving, screening, sifting or using gas currents

B07B

Centrifuges

B04B

Vortex apparatus, e.g. cyclones

B04C

Presses per se for squeezing-out liquid from liquid-containing material

B30B 9/02

Making single crystals

C30B

Into single crystals

C30B 23/00

Manufacture of hollow fibres

D01D 5/24, D01F 1/08

Separation of difficult-to-condense gases or air by liquefaction

F25J 3/00

Condensers

F28B
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Blood or infusion liquid filters

A61M 5/165

Screens or sieves per se

B07B 1/00

Extrusion filters

B29C 47/68

Filtering spinning solution or melt

D01D 1/10

Filtration of lubricants

F16N 39/06

Suction cleaner filters

A47L 9/10

Filters for breathing-protection purposes

A62B 23/00

Filtering air for vehicles

B60H 3/06

Separating pneumatically-conveyed materials from propelling gas

B65G 53/60

Exhaust or silencing apparatus for machines or engines having means for removing solid constituents of exhaust

F01N 3/02

Air cleaners for the intakes of gas-turbine or jet-propulsion plants

F02C 7/05

Air cleaners for the intakes of combustion engines

F02M 35/024

Air cleaners for the intakes of compressors

F04B 39/16

Filtering in air-conditioning

F24F 3/16

Arrangement or mounting of filters in air-conditioning, air-humidification or ventilation

F24F 13/28

Purification or separation of nitrogen

C01B 21/04

Working-up unidentified gaseous mixtures obtained by cracking hydrocarbon oils

C10G 70/00

Cleaning coal gas

C10K

Working-up of natural gas, or synthetic natural gas

C10L 3/10

Investigating materials

G01N 30/00

Treatment of milk by dialysis, reverse osmosis or ultrafiltration

A23C 9/142

Treatment of milk by electrodialysis

A23C 9/144

Artificial kidneys

A61M 1/14

Treatment of water e.g. softening of water by ion-exchange

C02F, C02F 1/42

Treatment of water by dialysis, osmosis or reverse osmosis

C02F 1/44

Treatment of water by electrodialysis

C02F 1/469

Apparatus for enzymology or microbiology with dialysis means

C12M 1/12

Production or purification of sugar juices, e.g. by osmosis

C13B 20/16

Extraction of sugar from molasses, e.g. by osmosis

C13B 35/08

Diaphragms for electrolysis

C25B 13/00, C25C 7/04

Osmosis as energy source

F03G 7/00

Special rules of classification

Group B01D 59/00 (separation of isotopes) takes precedence over other groups of this subclass since it covers separation of isotopes of the same chemical element, whatever process or apparatus is employed.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Filtration

The separation of a fluid-solid mixture, involving passage of most of the fluid through a porous barrier which retains most of the solid particulates contained in the mixture; includes straining solids from fluids.

Filter medium

A porous barrier or porous arrangement of material, which lets a fluid pass while retaining most of the solids which were mixed with it.

Filtering element

A section of filter medium in addition to parts to which the medium is demountably or permanently fixed, including other sections of medium, end caps, peripheral frames or edge strips, but excluding housings.

Filter housing

The fluid-constraining impervious vessel, whether open or closed, which contains, or is adapted to contain one or more filtering elements or filter media.

Filter chamber

The space within a housing where filtering elements or filter media are located; partitions may divide a single housing into a plurality of chambers.

Filtering apparatus

Filtering elements combined with housings, cleaning arrangements, motor or like parts, which are characteristic of the particular type of apparatus. Ancillary devices such as pumps or valves are considered part of a filtering apparatus when inside the apparatus. Ancillary devices performing similar or different unit operations such as comminutors, mixers or non-filtering separators, whether or not inside the apparatus, are not considered part of a filtering apparatus. The term does not extend to apparatus, e.g. washing machines, of which the filter forms only a part.

B01D 1/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Preparation of starch

C08B 30/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Prevention of incrustation

C23F

B01D 1/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sprayers in general

B05B

B01D 3/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Preparation of alcoholic beverages by distillation

C12G 3/12

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Gas chromatography

B01D 15/08

Destructive distillation

C10B

B01D 3/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Packing elements

B01J 19/30, B01J 19/32

B01D 8/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pumps for evacuating by condensing or freezing

F04B 37/08

B01D 15/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Treating liquids with moving adsorbents.

Non-selective adsorption treatment of liquids with ion-exchange materials in processes where no ion-exchange occurs (e.g. purification or regeneration treatments).

Selective adsorption treatments of liquids with ion-exchange materials as adsorbents.

Separation processes and apparatus using selective adsorption e.g. chromatography.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Separating processes involving the treatment of liquids with liquid sorbents

B01D 11/00

Preparative gas chromatography

B01D 53/02

Separation of isotopes of the same chemical element

B01D 59/00

Sorbent materials in general

B01J 20/00

Sorbents for chromatography

B01J 20/281

Ion-exchange processes or materials

B01J 39/00-B01J 49/00

Treatment of water

C02F

e.g. softening of water by ion-exchange

C02F 1/42
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Investigative or analytical chromatography

G01N 30/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sorption and chromatography relating to particular applications, or relating to treating particular compounds or groups of compounds, may be classified in the following non-exhaustive list:

Modifying dairy products by dialysis, osmosis, filtration or ion-exchange

A23C 9/14

Treating blood or products derived therefrom

A61K 35/14

Separation of optically active compounds

C07B 57/00

Purification of hydrocarbons by adsorption

C07C 7/12

Extraction, separation or purification of peptides by chromatography

C07K 1/16

Refining hydrocarbon oils with solid sorbents

C10G 25/00

Refining fats or fatty oils by adsorption

C11B 3/10

Purification of alcoholic beverages with ion-exchange or adsorption material

C12H 1/04

Separating or purifying micro-organisms or enzymes

C12N 9/00

Purification of sugar juices using adsorption agents

C13B 20/12

Special rules of classification

In order that group B01D 15/08 may provide a basis for a complete search with respect to chromatography, all subject matter of interest should also be classified in this group even when it is classified primarily in application-oriented place(s) (see Informative References).

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Adsorption

A separation process which involves the transfer and resulting equilibrium distribution of one or more solutes between a fluid phase and adsorbing particles.

Sorbent

A material which separates a constituent from a fluid mixture containing such constituents. The action in most instances is that of selective retention (i.e. the sorbent removes only the part of the fluid mixture for which it has the greatest affinity). The retained constituent cannot be removed by shaking, brushing or similar mechanical action, but generally can be removed by heating, pressure reduction, or use of a stripping or denuding fluid.

Chromatography

A process in which a liquid is flowed along a linear path comprising a sorbent, with which the liquid competes in affinity for a constituent of the liquid. The constituent is sorbed from the moving liquid by the relatively immobile sorbent and re-dissolved by a later passing portion of the liquid until an equilibrium of the sorbing-dissolving step is set up causing the constituent to concentrate in a specific volume of the sorbent and to move along the path of the liquid at a rate slower than such liquid.

Adsorption chromatography

Separation is based mainly on differences between the adsorption affinities of the sample components for the surface of an active solid.

Partition chromatography

Separation is based mainly on differences between the solubilities of the sample components in the stationary phase (gas chromatography) or on differences between the solubilities of the components in the mobile and stationary phases (liquid chromatography).

Exclusion chromatography

Separation is based mainly on exclusion effects, such as differences in molecular size (size-exclusion chromatography) and/or shape or charge

Affinity chromatography

The particular variant of chromatography in which the unique biological specificity of the analyte and ligand interaction is utilised for the separation.

Bonded phase

A stationary phase which is covalently bonded to the support particles or to the inside wall of the column tubing.

Synonyms and Keywords

HPLC

High performance liquid chromatography, sometimes also referred to as high pressure liquid chromatography

B01D 17/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Devices for separating or removing fatty or oily substances or similar floating material from water, waste water, or sewage

C02F 1/40

Cleaning or keeping clear the surface of open water from oil or like materials

E02B 15/04

Arrangements for separating lubricants from refrigerants

F25B 43/02

B01D 19/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Foam dispersion or prevention during boiling

B01B 1/02

Foam dispersion or prevention during fermentation

C12

B01D 21/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Devices for separating or removing fatty or oily substances or similar floating material from water, waste water, or sewage

C02F 1/40

B01D 21/01 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Using flocculating agents for purifying water

C02F 1/52

Using flocculating agents for liquid radioactive waste

G21F 9/10

B01D 21/26 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Centrifuges

B04B

Cyclones

B04C

B01D 33/052 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Presses per se for squeezing out liquid using an endless pressing band

B30B 9/24

B01D 39/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Making filter paper

D21F 11/14

B01D 39/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Porous ceramic material

C04B 38/00

Making alloys by powder metallurgy

C22C 1/04

B01D 47/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Packing elements

B01J 19/30, B01J 19/32

B01D 51/00 - Definition fr

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Preventing dust fires is classified in subclass A62C

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pretreatment specially adapted for magnetic separation

B03C 1/005

Pretreatment specially adapted for electrostatic separation

B03C 3/01

B01D 53/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Separation of difficult-to-condense gases or air by liquefaction

F25J
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For the separation of specific gases or vapours, see the relevant places, e.g. for purification or separation of nitrogen

C01B 21/04

Working-up undefined gaseous mixtures obtained by cracking hydrocarbon oils

C10G 70/00

Cleaning coal gas

C10K

Working-up of natural gas, or synthetic natural gas

C10L 3/10

For investigating materials

G01N 30/00

B01D 53/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Packing elements

B01J 19/30, B01J 19/32

B01D 53/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Manufacturing semi-permeable membranes

B01D 67/00

Form, structure or properties of semi-permeable membranes

B01D 69/00

Material for semi-permeable membranes

B01D 71/00

B01D 57/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Treatment of water, waste water, sewage or sludge by electrophoresis

C02F 1/469

Electrophoretic production of compounds or non-metals

C25B 7/00

Investigating or analysing materials by using electrophoresis

G01N 27/26

B01D 59/38 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Separation by electrochemical methods in general

B01J

B01J - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Treatment of milk

A23C 9/14

Separation by ion-exchangers

B01D

E.g. separation of liquids by ion-exchange adsorbents

B01D 15/04

Chromatography involving ion-exchange

B01D 15/36

Separation of isotopes

B01D 59/00

Compounds per se, see the relevant classes, e.g.

C01, C07, C08

Treatment of water

C02F 1/42

Refining of hydrocarbon oils, in the absence of hydrogen, with solid sorbents

C10G 25/00

Purification of sugar juices

C13B 20/14

Extraction of sugar from molasses

C13B 35/06

Extraction of metal compounds from ores or concentrates by wet processes

C22B 3/00

Using ion-exchange for investigating or analysing materials

G01N 30/96

Treating radioactively contaminated material

G21F 9/12

B03D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus or methods using liquids for the separation of solids from solids, such apparatus or methods consisting of the following:

Flotation type separation apparatus or methods that may include one or more of the following:

Differential sedimentation type separation apparatus or methods that may include coagulation or flocculation.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In Section B, the separation of different materials, e.g. of different matter, size or state, is predominantly found in the following subclasses: B01D, B03B, B03C, B03D, B04B, B04C, B07B, B07C.

The classifying characteristics of these subclasses are:

The first of these characteristics involves six different aspects, assembled in three groups:

These subclasses are to be used according to the following general rules:

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Combinations of dry separating apparatus with wet separating apparatus

B03B

Sink-float separation

B03B 5/28
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Separating isotopes

B01D 59/00

Treatment of water, waste water or sewage by flotation

C02F 1/24

Flotation apparatus for enzymology or microbiology

C12M 1/09

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes or devices capable of general use, for removing adhering liquid from separated materials

B01D

Froth dispersion

B01D 19/02

Sedimentation in general

B01D 21/00

Devices for feeding measured quantities of reagents

B01J 4/02

Conditioners

B03B 1/00

Centrifuges

B04B

Separating by dry methods

B07

Detergents, soaps

C11D

Special rules of classification

In groups B03D 1/001-B03D 1/018 (advanced level), in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

In groups B03D 1/001-B03D 1/018 (advanced level), it is desirable to add the appropriate indexing code(s) from each of groups B03D 101/00 or B03D 103/00.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Coagulation

The process by which a liquid changes to a thickened, curdlike, insoluble state by some kind of chemical or physical process, excluding by evaporation.

Differential sedimentation

A separation process using gravity or centrifugal force to initiate differential settling of suspended solids, for example at the bottom of a tank. Different solid materials settle at different rates.

Flocculation

This refers to a process where a solute comes out of solution in the form of floc or "flakes". The term is also used to refer to the process by which fine particulates are caused to clump together into floc. The floc may then float to the top of the liquid, settle to the bottom of the liquid, or can be readily filtered from the liquid. Sodium silicate is a common flocculating agent.

Flotation

(Also known as froth flotation) A separation process whereby water and chemicals are added to a mixture of solids to form a pulp while developing differences in surface tension between the various species in the solids mixture. The pulp is then copiously aerated and the preferred (aerophilic) species clings to bubbles and floats as a mineralized froth, which is then skimmed off.

B03D 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Conditioning for flotation, general arrangement of plant

B03B 1/00, B03B 9/00

B03D 1/001 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Conditioners

B03B 1/04

B03D 1/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Froth dispersion

B01D 19/02

B03D 1/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes or devices capable of general use

B01D

B03D 1/14 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Flotation apparatus for enzymology or microbiology

C12M 1/09

B04B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Centrifuges that are intended for separating, mixing, drying, extracting, purifying or other ways of treating mixtures composed of matter in the following physical states:

Such centrifuges may comprise centrifuges with rotary bowls provided with solid jackets for separating predominantly liquid mixtures with or without solid particles; centrifuges with rotary bowls in which solid particles or bodies become separated by centrifugal force and simultaneously sifted or filtered; or other centrifuges including radial chamber apparatus such as butyrometers or counter-current apparatus.

Elements or accessories of centrifuges such as casings, lids, rotary bowls, drives, gearing, suspending or balancing of rotary bowls, feeding, charging or discharging of bowls, control arrangements, heating, cooling or suppressing the formation of foam.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Separation of isotopes of the same chemical element is covered by B01D 59/00, whatever process or apparatus is employed. Processes for separation of different isotopes of the same chemical element by centrifuging are covered by B01D 59/20.

Processes in general that use centrifugal force for separating, extracting or purifying components of mixtures are covered in subclasses B01D and B07B, and not in subclass B04B with the apparatus for accomplishing these processes. Examples of such processes can be found in the "References relevant to classification in this subclass" section below, in the subsection entitled "Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system".

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

High-speed drum mills

B02C 19/11

Cyclone separators

B04C
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Centrifuges for producing filtered coffee

A47J 31/22

Dental appliances for receiving spittle, with or without rinsing means therefore, e.g. dental basins, spittoons or cuspidors

A61C 17/14

Suction or pumping devices for medical purposes, other treatment of blood in a by-pass of the natural circulatory system

A61M 1/36

Processes for separation of non-miscible liquids by centrifugal force

B01D 17/038

Processes for using centrifuges for separating sediment

B01D 21/26

Processes for separating dispersed particles from gases or vapours by gravity, inertia or centrifugal forces

B01D 45/00, B01D 45/12

Processes for separation of gases or vapours or for recovering vapours of volatile solvents from gases by centrifugal force

B01D 53/24

Processes using centrifugal force for selective separation of solid materials carried by, or dispersed in, gas currents

B07B 7/08

Centrifugal casting machines

B22D

Treatment of water, waste water or sewage by centrifugal separation

C02F 1/38

Domestic spin dryers

D06F

Lubrication of machines or engines in general, details of lubricant purifying means

F01M 11/03

Exhaust or silencing apparatus for machines or engines having means for removing solid constituents of exhaust, using inertial or centrifugal separators

F01N 3/037

Drying solid material by using centrifuges

F26B 5/08

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Filters in general

B01D

Separation in general

B01D

Magnetic or electrostatic separators

B03C

Sieves in general

B07B

Shock absorbers, vibration dampers

F16F

Analysing materials by determining their physical or chemical properties e.g. during centrifuging

G01N

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Centrifuge

Machine or apparatus for separating, mixing, drying, extracting, purifying, or like treating in which centrifugal effects are generated by rotary bowls or other rotors. Where such a machine or apparatus involves pumping effects, such effects must be incidental or subsidiary to the treating.

B04B 5/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Magnetic or electrostatic separators

B03C

B04B 7/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Shock absorbers, vibration dampers

F16F

B04B 7/08 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Centrifugal casting machines

B22D

B04B 7/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Filters in general

B01D

Sieves in general

B07B

B04B 7/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Filters in general

B01D

Sieves in general

B07B

B04B 9/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Balancing in general

G01M

B04C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus for separating, mixing or like treating (e.g. drying, extracting, purifying) in which centrifugal or centripetal effects are generated by free vortex flow, otherwise than by rotary bowls, rotors or curved passages. The free vortex flow generated may follow a flat spiral, have an unchanged or constant axial direction, or have a reversible axial direction. The mixtures treated are composed of the following physical states of matter:

Combinations of such apparatus with other devices, e.g. fans.

Accessories for such devices e.g. safety or control devices.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Separation of isotopes of the same chemical element is covered by B01D 59/00, whatever process or apparatus is employed.

Processes in general that use free vortex flow, e.g. cyclones, for separating, extracting or purifying components of mixtures are covered in subclass B01D, and not in subclass B04C with the apparatus for accomplishing these processes.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Combinations of cyclones with filters, for separating particles from gases or vapours

B01D 50/00

Combinations of cyclones with electrostatic precipitating arrangements

B03C 3/14

Cyclonic type combustion apparatus using fluent fuel

F23C 3/00

Vortex burners e.g. for cyclone-type combustion apparatus

F23D 1/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement or disposition of cyclones or other devices with centrifugal action, in suction cleaners

A47L 9/16

Separation in general

B01D

Jet mills

B02C 19/06

Magnetic or electrostatic separators

B03C

Centrifugal separators

B04B

Selective separation of solid materials carried by or dispersed in gas currents, using centrifugal force

B07B 7/08

Mounting or connecting of lubricant purifying means relative to a machine or engine

F01M 11/03

Crankcase ventilating or breathing having means for purifying air before leaving crankcase, e.g. removing oil

F01M 13/04

Exhaust or silencing apparatus for machines or engines having means for removing solid constituents of exhaust, using inertial or centrifugal separators

F01N 3/037

Fluid dynamics in general

F15D

Compression machines, plant or systems using vortex effect

F25B 9/04

Analysing materials by determining their physical or chemical properties, e.g. while the centrifugal or centripetal effects generated by a vortex flow are acting on the sample

G01N

B04C 5/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fluid dynamics in general

F15D

B05B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus for the release or projection of drops or droplets into the atmosphere or into a chamber to form a mist or the like. The materials to be projected may be suspended in a stream of gas or vapour.

Apparatus as above, for the release or projection of streams or sprays of other fluent materials into the atmosphere or into a chamber.

Examples of such apparatus, and subcomponents thereof covered by this subclass, include:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Subclass B05C relates to apparatus for applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces in general. This subject matter generally relates to contact methods e.g. spreading, pouring, dipping, rubbing, using rollers, using fluidized bed techniques etc. but not to spraying or atomising apparatus which is covered by subclass B05B. B05C also relates to apparatus for projecting liquids or other fluent materials onto surfaces (B05C 5/00) or to the inside of hollow work (B05C 7/02), and further to apparatus specially adapted for the projection of particulate material onto surfaces (B05C 19/04). In B05C, ‘projection’ relates to the application of a continuous stream of liquid or other fluent (e.g. particulate) material to a surface. In B05B, ‘projection’ relates to the release of a discontinuous stream of drops, droplets or a cloud of particulate material into the atmosphere or into a chamber to form a mist or the like.

Subclass B05D relates to processes (including processes performed by spraying) for applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces in general.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Spray-mixers with nozzles

B01F 5/20

Aerosol containers

B65D 83/14

Drinking fountains

E03B 9/20
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Nozzles for bathing devices for special therapeutic or hygienic purposes

A61H 33/00

Sprayers or atomisers specially adapted for therapeutic purposes

A61M 11/00

Inhalators

A61M 15/00

Nozzles specially adapted for fire-extinguishing

A62C 31/02

Machines or devices for abrasive blasting with particulate material

B24C 3/00

Nozzles for injection moulding

B29C 45/20

Nozzles for ink-jet printing mechanisms

B41J 2/135

Dropping or releasing powdered, liquid or gaseous matter in flight by spraying, e.g. insecticides

B64D 1/18

Nozzles for introducing articles or materials into containers or wrappers

B65B 39/00

Filling nozzles for transferring liquid from bulk storage containers or reservoirs into vehicles or into portable containers, e.g. in vehicle service stations

B67D 7/42

Nozzles for delivery of liquid or semi-liquid contents by internal gaseous pressure

B65D 83/28

Nozzles for drilling by liquid or gas jets

E21B 7/18

Supplying combustion engines in general with combustible mixtures or constituents thereof

F02M

Atomising devices for mist lubrication

F16N 7/34

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Watering gardens, fields, sports grounds or the like

A01G 25/00

Dish washing or rinsing machines with spray devices

A47L 15/00

Flow mixers

B01F 5/00

Cleaning in general by methods involving the use or presence of a liquid

B08B 3/00

Making metallic powder by atomising or spraying

B22F 9/08

Coating of articles during shaping of substances in a plastic state

B29C 39/10, B29C 39/18, B29C 41/20, B29C 41/30, B29C 43/18, B29C 43/28, B29C 45/14, B29C 47/02

Forming layered products

B32B

Conveying articles or workpieces through baths of liquid

B65G 49/02

Surface treatment of glass by coating

C03C 17/00, C03C 25/10

Coating or impregnation of mortars, concrete, stone or ceramics

C04B 41/45, C04B 41/61, C04B 41/81

Paints, varnishes, lacquers

C09D

Enamelling of metals, applying a vitreous layer to metals, chemical cleaning or degreasing of metallic objects

C23

Electroplating

C25D

Treating of textile materials by liquids, gases or vapours

D06B

Treating roads

E01C

Anti-splash devices for water taps

E03C 1/08

Means for pumping fluids

F04

Valves, e.g. water-taps

F16K

Burners using a direct spraying action of liquid droplets or vaporised liquid into the combustion space

F23D 11/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Coating

The applied material. A coating may be a solidified layer originally applied as a liquid (e.g. dried paint) or a layer of material which, once applied, remains in a liquid or semi-liquid state (e.g. lubricant).

Liquid or fluent

designates materials which can flow, e.g. liquids, including solutions, dispersions and suspensions, as well as semi-liquids, pastes, melts and particulate materials.

Particulate materials

Solid materials in the form of very small pieces, e.g. powders, granules, short fibres or chips.

B05B 1/28 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Means for limiting the area of spray, or for the collection or re-use of excess material

B05B 15/04

B05B 9/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Details or components, e.g. casings, bodies, of portable power-driven tools not particularly related to the operation performed

B25F 5/00

B05B 12/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Controlling in general

G05

B05B 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Accessories applicable to other methods of applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces

B05C

B05B 15/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Enclosures, e.g. booths, for applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces

B05C 15/00

B05C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus or hand tools, in general, for applying liquids or other fluent materials to a surface or part thereof, by any mechanical or physical method, in particular apparatus for obtaining a uniform distribution of liquids or other fluent materials on a surface.

Apparatus in which liquids or other fluent materials are applied by bringing the work into contact with a member carrying liquid or other fluent materials or into contact with a bulk quantity of liquid or other fluent materials (e.g. using immersion baths or tanks).

Apparatus in which liquid or other fluent materials is projected, poured or allowed to flow on to the surface of the work.

Apparatus specially designed for applying liquids or other fluent materials to the inside of a hollow work.

Means for manipulating or holding work, e.g. for separate articles, to facilitate the application of liquids or other fluent materials thereto.

Enclosures and booths to accommodate apparatus for applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces.

Hand tools for the application or partial removal of liquids or other fluent materials from surfaces.

Apparatus specially adapted for applying particulate materials to surfaces.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Subclass B05B relates to spraying, sprinkling and atomising apparatus, including nozzles, for the release or projection of drops or droplets into the atmosphere or into a chamber to form a mist or the like. The material to be sprayed or atomised may be suspended in a stream of gas or vapour. Accordingly, B05B covers spray heads, sprinkling apparatus, electrostatic spraying apparatus, hand-held spraying apparatus, spraying plants (e.g. spray booths), delivery control means associated with such apparatus, and the like. Also covered are means for heating, mixing or pressurising of the materials to be sprayed, sprinkled or atomised. Whilst spray booths are covered by B05B 15/12, enclosures for the general application of liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces are covered by B05C 15/00.

Subclass B05D relates to processes (including processes performed by spraying) for applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces in general. Also included in this subclass are the processes of dipping, flocking and the application of liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces using brushes, pads or rollers. The process of fluidised-bed technique to coat surfaces is covered in B05D 1/22, whilst the apparatus used for such is classified in B05C 19/02. Pre-treatment of surfaces, after-treatment of applied coatings and processes to obtain special surface effects using liquids and other fluent materials are also covered by B05D.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Brushes

A46B

Implements for writing and drawing

B43K
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Apparatus for coating or filling sweetmeats or confectionery

A23G 3/20

Apparatus for coating or filling frozen sweets

A23G 9/24

Appliances specially adapted for applying liquid cosmetic or toilet substances, e.g. using roller or ball

A45D 34/04

Hand implements for shoe-cleaning with applicators for shoe polish

A47L 23/05

Inking arrangements or devices for printing machines or presses

B41F 31/00

Ball-point pens

B43K 7/00

Hand or desk devices of the office or personal type for applying liquid, other than ink, by contact to surfaces, e.g. for applying adhesive

B43M 11/00

Accessories or implements for use in connection with painting or artistic drawing

B44D 3/00-B44D 3/38

Pliable tubular containers adapted to be permanently deformed to expel contents for applying contents to surfaces

B65D 35/36

Container closures with pads or like contents-applying means

B65D 47/42

Hot-dipping or immersion apparatus for applying the coating metal in the molten state without affecting the shape

C23C 2/00

Liquid processing apparatus for processing exposed photographic materials

G03D 3/00, G03D 5/00

Apparatus for coating photoresists in photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces

G03F 7/16

Apparatus for coating conductors or cables with impervious material

H01B 13/32

Apparatus for applying conductive material to the surface of the insulating support in the manufacture of printed circuits

H05K 3/02, H05K 3/10

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Containers of accessories specially adapted for handling liquid toilet or cosmetic substances, e.g. perfumes

A45D 34/00

Casings or accessories specially adapted for storing or handling solid or pasty toilet or cosmetic substances, e.g. shaving soap, lipstick or make-up

A45D 40/00

Domestic cleaning

A47L

Amalgam presses or mixers for filling or capping teeth

A61C 5/06

Forming layered products

B32B

Implements or apparatus for removing dry paint from surfaces

B44D 3/16

Conveying workpieces through baths of liquid

B65G 49/02

Paints, varnishes or lacquers

C09D

Laundering

D06F

Repairing buildings, e.g. filling cracks

E04G 23/02

Drying ovens

F26B

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Coating

The applied material. A coating may be a solidified layer originally applied as a liquid (e.g. dried paint) or a layer of material which, once applied, remains in a liquid or semi-liquid state (e.g. lubricant).

Fluidised-bed technique

A technique used to cause dry particulate material to behave like a fluid. This is commonly achieved by the introduction of a pressurised fluid into the material and promotes a high degree of contact between the fluid and material.

Liquid or fluent

designates materials which can flow, e.g. liquids, including solutions, dispersions and suspensions, as well as semi-liquids, pastes, melts and particulate materials.

Particulate materials

Solid materials in the form of very small pieces, e.g. powders, granules, short fibres or chips.

B05C 3/15 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Web or filament feeding arrangements

B65H

B05C 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Spraying or electrostatic spraying

B05B

B05C 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Spray booths

B05B 15/12

B05C 11/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Controlling supply of liquid or other fluent material

B05C 11/10

Implements for after- treatment of plaster or the like, e.g. smoothing tools, profile trowels

E04F 21/16

B05C 17/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Absorbent pads, e.g. swabs, for removing media from the human body

A61F 13/15

Devices for applying media, e.g. remedies, on the human body

A61M 35/00

B05C 17/005 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Grease guns

F16N 3/12

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Containers or packages with special means for dispensing fluent material by means of a piston or the like

B65D 83/76

B05C 17/06 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Stencils used in connection with printing plates or foils

B41N 1/24

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Drawing accessories

B43L 13/00

B05C 19/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fluidised-bed technique, in general

B01J 8/24

B05C 19/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Spraying or electrostatic spraying

B05B

B05D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Processes for applying liquids or other fluent materials to a surface or part of a surface, in general, by any mechanical or physical method and particularly processes producing a uniform distribution of liquids or other fluent materials on a surface.

Pretreatment of surfaces to which liquids or other fluent materials are to be applied.

After-treatment of applied coatings.

Processes for applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces to obtain special surface effects, finishes or structures.

Processes specially adapted for applying liquids or other fluent materials to particular surfaces (e.g. to macromolecular substances, to wood, to leather, to metal, to wires, to internal surfaces).

Processes specially adapted for applying particular liquids or other fluent materials (e.g. processes adapted for the application of lacquers or varnishes)

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Subclass B05B relates to spraying, sprinkling and atomising apparatus, including nozzles, for the release or projection of drops or droplets into the atmosphere or into a chamber to form a mist or the like. The material to be sprayed or atomised may be suspended in a stream of gas or vapour. Accordingly, B05B covers spray heads, sprinkling apparatus, electrostatic spraying apparatus, hand-held spraying apparatus, spraying plants (e.g. spray booths), delivery control means associated with such apparatus, and the like. Also covered are means for heating, mixing or pressurising of the materials to be sprayed, sprinkled or atomised. Whilst B05B covers spraying apparatus, the processes for applying liquids and other fluent materials to surfaces by spraying (including electrostatic spraying processes) are covered by groups B05D 1/02-B05D 1/14.

Subclass B05C relates to apparatus for applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces in general. This subject matter generally relates to contact methods e.g. spreading, pouring, dipping, rubbing, using rollers, using fluidised-bed techniques etc. B05C also relates to apparatus for projecting liquids or other fluent materials onto surfaces (B05C 5/00) or to the inside of hollow work (B05C 7/02), and further to apparatus specially adapted for the projection of particulate material onto surfaces (B05C 19/04). ‘Projection’ relates to the application of a continuous stream of liquid or other fluent material to a surface, where the stream is not divided into droplets or a cloud of particulate material as by the apparatuses covered by B05B. Apparatus for application of particulate materials to surfaces using fluidised-bed technique is classified in B05C 19/02, whilst surface dip-coating processes using fluidised beds are covered by B05D 1/22.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Producing layered products by applying coatings of pasty or pulverulent plastics

B29C 41/00, B32B 37/00

Dyeing or printing textiles; Dyeing leather, furs, or solid macromolecular substances in any form

D06P

Insulating electric cables by passing through, or dipping in, a liquid bath

H01B 13/16

Electrolytic coating other than with metals

C25D 9/00

Electrolytic coating by surface reaction

C25D 11/00

Electrophoretic coating

C25D 13/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Domestic cleaning

A47L

Cladding or plating by soldering or welding

B23K

Forming layered products

B32B

Handling webs or filaments in general

B65H

Surface treatment of glass; Surface treatment of fibres or filaments from glass, minerals or slags

C03C

Paints, varnishes, lacquers

C09D

Laundering

D06F

Wall, floor, or like covering materials, e.g. linoleum, oilcloth, artificial leather, roofing felt, consisting of a fibrous web coated with a layer of macromolecular material

D06N

Impregnating or coating of paper

D21H

Drying ovens

F26B

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Coating

The applied material. A coating may be a solidified layer originally applied as a liquid (e.g. dried paint) or a layer of material which, once applied, remains in a liquid or semi-liquid state (e.g. lubricant).

Flocking

The deposition of fibre particles (‘flock’) upon a surface where the particles land non-parallel to the surface. The process may be facilitated by the application of electrostatic charge to the flock to cause its attraction to an adhesive-coated surface (‘electrostatic flocking’). This results in the fibres standing perpendicular to the surface.

Fluidised-bed technique

A technique used to cause dry particulate material to behave like a fluid. This is commonly achieved by the introduction of a pressurised fluid into the material and promotes a high degree of contact between the fluid and material.

Liquid or fluent

designates materials which can flow, e.g. liquids, including solutions, dispersions and suspensions, as well as semi-liquids, pastes, melts and particulate materials.

Particulate materials

Solid materials in the form of very small pieces, e.g. powders, granules, short fibres or chips.

B05D 1/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fluidised-bed technique, in general

B01J 8/24

B05D 1/38 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Intermediate treatment of an applied coating prior to subsequent applications of liquids or other fluent materials

B05D 3/00

B05D 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Successively applying liquids or other fluent materials

B05D 1/36

B05D 5/08 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Rendering particulate materials free-flowing in general, e.g. making them hydrophobic

B01J 2/30

B05D 7/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Chemical treatment or coating of shaped articles made of macromolecular substances

C08J 7/00

B05D 7/12 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Chemical treatment of leather

C14C

B05D 7/14 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Chemical surface treatment of metallic material by reaction of the surface with a reactive liquid, leaving reaction products of surface material in the coating, e.g. conversion coatings, passivation of metals

C23C 22/00

B05D 7/20 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Insulating electric cables by passing through, or dipping in, a liquid bath

H01B 13/16

B07B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus or methods for the separation of solids from solids that include:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In Section B, the separation of different materials, e.g. of different matter, size, or state, is predominantly found in the following subclasses: B01D, B03B, B03C, B03D, B04B, B04C, B07B, B07C.

The classifying characteristics of these subclasses are:

The first of these characteristics involves six different aspects, assembled in three groups:

These subclasses are to be used according to the following general rules:

Sorting peculiar to particular materials or adapted to a specific purpose may be covered in other classes, see for example the non-exhaustive list of places for special adaptions in the following subsection.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Separating isotopes

B01D 59/00

Combinations of dry separating apparatus with wet separating apparatus or pneumatic tables

B03B

Separating solids from solids using pneumatic tables or jigs

B03B 4/00

Hand sorting, postal sorting, sorting by switching or other devices actuated in response to detection or measurement of some feature of articles or samples of material

B07C
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Grading or sorting of eggs

A01K 43/00, A01K 43/04

Machines for sorting heel lifts in shoe-making

A43D 33/06

Sorting arrangements forhandling work specially combined with, or arranged in, or specially adapted for use in connection with, machine tools

B23Q 7/12

Straining or screening of pulp in paper-making

D21D 5/02

Rotary screen-drums used in paper-making

D21D 5/06

Sorting of coins

G07D

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Separation in general; solid/gas separation in general

B01D

Wet separating processes, sorting by processes using fluent material in the same way as liquid

B03

Wet separating using liquids

B03B, B03D

Using wet methods

B03B 7/00

Sorting by magnetic or electrostatic separation of solid materials from solid materials or fluids, separation by high-voltage electric fields

B03C

Centrifuges or vortex apparatus for carrying out physical processes, e.g.

B04

Centrifuges

B04B

Cyclones

B04C

B07B 7/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Centrifuges

B04B

Cyclones

B04C

B07B 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Grading eggs

A01K 43/04

B07C - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tube mail systems

B65G 51/04

Sorting information records, e.g. punched cards

G06F 7/10

B21B - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Processes for changing of physical properties of metals

C21D, C22F

B21B 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Control of tube rolling

B21B 37/78

B21B 19/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Control of tube rolling

B21B 37/78

B21B 21/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Control of tube rolling

B21B 37/78

B21B 23/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Control of tube rolling

B21B 37/78

B21B 25/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Control of tube rolling

B21B 37/78

B21C - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Processes for changing of physical properties of metals

C21D, C22F

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Continuous casting

B22D 11/00

Soldering, welding, flame-cutting

B23K

Pressure welding by means of a rolling mill

B23K 20/04

B21D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Processes and apparatus for the mechanical working of sheet metal or metal tubes, rods or profiles without essentially removing material. Typical metal profiles are structural steel shapes like I-beams.

Processes and apparatus for punching, i.e. press-cutting, sheet metal or other metal stock material, as a particular mechanical working which removes material.

It further covers the following parts and devices related to those apparatus:

The mechanical working covers treatments characterised by their function, comprising methods for

The processing of sheet metal or metal tubes, rods or profiles covers the application of those mechanical metal-working treatments or methods for the following particular purposes

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Input products

B21B covers rolling of metal. B21C covers the manufacture of metal sheets, rods, tubes, profiles or like semi-manufactured products otherwise than by rolling. Operations of the kind involved in the manufacture of metal sheets or metal tubes, rods or profiles are therefore covered by subclasses B21B and B21C. However, the semi-finished products manufactured by the operations of B21B (e.g. sheet metal coils, tubes, profiles) or B21C (e.g. tubes, concrete rods, profiles) may be input products for the metal-working and processing covered by B21D.

The mechanical working of wire, which is a further semi-finished product manufactured by the operations of B21C, is covered by the specific subclass B21F.

The mechanical working of metal foils in a manner analogous to the working of paper is covered by B31F, except for the perforating, cutting, or otherwise severing, of metal foils, which is covered by B26D and B26F. Other special measures in connection with working metal foils, e.g. for adapting apparatus of B21D therefore, are covered by main group B21D 33/00.

Presses

Presses in general, e.g. characterised by their pressing member or the drive there for, and details thereof, or accessories there for (e.g. the construction of the frame or control arrangements) are covered by B30B. The special adaptation of presses for the purposes of stamping, deep-drawing or punching sheet metal or metal tubes, rods or profiles is covered by B21D, especially by main group B21D 24/00 for special deep-drawing arrangements in, or in connection with, presses.

Manufacturing particular articles

The manufacture of some articles made from input material for the mechanical working of B21D is covered by places in other subclasses.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Working or processing of wire, e.g. for making wire fabrics

B21F
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pressing or stamping ornamental design on surfaces

B44C 1/24

Stamping or bending processes for producing ornamental structures

B44C 3/08

Making nails, pins or the like by cutting from strips or sheet material

B21G 3/26

Making chains or chain parts

B21L

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Rolling of metal in general

B21B

Manufacture of metal sheets, rods, tubes, profiles or like semi-manufactured products otherwise than by rolling; Auxiliary operations used in connection with metal-working operations without essentially removing material

B21C

Forging; Hammering; Pressing; Riveting

B21J

Working metal by removing material there from

B23

Shearing or similar cutting of metal, e.g. tubes or profiles

B23D

Features of cutting or severing devices or machines in general

B26

Presses in general, e.g. safety devices there for

B30B

Safety devices in general

F16P

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

profiles

constructional elements in form of metal bars with a particular cross section different from those of tubes or rods, e.g. a load supporting I-beam

B21D 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Working sheet metal of limited length by stretching

B21D 25/00

Working sheet metal localised hammering

B21D 31/06

B21D 3/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Bending, e.g. for straightening rails or rail joints

E01B 31/08

Reconditioning of well casings, e.g. straightening

E21B 29/10

B21D 3/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Straightening or restoring form by twisting only

B21D 11/14

B21D 5/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Corrugating sheet metal

B21D 13/00

Bending sheet metal along straight lines as edge treatment

B21D 19/00

B21D 9/15 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Filling of tubes with such material

B21D 9/16

B21D 11/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Corrugating or bending into wave form

B21D 13/00, B21D 15/00

Flanging

B21D 19/00

B21D 11/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Working sheet metal of limited length by stretching

B21D 25/00

B21D 11/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Making helically seamed tubing

B21C 37/12

B21D 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Corrugating tubes

B21D 15/00

B21D 15/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Wrinkle-bending using mandrels or the like

B21D 9/14

B21D 17/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Grooving or notching of bolts, studs, or the like

B21K 1/54

B21D 19/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Connecting by making use of folds

B21D 39/02

Flaring out tube ends

B21D 41/02

B21D 19/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Edge-curling

B21D 19/12

B21D 22/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Shaping over a die without external former

B21D 11/02

B21D 26/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Stamping using resilient pads

B21D 22/10

B21D 26/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices and methods for deforming sheet metal blanks in the form of sheets or thin plates, tubes with or without bottom, or profiles, by applying fluid pressure.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Making other parts for vehicles, e.g. cowlings, mudguards

B21D 53/88

Special rules of classification

Multi-aspect classification is applied to technical subjects under this subgroup with respect to the features of the deformation process or device according to subgroups B21D 26/021-B21D 26/051 and with respect to the particular material features of the bodies to be deformed according to subgroups B21D 26/053-B21D 26/059.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Fluid

Comprises gas, liquids, fluent particulate materials (e.g. sand) and materials which easily show plastic flow (e.g. soft metals such as lead).

B21D 26/021 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices and methods for deforming sheet metal in the form of flat sheets or thin plates, whether layered or not, by applying fluid pressure.

Special rules of classification

When the invention is characterized by the shape of the bodies to be deformed in combination with a particular material feature of the bodies to be deformed, the invention shall also be classified in B21D 26/053 and subgroups thereof.

B21D 26/023 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices and methods for deforming sheet bodies by fluid pressure and performing a piercing, perforating, caulking, marking or other additional treatment by applying fluid pressure to the bodies being deformed.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Shaping by press-cutting

B21D 28/00

Perforating by punching

B21D 28/24

Stabbing or piercing

B21D 31/02

Combined processes according to methods covered by groups B21D 1/00-B21D 31/00

B21D 35/00

Application of shaping procedures without cutting in order to connect objects or parts, e.g. coating with sheet metal otherwise than by plating

B21D 39/00

Uniting components by forging or pressing to form integral members

B21K 25/00

Press-fitting, force-fitting, or shrinking in general

B23P 11/00

B21D 26/025 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Those control means that are characterized by the control of clamping the mould and opening the mould, e.g. control of the pressure to be applied on the moulds when clamping or opening moulds.

B21D 26/027 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Those control means for controlling supply pressure, temperature or other variables of the fluid at the time of supply. Means for merely controlling pumps are not included.

B21D 26/029 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Those means and details that are relevant for the sealed or airtight closing of the mould.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sealings

F16J 15/00

B21D 26/031 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Constructional features or details of the mould, e.g. a mould of which some portion is movable, which are not covered by other subgroups of B21D 26/021.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Means for controlling the clamping or opening of the moulds

B21D 26/025

Means for controlling fluid parameters, e.g. pressure or temperature

B21D 26/027

Closing or sealing means

B21D 26/029

B21D 26/033 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices and methods for deforming sheet metal in the form of metal tubes, e.g. cylinders, with or without bottom, by applying fluid pressure.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Corrugating tubes by applying fluid pressure

B21D 15/03, B21D 15/10

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tube expanders

B21D 39/08

Special rules of classification

When the invention is characterized by the shape of the bodies to be deformed in combination with a particular material feature of the bodies to be deformed, the invention shall also be classified in B21D 26/053 and subgroups thereof.

B21D 26/035 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices and methods for deforming tubular bodies by fluid pressure and performing a piercing, perforating, caulking, marking or other additional treatment by applying fluid pressure on the bodies being deformed.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Shaping by press-cutting

B21D 28/00

Perforating by punching

B21D 28/24

Stabbing or piercing

B21D 31/02

Combined processes according to methods covered by groups B21D 1/00-B21D 31/00

B21D 35/00

Application of shaping procedures without cutting in order to connect objects or parts, e.g. coating with sheet metal otherwise than by plating

B21D 39/00

Uniting components by forging or pressing to form integral members

B21K 25/00

Press-fitting, force-fitting, or shrinking in general

B23P 11/00

B21D 26/037 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices and methods for deforming metal tubular bodies by applying fluid pressure specially adapted to obtain branched tubes.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Making branched tube fittings, e.g. T-pieces for connecting pipes

B21C 37/29

B21D 26/039 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Those control means that are characterized by the control of clamping the mould and opening the mould, e.g. control of the pressure to be applied on the moulds when clamping or opening moulds.

B21D 26/041 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Those control means for controlling supply pressure, temperature or other variables of the fluid at the time of supply. Means for merely controlling pumps are not included.

B21D 26/043 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Those control means that are characterized by the control of the axial movement (speed, timing, steps) of, the counter-pressure applied to, or other variables of the axial pusher during the deformation process.

B21D 26/045 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Those details that are relevant for the sealed or airtight closing of the mould.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sealings

F16J 15/00

B21D 26/047 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Constructional features or details of the mould, e.g. a mould of which some portion is movable, which are not covered by other subgroups of B21D 26/033.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Forming branched tubes

B21D 26/037

Means for controlling the clamping or opening of the moulds

B21D 26/039

Means for controlling fluid parameters, e.g. pressure or temperature

B21D 26/041

Means for controlling the axial pusher

B21D 26/043

Closing or sealing means

B21D 26/045

B21D 26/049 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices and methods for deforming metal tubular bodies having a bottom, i.e. a closed end, by applying fluid pressure.

Special rules of classification

When the invention is characterized by the shape of the bodies to be deformed in combination with a particular material feature of the bodies to be deformed, the invention shall also be classified in B21D 26/053 and subgroups thereof.

B21D 26/051 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices and methods for deforming metal double-walled tubular bodies by applying fluid pressure.

Special rules of classification

When the invention is characterized by the shape of the bodies to be deformed in combination with a particular material feature of the bodies to be deformed, the invention shall also be classified in B21D 26/053 and subgroups thereof.

B21D 26/053 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices and methods for deforming metal bodies by applying fluid pressure which are characterized by the material, composition or constituents of the bodies to be deformed.

Special rules of classification

When the invention is characterized by the adaptation to deforming metal bodies with a particular material feature in combination with the shape of the bodies to be deformed, the invention shall also be classified in B21D 26/021 or B21D 26/033 and their subgroups.

B21D 26/055 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices and methods adapted for deforming metal bodies comprising a material having super-plastic properties, e.g. a super-plastic alloy, by applying fluid pressure.

B21D 26/057 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices and methods adapted for deforming metal bodies preassembled from different pieces, e.g. pieces of different materials or pieces of different thickness, by applying fluid pressure.

B21D 26/059 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices and methods adapted for deforming layered blanks by applying fluid pressure.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Layered products essentially comprising metal

B32B 15/00

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Layered blank

Blank consisting of several layers of material that becomes characteristic by being layered, e.g. a blank from a sheet metal coated with resins or a laminate of sheet metals with different degrees of hardness.

B21D 28/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Cutting nails or pins from strips or sheet material

B21G 3/26

B21D 31/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Methods and apparatus or machines for working sheet metal, metal tubes, rods or profiles without essentially removing material but otherwise than by straightening, bending, corrugating, flanging, stamping, spinning, deep-drawing, stretching, or shaping by fluid pressure or magnetic forces.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Working of sheet metal, metal tubes, rods or profiles without essentially removing material

B21D 1/00, B21D 26/00

Shaping by press-cutting; Perforating

B21D 28/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Working metal by removing material therefrom

B23

B21D 31/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Dimpling

B21D 22/04

Perforating by punching

B21D 28/24

B21D 31/04 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Enlarging tube ends

B21D 41/02

B21D 31/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Forging hammers

B21J 7/00

B21D 33/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Special measures to adapt sheet metal working methods or apparatus according to subclass B21D for working metal foils, e.g. gold foils.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Manufacture of metal foils from a thick stock

B21C 37/02

Cutting, perforating, punching; cutting-out, stamping-out or severing by means other than cutting metal foils or non-metallic sheet material like paper

B26D, B26F

Mechanical working, or mechanical deformation without removing material, of metal foils in a manner analogous to the working of paper, e.g. embossing or corrugating

B31F 1/00

B21D 39/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Methods or arrangements of apparatus for connecting objects or parts comprising sheet metal, metal tubes, rods or profiles by operations for deforming or punching sheet metal, metal tubes, rods or profiles covered by groups B21D 1/00 - B21D 31/00, e.g. for connecting sheet metal parts by folding them.

Tube expanders.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Joining sub-units or components to body shell or other sub-units or components of motor vehicles or trailers

B62D 65/02

Connecting or fastening roof covering slabs or stiff sheets by permanent deformation of, or by forcing together, the marginal portions of adjacent slabs or sheets, e.g. by folding the edges

E04D 3/367, E04D 3/368

Apparatus for working, e.g. connecting, roof coverings comprising slabs, sheets or flexible material

E04D 15/04

Methods or apparatus for setting of, e.g. expandable, casings, screens or liners in wells

E21B 43/10

Apparatus or processes specially adapted for forming connections of electric conductors by deformation, e.g. crimping tools

H01R 43/04

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Flanging or other edge treatment, e.g. of tubes

B21D 19/00

Welding, e.g plating

B23K, B23K 20/00

Press-fitting, force-fitting, or shrinking in general

B23P 11/02, B23P 19/02

Connecting constructional elements or machine parts by adhesives

F16B 11/00

B21D 43/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Piling or unpiling articles or sheet material in general

B65G, B65H

B21D 47/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Processing sheet metal or metal tubes, or processing metal profiles, according to any of groups B21D 1/00 - B21D 45/00 in the manufacture of finished or semi-finished rigid structural elements or units, e.g. honeycomb structures, beams or pillars.

B21D 49/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Processing sheet metal or metal tubes, or processing metal profiles, according to any of groups B21D 1/00 - B21D 45/00 for sheathing or stiffening objects.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

by winding wire or tape thereon

B65H 54/00, B65H 81/00

specially adapted for manufacturing conductors or cables

H01B 13/26

B21D 51/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Processing sheet metal or metal tubes, or processing metal profiles, according to any of groups B21D 1/00 - B21D 45/00 in the manufacture of finished or semi-finished hollow objects, e.g. characterised by their structure, e.g. shape, or by their use, e.g. vessels, high-pressure containers, cans or tins.

B21D 51/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Making tubes from doubled flat material

B21C 37/14

B21D 51/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Welding or soldering

B23K

Closing containers or receptacles after filling

B65B 7/00

B21D 53/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Processing sheet metal or metal tubes, or processing metal profiles, according to any of groups B21D 1/00 - B21D 45/00 in the manufacture of other particular articles, which are not covered by main groups B21D 47/00 - B21D 51/00. The processing is specially adapted for the manufacture of a particular articles, e.g. heat exchangers, wheels, parts for vehicles or aircrafts.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Making wire fabrics

B21F

B21D 53/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connecting tubes in openings

B21D 39/06

B21D 55/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Safety devices for presses in general

B30B

Safety devices in general

F16P

B21F - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Processes for changing of physical properties of metals

C21D, C22F

B21J - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Working metallic powder

B22F

B21K - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Working metallic powder

B22F

B21L - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Soldering, welding, flame-cutting

B23K

B22D 33/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement of indicating or measuring devices

B22D 2/00

B22D 35/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement of indicating or measuring devices

B22D 2/00

B22D 37/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement of indicating or measuring devices

B22D 2/00

B22D 39/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement of indicating or measuring devices

B22D 2/00

B22D 41/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement of indicating or measuring devices

B22D 2/00

B22D 43/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement of indicating or measuring devices

B22D 2/00

B22D 45/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement of indicating or measuring devices

B22D 2/00

B22F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Special treatment of metallic powder, e.g. thermal, thermo-mechanical or chemical treatments, making agglomerates, mixing with lubricants or binders;

Manufacture of workpieces or articles from metallic powder characterised by the manner of compacting or sintering or by the special shape of the product;

Manufacture of composite layers, workpieces, or articles, comprising metallic powder, by sintering the powder, with or without compacting;

Manufacture of articles from scrap or waste metal particles;

Making metallic powder or suspensions thereof using physical or chemical processes;

Powder metallurgical apparatus or equipment specifically adapted therefor, e.g. furnaces, retorts, sintering apparatus;

Metallic powders, per se., e.g. powder, mixture of powders or a mixture of a powder with a lubricating or binding agent.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

B22F covers the making of metallic powder including a metal powder with specific physical characteristics. Non-metal particles or inorganic compounds coated with metal as well as metal particles coated with non-metals or inorganic compounds are classified in subclass B22F. B22F covers powders containing a substantial proportion of non-metallic material. It means that when the metal is in proportion relevant so that it could not be seen as a impurity in the metallurgic process it must be classified in B22F. When the metal is present only as impurity, or when the subject matter does not refer to the manufacturing process itself but only refers to the use of it (e.g. dental implants using metal powder are classified in A61C 8/00), it is classified in the other places of IPC.

C22B 1/14 covers preliminary treatment of ores or scrap with organic or inorganic binders, e.g., agglomerating; briquetting, granulating; sintering.

C22C 1/05; C22C 1/10; C22C 33/02; C22C 47/14 cover the making of alloys by powder metallurgy using mixtures of metal powder with non-metallic powder, fibres or filaments.

C22F covers changing the physical structure of non-ferrous metals or alloys by heat treatment or by hot or cold working, including special physical methods, e.g. treatment with neutrons.

C04B covers preparing or treating powders of inorganic compounds in preparation to the manufacturing of ceramic products, e.g., C04B 35/622. When the proportion of metal powder is present not like as impurity in the compounds, it is classified at B22F.

C08K covers use of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients, including metals as inorganic ingredient, e.g., C08K 5/56 organic compounds containing a metal-to-carbon bond.  These compounds are not considered metal per se.

B01J 2/00 covers chemical or physical processes or devices for granulating materials in general.

B02C covers crushing, grinding or milling in general.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Non-ferrous alloys compositions made by powder metallurgy

C22C 1/04

Making alloys from mixtures of metal powder with non-metallic powder

C22C 1/05, C22C 1/10

Alloys based on metal compounds

C22C 29/00

Non-ferrous alloys containing other metal compounds

C22C 32/00

Making ferrous alloys by powder metallurgy

C22C 33/02

Making alloys containing metallic or non-metallic fibres or filaments by powder metallurgy

C22C 47/14
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Making ceramics by compacting or sintering

C04B

Shaped ceramic products characterised by their composition

C04B 35/00

Burning or sintering process for ceramic compositions

C04B 35/64

Production or refining of metals; Pretreatment of raw materials

C22B

Sintering; Agglomerating for ores or scrap

C22B 1/16

Electrolytic production, recovery of refining of metal powder or metal masses

C25C 5/00

Magnets made by metals or alloys in the form of particles, e.g. powder, pressed, sintered or bound together

H01F 1/08, H01F 1/22

Cores made from powder

H01F 3/08

Devices using superconductivity or hyperconductivity characterised by the material

H01L 39/12

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Dental implants

A61C 8/00

Prostheses implantable into the body

A61F 2/02

Use of preparations for artificial teeth, for filling or for capping teeth

A61K 6/04

Materials for prostheses or for coating prostheses

A61L 27/04

Chemical or physical processes or devices for granulating materials in general

B01J 2/00

Catalysts comprising metals

B01J 23/00

Methods for preparing or activation of catalysts

B01J 37/00

Crushing, grinding or milling in general

B02C

Disposal of solid waste

B09B

Mechanical metal-working

B21C 23/00

Metal parts in the mould of a casting process

B22D 23/00

Soldering or unsoldering; Welding; Cladding or plating by soldering or welding

B23K

Abrasive tools

B24D

Cutting tools

B26D, B26F

Presses specially adapted for forming articles from material in particulate or plastic state

B30B 11/00

Layered products characterised by features of a layer formed of particles, e.g. chips, chopped fibres, powder

B32B 5/16

Printing

B41J, B41M

Chemical aspects of powdering or granulating of macromolecular substances

C08J 3/12

Metallic pigments or fillers

C09C 1/62

Compressing powdered coating material, e.g. by milling

C23C 24/06

Drilling tools

E21B 10/00, E21B 11/00, E21B 12/00

Parts of bearings; Use of special materials or surface treatments, e.g. for rust-proofing

F16C 33/12

Conductive material dispersed in non-conductive organic material

H01B 1/22

Magnets or magnetic bodies characterised by the magnetic materials therefore; Selection of materials for their magnetic properties in the form of particles, e.g. powder

H01F 1/20

Selection of the material for the legs of the junction comprising metals only

H01L 35/20

Elements or alloys used in electrodes

H01M 4/38

Printed circuits

H05K

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Compacting

join or press firmly together.

Metallic powder

covers powders which in addition to metals may contain a substantial proportion of non-metallic material.

Powder

may include somewhat larger particles which are worked, obtained or behave in a manner similar to powder, e.g. fibres.

Sintering

coalesce or cause to coalesce from powder into solid by heating.

Alloy

a composition of plural elements at least one of which is a free metal. Also includes material containing any combination of fibres, filaments, whiskers and particles, e.g. carbides, diamond, oxides, borides, nitrides or sulfides, embedded in a metallic matrix..

Furnace

covers kilns, ovens or retorts

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following words "apparatus", "equipment" and "device" are often used as synonyms.

In the case of areas related to recycling the following keywords "residue", "waste", "remains", "scrap", "rejects" and "shred" would be useful to a searcher.

In patent documents the following keywords "compacting" and "compressing" would be useful to a searcher.

B22F 1/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Electrolytic production, recovery or refining of metal powders

C25C 5/00

B22F 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mechanical metal-working without essentially removing material; Punching metal

B21D

Forging; Hammering; Pressing; Forge Furnaces

B21J

Making forged or pressed products

B21K

Furnaces, Kilns, Ovens, or retorts in general; Open sintering or like apparatus

F27B

B22F 3/105 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Manufacture of workpieces or articles from metallic powder characterised by the manner of sintering; Apparatus specially adapted therefor

B22F 3/11

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric heating

H05B

Dental prostheses

A61C 13/00

Producing shape articles from the material

B28B 1/00

Shaping or joining plastics or substances in plastic state

B29C 67/00

B22F 7/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Layered products characterised by the relation between layers

B32B 7/00

B22F 9/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes or devices for granulating materials, in general

B01J 2/00

Metallic powder obtained by crushing, pulverising, disintegrating in general; milling grain

B02C

B22F 9/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Controlled atmosphere, or pulverulent material; Adjusting the composition of the atmosphere

C21D 1/76

B23B - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For surgical purposes

A61B 17/16

Earth or rock drilling

E21B

B23D - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Surgical saws

A61B 17/14

Sawing wood or similar material

B27B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Punching, perforating, making articles by processing sheet metal, tubes or profiles

B21D

Grinding

B24

B23D 67/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Sharpening saw teeth thereby

B23D 63/10

B23D 69/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Sharpening saw teeth thereby

B23D 63/10

B23D 71/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Sharpening saw teeth thereby

B23D 63/10

B23D 73/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Sharpening saw teeth thereby

B23D 63/10

B23K - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Essentially requiring the use of welding machines or welding equipment, see the relevant groups for the welding machines or welding equipment

B23P - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Punching, perforating, making articles by processing sheet metal, tubes, or profiles

B21D

Grinding

B24

B24B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Grinding or polishing processes not particular to specific machines, devices or work, including the use of auxiliary equipment in connection with such processes, e.g. of grinding with ultrasonic frequency;

Machines, devices or processes for sharpening cutting edges, or accessories therefor, adapted e.g. to the cutting edges of milling cutters, turning or planing tools, drills or cutting blades;

Machines, devices or processes for grinding, or accessories therefor,

whereby in connection with glass the terms "grinding" and "polishing" are treated as being equivalent.

Machines, devices or processes for polishing or finishing surfaces, or accessories therefor, according to the kind of operation performed, which are

Component parts, accessories, or auxiliary devices, of general applicability for grinding, polishing or finishing machines or devices, comprising

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Abrasive machining

Subclass B24C complements the abrasive grinding and polishing operations covered by B24B by abrasive blasting with particulate material, whereby blasting is defined as using a blast of any particles or pellets dispersed in air, gas or liquid, or an equivalent jet of material projected or energised by other means, for the treatment of surfaces or cutting of materials, the particles usually being of abrasive material.

When abrading internal surfaces, e.g. of a tube, by operations known in the art as abrasive flow machining, extrude honing or hydro-erosive grinding, the operations is considered as abrading surfaces either by a blast or jet of abrasive particles through the tube (B24C 3/32) or by means of a plastically deformable grinding compound under the influence of pressure (B24B 31/116), when the viscosity of carrier medium is higher than water.

Subclass B24D covers the grinding, polishing and sharpening tools used with the machines and devices covered by subclass B24B. The tools specially designed for the particular grinding or polishing operations of tumbling (B24B 31/14), honing (B24B 33/08) or lapping (B24B 37/11) are however covered by B24B. B42B further provides places for the tools specially adapted for grinding or polishing optical surfaces on lenses (B24B 13/01) as a particular kind of work. Devices or means for securing grinding or polishing wheels on rotary arbors of the machines or for dressing or conditioning abrasive surfaces of the tools are as well covered by B24B.

Machining metal by electro-erosion for surface improvement or improvement of the dimensional accuracy is covered by subclass B23H, including electrical discharge or electrochemical machining combined with mechanical working, e.g. grinding or honing (B23H 5/00). Electrolytic etching or polishing for the same purposes is covered by main group C25F 3/00, covering the working of metallic and non-metallic materials, especially the electrolytic polishing of semiconductor materials (C25F 3/30).

Abrasive materials and polishing compositions

Abrasive particles, powders or compositions per se are covered by group C09K 3/14, which may be used in abrasive tools or in suspensions or pastes for polishing. Polishing compositions, suitable for the operations covered by B24B 29/00, are covered by main group C09G 1/00. When they contain abrasives or grinding agents (C09G 1/02) they are as well suitable for lapping (B24B 37/00).

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Abrasive or related blasting with particulate material

B24C

Working metal by electro-erosion, e.g. electrolytic grinding

B23H, B23H 5/08

Electrolytic etching or polishing

C25F 3/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Grinding of gear teeth

B23F

Grinding of screw threads

B23G 1/36, B23G 1/42

Grinding arrangements for use on assembled railway tracks

E01B 31/17
Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

none

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tools for grinding, buffing or sharpening

B24D

Polishing compositions containing abrasives or grinding agents

C09G 1/02

Abrasives

C09K 3/14

Details, components, or accessories for machine tools, in general

B23Q 1/00, B23Q 35/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Grinding

Grinding means machining by fixed abrasive particles in its most general sense and covers "corrective" operations, such as correction of dimension, e.g. diameter, or shape, e.g. roundness. It is characterised by a comparatively high material removal rate.

Polishing

Polishing means abrading a work so as to improve, e.g. smoothen, its surface, without substantial change of dimension or shape of the work as would occur in grinding.

Abrading

Abrading is used in its most general sense to mean mechanically removing material by a multitude of fixed or loose particles that are forced into the surface of the work so that each particle cuts away small chips of material

Honing

Honing means abrading by means of one or more, often compliant, fine grit abrasive blocks or stones along a controlled path of combined movements, including a reciprocating movement, in order to smoothen a surface or to produce a defined surface texture such as a cross-hatch pattern.

Superfinishing

Superfinishing means abrading by means of one or more fine grit abrading blocks or an abrasive band pressed by a shoe (bandfinishing) along a controlled path of combined movements. Typically, the block or shoe is oscillated with a short stroke and relatively high frequency while the work is rotated, in order to improve surface finish or produce a defined surface texture such as a cross-hatch pattern. Superfinishing is also referred to as microfinishing, or short-stroke honing, in the art.

Lapping

Lapping is surface finishing by rubbing the surface of the work and the surface of a lapping tool, e.g. a lapping plate or lapping pad, that is mostly shaped corresponding to the work surface, against each other, mainly with loose abrasives rolling and sliding between the surfaces; the abrasives may be dispersed in a liquid medium, i.e. a slurry, or in a paste, or fixed to the lapping pad

Burnishing

Burnishing means plastically deforming a work on a small scale by means of rubbing or rolling a tool, e.g. a roller or ball, on the work. It is not an abrading operation but used as an alternative to abrasive finishing operations in order to improve the surface finish or surface hardness of the work.

Conditioning

Conditioning is used in its most general sense to mean

truing by removing material from the abrasive tool to maintain tool geometry, e.g. concentricity, or to (re-) profile a form into the abrasive surface,

sharpening by removing small amounts of binding material from the abrasive surface to expose abrasive grains or by breaking abrasive grains to produce sharper cutting edges on the grain,

cleaning the surface of an abrasive tool or a lapping pad in order to remove debris from the space between the grains or pores of the pad.

Dressing

Dressing is used as a synonym for conditioning

Synonyms and Keywords

It is noted that the above terms overlap in material removal rate and surface roughness such that a clear distinction by these parameters is not possible.

In groups B24B 1/00 - B24B 27/00, in connection with glass the terms "grinding" and "polishing" are treated as being equivalent.

B24B 3/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Sharpening of saw teeth

B23D 63/12

Sharpening of files or rasps

B23D 73/00

B24B 5/18 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Centreless grinding of threads

B23G 1/42

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Centreless turning

B23B 5/08

B24B 5/50 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cutting profiles into the treads of tyres

B29D 30/68

B24B 7/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Involving a reciprocatingly-moved grinding wheel in combination with a stationary work-table

B24B 7/07

B24B 7/10 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Grinding tools or machines specially adapted for use on assembled railway track

E01B 31/17

B24B 7/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Portable grinding machines designed for fastening on workpieces

B24B 23/08

B24B 7/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For grinding edges or bevels on work

B24B 9/00

B24B 7/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Machines or devices for cleaning floorings

A47L 11/00, A47L 13/00

B24B 11/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Specially designed for optical surfaces

B24B 13/00

For seat surfaces

B24B 15/00

B24B 17/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Machines or devices so-controlled for grinding the edges of lenses

B24B 9/14

For grinding or polishing optical lens surfaces

B24B 13/06

For grinding non-circular cross-sections

B24B 19/08

For grinding trochoidal surfaces

B24B 19/09

For grinding cams

B24B 19/12

For grinding turbine blades or the like

B24B 19/14

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Such control means per se:

Methods for copying

B23Q 33/00

Control systems or devices for copying directly from a pattern or a master model; Devices for use in copying manually

B23Q 35/00

Controlling; Regulating

G05

B24B 19/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tapering, chamfering or relief cutting of taps or reamers

B24B 3/20, B24B 3/22

B24B 19/11 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Grinding end faces

B24B 7/16, B24B 7/17

B24B 19/14 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Using grinding belts

B24B 21/16

B24B 19/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Grinding bevels on diamonds or sapphires

B24B 9/16

B24B 19/18 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Devices for sharpening card-clothings built in, or attachable to, carding machines

D01G

B24B 19/20 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

For grinding walls of very fine holes, e.g. in drawing-dies

B24B 5/48

B24B 19/26 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Grinding of spherical surfaces in general

B24B 11/00

Of optical surfaces on lenses or surfaces of similar shape on other work

B24B 13/00

B24B 19/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Of brake drum hubs

B24B 5/06

Of brake discs

B24B 7/17

B24B 21/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For sharpening cutting edges of tools

B24B 3/00

B24B 21/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Single purpose machines for grinding cams or camshafts

B24B 19/12

B24B 23/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For grinding seat surfaces

B24B 15/00

Grinders for cutting-off

B24B 27/08

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Having a flexible shaft

B24B 27/027

Details or components, e.g. casings, bodies, of portable power-driven tools not particularly related to the operation performed

B25F 5/00

B24B 29/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Machines or devices for grinding or polishing glass

B24B 7/24, B24B 9/08, B24B 13/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Polishing tools in general

B24D 13/00

B24B 31/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Machines or devices for grinding or polishing glass

B24B 7/24, B24B 9/08, B24B 13/00

B24B 31/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

In general

B24B 55/00

B24B 33/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Gauging in general

G01B

Controlling in general

G05

B24B 37/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Lapping machines or devices and accessories for surface finishing by rubbing the surface of the work and the surface of a tool, e.g. a lapping plate or lapping pad, generally shaped corresponding to the work surface, against each other, mainly with loose abrasives rolling or sliding between the surfaces. The abrasives may be dispersed in a liquid medium, i.e. a slurry, or in a paste, or fixed to the lapping pad.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Polishing compositions containing abrasives or grinding agents

C09G 1/02

Anti-slip materials; Abrasives

C09K 3/14

Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of electric solid state devices not otherwise provided for 

H01L 21/00

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Lapping

surface finishing by rubbing the surface of the work and the surface of a lapping tool, e.g. a lapping plate or lapping pad, that is mostly shaped corresponding to the work surface, against each other, mainly with loose abrasives rolling and sliding between the surfaces; the abrasives may be dispersed in a liquid medium, i.e. a slurry, or in a paste, or fixed to the lapping pad.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following expressions/words "lap" and "lapping tool" are often used as synonyms.

B24B 37/005 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems, devices or methods specially adapted for the control or regulation of lapping machines or devices and operations performed by them.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Special adaptations of machines or devices for grinding controlled by patterns, drawings, magnetic tapes or the like

B24B 17/00

Measuring or gauging equipment for controlling the feed movement of the grinding tool or work; Arrangements of indicating or measuring equipment

B24B 49/00

Arrangements for automatic control of a series of individual steps in grinding a workpiece

B24B 51/00

Automatic control or regulation of feed movement or position of tool or work

B23Q 15/00

Control or regulating systems in general; Functional elements of such systems

G05B

Systems for controlling or regulating non-electric variables or for regulating electric or magnetic variables

G05D, G05F

B24B 37/013 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring or gauging equipment for controlling the feed movement of the grinding tool or work according to the instantaneous size and required size of the workpiece acted upon

B24B 49/02

Measuring or gauging equipment for controlling the feed movement of the grinding tool or work involving electrical or optical means, or taking regard of the load

B24B 49/10, B24B 49/12, B24B 49/16

B24B 37/015 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems, devices or methods for cooling, or temperature control of, the work, a component of the lapping machine, the ambient air, or the slurry specially adapted for lapping purposes.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring or gauging equipment for controlling the feed movement of the grinding tool or work taking regard of the temperature during grinding

B24B 49/14

Accessory equipment fitted to grinding or polishing machines for cooling the grinding surfaces, including devices for feeding coolant

B24B 55/02

Methods or arrangements for maintaining a constant temperature in parts of machine tools in general

B23Q 11/14

Arrangements for cooling work, tools or parts of machine tools in general

B23Q 11/10, B23Q 11/12

B24B 37/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices or methods for lapping surfaces or parts of surfaces of revolution, e.g. cylindrical surfaces, on a single work piece or on a plurality of work pieces. Typically, a plurality of work pieces, such as balls or cylinders are lapped by rolling the work pieces held between two lapping plates that are relatively rotating to each other. One lapping plate may be replaced by a holding structure, such as a holding plate or holding rollers.

B24B 37/025 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Machines or devices designed for grinding balls involving grinding wheels acting by the front faces, e.g. of plane, grooved, or beveled shape

B24B 11/06

B24B 37/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Single purpose machines or devices designed for grinding plane surfaces on inorganic material, e.g. stone, ceramics, porcelain

B24B 7/22

apparatus specially adapted for the mechanical treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof to change the physical characteristics of their surfaces, or to change their shape, e.g. grinding or polishing

H01L 21/304

B24B 37/07 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices and methods defined by features that relate to the type of movement in the plane of contact of the work or its carrier and the lapping tool with respect to each other. Typically, the work or carrier can either be driven, e.g. rotatably or in a combined or superposed movement, or can be loosely arranged on the lapping tool without direct drive for movement in a quasi random manner.

B24B 37/12 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Lapping plate

A lapping plate is a rigid, self-supporting structure used as the lapping tool itself or as a support for a lapping pad

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expressions "platen" or " polishing table" are often used instead of "lapping plate" which is used in the classification scheme of this subclass.

B24B 37/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Lapping plates characterised by the shape or geometry of the lapping plate surface contacting the work or lapping pad, e.g. provided with particular holes, grooves or recesses.

B24B 37/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Grinding or buffing wheels having flexibly-acting working parts acting by the front face

B24D 13/14

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Lapping pad

A lapping pad is made of relatively soft material, usually provided on a support structure, i.e. the lapping plate, for holding the loose abrasive temporarily during lapping or having the abrasive incorporated therein (fixed abrasive)

B24B 37/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Lapping pads characterised by being composed of two or more layers, e.g. to obtain an advantage resulting from the association or combination of the layers.

B24B 37/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Lapping pads characterised by the selection of a particular material, based on its composition or properties, e.g. for a particular layer of the lapping pad.

B24B 37/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Lapping pads characterised by the shape or geometry of the lapping pad surface contacting the work, e.g. provided with grooves of particular cross section or location on the pad.

B24B 37/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Work supports, e.g. adjustable steadies, of grinding machines or devices

B24B 41/06

Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components thereof using specially adapted carriers

H01L 21/673

B24B 37/34 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices or means for dressing, cleaning or otherwise conditioning lapping tools

B24B 53/017

Devices for feeding, applying, grading or recovering grinding, polishing or lapping agents

B24B 57/00

Combinations or associations of metal-working machines comprising features relating to transfer of work between machines

B23Q 41/02

Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components thereof for conveying, e.g. between different work stations, for positioning, orientation or alignment, or for supporting or gripping

H01L 21/677, H01L 21/68, H01L 21/683

B24B 39/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Modifying the physical properties or structure of metal by burnishing

C21D 7/08, C22F 1/00

B24B 45/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Suppression of vibrations in systems

F16F 15/00

Testing static or dynamic balancing of machines

G01M 1/00

B24B 49/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Gauging instruments in general

G01B

B24B 53/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Compensation for grinding wheel abrasion resulting from dressing

B24B 47/25

B24B 53/095 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cooling the grinding surfaces

B24B 55/02

B24B 55/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Of general applicability for machine tools

B23Q 11/00

In general

F16P

B24B 55/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cooling or lubricating during dressing operation

B24B 53/095

B25D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Hand tools for carrying out strokes, e.g. hammers or picks.

Hand tools for transmitting strokes, e.g. chisels or punches.

Portable power-driven percussive tools with fluid-pressure drive, electromotor drive or electromagnetic drive, e.g. compressed-air hammers.

Portable percussive tools using centrifugal or rotary impact elements.

Portable percussive machines with superimposed rotation, e.g. drill hammers.

Details of, or accessories for, portable power-driven percussive tools.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass is a function-oriented place for classifying percussive hand tools and portable power-driven percussive tools, the primary function of which is to generate percussive action.

Hand tools and portable power-driven tools with percussive action for supporting another primary function, e.g. cutting or drilling, are classified in the relevant places for the primary function. For example, hand-held cutting tools employing percussive action for cutting, such as axes or hatchets, are classified in B26B 23/00. Impact drilling machines with percussive action for supporting the drilling operation are classified in B23B 45/16.

Hand tools and portable power-driven tools with percussive action which are specially adapted or used for a particular purpose are classified in the relevant application-oriented places. For example, hand tools especially for nailing or stapling are classified in subclass B25C, e.g. nail punches. Pick hammers and chisels especially for mining or quarrying are classified in E21C 37/24 and E21C 37/26. Mortise chisels for wood-working are classified in B27G 17/08.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Non-abrasive sharpening devices for scythes, sickles, or the like with percussive tools

A01D 3/02

Hand-operated implements for threshing

A01F 5/00

Meat pounders

A22C 9/00

Carpet beaters

A47L 13/36

Instruments for medical or veterinary examination by percussion

A61B 9/00

Hand-held nailing or stapling tools

B25C

Combination or multi-purpose hand tools not otherwise provided for

B25F 1/00

Mortise chisels for wood-working

B27G 17/08

Pick hammers for mining or quarrying, specially adapted for dislodging minerals

E21C 37/24

Chisels for mining or quarrying

E21C 37/26

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Golf clubs

A63B 53/00

Bats, rackets, or the like, for other games

A63B 59/00

Disintegrating by mills having rotary beater elements

B02C 13/00

Processes or apparatus for generating mechanical vibrations making use of mechanical energy

B06B 1/10

Deforming sheet metal, tubes or profiles by sequential impacts, e.g. hammering

B21D 31/06

Forging machines with hammers or die jaws acting by impact

B21J 7/00, B21J 11/00

Hand-held drilling machines with superimposed percussive action

B23B 45/16

Treating or finishing surfaces by hammering

B23P 9/04

Impact wrenches or screwdrivers

B25B 19/00

Portable power-driven screw or nut setting or loosening tools with means for imparting impact to screwdriver blade or nut socket

B25B 21/02

Hand tools for fitting together or separating parts employing impacting means

B25B 27/067

Axes or hatches

B26B 23/00

Working stone or stone-like materials by impact tools, e.g. by chisels

B28D 1/26

Knocking devices for preventing bridge formation in large containers

B65D 88/66

Tamping apparatus for consolidating or finishing laid-down unset paving material

E01C 19/30

Tampers for compacting soil

E02D 3/046

Methods or apparatus for placing sheet pile bulkheads, piles, mould-pipes, or other moulds by driving

E02D 7/00

Percussion drilling of earth or rock

E21B 1/00, E21B 4/06, E21B 6/00, E21B 10/36

Fishing for or freeing objects in boreholes or wells using impact means for releasing stuck parts

E21B 31/107

Cutting machines slitting solely by one or more percussive tools moved through the seam in mining or quarrying applications

E21C 25/02

Percussion or firing pins or hammers of firearms

F41A 19/13, F41A 19/14

Batons, truncheons, sticks, shillelaghs

F41B 15/02

Percussive musical instruments

G10D 13/00

Clappers or other strikers for bells

G10K 1/10

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Hand hammer

Hand tool for carrying out a stroke with a striking face which is not intended to penetrate the material or object to be struck.

Pick

Hand tool for carrying out a stroke with a pointed striking tip or edge which is intended to penetrate the material or object to be struck.

B25D 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Combined with other tools

B25F

B25D 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Portable drilling machines driven by fluid pressure or pneumatic power

B23B 45/04

B25D 16/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Portable drilling machines with superimposed percussive action

B23B 45/16

B25D 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Details or components, e.g. casings, bodies, of portable power-driven tools not particularly related to the operation performed

B25F 5/00

B25D 17/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Percussion drill bits for drilling earth or rock

E21B 10/36

B25D 17/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

In general

F16P

B25D 17/11 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Noise damping in general

G10K 11/16

B25D 17/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Flushing boreholes while drilling earth or rock

E21B 21/00

B25D 17/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

In general

F16N

B25F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Combination or multi-purpose hand tools not otherwise provided for, e.g. with interchangeable or adjustable tool elements;

Associations of tools for different working operations with one portable power-drive means and adapters therefor, e.g. a Proxxon®-type rotary power tool with exchangeable tools for boring, milling, grinding, polishing, etc;

Details or components of portable power-driven tools not particularly related to the operations performed and not otherwise provided for, e.g. construction of casings, bodies or handles.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

B25F covers combination or multi-purpose hand tools and combination or multi-purpose portable power-driven tools. When the tools have a clear primary function they are classified in other relevant places of IPC, for instance: subclass B25B covers hand tools having a clear primary function of fastening, connecting, disengaging or holding, e.g. spanners, wrenches or screwdrivers.

Subclass B25F further covers details or components of portable power-driven tools not particularly related to the operations performed and not otherwise provided for. Even if a portable power-driven tool has a clear primary function, its details or components, which are not particularly related to this primary function, are classified in subclass B25F, if not otherwise provided for.

Details or components of hand tools with a clear primary function are classified in the relevant subclass for the hand tool, for instance: subclass B25B covers details of or accessories for spanners, wrenches or screwdrivers; subclass B25G covers handles for hand implements, subclass B25C covers tools for driving both nails or staples.

More specifically, B23B 45/00 and 47/00 cover hand-held or like portable drilling machines and constructional features of components specially designed for boring or drilling machines. B67B 7/44 covers combination tools for opening closed containers, e.g. comprising cork-screws, can pierces, crown-cap removers. B25B 33/00 covers hand tools not covered by any other group in subclass B25B.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Hand-held or like portable drilling machines and constructional features of components specially designed for boring or drilling machines

B23B 45/00

Tools or bench devices not otherwise provided for, for fastening, connecting, disengaging, or holding

B25B

Hand tools not covered by any other group in subclass B25B

B25B 33/00

Hand-held nailing or stapling tools; manually-operated portable stapling tools

B25C

Handles of portable power-driven percussive tools

B25D 17/04

Handles for hand implements, in general

B25G

Hand- or power-operated combination tools for opening closed containers, e.g. comprising cork-screws, can piercers, crown-cap removers

B67B 7/44

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cutting implements specially adapted for horticultural purposes; Delimbing standing trees

A01G 3/00

Multi-purpose kitchen machines for preparing food

A47J 44/00

Power-driven cleaning or polishing devices for dentistry

A61C 17/16

Machines, devices or processes for planing, slotting, shearing, broaching, sawing, filing, scraping

B23D

Portable grinding machines; Accessories therefor

B24B 23/00

Hand-held cutting tools, e.g., hand knives, hand shears, scissors and razors

B26B

Portable hand-operated wood-milling machines; Routers

B27C 5/10

Portable power-driven circular saws for manual operations

B27B 9/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Portable

Capable of being easily carried or conveyed.

Multi-purpose tool

Device having or serving several purposes, which may be either manual or power-driven, eg a tool with interchangeable tool elements.

Combination hand tools

Manually operated object involving two, or possibly more than two (but a confined number of), clearly defined purposes (having two or more tools put together for different purposes), e.g. Gerber® multi-plier tool.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following keywords "power-driven" and "power assisted" would be useful to a searcher.

In patent documents the following terms "hand tool", "hand-held", "hand device", "hand operated" and "hand actuated" are often used as synonyms. Also, these terms can be used as keywords.

In patent documents the following keywords "portable machine" and "portable equipment" would be useful to a searcher.

B25H - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Workshop equipment, used when performing a task, of the following types and adapted for the indicated purposes:

Storage means for workshops adapted for the following purposes useful when performing a task:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

B25H covers workshop equipment, e.g. work benches, portable stands or supports for positioning tools or workpieces, storage means tools, workpieces or instruments and marking-out or setting-out workpiece.

A47B 37/00, A47B 81/00 cover tables, cabinets, racks or shelf units or similar furniture specially adapted for other particular purposes, A47C 9/02 covers workshop stools and A47F 1/00 cover racks or containers for dispensing merchandise. B25B cover tools or bench devices not otherwise provided for, for fastening connecting, disengaging, or holding. B60P 3/14 cover vehicles adapted to transport objects, e.g. workshop for servicing and B63B 35/44 cover floating workshops. B65D cover storing and packing and B65G 1/00, B65G 37/02 covers other storage arrangements and flow sheets for conveyer combinations in warehouses, magazines, or workshops. F16M 11/00, F16M 13/00 cover stands or trestles as supports for apparatus or articles placed thereon. Hoisting or lifting equipment is covered by B66C 23/48; B66F 5/00.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Appliances or methods for marking-out, perforating, or making buttonholes

A41H 25/00

Centre punches

B25D 5/00

Cord lines chalkers

B44D 3/38

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Holders or carriers for hand articles; Fastening articles to the garment

A45F 5/02

Tables, cabinets, racks or shelf units specially adapted for other particular purposes

A47B 37/00, A47B 81/00

Workshop stools

A47C 9/02

Racks for dispensing merchandise

A47F 1/00

Arrangements or auxiliary devices for supporting or guiding torches, electrodes and carriages for supporting the welding or cutting element

B23K 5/24, B23K 7/10, B23K 9/28, B23K 37/02

Working by laser beam, e.g. for marking or protecting purposes

B23K 26/18

Devices holding, supporting or positioning work or tools, e.g. work-table or tool-slide

B23Q 3/00, B23Q 3/02

Protectors for storage tools or cutters when not in operation

B23Q 13/00

Component parts of grinding machines or devices, such as frames, beds, carriages or headstocks; work supports

B24B 23/00, B24B 41/06

Portable devices for holding and guiding nails; Nails dispensers

B25C 3/00

Combination or multi-purpose hand tools, details or components of portable power-driven tools

B25F 1/00, B25F 5/00

Handle constructions with provision for storing tool elements

B25G 1/08

Cutting work characterised by the nature of the cut made, e.g. beveling, grooving, scoring, incising, slitting or splitting

B26D 3/00

Means for holding or positioning work, e.g. clamping

B26D 7/02

Components or accessories for saws, e.g. saw benches, frames, pillars, or beds and work-tables

B27B 5/16, B27B 11/08, B27B 13/04

Log or timber loading equipment for traveling carriages

B27B 31/02

Arrangements for guiding or supporting the tool, e.g. tool rests

B27C 7/06

Accessories for supporting or holding work

B28D 7/04

Straight edges

B43L 7/00

Vehicles adapted to transport objects, e.g. workshop for servicing

B60P 3/14

Separate supports or holders for parking or storing cycles

B62H 3/00

Floating workshops

B63B 35/44

Nestable, stackable or joinable containers; Containers of variable capacity

B65D 21/00

Clamping or other pressure-applying devices for securing or retaining closure members

B65D 45/00

Containers or packages for dispensing, e.g. rod-shaped, annular, disc-shaped, or spherical or like small articles

B65D 83/02, B65D 83/04

Containers or packages specially adapted for dispensing, e.g. welding electrodes, ball bearings, washers, machines or engines

B65D 85/26, B65D 85/58, B65D 85/68

Storing articles, individually or in orderly arrangement, in warehouses or magazines or workshops

B65G 1/00

Storage devices mechanical with relatively-movable racks to facilitate insertion or removal of articles

B65G 1/10

Flow sheets for conveyer combinations in warehouses, magazines, or workshops

B65G 37/02

Manually-movable jib cranes for use in workshops

B66C 23/48

Mobile jacks of the garage type mounted on wheels or rollers

B66F 5/00

Ladders mounted on vehicles

E06C 5/00

Stands or trestles as supports for apparatus or articles placed thereon

F16M 11/00, F16M 13/00

Instruments characterised by the use of mechanical measuring means, e.g. rulers or tapes, compasses, micrometers and gauges

G01B 3/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Tool

means a hand-held, manually operated unit or a portable power-driven unit

Workshop

A room or small building where portabletools and machines are operated by one or more workers for manufacturing or repairing manufactured goods or vehicles.

Vehicles

All varieties of apparatus (e.g. automobiles) intended to carry people or goods significant distances (e.g. inside a room, between cities, to or from separate building complexes) across land, over water, or through the air except those restricted to one of the following types: rail vehicles, waterborne vessels, aircraft, space vehicles, hand carts, cycles, animal-drawn vehicles, or sledges.

Portable

Capable of being easily carried or conveyed.

B25H 1/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Work benches of trestle type; Portable stands or supports of trestle type for positioning portabletools or work to be operated on thereby.

B25H0001060000

B25H 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Containers or packages with special means for dispensing contents

B65D 83/00

B25H 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Means for holding wheels or parts thereof

B60B 30/00

B25H 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring, gauging

G01

Optical apparatus

G02B

By photographic means

G03C

B25H 7/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices, e.g. scribers, for marking-out work.

B25H0007040000

B26B - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For horticultural purposes

A01G

Bone shears

A22C 17/06

Metal shears

B23D

B26D - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Plant

Any of a kingdom (Plantae) of multicellular eukaryotic mostly photosynthetic organisms typically lacking locomotive movement or obvious nervous or sensory organs and possessing cellulose cell walls.

B27J 7/00 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Plant

Any of a kingdom (Plantae) of multicellular eukaryotic mostly photosynthetic organisms typically lacking locomotive movement or obvious nervous or sensory organs and possessing cellulose cell walls.

B27K - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods and apparatus for the following treatments of wood:

Other methods and apparatus for treating of wood with permeant liquids, unless provided for in other subclasses.

Methods and apparatus for bleaching or impregnatingwood in combination with drying.

Methods and apparatus for chemical or physical treatment of cork.

Methods and apparatus for chemical or physical treatment of cane, reed, straw, bamboo or similar fibrous material of plant origin.

Selection of chemical substances for the treatments covered by this subclass, unless provided for in other subclasses.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass covers the selection of chemical substances, i.e. the use thereof, for the treatments covered by the subclass. The structure or composition of the chemical substances selected is covered by pure chemistry classes C01, C07 or C08. Special activities or special properties of the chemical substances selected are covered in places for these activities or properties, for example in A01N (biocides), A62D 1/00 (fire extinguishing compositions), C09B (dyes), C09D (stains) or C09K (anti-oxidant compositions or fireproofing materials).

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Bending of wood

B27H

Impregnation of stoppers for bottles, jars, or similar containers

B67B 1/03

Impregnation of matches

C06F 1/06, C06F 3/04
Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Manufacture or after-treatment of articles made by dry processes from particles or fibres consisting of wood or other lignocellulosic or like organic material

B27N

Debarking wood by chemical treatment

B27L 3/00

Impregnating fibreboard manufactured by wet processes

D21J 1/08

After-treatment, e.g. hardening, of fibreboard manufactured by wet processes

D21J 1/10

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Biocides, Pest repellants

A01N

Fire-extinguishing compositions

A62D 1/00

Apparatus for applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces in general

B05C

Processes for applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces in general

B05D

Processes, other than flocking, specially adapted for applying liquids or other fluent materials to wood

B05D 7/06

Mechanical working of veneer or plywood

B27D

Applying adhesives or glue to surfaces of wood to be joined

B27G 11/00

Mechanical working of cane or the like

B27J 1/00

Mechanical working of cork

B27J 5/00

Mechanical working of tree or plant material not otherwise provided for

B27J 7/00

Burning or charring of wood

B27M 1/06

Manufacture or reconditioning of specific semi-finished or finished articles of wood

B27M 3/00

Artistic painting or surface treatment

B44D

Organic dyes; Mordants; Lakes

C09B

Coating compositions, e.g. paints

C09D

Woodstains

C09D 15/00

Water repellent coating compositions based on oils, fats or waxes

C09D 191/00

Drying-oils

C09F 5/00, C09F 7/00

Siccatives, i.e. compounds to be used as driers

C09F 9/00

Anti-oxidant compositions; Compositions inhibiting chemical change

C09K 15/00

Fireproofing materials

C09K 21/00

Impregnating materials for pulp

D21H 17/00, D21H 21/00

Protection of building elements, e.g. against pests or fire

E04B 1/62

Drying solid material in general

F26B

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Wood

Natural whole wood, or wood-based products other than those made from fibres, for example plywood or laminated veneer lumber.

Impregnating

Incorporating a substance into the pores of a material by absorption, adsorption or penetration, for example by soaking the material in the substance or by treating the material with the substance under pressure. Impregnating can for example be done in order to protect a material against destructive outside influences, such as fungal decay, pests or water.

Staining

Treating a surface with a paint that is formulated to transport the pigment into the pores of the surface, rather than creating a film on top of the surface.

Dyeing

Treating a material with a soluble colouring substance that has an affinity to the material to which it is applied (as opposed to colouring with a pigment, which is usually insoluble).

Dampening

Treating wood, for example with steam, in order to increase its water content.

Synonyms and Keywords

LVL

Laminated veneer lumber

PSL

Parallel strand lumber

LSL

Laminated strand lumber

OSB

Oriented strand board

B27K 5/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bleaching wood pulp

D21C 9/10

B28C - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Mixers in general

B01F

Concrete paving mixers combined with distributing devices

E01C 19/00

Machines for preparing mixtures of road-metal with bitumen

E01C 19/10

B29C - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Processing doughs

A21C

Working chocolate

A23G

Working cement, clay

B28

Working glass

C03B

Candle making

C11C 5/02

Making soap

C11D 13/00

Manufacture of artificial filaments, threads, fibres, bristles or ribbons

D01D, D01F

Manufacture of articles from cellulosic fibrous suspensions or from papier-mâche

D21J

B29D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Processes and apparatus which are characteristic for the production of particular articles from plastics or from substances in a plastic state. The particular articles can be defined:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

As it is for the whole B29 class, this subclass does not cover the working of plastics sheet material in a manner analogous to the working of paper, which is covered by class B31.

B29D covers the production of plastic or plastic-like articles. This subclass is often connected with the following areas:

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Making granules

B29B 9/00

Making performs

B29B 11/00

Manufacture of layers comprising fibrous parallel reinforcements of substantial or continuous length

B29C 70/20

Connection of valves to inflatable elastic bodies

B60C 29/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Collars made of plastic

A41B 3/16

Seats or covers made of plastic materials for all kinds of closets

A47K 13/02

Manufacture of rings from wire

B21F 37/00

Machines, devices or processes for grinding or polishing of optical elements

B24B

Conditioning or physical treatment of the material to be shaped

B29B 13/00

Pretreatment of the material to be shaped, e.g. of reinforcements, fillers or inserts

B29B 15/00

Heating or curing, e.g. crosslinking, for shaping plastics; Apparatus therefor, e.g. for vulcanising

B29C 35/02

Methods or apparatus for making layered products; Treatment of the layers or of the layered products

B32B 37/00, B32B 41/00

Means for holding wheels or parts thereof for mounting, holding or assembling wheels

B60B 30/00

Construction of tires or parts thereof

B60C

Sealings formed by liquid or plastic material

B65D 53/00

Woven fabrics, methods of weaving and looms

D03D

Making nets by knotting of filamentary material, making knotted carpets or tapestries and knotting not otherwise provided for

D04G

Protection helmets of plastics or Plastic head-shields

F41H 1/08

Driving belts made of plastics with reinforcement bonded by the plastic material

F16G 1/16

V-belts made of plastics with reinforcement bonded by the plastic material

F16G 5/14

Testing of tyres of wheeled vehicles

G01M 17/02

Optical elements, systems or apparatus

G02B

Spectacles; sunglasses or goggles insofar as they have the same features as spectacles; contact lenses

G02C

Plastic bearings for clocks or watches

G04B 31/016

Information storage based on relative movement between record carrier and transducer, the transducer directly producing, or being directly actuated by, modulation in the track being recorded

G11B

Special rules of classification

The working of plastics is, as far as possible, classified primarily according to the particular shaping technique used, e.g. in subclass B29C;

Classification according to production of particular articles in subclass B29D is restricted to:

Aspects which are characteristic for the production of a particular article, and not classifiable in subclass B29B or B29C;

combined operations for making the particular article which are not fully classifiable in subclass B29C.

Products per se are not classified in this class. However, if a product is characterised by the way it is produced and not by its structure or composition, the production method should be classified in this class;

In this subclass, it is desirable to add the indexing codes of subclass B29K.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Bearing

Plastic device to allow constrained relative motion between two or more parts, typically rotation or linear movement.

Bush

Thin plastic sleeve or tubular lining serving as a bearing or guide.

Carrier of records

a body, such as a cylinder, disc, card, tape, or wire, capable of permanently holding information, which can be read-off by a sensing element movable relatively to the record carrier.

B29D 35/00 - Definition fr

Special rules of classification

Classification is made in this group if the moulding technique is of interest.

The assembling of individual parts by mechanical joining is classified in subclass A43D, e.g. by gluing shoe parts A43D 25/00.

B32B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Layered products comprising different kinds of material.

Layered products not characterized by the kind of material used.

Products similar to layered products but comprising only material in the form of a sheet or network embedded in a mass of plastics or of physically-similar substances which mass penetrates the said sheet or network and lies on both sides of the latter (e.g. so that the sheet or network reinforces the plastics substance) provided that the embedded sheet or network extends coherently or connectedly over substantially the whole area of the product; thus the embedded sheet or network may be a fabric or a series of rods connected by cross wires.

Methods or apparatus for making layered products; Method or apparatus for treating layers or layered products either preliminary to or subsequent to their manufacture.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

The classification of layered products is provided for in many places, most of which are confined to a particular kind of material. However, in order that this subclass may provide a basis for making a complete search with respect to layered products, any similar layered products that specify relevant useful information are classified in this subclass even though it may also be classified in other classes.

However, this subclass does not cover:

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Etched metallic patterns on the surface of a printed circuit board

H05K 1/00

Special rules of classification

In groups B32B 1/00-B32B 33/00, at each level of indentation, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the first appropriate place.

In groups B32B 9/00-B32B 29/00 a "specific substance" covers specified alternative substances if they are all covered by a single main group.

Layered products are classified in groups B32B 37/00 or B32B 38/00 if not characterized by their structure or composition.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

adhesive

substance applied in any state or in any manner, which is incorporated for the purpose of bonding.

laminating

the combining of a base layer formed from a sheet (e.g., a fabric) or network (e.g., a series of rods connected by cross wires) of material and a mass of plastic, or another physically similar substance, that surrounds or embeds the base layer (i.e., it covers at least the outer surfaces of the opposite elongated sides of the layer) by encasement or penetration of the layer.

partial laminating

laminating wherein one layer does not fully cover a surface of another layer.

layer

sheet or strip or stratum having a small thickness relative to its other dimensions which, together with at least one other layer, exists in a product, whether it pre-existed, e.g. as a separate sheet or strip, or was formed during the production of the layered product. It may or may not be homogeneous or cohesive; it may be an assembly of fibres or pieces of material. It may be discontinuous, e.g. in the form of a grating, honeycomb, or frame. It may or may not be in complete contact with the next layer, e.g. a corrugated layer against a flat layer.

layered product

product composed of layers (continuous, discontinuous, or with gaps) of any form (e.g., honeycomb, corrugated) secured together in any way. Normally of substantially uniform thickness overall (i.e., ignoring local variations such as are produced by a corrugated face layer); may be in the form of an article, e.g., a container. This term is of wider scope than "laminate", covering material with voids between or in any layer.

filamentary layer

a layer of threads or filaments of any substance (e.g. wires) of more or less unlimited length placed in an orderly arrangement and secured together; it may be woven, knitted, braided, or netted, or formed of threads crossed or laid side and bonded together.

fibrous layer

a random assembly of fibres or filaments, usually of limited length, e.g. felt, fleece; the fibres may or may not be interengaged or connected, e.g. by adhesive.

particulate layer

layer that is composed from numerous small separate particles, e.g. chips, finely chopped fibres, powder.

film

formed on a layer by spreading a substance thereon; a film is not considered to constitute a layer itself if it serves only as an adhesive or it purpose is merely to finish the surface of a layer.

B41L - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Reproduction or duplication of pictures or patterns by scanning and converting into electrical signals

H04N

B41M 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Organic dyes or closely-related compounds for producing dyes per se

C09B

B41M 5/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes in which the current is transformed into a heat pattern for obtaining a transfer to a receiving sheet

B41M 5/382

B41M 5/40 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Recording sheets characterised by the coating used to improve ink, dye or pigment receptivity, e.g. for ink-jet or thermal dye transfer recording

B41M 5/50

B42D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Particular final and input products of bookbinding processes, including

Particular final and input products of other processes for associating printed sheets, signatures or webs, e.g. of processes for interposing inserts, including

Printed matter of special format, i.e. selection, arrangement, size or shape of the substrate, or style, i.e. selection or arrangement of indicia, comprising:

Particular devices for use with the above products or printed matter, comprising

Movable-strip writing or reading apparatus.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Bookbinding

Subclass B42C covers the processes and apparatus for various bookbinding steps, especially for collating or gathering and permanently attaching together sheets or signatures and for preparing the edges or backs of leaves or signatures for binding, including the fillings obtained thereby. B42C further covers the processes and apparatus for manufacturing bookbinding cases.

Main group B42B 7/00 covers processes and apparatus for permanently attaching objects, e.g. map sections, to sheets, by which multi-part book pages, forms or cards can be obtained.

The processes and apparatus for permanently attaching together sheets, quires, or signatures, covered by B42B, and for making booklets, pads, or form sets from multiple webs, covered by B42C 3/00, generally provide the pads, blocks or form sets covered by B42D 5/00.

Indexing; Filing appliances

Indexing features of books or other bound products, of sheets, loose leaves or inserts, or of bookmarking or leave turning devices used therewith, are covered by main group B42F 21/00.

The book covers or the hanging or securing devices for books, newspapers, or the like, covered by subclass B42D, are intended for single or combined units of fillings resp. books, newspapers, or the like, while the filing appliances, including suspended filing appliances, of subclass B42F are intended for collections of units whereby each unit is individually insertable and extractable.

Book supports

Furniture for storing, holding, or supporting books, documents, forms, or the like is covered by subclass A47B, or by main group B42F, if specially adapted for card-filing. Book-rests or book-ends are as well covered by A47B and are, as devices for use with books or other printed matter, not covered by subclass B42D.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Indexing means on books; Indexing tabs on sheets

B42F 21/00
Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Reading-desks; Lecterns; Pulpits

A47B 19/00

Reading-racks; Book-rests

A47B 23/00

Holders or supports for guiding copy-books, slates, or the like associated to school desks or tables

A47B 41/06

Cabinets, racks or shelf units, specially adapted for storing books, documents, forms, or the like

A47B 63/00

Book-troughs; Accessories specially adapted for book-storing, e.g. book-ends

A47B 65/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Permanently attaching together sheets, quires or signatures, or permanently attaching objects, e.g. map sections, thereto

B42B

Bookbinding

B42C

Sheets temporarily attached together; Filing appliances; File cards; Indexing means

B42F

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

binding

connecting a filling to a cover to provide a bound product. Usually, the connection is permanent, the filling is a book block consisting of a set of printed sheets, quires, or signatures, which are loose or already permanently attached together, the cover is a bookbinding case comprising a spine and the bound product is a book.

printed matter

articles bearing indicia, which effect intellectual or esthetic impressions, produced by a graphic process. Usually, the articles are sheet materials the indicia are characters, patterns or designs and examples for the graphic processes are printing, marking, duplicating, copying or decalcomania.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expression/word "casing-in" is often used instead of "binding" which is used in the classification scheme of this subclass.

B42D 1/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Books or other bound products

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this main group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Picture books with additional toy effects

A63H 33/38

Educational or demonstration appliances, e.g. textbooks for teaching foreign languages

G09B, G09B 19/08

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Match-books

A24F 27/12

Casing-in

B42C 11/00

Rebinding books

B42C 17/00

Converting filing appliances into permanent binders

B42F 13/42

B42D 3/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

All kinds of book covers: hard or soft covers and particular details thereof, e.g. hinges, locks or closures, or permanent protective liners;

Book covers combined with other articles, e.g. with column markers, line or heading indicators or means for holding books open;

Particular devices for use with book covers, e.g. devices for protecting or reinforcing edges or corners of book covers;

Accessories for book covers or books not otherwise provided for, specially adapted for use therewith or for removable attachment thereto, e.g. protective jackets or protective book cases.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Filing appliances

Filing appliances covered by B42F 7/00 - B42F 15/00 can comprise cover details similar to those of book covers, e.g. for protecting edges or corners. While book covers are intended to be permanently connected with fillings, filing appliances are intended for holding collections of papers, sheets, cards, or units thereof, in a way that each paper, sheet, card, or unit is individually insertable and extractable therefrom. Accordingly, the groups of B42F primarily provide classification places for cover features specially adapted for the filing purpose, e.g. for expansible cover splines, to adapt loose leave binders to an increasing collection, in B42F 13/38 or for covers with clamping backs in B42F 9/00.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Manufacturing bookbinding cases

B42C 7/00

Jacketing books

B42C 15/00

Covers with clamping backs for filing purposes

B42F 9/00

Expansible cover splines of filing appliances with means for engaging perforations or slots

B42F 13/38

Backs or the like for suspended filing appliances

B42F 15/04

B42D 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes for permanently attaching together sheets, e.g. to form pads or blocks

B42B

Making pads or form sets from multiple webs

B42C 3/00

B42D 5/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Book-keeping forms

B42D 12/02

B42D 5/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Special apparatus for printing calendars

B41F 17/04

B42D 9/00 - Definition fr

Relationship between large subject matter areas

A plurality or a set of tab-like page markers intended for being associated with different pages of a book are considered as indexing means covered by B42F 21/00.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this main group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Reading-racks or book-rests characterised by association with leaf turners or other auxiliary devices

A47B 23/06

Devices for holding books open combined with book covers

B42D 3/16

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Selective printing or marking mechanisms, e.g. ink-jet printers, thermal printers, for printing downwardly on flat surfaces, e.g. of books

B41J 3/28

B42D 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Loose leaves modified for temporary attachment

B42F 3/00

B42D 15/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Cards of card games; Special shapes of such cards

A63F 1/02

Book-keeping forms or arrangements

B42D 12/00

Sheets temporarily attached together; Sheet details therefor; Sheets and objects temporarily attached together; Means therefor

B42F 1/00, B42F 5/00

Securities or banknotes characterised by colour effects

B44F 1/12

Maps, plans, charts, diagrams, e.g. route diagrams

G09B 29/00

Cardboard or like show-cards of foldable or flexible material

G09F 1/00

Labels, tag tickets, or similar identification or indication means; Seals; Postage or like stamps

G09F 3/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Permanently attaching objects, e.g. map sections, to sheets

B42B 7/00

B42D 15/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Envelopes

B65D 27/00

B42D 15/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Security printing processes

B41M 3/14

Machines or apparatus for embossing decorations or marks

B44B 5/00

Agents, added to the pulp or applied with paper impregnating or coating material, facilitating proof of genuineness or preventing fraudulent alteration, e.g. for security paper

D21H 21/40

Diffracting gratings

G02B 5/18

Holograms used as optical elements

G02B 5/32

Reading or recognising characters or patterns, e.g. fingerprints

G06K 9/00

Testing specially adapted to determine the identity or genuineness of paper currency or similar valuable papers

G07D 7/00

Record carriers in general

G11B 23/00

B42D 19/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For manifolding by means of pressure-sensitive layers

B41L 5/00

Adapted for, or incorporated in, cash registers

G07G

B44B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Artists’ machines or apparatus equipped with tools or work holders moving, or able to be controlled, three-dimensionally for making single sculptures or models;

Artists’ machines or apparatus equipped with tools or work holders moving or able to be controlled substantially two-dimensionally for carving, engraving, or guilloching shallow ornamenting or markings;

Machines or apparatus for embossing decorations or marks;

Machines, apparatus, or hand tools for branding;

Machines or apparatus for inlaying with ornamental structures;

Artists’ hand tools for sculpturing, kneading, carving, engraving, guilloching, or embossing; accessories therefor.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Attention should be drawn to the fact that class B44 is related to any machine, apparatus, tool or process so far as the matter produces an effect or mark meant to be judged by the eye and so far as such machine, apparatus, tool or process is not provided for elsewhere.

General relationship of B44B with B41.

B41C and B41D cover processes and apparatus for the reproduction of printing surfaces; B41F, B41J, B41K and B41M cover embossing combined with application of ink, type marking presses, selective embossing mechanisms.

General relationship of B44B with B44C, B44D and B44F.

B44C covers processes for producing decorative surface effects or ornamental structures by removing surface material, e.g. by engraving, by pressing or stamping, by pyrography and by uniting ornamental elements to mosaics or mosaic plates in B44C 1/00 and B44C 3/00, and for producing special ornamental bodies in B44C 5/00.

B44D covers artists’ accessories or implements for use in connection with painting or artistic drawing, especially implements or apparatus for removing dry paint from surfaces, e.g. by scraping or burning, and surface treatment to obtain special artistic surface effects or finishes or treatments for preserving paintings. B44F covers special designs or pictures, e.g. designs imitating mosaic patterns.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Working or processing of sheet metal or metal tubes, rods or profiles without essentially removing material;

B21D

Marking or engraving machining specially adapted for treating particular metal objects or for obtaining special effects or results on metal objects by the action of a high concentration of electric current

B23H 9/06

Control systems or devices for copying directly from a pattern or a master model;

B23Q 35/00

Surface shaping of plastics or of substances in a plastic state by mechanical means, e.g. embossing; apparatus therefor

B29C 59/02

Embossing of paper or cardboard without removing material including combined deformation and laminating

B31F 1/07

Processes for the manufacture or reproduction of printing surfaces; engraving

B41C 1/02

Processes for the manufacture or reproduction of printing surfaces by embossing, e.g. with a typewriter

B41C 1/08

Printing machines or presses; apparatus or machines for carrying out printing operations combined with embossing

B41F 19/02

Typewriters; selective printing mechanisms for embossing

B41J 3/38

Stamps; stamping or numbering apparatus or devices with means for offset or intaglio stamping

B41K 1/30

Stamps; stamping or numbering apparatus or devices with means for relief stamping

B41K 3/14

Stamps; stamping or numbering apparatus or devices with means for deforming or punching the copy matter

B41K 3/36

Machines for ornamenting, producing designs, embossing of leather surfaces

C14B 1/56

Mechanical treatment for finishing; producing designs or patterns

C14B 15/12

Hand tools specially adapted for the treatment of hides, skins or leather

C14B 19/00

Photomechanical production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. for printing, for processing of semiconductor devices; apparatus specially adapted therefor; exposure

G03F 7/20

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Working of wood not provided for in subclasses B27B27L by burning or charring, e.g. cutting with hot wire

B27M 1/06

Printing, duplicating, marking, or copying processes; colour printing combined with embossing

B41M 1/24

Decorative arts producing decorative effects; mosaics; tarsia work; paperhanging

B44C

Processes for producing decorative surface effects uniting ornamental elements on a support, e.g. mosaics

B44C 1/28

Processes for producing ornamental structures uniting ornamental elements to structures, e.g. mosaic plates

B44C 3/12

Processes for producing special ornamental bodies

B44C 5/00

Special design imitating mosaic or tarsia-work patterns

B44F 11/04

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Decorative arts

Crafts or arts providing an object with an effect or mark meant to be judged by the eye. Such crafts or arts may comprise, for example, sculpturing, kneading, carving, engraving, guilloching, embossing, branding and inlaying.

Artistic work

Work performed by craftsmen or artists to provide an object with an effect or mark meant to be judged by the eye. Artistic work may comprise techniques such as sculpturing, kneading, carving, engraving, guilloching, embossing, branding and inlaying.

B44F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Special designs or pictures produced by creating an effect or a mark intended to be judged by the eye. Designs are arrangements or patterns of elements or features of an artistic or decorative work, e.g. an ornamental pattern. Pictures are visual representations or images of a subject or scene (e.g. a person, object or landscape) projected, painted, drawn, or otherwise produced upon a surface. The designs or pictures are characterised as special by particular technical features used to create the patterns or images or by characteristic features of patterns or images which provide the special effects. This subclass covers especially:

This subclass also covers processes for creating such designs or pictures in so far as they are not covered by other places. For example, B05D 5/00 already covers processes for applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces to obtain special surface effects, finishes or structures and B44C 1/00 covers processes for producing decorative surface effects which are not specifically provided for elsewhere in the IPC.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

General relationship of B44F with B44B, B44C and B44D.

B44B covers machines, apparatus and tools for artistic work; B44C covers processes for producing decorative effects; B44D covers processes for painting or artistic drawing and shows accessories or implements for use in connection with painting or artistic drawing.

Objects provided with special designs are per se covered by the relevant places for those objects, in particular patterned paper by D21H 27/02 or coated paper providing special visual effects by D21H 19/66. Other typical examples of objects are flooring elements E04F 15/02, wall or ceiling covering elements E04F 13/08, and labels for packages G09F 3/00.

Particular objects providing special or unusual light effects are for example covered by G09F 19/12, for advertising or display means using special optical effects. F21V covers shades, cover glasses or light filters associated with light sources, e.g. light filters for simulating daylight in F21V 9/02, and F21S 10/00 covers lighting devices or systems producing a varying lighting effect.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a large system:

Advertising or display means using special optical effects

G09F 19/12

Coated paper characterised by a special visual effect, e.g. patterned, textured

D21H 19/66

Patterned paper

D21H 27/02
Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Processes for applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces to obtain special surface effects, finishes or structures

B05D 5/00

Processes, not specifically provided for elsewhere, for producing decorative surface effects

B44C 1/00

Surface treatment to obtain special artistic surface effects or finishes

B44D 5/00

Making patterns or design on fabrics

D06C 23/00

Decorating textiles

D06Q 1/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Artists’ machines or apparatus equipped with tools or work holders moving or able to be controlled substantially two-dimensionally for carving, engraving, or guilloching shallow ornamenting or markings

B44B 3/00

Machines or apparatus for embossing decorations or marks, e.g. embossing coins

B44B 5/00

Artists’ hand tools for sculpturing, kneading, carving, engraving, guilloching, or embossing; Accessories therefor

B44B 11/00

Surface treatment of glass, not in the form of fibres or filaments, e.g. by etching or coating, or mechanical means, or diffusing ions or metals into the surface, or other treatment

C03C 15/00-C03C 23/00

Shades for light sources; Covers for frames; Frameless shades

F21V 1/14

Globes; Bowls; Cover glasses

F21V 3/00

Light filters for simulating daylight

F21V 9/02

Lighting devices or systems producing a varying lighting effect

F21S 10/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Design

The arrangement or pattern of elements or features of an artistic or decorative work, especially for producing an effect meant to be judged by the eye, e.g. an ornamental pattern

Picture

A visual representation or image of a subject or scene (e.g. a person, object or landscape) projected, painted, drawn, or otherwise produced upon surface

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following terms "design", "ornamental pattern", "decorative work", "artistic work" and "ornamental model" are often used as synonyms. Also, these terms can be used as keywords.

In patent documents the following terms "picture", "painting", "image", "visual representation", "photography", "artistic drawing" are often used as synonyms. Also, these terms can be used as keywords.

B44F 5/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Special designs imitating natural patterns

B44F 9/00

Special designs imitating artistic work

B44F 11/00

B60B - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Wheels for roller skates

A63C 17/22

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hand tools in general

B25

Tools for mounting tyres

B60C 25/00

Joining wheel units to motor vehicles or trailers during manufacturing, e.g. assembling

B62D 65/12

B60J 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Non-fixed roofs

B60J 7/00

Liners for load platforms or load compartments

B60R 13/01

Railway wagon or like covers

B61D 39/00

Hoods or weather screens for children's carriages or perambulators

B62B 9/14

Covers for seats of cycles

B62J 1/18

Parking covers for cycles

B62J 19/00

Hoods or weather-guards for sidecars

B62K 27/16

Mud-guards or protecting devices for wheels of children's carriages or perambulators

B62B 9/16

B60K - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Elastic mountings per se

F16F

B60K 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Of control devices for such units

B60K 26/00

B60K 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Of control devices for such units

B60K 26/00

B60K 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Of control devices for such units

B60K 26/00

B60K 6/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Of control devices for such units

B60K 26/00

B60K 6/42 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Differential gearing distribution type

Series-parallel type HEVs in which the combustion engine power is distributed by a differential, e.g. a planetary gearing, to the first motor-generator and the wheels, and the electric power generated by the first motor-generator is used to drive the second motor-generator mechanically connected to either the wheels or the combustion engine. The series-mode energy flow path is established when the second motor-generator is driven by the electric power generated by the first motor-generator, while the parallel-mode energy flow path is established when the wheels are driven by both the combustion engine and the second motor-generator. Motor-generator currents are controlled to determine the energy flow path through the drive units.

Example: The combustion engine is mechanically connected to a motor-generator via a first element of a differential gearing. A second motor-generator is connected to a second element of the differential gearing. The differential gearing also connects one or both of the motor-generators to the wheels.

Electrical distribution type

Series-parallel type HEVs in which the engine power is distributed, using a first motor-generator which is specific as a double rotor-type motor-generator, into mechanical power for driving the wheels and electric power for driving a second motor-generator connected to either the wheels or the combustion engine. The series-mode energy flow path is established when the second motor-generator is driven by the electric power generated by the first motor-generator, while the parallel-mode energy flow path is established when the wheels are driven by both the combustion engine and the second motor-generator. Motor-generator currents are controlled to determine the energy flow path through the drive units.

Example: The combustion engine shaft is mechanically connected to the inner rotor of a double-rotor type motor-generator. The outer rotor of the double-rotor type is connected to the second motor generator which is connected to the shaft driving the wheels.

Motor-assist type

Parallel type HEVs in which the motor-generator only assist the combustion engine and cannot drive the wheels alone.

Example: The motor-generator is mechanically connected to the engine. There is no clutch or differential gearing between motor-generator and engine. The combustion engine is mechanically connected to the wheels.

Parallel type

HEVs having a single motor-generator in which both the combustion engine and the motor-generator can directly drive the wheels. Parallel type HEVs in which the motor-generator only assist the combustion engine and cannot drive the wheels alone are specially defined as "motor assist type". Therefore "parallel type" is assigned to HEVs in which the motor generator can drive the wheels alone without the engine being connected to the wheels.

Example: There is a single motor-generator and the combustion engine is mechanically connected to the motor-generator, via a clutch or via differential gearing. The motor-generator is also mechanically connected to the wheels. The vehicle is driven electrically by the motor-generator or mechanically by the engine or by both in combination.

Series-parallel switching type

Series-parallel type HEVs in which the mode can be switched between series mode and parallel mode.

Example: The combustion engine is directly connected to a first motor-generator. There is a second motor-generator mechanically connected to the wheels and a clutch between the two motor-generators. In the series mode the clutch will be disengaged and the second motor generator will drive the wheels by using the electric power generated by the first motor generator. In the parallel mode the clutch will be engaged and the engine directly drives the wheels with or without assistance by the motor generators.

Series-parallel type

HEVs having at least two motor-generators, which include the functions of both the series type and the parallel type.

Series type

HEVs having at least two motor-generators in which the first motor-generator is mechanically connected for driving or braking the wheels supplied by a battery which power is mostly generated by the second motor-generator mechanically connected to the combustion engine.

Example: The combustion engine is mechanically connected to a motor-generator. The combustion engine is not mechanically connected to the wheels. All the output energy of the combustion engine is converted to electrical energy. The energy is used to drive a second electric machine connected to the wheels and/or to charge the energy storing means. The second electric machine will be used as generator during braking.

B60K 6/50 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Particular arrangements of transmission units.

Kind or type of transmission units, e.g. CVT.

Four wheel drive arrangements.

B60K 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Of control devices for such units

B60K 26/00

B60K 8/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Of control devices for such units

B60K 26/00

B60L - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Supply of electric power to auxiliary equipment of electically-propelled vehicles, e.g. electric heating or lighting circuits.

Current-collectors and arrangements thereof on electrically-propelled vehicles, e.g. rollers in contact with trolley wire, pantographs or third-rail current-collectors.

Electrodynamic brake systems for vehicles in general, e.g. electric resistor braking, electric regenerative braking or eddy-current braking.

Electric propulsion of vehicles with power supply external to the vehicle or supplied within the vehicle.

Electric propulsion of vehicles with power supply from force of nature, e.g. sun or wind.

Electric propulsion for monorail vehicles, suspension vehicles or rack railways.

Magnetic suspension or levitation for vehicles.

Methods, circuits or devices for controlling the propulsion of electrically-propelled vehicles.

Monitoring operating variables, e.g. speed, deceleration or power consumption.

Electric devices on electrically-propelled vehicles for safety purposes, e.g. dead-man’s devices, devices for limiting the current under mechanical overload conditions or for preventing excessive speed of the vehicle.

Adaptation of control equipment on electrically-propelled vehicles for remote actuation from a stationary place, from alternative parts of the vehicle or from alternative vehicles in the same vehicle train.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass is the general place for subject-matter relating to the propulsion of electrically-propelled vehicles, for control of the propulsion and for collecting electrical power therefor. However conjoint control of two or more vehicle subunits, one of which may be an electrical propulsion unit, and subject-matter relating to control of hybrid vehicles comprising an internal-combustion motor and an electric motor, are covered in subclass B60W Further subject-matter relating to arrangements or mounting of electrical propulsion units, electric gearings or auxiliary drives in vehicles, are covered in subclass B60K Electrically-powered cycles are covered in subclass B62M

This subclass is also the application-oriented place for subject-matter relating to electrodynamic or dynamo-electric braking systems for vehicles. The function-oriented places for such systems are subclasses H02Kand H02P

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Electric coupling devices combined with mechanical couplings of vehicles

B60D 1/62

Electric heating for vehicles

B60H 1/00

Arrangements or mounting of electrical propulsion units in vehicles

B60K 1/00

Arrangement or mounting of plural diverse prime movers for mutual or common propulsion, e.g. hybrid propulsion systems

B60K 6/00

Arrangements or mounting of electric gearing in vehicles

B60K 17/12, B60K 17/14

Arrangement of signalling or lighting devices, the mounting or supporting thereof or circuits therefor, for vehicles in general

B60Q

Power-driven ground-engaging fittings for manoeuvring the vehicle

B60S 9/205

Conjoint control of vehicle sub-units of different type or different function, including control of electrical propulsion units

B60W 10/00

Control systems specially adapted for hybrid vehicles

B60W 20/00

Preventing wheel slip by reducing power in rail vehicles

B61C 15/08

Dynamo-electric machines,e.g. dynamo-electric brakes

H02K, H02K 49/00

Starting, controlling, braking of electric machines or converters in general

H02P

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Auxiliary drives on vehicles

B60K 25/00

Power supply lines for supplying power to electrically-propelled vehicles

B60M

Electric locomotives or railcars

B61C 3/00

Railway track circuits in general

B61L

Lighting in general

F21, H05B

Switches in general

H01H

Coupling devices for electric connections in general

H01R

Conversion of electric power

H02M

Electric heating in general

H05B

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Electrodynamic braking system

An electric machine that acts as a brake. Braking is accomplished by reversing the electric fields on the machine, effectively turning it into a generator. The usage of the generated power, either in useful applications or as dissipation of heat, restrains the motor-generator and provides a braking action.

As such, this term is virtually coterminous with "dynamo-electric braking system" (see below). However the term "electrodynamic" on its own is broader and less clear than the term "dynamo-electric". It means "pertaining to electric current, electricity in motion and the effects of magnetism and induction", and could theoretically encompass electrical devices other than dynamo-electric devices.

Dynamo-electric braking system

A dynamo-electric machine is a device for converting electrical energy into mechanical energy or mechanical energy into electrical energy or combinations thereof, which involve electromagnetic induction. In respect of brakes, a braking effect could be produced by converting the kinetic energy of a vehicle into electrical energy, for dissipation (e.g. by resistors or as eddy-currents) or for storage (e.g. by regenerative braking). Alternatively, electrical energy could be supplied to the device to drive it into reverse, thereby producing a braking effect.

Vehicle

This term has been used with the following two variations in meaning within this subclass:

(1) all varieties of apparatus (e.g. automobiles) intended to carry people or goods significant distances (e.g. between cities, to or from separate building complexes) across land or over water, except those restricted to one of the following types: rail vehicles, waterborne vessels, aircraft, space vehicles, hand carts, cycles, animal-drawn vehicles or sledges, which are covered by the relevant subclasses of B61-B64. Moreover the term "vehicle" also includes (i) vehicular characteristics which are common to more than one of the above-listed types of vehicles, and (ii) certain characteristics restricted to automobiles, road trailers or cross-country trailers.

(2) In some instances of this definition, the term "vehicle" has been qualified by another word which takes its meaning outside the scope of (1) above (e.g. "rail vehicle"); in such cases the word "vehicle" takes its broader dictionary meaning.

The reader can determine from the context whether an occurrence of the word "vehicle" in this definition falls within the meaning stated in (1) or (2).

Synonyms and Keywords

Maglev

Magnetic levitation vehicle

B60L 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Lighting in general

F21, H05B

Circuit arrangements for charging batteries

H02J 7/00

B60L 1/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric lighting systems for toy vehicles

A63H 17/28

B60L 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Railway track circuits in general

B61L 1/18

Measuring in general

G01

B60L 3/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Emergency protective devices or circuit arrangements in general

H01H, H02H

B60L 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Supply of electric current to toy vehicles through a track

A63H 18/12

Toy vehicles with overhead trolley-wire

A63H 19/26

Non-rotary current collectors

H01R 41/00

B60L 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Vehicle brake control systems in general

B60T

Actuating mechanisms for brakes

F16D 65/14

B60L 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Supply of electric current to toy vehicles through a track

A63H 18/12

Control of toy vehicles by vehicle-track interaction

A63H 18/16

Electrically-driven model locomotives

A63H 19/10

Electric toy railways

A63H 19/24

Toy vehicles with overhead trolley-wire

A63H 19/26

Electric drive mechanisms for toys

A63H 29/22

B60L 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrically-driven model locomotives

A63H 19/10

Control systems specially adapted for hybrid vehicles

B60W 20/00

B60L 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electromagnets per se

H01F 7/06

Propulsion by linear motors per se

H02K 41/02

B60L 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preventing wheel slippage in locomotives or railcars

B61C 15/08

B60Q - Definition

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

B60R - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Any categories of vehicles per se that:

Vehicle components or parts of the following types when they are either of general utility or specially adapted for a category of vehicle proper for this subclass:

Vehicle components or parts of general utility that are for uses other than those specified above and that are not specially adapted for or restricted to usage with

Relationship between large subject matter areas

General relationship between B60R and other subclasses providing for devices or fittings for preventing injuries to passengers of vehicles

B60R covers safety devices or fittings for preventing or reducing direct-impact type injuries to occupants of vehicles when they are specifically for the types of vehicles proper for class B60 or are of general utility (i.e. usable on vehicles of several types). In addition to this, B60R covers air bags, seat belts or safety harnesses used in motor or rail-type vehicles of all types (i.e. land vehicles ).

B60P covers safety devices for securing or bracing loads other than occupants on vehicles .

B64D (in particular B64D 25/00) covers safety devices or fittings for aircraft and, in particular, safety belts and harnesses used on aircraft.

B63B (in particular B63B 23/00) and B63C (in particular B63C 9/00) cover safety devices or fittings for boats or ships.

A62B 35/00 covers safety belts or harnesses that are not used in vehicles or that are not limited to use in vehicles .

General relationship between B60R and other subclasses providing compartments, holding devices, or mounting devices in vehicles

B60R includes vehicle compartments or holding devices for storing or mounting articles in a non-use position when they are of general utility or not specifically provided for in an appropriate subclass for the category of vehicle they are on. Normally the 'articles' stored or held are not the primary payload of the vehicle (see B60P reference) and are limited to stowed articles that are the personal property of their occupants (e.g. luggage, skis), used by their occupants when traveling (e.g. maps, flashlights), or used for vehicle maintenance (e.g. jacks, tools). The 'articles' stored or held may also be an essential or primary vehicle component of the types specified in the main group titles of B60R (e.g. mirrors, air bags). Moreover, B60R also provides for devices for holding or mounting other types of 'articles' in a use position, but only when the 'articles' held or mounted are not essential to the operation of the vehicle (e.g. ceiling/roof liner, radio) or are secondary-type vehicle components (e.g. electrical wiring for circuits).

Other vehicle subclasses provide for compartments or component mounting devices when they are structurally limited to use only with a specific vehicle type provided for elsewhere. The exception to this statement is for those essential or primary vehicle components that are expressly provided for in specific groups of B60R (e.g. vehicle mirrors, bumpers, seat belts). Other vehicle subclasses provide for compartments or component mounting devices when they are for housing, positioning, or holding 'articles' that are the distinguishing essential or primary operational components for their category of vehicle (e.g. curtain-forming nozzle for aircushion vehicle ). However, in these situations, the operational components of vehicles must be useable in the held or housed position, or easily repositioned from a stored position to a position for use, for their primary purpose (e.g. B62D 25/08 for engine compartments, B60J 1/16 for vehicle windows slidable into non-use area of doors, B60Q 1/05 for retractable vehicle head lights) versus merely being transported freight.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Cooling, heating, or ventilating devices for compartments that store goods within passenger vehicles

B60H 1/00

Special receptacles, compartments, or holders on vehicles for the refuse, food, beverages, or cigarettes of occupants

B60N 3/00

Vehicles with living accommodations for people (e.g. caravans with closets or bathrooms)

B60P 3/32

Vehicle safety devices for securing or bracing loads other than the occupants

B60P 7/06
Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Fire prevention, containment or extinguishing specially adapted for vehicles

A62C 3/07

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Wheels and axles for vehicles

B60B

Tyres for vehicles

B60C

Vehicles for use both on rail and on road

B60F 1/00

Vehicles for use on land and in or on water

B60F 3/00

Vehicles convertible to travel in or on different media

B60F 5/00

Vehicles predominantly for transporting loads

B60P

Air-cushion vehicles

B60V

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Direct-impact type injury

For drivers or passengers within a vehicle this consists of the types of injuries caused by a portion of an occupant's body striking a component that is within or encloses the passenger compartment of their vehicle (e.g. a bumper actuated air bag specifically protecting a passenger from hitting the steering wheel in contrast to an energy absorbing bumper protecting the vehicle ) and for non-occupants this consists of the types of injuries caused by a portion of a non-occupant's body striking an exterior component of a vehicle (e.g. a bumper actuated safety net catching a pedestrian prior to hitting the vehicle for specifically protecting the pedestrian in contrast to a flexible vehicle body part that is intended to resist damage due to any type of impact).

Vehicle

This term has been used with the following two variations in meaning within this subclass:

(1) all varieties of apparatus (e.g. automobiles) intended to carry people or goods significant distances (e.g. between cities, to or from separate building complexes) across land, over water, or through the air except those restricted to one of the following types: rail vehicles , waterborne vessels, aircraft, space vehicles , hand carts, cycles, animal-drawn vehicles , or sledges. Moreover, the term " vehicle " also includes (i) vehicular characteristics which are common to more than one of the above-listed types of vehicles , (ii) certain characteristics restricted to automobiles, road trailers, or cross-country trailers, and (iii) all land vehicles having characteristics specifically adapted for occupant safety such as air bags, seat belts, or safety harnesses.

(2) In some instances in this definition, the term " vehicle " has been qualified by another word which takes its meaning outside the scope of (1) above (e.g. "rail vehicle "), in such cases the word " vehicle " takes its broader dictionary meaning.

The reader can determine from the context whether an occurrence of the word " vehicle " in this definition falls within the meaning stated in (1) or (2).

B60R 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices per se

G02B

Heating arrangements specially adapted for transparent or reflecting areas

H05B 3/84

B60R 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ladders

E06C

B60R 9/05 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Wind deflectors for open roofs

B60J 7/22

B60R 9/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Vehicles adapted to transport, to carry or to comprise special loads or objects

B60P 3/00

B60R 11/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Of aerials

H01Q

B60R 11/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cameras per se

G03B

B60R 11/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For vehicle roof parts

B60J 7/20

B60R 13/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sealing arrangements forvehicle windows, windscreens, non-fixed roofs, doors, or similar devices

B60J 10/00

B60R 16/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for measuring, signalling, controlling or distributing tyre pressure or temperature, specially adapted for mounting on vehicles

B60C 23/00

Central door locking

E05B 65/36

B60R 16/033 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For propulsion purposes

B60K 1/04

Supplying batteries to, or removing batteries from, vehicles

B60S 5/06

Testing of charge state

G01R 31/36

Circuit arrangements for charging or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries

H02J 7/00

B60R 16/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement or mounting of batteries for electrical propulsion

B60K 1/04

Supplying batteries to, or removing batteries from, vehicles

B60S 5/06

B60R 16/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Carrying-off electrostatic charges in general

H05F 3/00

B60R 16/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement of fuel conduits

B60K 15/01

B60R 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Lubricating in general

F16N

B60R 19/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For rail vehicles

B61F 19/04

Safety equipment for cycles

B62J 27/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Initiating brake action by contact of bumper with an external object

B60T 7/22

B60R 19/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connection of valves to inflatable elastic bodies

B60C 29/00

B60R 19/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Springs, shock absorbers, or means for damping vibrations per se

F16F

B60R 19/42 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ornamental or guard strips

B60R 13/04

B60R 21/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Vehicles of this subclass that include specially adapted arrangements, devices, or fittings attachable to or forming part of vehicles for either:

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Safety belts or body harnesses in vehicles

B60R 22/00

Safety devices for propulsion unit control specially adapted for, or arranged in, vehicles

B60K 28/00

Crash or safety seats constructed to protect the occupant from the effect of abnormal g-forces

B60N 2/42

Energy-absorbing arrangements for hand wheels for steering vehicles

B62D 1/11

Energy-absorbing arrangements for vehicle steering columns

B62D 1/19

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus or methods for life-saving in general

A62B

Safety devices for propulsion unit control specially adapted for, or arranged in, vehicles

B60K 28/00

Safety devices for securing or bracing loads other than occupants on vehicles

B60P

B60R 21/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Vehicles of main group B60R 21/00 wherein the specially adapted arrangements, devices, or fittings are for either preventing or reducing direct-impact type injuries to occupants of vehicles or otherwise directly protecting occupants of vehicles.

B60R 21/05 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Yieldable steering columns

B62D 1/18

B60R 21/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrical circuits for triggering safety arrangements

B60R 21/01

B60R 21/13 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrical circuits for triggering safety arrangements

B60R 21/01

B60R 21/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Device comprising an inflatable restraint or confinement designed to inflate upon impact of a vehicle with an external object, thereby confining vehicle occupants in a protective environment, to prevent injury.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connection of valves to inflatable elastic bodies

B60C 29/00

B60R 21/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Inflatable restraints or confinements that are either (1) shaped as or resembles a belt, strap, or harness arrangement or (2) combined with a belt, strap, or harness arrangement.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Safety belts or body harnesses in vehicles

B60R 22/00

B60R 21/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Structure for encasing or housing an uninflated inflatable restraint or confinement prior to inflation or the location of the mounting of the inflatable restraint or confinement arrangement with respect to a vehicle or occupant, or the mounting of the inflatable restraint or confinement components with respect to each other or the vehicle.

B60R 21/201 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Covers or wrappers or strips or bands that enclose or encircle the inflatable restraint or confinement to prevent unwanted unfolding prior to inflation.

B60R 21/203 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Mounting or storing of an inflatable restraint arrangement in or on a steering wheel or steering column.

B60R 21/205 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Inflatable restraints or confinements that are stored in its nonuse or deflated condition within or on the instrument panel or dashboard of a vehicle.

B60R 21/206 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Mounting or storing of an inflatable restraint or confinement in a lower portion of the instrument panel that provides impact protection for the lower extremities, e.g. knee or portion near the knee, of a vehicle occupant.

B60R 21/207 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Mounting or storing an inflatable restraint or confinement arrangement in or on a structure in the vehicle on which an occupant is intended to sit.

B60R 21/21 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Mounting or storing of an inflatable restraint or confinement in or on a lateral door or lateral body panel of a vehicle.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Pillar mounted inflatable restraint or confinement

B60R 21/213

B60R 21/213 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Mounting or storing of an inflatable restraint or confinement arrangement in or on a structural member of the uppermost part or a support of the uppermost part of the vehicle.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Pillar

A pillar is considered the vertical or inclined vehicle portion that extends from the lower part of the vehicle, between the doors and windows to the uppermost part of the vehicle i.e. the roof, or from the upper portion of the door to the roof.

B60R 21/214 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Mounting or storing of an inflatable restraint or confinement arrangement in or on the laterally extending panel structure of the uppermost part of the vehicle.

B60R 21/215 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Covers or lids or structure specifically related thereto that open upon inflation of the restraint to allow for expansion of the restraint.

B60R 21/2155 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Covers for an inflatable restraint or confinement that move or are moved following a particular path or in a particular manner, i.e. having at least two particular motions or directions, e.g. translation, rotation, etc.

B60R 21/216 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Straps or bands that restrict, restrain, or direct the movement of the inflatable restraint or confinement cover [or part thereof] during the inflation of the inflatable restraint or confinement.

B60R 21/2165 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Portions in or adjacent the cover that separate or rupture so as to provide a passage and allow for the inflation of the inflatable restraint or confinement throughout the passage.

B60R 21/217 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The housing or body of the inflation fluid source;

The attachment detail between elements of the inflatable restraint or confinement system.

B60R 21/23 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Structure, shape, deployment positioning, deflation feature, or other characteristic of the inflatable restraint or confinement prior to, during, or after inflation.

Special rules of classification

B60R 21/18 takes precedence.

B60R 21/231 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The contour or form;

The structural detail or makeup;

The relative positioning of the inflatable restraint or confinement.

B60R 21/232 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Inflatable restraints or confinements that are inflated in a vertical downward direction from its top edge.

B60R 21/233 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Inflatable restraints or confinements including a plurality of substantially separated chambers that make up the restraint, wherein the chambers may be defined in a side-to-side orientation or the chambers may be defined by a chamber provided within a larger chamber.

Special rules of classification

B60R 21/232 takes precedence.

B60R 21/2334 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Features of or relating to the inflatable restraint or confinement for restraining, positioning, or defining a deployment shape of the inflatable restraint or confinement during or after deployment.

B60R 21/2338 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Strips or bands of or relating to the inflatable restraint or confinement that restrain or position the inflatable restraint or confinement during or after deployment to control the deployment shape or position of the inflatable restraint or confinement.

B60R 21/2342 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Junction of two portions of the inflatable restraint or confinement that is ruptured to define a particular deployment characteristic of the inflatable restraint or confinement.

B60R 21/2346 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Features within and of the inflatable restraint or confinement to distribute or deflect the inflation fluid within the inflatable restraint or confinement.

B60R 21/235 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Particular characteristics of the constituents or substances that make up at least a portion of the inflatable restraint or confinement.

B60R 21/237 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Particular structures of the inflatable restraint or confinement that include pleating, rolling, or other details of the inflatable restraint or confinement when in a gathered, pre-inflated state.

B60R 21/239 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Specific structures of or related to an inflatable restraint or confinement that allow for the inflation fluid within the air bag to escape through a portion of the inflatable restraint or confinement.

B60R 21/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Inflation fluid source or generator or means to control inflation fluid flow from the source to the inflatable restraint or confinement or to the atmosphere.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Inflation fluid

The fluid that inflates the inflatable restraint or confinement.

B60R 21/261 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Features, which are not part of the inflatable restraint or confinement structure, that disperse, direct, or control inflation fluid.

B60R 21/262 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Dispersing, guiding, or directing members that have a slender, hollow shape, e.g. specifically adapted for curtain-type inflatable restraint or confinement.

B60R 21/263 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Inflation fluid source, including means or detail for providing more than one level of inflation, e.g. by adjustable volumes of inflation fluid.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Inflatable restraint or confinement with an inflation fluid source using instantaneous release of stored pressurized gas with means for increasing the pressure of the gas just before or during liberation, e.g. hybrid inflators

B60R 21/272

B60R 21/264 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Inflation fluid source that contains a material that is ignited or burned to produce inflation fluid.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Generation of pressure gas, e.g. for blasting cartridges

C06D 5/00

Special rules of classification

B60R 21/268 takes precedence.

B60R 21/268 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Inflation fluid source containing a compressed gas that is released to inflate the inflatable member.

B60R 21/272 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Inflation fluid source comprising diverse sources of inflation fluid, the pressure of one of the inflation fluid sources is augmented just before or during inflation fluid release by another inflation fluid source.

B60R 21/274 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means to fracture or break a member or means to provide passage of inflation fluid from the fluid source to allow the inflation fluid to flow to the inflatable restraint or confinement.

B60R 21/276 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Specific structures of, or related to, means allowing the inflation fluid to escape the inflation fluid source, i.e. without reaching the inflatable restraint or confinement.

B60R 21/30 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means for including ambient air into the flow line and mixing such air with the inflation fluid, such mixture being the total or resultant mixture that inflates the inflatable restraint or confinement.

B60R 21/33 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrical circuits for triggering safety arrangements

B60R 21/01

B60R 21/34 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices associated with a vehicle for lessening forces or injury experienced by a non-occupant as a result of impact with a vehicle.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Vehicle bumpers

B60R 19/02

Bonnets

B62D 25/10

B60R 21/36 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means for protecting non-occupants of a vehicle includes an inflatable member for absorbing impact forces.

B60R 21/38 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means for raising a cover of an engine compartment.

B60R 22/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Vehicles of this subclass that include specially adapted flexible strap-like members or their arrangements that are intended to:

Specially adapted devices or fittings for cooperating with the flexible strap-like members.

Note.

Many of the flexible strap-like members are activated to protectively engage the occupant by extreme changes in or abnormal vehicular movement (e.g. sharp deceleration, collision with an object, vehicle turnover) or by means detecting the potential for this type of change or movement (e.g. radar signaling impending collision with another vehicle activates).

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Inflatable members forming a safety belt or harness, or used in combination with a safety belt or harness arrangement, on a vehicle

B60R 21/18
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Harnessing in aircraft

B64D 25/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Safety belts or body harnesses in general

A62B 35/00

B60R 22/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Children's seats

B60N 2/24

B60R 22/195 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrical circuits for triggering safety arrangements

B60R 21/01

B60R 22/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Buckles

A44B 11/00

Releasable fastenings in general

F16B

B60R 22/46 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrical circuits for triggering safety arrangements

B60R 21/01

B60R 25/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Anti-theft devices for wheel cover discs, rings or the like

B60B 7/16

Locks or bolts per se

E05

B60T - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Arrangement of braking elements on vehicles (as defined in the Glossary of terms below).

Portable devices for preventing unwanted movement of vehicles, and especially where the devices are specially adapted to engage an exterior portion of a stationary vehicle to prevent or restrain its movement, e.g. chocks.

Vehicle modifications to facilitate cooling of brakes.

Control systems or parts thereof, in general or specially adapted for vehicles, for processing variables which influence the extent or duration of a braking event, for the following purposes:

Component parts, details or accessories of brake control systems, for example:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

B61H covers brakes or other retarding apparatus peculiar to rail vehicles, and arrangement or disposition of brakes or other retarding apparatus in rail vehicles, but the following aspects thereof in relation to rail vehicles are covered in B60T:

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Brakes or other retarding apparatus peculiar to rail vehicles; Arrangement or disposition of brakes or other retarding apparatus in rail vehicles (see above)

B61H

Electrodynamic brake systems and control thereof for vehicles, and in general

B60L

Conjoint control of brakes and other drive units of vehicles, such as engine, gearing or clutch (this may be particularly significant when traction control systems operating on more than just brakes are being classified)

B60W

Arrangement of braking elements on cycles

B62L

Arrangement of braking elements on aircraft

B64C 25/42

Dynamo-electric brakes

H02K 49/00

test

G10L

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Brakes themselves, i.e. the devices where the braking effect actually occurs, and actuators directly acting on those devices

F16D

Railway stops, track brakes or retarding apparatus, fixed to permanent way

B61K 7/00

Safety arrangements on roads for slowing, redirecting or stopping errant vehicles, e.g. guard posts, bollards

E01F 15/00

Special rules of classification

In group B60T 8/00, when the subject matter to be classified is characterised by both electronic and non-electronic aspects, it should be classified both in group B60T 8/17 or its subgroups, and in group B60T 8/18.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Boosters

Means for providing power assistance to the braking effort

Vehicle

This term can have two different meanings here, viz.

(1) all vehicles except those restricted to one of the following types of vehicles: rail vehicles, waterborne vessels, aircraft, space vehicles, hand carts, cycles, animal-drawn vehicles, and sledges, which are covered by the relevant subclasses of B61-B64. The term "vehicle" also includes

(i) vehicular characteristics which are common to more than one of the above-listed types, and

(ii) certain characteristics restricted to automobiles, road or cross-country trailers.

(2) In some instances in this definition, the term "vehicle" has been qualified by another word which takes its meaning outside the scope of (1) above (e.g. "rail vehicle"), in which case the word "vehicle" takes its normal dictionary meaning.

The reader can determine from the context whether an occurrence of the word "vehicle" in this definition falls within the meaning stated in (1) or (2).

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following abbreviations are often used:

ABS

Anti-lock Braking System

ASR

Anti-Spin Regulation

EBA

Electronic Brake Assist

EBD

Electronic Brakeforce Distribution

In patent documents the following expressions are often used as synonyms:

antilock, anti-lock, anti-skid, antiskid, anti-blocking;

wheel slip, wheel-slip, wheel spin, wheel-spin;

traction control, anti-spin regulation - for combating wheel-spin.

B60T 7/14 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Dead-man's devices for electrically-propelled vehicles

B60L 3/02

B60T 8/175 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Safety devices for propulsion unit control responsive to, or preventing, skidding of wheels

B60K 28/16

B60T 8/32 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric devices on electrically propelled vehicles indicating the wheel slip

B60L 3/10

B60T 11/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Master cylinders associated with vacuum boosters

B60T 13/565

B60T 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements for adjusting wheel-braking force to meet varying vehicular or ground-surface conditions

B60T 8/00

Valves incorporated in such systems

B60T 15/00

B60T 13/08 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Automatic brake-action initiating means specially adapted for trailers

B60T 7/20

B60T 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connection of valves to inflatable elastic bodies

B60C 29/00

B60T 15/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Automatic initiation of braking in general

B60T 7/12

B60T 17/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Pipes, cut-off valves, couplings, air hoses per se

F16C, F16K, F16L

B60T 17/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

With built-in wear-compensating mechanisms, ultimate actuators

F16D 49/00-F16D 65/00

B60V - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Vehicles that are specifically designed, or specially adapted, to be wholly or partially supported, at least some of the time during their travel over a surface (e.g. water, land, floors, railways, roads, sidewalks, runways), by a thin cushion or film of gaseous fluid (e.g. air). Wherein the gaseous fluid of the cushion or film is at least partially:

Components of the above vehicles having structural features that limit them to use with vehicles supported during travel on a thin cushion or film of gaseous fluid.

The making of vehicles that are specifically designed to be:

Specially adapted method steps or apparatus, which are part of an entire manufacturing process, for the manufacture of components essential to forming or maintaining the thin cushion or film of gaseous fluid for vehicles of the type that are only partially supported, or supported only part time during travel, by the gaseous fluid.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Between B60V and other vehicle manufacturing subclasses

B60V covers the manufacture of vehicles that are designed to be exclusively supported by a thin cushion or film of gaseous fluid at all times when traveling.

Despite the fact that B60V covers the structure of certain combination or convertible types of vehicles, it does not cover the total method or means for making or assembling these vehicles. In the situations where a vehicle includes an alternative, supplemental, or primary means for supporting it during travel that is not an air cushion, the manufacture of this type of vehicle is covered in the same subclass that provides for the manufacture of vehicles relying solely for support on its particular type of alternative, supplemental, or primary means. Subclasses B62D, B63B, and B64F cover the manufacture of the various types of combination or convertible vehicles.

Nevertheless, B60V does cover specific manufacturing steps or apparatus that are a part of a total process used to make combination or convertible vehicles that are partially supported, or supported part time, by the gaseous fluid if the manufacturing steps or apparatus are specially adapted for the manufacture of components of the vehicles used to form or maintain the thin cushion or film of gaseous fluid.

B62D 65/00 "Designing, manufacturing, e.g. assembling, facilitating disassembly, or structurally modifying motor vehicles or trailers, not otherwise provided for" covers subject matter pertaining to the designing and manufacturing of motor vehicles, rail vehicles and trailers, as well as the designing and manufacturing of convertible types and/or combination types of these vehicles.

B63B "Ships or other waterborne vessels; Equipment for shipping" provides for the construction of hulls in group B63B 3/00 and the methods of designing, building, maintaining, converting, refitting, repairing or determining properties of vessels in group B63B 9/00.

B64F 5/00 "Designing, manufacturing, assembling, cleaning, maintaining or repairing aircraft, not otherwise provided for" covers the manufacture or assembly of aircraft.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

General manufacturing of various vehicle parts

B23P 15/00

Assembling and disassembling of various metal parts

B23P 19/04

Assembling of a multiplicity of different parts to compose units

B23P 21/00

Designing, manufacturing, assembling, facilitating disassembly, or structurally modifying motor vehicles or trailers

B62D 65/00

The construction of hulls

B63B 3/00

Methods of designing, building, maintaining, converting, refitting, repairing, or determining properties of vessels

B63B 9/00

Designing, manufacturing, or assembling aircraft, not otherwise provided for

B64F 5/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mowers supported by an air-cushion

A01D 34/695

Devices that assist either manually moving over a short distance (e.g. within a building or buildings) or tilting heavy loads by using pressurized fluid supplied from an independent source to provide a cushion of fluid between a load and floor

B65G 7/06

Conveying articles through pipes or tubes by fluid flow or pressure and the conveying of articles over a surface using pressurized fluid jets located in the surface

B65G 51/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Vehicle

This term has been used with the following two variations in meaning within this subclass:

(1) all varieties of apparatus (e.g. automobiles) intended to carry people or goods significant distances (e.g. between cities, to or from separate building complexes) across land, over water, or through the air except those restricted to one of the following types: rail vehicles , waterborne vessels, aircraft, space vehicles , hand carts, cycles, animal-drawn vehicles , or sledges.

(2) In some instances in this definition, the term " vehicle " has been qualified by another word which takes its meaning outside the scope of (1) above (e.g. "rail vehicle "), in which case the word " vehicle " takes its broader meaning in (1) above (i.e. without the specified exception of particular types of vehicles from its scope). The reader can determine from the context whether an occurrence of the word " vehicle " in this definition falls within the meaning stated in (1) or (2).

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the terms hovercraft , ground-effect vehicle , surface-effect vehicle , and air-cushion vehicle are often used as synonyms.

B60V 1/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Vehicles of this subclass that are specifically designed, or specially adapted, to be wholly supported during their travel over a surface (e.g. water, land, floors, railways, roads, sidewalks, runways) by a thin cushion or film of gaseous fluid.

Components of the above vehicles having structural features that limit them to use with vehicles supported during travel on a thin cushion or film of gaseous fluid.

Components of other types of vehicles supported during travel at least part of time on a thin cushion or film of gaseous fluid, when the components are of a general utility for, and limited in use to, creating a thin cushion or film of gaseous fluid.

The making of vehicles that are specifically designed to be:

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Land vehicles, waterborne vessels, or aircraft adapted or modified to travel on air cushions

B60V 3/00

B60V 1/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hydrofoils per se

B63B 1/24

B60V 3/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Vehicles of this subclass that are specifically designed, or specially adapted, to be supported entirely or partially at least some of the time by means other than their thin cushion or film of gaseous fluid during travel across land, over water, or through the air.

Components of the above types of vehicles having structural features that restrict them to use with a particular type of vehicle (e.g. ship), when the components have utility for, and are limited in use to, creating a thin cushion or film of gaseous fluid.

Specially adapted method steps or apparatus, which are part of an entire manufacturing process, for the manufacture of components essential to forming or maintaining the thin cushion or film of gaseous fluid for vehicles of the type that are only partially supported, or supported only part time, by the gaseous fluid during travel on land, over water, or through the air.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Vehicles for use both on rail and on road, amphibious or like vehicles, or convertible vehicles

B60F

B60V 3/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Vehicles of main group B60V 3/00 having wheel or wheel-substitute type supporting means (e.g. endless tracks, skids) for alternative or supplemental engaging of land (e.g. roadway, rail) during travel.

Vehicles specifically designed to be exclusively supported solely by a thin cushion or film of gaseous fluid and restricted to a specific path by solid guiding structure (e.g. channel, trough) during traveling.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Railway systems that include sliding or levitation means

B61B 13/08

Pneumatic tunnel-type railway system (e.g. atmospheric railways)

B61B 13/10

B60V 3/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Vehicles of main group B60V 3/00 having structure (e.g. a hull) that allows the vehicle (e.g. ship) to be supported alternatively or supplementally by direct floating contact with water during travel.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Hydrodynamic or hydrostatic features of hulls or of hydrofoils that reduce surface friction by using air bubbles or air layers

B63B 1/38

B60V 3/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Vehicles of main group B60V 3/00 having structure specifically designed to allow them to travel significant distances above the surface of the earth (i.e. higher than most manmade obstructions such as buildings) while supported by air (e.g. helicopters).

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Aeroplanes or helicopters without any air cushion creating means other than standard components associated with flight

B64C

B60W - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Control systems for conjoint control of vehicle sub-units of different type or different function.

Control systems specially adapted for hybrid vehicles.

Purposes of road vehicledrive control systems for purposes that are

Estimation or calculation of driving parameters for road vehicle drive systems that are used for purposes

Details of control systems for road vehicle drive control, e.g. monitoring of signals for controllers that are used for purposes

Relationship between large subject matter areas

B60W is the application-oriented place covering vehicle drive control systems in general that are not related to a particular sub-unit or used for conjoint control of two or more sub-units. The control of a single particular sub-unit, or same type multiple sub-units for the same purpose are not covered by this subclass and have to be classified in the relevant class for the sub-unit, e.g. F02D or F16H. Where a single particular sub-unit is controlled by signal or commands from other sub-units, the control of this single sub-unit is classified in the relevant place for this sub-unit. For example the control of variable ratio gearing by means of signals from the engine or accelerator is classified in the subclass for gearing F16H.

Conjoint control of driveline units, e.g. engines, and variable-ratio gearing occurring only transiently during ratio shift and being also characterized by the control of the gearing is also classified in the subclass for gearing F16H.

One main group (B60W 20/00) is intended for all control systems specially adapted for hybrid vehicles. This group also covers control systems specially adapted for hybrid vehicles that do not reveal any use of conjoint control. The arrangement or mounting of plural diverse prime-movers for common propulsion of a hybrid vehicle will be classified in the subclass B60K. Conjoint control of pure electric drive units like motor and battery will be classified in subclass B60L. When the architecture or type of transmission of the hybrid vehicle is also of interest, it should be classified in the relevant groups of main group B60K 6/00.

This subclass also cover road vehicledrive control systems not related to any particular sub-unit, i.e. which do not specify which sub-unit is activated or actuated by the control system. For example a control system or control method for predicting a collision which is not related to the control of any specific sub-unit will be correctly covered by the appropriate group B60W 30/08.

Detecting means in general (e.g. ultrasonic radar, TV camera, image processing, or measuring means) are covered by the classes G01, G06 or H04 and their appropriate subclasses.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Arrangement or mounting of plural diverse prime-movers for mutual or common propulsion, e.g. hybrid propulsion systems comprising electrical and internal combustion motors

B60K 6/00

Vehicle fittings for automatically controlling vehicle speed by acting on a single sub-unit

B60K 31/00

Propulsion of purely electrically-propelled vehicles with power supplied within the vehicle

B60L 11/00

Electrical circuits for triggering safety arrangements to protect or prevent injuries to occupants or pedestrians

B60R 21/01

Brake control systems for vehicle drive stability

B60T 8/1755

Traffic control systems i.e. systems transmitting information to a plurality of vehicles simultaneously in order to co-ordinate the flow of vehicles or systems controlling platoons of vehicles

G08G 1/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Controlling combustion engines, such controlling being peculiar to the devices driven thereby, the devices being other than parts or accessories essential to engine operation, e.g. controlling of engines by signals external thereto

F02D 29/00

Combinations of clutches and brakes

F16D 67/00

Control functions within change-speed- or reversing-gearings for conveying rotary motion

F16H 61/00

Systems for controlling position, course, altitude, or attitude of land, water, air, or space vehicles

G05D 1/00

Anti-collision systems

G08G 1/16

Special rules of classification

Multi-aspect classification practice is used in this subclass for road vehicledrive control systems using conjoint control. Whenever one or more specific types of subunits are controlled, classification in main group B60W 10/00 should be given for each of the different sub-units controlled. For each controlled sub-unit a classification symbol should be added in the relevant place. When documents classified in main group B60W 10/00 are also relevant for main groups B60W 20/00 to 50/00, a classification in one of these groups is required.

Within main group B60W 20/00 to 50/00 the first place priority rule is applied, i.e. at each hierarchical level, obligatory classification is made in the first appropriate place. When several novel and non-obvious technical subjects are disclosed, the first place priority rule is separately applied to each of them.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Automatic control

Using control systems for mechanising or assisting, to a full- or partial extent, tasks associated with driving of the vehicle, e.g. those normally carried out by the driver or those necessary to control the motion of the vehicle.

Auxiliary equipment

A subsidiary or supplementary device of the propulsion, transmission or other units of the vehicle, e.g. a pump for supply of pressure for the control unit.

Conjoint control

A programmed or condition-responsive automatic controller on-board the vehicle, embodying control logic for plural vehicle sub-units and sends control signals to actuators of two or more vehicle sub-units, so that the sub-units act together to solve a particular problem or in response to a particular driving condition.

Conjoint control of diverse vehicle sub-units

Such control of different sub-units within the same vehicle for those vehicles defined under note to class B60, and of general applicability to different types of vehicles normally under the control of a human driver.

Cruise control

A system for automatically controlling vehicle speed, which may include additional functions e.g. control of distance between vehicles, so-called "Adaptive Cruise Control" (ACC).

Drive control system

An electronic system in a road vehicle for automatically controlling the movement of that vehicle in order to take certain actions.

Driving parameter

All input or output parameters of the road vehicledrive control systems, e.g. road specific parameters, driver or passenger related parameters, state variables of motion of the vehicle body or parameters related to the vehicle itself like load or weight of the vehicle.

Hybrid vehicle

Vehicles having two or more prime movers of more than one type, e.g. electrical and internal combustion motors, and that are either singularly or in combination used for propulsion of the vehicle.

Road vehicle

A vehicle normally under the control of a human driver for transportation on roads, e.g. an automobile, truck or bus.

Sub-unit

One of the following vehicle systems: propulsion systems; clutch system; change-speed gearing system; system for distributing drive torque between front and rear axles; axle differential system; brake system; steering system or suspension system; energy storage means; fuel cells or other auxiliary equipments.

B60W 10/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Sub-units of different type or function, which are controlled by a controller on board of the vehicle. The controller sends control signals to two or more vehicle sub-units, so that the sub-units act together to solve a particular problem in order to improve stability, comfort or safety of the vehicle or to propel the vehicle.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

for propulsion of purely electrically-propelled vehicles with electric power supplied within the vehicle

B60L 11/00

Special rules of classification

When classifying in this group, each controlled sub-unit must be separately identified by a classification in a relevant place in this group. Classification must also be made in groups B60W 20/00-B60W 50/00 in order to identify the purpose or use of the control.

B60W 20/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Arrangement or mounting of plural diverse prime-movers for mutual or common propulsion, e.g. hybrid propulsion systems

B60K 6/00

Special rules of classification

Multi-aspect classification practice is used in this group for control systems specially adapted for hybrid vehicles. Whenever one or more specific types of subunits are controlled, classification in main group B60W 10/00 should be given for each of the different sub-units controlled. When the architecture or type of transmission of the hybrid vehicle is of interest, it should be classified in the relevant groups of B60K 6/00.

B60W 30/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Exclusive brake control systems for vehicle drive stability

B60T 8/1755

B60W 30/045 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems influencing the drivability or agility of a vehicle in a curve.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements for automatically controlling steering depending on driving conditions sensed and responded to

B62D 6/00

B60W 30/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Steering aids

B62D 15/02

B60W 30/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Control systems for predicting coming or possible collisions or taking measures to prevent or weaken the impact of a collision.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Electrical circuits for triggering safety arrangements to protect or prevent injuries to occupants or pedestrians

B60R 21/01

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Anti-collision systems for land vehicles

G08G 1/16

B60W 30/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Control systems for adapting vehicle speed to particular conditions, e.g. for controlling distance to preceding vehicle or taking actions when preceding vehicles is going to stop.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Vehicle fittings for automatically controlling vehicle speed by acting on a single sub-unit

B60K 31/00

Traffic control systems i.e. systems transmitting information to a plurality of vehicles simultaneously in order to co-ordinate the flow of vehicles or systems controlling platoons of vehicles

G08G 1/00

B60W 30/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Control systems for the driving or retarding of road vehicles controlling multiple sub-units

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Control systems specially adapted for hybrid vehicles

B60W 20/00

Controlling combustion engines, such controlling being peculiar to the devices driven thereby, the devices being other than parts or accessories essential to engine operation, e.g. controlling of engines by signals external thereto

F02D 29/00

Control functions within change-speed- or reversing-gearings for conveying rotary motion

F16H 61/00

B60W 40/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

The estimation or calculation of non-direct measurable parameters related to vehicle drive control and not used for a particular sub-unit, e.g. by using mathematic models for estimation of the parameters.

B60W 50/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

On board failure detection;

Failure correction strategies;

Means or methods to repair failures;

Work around methods in case of failure;

Control input devices for limp home.

B60W 50/029 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Control methods for fail safe which will avoid situations where a defect part is involved, i.e. the control uses different parts or a method for a work around. No redundant parts are used and these methods could lead to constrains in functionality.

B60W 50/035 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Control methods for fail safe which will put the control in a predefined state, e.g. the transmission in particular gear ratio, or for giving priority to a particular actuator.

B60W 50/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Interfaces between driver and control system not for a single or particular sub-unit with interaction, i.e. communications or actions with a feedback loop between the driver and the control system. The interaction can be a tactile feedback to the driver, e.g. vibrations of the steering wheel.

B60W 50/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Interpreting driver intention and initiating control based on different parameters, e.g. vehicle speed and driver activity

- by monitoring actuating speed of the accelerator

B60W 50/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Preventing particular driving manoeuvres based on the vehicle situation, e.g. limiting driver control by drive assistance systems in critical driving situations

B60W 50/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Warning or informing the driver when the movement of the vehicle will be changed momentarily, e.g. adding a slight yaw rate, momentary deceleration;

Informing the driver that the drive control mode will change, e.g. from comfort mode to performance mode;

Assistance systems for warning the driver, e.g. warning the driver if approaching speed at a stopping location will be too high.

B61B - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Devices specially adapted or mounted for storing and repeatedly paying-out and re-storing lengths of material

B65H 75/34

B61D - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For vehicles in general

B60

B61G - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Vehicle connections in general

B60D

B61L - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Means for controlling and safeguarding railway vehicle traffic, including apparatus and processes that are specially adapted, or intended to be utilized, for the following categories related to railway vehicle traffic:

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Railway vehicle brakes or other retarding apparatus

B61H

Derailing or re-railing blocks on the track, and for railway stops, scotch-blocks, track brakes or retarders fixed to the permanent way

B61K

Detectors indicating the overheating of railway vehicle axle bearings

B61K 9/04

Rail, switch, point or crossing construction

E01B

Rail joints

E01B 11/00

Electrically insulated rail joints

E01B 11/54

Cattle guards fixed to the permanent way

E01B 17/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Power supply lines for electrically propelled vehicles

B60M

Arrangement, mounting or supporting of signaling devices for vehicles in general

B60Q

The arrangement of signaling or lighting devices, the mounting or supporting thereof for rail vehicles

B61D

Illumination in general; illumination for signaling, marking or indicating; details of lighting devices or systems

F21

Visible signaling arrangements in general

G08B 5/00

An alarm responsive to an abnormal condition

G08B 21/00, G08B 23/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Scotch-block

A wedge to prevent the movement of an opening switch rail of a set of points or of stationary vehicles.

B61L 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Central traffic control systems controlled by train

B61L 27/04

B61L 1/16 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Counting moving objects in general

G06M

B61L 1/18 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Automatically-operated track circuits specially adapted for section blocking for controlling traffic

B61L 23/00

B61L 3/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Using radio waves

B61L 3/12

B61L 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Track-mounted scotch-blocks per se

B61K

B61L 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Lighting in general

F21

B61L 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Rail brakes

B61K

B61L 21/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Automatic central traffic control systems

B61L 27/04

B61L 23/08 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Station blocking between signal boxes in one yard

B61L 21/00

B61L 23/22 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Station blocking between signal boxes in one yard

B61L 21/00

B62B - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Chairs or multi-track cycles specially adapted for invalids

A61G 5/00

B62D - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Steering devices applicable only to steerable undercarriages for aircraft

B64C 25/50

B62D 47/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Understructures, i.e. chassis frames, characterised by the vehicle type

B62D 21/18

B62D 49/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Understructures, i.e. chassis frames, characterised by the vehicle type

B62D 21/18

B62D 51/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Understructures, i.e. chassis frames, characterised by the vehicle type

B62D 21/18

B62D 53/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Understructures, i.e. chassis frames, characterised by the vehicle type

B62D 21/18

B62D 55/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Understructures, i.e. chassis frames, characterised by the vehicle type

B62D 21/18

B62D 57/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Understructures, i.e. chassis frames, characterised by the vehicle type

B62D 21/18

B62D 59/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Understructures, i.e. chassis frames, characterised by the vehicle type

B62D 21/18

B62D 61/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Understructures, i.e. chassis frames, characterised by the vehicle type

B62D 21/18

B62D 63/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Understructures, i.e. chassis frames, characterised by the vehicle type

B62D 21/18

B62J - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement of signalling or lighting devices, the mounting or supporting thereof or circuits therefor, for vehicles in general

B60Q

For vehicles in general

B60R

Guards in general

F16P

B62K 5/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Wheeled vehicles with three or more wheels provided with a handlebar-type steering mechanism.

This head group will contain particularly four or more wheeled muscle powered vehicles provided with a handlebar-type steering which are not covered by the groups B62K 5/003, B62K 5/007.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Cycle supports or stands equipped with additional wheels for ride stabilisation

B62H 1/12

B62K 5/003 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Four or more wheeled muscle powered personal mobility vehicles.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Wheelchairs

A61G 5/00

B62K 5/007 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Personal mobility vehicles with four or more wheels driven by engine or motor.

B62K 5/01 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Four wheeled all terrain type vehicles (ATV’s) with engines and other power driven vehicles with four or more wheels, steered by handlebars.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted:

Specially adapted for disabled riders

B62K 5/003

B62K 5/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Three wheeled muscle powered vehicles.

This group will contain particularly three wheeled muscle powered vehicles which are not covered by the groups B62K 5/023, B62K 5/025, B62K 5/027.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Children tricycles

B62K 9/02

B62K 5/023 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Three wheeled muscle powered personal mobility vehicles.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted:

Wheelchairs

A61G 5/00

B62K 5/025 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Personal mobility vehicles with three wheels driven by engine or motor.

B62K 5/027 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Three wheeled all terrain type vehicles (ATV’s) with engines and other power driven vehicles with three wheels, steered by handlebar.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Specially adapted for disabled riders

B62K 5/023

B62K 5/05 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Three wheeled vehicles with a single rear wheel.

In most cases the front wheels are essentially in coaxial arrangement, at least when driving straight ahead.

B62K 5/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Tricycle frames characterised by special features or details.

B62K 5/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Details of suspension arrangements to allow the body of the vehicle to lean for curve behaviour

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Suspensions arrangements for inclining the vehicle body of non-cycle type vehicles

B62D 9/02

B62K 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Motorised mobility scooters with three or more wheels

B62K 5/007, B62K 5/025

B62M 1/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Rider propulsions of wheeled vehicles, e.g. bicycles, having pedals connected to crank shaft by means of reciprocating levers, wherein one end of the lever is connected to the pedal and the other end to the crank shaft. The rider propels the vehicles by pressing on the pedals alternatively up and down.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Cranks which can be immobilised as foot rests

B62M 5/00

B62M 1/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Rider propulsion using pedals following essentially a reciprocating movement. The reciprocating levers are combined with the rotary crank mechanism, wherein usually one end of the lever is connected to the pedal, and the other end of the lever is linked to the rotary crank.

B62M0001260000

B62M 1/28 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Rider propulsion using pedals following essentially a reciprocating movement and being connected to the crank shaft or driven wheel by flexible members, e.g. chains, belt or cables.

B62M0001280000

B62M0001280000

B62M 1/30 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Rider propulsion using pedals following essentially a reciprocating movement and connected to the crank shaft or driven wheel by using intermediate toothed wheels, e.g. for speed reduction.

B62M0001300000

B62M 1/32 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Rider propulsion using pedals following essentially a reciprocating movement. The levers having a first end connected to the pedal and the second end directly connected to the driven wheel axle. The driving connection could use a ratchet wheel.

B62M0001320000

B62M 1/34 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Rider propulsion of wheeled vehicle where the rider propels the vehicle by walking on an endless belt or the like.

B62M0001340000

B62M 1/36 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Rider propulsions having rotary cranks with pedals attached to the end of the crank arms.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Rotary cranks combined with reciprocating levers

B62M 1/26

Rider propulsion by walking on an endless belt

B62M 1/34

Cranks which can be immobilised as foot rests

B62M 5/00

B62M 1/38 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The crank levers are directly arranged on the driven axle, a freewheel could be used to uncouple the crank when driving down on a slope.

B62M0001380000

B62M 6/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Rider propelled cycles, e.g. bicycles, tricycles having additional source of power;

Subject-matter related to the use of additional source of power in rider propelled cycles;

Rider propelled cycle with additional source of propulsion power different from combustion engine or electric motor.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Motorcycle characterized by position of motor or engine

B62M 7/00

Bicycle or tricycle having the additional source of power on a auxiliary wheel unit

B62M 7/14

Transmission characterized by use of friction roller engaging the periphery of the ground wheel

B62M 13/00

Transmission characterized by two or more dissimilar sources of power, e.g. transmission for hybrid cycles

B62M 23/02

Wheelchairs

A61G 5/00

Cycles with handlebars, equipped with three or more road wheels, e.g. tricycles

B62K 5/00

Features relating to engine or motor driven bicycles, e.g. frames, steering wheel forks or handle-bar constructions associated therewith

B62K 11/00

Special rules of classification

In this main group, at each hierarchical level, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the first appropriate place.

B62M 6/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Bicycle having a combustion engine as an additional source of power in order to propel the vehicle when requested by the rider.

B62M 6/15 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means, specially adapted for the application on bicycle, for controlling the delivery of power to the cycle by first "sensing or detecting" of parameters, e.g. rider pedaling force, torque, speed or braking force and then sending a signal to the engine in order to control the combustion engine output torque to the cycle. Arrangement of sensors or detectors on the cycle.

B62M 6/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Cycles where the power output of the combustion engine is transmitted to the pedal crank shaft through a power transmission arrangement at the pedal crank shaft and which together with the pedal crank arrangement permit the bicycle to be readily operated in the engine power mode or pedal power mode.

B62M 6/25 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Cycles where the power output of the combustion engine is transmitted to the rear wheel axle shaft through a power transmission arrangement at the wheel axle shaft. The engine driving shaft might be coaxial with the driven wheel axle shaft.

B62M 6/30 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Cycles where the power output of the combustion engine is transmitted to the flexible member which connects the rear wheel axle shaft to the pedal shaft. . The flexible member might be a chain, belt or the like and can be driven either by the engine or by the pedal-driven chain wheel or pulley. In general the power transmission arrangement includes also reduction gears.

B62M 6/35 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Cycles where the power output of the combustion engine might be transmitted to the ground or road wheel through a power transmission arrangement which includes friction or pressure rollers or the like. The rollers might be set in contact with the periphery or the side of the ground wheel.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transmission characterized by the use of friction roller or gears engaging the ground wheel having only human propulsion

B62M 13/00

B62M 6/40 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Cycle having an electric motor as additional source of power in order to propel the vehicle when requested by the rider. The electrical motor is in general fed by battery, solar power or fuel cells.

B62M 6/45 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means, specially adapted for the application on bicycle, for controlling the delivery of power to the cycle by sensing or detecting of parameters, e.g. rider pedaling force, torque, speed or braking force and then sending a signal to the motor in order to control the output torque to the cycle. This subgroup deals with the way power is diverted or switched over from the motor to the cycle when requested by the rider or automatically according the circumstances or the detected parameters.

B62M 6/50 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Sensing devices or detectors specially adapted for the application on the cycle for sensing or detecting control parameters, e.g. rider pedaling force, torque, speed or braking force. In particular the arrangement or the specific location on the cycle.

B62M 6/55 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Cycles where the power output of the electric motor is transmitted to the pedal crank shaft through a power transmission arrangement at the pedal crank shaft and which together with the pedal crank arrangement permit the bicycle to be readily operated in the motor power mode or pedal power mode.

B62M 6/60 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Cycles where the power output of the electric motor is transmitted to the rear wheel axle shaft through a power transmission arrangement at the wheel axle shaft. The electric motor shaft might be connected to the wheel axle shaft through chain, belt or gear transmissions.

B62M 6/65 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Cycles where the power output of the electric motor is transmitted to the rear wheel axle shaft through a power transmission arrangement at the wheel axle shaft. The motor driving shaft is coaxial with the driven wheel axle shaft.

B62M 6/70 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Cycles where the power output of the electric motor is transmitted to the flexible member which connects the rear wheel axle shaft to the pedal shaft. The flexible member might be a chain, belt or the like and can be driven either by the motor or by the pedal-driven chain wheel or pulley. In general the power transmission arrangement includes also reduction gears.

B62M 6/75 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Cycle where the power output of the electric motor might be transmitted to the ground or road wheel through a power transmission arrangement which includes friction or pressure rollers or the like. The rollers might be set in contact with the periphery or the side of the ground wheel.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transmission characterized by the use of friction roller or gears engaging the ground wheel having only human propulsion

B62M 13/00

B62M 6/80 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Auxiliary equipment or accessories, e.g. batteries or fuel cells feeding the electric motor. Devices having special features to be considered specially adapted for the application on a power assisted cycle, e.g. cooling system specially adapted for the auxiliary electric motor. Furthermore this sub-group also deals with the location and the arrangement of the accessories on the cycle.

B62M 6/85 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Solar cells on cycles providing a power source to batteries or electric propulsion motors. Arrangement of solar cells on the cycle.

B62M 6/90 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Batteries on cycles providing a power source for electric propulsion motors. Arrangement of these batteries on the cycle.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric or power supply devices relating to the cycle power supply for lightening

B62J 6/06

B62M 9/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for lateral shifting of cycle chains not specific for the rear or front cluster sprockets;

Accessories for cycle derailleurs not specific for the rear or front clusters.

B62M 9/121 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for shifting the chain laterally on the cycle cluster sprockets situated at the rear wheel of a cycle or similar vehicle.

B62M 9/122 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Electric or fluid assisted rear derailleurs and control methods therefor for shifting chains by rear derailleurs. Contrary to the directly manual actuated derailleur, these shifting devices are assisted by a small electric or fluid operated servos connected to the derailleur mechanism.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Actuators for gearing speed-change mechanisms specially adapted for cycles with electrical or fluid transmitting systems

B62M 25/08

B62M 9/123 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Rear derailleurs having the chain moved laterally without rider intervention. The chain guide movement is controlled automatically in accordance with pre-set parameters, e.g. the crank speed or the pressure on the pedals.

B62M 9/124 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Rear derailleurs comprising all or most of the following features: a fixed member connected to the bicycle frame, a base member, a linkage mechanism, a movable member and chain guides, cable receiving and connecting portions, springs or the like devices. The linkage mechanism insures proper lateral shift movement of the chain over the different rear sprockets by acting on the chain guide. The mechanism can comprise articulated linkages, plates, cams or telescopic shafts.

B62M 9/1242 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Details of the linkage mechanism, e.g. articulated parallelograms or quadrilateral systems, connecting the base member to the chain guide in order to move the chain guide laterally relative to the base member. In general the linkage mechanism also comprises a cable fixing portion.

B62M 9/1244 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means, e.g. stops, projections, detents or the like, for improving positioning of the mechanism or for limiting the movement of the mechanism to avoid shocks against the bicycle frame.

B62M 9/1246 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means using cams or plates for limiting or positioning the shifting mechanism.

B62M 9/1248 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The arrangement, the location and the functioning of the biasing means in relation with the shifting mechanism. Given that all the shifting mechanism in general discloses biasing or spring means, this sub-group is meant to be used for those shifting mechanism in which a particular emphasis is placed on the arrangement of the biasing means of the shifting mechanism, the particular form of these biasing means or on special effects expected by these means.

B62M 9/125 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Mounting or arrangement of the rear derailleur onto the bicycle frame.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Frame part to receive other cycle parts or accessories

B62K 19/30

B62M 9/126 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Chain guide components and characteristic features thereof; mounting of the chain guide on the movable member. The chain guide in general comprises a pair of cage plates and two chain pulleys rotationally supported between the cage plates. The movable member connects the chain guide to the linkage mechanism.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tensioning or adjusting equipment for chains, belts or the like

B62M 9/16

B62M 9/127 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means specially adapted for use on a rear derailleur for receiving, guiding or mounting cables in order to facilitate the smooth operation of the derailleur and the cable. These means could be for example cable pulleys, sleeves, special grooves or projections.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Actuators for gearing speed change mechanism specially adapted for bicycles with mechanical transmitting systems e.g. levers, cables

B62M 25/02

Means for transmitting linear movement in a flexible sheathing, e.g. "Bowden-mechanisms"

F16C 1/10

B62M 9/128 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices which are not forming actual part of the derailleur but are for use with the derailleur for a particular purpose, e.g. the protection of the rear derailleur.

B62M 9/131 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for shifting the chain laterally on the cycle cluster sprockets situated close to the pedal crank of a cycle or similar vehicle.

B62M 9/132 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Electric or fluid assisted front derailleurs and control methods therefor for shifting chains by front derailleurs. Contrary to the directly manual actuated derailleur, these shifting devices are assisted by a small electric or fluid operated servos connected to the derailleur mechanism.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Actuators for gearing speed-change mechanisms specially adapted for cycles with electrical or fluid transmitting systems

B62M 25/08

B62M 9/133 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Front derailleurs having the chain moved laterally without rider intervention. The chain guide movement is controlled automatically in accordance with pre-set parameters, e.g. the crank speed or the pressure on the pedals.

B62M 9/134 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Front derailleurs comprising all or most of the following features: a fixed member connected to the bicycle frame, a base member, a linkage mechanism, a movable member and chain guides, cable receiving and connecting portions, springs or the like devices. The linkage mechanism insures proper lateral shift movement of the chain over the different rear sprockets by acting on the chain guide. The mechanism can comprise articulated linkages, plates, cams or telescopic shafts.

B62M 9/1342 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Details of the linkage mechanism, e.g. articulated parallelograms or quadrilateral systems, connecting the base member to the chain guide in order to move the chain guide laterally relative to the base member. In general the linkage mechanism also comprises a cable fixing portion.

B62M 9/1344 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means, e.g. stops, projections, detents or the like, for improving positioning of the mechanism or for limiting the movement of the mechanism to avoid shocks against the bicycle frame.

B62M 9/1346 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means using cams or plates for limiting or positioning the shifting mechanism.

B62M 9/1348 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The arrangement, the location and the functioning of the biasing means in relation with the shifting mechanism. Given that all the shifting mechanism in general discloses biasing or spring means, this sub-group is meant to be used for those shifting mechanism in which a particular emphasis is placed on the arrangement of the biasing means of the shifting mechanism, the particular form of these biasing means or on special effects expected by these means.

B62M 9/135 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Mounting or arrangement of the rear derailleur onto the bicycle frame.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Frame part to receive other cycle parts or accessories

B62K 19/30

B62M 9/136 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Chain guide components and characteristic features thereof; mounting of the chain guide on the movable member. The chain guide comprises, in general, a pair of cage plates and two chain pulleys rotationally supported between the cage plates. The movable member connects the chain guide to the linkage mechanism.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tensioning or adjusting equipment for chains, belts or the like

B62M 9/16

B62M 9/137 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means specially adapted for use on a front derailleur for receiving, guiding or mounting cables in order to facilitate the smooth operation of the derailleur and the cable. These means could be for example cable pulleys, sleeves, special grooves or projections.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Actuators for gearing speed change mechanism specially adapted for bicycles with mechanical transmitting systems e.g. levers, cables

B62M 25/02

Means for transmitting linear movement in a flexible sheathing, e.g. "Bowden-mechanisms"

F16C 1/10

B62M 9/138 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices which are not forming actual part of the derailleur but are for use with the derailleur for a particular purpose, e.g. the protection of the front derailleur.

B63B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Details of hulls, hydrofoils and keels

Other structural parts of ships or other waterborne vessels

Docking, moving and anchoring equipment

Equipment for navigation, position-marking, signalling or lighting

Equipment for controlling and indicating vessel attitude

Onboard safety features

Cleaning of ships or other waterborne vessels

Means for controlling ballast or for removing unwanted onboard water

Loading equipment or accommodation for cargo or passengers

Other

Relationship between large subject matter areas

B63B is the general home for ships or other waterborne vessels, and covers in particular their hydrostatic, hydrodynamic, structural and design features. It is also the place for equipment adapted for use on ships, and onboard arrangements thereof. Further it provides a residual place for equipment for shipping, wherein 'shipping' is interpreted in its broadest sense.

Whilst methods of designing, building, maintaining, converting, repairing of vessels are classified in B63B, subclass B63C covers the storing and handling of ships or other waterborne vessels to and from a non-floating position, e.g. launching, hauling-out, dry-docking, as well as equipment usable both on slipways and dry docks. B63C also covers salvaging of disabled, stranded or sunken vessels.

B63B covers onboard safety equipment and handling of lifeboats, yet devices for life-saving in water are classified in B63C.

Whilst vessels or floating structures for aircraft are classified in B63B, military aircraft carriers and other vessels characterised by their offensive or defensive capabilities, such as submarines, are classified in B63G.

Whilst B63B provides for the hydrodynamic and hydrostatic features of ships and other waterborne vessels (e.g. hulls, hydrofoils, keels), details of marine propulsion and steering (e.g. propellers or paddle wheels and their arrangement on vessels, sails, jets propulsion, oars, rudders) are classified in B63H.

B63B 29/00 provides for crew or passenger accommodation, yet B63J covers all other auxiliary equipment designed to render vessels habitable or operative (e.g. fresh water production, ventilation, heating and cooling arrangements).

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Launching, hauling-out, or dry-docking of vessels; Life-saving in water; Equipment for dwelling or working under water; Means for salvaging or searching for underwater objects

B63C

Offensive or defensive arrangements on vessels; Mine-laying; Mine-sweeping; Submarines; Aircraft carriers

B63G

Marine propulsion or steering

B63H

Arrangements on vessels of installations for producing fresh water; Arrangements on vessels of ventilation, heating, cooling, or air-conditioning; Driving of vessel auxiliaries; Arrangements on vessels of installations for treating waste-water or sewage;

B63J
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Fire-fighting vessels

A62C 29/00

Convertible vehicles, i.e. vehicles capable of travelling in or on different media, e.g. amphibious vehicles;

B60F

Water flotation gear for lighter-than-air aircraft

B64B 1/68

Aircraft alighting gear comprising floats

B64C 25/54

Flying-boat hulls

B64C 35/02

Emergency flotation gear for aircraft

B64D 25/18

Floating bridges

E01D 15/14

Floating substructures as supports of dredgers or soil-shifting machines

E02F 9/06

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fishing

A01K 69/00-A01K 97/00

Air-cushion vehicles

B60V

Large containers for use in or under water

B65D 88/78

Transport or storage devices, conveyors, cableways, per se; Shore-based equipment for loading and unloading ships

B65G

Cranes; Load-engaging elements or devices for cranes, capstans, winches or tackles

B66C

Capstans; Winches; Tackles, e.g. pulley blocks; Hoists

B66D

Hoisting, lifting, hauling, in general

B66F

Ropes or cables in general

D07B

Equipment for shipping on coasts, in harbours or on other fixed marine structures, e.g. for landing purposes

E02B 3/20

Artificial islands mounted on piles or like supports; Construction methods therefor

E02B 17/00

Ship-lifting devices, e.g. locks

E02C

Ropes, predominantly used for driving purposes; Chains

F16G

Pipes or hoses; Joints or fittings therefor; Supports for pipes, cables or protective tubing; Thermal insulation in general

F16L

Functional features or details of lighting devices or systems thereof, in general

F21V

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Attitude

The position of a vessel in relation to the horizontal plane.

Bilge

Part of the hull and corresponding compartment of a ship where the hull sides curve inward to meet at the keel.

Bilge keel

Longitudinally extending profile protruding from the outer surface of the bilge, for resisting rolling motion.

Bulkhead

An upright wall within the hull of a ship, separating hull compartments.

Davit

A crane on the side or stern of a ship for raising and lowering loads, often arranged in pairs for lowering lifeboats.

Fender

A buffer to protect a vessel's hull from chafing or collision with a wharf or with other vessels.

Keel

A longitudinal beam around which the hull is built; a subsurface fin protruding from the hull to afford directional control and stability

Lashing

Fastening a movable body with a cord or the like.

Mooring

Securing a boat or vessel in a particular place, e.g. by tying-up or anchoring.

Port

A door, gate or closable opening.

Shipping

Ships collectively. Navigation. The act of putting persons or things onboard ship or transporting them by ship.

Stability

The ability of a floating vessel to remain upright or return to an upright position when disturbed.

Trimming

Adjustment or division of ballast and/or cargo to alter a vessel's draft or trim. The distribution of buoyancy and load.

Winch

A hoisting or hauling device comprising a driven rotating drum around which a rope passes

Synonyms and Keywords

AOV

Automously Operated Vehicle

FPSO

Floating Production Storage and Offloading (unit, vessel)

GPS

Global Positioning System

LASH

Lighter Aboard SHip (carrier)

RADAR

RAdio Detection And Ranging

ROV

Remotely Operated Vehicle

SONAR

SOund Navigation And Ranging

In patent documents the following expressions/words

"berth" and "mooring place"

"canoe", "Canadian or Indian canoe", and "Canadian"

"centreboard" and "daggerboard"

"side board" and "lee-board"

"sailboard", "windsurfing board" and "windsurfer"

are often used as synonyms.

In patent documents the expressions/words "docking" and "mooring" are often used instead of "tying-up" which is used in the classification scheme of this subclass.

In patent documents the expression/word "stem" is often used with the meaning "stern".

In patent documents the expression/word "fouling" is often used with the meaning "to cause something, e.g. an anchor, a cable or a propeller, to become entangled".

B63B 1/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Determining hydrodynamic or hydrostatic features

B63B 9/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Decreasing pitch, roll, or like unwanted vessel movements by using foils acting on ambient water

B63B 39/06

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Hydrofoil

A wing-like structure positioned below a hull which creates hydrodynamic lift when a vessel is moved through the water at speed. The term is also used to describe vessels which use hydrofoil features to lift the hull out of the water at speed, thereby reducing drag.

Planing surface

Part of the hull of a light water craft of the hydroplane type which generates hydrodynamic lift when skimming over the water surface at high speed.

B63B 1/18 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Controlling submarine attitude or depth by hydroplanes

B63G 8/18

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Hydroplane

A light water craft which skims over the water surface at high speeds.

B63B 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Designing, building, maintaining, or repairing methods

B63B 9/00

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Frame

A beam-like steel structure secured to the shell of a hull to increase its strength and rigidity. A vertical transverse constructional section through a ship’s hull.

B63B 3/32 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Web beam

A strengthened beam built from plate-like webs and stiffening flanges.

Web frame

A strengthened frame built from plate-like high webs and stiffening flanges.

B63B 3/40 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Stern frame

A strong structural assembly forming the stern construction, often comprising a rudder shoe and a stern boss.

Stern post

A strong structural hull member extending upward from the keel at the stern, often comprising a rudder shoe and a stern boss.

B63B 3/42 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Shaft bracket

A bracket for supporting a propeller shaft extending external to the hull, e.g. on twin propeller vessels.

B63B 3/46 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Stem

A structural member extending upward from the keel at the bow of a ship’s hull.

B63B 3/50 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Vaulted deck

A deck of arched or rounded shape.

B63B 3/54 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Hatch coaming

A raised lip around a hatch opening to prevent unwanted ingress of surface water when the hatch is open.

B63B 3/64 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Keelson

A longitudinal structural member secured to the keel and arranged parallel to the keel and above the transverse members such as timbers, frames or floors to increase longitudinal strength and rigidity, and to bind the keel to the transverse members.

B63B 3/66 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Grating

A framework of wooden or metal bars.

B63B 3/68 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Lining

An internal protective wall covering, e.g. for heat or acoustic insulation.

Panelling

A wall facing, wall lining, wainscot.

B63B 5/04 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Carcass

The structural skeleton of a ship, including ribs, keel, stem, and stern-post, after the planks are stripped off.

B63B 5/16 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Monolithic concrete

Concrete, hardened into a solid unbroken mass

B63B 7/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connection of valves to inflatable elastic bodies

B60C 29/00

B63B 9/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hydrodynamic testing; Arrangements in or on ship-testing tanks

G01M 10/00

B63B 9/08 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Balance

Equilibrium.

B63B 11/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cleaning of tanks

B63B 57/00

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Bunker

A compartment for solid or fluid fuel.

B63B 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Draining means for hatches

B63B 19/26

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Bailing

Pumping or scooping out water that has entered the interior of a vessel or water craft.

Scupper

A deck-level hole in a ship’s side to allow water to drain overboard.

B63B 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Loading or unloading equipment

B63B 27/00

Sails, running rigging

B63H 9/00

Masts or staying in general

E04H

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Superstructure

Those parts of a ship, other than masts and rigging, which protrude above the main deck.

B63B 15/02 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Stay

An inclined rope or cable forming part of the standing rigging, used for imparting lateral stability to a mast or other superstructures.

B63B 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Centrifugal bilge-water separators

B04B

B63B 17/02 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Awning

A roof-like removable or fixed covering, e. g. of canvas, used as a shelter from sun or rain, in particular above a deck of a vessel.

B63B 17/04 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Stanchion

An upright support, often for the ship’s guard rail or bulwark.

B63B 17/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Removal of domestic or like refuse

B65F

B63B 19/00 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Porthole

A typically circular window in the side of a boat or ship.

B63B 19/02 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Clear-view screen

A glass disk mounted in a window, usually on the bridge of a ship, that rotates at high speed to disperse rain, spray, and snow, typically driven at the centre of the screen.

B63B 19/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ventilation

B63J 2/02

B63B 19/12 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Hatchway

A square or oblong opening in the deck of a ship through which cargo can be lowered into the hold.

B63B 19/22 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Hatch beam

A beam placed across a hatch opening to support hatch covers.

B63B 19/24 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Cleat

A device to which ropes may be fastened, featuring two horns extending parallel to the surface on which it is mounted.

B63B 21/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Buoys for mooring vessels

B63B 22/02

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Fluke

A flat blade upon an anchor, designed to penetrate and grip the seabed.

Hawser

Anchor or mooringline, rope or cable; towing rope, towline.

Shifting

Moving a vessel from one place to another, e.g. from one berth to another, or using an anchor and warp to pull a vessel into position.

Tying-up

Securing a vessel with ropes.

B63B 21/06 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Bollard

A post on a ship to which ropes may be secured.

B63B 21/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Clamping and wedging devices in general; Hooks

F16B

B63B 21/10 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Fairlead

A ring or aperture on a boat to guide ropes and the like, in order to prevent entanglement or rubbing on other structures.

B63B 21/12 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Rat guard

Device to prevent rats from boarding a vessel moored at a dock, e.g. a disk of sheet metal fitted around a hawser.

B63B 21/14 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Hawse-hole

An opening in the hull of a vessel through which an anchor cable or anchor chain passes.

Hawse-pipe

A pipe beneath the hawse-hole through which the anchor cable or anchor chain passes.

B63B 21/48 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Drogue

A funnel-like device deployed in the water behind a vessel to create drag in order to reduce vessel speed or improve stability.

B63B 21/50 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Anchoring arrangements for buoys

B63B 22/04

B63B 21/54 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Boat-hook

A pole-handled hook used for fending off or pulling a boat.

B63B 21/58 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hooks in general

F16B 45/00

B63B 21/62 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Rigid interconnections between pontoons

B63B 35/38

B63B 21/64 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Propulsion of vessels by use of driving mechanisms co-operating with anchored chains or the like

B63H 15/00

Propulsion of vessels by direct engagement with water-bed or ground

B63H 19/08

B63B 21/66 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Salvaging underwater vessels or objects

B63C 7/00

Towed underwater vessels

B63G 8/42

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Fairing

An outer structure designed to reduce drag. A cable fairing improves the cable’s passage through the water by acting as a streamlined sleeve.

B63B 22/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements for cargo transfer at sea using pipe-lines

B63B 27/34

B63B 22/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Signalling or lighting devices

B63B 45/00

Marking of navigational route other than with buoys

B63B 51/00

B63B 22/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connection of valves to inflatable elastic bodies

B60C 29/00

B63B 22/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements between ships and off-shore structures for loading or unloading, using pipe-lines

B63B 27/34

B63B 23/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Life-saving in water

B63C 9/00

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Lifeboat

An open or covered boat, motorized or propelled by wind or muscle power, e.g. by oars, for rescue of crew and passengers at sea.

Lifeboat-like craft

A small auxiliary boat, e.g. dinghy, zodiac or jolly-boat, carried on a larger vessels, e.g. for providing access to the shore or for transfer to other vessels.

Tackle

A combination of pulley-blocks and a rope for facilitating hoisting or lowering of heavy bodies.

B63B 23/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for recovering craft from water

B66C 13/02

B63B 23/24 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Slewing

Turning (a thing) round upon its own axis, or without shifting it from its place.

B63B 23/36 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Skid fender

A removable fender strip which facilitates launching of lifeboats over a ship’s side whilst offering protection from damage by striking against the side of the ship.

B63B 23/66 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bilge or keelblocks for use on slipways and in dry docks

B63C 5/04

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Block

A support for facilitating storage of boats, typically matching the boat’s hull shape.

Chock

A pad, packing or bedding typically from wood or an elastomeric material, used for distributing localised loads acting on a boat’s or ship’s hull, e.g. from struts or shores ; a wooden support upon which a boat rests when stowed on a vessel, e.g. on the vessel’s deck

B63B 25/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Constructive aspects of cargo-spaces

B63B 11/00

Hatches, hatchways

B63B 19/12

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Stowing

The placing and securing of cargo on board of a vessel, e.g. in the hold; The storing of provisions between decks.

B63B 25/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Insulating panellings

B63B 3/68

Arrangements for heating or cooling on vessels

B63J 2/12

B63B 25/24 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Dunnage

Material or packaging deployed around cargo to secure it during transportation.

B63B 27/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Shore-based equipment for loading or unloading ships

B65G 67/60

Elevators, escalators or moving walkways per se

B66B

Dispensing, delivering, or transferring liquids, not otherwise provided for

B67D

Pipes or hoses per se

F16L

Pipe-lines per se

F17D

B63B 27/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Derricks per se

B66C 23/60

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Derrick

A crane for hoisting heavy loads, comprising a movable boom and furnished with suitable tackle for loading and unloading cargo.

B63B 27/12 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Gantry crane

A bridge crane travelling on rails and supported on a frame or platform.

B63B 27/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Inboard ladders

B63B 29/20

Loading ramps per se

B65G 69/28

Ladders per se

E06C

B63B 27/18 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Breeches-buoy

A rescue device used to evacuate personnel from wrecked vessels, typically comprising a circular buoyant ring with an integral sit harness. The buoy is suspended on a zip-wire and designed to be hauled to the safety of shore or an adjacent vessel.

B63B 27/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement of devices with throwing action

B63B 27/26

Arrangement of chutes

B63B 27/28

B63B 27/25 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Conveying materials in bulk through troughs, pipes, or tubes by floating the materials, or by flow of gas, liquid, or foam

B65G 53/00

B63B 27/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mechanical throwing machines for articles or solid materials per se

B65G 31/00

B63B 27/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Chutes per se

B65G 11/00

B63B 27/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for facilitating retrieval of floating objects per se

B66C 13/02

B63B 29/08 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Fiddle

A guardrail used on a table during rough weather to prevent things from slipping off.

B63B 29/10 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Berth

A bed, bunk or sleeping-place in a ship, usually narrow and fixed to a wall.

B63B 29/16 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Soil-water

Used waste-water, e.g. used for washing, bathing, cleaning, flushing. Sewage from water closets.

B63B 29/22 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Galley

The cooking-room or kitchen on a ship.

B63B 35/00 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Pontoon

A stationary floating structure, typically used for support purposes, e.g. landing stages.

B63B 35/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fishing

A01K 69/00-A01K 97/00

B63B 35/16 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Trawler

A fishing boat that uses a trawl net or dragnet.

B63B 35/18 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Dragging

Drawing or pulling with force something which is heavy and resists motion; hauling.

B63B 35/28 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Barge

A flat-bottomed boat, built mainly for river and canal transport of heavy goods, often not self-propelled but towed or pushed by towboats.

Lighter

A flat-bottomed barge, typically unpowered, used for transferring goods and passengers to and from moored ships.

B63B 35/32 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Pollution

Harmful substances left in the environment.

B63B 35/38 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Draft

The vertical distance between the waterline and the bottom of the hull. A large draft increases stability in high winds, whilst a small draft allows a vessel to navigate through shallower waters.

B63B 35/44 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Buildings adapted to withstand floods

E04H 9/14

B63B 35/54 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Propulsion of chain ferries

B63H

Propulsion of ferries by water current

B63H 19/04

B63B 35/56 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Use of lighting devices or systems for signalling on lightships

F21W 111/043

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Lightship

A ship equipped like a lighthouse and anchored where a permanent lighthouse would be impracticable

B63B 35/58 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Collapsible, foldable, inflatable, or like vessels

B63B 7/00

B63B 35/66 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Towing or pushing equipment

B63B 21/56

B63B 35/71 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Collapsible, foldable, inflatable or like vessels

B63B 7/00

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Canoe

A small boat propelled by a single-bladed paddle. Variants include open-topped (Canadian) canoes in which the paddler is seated and decked canoes in which the paddler kneels.

Kayak

A small boat with a covered deck and propelled by a double-bladed paddle. The kayak has one or more cockpits to accommodate paddlers in a seated position.

B63B 35/79 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Sailboard

A wind-propelled surfboard.

Surf-board

A recreational board-like planing hull for supporting a user. These may gravity- propelled for riding on the slope or crest of a wave, or wind-propelled when equipped with a sail.

B63B 35/81 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Water sledge

A small sledge-like buoyant device with planing hull and propelled by towing; a small buoyant device for partly supporting a user, when riding down white-water.

B63B 35/83 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Bog shoes

Buoyant devices attachable to one’s feet to assist with walking upon boggy or swampy terrain or morass.

Water shoes

Buoyant devices attachable to one’s feet to assist with walking upon water.

B63B 38/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Vessels characterised by load- accommodating arrangements

B63B 25/00

Fire- extinguishing vessels

A62C 29/00

Mine-laying and mine-sweeping vessels, submarines, aircraft carriers, vessels characterised by their offensive or defensive arrangements

B63G

B63B 39/00 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Pitch

The rotary motion of a vessel about its transverse axis.

Roll

The rotary movement of a vessel about its longitudinal axis.

B63B 39/04 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Gyroscope

A rapidly rotating mass used for decreasing vessel movements, in particular roll.

B63B 41/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Keels integral with hull

B63B 3/38

Stabilising foils

B63B 39/06

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Centreboard

A retractable keel arranged centrally on sailboats to prevent leeward drift.

Drop keel

A retractable keel that can be moved between deployed and retracted positions, to allow sailing in shallow waters.

Side board

A retractable keel at the side of a sailing boat or sailing vessel, that can be moved between deployed and retracted positions, to allow sailing in shallow waters.

B63B 43/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fire-fighting in ships

A62C 3/10

B63B 43/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Conduits for emptying or ballasting

B63B 13/00

B63B 43/12 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Inboard

Within the sides of a ship or vessel, or inside the hull of a ship or vessel.

B63B 43/16 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Collision mat

A large square of canvas, treated with a sealing agent and attached to lines at each corner, hauled over a damaged part of the hull to limit the inflow of water.

B63B 45/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement of signalling or lighting devices, the mounting or supporting thereof or circuits therefor, for vehicles in general

B60Q

Vehicle lighting devices

F21S 8/10

Functional features or details of lighting devices or systems thereof; Structural combinations of lighting devices with other articles, not otherwise provided for

F21V

Use of lighting devices in water vehicles

F21W 101/04

Use of lighting devices or systems for signalling on waterways

F21W 111/04

B63B 45/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fog horns

G10K 9/00

B63B 49/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Nautical measuring instruments

G01C

Radio navigation, analogous arrangements using other waves

G01S

Sonar systems for mapping or imaging

G01S 15/89

Vessel-based electric or magnetic prospecting or detecting

G01V 3/15

B63B 51/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Buoys specially adapted for marking a navigational route

B63B 22/16

B63B 51/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Use of lighting devices or systems for signalling on lighthouses or lightships

F21W 111/043

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Lighthouse

A fixed structure in the form of a tower equipped with a strong light visible to mariners for warning them of obstructions, for marking harbour entrances, etc.

Lightship

A ship equipped like a lighthouse and anchored where a permanent lighthouse would be impracticable

B63B 51/04 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Flare

A device that produces a bright light for signaling, illumination, or identification.

B63B 57/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tank cleaning in general

B08B 9/08

B63B 59/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cleaning in general

B08B

Cleaning of vehicles in general, e.g. windscreen wipers

B60S

Inhibiting corrosion of metals by anodic or cathodic protection

C23F 13/00

B63B 59/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fenders on coasts, in harbours or on other fixed marine structures

E02B 3/26

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Rubbing strake

A protective strip running along the length of the upper hull to prevent damage when coming alongside other structures or vessels.

B63B 59/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Anti-fouling paints

C09D 5/16

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Fouling

The growth of marine organisms such as barnacles in the underwater portion of a ship’s hull.

B63B 59/10 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Trolley

A carriage running on wheels, self-propelled or towed by ropes.

B65B 9/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Machines, apparatus, or methods for enclosing successive articles, or quantities of material, in flat, folded, or tubular webs of flexible sheet material or for subdividing filled flexible tubes to form packages. Quantities of material comprise for example volumes of liquid or other fluent material or masses or numbers of small objects, distinct from separate or individual articles.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Combinations of cutting and packaging machines specially adapted for sugar

C13B 45/02

Packaging of ammunition or explosive charges

F42B 39/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Machinery characterised by making rectangular envelopes or bags of flat form

B31B 19/00

Inserting documents in prepared envelopes and closing the latter

B43M 3/00, B43M 5/00

Packages comprising articles or materials wholly enclosed in tubes or webs of flexible sheet material

B65D 75/00

Special rules of classification

For subgroups B65B 9/067 and B65B 9/073, B65B 9/087 and B65B 9/093, B65B 9/207 and B65B 9/213 multiple classification is applied. If an invention involves both, continuous and intermittent web motion defined by these pairs of subgroups, it is classified in both of these subgroups.

Synonyms and Keywords

HFFS

Horizontal Form-Fill-Seal

VFFS

Vertical Form-Fill-Seal

B65B 9/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Machines, apparatus, or methods for enclosing successive articles, or quantities of material, between opposed webs.

B65B 9/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Machines, apparatus, or methods for enclosing successive articles, or quantities of material, in a longitudinally-folded web, or in a web folded into a tube about the articles or quantities of material placed upon it.

Longitudinal folding can comprise a plurality of folds, e.g. providing gussets.

Typically, the articles or quantities of material are placed upon a horizontally travelling web and are fed in a direction with a component in the web conveying direction.

The longitudinal sealing edges of the folded web can be located anywhere around the web conveying direction, e.g. laterally or above the articles or quantities of material placed upon a horizontally travelling web.

Special rules of classification

For subgroups B65B 9/067 and B65B 9/073 multiple classification is applied. If an invention involves both, continuous and intermittent web motion, it is classified in both groups B65B 9/067 and B65B 9/073.

Synonyms and Keywords

HFFS

Horizontal Form-Fill-Seal

B65B 9/067 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Machines, apparatus, or methods for enclosing successive articles, or quantities of material, in a longitudinally-folded web, or in a web folded into a tube about the articles or quantities of material placed upon it, whereby the web advances continuously.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

advancing continuously

advancing with a velocity always greater than zero, whereby the velocity can be constant or variable

B65B 9/073 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Machines, apparatus, or methods for enclosing successive articles, or quantities of material, e.g. liquids or semiliquids, in a longitudinally-folded web, or in a web folded into a tube about the articles or quantities of material placed upon it, whereby the web has an intermittent motion.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

intermittent motion

advancing with intermediate periods of standstill, with a stop and go movement where the velocity temporarily is equal to zero

B65B 9/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Machines, apparatus, or methods for enclosing successive articles, or quantities of material, in a web folded and sealed transversely to form pockets which are subsequently filled and then closed by sealing.

Special rules of classification

For subgroups B65B 9/087 and B65B 9/093 multiple classification is applied. If an invention involves both, continuous and intermittent web motion, it is classified in both groups B65B 9/087 and B65B 9/093.

B65B 9/087 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Machines, apparatus, or methods for enclosing successive articles, or quantities of material, e.g. liquids or semiliquids, in a web folded and sealed transversely to form pockets which are subsequently filled and then closed by sealing, whereby the web advances continuously.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

advancing continuously

advancing with a velocity always greater than zero, whereby the velocity can be constant or variable

B65B 9/093 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Machines, apparatus, or methods for enclosing successive articles, or quantities of material, e.g. liquids or semiliquids, in a web folded and sealed transversely to form pockets which are subsequently filled and then closed by sealing, whereby the web has an intermittent motion.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

intermittent motion

advancing with intermediate periods of standstill, with a stop and go movement where the velocity temporarily is equal to zero

B65B 9/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Machines, apparatus, or methods for enclosing successive articles, or quantities of material, e.g. liquids or semiliquids, in preformed tubular webs, or in webs formed into tubes around filling nozzles, e.g. extruded tubular webs.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Sausage-making

A22C 11/00

B65B 9/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Machines, apparatus, or methods for enclosing successive articles, or quantities of material, in webs being formed into tubes in situ around the filling nozzles.

Typically, the tube and the filling nozzle extend along a vertical axis.

Special rules of classification

For subgroups B65B 9/207 and B65B 9/213 multiple classification is applied. If an invention involves both, continuous and intermittent web motion, it is classified in both groups B65B 9/207 and B65B 9/213.

Synonyms and Keywords

VFFS

Vertical Form-Fill-Seal

B65B 9/207 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Machines, apparatus, or methods for enclosing successive articles, or quantities of material, in webs being formed into tubes in situ around the filling nozzles, whereby the web advances continuously.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

advancing continuously

advancing with a velocity always greater than zero, whereby the velocity can be constant or variable

B65B 9/213 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Machines, apparatus, or methods for enclosing successive articles, or quantities of material, in webs being formed into tubes in situ around the filling nozzles, whereby the web has an intermittent motion.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

intermittent motion

advancing with intermediate periods of standstill, with a stop and go movement where the velocity temporarily is equal to zero

B65B 9/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Machines, apparatus, or methods for forming shoulders when enclosing successive articles, or quantities of material in webs being formed into tubes in situ around the filling nozzles.

Tube formers for forming webs into tubes in situ around the filling nozzles, when enclosing successive articles, or quantities of material, therein.

B65B 29/04 - Definition

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Floatable furniture for life-saving in water

B63C 9/30

B65D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Rigid or semi-rigid containers in general (e.g. containers formed by folding or erecting one or more blanks of stiff paper) that are used for temporarily holding goods or materials during their storage or transport, which goods or materials are intended to be eventually removed from the container for their intended purpose.

Structural details of, and fittings for, rigid or semi-rigid containers (e.g. linings, partitions, inspection windows, handles, nesting/stacking features), not covered elsewhere.

Flexible containers in general (e.g. sacks, bags, squeezable toothpaste tubes) that are used for temporarily holding goods or materials during their storage or transport, which goods or materials are intended to be eventually removed from the container for their intended purpose.

Structural details of, and fittings for, flexible containers, not covered elsewhere.

Devices or structure for closing access openings for flexible, rigid or semi-rigid containers to prevent spillage of the goods or materials stored therein (e.g. caps, crown seals, foil or paper covers, lids or discs).

Structural details of access openings for flexible, rigid or semi-rigid containers that are specially adapted to cooperate with, or are characterized by the form of, the closure devices or structure used with them (e.g. screw thread around opening).

Means for securing the above closure devices, filling and discharging devices, arrangements for preventing refilling (e.g. by tampering or adding unwanted or noxious substances), means for discouraging unauthorized opening (e.g. child-proof closures), and other details.

Kinds or types of packaging elements, e.g. external or internal frames, straps for bundling, wrappers etc.

Kinds or types of packages, e.g. bundles, bales, articles attached to cards, sheets or webs or (partially) enclosed in strips, sheets, blanks, tubes or webs of flexible sheet material, and packages formed by enclosing articles or materials in preformed containers.

Containers, packaging elements or packages of special types or forms, or specially adapted for organisms, articles or materials presenting particular transport, storage or dispensing problems; such as for frangible material, storing in vacuum or superatmospheric pressure, preventing deterioration or decay of contents.

Containers specially adapted for particular articles or materials, e.g. tyres, cigarettes, spaghetti, eggs, optical apparatus, bricks, tape cassettes, sweets, jumbo rolls, machines or engines, ice-cream, poisons or corrosive chemicals.

Large containers, e.g. of ISO type (see Glossary), especially for bulk storage or for carrying freight.

Containers, packaging elements or packages with auxiliary means or provision for displaying articles or materials.

Methods of packaging which are wholly characterised by the form of the package produced or the form of the container or packaging element used.

Constructional features of foldable or erectable containers or wrapper blanks, including containers or wrappers formed by folding or erecting such blanks.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass is intended to be as comprehensive as possible. However, subject matter not classified in B65D is explained below under ‘Special rules of classification within this subclass’.

Relationship with subclass B65B

There is some affinity between this subclass and subclass B65B which covers machines, apparatus or devices for, or methods of, packaging articles or materials. This subclass (B65D) covers methods of packaging that are wholly characterised by the form of the package produced or by the form of the container or packaging element used, as distinct from the operations performed or the apparatus employed, which are covered by subclass B65B.

Relationship with subclasses B67B, B67C and B67D

There is also affinity between this subclass and subclasses B67B, B67C and B67D. B67B covers methods or apparatus for applying closure members to bottles, jars or similar containers or for opening closed containers; it also covers securing bottle closures with wire or protecting or decorating such closures, whereas this subclass (B65D) covers the closures themselves.

B67C covers methods or apparatus for filling or emptying of bottles or other containers, while this subclass (B65D) covers constructions of containers or closures that allow filling or emptying. B67D covers methods or apparatus for dispensing, delivering or transferring liquids from containers, while this subclass (B65D) covers constructions of containers or closures that allow such dispensing, delivering or transferring.

Making containers

Reference should be made to subclasses dealing with the working of the material concerned (e.g. class B29) or to subclass B31B in respect of forming foldable or erectable blanks.

Function- and applicatation-orientated aspects of containers or packages

Whilst function-orientated aspects of containers and packages are covered by B65D, it will be readily appreciated that various application-orientated aspects of containers and packages may be classified elsewhere in the scheme. Paragraphs 85-87 of the guide will help to clarify whether an invention lies the function of disclosed technical matter, or the way in which it is applied.

For a non-exhaustive list of possible places where applications of containers and packages may be classified outside of B65D, the reader is directed to the section "References relevant to classification in this subclass" below.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Containers specially adapted for use in dairies

A01J

Receptacles for live fish, containers for angling

A01K

Match boxes, receptacles for cigars, cigarettes or cigarette papers

A24F

Portable containers for personal belongings, e.g. purses, luggage, hand-carried bags

A45C

Containers or accessories specially adapted for handling toiletry or cosmetic substances

A45D

Travelling or camp equipment, sacks or packs carried on the body

A45F

Containers for household or table equipment

A47G

Kitchen containers

A47J

Liquid handling

B67

Storing gases or liquids

F17

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Liquid sprayers; nozzles or spouts

B05B

Making closures by working sheet metal

B21D 51/44

Affixing labels

B65C 3/06

Special rules of classification

This subclass onlyexcludescontainers or packages of a nature clearly confined to a single other subclass, which are classified in that subclass.

In this subclass, groups B65D 5/00, B65D 27/00, B65D 30/00 or B65D 65/00 include constructional features of foldable or erectable container or wrapper blanks as well as the containers or wrappers formed by folding or erecting such blanks.

Containers, packaging elements or packages classified in group B65D 85/00 are also classified according to their constructional or functional features, if such features are of interest.

Tamper-indicating means for containers of closures are classified in the group appropriate to the type of container or closure, e.g. B65D 5/43, B65D 5/54, B65D 17/00, B65D 27/30, B65D 27/34, B65D 33/34, B65D 41/32, B65D 47/36, B65D 49/12, B65D 51/20, B65D 55/06.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Accessories

In relation to the word "accessories" in the B65D subclass title, this word means fixtures or fittings which are associated with the container to fulfil a particular purpose relative to the functioning of the container.

Blank

Any sheet of paper or other planar material that is pre-shaped, cut/punched out to have holes or slots, perforated/slit to form fold lines, or otherwise modified so that it can subsequently be folded or erected according to a pre-selected pattern to form a container such as a box or carton. Blanks are frequently interim products of a manufacturing process that will require further assembly operations (e.g. corner gluing of carton) to become actual containers. However, the term also covers blanks that require only manual manipulation to fashion or disassemble a container and this is normally done for purposes of economical storage of the container (e.g. folding packing boxes for house moves).

Container

A structure having both a bottom portion for supporting removable contents stored or shipped therein, and a peripheral wall structure for at least partially surrounding or encompassing the contents while stored or transported, including structures where the same physical wall can fulfil both these functions.

Flexible containers

These include:

containers deformed by, or taking up the shape of, their contents; and

containers adapted to be permanently deformed to expel their contents.

Large containers

Containers of approximately the size used in container traffic, variously referred to as freight, shipping, bulk storage, forwarding, "ISO" (International Standardization Organization) or intermodal containers.

Packages

These include:

combinations of containers or packaging elements with articles or materials to be stored or transported; and

articles joined together for convenience of storage or transport.

Packaging elements

These include:

elements, other than containers, for covering, protecting, stiffening or holding together articles or materials to be stored or transported; and

packaging materials of special type or form not provided for in other subclasses.

Paper

In relation to this subclass, this term includes materials, e.g. cardboard, plastic sheet materials, laminated materials or metal foils, worked in a manner analogous to paper.

Rigid or semi-rigid containers

These include:

containers not deformed by, or not taking up the shape of, their contents;

containers adapted to be temporarily deformed to expel their contents;

pallets; and

trays.

B65D 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Details of bottles or jars

B65D 23/00

Bundles of articles held together by packaging elements for convenience of storage or transport, e.g. portable segregating carriers for plural receptacles such as beer cans or pop bottles

B65D 71/00

B65D 1/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Thermally insulated containers

A47J 41/00, B65D 81/38

B65D 1/32 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Containers with disinfecting linings

A61L 2/00

B65D 1/40 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Other container details

B65D 23/00, B65D 25/00

B65D 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bundles of articles held together by packaging elements for convenience of storage or transport, e.g. portable segregating carriers for plural receptacles such as beer cans, pop bottles,

B65D 71/00

B65D 5/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Shells of drawer-and-shell type containers

B65D 5/38

B65D 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Opening arrangements or devices for containers made by winding, bending or folding paper

B65D 3/00, B65D 5/00

Opening devices added or incorporated during filling or closing of containers

B65D 77/30

Separate devices for opening closed containers

B67B 7/00

B65D 23/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hydrodynamic means for influencing the flow of liquids

F15D 1/00

B65D 23/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Wrappers

B65D 65/00

B65D 23/16 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Feeding bottles with thermometers

A61J 9/02

B65D 25/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For pallets

B65D 19/38

Of large containers

B65D 90/00

B65D 25/40 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Nozzles or spouts, in general

B05B

B65D 27/32 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices or processes for the combined stuffing and closing of envelopes

B43M 5/00

Separate devices for opening envelopes

B43M 7/00

B65D 33/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Sack holders

B65B 67/12

B65D 33/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Closures using adhesive applied to integral parts of envelopes

B65D 27/14

B65D 35/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Brushes combined or associated with tubular containers

A46B 11/00

B65D 35/44 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Closure members of interest apart from those used for pliable tubular containers adapted to be permanently deformed to expel contents

B65D 39/00-B65D 55/00

Forming closures after filling

B65B 7/14

B65D 35/46 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Office accessories for applying liquids, e.g. adhesive

B43M 11/00

B65D 39/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Closure flaps or lids attached to, or incorporated in, containers, or foldable or erectable containerblanks, made of paper

B65D 3/00, B65D 5/00

Closure walls of containers specially constructed to be opened by cutting, piercing, or tearing of wall portions

B65D 17/00

Applying closure members to bottles, jars, or similar containers

B67B

Covers or similar closure members, for pressure vessels in general

F16J 13/00

B65D 41/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Closure flaps or lids attached to, or incorporated in, containers, or foldable or erectable containerblanks, made of paper

B65D 3/00, B65D 5/00

Closure walls of containers specially constructed to be opened by cutting, piercing, or tearing of wall portions

B65D 17/00

Applying closure members to bottles, jars, or similar containers

B67B

Covers or similar closure members, for pressure vessels in general

F16J 13/00

B65D 43/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Closure flaps or lids attached to, or incorporated in, containers, or foldable or erectable containerblanks, made of paper

B65D 3/00, B65D 5/00

Closure walls of containers specially constructed to be opened by cutting, piercing, or tearing of wall portions

B65D 17/00

Applying closure members to bottles, jars, or similar containers

B67B

Covers or similar closure members, for pressure vessels in general

F16J 13/00

B65D 43/03 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Nestable or stackable containers

B65D 21/00

B65D 45/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Closure flaps or lids attached to, or incorporated in, containers, or foldable or erectable containerblanks, made of paper

B65D 3/00, B65D 5/00

Closure walls of containers specially constructed to be opened by cutting, piercing, or tearing of wall portions

B65D 17/00

Applying closure members to bottles, jars, or similar containers

B67B

Covers or similar closure members, for pressure vessels in general

F16J 13/00

B65D 45/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Forming levers or links by working wire

B21F 45/04

B65D 47/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Office equipment for applying liquid by contact to surfaces

B43M 11/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fluid-delivery valves in general

F16K 21/00

B65D 47/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Laboratory droppers, burettes and pipettes

B01L 3/00

B65D 47/42 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Swabs for applying media to the human body from an integral supply

A61F 13/40

B65D 49/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Integral, or permanently secured, closures for containers specially adapted to be opened by cutting, piercing, or tearing of wall portions

B65D 17/00

B65D 50/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Closure flaps or lids attached to, or incorporated in, containers, or foldable or erectable containerblanks, made of paper

B65D 3/00, B65D 5/00

Closure walls of containers specially constructed to be opened by cutting, piercing, or tearing of wall portions

B65D 17/00

Applying closure members to bottles, jars, or similar containers

B67B

Covers or similar closure members, for pressure vessels in general

F16J 13/00

B65D 50/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bottles or similar containers with closable apertures at bottom

B65D 1/06

B65D 51/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Closure flaps or lids attached to, or incorporated in, containers, or foldable or erectable containerblanks, made of paper

B65D 3/00, B65D 5/00

Closure walls of containers specially constructed to be opened by cutting, piercing, or tearing of wall portions

B65D 17/00

Applying closure members to bottles, jars, or similar containers

B67B

Covers or similar closure members, for pressure vessels in general

F16J 13/00

B65D 51/32 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Droppers

B65D 47/18

B65D 53/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sealings in general

F16J 15/00

B65D 55/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Applying labels to bottles

B65C 3/06, B65C 9/00

B65D 55/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Seals per se

G09F 3/00

B65D 63/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Flexible elongated elements for supporting pipes, cables or protective tubing

F16L 3/137

B65D 65/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Layered products per se

B32B

B65D 71/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Binding of hay or straw

A01D 59/00, A01F 1/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bundling or baling

B65B, B65B 13/00, B65B 27/00

B65D 73/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Cards for buttons, collar-studs or sleeve-links

A44B 7/00

B65D 75/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Wrapping

B65B 11/00

B65D 77/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Closing filled containers in association with packaging

B65B 7/00, B65B 51/00

B65D 81/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Wrappers with provision for excluding light

B65D 65/16

B65D 83/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Containers or the like for shops, stores, offices, bars or the like

A47F 1/04

Showcases or show cabinets with dispensing arrangements

A47F 3/02

Magazines for screws or nuts in combination with spanners, wrenches or screwdrivers

B25B 23/06

Nail dispensers

B25C 3/00

Coin deliverers

G07D 1/00

B65D 83/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Cigar or cigarette receptacles or boxes, with dispensing means

A24F 15/04, A24F 15/06, A24F 15/14, A24F 15/16

B65D 83/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Spraying or atomising apparatus in general

B05B

B65D 83/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Spraying or atomising apparatus in general

B05B

Siphons, pumping of fluid by direct contact of another fluid

F04F

Vessels for containing or storing compressed, liquefied, or solidified gases

F17C

B65D 83/76 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Hand tools for discharging fluent material through an outlet orifice by pressure

B05C 17/005

B65D 85/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Packages for surgical knives, scalpels or blades therefor

A61B 17/3215

Paint cans

B44D 3/12

Oil cans

F16N 3/00

Containers for carrying smallarms

F41C 33/06

Packaging of ammunition or explosive charges

F42B 39/00

Containers for record carriers, specially adapted for cooperation with the recording or reproducing apparatus

G11B 23/00

B65D 85/28 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pencil boxes

A45C 11/34

B65D 88/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Construction or assembling of bulk storage containers employing civil engineering techniques in situ or off the site

E04H 7/00

B65D 88/12 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Rigid large containers associated with vehicles

B60-B64

B65D 88/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connection of valves to inflatable elastic bodies

B60C 29/00

B65D 88/22 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Flexible large containers associated with vehicles

B60-B64

B65D 88/54 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Filling or emptying bunkers, hoppers, or like containers

B65G 65/30

B65D 88/76 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Manholes; Inspection openings; Covers therefor

B65D 90/10

B65D 88/78 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Manholes; Inspection openings; Covers therefor

B65D 90/10

B65D 90/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Covers or similar closure members, for pressure vessels in general

F16J 13/00

B65D 90/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Castors in general

B60B

B65D 90/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fire-fighting

A62C

B65D 90/32 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Valves per se

F16K

B65D 90/34 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Vehicle fuel tanks characterised by venting means

B60K 15/035

B65D 90/46 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Carrying-off, or preventing the formation of electrostatic charges in general

H05F

B65D 90/50 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Investigating fluid tightness of structures

G01M 3/00

B65D 90/52 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Vehicle fuel tanks with means modifying or controlling distribution or motion of fuel, e.g. to prevent noise, surge, splash or fuel starvation

B60K 15/077

B65D 90/54 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Covers or similar closure members, for pressure vessels in general

F16J 13/00

B65G - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Luggage carriers

A45C 13/38

Holders or carriers for hand articles or for use while travelling or camping

A45F 5/00

Vehicles in general, axles, wheels

B60

Air-cushion vehicles

B60V

Handcarts, sledges, features of hand-propelled wheeled devices or pedestrian-controlled, power-driven vehicles equally applicable to handcarts

B62B

Ship-moving devices

B63C, E02C

Loading or unloading by soil-shifting or like equipment

E02F

Drag-line scraper conveyers

E02F 3/46

Stacking or de-stacking data record cards in association with machines for marking or sensing data

G06K

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Containers, pallets

B65D

Escalators or moving walkways

B66B 21/00

Air-cushions as bearing elements

F16C 29/00

B65G 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Loading or unloading

B65G 65/00

B65G 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Loading or unloading

B65G 65/00

B65G 19/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Loading or unloading

B65G 65/00

B65G 25/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Loading or unloading

B65G 65/00

B65G 27/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Loading or unloading

B65G 65/00

B65G 29/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Loading or unloading

B65G 65/00

B65G 31/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Loading or unloading

B65G 65/00

B65G 33/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Loading or unloading

B65G 65/00

B65G 35/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Loading or unloading

B65G 65/00

B65G 37/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Loading or unloading

B65G 65/00

B65H - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Winding or unwinding metal band or like flexible metallic material during manufacture

B21C

In selective printing mechanisms

B41J

Working or processing wire

B21F, B21G

Unwinding, paying-out, forwarding, or winding ropes or cables in load-moving apparatus

B61B, B65G, B66

Creels, warping, beaming, or leasing machines or methods for textile manufacturing purposes

D02H

In cinematographic or photographic apparatus

G03B

Winding, unwinding, or feeding tape to, in, or from, information-processing apparatus

G06, G11B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Manipulators

B25J

B66B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Transporting apparatus of the types specified herein for people or discrete loads when used in conjunction with buildings, complexes of buildings, mines, or similar scale manmade structures or natural formations (e.g. caves).

Elevating apparatus (i.e., elevators or lifts) for shifting a discrete load (e.g., person(s), freight), in its entirety, a significant distance (e.g., at least the height of a normal floor of a building) from an entry level (e.g., landing) to a vertically spaced exit level along a shaft. To be proper for this subclass, the elevating apparatus must include:

Conveying apparatus (i.e., an assemblage of elements for moving a load along a predetermined path) for transporting pedestrians (i.e., escalators or moving walkways) from an entrance location to at least one horizontally spaced egress location. To be proper for this subclass, the conveying apparatus must:

Components of the elevating or conveying apparatus when:

Ancillary devices (e.g., elevator call registration systems) for either the elevating or conveying apparatus which are:

Explanatory Notes or Graphics

(1) Note. Examples of special adaptations for escalators or moving walkways that facilitate the transport of pedestrians are:

(2) Note. Elevating or conveying apparatus otherwise proper for the definition which is either specially modified for use with, or combined with, apparatus for doing work on or treating (e.g., machine tools, furnaces) the discrete loads being carried (e.g., tools shaping load during elevation, transporting human body during its cremation) are covered in appropriate subclasses for this subject matter.

(3) Note. The load support surfaces of elevators or lifts are intended to support their loads only for a short period of time during handling. Surfaces intended to either support an article in a nonuse storage location, support a useable machine or tool, or move one portion of a machine or article relative to another portion thereof are covered in appropriate subclasses for this subject matter.

(4) Note. The discrete load transported by the elevating apparatus of this subclass is either

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Life-saving devices used as an alternative to normal egress means (e.g., stairs) during rescue to lower persons in cages, bags, or similar supports from buildings or other structures

A62B 1/02

Equipment for handling freight or for facilitating passenger embarkation or the like to aircraft

B64D 9/00

Braking or detent devices controlling normal movements of winding drums or barrels for capstans, hoist, or winches

B66D

Lifting frames, e.g. for lifting vehicles; Platform lifts

B66F 7/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Hoisting or lowering devices for coffins

A61G 19/00

Vessels arrangements of ammunition stores or handlers

B63G 3/00

Transport or storages devices

B65G

Storage articles, individually or in orderly arrangement, in warehouses or magazines

B65G 1/00

Ship-lifting devices or mechanisms

E02C

Garages with mechanical means for shifting or lifting vehicles

E04H 6/12

Feeding or loading of ammunition, magazines or guiding means for extracting cartridges

F41A 9/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Lifting and lowering devices for moving disabled persons or patients

A61G

Amusement rides (e.g., roundabouts, and Ferris wheels) that are, or may include as a part of their structure, elevating or conveying apparatus

A63G

Funicular rail-bound systems with rigid ground-supported tracks and cable traction (e.g., cliff railways)

B61B 9/00

Ski-lift, sleigh-lift, or the like trackless systems with only guided towing cables

B61B 11/00

Devices for lifting or lowering bulky or heavy goods for loading or unloading purposes

B66F

Controlling; Regulating

G05

Signalling

G08

Boards, panels, desks for electric power distribution

H02B 1/015

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Cable

a flaccid, elongated, flexible element that can transmit force (e.g., rope, wire, chain, push-chains).

Drive means

means for supplying motive force to an element to be moved which includes both force generating means (e.g., motor) and structural linkage (e.g., gears) needed to transmit the force from the generating means to the element.

Landing

an in situ floor within a structure (e.g., building) (a) that is located adjacent to an elevator shaft or the entrance or egress points of the conveying apparatus’ path and (b) to or from which a load (e.g., passenger, cargo, pedestrian) transfers during the charging or discharging of the load-underlying support surface of an elevator or conveying apparatus.

Shaft

a long, narrow, in situ passageway within a structure (e.g., building, ship, mine) which defines the fixed path between the vertically spaced load entrance and exit levels traveled by the load-underlying support surface of an elevator.

B66B 1/46 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Electric switches; Relays; Selectors; Emergency protective devices

H01H

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Boards, panels, desks for electric power distribution

H02B 1/015

B66B 1/48 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Applications of limit circuits or of limit-switch arrangement for controlling cranes, capstans, winches or tackles

B66C 13/50

Capstans or winding mechanism using safety gear limit switches

B66D 1/56

B66B 7/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Arrangement in mine shafts

E21D 7/02

B66B 9/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Apparatus for raising or lowering persons

A63J 5/12

B66B 9/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Platforms for lifting or lowering bulky or heavy goods through short distances

B66F 7/00

B66B 9/10 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Conveyers having endless traction element

B65G 17/00

B66B 9/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fork-lift trucks for lifting or lowering bulky or heavy goods

B66F 9/06

B66B 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Locks; Keys; Windows or door fittings; Safes

E05

B66B 13/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for moving wings into open or closed position; Checks for wings; Wings fitting not otherwise provided for, concerned with the functioning of the wing

E05F

B66B 13/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fixed or movable closures for opening in buildings, vehicles, fences, or like enclosure in general

E06B

B66B 17/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Winding towers for mines

E04H 12/26

B66B 17/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transport or storage devices

B65G

B66B 17/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric control systems of elevators in general

B66B 1/06

B66B 19/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Signalling or calling systems; Order telegraphs; Alarm systems

G08B

B66B 29/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Balustrades handrails of variable speed type

B66B 23/26

B67C - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Handling liquefied gases

F17C

B67D - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Handling liquefied gases

F17C

B81B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Very small micro-mechanical devices which include at least one essential operational component that has all of the following attributes:

Very small three-dimensional structural formations (i.e. microstructures) that have all of the following attributes:

Systems including a discrete micro-mechanical device or microstructure and at least one other discrete micro-mechanical device, micro-electronic device, or micro-optical device (e.g. Micro-Mechanical Systems, Micro-Electronic-Mechanical Systems/MEMS, Micro-optical-Mechanical Systems) that have all of the following attributes:

Components of micro-mechanical devices or microstructures having specialized structural features that limit them to use with their device or structure.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

General relationship of microstructures of B81B with micro-sized structures found in the subclasses of sections C and H

The microstructures covered by this subclass are expected to perform a structural function when interacting with their local environment and are intentionally designed to specifically perform this type of task. This requirement precludes the classification of micro-sized structures within this subclass that either

Micro-electronic devices and micro-optical devices per se are classified in the subclasses of section H (Electricity) and G (Physics) even if they also inherently (e.g. a micro-sized wire between two substrates that supports the upper substrate), or intentionally (e.g. an aerodynamically shaped micro-processor on a wing), accomplish a secondary structural function. Micro-electronic devices and micro-optical devices are found in particular in G02B, G11B, H01L, and H01P.

Chemically and biologically formed structures per se that are mere byproducts of processes are classified in the subclasses of section C, "Chemistry; Metallurgy". However, chemically and biologically formed microstructures are classified in B81B when they are the primary intended product of their processes and the microstructures perform a structural function when interacting with their local environment.

Relationship of microstructures of B81B and micro-sized structures in B32B

Microstructures that merely form part of layered products (e.g. bonded or encased micro-sized substrates) are classified in B32B when their intended use is not specified or they are of general utility. However, when at least one of the layers of the layered product is micro-sized and accomplishes a particular structural function (e.g. honeycomb layer forms micro-sized channels for directing fluid to micro-sized pump) they are classified in B81B.

Special rules for classification between this subclass and other subclasses

If the operation or practical utility of micro-sized devices, structures, or systems covered by this subclass are not inherently limited to a microscopic environment, they are also obligatorily classified in the subclasses appropriately providing for their structural or functional features when produced on a larger scale.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Products that are essentially two-dimensional layered structures

B32B

Atomic scale structures produced by manipulation of single atoms or molecules

B82B

Micro-optical devices per se

G02F

Semiconductors or other solid-state devices per se or combined with other devices formed on a common substrate

H01L
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Microcapsules for medicinal preparations

A61K 9/50

Micromanipulators

B25J 7/00

Micromanipulators combined with microscopes

G02B 21/32

Magnetic heads used with record carriers for information storage

G11B 5/127

Waveguide microstrips

H01P 3/08

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Pressure sensors

G01L 9/00

Mechanical vibration measuring devices and ultrasonic, sonic, or infrasonic wave measuring devices

G01H

Devices for measuring linear or angular speed, acceleration, or deceleration

G01P

Photomechanical processing of semiconductor devices

G03F

Special rules of classification

Identical micro-mechanical devices, microstructures, or micro-structural systems that are not operationally interlinked to each other and are merely produced on a common substrate that is an interim product; are not classified as a system, but in the groups providing for the individual device, structure, or system.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Micro-electronic device

Any kind of electronic device that has at least one essential operational component not visible without the use of an optical microscope.

Micro-optical device

Any kind of optical device that has at least one essential operational component not visible without the use of an optical microscope.

Micro-sized

Having a dimension not visible without the use of an optical microscope (e.g. typically within the range of 10-4 to 10-7 meters).

Structural function

The effect of structural features of a microstructure on the mechanical properties of media in contact with the microstructure (e.g. directing of a sampled fluid's flow).

B81C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Processes having one or more steps, or apparatus adapted for performing at least one step in such processes, with specialized features directly related to the manufacture or treatment of specific types of micro-sized products (e.g., typically within the range of 10-4 to 10-7 meters).

The manufacturing or treating of these micro-sized products must create a structural, as opposed to a purely chemical or electronic, feature that is essential to their use.

The types of micro-sized products that are manufactured or treated in this subclass consist of the following varieties:

Mechanical devices (i.e., micro-mechanical devices) which include at least one essential operational component that has all of the following attributes:

Three-dimensional structural formations (i.e., microstructures) that have all of the following attributes:

Systems including a discrete micro-mechanical device or microstructure and at least one other discrete micro-mechanical device, micro-electronic device, or microoptical device (e.g., Micro-Mechanical Systems, Micro-Electronic-Mechanical Systems/MEMS, Microoptical-Mechanical Systems) that have all of the following attributes:

Components of micro-mechanical devices or microstructures having specialized structural features that limit them to use with their device or structure.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

General relationship of B81C with subclasses of sections C and H

This class covers processes or apparatus for the manufacture or treatment of microstructures that perform a structural function when interacting with their local environment and are intentionally designed to specifically perform this type of task. This requirement precludes the classification of the manufacture or treatment of micro-sized structures per se within this subclass that either

However, processes or apparatus for chemically and biologically forming microstructures are classified in B81C when these microstructures are the primary intended product of their processes and the microstructures perform an appropriate structural function when interacting with their local environment.

Processes or apparatus for the manufacture or treatment of chemically and biologically formed micro-sized structures per se are classified in the subclasses of section C, "Chemistry; Metallurgy".

Processes or apparatus for the manufacture or treatment of micro-electronic devices and microoptical devices per se are classified in the subclasses of section H, "Electricity" even if they also inherently (e.g., a micro-sized wire between two substrates that supports the upper substrate), or intentionally (e.g., an aerodynamically shaped micro-processor for wings), accomplish a secondary structural function. The manufacture or treatment of micro-electronic devices and microoptical devices is found in particular in H01L (e.g. H01L 21/00) and H01P (e.g., H01P 11/00) respectively.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Chemical or physical processes or relevant apparatus for making microcapsules or microballoons

B01J 13/02

Specially adapted processes or apparatus restricted to the manufacture or treatment of products that are essentially two-dimensional layered structures

B32B

Specially adapted processes or apparatus involved in the manufacture of atomic scale structures produced by manipulation of atoms or molecules

B82B

For processes or apparatus peculiar to the manufacture or treatment of piezo-electric, electrostrictive, or magnetostrictive elements per se

H01L 41/22

For processes or apparatus specially adapted to the manufacture or treatment of wave-guide micro-strips

H01P 3/08

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For processes or apparatus specially adapted to the manufacture or treatment of pressure sensors

G01L 9/00

For processes or apparatus specially adapted to the manufacture or treatment of acceleration measuring devices

G01P 15/00

For processes or apparatus specially adapted to the manufacture or treatment of micromanipulators structurally combined with microscopes

G02B 21/32

For photomechanical processing of semiconductor devices

G03F

For processes or apparatus specially adapted to the manufacture or treatment of magnetic heads

G11B 5/127

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Manufacture

a chemical, electrical, or mechanical process or apparatus for accomplishing one or more of the following operations on a micro-mechanical device, micro-structure, or micro system proper for this subclass: assembling, associating, bonding, casting, coating, constructing, creating, cutting, distorting, electric photographing, etching, fabricating, fastening, finishing, joining, juxtaposing, machining, molding, positioning, shaping, or working.

Micro-electronic device

any kind of electronic device that has at least one essential operational component not visible without the use of an optical microscope.

Microoptical device

any kind of optical device that has at least one essential operational component not visible without the use of an optical microscope.

Micro-sized

having a dimension not visible without the use of an optical microscope (e.g., typically within the range of 10-4 to 10-7 meters).

Structural function

effect of structural features of a microstructure on the mechanical properties of media in contact with the microstructure (e.g., directing of a sampled fluid's flow).

B82B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Precise arrangements of matter on molecular or atomic level having particularly shaped configurations (i.e. nano-structural assemblages) formed during manufacture which are distinct from both naturally occurring and chemically produced chemical or biological arrangements composed of similar matter, wherein each assemblage includes at least one essential integral element:

The essential integral elements of nano-structural assemblages when they include structural features limiting their use to these assemblages.

The manufacture or treatment of the above type of nano-structural assemblages when the manufacturing or treating creates an essential structural feature of an assemblage and utilizes either:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

General relationship of B82B with section C:

The terminology "particularly shaped configurations ----- distinct from both naturally occurring and chemically produced chemical or biological arrangements composed of similar matter" in the definition statement is intended to preclude classification of chemical or biological structures per se in this subclass that are similar in size. As a practical matter, what is intended by "distinct" in this phrase is that the only nano-sized structures appropriate for this subclass are those that accomplish a function that is not inherent in the chemical or biological composition from which they are formed (e.g. a nano-sized structure shaped so that an atom or molecule component is movable between locations to act as a switch in an electrical operation would be classified in B82B even if it were formed using a method that included a chemical or biological step).

The subclasses under section C, "Chemistry; Metallurgy", specifically provide for the majority of these excluded chemical or biological structures per se, or specially adapted processes or apparatus for the manufacture or treatment thereof (e.g. in classes C08, C12).

Special rules for additional classification in other subclasses:

Except when the operation or practical utility of the nano-structure is inherently completely limited to a microscopic environment, the nano-structures that are covered by this subclass should also be obligatorily classified in subclasses that otherwise appropriately provide for their novel and unobvious structural or functional features.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system

Nanocapsules for medicinal preparations

A61K 9/51

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Investigating or analyzing surface structures in atomic ranges using scanning-probe techniques

G01Q 10/00-G01Q 90/00

Details of apparatus using scanning-probe techniques

G01Q 10/00-G01Q 90/00

Thin magnetic film formed from spin-exchange coupled multi-layers

H01F 10/32

Apparatus or processes specially adapted for manufacturing or assembling devices by applying magnetic films to substrates that are formed from nanostructures

H01F 41/30

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Manufacture

Chemical, electrical, or mechanical process or apparatus for accomplishing one or more of the following operations on a nano structural assemblage or an essential integral element thereof: assembling, associating, bonding, constructing, creating, cutting, distorting, electric photographing, etching, fabricating, fastening, finishing, joining, juxtaposing, positioning, shaping, or working.

C01B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

The chemical elements of hydrogen, halogen (fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine and astatine), oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon, nitrogen, boron, selenium, tellurium, and noble gases (helium, neon, argon, krypton, xenon and radon).

Compounds solely composed of any of the elements listed above.

Carbon and compounds of carbon with any of the elements listed above, with the proviso that said compounds cannot contain a carbon atom having direct bonding to another carbon atom, a carbon atom having direct bonding to a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, or a carbon atom having direct bonding to a nitrogen atom by a single or double bond.

Compounds composed solely of one or more metal atoms and hydrogen.

Peroxides and salts of peroxyacids.

Magnesium, calcium, strontium, or barium sulfides or polysulfides.

Alkali metal sulfides or polysulfides.

Thiosulfates, dithionites and polythionates.

Compounds containing selenium or tellurium.

Azides, metal amides and nitrites.

Carbamic acid and salts thereof.

Binary compounds containing a metal and either N, C or P.

Salts of the oxyacids of halogen or phosphorus.

Compounds consisting only of carbon atoms, e.g. fullerenes, carbon nanotubes.

Phosgene and thiophosgene.

Compounds containing silicon such as silicates, silicon oxides or colloidal silica, e.g. dispersions, gels, hydroorganosols, organosols.

Compounds containing boron.

Substances having molecular sieve properties, but not having base-exchange properties.

Substances having a combination of molecular sieve and base-exchange properties, e.g. crystalline zeolites.

Synthesis, treatment or modification of any of the elements or compounds above by:

Methods of preparing the following compounds, in general:

Apparatus:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In Class C01, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate subclass of this class. For example, lead oxide is classified in subclass C01G rather than in this subclass.

This subclass is a function oriented entry for the chemical elements and their compounds and does not cover the application or use of the elements and compounds under the subclass definition. For classifying such information other entries in IPC exist, for example:

Salts, adducts, or complexes formed between an inorganic compound of this subclass and an organic compound of class C07, are regarded as organic compounds and classified in class C07.

When a process produces multiple compounds only those which are intended or desired require classification and classification may be proper in multiple subclasses.

MULTIPLE CLASSIFICATION

Biocidal, pest attractant, or plant growth regulatory activity of chemical compounds or preparations is further classified in subclass A01P.

Therapeutic activity of chemical compounds or medicinal preparations is further classified in subclass A61P.

Uses of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations are further classified in subclass A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Treatment of inorganic materials to enhance their pigmenting or filling properties; Preparation of carbon black

C09C

Intentional preparation of carbon dioxide by a fermentation process or the use of an enzyme

C12P 1/00

Preparation of elements or inorganic compounds except carbon dioxide, by a fermentation process or the use of an enzyme

C12P 3/00

Production of non-metallic elements or inorganic compounds by electrolysis or electrophoresis

C25B 1/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Processing powders of inorganic compounds preparatory to the manufacturing of ceramic products

C04B 35/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Chemical or physical processes, e.g. catalysts, colloid chemistry; their relevant apparatus

B01J

Inorganic fertilisers

C05D

Organic chemistry

C07

Alloys

C22C

Chemical libraries containing only inorganic compounds or inorganic materials

C40B 40/18

Methods of creating chemical libraries

C40B 50/00

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound or a process of making a compound appropriate for this subclass is classified in the last appropriate place.

In this subclass, tradenames that are often found in scientific and patent literature have been used to define precisely the scope of the groups.

This subclass provides for products which are intended or desired. When a process produces multiple compounds only those which are intended or desired require a classification. However, by-products can be given an additional classification if they or the processes for obtaining them are considered of interest for search.

Inorganic salts of a compound, unless specifically provided for elsewhere, are classified as that compound.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Base-exchange

The replacement of one cation absorbed on a material by another.

Binary compound

A compound containing and limited to two distinct chemical elements.

Direct bonding

Requires a bond between two adjacent atoms.

Inorganic compound

A compound devoid of a carbon atom and containing a non-metallic element, or

a compound containing a carbon atom, and satisfying one of the following criteria:

the compound cannot have a carbon atom having direct bonding to another carbon atom, or

the compound cannot have direct bonding between a carbon atom and a halogen or hydrogen atom, or

the compound cannot have direct bonding between a carbon and a nitrogen atom by a single or double bond.

The following are exceptions to the above and are to be considered as inorganic compounds: compounds consisting of only carbon atoms, (e.g. fullerenes), cyanogen, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, phosgene, thiophosgene, hydrocyanic acid, isocyanic acid, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid, unsubstituted carbamic acid, and salts of the previously mentioned acids and which contain the same limitations as to a carbon atom.

Isomorphous zeolites

Compounds isomorphous to zeolites wherein the aluminum or silicon atoms in the framework are partly or wholly replaced by atoms of other elements, e.g. by gallium, germanium, phosphorus or boron.

Metal

Any element other than a non-metal.

Metal hydride

Compound containing only metal and hydrogen.

Molecular sieve

Materials (e.g. zeolitic, mesoporous) having cavities and channels which by their size allow some molecules to pass through, but prevent others.

Non-metal

The elements of hydrogen, carbon, halogen (fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine and astatine), oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon, nitrogen, boron, selenium, tellurium and noble gases (helium, neon, argon, krypton, xenon and radon).

Preparation

Covers synthesis, purification, separation, stabilisation, or use of additives, unless a separate place is provided in the classification scheme.

Zeolites

(i) Cystalline aluminosilicates with base-exchange and molecular sieve properties, having three dimensional, microporous lattice framework structure of tetrahedral oxide units;

(ii) Compounds isomorphous to those of the former category, wherein the aluminium or silicon atoms in the framework are partly or wholly replaced by atoms of other elements, e.g. by gallium, germanium, phosphorus or boron.

C01B 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Separation of gases by physical means

B01D

Purifying or modifying the chemical compositions of combustible gases containing carbon monoxide

C10K

C01B 3/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Coking liquid carbonaceous materials

C10B 55/00

C01B 4/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Separation of isotopes

B01D 59/00

C01B 25/46 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Solvent extraction in general

B01D 11/00

C01B 31/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Gas carbon production

C10B

C01B 31/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus

B01J 2/00

C01B 31/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Alloys

C22C

C01B 33/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Alloys

C22C

C01B 33/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preparation of aerogels by dehydrating gels

C01B 33/158

C01B 33/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Regeneration thereof

B01J 49/00

C01B 35/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Alloys containing boron

C22C

C01B 39/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Regeneration or reactivation of ion-exchange properties

B01J 49/00

Preparation of stabilised suspensions used in detergents

C11D 3/12

C01C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Ammonia and inorganic compounds thereof which contain at least one ammonium moiety.

Cyanogen and compounds thereof such as:

Synthesis, treatment or modification of any of the compounds above:

Methods of preparing ammonium salts in general.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In Class C01, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate subclass of this class. For example, complexes of nickel and ammonia are classified in C01G 53/12 rather than in this subclass.

This Subclass is a function oriented entry for the compounds themselves and does not cover the application or use of the compounds under the subclass definition. For classifying such information other entries in IPC exist, for example:

Ammonium salts of complex acids (other than complex cyanides) containing a metal in the anion are covered by the relevant groups of subclasses C01D-C01G, according to the metal.

Salts of polybasic acids with ammonium and a metal as cations are classified as though the ammonium were hydrogen.

Complex ammine salts are classified in the relevant groups of subclasses C01D-C01G, according to the metal.

Salts, adducts or complexes formed between an inorganic compound of this subclass and an organic compound of Class C07, are regarded as organic compounds and classified in C07.

When a process produces multiple compounds only those which are intended or desired require classification and classification may be proper in multiple subclasses.

Multiple classification

Biocidal, pest attractant, or plant growth regulatory activity of chemical compounds or preparations is further classified in A01P.

Therapeutic activity of chemical compounds or medicinal preparations is further classified in A61P.

Uses of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations are further classified in A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Salts of the oxyacids of halogens

C01B 11/00

Peroxides, salts of peroxyacids

C01B 15/00

Thiosulfates, dithionites, polythionates

C01B 17/64

Compounds containing selenium or tellurium

C01B 19/00

Azides

C01B 21/08

Metal amides

C01B 21/092

Ammonium salts of carbamic acid

C01B 21/12

Nitrites

C01B 21/50

Phosphides

C01B 25/08

Salts of the oxyacids of phosphorus

C01B 25/16

Ammonium phosphates

C01B 25/28

Compounds containing silicon

C01B 33/00

Compounds containing boron

C01B 35/00

Preparing inorganic compounds except carbon dioxide using enzymes or fermentation processes

C12P 3/00

Electrolytic production of inorganic compounds or non-metals

C25B 1/00

Processes of producing compounds in which electricity is simultaneously produced

C25B 5/00

Electrophoretic production of inorganic compounds or non-metals

C25B 7/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Processing powders of inorganic compounds preparatory to the manufacturing of ceramic products

C04B 35/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Chemical or physical processes, e.g. catalysts, colloid chemistry; their relevant apparatus

B01J

General methods of preparing halides

C01B 9/00

Methods of preparing oxides or hydroxides in general

C01B 13/14

Methods of preparing sulfides or polysulfides in general

C01B 17/20

Methods of preparing sulfites in general

C01B 17/62

Methods of preparing sulphates in general

C01B 17/96

Methods of preparing nitrates in general

C01B 21/48

Methods of preparing carbonates or bicarbonates in general

C01B 31/24

Inorganic fertilisers

C05D

Organic chemistry

C07

Chemical libraries containing only inorganic compounds or inorganic materials

C40B 40/18

Methods of creating chemical libraries

C40B 50/00

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound or a process of making a compound appropriate for this subclass is classified in the last appropriate place.

This subclass provides for inorganic non-metal ammonium compounds and cyanogens and compounds thereof which are intended or desired. When a process produces multiple compounds, only those which are intended or desired require a classification. However, by-products can be given an additional classification if they or the processes for obtaining them are considered of interest for search.

If an inorganic ammonium compound proper for this subclass contains two or more non-metal moieties, then a classification is given in the last relevant subgroup.

Inorganic ammonium compounds that are covered by different subgroups because of alternatively specified non-metal moieties are classified in each relevant subgroup.

Inorganic salts of a compound, unless specifically provided for elsewhere, are classified as that compound.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Direct bonding

Requires a bond between two adjacent atoms.

Inorganic compound

A compound devoid of a carbon atom and containing a non-metallic element or

a compound containing a carbon atom, and satisfying one of the following criteria:

the compound cannot have a carbon atom having direct bonding to another carbon atom, or

the compound cannot have direct bonding between a carbon atom and a halogen or hydrogen atom, or

the compound cannot have direct bonding between a carbon atom and a nitrogen atom by a single or double bond.

The following are exceptions to the above and are to be considered as inorganic compounds: compounds consisting of only carbon atoms, (e.g. fullerenes), cyanogen, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, phosgene, thiophosgene, hydrocyanic acid, isocyanic acid, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid, unsubstituted carbamic acid, and salts of the previously mentioned acids and which contain the same limitations as to a carbon atom.

Moiety

A specific part of a molecule.

Preparation

Covers synthesis, purification, separation, stabilisation or use of additives, unless a separate place is provided in the classification scheme.

C01C 3/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Dicyandiamide

C07C 279/28

C01D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Oxides or hydroxides; halides; sulfates or sulfites; carbonates; nitrates of sodium, potassium or other alkali metals in general.

Compounds of sodium or potassium not provided for elsewhere.

Lithium compounds, e.g. oxides, halides, sulfates, carbonates, nitrates.

Rubidium, caesium or francium compounds.

Synthesis, treatment or modification of any the elements or compounds above by :

Forming shaped alkali metal compounds and the shaped products, per se, e.g. granules.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In Class C01, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate subclass of this class. For example, lead oxide is classified in subclass C01G rather than in this subclass.

This subclass is a function oriented entry for the chemical elements and their compounds and does not cover the application or use of the elements and compounds under the subclass definition. For classifying such information other entries in IPC exist, for example:

Ammonium salts of complex acids (other than complex cyanides) containing a metal in the anion are covered by the relevant groups of this subclass or subclasses C01F, C01G, according to the metal.

Complex ammine salts are classified in the relevant groups of this subclass, or subclasses C01F, C01G, according to the metal.

Salts, adducts, or complexes formed between an inorganic compound of this subclass and an organic compound of class C07, are regarded as organic compounds and classified in class C07.

When a process produces multiple compounds only those which are intended or desired require classification and classification may be proper in multiple subclasses.

MULTIPLE CLASSIFICATION

Biocidal, pest attractant, or plant growth regulatory activity of chemical compounds or preparations is further classified in A01P.

Therapeutic activity of chemical compounds or medicinal preparations is further classified in A61P.

Uses of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations are further classified in A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Metal hydrides

C01B 6/00

Salts of oxyacids of halogens

C01B 11/00

Peroxides, salts of peroxyacids

C01B 15/00

Sulfides or polysulfides of alkali metals

C01B 17/22

Thiosulfates, dithionites, polythionates

C01B 17/64

Compounds containing selenium or tellurium

C01B 19/00

Binary compounds of nitrogen with metals

C01B 21/06

Azides

C01B 21/08

Metal amides

C01B 21/092

Nitrites

C01B 21/50

Phosphides

C01B 25/08

Salts of oxyacids of phosphorous

C01B 25/16

Carbides

C01B 31/30

Compounds containing silicon

C01B 33/00

Compounds containing boron

C01B 35/00

Cyanides

C01C 3/08

Salts of cyanic acid

C01C 3/14

Salts of cyanamide

C01C 3/16

Thiocyanates

C01C 3/20

Preparation of elements or inorganic compounds except carbon dioxide by using micro-organisms or enzymes

C12P 3/00

Obtaining metal compounds from mixtures in a metallurgical process

C22B

Production of non-metallic elements or inorganic compounds by electrolysis or electrophoresis

C25B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Crystallisation

B01D 9/00

Calcination

B01J 6/00

Catalysts

B01J 23/00, B01J 27/00, B01J 31/00

General methods of preparing halides

C01B 9/00

Methods of preparing sulfites in general

C01B 17/62

Shaped ceramic products characterised by their composition

C04B 35/00

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound or a process of making a compound appropriate for this subclass is classified in the last appropriate place.

In this subclass, tradenames that are often found in scientific and patent literature have been used to define precisely the scope of the groups.

This subclass provides for products which are intended or desired. When a process produces multiple compounds only those which are intended or desired require a classification. However, by-products can be given an additional classification if they or the processes for obtaining them are considered of interest for search.

Inorganic salts of a compound, unless specifically provided for elsewhere, are classified as that compound.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Binary compound

A compound containing and limited to two distinct chemical elements.

Inorganic compound

A compound devoid of a carbon atom and containing a non-metallic element or

a compound containing a carbon atom, and satisfying one of the following criteria:

the compound cannot have a carbon atom having direct bonding to another carbon atom, or

the compound cannot have direct bonding between a carbon atom and a halogen or hydrogen atom, or

the compound cannot have direct bonding between a carbon atom and a nitrogen atom by a single or double bond.

The following are exceptions to the above and are to be considered as inorganic compounds: compounds consisting of only carbon atoms, (e.g. fullerenes), cyanogen, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, phosgene, thiophosgene, hydrocyanic acid, isocyanic acid, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid, unsubstituted carbamic acid, and salts of the previously mentioned acids and which contain the same limitations as to a carbon atom.

Metal

Any element other than a non-metal

Moiety

A specific part of a molecule.

Non-metal

The elements of hydrogen, carbon, halogen (fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine and astatine), oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon, nitrogen, boron, selenium, tellurium and noble gases (helium, neon, argon, krypton, xenon and radon)

Preparation

Covers synthesis, purification, separation, stabilisation or use of additives, unless a separate place is provided in the classification scheme.

C01F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Compounds of beryllium, e.g. fluorides, oxides, hydroxides.

Compounds of magnesium, e.g. magnesia, hydroxide, carbonates, halides, nitrates, sulfates, sulfites.

Compounds of aluminium, e.g. carbonate, oxides, hydroxides, alkali metal aluminates, halides, nitrates, sulfides, sulfites, sulfates.

Compounds of calcium, strontium or barium , e.g. oxides, hydroxides, carbonates, halides, nitrates, sulfates, sulfites.

Compounds of radium.

Compounds of thorium.

Compounds of the rare-earth metals, i.e. scandium, yttrium, lanthanum, lanthanides.

Synthesis, treatment or modification of any of the elements or compounds above by:

Forming shaped metal compounds covered by C01F and the shaped products, per se, e.g. granules.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In Class C01, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate subclass of this class. For example, lead oxide is classified in subclass C01G rather than in this subclass.

This subclass is a function oriented entry for the chemical elements and their compounds and does not cover the application or use of the elements and compounds under the subclass definition. For classifying such information other entries in IPC exist, for example:

Ammonium salts of complex acids (other than complex cyanides) containing a metal in the anion are covered by the relevant groups of this subclass or subclasses C01D and C01G, according to the metal.

Complex ammine salts are classified in the relevant groups of this subclass, or subclasses C01D and C01G, according to the metal.

Salts, adducts, or complexes formed between an inorganic compound of this subclass and an organic compound of class C07, are regarded as organic compounds and classified in class C07.

When a process produces multiple compounds only those which are intended or desired require classification and classification may be proper in multiple subclasses.

MULTIPLE CLASSIFICATION

Biocidal, pest attractant, or plant growth regulatory activity of chemical compounds or preparations is further classified in A01P.

Therapeutic activity of chemical compounds or medicinal preparations is further classified in A61P.

Uses of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations are further classified in A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Metal hydrides

C01B 6/00

Salts of oxyacids of halogens

C01B 11/00

Peroxides, salts of peroxyacids

C01B 15/00

Sulfides or polysulfides of magnesium, calcium, strontium or barium

C01B 17/42

Thiosulfates, dithionites, polythionates

C01B 17/64

Compounds containing selenium or tellurium

C01B 19/00

Binary compounds of nitrogen with metals

C01B 21/06

Azides

C01B 21/08

Metal amides

C01B 21/092

Nitrites

C01B 21/50

Phosphides

C01B 25/08

Salts of oxyacids of phosphorous

C01B 25/16

Carbides

C01B 31/30

Compounds containing silicon

C01B 33/00

Compounds containing boron

C01B 35/00

Compounds having molecular sieve properties but not base-exchange properties

C01B 37/00

Compounds having molecular sieve and base exchange properties (crystalline zeolites)

C01B 39/00

Cyanides

C01C 3/08

Salts of cyanic acid

C01C 3/14

Salts of Cyanamide

C01C 3/16

Thiocyanates

C01C 3/20

Double sulfates of magnesium with sodium or potassium

C01D 5/12

Double sulfates of magnesium with lithium

C01D 15/06

Double sulfates of magnesium with rubidium, caesium or francium

C01D 17/00

Production of lime, magnesia or dolomite

C04B 2/00

Burning, calcining lime, magnesite or dolomite

C04B 2/10

Dehydration of gypsum for calcium sulfate cements

C04B 11/02

Preparation of elements or inorganic compounds except carbon dioxide by using micro-organisms or enzymes

C12P 3/00

Obtaining metal compounds from mixtures in a metallurgical process

C22B

Production of non-metallic elements or inorganic compounds by electrolysis or electrophoresis

C25B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Crystallisation

B01D 9/00

Calcination

B01J 6/00

Catalysts

B01J 23/00, B01J 27/00, B01J 31/00

General methods of preparing halides

C01B 9/00

Methods of preparing sulfites in general

C01B 17/62

Shaped ceramic products characterised by their composition

C04B 35/00

Use of inorganic ingredients, e.g. oxygen-containing compounds, e.g. metal carbonyls

C08K 3/18

Treatment of specific inorganic compounds of alkaline earth metals or magnesium, other than fibrous fillers

C09C 1/02

Inorganic compounds of alkaline earth metals, added to the pulp, paper-impregnating material, e.g. water-insoluble compounds

D21H 17/67

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound or a process of making a compound appropriate for this subclass is classified in the last appropriate place.

In this subclass, tradenames that are often found in scientific and patent literature have been used to define precisely the scope of the groups.

This subclass provides for products which are intended or desired. When a process produces multiple compounds only those which are intended or desired require a classification. However, by-products can be given an additional classification if they or the processes for obtaining them are considered of interest for search.

Inorganic salts of a compound, unless specifically provided for elsewhere, are classified as that compound.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Binary compound

A compound containing and limited to two distinct chemical elements.

Inorganic compound

A compound devoid of a carbon atom and containing a non-metallic element or

a compound containing a carbon atom, and satisfying one of the following criteria:

the compound cannot have a carbon atom having direct bonding to another carbon atom, or

the compound cannot have direct bonding between a carbon atom and a halogen or hydrogen atom, or

the compound cannot have direct bonding between a carbon atom and a nitrogen atom by a single or double bond.

The following are exceptions to the above and are to be considered as inorganic compounds: compounds consisting of only carbon atoms, (e.g. fullerenes), cyanogen, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, phosgene, thiophosgene, hydrocyanic acid, isocyanic acid, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid, unsubstituted carbamic acid, and salts of the previously mentioned acids and which contain the same limitations as to a carbon atom.

Metal

Any element other than a non-metal

Moiety

A specific part of a molecule.

Non-metal

The elements of hydrogen, carbon, halogen (fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine and astatine), oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon, nitrogen, boron, selenium, tellurium and noble gases (helium, neon, argon, krypton, xenon and radon)

Preparation

Covers synthesis, purification, separation, stabilisation or use of additives, unless a separate place is provided in the classification scheme.

C01G - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Inorganic compounds containing at least one of the following metals:

Synthesis, treatment or modification of any of the compounds proper for this subclass by:

Methods of preparing compounds of metals not covered by subclasses C01B, C01C, C01D or C01F, in general.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In class C01, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate subclass of this class. For example, lead carbonate is classified in subclass C01G 21/14, rather than in C01B.

Subclass C01G is a function oriented entry for the compounds themselves and does not cover the application or use of the compounds under the subclass definition. For classifying such information other entries in IPC exist, for example:

Salts, adducts or complexes formed between an inorganic compound of this subclass and an organic compound of Class C07, are regarded as organic compounds and classified in C07.

When a process produces multiple compounds only those which are intended or desired require classification and classification may be proper in multiple subclasses.

Multiple classification

Biocidal, pest attractant, or plant growth regulatory activity of chemical compounds or preparations is further classified in subclass A01P.

Therapeutic activity of chemical compounds or medicinal preparations is further classified in subclass A61P.

Uses of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations are further classified in subclass A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Metal hydrides

C01B 6/00

Salts of oxyacids of halogens

C01B 11/00

Peroxides, salts of peroxyacids

C01B 15/00

Thiosulfates, dithionites or polythionates

C01B 17/64

Compounds containing selenium or tellurium

C01B 19/00

Binary compounds of nitrogen with metals, silicon or boron

C01B 21/06

Azides

C01B 21/08

Metal amides

C01B 21/092

Nitrites

C01B 21/50

Phosphides

C01B 25/08

Salts of oxyacids of phosphorus

C01B 25/16

Carbides

C01B 31/30

Compounds containing silicon

C01B 33/00

Compounds containing boron

C01B 35/00

Compounds having molecular sieve properties but not having base-exchange properties

C01B 37/00

Compounds having molecular sieve properties and base- exchange properties, e.g. crystalline zeolites

C01B 39/00

Cyanides

C01C 3/08

Salts of cyanic acid

C01C 3/14

Salts of cyanamide

C01C 3/16

Thiocyanates

C01C 3/20

Treatment of inorganic materials to enhance their pigmenting or filling properties; Preparation of carbon black

C09C

Preparing inorganic compounds except carbon dioxide using enzymes or fermentation processes

C12P 3/00

Manufacture of iron or steel

C21B

Obtaining metal compounds by metallurgical processes

C22B

Alloys

C22C

Electrolytic production of inorganic compounds or non-metals

C25B 1/00

Processes for producing compounds in which electricity is simultaneously generated

C25B 5/00

Electrophoretic production of inorganic compounds or non-metals

C25B 7/00

Electrolytic production of metals by electolysis of solutions

C25C 1/00

Electrolytic production of metals by electolysis of melts

C25C 3/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Processing powders of inorganic compounds preparatory to the manufacturing of ceramic products

C04B 35/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Chemical or physical processes, e.g. catalysts, colloid chemistry; their relevant apparatus

B01J

General methods of preparing halides

C01B 9/00

Methods of preparing oxides or hydroxides in general

C01B 13/14

Methods of preparing sulfides or polysulfides in general

C01B 17/20

Methods of preparing sulfites in general

C01B 17/62

Methods of preparing sulfates in general

C01B 17/96

Methods of preparing nitrates in general

C01B 21/48

Methods of preparing carbonates or bicarbonates in general

C01B 31/24

Inorganic fertilisers

C05D

Organic compounds

C07

Electrolytic production of metal powders or porous metal masses

C25C 5/00

Chemical libraries containing only inorganic compounds or inorganic materials

C40B 40/18

Methods of creating chemical libraries

C40B 50/00

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound or a process of making a compound appropriate for this subclass is classified in the last appropriate place.

Salts of polybasic acids with ammonium and a metal as cations are classified as though the ammonium were hydrogen.

Complex ammine salts are classified in the relevant groups of this subclass, according to the metal.

This subclass provides for products which are intended or desired. When a process produces multiple compounds only those which are intended or desired require a classification. However, by-products can be given an additional classification if they or the processes for obtaining them are considered of interest for search.

If an inorganic compound contains two or more metals of this subclass, then a classification is given in the last relevant main group.

If an inorganic compound contains a single metal and two or more non-metal moieties proper for this subclass, then a classification is given in the last relevant subgroup.

Compounds that are covered by different main groups because of alternatively specified metal atoms are classified in each relevant main group.

Compounds that are covered by different subgroups because of alternatively specified non-metal moieties are classified in each relevant subgroup.

Inorganic salts of a compound, unless specifically provided for elsewhere, are classified as that compound.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Direct bonding

Requires a bond between two adjacent atoms.

Inorganic compound

A compound devoid of a carbon atom and containing a non-metallic element or

a compound containing a carbon atom, and satisfying one of the following criteria:

the compound cannot have a carbon atom having direct bonding to another carbon atom, or

the compound cannot have direct bonding between a carbon atom and a halogen or hydrogen atom, or

the compound cannot have direct bonding between a carbon and a nitrogen atom by a single or double bond.

The following are exceptions to the above and are to be considered as inorganic compounds: compounds consisting of only carbon atoms, (e.g. fullerenes), cyanogen, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, phosgene, thiophosgene, hydrocyanic acid, isocyanic acid, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid, unsubstituted carbamic acid, and salts of the previously mentioned acids and which contain the same limitations as to a carbon atom.

Metal

Any element other than a non-metal.

Moiety

A specific part of a molecule.

Non-metal

The elements of hydrogen, carbon, halogen (fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine and astatine), oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon, nitrogen, boron, selenium, tellurium and noble gases (helium, neon, argon, krypton, xenon and radon).

Preparation

Covers synthesis, purification, separation, stabilisation, or use of additives, unless a separate place is provided in the classification scheme.

Transuranic elements

Elements having higher atomic weights than uranium.

C02F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

The physical, chemical and biological treatment of water, waste water or sewage, e.g. by distillation or evaporation, by degassing, by centrifugal separation, by flocculation of suspended impurities, or by using plants such as algae.

Selection or use of compositions for such treatments.

Compositions (per se) specially adapted for such treatments.

Softening water and preventing scale; Adding scale preventatives or scale removers to water, e.g. adding sequestering agents.

Aeration of stretches of water.

Multistep treatment of water, waste water or sewage.

Treatment of sludge and devices therefor, e.g. bioreactors.

Devices for the treatment of water, waste water or sewage, e.g. devices for separating or removing fatty or oily substances or similar floating material.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Separation in general is classified in B01D.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances

A62D 3/00

Settling tanks and filter devices

B01D

Adding materials to water to prevent corrosion

C23F

Cleaning or keeping clear the surface of open water, e.g. the sea

E02B 15/00

Devices for cleaning or keeping clear the surface of open water

E02B 15/04

Methods for obtaining or collecting drinking water or tap water

E03B 3/00

Treating radioactively-contaminated liquids

G21F 9/04
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system.

Special arrangements on waterborne vessels of installations for producing fresh water

B63J 1/00

Special arrangements on waterborne vessels of installations for treating waste water or sewage.

B63J 4/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Medicinal water

A61K

Degasification of liquids in general

B01D 19/00

Ion-exchange in general

B01J

Packing elements in general

B01J 19/32

Device in sewers for separating liquid or solid substances from sewage

E03F 5/14

Methods of steam generation

F22B

Preheating boiler feed-water or accumulating preheated boiler feed-water

F22D

Incinerators or other apparatus for burning waste liquors

F23G 7/04

Special rules of classification

When classifying in this subclass, classification is also made in group B01D 15/08 insofar as subject matter of general interest relating to chromatography is concerned.

It is desirable to add the indexing codes of group C02F 101/00 for the nature of the contaminant and of group C02F 103/00 for the nature of the water, waste water, sewage or sludge to be treated which are considered to be of interest for search.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Sludge

Solids that remain after wastewater treatment. This material may be separated, treated and composted into fertilizer.

C02F 1/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Methods of steam generation

F22B

Preheating boiler feed-water or accumulating preheated boiler feed-water

F22D

C02F 1/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Degasification of liquids in general

B01D 19/00

Arrangement of degassing apparatus in boiler feed supply

F22D

C02F 1/40 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For use in drains leading to the sewer

E03F 5/16

C02F 1/42 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ion-exchange in general

B01J

C02F 1/68 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Medicinal water

A61K

C02F 3/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Packing elements in general

B01J 19/30, B01J 19/32

C02F 9/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Only those combined water, waste water or sewage treating operations where the essential characteristic resides in the combination of the treatment steps.

Special rules of classification

In this group, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

Any individual step of a multistep treatment, which is not identified by the classification in the last appropriate place, and which is considered to represent information of interest for search, may also be classified in one or more of groups C02F 1/00-C02F 1/56 or C02F 1/66-C02F 7/00. This can, for example, be the case which it is considered of interest to enable searching of multistep treatments using a combination of classification symbols. Such non-obligatory classification should be given as "additional information".

Treatments where the essential characteristic resides in an individual step of the treatment, which treatments are covered by groups C02F 1/00-C02F 7/00, are not covered by group C02F 9/00. An example of such treatments is a treatment in which the essential characteristic resides in a chemical treatment step and in which the one or more other steps, such as filtration or settlement, are conventional.

C02F 11/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Incinerators or other apparatus for burning waste liquors, e.g. sulfite liquor from paper-making plant

F23G 7/04

C03B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

The manufacture of glass by:

Processes before the melting by the preparation of raw material mixtures used in manufacturing glass, mineral or slag wool (batches) i.e. mixing, pelletizing.

Melting processes:

The shaping of glass by:

The after-treatment of glass products by:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

C03B concerns all aspects of glass manufacture processes, apparatus and C03C relates to the glass chemistry, such as composition, additives, chemical treatment.

C04B relates to ceramics having a crystallographic structure different from the glass compounds. For composites containing glass and ceramic, composites comprising more than 50% of glass are classified in C03C.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Preparation of finely divided silica

C01B 33/18

Chemical aspects of glass

C03C

Changing the surface of the glass ribbon by chemical methods

C03C

Refining agents

C03C 1/00

Chemical aspects of hollow, porous, sintered or foamed beads

C03C 11/00

Beads composition

C03C 12/00

Surface treatment of glass by coating with glass

C03C 17/02

Surface treatment of fibres or filaments from glass, minerals or wools, sizing of the fibres

C03C 25/00

Coating of the fibre during the drawing process

C03C 25/10

Polarisation-maintaining optical fibres per se

G02B 6/024

Cutting or severing of light guides

G02B 6/25

Fusion-splicing of light guides

G02B 6/255

Treatment of light guides to shape optical elements

G02B 6/287

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Syringes

A61M 5/178

Devices for reactant delivery in general

B01J 4/00

Containers or dishes for laboratory use, e.g. laboratory glassware

B01L 3/00

Nozzles

B05B

Disposal or transformation of solid waste in general

B09B

Machines or processes for grinding or polishing glass

B24B 7/24

Molding plastics around a core using a cross-head annular extrusion nozzle

B29C 47/28

Extrusion presses in general

B30B 11/22

Windows, windscreens for vehicles

B60J 1/00

Windows, doors for airplanes

B64C 1/14

Glass containers, e.g. bottles, ampoules, jars

B65D 1/00

Conveying systems for fragile sheets, e.g. glass

B65G 49/06

Hand tools for cutting ampoules

B67B 7/92

Crucibles for supporting the melt

C30B 15/10

Bi-component fibres

D01F 8/00

Yarns or threads made from glass

D02G 3/18

Woven fabrics

D03D 15/00

Non-woven fabrics

D04H 13/00

Building elements of glass or other transparent material

E04C 1/42

Doors, windows

E06

Thermal insulation arrangements using fillers, e.g. slag wool

F16L 59/04

Brick shapes in general

F27D 1/04

Globes, bowls, cover glasses

F21V 3/00

Optical glass, lens

G02B 1/00

Treatment of radioactive waste

G21F 9/00

Programme-control system

G05B 19/00

Apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture of electric discharge tubes, discharge lamps

H01J 9/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Annealing

Process of slowly cooling glass to relieve internal stresses after it was formed

Cullet

Scraps of broken or waste glass for remelting

Gob

Lump of molten glass used to make a piece of glassware

Mineral wool

Inorganic fibrous material made from molten glass

Slag wool

Mineral wool made from blast-furnace slag

Tempering

Process of heating glass above its annealing point and then rapidly cooling it.

Debiteuse

Clay block floating upon molten glass in a tank furnace and containing a long slot that shapes glass into a sheet as it is drawn through it

Synonyms and Keywords

Tempered

Toughened

Mineral wool, Slag wool

Rock wool

C03B 9/41 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric or electronic systems in general

G05B 19/00

C03B 35/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Conveying systems for fragile sheets, e.g. glass

B65G 49/06

C03B 37/07 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Controlling or regulating in general

G05

C03B 37/075 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Optical fibres

G02B 6/02

C03B 37/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Nozzles in general

B05B

C03B 37/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Yarns or threads

D02

Woven fabrics

D03

non-woven fabrics

D04

C03C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Chemical composition of

Surface treatment of glass, surface treatment of fibres or filaments from glass, minerals or slags :

Joining glass to glass or to other materials by fusing, by using specially adapted adhesive, interlayer.

Joining metals with the aid of glass.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

C03B concerns all aspects of glass manufacture processes, apparatus and C03C relates to the glass chemistry, such as composition, additives, chemical treatment.

C04B relates to ceramics having a crystallographic structure different from the glass compounds. For composites containing glass and ceramic, composites comprising more than 50% of glass are classified in C03C.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Cleaning by methods or apparatus specially adapted for plate glass

B08B 11/04

Grinding or polishing glass

B24B

Abrasive blasting (e.g. sand-blasting) of glass

B24C 1/00

Layered product essentially comprising sheet glass or fibres of glass, slag or the like

B32B 17/00

Wired glass

C03B 13/12

Fusing pieces of glass without substantial reshaping

C03B 23/20

Manufacture of fibres or filaments from softened glass, minerals, or slags

C03B 37/00

Joining glass to ceramic

C04B 37/04

Cold glazes for ceramics

C04B 41/86

Chemical treatment of glass fabrics

D06M

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Treatment of materials specially adapted to enhance their filling properties in mortar, concrete or artificial stone

C04B 14/00, C04B 20/00

Etching or surface brightening composition

C09K 13/00

Units for use as elements for closing wall or like openings and comprising two or more parallel glass panes in spaced relationship, the panes being permanently secured together

E06B 3/66

Optical coatings of optical elements

G02B 1/10

Light guides

G02B 6/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Glass

amorphous structure

Glass batch

raw materials of the glass before melting

Glass composition

materials forming the glass after melting

Ceramic

monocrystalline or polycrystalline material

Glass-ceramics

Glass which containing microcrystals obtained after a special thermal treatment (crystalline phase constituting at least 50% by weight of the total composition

Glaze

Thin vitrified layer on a ceramic

Enamel

Thin vitrified layer on a metal or a glass

Slag

Partially vitrified by-product obtained when making metal

C03C 13/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Optical fibres

G02B 6/02

C03C 27/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fusing

C03B 23/20

Units for use as elements for closing wall or like openings and comprising two or more parallel glass panes in spaced relationship, the panes being permanently secured together

E06B 3/66

C04B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Chemical aspects of the processing of lime, magnesia or dolomite and of molten slag.

Compositional aspects of:

Physico-chemical aspects of methods for obtaining mortars, concrete, artificial stones or ceramics , e.g. for delaying the setting time of mortar compositions.

Treatment including defibrillating of materials such as fillers , agglomerated or waste materials, or refuse to enhance their filling properties in mortars, concrete or artificial stone.

Porous mortars, concrete, artificial stone or ceramic ware, and the preparation thereof.

Methods and apparatus for:

After- treatment of artificial stones, mortars, concrete and ceramics , e.g. coating or impregnation of green concrete after primary shaping.

Non-mechanical treatment of natural stone.

Processing powders of inorganic compounds in preparation to the manufacturing of ceramic products .

The joining of burned ceramics with other articles by heating.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Granulating apparatus

B01J 2/00

Mechanical features relating to the working of mortars, concrete, stone, clay-wares or ceramics , e.g. mixing or shaping ceramic compositions, boring natural stone

B28

Chemical preparation of powders of inorganic compounds

C01

Devitrified glass-ceramics

C03C 10/00

Compositions containing free metal bonded to carbides, diamond, oxides, borides, nitrides, silicides, e.g. cermets, or other metal compounds, such as oxynitrides or sulfides, other than as macroscopic reinforcing agents

C22C

Building elements or constructions; Finishing work on buildings

E04

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Materials for prostheses or for coating prostheses

A61L 27/00

Chemical or biological purification of waste gases

B01D 53/34

Layered products

B32B

Treating inorganic non-fibrous materials to enhance their pigmenting or filling properties

C09C

Cementing or plastering compositions for boreholes or wells

C09K 8/00

Adhesives

C09J

Alloys based on refractory metals

C22C

Shaft or vertical furnaces in general

F27B 1/00

Hydraulic hardening materials , e.g. concretes, ceramics or refractories for protection against radiation, i.e. shielding

G21F 1/00

Special rules of classification

Active ingredients which react with cement compounds for forming new or modified mineralogical phases and are added before the hardening process, as well as cements added as additives to other cements , are classified in groups C04B 7/00 to C04B 12/00, e.g. in group C04B 7/42.

In each set of groups C04B 7/00 to C04B 32/00 and C04B 41/45 to C04B 41/91, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place, e.g. classifiable subject matter relating to:

an hydraulic cement is classified in main group C04B 7/00;

an admixture of an additive to a cement after the burning step or in the absence of a burning step is classified in one or more of main groups C04B 14/00 to C04B 24/00;

an inorganic accelerator for cement is classified in main group C04B 22/00;

a mortar composition containing an hydraulic cement , an organic co-binder, fillers and active ingredients , such as surfactants and anti-foam agents, is classified in main group C04B 28/00.

Any ingredient of compositions of mortars, concrete or artificial stone, classified in groups C04B 26/00 to C04B 32/00 in accordance with the previous special rules, and which itself is determined to be novel and non-obvious, must also be classified in groups C04B 7/00 to C04B 24/00 respecting these previous rules.

This can be the case when, e.g.:

the actual invention relates to one of the ingredients of the mixture;

a special organic co-binder is used in combination with an hydraulic cement (C04B 24/24).

Any ingredient of compositions of mortars, concrete or artificial stone, which is not identified by the classification in groups C04B 26/00 to C04B 32/00 in accordance with the previous rules, and which is considered to represent information of particular interest for search, may also be classified respecting these previous notes. This can for example be the case when, it is considered of interest to enable searching of compositions using a combination of classification symbols. Such non-obligatory classification should be given as "additional information". For example:

the problem-solution aspect of the invention relates to one of the ingredients in particular, such as the corrosion problem of glass fibres in a concrete matrix (additional classification in C04B 14/42);

well defined Portland cement mortar mixture containing clay as an essential or characterising filler (additional classification in C04B 14/10);

unusual ingredients used.

Artificial stone compositions containing fibres but no binders, and voids which may occur between the intertwined fibres, are not considered porous in the sense of main group C04B 38/00. In the same way, such compositions, where binder is only present on the mutual contact points of the intertwined fibres, are not considered as compositions covered by main groups C04B 26/00 to C04B 28/00.

Use of indexing codes:

when classifying in main groups C04B 22/00 or C04B 24/00, it is desirable to add the indexing codes of group C04B 103/00 relating to the function or property of the active ingredients ;

when classifying in main groups C04B 26/00 to C04B 32/00, it is desirable to add the indexing codes of group C04B 111/00 relating to the function, property or use of the mortars, concrete or artificial stone.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Active ingredients

Ingredients having an effect on the mortar-, concrete- or artificial stone composition during processing or on the characteristics of the final product, e.g. as set accelerator, as dispersant or as gas generating agent. Other examples are processing aids or property improvers, e.g. grinding aids, used after the cement burning process or in the absence of such a burning process.

Cement

The binder proper, i.e. excluding any additional ingredient or additive added to the finished binder as such, with the exception of mixtures of binders.

Cement composition

In patent literature this term might be used in the sense of " cement " as well as in the sense of a "mortar-, concrete- or artificial stone composition". For classification and search, the term must be interpreted using the Glossary as guidance.

Clinker

The unground sintered product leaving the cement kiln. In patent literature this term might be used literally, i.e. to indicate the unground sintered product leaving the cement kiln, or it might be used to indicate the ground cement without any additive, i.e. not interground with additives such as gypsum.

Ceramics

Inorganic, non metallic products obtained by a process involving a shaping step and a sintering or comparable heat treatment step, with the exclusion of cements , cermets and glasses, glazes, vitreous enamels and devitrified glass ceramics .

Fillers

Inactive ingredients, include pigments, aggregates and fibrous reinforcing materials.

Fine ceramics

Ceramics having a polycrystalline fine-grained microstructure, e.g. of dimensions below 100 micrometer.

Hydraulic binder

For the purpose of classification and search in this subclass, the terms " cement " and " hydraulic binder " are considered to be equivalent, even if in literature, an hydraulic binder might be defined as a mixture of cement and one or more inorganic additives.

Mortar- , concrete- and artificial stone compositions

They are considered as a single group of materials, are mixtures of one or more binders with fillers or other ingredients. In the context of such compositions, the terms " cement " and "binder" are considered equivalent.

Resin mortar or resin concrete

Mortar or concrete containing resin as a binder instead of cement , i.e. excluding any inorganic binder and containing a considerable amount of inorganic filler compared with the amount of the organic binder.

Refractories

Ceramics or mortars withstanding high temperatures of at least about 1500 degrees C. For classification and search in this subclass no substantial distinction is made between the terms " refractories " and " ceramics ".

Porous materials

Materials which are deliberately made porous, e.g. by adding gas-forming, foaming, burnable or lightweight additives to the composition they are made of.

C04B 2/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hydraulic lime cements

C04B 7/34

C04B 5/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Manufacture of slag wool

C03B

Treatment of slag in, or for the production of metals

C21B, C22B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mechanical aspects

B28B 1/54

C04B 12/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ammonium silicates per se and their preparation

C01C 1/00

Alkali metal silicates per se and their preparation

C01B 33/32

C04B 12/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

In, or for, the manufacture of ceramics

C04B 33/00, C04B 35/00

C04B 18/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Use of waste materials for the manufacture of cement

C04B 7/24

C04B 18/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For manufacture of cement

C04B 7/14

C04B 26/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Mortar or concrete compositions that contain organic binders instead of cement, i. e. excluding any inorganic binder and containing a considerable amount of inorganic filler compared with the amount of the organic binder. Examples of such organic binders are: resins, polysaccharides and compounds having carbon-to-metal linkages.

Compositions covered by this main group are often referred to as polymer- or resin-mortars or concrete.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Mechanical features relating to the working of plastics, e.g. moulding polymer or resin concrete

B29

Compositions of macromolecular compounds

C08L

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bituminous compositions

C08L 95/00

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Resin- or polymer mortars or concrete

Mortar and concrete compositions based on organic binders only, i.e. excluding any inorganic binder. In patent literature these terms are sometimes used for compositions also containing an inorganic binder, e.g. Portland cement. If this is the case classification should not be made in this main group but in main group C04B 28/00.

C04B 28/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Monolithic refractories or refractory mortars

C04B 35/66

C04B 30/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Artificial stone compositions containing fibres, but no binder. Though voids may result between the intertwined fibres these compositions are not considered porous in the sense of main group C04B 38/00.

C04B 33/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mechanical features

B28B 1/26

C04B 35/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Ceramic compositions or refractories based on oxides or oxide mixtures or solid solutions of two or more oxides; Processes for their manufacture.

Ceramic compositions based on rare earth compounds or on compounds of actinides; Processes for their manufacture.

Ceramic compositions or refractories based on non-oxides, e.g. on carbon, sulfides, selenides, fluorides, carbides, borides, nitrides or silicides; Processes for their manufacture.

Monolithic refractories or refractory mortars, including those whether or not containing clay; Processes for their manufacture.

Ceramic products containing macroscopic reinforcing agents, e.g. shaped metallic or non-metallic materials ; Processes for their manufacture.

Shaped ceramic products or refractories characterised by their composition; Processes for manufacturing these shaped ceramic products or refractories:

Processes characterised by the burning or sintering step.

Shaped products obtained by processes involving a melting step.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Mechanical features relating to the working of ceramics, e.g. mixing or shaping ceramic compositions

B28

Devitrified glass ceramics

C03C 10/00

Clay-wares

C04B 33/00

Compositions containing free metal bonded to carbides, diamond, oxides, borides, nitrides, silicides, e.g. cermets, or other metal compounds, such as oxynitrides or sulfides, other than as macroscopic reinforcing agents

C22C

Manufacture of ceramic fibres

D01F 9/08

Furnaces, kilns, ovens, or retorts

F27

Casings, linings, walls, roofs of furnaces, kilns, ovens, or retorts

F27D 1/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Dental prostheses, e.g. porcelain or ceramic teeth

A61C 13/08

Materials for prostheses or for coating prostheses

A61L 27/00

Materials for catheters or for coating catheters

A61L 29/00

Materials for other surgical articles

A61L 31/00

Luminescent materials

C09K 11/00

Fireproofing materials

C09K 21/00

Materials for coating by flame or plasma spraying

C23C 4/10

Materials for coating by sputtering, e.g. ceramic targets

C23C 14/06

Materials for parts of bearings, e.g. sliding-contact bearings

F16C 33/00

Materials for friction linings

F16D 69/02

Materials for pistons, trunk pistons, plungers

F16J 1/01

Materials for piston-rings or seats therefor

F16J 9/26

Materials for rigid pipes

F16L 9/00

Materials for protection of pipes or pipe fittings against corrosion or incrustation

F16L 58/00

Luminescent materials for light screens

F21V 9/16

Materials for conductors or conductive bodies

H01B 1/00

Materials for insulators or insulating or dielectric bodies

H01B 3/00

Superconductive or hyperconductive conductors, cables, or transmission lines

H01B 12/00

Materials for varistor cores

H01C 7/105

Materials for magnets or magnetic bodies

H01F 1/00

Superconducting magnets or coils

H01F 6/00

Materials for fixed capacitors, e.g. ceramic dielectrics

H01G 4/12

Details of semiconductor or other solid state devices characterised by the material , e.g. ceramic substrates

H01L 23/00

Materials for superconductive or hyperconductive devices

H01L 39/00

Materials for piezo-electric or electrostrictive elements

H01L 41/00

Materials for inert electrodes with catalytic activity for electrochemical generators, e.g. for fuel cells

H01M 4/86

Materials for solid electrolytes of fuel cells

H01M 8/10

Dielectric resonators of the waveguide type

H01P 7/10

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Filters, membranes for separation processes

B01D

Catalysts

B01J

Articles characterised by particular shape, see the relevant classes, e.g. linings for casting ladles, tundishes, cups or the like

B22D 41/02

Producing shaped articles from the material , e.g. by slip-casting

B28B 1/00

Layered products essentially comprising ceramics , e.g. refractory products

B32B 18/00

Chemical preparation of powders of inorganic compounds

C01

Chemical composition of glasses, glazes, or vitreous enamels

C03C

Obtaining porous products

C04B 38/00

Alloys based on carbides, oxides, borides, nitrides or silicides, e.g. cermets

C22C 29/00

Single crystals or homogeneous polycrystalline material with defined structure

C30B 29/00

Casings, linings, walls of combustion chambers characterised by the shape of the bricks or blocks

F23M 5/02

Arrangement or mounting of linings for fire-boxes, e.g. fire-back

F24B 13/02

Basic electric elements

H01

Special rules of classification

In this group, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, compositions are classified according to the constituent present in the highest proportion by weight.

In this group, magnesium is considered as an alkaline earth metal.

In this group, a composite is considered as a sintered mixture of different powdered materials , other than sintering aids, the materials being present as separate phases in the sintered product .

In this group, fine ceramics are considered as products having a polycrystalline fine-grained microstructure, e.g. of dimensions below 100 micrometers.

The production of ceramic powder is classified in this group in so far as it relates to the preparation of powder with specific characteristics.

Any ingredient of a refractory mortar composition containing a hydraulic cement , e.g. aluminous cement , classified in C04B 35/66, which is considered to represent information of interest for search, may also be classified according to the Last Place Rule of note (2) after the subclass title of C04B, in groups C04B 7/00 to C04B 24/00. This can for example be the case when it is considered of interest to enable searching of compositions using a combination of classification symbols. Such non-obligatory classification should be given as "additional information". For example, such an additional classification in group C04B 24/00 may be given for an organic retarder added to the refractory mortar composition.

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Ceramics

Inorganic, non-metallic products obtained by a process involving a shaping step and a sintering or comparable heat treatment step, with the exclusion of cements , cermets and glasses, glazes, vitreous enamels and devitrified glass ceramics .

Fine ceramics

Ceramics having a polycrystalline fine-grained microstructure, e.g. of dimensions below 100 micrometer.

Refractories

Ceramics or mortars withstanding high temperatures of at least about 1500 degrees C. For classification and search in this subclass, no substantial distinction is made between the terms " refractories " and " ceramics ".

Carbon-carbon composites

Products consisting of carbon fibres in a carbon matrix are usually referred to as " carbon-carbon composites ".

Porous materials

Materials which are deliberately made porous, e.g. by adding gas- forming, foaming, burnable or lightweight additives to the composition they are made of.

C04B 35/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Abrasives

C09K 3/14

Materials for vessels of gas- or vapour discharge lamps

H01J 61/30

C04B 35/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Abrasives

C09K 3/14

Selection of ferrites for their magnetic properties

H01F 1/34

C04B 35/45 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Precursor materials for ceramic superconductors and high critical-temperature superconductive materials characterised by the ceramic-forming technique or the ceramic composition based on cuprates.

Non superconductive ceramic copper oxides or solid solutions thereof with other oxides.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Single-crystals or homogeneous polycrystalline material with defined structure or crystallographic orientation characterised by the material or by the method

C30B

Superconductive conductors, cables, or transmission lines

H01B 12/00

Superconducting magnets or coils

H01F 6/00

Superconductors characterised by the material

H01L 39/12

Synonyms and Keywords

HTS or High-Tc

These abbreviations correspond to the term "high critical-temperature superconductor".

Y-Ba-Cu-O

In patent literature this abbreviation is used for the general substance group, which includes e.g. the compounds Y 1 Ba 2 Cu 3 O x or Y 2 Ba 1 Cu 1 O 5 corresponding to the short cuts Y-123 or Y-211 .

Bi-Sr-Ca-Cu-O

In patent literature this abbreviation is used for the general substance group, which includes e.g. the compounds Bi 2 Sr 2 Ca 2 Cu 3 O x or Bi 2 Sr 2 Ca 1 Cu 2 O x corresponding to the short cuts Bi-2223 or Bi-2212 .

Hg-Ba-Ca-Cu-O

In patent literature this abbreviation is used for the general substance group, which includes e.g. the compound Hg 1 Ba 2 Ca 2 Cu 3 O x corresponding to the short cut Hg-1223 .

Tl-Sr-Ca-Cu-O

In patent literature this abbreviation is used for the general substance group, which includes e.g. the compound Tl 2 Sr 2 Ca 2 Cu 3 O x corresponding to the short cut Tl-2223 .

C04B 35/453 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Resistors, e.g. varistors based on ZnO

H01C 7/112

Target materials for coating by Physical Vapour Deposition

C23C 14/08

C04B 35/46 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Ceramic compositions based on titanium oxides or titanates, containing also zirconium or hafnium oxides, zirconates or hafnates

C04B 35/49

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ceramic insulating or dielectric materials

H01B 3/12

Resistors, e.g. varistors, based on titanium oxide or titanates

H01C 7/115

Ceramic capacitors

H01G 4/12

Piezoelectric ceramics

H01L 41/187

Ceramic dielectric resonators

H01P 7/10

C04B 35/49 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ceramic insulating or dielectric materials

H01B 3/12

Risistors, e.g. varistors, based on metal oxides

H01C 7/108

Ceramic capacitors

H01G 4/12

Piezoelectric ceramics

H01L 41/187

Ceramic dielectric resonators

H01P 7/10

C04B 35/50 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Luminescent materials containing rare earth metals

C09K 11/77

Light filters; Selection of luminescent materials for light screens

F21V 9/16

Luminescent screens

H01J 1/63

Scintillation detectors

G01T 1/20, G01T 3/06

C04B 35/51 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Nuclear fuel materials

G21C 3/62

C04B 35/56 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Friction linings

F16D 69/02

C04B 35/622 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Preparing or treating powders of inorganic compounds in preparation to the manufacturing of ceramic products .

Non-mechanical aspects of ceramic-forming techniques . References relevant to classification in this main group.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Articles characterised by particular shape, e.g. linings for casting ladles, tundishes, cups or the like

B22D 41/02

Mechanical features relating to the shaping of clay or other ceramic compositions, e.g.

B28B

by injection moulding or

B28B 1/24

by slip-casting

B28B 1/26

by applying the material on to a core to form a layer thereon

B28B 1/30

Preparing clay or like ceramic compositions; Producing mixtures containing clay or like ceramic compositions

B28C

Working stone or stone-like materials

B28D

Chemical preparations of powders of inorganic compounds

C01

After- treatment of ceramics, e.g. coating or impregnation

C04B 41/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Patterns for foundry moulding; Manufacture thereof so far as not provided for in other classes

B22C 7/00

Manufacture of workpieces or articles from metallic powder characterised by the manner of sintering by using electric current, laser radiation or plasma

B22F 3/105

Working by laser beam

B23K 26/00

Layered products

B32B

Layered products essentially comprising ceramics, e.g. refractory products

B32B 18/00

Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces

G03F 7/00

Exposure, e.g. with laser beam

G03F 7/20

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Rapid Prototyping (RP)

RP is a forming method in which resin or powder material is used. RP devices build up a prototype body layer by layer, rapidly generating a three-dimensional free form. In the ceramic art, two kinds of RP are mainly applied.One is "3D Printing", the other is "Selective Laser Sintering" (see glossary of C04B 35/64).

3D Printing (3DP)

3DP is a general forming technique which is also used in the ceramic art, developed from stereolithography. Light-sensitive monomers are polymerised by a laser beam and solidified by gelation in this way. Through the gelation and solidification of an aqueous ceramic slurry, which contains the light-sensitive monomer, a component is built up in layers.

Synonyms and Keywords

Rapid Prototyping technologies are otherwise known as Solid Freeform Fabrication or Desktop Manufacturing or Layer Manufacturing technologies.

C04B 35/64 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Burning methods for clay-wares

C04B 33/32

Furnaces, kilns, ovens, or retorts

F27

e.g. chamber type furnaces

F27B 17/00

Travelling or movable supports or containers for the charge of furnaces, kilns, ovens, retorts in so far as they are of kinds occurring in more than one kind of furnace

F27D 3/12

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Selective Laser Sintering (SLS)

A layer of ceramic powder is deposited on a support, and possibly compacted by a rolling device. A computer-controlled laser beam scans a two-dimensional cross-section of a part, selectively sintering the layer. A new layer of powder is deposited, compacted and sintered. After completion of the part, the unfused or unsintered powder, which helps hold the part during the process, is removed. This technique may allow local composition variations for gradient materials or manufacture of composites.

C04B 38/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Mortars, concrete, artificial stone or ceramic ware which are deliberately made porous, e.g. by adding gas-forming, foaming, lightweight or burnable additives to the compositions they are made of, and the preparation thereof.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Artificial stone compositions containing fibres, and voids which may occur between the intertwined fibres, but no binders

C04B 30/02

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Porous or cellular macromolecular materials

C08J 9/00

Special rules of classification

Porous mortars, concrete, artificial stone or ceramic ware characterised by the ingredients or compositions are also classified in groups C04B 2/00 to C04B 35/00.

C04B 40/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mechanical aspects

B28

Mechanical aspectsB28, e.g. conditioning the materials prior to shaping

B28B 17/02

C04B 41/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Glazes, other than cold glazes

C03C 8/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces, in general

B05

Grinding or polishing

B24

Apparatus or processes for treating or working shaped articles of clay or other ceramic compositions, slag or mixtures containing cementitious material

B28B 11/00

Working stone or stone like materials

B28D

Conditioning of the materials prior to shaping

C04B 40/00

Etching, surface-brightening or pickling compositions in general

C09K 13/00

C05B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Materials affecting the growth of plants solely by supplying nutrients ordinarily required for growth or materials which are used to prevent or cure mineral deficiencies in plants as listed below

Superphosphates, i.e. fertilisers produced by reacting rock or bone phosphates with sulfuric or phosphoric acid in such amounts and concentrations as to yield solid products directly; apparatus for the manufacture thereof

Fertilisers based essentially on di-calcium phosphate

Thomas phosphate; Other slag phosphates

Fertilisers based essentially on alkali or ammonium orthophosphates

Fertilisers based essentially on phosphates or double phosphates of magnesium

Fertilisers produced by wet-treating or leaching raw materials either with acids in such amounts and concentrations as to yield solutions followed by neutralisation, or with alkaline lyes; pretreatment thereof

Fertilisers produced by pyrogenic processes from phosphatic materials

Organic phosphatic fertilisers, e.g., containing phosphoric triamide compounds

Other phosphatic fertilisers, e.g. soft rock phosphates, bone meal

Granulation or pelletisation of phosphatic fertilisers other than slag

Mixtures of phosphatic fertilisers covered by more than one of main groups C05B 1/00-C05B 19/00

Preparation, treatment or modification of any of the materials above: e.g., by chemical means (e.g. addition of stabilisers, preservatives), physical means (e.g., irradiation, concentration, purification, separation) or combination of both chemical and physical means, with the proviso that the resultant product is proper for classification in this subclass

Methods of preparing phosphatic fertilisers in general

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In contrast with fertilisers (C05), plant growth regulators (A01N) are those materials which alter a plant through chemical modification of plant metabolism, for example auxins.

Soil-conditioning materials or soil-stabilising materials are classified in C09K 17/00 and covers mixtures of soil-conditioning materials or soil-stabilising materials with fertilisers where the composition in question is characterised by the soil-conditioning or soil-stabilising properties.

Mixtures of soil-conditioning materials or soil-stabilising materials with fertilisers where the composition in question is characterised by the fertilising activity are classified in C05G.

Whilst the subject matter of C05B deals with phosphatidic fertilisers per se, A01C 3/00 deals with methods of treating manure/methods of manuring per se and A01C 21/00 deals with methods of fertilising per se.

Any apparatus for preparing fertilisers may be classified in those areas of C05 that are specific for such apparatus – e.g., C05B 1/10 – apparatus for the manufacture of superphosphates. Otherwise, individual apparatus should be classified in the relevant area of the IPC, e.g., F26B 17/00

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

NITROGENOUS FERTILISERS

C05C

INORGANIC FERTILISERS NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES C05B, C05C; FERTILISERS PRODUCING CARBON DIOXIDE

C05D

ORGANIC FERTILISERS NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES C05B, C05C, e.g. FERTILISERS FROM WASTE OR REFUSE

C05F

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Harrows with means for distributing fertilisers

A01B 25/00

Fertiliser distributors

A01C 15/00

Mowers combined with dispensing apparatus, e.g., for fertilisers

A01D 43/14

HORTICULTURE; CULTIVATION OF VEGETABLES, FLOWERS, RICE, FRUIT, VINES, HOPS, OR SEAWEED; FORESTRY; WATERING

A01G

Root feeders; Injecting fertilisers into the roots

A01G 29/00

Processes or devices for granulating materials, in general

B01J 2/00

Phosphorus, inorganic compounds thereof

C01B 25/00

Granulating slag

C04B

(Organo)Phosphorus compounds

C07F 9/02

Soil-conditioning or soil-stabilising materials

C09K 17/00

Special rules of classification

Note(s)

1. An ingredient in a mixture of fertilisers, or a single fertiliser which contains more than one of the chemical elements on which the subdivision into subclasses is based, is classified only in the first of the appropriate subclasses. Thus, a nitrophosphate or an ammoniated superphosphate is classified in C05B but not in C05C, magnesium phosphate is classified in C05B but not in C05D, and calcium cyanamide in C05C but not in C05D.

2. Any ingredient in a mixture, which is considered to represent information of interest for search, may also additionally be classified according to Note (1). This can, for example, be the case when it is considered of interest to enable searching of mixtures using a combination of classification symbols. Such non-obligatory classification should be given as "additional information".

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Fertiliser (fertiliser material)

Natural or artificial substance containing the chemical elements that improve growth and productiveness of plants.

Phosphatic fertiliser

A source of inorganic and/or organic phosphate. Common examples include single superphosphate - (CaH2PO4)16 - having a P2O5 content of circa 18%* and ammonium phosphate, having a P2O5 content of circa 20%*.

Thomas phosphate

A furnace slag produced in steel-making, containing large amounts of calcium phosphate.

Double superphosphate

CaH4(PO4)2 - having circa 32% P2O5 present*

Triple superphosphate

Ca(H2 PO4)2 having circa 46-48% P2O5 present*

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following expressions/words "Amendment", "Plant food", "Agricultural chemical" and "Fertiliser" are often used as synonyms.

In patent documents the expression/word "enrichment" is often used with the meaning "fertiliser".

C05C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Nitrogenous Fertilisers

Materials affecting the growth of plants solely by supplying nutrients ordinarily required for growth or materials which are used to prevent or cure mineral deficiencies in plants as listed below

Ammonium nitrate fertilisers; granulation, pelletisation, stabilisation, colouring thereof

Fertilisers containing other salts of ammonia or ammonia itself, e.g. gas liquor

Fertilisers containing other nitrates, e.g., sodium, potassium or calcium nitrate

Fertilisers containing calcium or other cyanamides; granulation, pelletisation, de-gassing, hydrating, hardening, stabilisation, oiling thereof

Fertilisers containing urea or urea compounds

Other nitrogenous fertilisers

Mixtures of nitrogenous fertilisers covered by more than one of main groups C05C 1/00 - C05C 11/00

Preparation, treatment or modification of any of the materials above: e.g., by chemical means (e.g. addition of stabilisers, preservatives), physical means (e.g., irradiation, concentration, purification, separation) or combination of both chemical and physical means, with the proviso that the resultant product is proper for classification in this subclass

Methods of preparing nitrogenous fertilisers in general

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In contrast to fertilisers (C05), plant growth regulators (A01N) are those materials which alter a plant through chemical modification of plant metabolism, for example auxins.

Soil-conditioning materials or soil-stabilising materials are classified in C09K 17/00 and covers mixtures of soil-conditioning materials or soil-stabilising materials with fertilisers where the composition in question is characterised by the soil-conditioning or soil-stabilising properties.

Mixtures of soil-conditioning materials or soil-stabilising materials with fertilisers where the composition in question is characterised by the fertilising activity are classified in C05G

Whilst the subject matter of C05C deals with nitrogenous fertilisers per se, A01C 3/00 deals with methods of treating manure/methods of manuring per se and A01C 21/00 deals with methods of fertilising per se.

Any apparatus for preparing fertilisers may be classified in those areas of C05 that are specific for such apparatus – e.g., C05B 1/10 – apparatus for the manufacture of superphosphates. Otherwise, individual apparatus should be classified in the relevant area of the IPC, e.g., F26B 17/00

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

PHOSPHATIC FERTILISERS

C05B

INORGANIC FERTILISERS NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES C05B, C05C; FERTILISERS PRODUCING CARBON DIOXIDE

C05D

ORGANIC FERTILISERS NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES C05B, C05C, e.g. FERTILISERS FROM WASTE OR REFUSE

C05F

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Harrows with means for distributing fertilisers

A01B 25/00

Fertiliser distributors

A01C 15/00

Mowers combined with dispensing apparatus, e.g., for fertilisers

A01D 43/14

HORTICULTURE; CULTIVATION OF VEGETABLES, FLOWERS, RICE, FRUIT, VINES, HOPS, OR SEAWEED; FORESTRY; WATERING

A01G

Root feeders; Injecting fertilisers into the roots

A01G 29/00

Processes or devices for granulating materials, in general

B01J 2/00

Nitrogen, compounds thereof

C01B 21/00

AMMONIA; CYANOGEN; COMPOUNDS THEREOF

C01C

Soil-conditioning or soil-stabilising materials

C09K 17/00

Special rules of classification

Note(s)

1. An ingredient in a mixture of fertilisers, or a single fertiliser which contains more than one of the chemical elements on which the subdivision into subclasses is based, is classified only in the first of the appropriate subclasses. Thus, a nitrophosphate or an ammoniated superphosphate is classified in C05B but not in C05C, magnesium phosphate is classified in C05B but not in C05D, and calcium cyanamide in C05C but not in C05D.

2. Any ingredient in a mixture, which is considered to represent information of interest for search, may also additionally be classified according to Note (1). This can, for example, be the case when it is considered of interest to enable searching of mixtures using a combination of classification symbols. Such non-obligatory classification should be given as "additional information".

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Fertiliser (fertiliser material)

Natural or artificial substance containing the chemical elements that improve growth and productiveness of plants.

Nitrogenous fertiliser – see also "Special rules" above when more than one element present

Fertiliser materials, natural or synthesized, containing nitrogen available for fixation by vegetation, such as potassium nitrate, KNO3, or ammonium nitrate, NH4NO3

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following expressions/words "Ammonia", "Ammonium hydroxide" and "Ammonia water" are often used as synonyms.

In patent documents the following expressions/words "Amendment", "Plant food", "Agricultural chemical" and "Fertiliser" are often used as synonyms.

In patent documents the expression/word "enrichment" is often used with the meaning "fertiliser".

C05D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Materials affecting the growth of plants solely by supplying nutrients ordinarily required for growth or materials which are used to prevent or cure mineral deficiencies in plants as listed below

Inorganic fertilisers containing potassium; manufacture from potassium chloride or sulphate or double or mixed salts thereof; from minerals or volcanic rocks

Calcareous fertilisers; from limestone, calcium carbonate, calcium hydrate, slaked lime, calcium oxide or waste calcium compounds

Inorganic fertilisers containing magnesium

Fertilisers producing carbon dioxide, e.g., comprising bicarbonates

Other inorganic fertilisers, for example fertilisers containing trace elements

Mixtures of inorganic fertilisers covered by more than one of main groups C05D 1/00-C05D 9/00

Preparation, treatment or modification of any of the materials above: e.g., by chemical means (e.g. addition of stabilisers, preservatives), physical means (e.g., irradiation, concentration, purification, separation) or combination of both chemical and physical means, with the proviso that the resultant product is proper for classification in this subclass

Methods of preparing inorganic fertilisers or fertilisers that produce carbon dioxide covered by this subclass in general

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In contrast to fertilisers (C05), plant growth regulators (A01N) are those materials which alter a plant through chemical modification of plant metabolism, for example auxins.

Soil-conditioning materials or soil-stabilising materials are classified in C09K 17/00 and covers mixtures of soil-conditioning materials or soil-stabilising materials with fertilisers where the composition in question is characterised by the soil-conditioning or soil-stabilising properties.

Mixtures of soil-conditioning materials or soil-stabilising materials with fertilisers where the composition in question is characterised by the fertilising activity are classified in C05G

Whilst the subject matter of C05D deals with inorganic fertilisers not covered by subclasses C05B and C05C per se, A01C 3/00 deals with methods of treating manure/methods of manuring per se and A01C 21/00 deals with methods of fertilising per se.

Any apparatus for preparing fertilisers may be classified in those areas of C05 that are specific for such apparatus – e.g., C05B 1/10 – apparatus for the manufacture of superphosphates. Otherwise, individual apparatus should be classified in the relevant area of the IPC, e.g., F26B 17/00

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

PHOSPHATIC FERTILISERS

C05B

NITROGENOUS FERTILISERS

C05C

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Harrows with means for distributing fertilisers

A01B 25/00

Fertiliser distributors

A01C 15/00

Mowers combined with dispensing apparatus, e.g., for fertilisers

A01D 43/14

HORTICULTURE; CULTIVATION OF VEGETABLES, FLOWERS, RICE, FRUIT, VINES, HOPS, OR SEAWEED; FORESTRY; WATERING

A01G

Root feeders; Injecting fertilisers into the roots

A01G 29/00

Processes or devices for granulating materials, in general

B01J 2/00

Potassium containing inorganic compounds

C01D

Magnesium containing inorganic compounds

C01F 5/00

Calcium containing inorganic compounds

C01F 11/00

Lime, magnesia or dolomite and aspects of processing

C04B 2/00

Treatment of molten slag

C04B 5/00

ORGANIC FERTILISERS NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES C05B, C05C, e.g. FERTILISERS FROM WASTE OR REFUSE

C05F

Soil-conditioning or soil-stabilising materials

C09K 17/00

Special rules of classification

Note(s)

1. An ingredient in a mixture of fertilisers, or a single fertiliser which contains more than one of the chemical elements on which the subdivision into subclasses is based, is classified only in the first of the appropriate subclasses. Thus, a nitrophosphate or an ammoniated superphosphate is classified in C05B but not in C05C, magnesium phosphate is classified in C05B but not in C05D, and calcium cyanamide in C05C but not in C05D.

2. Any ingredient in a mixture, which is considered to represent information of interest for search, may also additionally be classified according to Note (1). This can, for example, be the case when it is considered of interest to enable searching of mixtures using a combination of classification symbols. Such non-obligatory classification should be given as "additional information".

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Fertiliser (fertiliser material)

Natural or artificial substance containing the chemical elements that improve growth and productiveness of plants.

Inorganic compound

(taken from the glossary of terms for C01B, C01C and C01G)

A compound devoid of a carbon atom and containing a non-metallic element or a compound containing a carbon atom, and satisfying one of the following criteria:

The compound cannot have a carbon atom having direct bonding to another carbon atom, or the compound cannot have direct bonding between a carbon atom and a halogen or hydrogen atom, or the compound cannot have direct bonding between a carbon and a nitrogen atom by a single or double bond.

The following are exceptions to the above and are to be considered as inorganic compounds: compounds consisting of only carbon atoms, (e.g. fullerenes), cyanogen, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, phosgene, thiophosgene, hydrocyanic acid, isocyanic acid, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid, unsubstituted carbamic acid, and salts of the previously mentioned acids and which contain the same limitations as to a carbon atom.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following expressions/words "Amendment", "Plant food", "Agricultural chemical" and "Fertiliser" are often used as synonyms.

In patent documents the expression/word "enrichment" is often used with the meaning "fertiliser".

C06B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Explosive compositions: compositions included are those containing both a fuel and sufficient oxidiser so that, upon initiation, they are capable of undergoing a chemical reaction of a relatively high rate of speed, resulting in the production of usable force for blasting, firearms, propelling missiles, or the like.

Thermic compositions; compositions included have

Compositions which are fuels for rocket engines and intended for reaction with an oxidant, excluding air, in order to provide thrust for motive power purposes.

Compositions used for affecting the explosion environment, e.g. for neutralising the poisonous gases of explosives or for cooling the explosion gases.

Methods or apparatus for preparing or treating, e.g. working-up, the compositions mentioned above, not otherwise provided for in the IPC.

Methods of using single substances as explosives.

Compositions mentioned above, defined by structure or arrangement of the components or products.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass does not cover chemical compounds or their preparation as such, which subject matter is covered by classes C01 (inorganic chemistry), C07 (organic chemistry) and C08 (organic macromolecular compounds).

The use of explosive or thermic compositions for welding operations is classified in subclass B23K, the compositions as such used therefor are additionally classified in subclass C06B.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Detonating or priming devices, fuses, chemical lighters or pyrophoric compositions

C06C

Blasting

F42D

Mechanical aspects of coated explosive charges

F42B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Making harmful chemical substances harmless or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances

A62D 3/00

Compounds in general

C01, C07, C08

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, methods or apparatus for preparing or treating compositions are classified according to the particular components of the compositions.

In this subclass, with the exception of group C06B 21/00, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a composition is classified in the last place that provides for an ingredient.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Nitrated

Compounds having a nitro group or a nitrate ester group.

C06B 45/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Explosive charges of particular form or shape

F42B 1/00, F42B 3/00

Shape or structure of solid propellant charges for rocket-engine plants

F02K 9/10

C06C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Fuses, e.g. fuse cords.

Non-electric detonators.

Blasting caps.

Primers.

Chemical contact igniters.

Chemical lighters.

Pyrophoric compositions.

Flints.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass does not cover chemical compounds or their preparation as such, which subject matter is covered by classes C01 (inorganic chemistry), C07 (organic chemistry) and C08 (organic macromolecular compounds).

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Ammunition fuzes

F42C

Initiators (non chemical aspects)

F42B 3/10

Filling fuzes

F42B 33/02

Containers for detonators or fuzes

F42B 39/30

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Explosives or thermic compositions; Manufacture thereof; use of single substances as explosives

C06B

Alloys in general

C22C

Fire-lighters

C10L 11/00

Ignition

F23Q

Lighters containing fuel, e.g. for cigarettes, characterised by catalytic ignition of fuel

F23Q 2/30

Non-chemical aspects of flints

F23Q 2/48

Arrangement of catalytic igniters

F23Q 11/00

Blasting cartridges, i.e. case and explosive

F42B 3/00

Arming or safety means for ammunition fuzes

F42C

Blasting

F42D

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Pyrophoric

Pyrophoric (Greek, meaning fire-bearing) materials are finely divided chemical substances, mostly metals, which at room temperature vehemently react with the oxygen contained in air. The energy released in this oxidation process is sufficient to make substances glow or blaze. Therefore a pyrophoric material can spontaneously ignite in air.

C06D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Chemical aspects of generating smoke or mist.

Generation of pressure gas, e.g. for blasting cartridges, starting cartridges, rockets.

Compositions for gas-attacks.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass does not cover chemical compounds or their preparations as such, which subject matter is covered by classes C01 (inorganic chemistry), C07 (organic chemistry) and C08 (organic macromolecular compounds).

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Compositions used as biocides, pest repellants or attractants, or plant growth regulators

A01N

e.g.

A01N 25/18

Devices for generating heat, smoke, or fog in gardens, orchards, or forests, e.g. to prevent damage by frost

A01G 13/06

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus for generating gases

B01J 7/00

Inflatable occupant restraints or confinements characterized by the inflation source or means to control inflation fluid flow

B60R 21/26

Explosive compositions containing an oxidizer, fuels for rocket engines intended for reaction with an oxidant other than air

C06B

Fuels, e.g natural or synthetic natural gas

C10

Rocket-engine plants, i.e. plants carrying both fuel and oxidant therefor; Control thereof

F02K 9/00

Non chemical aspects of generating combustion products of high pressure of high velocity

F23R

Smoke-pot projectors

F42B 5/155

Smoke-producing projectiles, missiles or mines

F42B 12/48

C06F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Mechanical manufacture of matches.

Chemical features in the manufacture of matches.

Matches.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass does not cover chemical compounds or their preparation as such, which subject matter is covered by classes C01 (inorganic chemistry), C07 (organic chemistry) and C08 (organic macromolecular compounds)

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Match-books

A24F 27/12

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Match receptacles or boxes

A24F 27/00

Devices for igniting matches; Holders for ignited matches

A24F 29/00

Devices for splitting matches

A24F 31/00

Dipping or coating in general

B05

Cutting in general

B26D

Impregnating wood or similar material

B27K

Manufacture of wooden sticks

B27L 9/00

Printing on wooden surfaces

B41M 1/38

Machine, apparatus or devices for, or methods of, packaging articles or materials; unpacking

B65B

Ignition compositions

C06B

Fire-lighters consisting of combustible material

C10L 11/04

Mechanical igniters

F23Q 1/00

C07B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods of chemistry when specially adapted for organic chemistry and of general applicability in that field, in which the method itself is of interest rather than the product, e.g. such methods as:

Apparatus for carrying out the above mentioned reactions and methods.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

General reactions and methods where the subject matter to be classified concerns the method or reaction per se and not its special adaptation to the actual product, are classified in this subclass. Preparation, purification, separation or stabilisation of defined compounds are classified in C07C-C07K.

When classifying in this subclass, classification is also made in group B01D 15/08 insofar as subject matter of general interest relating to chromatography is concerned.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Preparation of carboxylic acid esters by telomerisation

C07C 67/47

Processes for preparing macromolecular compounds, e.g. telomerisation

C08F, C08G

Fermentation or enzyme-using processes to synthesise a desired chemical compound or composition or to separate optical isomers from a racemic mixture

C12P

Production of organic compounds by electrolysis or electrophoresis

C25B 3/00, C25B 7/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preparation, separation, purification, or stabilization of hydrocarbons

C07C 1/00-C07C 7/00

Preparation, separation, purification, or stabilization of unsubstituted lactams

C07D 201/00

Process for the preparation of steroids, in general

C07J 75/00

General process for the preparation of peptides

C07K 1/00

Organic dyes

C09B

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, the functional group which is present already in some residue being introduced and is not substantially involved in a chemical reaction, is not considered as the functional group which is formed or introduced as a result of the chemical reaction.

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place according to the type of reaction employed, noting the bond or the functional group which is formed or introduced as result of the chemical reaction.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Asymmetric synthesis

Process that produce optically active compounds from symmetrically constituted molecules by the intermediate use of optically active reagents, but without the use of any of the methods of resolution.

Functional group

Group of atoms within a molecule that is responsible for certain properties of the molecule and reactions in which it takes part.

Grignard reaction

Addition of organomagnesium compounds (Grignard reagents) to carbonyl groups or other unsaturated groups to give alcohols or ketones.

Inversion

The spatial rearrangement of atoms or groups of atoms in a dissymmetric molecule, giving rise to a product with a molecular configuration that is a mirror image of that of the original molecule.

Racemisation

Conversion, by heat or by chemical reaction of an optically active compound into an optically inactive form in which half of the optically active substance becomes its mirror image (enantiomer). This change results in a mixture of equal quantities of dextro- and levorotatory isomers, as result of which the compound does not rotate plane-polarized light to either right or left since the two opposite rotations cancel each other.

Separation

Means separation only for the purposes of recovering organic compounds

C07C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Organic compounds which normally may contain as constituent elements only carbon, hydrogen, halogen, oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium. The only exception to this requirement is that the compounds may contain a metal, but only as the cation of an organic acid salt, alcoholate, phenate, or mercaptide, or as a chelating atom. These organic compounds are acyclic or carbocyclic, or may contain both acyclic and carbocyclic entities.

The synthesis, treatment or modification of the acyclic or carbocyclicorganic compounds of this subclass by chemical means (i.e., chemical reaction), by physical means, or by both chemical and physical means, provided that the resultant product is a compound under the subclass definition.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In class C07, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate subclass. For example, a peptide that is acyclic is classified in C07K rather than C07C.

Subclass C07C is a function oriented entry for the compounds themselves and does not cover the application or use of the compounds under the subclass definition. For classifying such information other entries in IPC exist, for example:

In general, Subclass C07H, and not C07C, is intended to cover compounds containing saccharide radicals, except for:

Subclass C07J covers compounds containing a cyclopenta[a]hydrophenanthrene skeleton or a ring structure derived there from (i.e., steroids), except for secosteroids, which are a group of steroids structurally characterized by the absence of a bond in the cyclopenta[a]hydrophenanthrene nucleus and are covered in subclass C07C.

Multiple classification

Biocidal, pest attractant, or plant growth regulatory activity of chemical compounds or preparations is further classified in A01P.

Therapeutic activity of chemical compounds is further classified in A61P.

Uses of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations are further classified in A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Carbamic acid

C01B 21/12

Fullerenes

C01B 31/00

Phosgenes

C01B 31/28

Carbides

C01B 31/30

Cyanogen compounds such as hydrogen cyanide, cyanic and thiocyanic acid, isocyanic and isothiocyanic acid, cyanogen, cyanamide, and cyanogen halide

C01C 3/00

Organic macromolecular compounds such as polysaccharides, rubbers, epoxy resins, styrene polymers, acrylamide polymers and the like; their preparation or chemical working-up; compositions thereof

C08

Preparation of liquid hydrocarbon mixtures of undefined composition

C10G 2/00

Preparation of synthetic natural gas

C10L 3/06

Preparation of soap

C11D

Preparation of acyclic or carbocyclicorganic compounds using enzymes or fermentation processes

C12P

Electrolytic or electrophoretic production of compounds or non-metals

C25B 1/00, C25B 3/00, C25B 7/00

Processes for producing compounds in which electricity is simultaneously generated

C25B 5/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes or devices for granulating materials, calcining or fusing, chemical processes involving a gas or a liquid, catalysts, cation or anion exchange, and the like

B01J

Processes, in general, for preparing catalysts

B01J 37/00

Dyes, paints, polishes, natural resins, adhesives, and miscellaneous compositions containing acyclic or carbocyclic compounds

C09

Liquid carbonaceous fuels

C10L 1/00

Chemical libraries containing only organic compounds

C40B 40/04

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound or a process of making a compound appropriate for this subclass is classified in the last appropriate place.

In general, and in the absence of an indication to the contrary (such as groups C07C 59/58, C07C 59/70), the terms "acyclic" and "aliphatic" are used to describe compounds in which there is no ring; and, if a ring is present, the compound is classified, based on the "last place priority rule," to a lower group of each level of coordinate groups for cycloaliphatic or aromatic compounds, if such a group exists. Where a compound or an entire group of compounds exists in tautomeric forms, it is classified as though existing in the form which is classified sequentially in the last group in each proper indentation level in the scheme, unless the other form is specifically mentioned higher in the scheme.

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary or if relative positioning according to the last place priority rule dictates otherwise, the compounds containing carboxyl or thiocarboxyl groups are classified as the relevant carboxylic or thiocarboxylic acids; a carboxyl group being a carbon atom having three bonds, and no more than three, to hetero atoms, other than nitrogen atoms of nitro or nitroso groups, with at least one multiple bond to the same hetero atom and a thiocarboxyl group being a carboxyl group having at least one bond to a sulfur atom, e.g. amides or nitriles of carboxylic acids, are classified with the corresponding acids.

In this subclass, a quaternary ammonium compound, unless specifically provided for elsewhere or in the absence of an indication to the contrary, is classified as a single entity, taking into account all substituents that are attached to the quaternised nitrogen, except the salifying anion. In other words, the quaternary cation is considered as a whole; no distinction for classification purposes is made among its four covalent substituents.

General processes for the preparation of a class of compounds falling into more than one main group are classified in the groups for the processes employed, when such groups exist. The compounds prepared are also classified in the groups for the types of compounds prepared, if of interest.

Salts of a compound, unless specifically provided for, are classified as that compound, e.g. aniline hydrochloride is classified as containing carbon, hydrogen and nitrogen only (in group C07C 211/46), sodium malonate is classified as malonic acid (in group C07C 55/08), and a mercaptide is classified as the mercaptan. Metal chelates are dealt with in the same way. Similarly, metal alcoholates and metal phenates are classified in subclass C07C and not in subclass C07F, the alcoholates in groups C07C 31/28 to C07C 31/32, and the phenates as the corresponding phenols in group C07C 39/235 or C07C 39/44. Salts, adducts or complexes formed between two or more organic compounds are classified according to all compounds forming the salts, adducts or complexes.

For the classification of compounds in groups C07C 1/00-C07C 71/00 and C07C 401/00-C07C 409/00:

a compound is classified considering the molecule as a whole (rule of the "whole molecule approach");

a compound is considered to be saturated if it does not contain carbon atoms bound to each other by multiple bonds;

a compound is considered to be unsaturated if it contains carbon atoms bound to each other by multiple bonds, e.g. a six-membered aromatic ring,

unless otherwise specified or implicitly derivable from the subdivision, as in group C07C 69/00, e.g. group C07C 69/712.

For the classification of compounds in groups C07C 201/00-C07C 395/00, i.e. after the functional group has been determined according to the "last place priority rule", a compound is classified according to the following principles:

compounds are classified in accordance with the nature of the carbon atom to which the functional group is attached;

a carbon skeleton is a carbon atom (other than the carbonyl carbon atom of a carboxyl group or of a salt, ester, amide, acid halide, or acid anhydride functional derivative thereof) or a chain of such carbon atoms directly bonded to each other;

when the molecule contains several functional groups, only functional groups linked to the same carbon skeleton as the one first determined are considered;

a carbon skeleton is considered to be saturated if it does not contain carbon atoms bound to each other by multiple bonds;

a carbon skeleton is considered to be unsaturated if it contains carbon atoms bound to each other by multiple bonds, e.g. a six-membered aromatic ring.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Acyclic

the absence of a ring structure.

Carbocyclic

the presence of a ring or ring system where all ring members are carbons.

Bridged

the presence of two rings that share at least three ring members.

Condensed

the presence of two rings that share at least one ring member, e.g., spiro and bridged are considered as condensed.

Condensed ring system

a ring system in which all rings are condensed among themselves; the "number of rings" in a condensed ring system equals the number of scissions necessary to convert the ring system into one acyclic chain. A scission is the breaking of a bond connection between two atoms irrespective of whether the bond is single or multiple.

Organic compound

compound satisfying one of the following criteria:

at least two carbon atoms bonded to each other, or

one carbon atom bonded to at least one hydrogen atom or halogen atom, or

one carbon atom bonded to at least one nitrogen atom by a single or double bond.

Exceptions to the above criteria are: compounds consisting of only carbon atoms (e.g., fullerenes, etc.), cyanogen, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, metal carbides, phosgene, thiophosgene, hydrocyanic acid, isocyanic acid, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid, unsubstituted carbamic acid, and salts of the previously mentioned acids; these exceptions are considered to be inorganic compounds for classification purposes.

Preparation

covers synthesis, purification, separation, stabilisation or use of additives, unless a separate place is provided in the classification scheme.

Quinones

compounds derived from compounds containing a six-membered aromatic ring or a system comprising six-membered aromatic rings (which system may be condensed or not condensed) by replacing two or four >CH groups of the six-membered aromatic rings by >C=O groups, and by removing one or two carbon-to-carbon double bonds, respectively, and rearranging the remaining carbon-to-carbon double bonds to give a ring or ring system with alternating double bonds, including the carbon-to-oxygen bonds; this means that acenaphthenequinone or camphorquinone are not considered as quinones.

C07C 53/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Pyroligneous acid

C10C

Preparation of vinegar

C12J

C07D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Organic compounds containing at least one heterocyclic ring, and with no ring comprising a steroid, saccharide or peptide moiety. Said compounds should generally comprise the following elements or periodic groups only, C, H, halogen, N, O, S, Se, Te.

The only exception to this requirement is that the compounds may contain metal atoms, but only as the cations of heterocyclic organic acid salts, alcoholates, phenolates or mercaptides, or as chelating atoms, e.g. in porphyrins.

Preparation of such compounds, including purification, separation, stabilisation or use of additives, unless a separate place is provided elsewhere in the classification scheme.

Rings are considered as "heterocycles" only if they contain at least one atom selected from halogen, N, O, S, Se or Te as a ring member. Heterocyclic rings may be present as distinct entities or condensed, either with carbocycles or among themselves.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In class C07, the last place priority rule is used, i.e. in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate subclass. Hence, while individual heterocycle-containing amino acids are classified in this subclass C07D, peptides are generally classified in subclass C07K. Similarly, compounds containing saccharide radicals are classified in subclass C07H, and heterocyclic steroids are classified in subclass C07J. Heterocycles incorporating elements other than C, H, halogen, N, O, S, Se or Te are classified in subclass C07F.

This subclass is a function-oriented entry for the compounds themselves and does not cover the application or use of the compounds under the subclass definition.

For classifying such information other entries in IPC exist, for example:

Multiple classification

Biocidal, pest attractant, or plant growth regulatory activity of chemical compounds or preparations is further classified in subclass A01P.

Therapeutic activity of chemical compounds is further classified in subclass A61P.

Uses of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations are further classified in subclass A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Macromolecular compounds

C08

Preparation of heterocyclic organic compounds using enzymes or fermentation processes

C12P

Electrolytic production of organic compounds

C25B 3/00

Processes for producing compounds in which simultaneously electricity is generated

C25B 5/00

Electrophoretic production of compounds

C25B 7/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Generic methods and apparatus therefor used in organic chemistry, such as oxidation, reduction, addition, substitution, purification, separation, stabilisation

C07B

Heterocyclic organic compounds containing elements other than carbon, hydrogen, halogen, oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium

C07F

Dyes, paints, polishes, natural resins, adhesives, and miscellaneous compositions containing heterocyclic compounds

C09

Combinatorial libraries containing organic compounds

C40B 40/04

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate place.

Chemical compounds and their preparation are classified in the groups for the type of compound prepared. The processes of preparation are also classified in the groups for the types of reaction employed, if of interest. The compounds prepared are also classified in the groups for the types of compounds prepared, if of interest.

Salts of a compound, unless specifically provided for, are classified as that compound. Salts, adducts or complexes formed between two or more organic compounds are classified according to all compounds forming the salts, adducts or complexes.

Heterocyclic compounds which contain rings of five or more members, wherein only nitrogen is present as a ring heteroatom, and wherein the ring carbon atoms are fully saturated and otherwise bound only to hydrogen atoms, are classified in main group C07D 295/00. Morpholines and thiomorpholines unsubstituted on the ring carbon atoms are also classified here.

Where a molecule may exist in tautomeric forms, classification is made for the form which appears latest in the scheme.

Where a heterocycle is linked to a carbocycle by an acyclic chain, and both the chain and the carbocycle are further substituted by either hetero atoms or carbon atoms with three bonds to hetero atoms, not more than one hetero atom being a halogen, the molecule is classified according to the substituents on the acyclic chain. See the following example:

C07D

Where a compound contains at least one ring covered by group C07D 295/00 and at least one other hetero ring, the hetero ring covered by group C07D 295/00 is treated as an acyclic chain containing nitrogen atoms for the purposes of classification.

Compounds containing a single heterocycle are classified in the range C07D 203/00-C07D 347/00.

Compounds containing two or more heterocycles, none of which are condensed with themselves or a carbocycle, and all of which are covered by the same main group are also classified in this range.

Compounds containing two or more hetero rings individually covered by different main groups, and not part of the same condensed ring system are classified in the range C07D 401/00-C07D 421/00.

Compounds containing two or more hetero rings, being part of the same condensed ring system, are classified in the range C07D 451/00-C07D 519/00.

Where any individual components of heterocyclic compounds, such as single hetero rings or single condensed systems are of interest in their own right for search purposes, they may be classified according to the procedure outlined in the three immediately preceding paragraphs. These non-obligatory classifications are to be given as "additional information".

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Acyclic

The absence of a ring structure. Acyclic chains may be linear or branched.

Bridged

Where two condensed rings share at least three adjacent ring members.

Carbocyclic

Where all ring members in a ring are carbon atoms.

Condensed

Where at least two rings share at least one ring member.

Condensed ring system

A ring system in which all rings are condensed among themselves, i.e. a ring system wherein the scission of a single connection between two ring atoms cannot result in the division of the ring system into separate entities. Two or more hetero rings are considered part of the same condensed ring system if they condensed among themselves or to a common carbocycle or carbocycle system.

Heterocyclic

Wherein at least one ring member in a molecule containing a ring of atoms is not a carbon atom. For the purposes of classification in this subclass, a narrower definition applies wherein heteroatoms may only be chosen from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium or halogen.

Ortho-condensed

Where two condensed rings share two adjacent ring atoms in common. A ring system is deemed ortho-condensed if each ring shares only one face with any other ring, and no ring has two adjacent shared faces.

Peri-condensed

Where three rings in a condensed ring system share a single ring atom in common.

Plant

Any of a kingdom (Plantae) of multicellular eukaryotic mostly photosynthetic organisms typically lacking locomotive movement or obvious nervous or sensory organs and possessing cellulose cell walls.

Spiro-condensed

Where two condensed rings share only one atom in common.

Number of relevant rings

In a condensed ring system, this equals the minimum number of scissions necessary to convert the ring system into an acyclic chain, a scission being the disconnection of two bonded atoms, without regard for the bond order.

Relevant rings

These are the rings which account for all the bonds in a condensed system. In order to prevent ambiguity in classifying a condensed ring system, the rings which identify the ring system are determined according to the following hierarchy of criteria:

the rings with the lowest number of members;

the rings with the highest number of hetero atoms as ring members;

the rings with the lowest number of members shared between rings;

the rings with the latest place in the classification scheme.

C07D 201/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Separation of inorganic salts

C01

C07D 215/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Quinophthalones

C09B 25/00

C07D 219/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Acridine dyes

C09B 15/00

C07D 221/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Acridine

C07D 219/00

C07D 233/62 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Triarylmethane dyes

C09B 11/26

C07F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Organic (acyclic, carbocyclic, heterocyclic) compounds containing elements only other than or in addition to carbon, hydrogen, halogen, oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium (e.g. metallo-organic compounds, boron compounds, silicon compounds, phosphorus compounds, arsenic compounds).

The preparation of compounds under the subclass definition including purification, separation, stabilisation or use of additives unless provided for elsewhere, as specified below.

The treatment and modification of compounds under the subclass definition provided that:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In class C07, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate place, i.e. in the last appropriate subclass. For example phosphonopyridines are classified in group C07F 9/58 as phosphorous compounds having pyridine ring and not in groupC07D 213/00 as pyridines, sugar phosphates are classified in subclass C07H as sugars and not in subclass C07F as phosphorus compounds and peptides containing metals are classified in subclass C07K and not in C07F.

Subclass C07F is a function-oriented entry for the compounds themselves and does not cover the application or use of the compounds under the subclass definition. For classifying such information other entries in IPC exist, for example:

Preservation of bodies of humans or animals or plants or parts thereof; Biocides, e.g. as disinfectants, as pesticides, as herbicides; Pest repellants or attractants; Plant growth regulators A01N.

Preparations for medical, dental, or toilet purposes A61K.

Subject matter concerning inorganic compounds is classified in Class C01. Thus, for example, when silica modified by organic compounds is not relevant to classification in subclass C07F (for example, when the structure of an organic compound is not disclosed sufficiently) classification may be made in group C01B 33/00.

Multiple classification

Biocidal, pest repellant, pest attractant or plant growth regulatory activity of compounds or preparations is further classified in subclass A01P.

Therapeutic activity of compounds is further classified in subclass A61P.

Cosmetic activity of compounds is further classified in subclass A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Metal-containing porphyrins

C07D 487/22

Organic acid salts, alcoholates, phenates, chelates or mercaptides, having no elements other than carbon, hydrogen, halogen, oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium in the parent compounds (attention is drawn to note 5 following the title of class C07 concerning the rules of classification of these compounds)

C07C, C07D

Macromolecular compounds

C08

Products obtained from layered base-exchange silicates by ion-exchange with organic compounds such as ammonium, phosphonium or sulfonium compounds or by intercalation of organic compounds

C01B 33/44

Fermentation or enzyme-using processes to synthesise a desired chemical compound or composition or to separate optical isomers from a racemic mixture

C12P

Production of organic compounds by electrolysis or electrophoresis

C25B 3/00, C25B 7/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Dyes

C09B

Detergent compositions; Use of single substances as detergents

C11D

Fermentation products

C12

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate place, e.g. ferrocenes and cobaltocenes are classified in group C07F 17/00 and not in group C07F 15/00.

In this subclass, organic acid salts, alcoholates, phenates, chelates or mercaptides are classified as the parent compounds.

Salts, adducts or complexes formed between two or more organic compounds are classified according to all compounds forming the salts, adducts or complexes.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

alcoholate

product of substitution of hydrogen in hydroxy group of alcohol by metal atom.

chelate

intracomplex compound i.e. compound containing intramolecular donor-acceptor bonds.

metallocene

cyclopentadienyl compound of transitional metal, e.g., ferrocenes, constrained geometry-type compounds.

metallo-organic compound or organometallic compound

organic compound containing metal bonded to carbon.

organic compound

is defined as satisfying at least one of the following criteria:

at least two carbon atoms bonded to each other, or

one carbon atom bonded to at least one hydrogen atom or halogen atom, or

one carbon atom bonded to at least one nitrogen atom by single or double bond.

Exceptions to the above criteria are: compounds consisting of only carbon atoms (e.g., fullerenes, etc.), cyanogen, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, metal carbides, phosgene, thiophosgene, hydrocyanic acid, isocyanic acid, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid, unsubstituted carbamic acid, salts thereof; these exceptions are considered to be inorganic compounds for classification purposes.

phenate

product of substitution of hydrogen in hydroxy group of phenol by metal atom.

salt

compound consisting of at least one anionic part and at least one cationic part. Carboxylate salts – products where the hydrogen in a carboxyl group is replaced by an ion of metal or other cation.

Synonyms and Keywords

arsine

compound having chemical formula AsnHn+2. (Organic derivatives of arsenic include dichloromethylarsine CH3AsCl2, dimethyldichlorodiarsine (CH3)2As –AsCl2) etc.).

cacodyl

tetramethyldiarsine (CH3)2As –As(CH3)2.

cacodylic acid

compound having chemical formula (CH3)2As OOH.

phosphine

compound having chemical formula PnHn+2. (Organic derivatives of phosphine include dimethylphosphine (CH3)2PH etc.).

silamine

organic silicon compound containing R – SiH2 – NH2 bonds.

silane

compound having chemical formula SinH2n+2. (Organic derivatives of silane include methylmonosilane CH3SiH3, dimethyldichlorosilane Si(CH3)2Cl2, hexamethyldisilane (CH3)3Si – Si(CH3)3 etc.).

silanol

organic silicon compound containing Si – OH bonds, e.g. trimethylsilanole (CH3)3SiOH, dimethylsilanediole (CH3)2Si(OH)2.

silazane

organic silicon compound containing Si – NH – Si bonds.

silicononane

tetraethylsilane

siloxane

organic silicon compound containing Si – O – Si bonds.

siltiane

organic silicon compound containing Si – S – Si bonds.

stibine

compound having chemical formula SbnHn+2. (Organic derivatives of antimony include trimethylstibine (Sb(CH3)3), triphenylantimony (Sb(C6H5)3), etc.).

C07H - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Compounds containing saccharide radicals, sugars and their derivatives, e.g.:

Nucleosides, nucleotides and nucleic acids;

Processes for the preparation of the above compounds.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In class C07, the last place priority rule is used, i.e. in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate subclass. Hence, while individual heterocycle-containing amino acids are classified in C07D, peptides are generally classified in C07K. Similarly, compounds containing saccharide radicals, with the exception of polysaccharides, are classified in this subclass, and heterocyclic steroids are classified under C07J. Heterocycles incorporating elements other than C, H, halogen, N, O, S, Se, Te are classified in C07F.

This subclass is a function oriented entry for the compounds themselves and does not cover the application or use of the compounds under the subclass definition. For classifying such information other entries in IPC exist, for example:

Multiple classification

Biocidal, pest attractant, or plant growth regulatory activity of chemical compounds or preparations is further classified in subclass A01P.

Therapeutic activity of chemical compounds is further classified in subclass A61P.

Uses of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations are further classified in subclass A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Derivatives of aldonic or saccharic acids

C07C, C07D

Aldonic acids, saccharic acids

C07C 59/105, C07C 59/285

Cyanohydrins

C07C 255/16

Glycals

C07D

Compounds of unknown constitution, glycosides

C07G

Steroid glycosides

C07J

Polysaccharides, derivatives thereof

C08B

DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification

C12N 15/00

Using enzymes or microorganisms for the preparation of compounds containing saccharide radicals

C12P 19/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Sugar industry

C13

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Brewing of beer

C12C

Preparation of wine or other alcoholic beverages

C12G

Measuring or testing processes involving nucleic acids

C12Q 1/68

Electrolytic or electrophoretic processes for the production of compounds.

C25B

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate place.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Heterocyclic radical or hetero ring

These are considered to exclude saccharide radicals as defined above.

Polysaccharide

A compound having more than five saccharide radicals attached to each other by glycosidic linkages.

Saccharide radical

Radical derived from acyclic polyhydroxy-aldehydes or acyclic polyhydroxy-ketones, or from their cyclic tautomers, by removing hydrogen atoms or by replacing hetero bonds to oxygen by the same number of hetero bonds to halogen, nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, in accordance with either of the following definitions:

a) It consists of an uninterrupted carbon skeleton and oxygen atoms directly attached thereto, and is considered to be terminated by every bond to a carbon atom of a cyclic structure and by every bond to a carbon atom having three bonds to hetero atoms, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, and contains within the carbon skeleton an unbranched sequence of at the most six carbon atoms in which at least three carbon atoms - at least two in the case of a skeleton having only four carbon atoms - have one single bond to an oxygen atom as the only hetero bond, and (i) in a cyclic or acyclic sequence, at least one other carbon atom has two single bonds to oxygen atoms as the only hetero bonds, or (ii) in an acyclic sequence, at least one other carbon atom has one double bond to an oxygen atom as the only hetero bond, the said sequence containing at the most one double bond, i.e. C=C or possibly ketalised C=O, in addition to the hetero bonds mentioned under (i) or (ii).

b) It is also a radical derived from a radical defined in (a) by replacing at the most four of the specified hetero bonds to oxygen by the same number of hetero bonds to halogen, nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium.

C07H 11/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Phosphonates

C07H 13/00

C07H 15/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Polyoxyalkylene derivatives of polyols in general

C07C 41/00, C07C 43/00

C07H 15/24 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Steroid glycosides

C07J

C07J - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Compounds containing cyclopenta[a]hydrophenanthrene skeleton or a ring structure derived therefrom:

Preparation of steroids including purification, separation, stabilisation or use of additives unless provided for elsewhere, as specified below.

Treatment and modification of steroids provided that

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In class C07, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate place, i.e. in the last appropriate subclass. For example cyclopenta [a] hydrophenantrenes are classified in subclass C07J as steroids and not in subclasses C07C or C07D as carbocyclic or heterocyclic compounds.

Subclass C07J is a function-oriented entry for the compounds themselves and does not cover the application or use of the compounds under the subclass definition. For classifying such information other entries in the IPC exist, for example:

Multiple classification

When a steroid forms a salt, an adduct or a complex with another organic compound, classification is also made in the entry in class C07 for this organic compound.

Biocidal, pest repellant, pest attractant or plant growth regulatory activity of compounds or preparations is further classified in subclass A01P.

Therapeutic activity of compounds is further classified in subclass A61P.

Cosmetic activity of compounds is further classified in subclass A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Seco-steroids

C07C

Fermentation or enzyme-using processes to synthesise steroids

C12P 33/00

Electrolytic production of organic compounds

C25B 3/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Macromolecular compounds

C08

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate place.

Salts of steroids are classified in the groups for these steroids. Metal chelates containing steroids are dealt with in the same way.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

A-, B-, C- or D-homosteroid

Compound in which a cyclopenta[a]hydrophenanthrene skeleton is modified by expansion of rings A, B, C or D correspondingly by one atom (the prefix "homo" may also mean that one methyl or methylene group is added in certain position, e.g. 18-homosteroids).

A-, B-, C- or D-bishomosteroid

Compound in which a cyclopenta[a]hydrophenanthrene skeleton is modified by expansion of rings A, B, C or D correspondingly by two atoms.

A-, B-, C- or D-norsteroid

Compound in which a cyclopenta[a]hydrophenanthrene skeleton is modified by contraction of rings A, B, C or D correspondingly by one atom (the prefix "nor" may also mean that one methyl group in certain position is substituted by hydrogen atom, e.g. 19-norsteroids, or one methylene group among non-ring members in certain position is absent).

A-, B-, C- or D-bisnorsteroid

compound in which a cyclopenta[a]hydrophenanthrene skeleton is modified by contraction of rings A, B, C or D correspondingly by two atoms.

"alpha"

relates to stereoisomers and designates atoms or groups of atoms that are arranged below the plane of a ring system (the bond between such atoms or groups of atoms and a ring system is represented by a dotted line) provided that a cyclopenta[a]hydrophenanthrene skeleton is drawn on the plane so that rings A, B, C and D are arranged from left to right.

"beta"

relates to stereoisomers and designates atoms or groups of atoms that are arranged above the plane of a ring system (the bond between such atoms or groups of atoms and a ring system is represented by a thick or uninterrupted line) provided that a cyclopenta[a]hydrophenanthrene skeleton is drawn on the plane so that rings A, B, C and D are arranged from left to right.

Bile acids

Steroids having a hydroxy-group and a five-carbon-atom side-chain terminating in a carboxyl group, e.g. cholic acid.

Normal steroid

Compound containing non-modified cyclopenta[a]hydrophenanthrene skeleton.

Seco-steroid

Compound which can be obtained from steroids by a break of one of the bonds in cyclopenta[a]hydrophenanthrene skeleton.

Sterols

Steroid alcohols; contain cyclopenta[a]hydrophenanthrene skeleton plus an 8 to 10-carbon atom side-chain and a hydroxy-group, e.g. cholesterol, ergosterol".

Substitution of steroids in certain position

means substitution of hydrogen atom bound to the carbon atom of the cyclopenta[a]hydrophenanthrene skeleton in that position.

C07J 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cardanolide, bufanolide

C07J 19/00

C07K - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

General processes for the preparation of peptides

Peptides e.g. oligopeptides, proteins

Immunoglobulins

Carrier-bound or immobilised peptides and preparation thereof

Hybridpeptides

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In class C07 the last place priority rule is used, i.e. in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate subclass.

So proline per se is classified in C07D, while ala-pro is a dipeptide and is classified in C07K.

Subclass C07K is a function oriented entry for the compounds themselves and does not cover the application or use of the compounds under the subclass definition. For classifying such information other entries in IPC exist, for example:

Preservation of bodies of humans or animals or plants or parts thereof; Biocides, e.g. as disinfectants, as pesticides, as herbicides; Pest repellants or attractants; Plant growth regulators are classified in A01N.

Preparations for medical, dental, or toilet purposes are classified in A61K.

Amino acids or derivatives thereof are classified in C07C or C07D.

Multiple classification

Biocidal, pest attractant, or plant growth regulatory activity of chemical compounds or preparations is classified in A01P.

Therapeutic activity of chemical compounds or medicinal preparations is further classified in A61P.

Uses of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations are further classified in A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Peptides containing ß-lactam rings

C07D

Cyclic dipeptides not having in their molecule any other peptide link than those which form their ring; e.g. piperazine-2,5-diones

C07D

Ergot alkaloids of the cyclic peptide type

C07D 519/02

Enzymes

C12N

Genetic engineering processes for obtaining peptides

C12N 15/00

Preparation of peptides and proteins by fermentation or enzyme-using processes

C12P 21/00

Electrolytic production of organic compounds

C25B 3/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Peptides in foodstuffs

A23

Macromolecular compounds having statistically distributed amino acid units in their molecules, i.e. when the preparation does not provide for a specific, but for a random sequence of the amino acid units, homopolyamides and block copolyamids derived from amino acids

C08G 69/00

Macromolecular products derived from proteins

C08H 1/00

Preparation of glue or gelatine

C09H

Micro-organisms

C12N

Compositions for measuring or testing processes involving enzymes

C12Q

Investigation or analysis of biological material

G01N 33/00

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate place.

Fragments of peptides modified by removal or addition of amino acids, by substitution of amino acids by others, or by combination of these modifications are classified as the parent peptides. However, fragments of peptides having only four or less amino acids are also classified in group C07K 5/00.

Peptides prepared by chemical processes or having an amino acid sequence derived from naturally occurring peptides are classified with the naturally occurring peptide.

Peptides prepared by recombinant DNA technology are not classified according to the host, but according to the original peptide expressed, e.g. HIV peptide expressed in E. coli is classified with HIV peptides.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Amino acid

compounds in which at least one amino acid group and at least one carboxylic group are bound to the same carbon skeleton and the nitrogen atom of the amino group may form a ring

Normal peptide link

a link between an alpha-amino group of an amino acid and the carboxylic group – in position 1 – of another alpha-amino acid

Abnormal peptide link

a link where at least one of the linked amino acids is not an alpha-amino acid or a link formed by at least one carboxyl or amino group being a part of the side chain of an alpha-amino acid

Peptides

compounds containing at least two amino acid units, which are bound through at least one normal peptide link, including oligopeptides, polypeptides and proteins, where

'''(i) Linear peptides

may comprise rings formed through S-S bridges, or through an hydroxy or a mercapto group of an hydroxy- or a mercapto-amino acid and the carboxyl group of another amino acid (e.g. peptide lactones) but do not comprise rings which are formed only through peptide links

'''(ii) Cyclic peptides

peptides comprising at least one ring formed only through peptide links; the cyclisation may occur only through normal peptide links or through abnormal peptide links, e.g. through the 4-amino group of 2,4-diamino-butanoic acid. Thus, cyclic compounds in which at least one link in the ring is a non-peptide link are considered as "linear peptides"

'''(iii) Depsipeptides

compounds containing a sequence of at least two alpha-amino acids and at least one alpha-hydroxy carboxylic acid, which are bound through at least one normal peptide link and ester links, derived from the hydroxy carboxylic acids, where

''''''(a) Linear depsipeptides

may comprise rings formed through S-S bridges, or through an hydroxy or a mercapto group of an hydroxy- or mercapto-amino acid and the carboxyl group of another amino- or hydroxy-acid but do not comprise rings formed only through peptide or ester links derived from hydroxy carboxylic acids, e.g. Gly-Ala-Gly-OCH2CO2H and Gly-OCH2CO-Ala-Gly are considered as "linear depsipeptides, but HOCH2CO-Gly-Ala-Gly does not contain an ester link, and is thus a derivative of Gly-Ala-Gly which is covered by C07K 5/08

''''''(b) Cyclic depsipeptides

are peptides containing at least one ring formed only through peptide or ester links - derived from hydroxy carboxylic acids -, e.g. Gly-Ala-Gly-OCH2CO

'''(iv) hybrid peptides

are peptides produced through fusion or covalent binding of two or more heterologous peptides

Immunoglobulins

proteins produced by B cells, made up of two identical heavy and two identical light chains, held together by interchain disulfide bonds

Antibodies

immonuglobins which interact with antigens

Monoclonal antibodies

antibodies produced from a single clone of cells, and reactive with a single antigen

Polyclonal antibodies

antibodies produced by a variety of cell clones, and reactive with a variety of antigens or with a variety of antigenic determinants (epitopes) on a single antigen

C08F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Homopolymers and copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated radicals, each having one or more carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds and optionally other functional groups such as aromatic rings, triple bonds, halogens, carboxylic acid, ester or anhydride groups, nitrogen or other heteroatoms such as Si, S, B or P. These polymers are also known as addition polymers.

The above polymers include polyethylene, polypropylene, polybutene, polymers of vinyl chloride, acetate or pyrrolidone, styrene or divinylbenzene polymers, polyacrylates, polymethacrylates, butadiene or isoprene polymers, allyl polymers, acrylonitrile polymers, maleic anhydride polymers, vinylidene polymers, tetrafluoroethylene polymers and many others including those in the "Synonyms/Keywords" section below.

Other specific polymers such as copolymers of hydrocarbons and mineral oils, petroleum resins, terpene resins, copolymers of drying oils with other monomers or coumarone-indene copolymers.

Graft polymers.

Block polymers.

Other types of polymer formed via carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. by inter-reacting polymers in the absence of non-macromolecular monomers.

Polymerisation processes, in bulk, in solution, in suspension, in emulsion, in gaseous or solid state, using regulators (e.g. chain terminators, retarders or short-stopping agents), in presence of compounding ingredients, or initiated by wave energy, particle radiation or electric current; including processes of polymerisation characterized by special features of the polymerisation apparatus used.

Polymerisation initiators or catalysts, e.g. Ziegler, anionic, cationic, redox or transition metal initiators or initiators for radiation polymerisation.

Post-polymerisation treatments of the above types of polymer (but not of rubbers) including purification, catalyst removal and separating polymers from non-polymers; but see "Relationships" section below for overlaps with subclass C08J.

Chemical modification of the above types of polymer (but not of rubbers) by after-treatment, e.g. oxidation, reduction, epoxidation, hydrolysis, halogenation or dehalogenation, sulfonation, cyclisation or partial depolymerisation.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Relationship with other subclasses of classes C08 and C09

Polysaccharides and their derivatives are classified in subclass C08B.

Treatment and chemical modification of rubbers, including conjugated diene rubbers, are classified in subclass C08C – however synthesis of rubbers and treatment or chemical modification of non-rubbers covered per se in this subclass (C08F) are classified in subclass this subclass (C08F).

Macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds (usually known as condensation polymers) are classified in subclass C08G. This includes unsaturated polyesters, polyamides or polyurethanes, silicone-type polymers with unsaturated groups and block polymers formed by interreacting polymers in the absence of monomers, as long as the mechanism for reaction is of C08G type.

Derivatives of natural macromolecular polymers, e.g. derived from proteins or vulcanised oils, are classified in subclass C08H.

Working-up, general processes of compounding and after-treatment not covered by this subclass are classified in subclass C08J. These include making solutions, dispersions etc., plasticising, compounding with additives, e.g. colouring or masterbatching, crosslinking, manufacture of articles or shaped materials, chemical treatment or coating of such articles, making porous, cellular or foamed materials, and recovery or working up of waste materials.

Use or choice of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic materials as compounding agents are classified in subclass C08K.

Compositions of macromolecular compounds, either with other macromolecular compounds or with other ingredients, including compositions of polysaccharides, rubbers or natural macromolecular compounds, are classified in subclass C08L.

Coating compositions and other polymer compositions for similar uses, e.g. paints, inks, woodstains and printing pastes, are classified in subclass C09D.

Adhesives and adhesive processes are classified in subclass C09J.

Materials for applications not otherwise provided for, or applications of materials not otherwise provided for, are classified in subclass C09K. These include sealing or anti-slip materials, heat-transfer, heat-exchange or heat-storage materials, drilling compositions, luminescent or tenebrescent materials, etching, surface-brightening or pickling materials, antioxidant materials, soil-conditioning or soil-stabilising materials, liquid crystal or fireproofing materials.

Subclasses C08B-C08L are generally function-oriented subclasses in relation to the polymers they cover, while C09D-C09K are application-oriented subclasses in relation to the said polymers.

Multiple classification

Biocidal, pest-repellant, pest-attractant or plant growth regulatory activity of compounds or preparations is further classified in subclass A01P.

Therapeutic activity of compounds is further classified in subclass A61P.

The use of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations is further classified in subclass A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Production of liquid hydrocarbon mixtures from lower carbon number hydrocarbons, e.g. by oligomerisation

C10G 50/00

Production of polymers using enzymes

C12P

Graft polymerization of monomers on to fibres, threads, yarns, fabrics or fibrous goods made from such materials

D06M 14/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

None – apart from those mentioned in the Relationships section above

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Catalysts in general (other than polymerization catalysts)

B01J

Chemical apparatus

B01J, B01L

Layered products

B32B

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, boron or silicon are considered as metals.

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a catalyst or polymer is classified in the last appropriate place.

This subclass also covers compositions based on monomers which form macromolecular compounds classifiable in this subclass (paints C09D 4/00, adhesives C09J 4/00). In this subclass:

if the monomers are defined, classification is made according to the polymer to be formed in groups C08F 10/00-C08F 246/00 if no preformed polymer is present; or in groups C08F 251/00-C08F 291/00 if a preformed polymer is present, considering the reaction to take place as a graft or cross-linking reaction;

if the presence of compounding ingredients is of interest, classification is made in group C08F 2/44 (sensitizing agents C08F 2/46, catalysts C08F 4/00);

if the compounding ingredients are of interest per se, classification is also made in subclass C08K.

Macromolecular compounds and their preparation are classified in the groups for the type of compound prepared.

General processes for the preparation of macromolecular compounds according to more than one main group are classified in the groups for the processes employed (C08F 2/00-C08F 8/00).

Processes for the preparation of macromolecular compounds are also classified in the groups for the types of reactions employed, if of interest.

Subject matter relating to both homopolymers and copolymers is classified in groups C08F 10/00-C08F 38/00.

Subject matter limited to homopolymers is classified only in groups C08F 110/00-C08F 138/00.

Subject matter limited to copolymers is classified only in groups C08F 210/00-C08F 246/00.

In groups C08F 210/00-C08F 238/00, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a copolymer is classified according to the major monomeric component.

Multiple classification

The following multiple classification rules apply in this subclass:

When classifying in groups C08F 210/00-C08F 297/00, any monomeric components not identified by the classification according to note (4) after the title of subclass C08F within this classification range, and where the use of such monomeric components is determined to be novel and non-obvious, must also be classified in the last appropriate place in groups C08F 210/00-C08F 238/00.

Any monomeric components not identified by the classification according to Note (4) after the title of subclass C08F or the note above, and where the use of such monomeric components is considered to represent information of interest for search, may also be classified in the last appropriate place in groups C08F 210/00-C08F 238/00. This can for example be the case when it is considered of interest to enable searching of copolymers using a combination of classification symbols. Such non-obligatory classifications should be given as "additional information".

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Addition polymers

Polymers in which unsaturated monomer molecules join together to form a polymer in which the molecular formula of the repeat unit is identical (except for the double bond) with that of the monomer.

Aliphatic radical

Means an acyclic or non-aromatic carbocyclic carbon skeleton which is considered to be terminated by every bond to:

an element other than carbon;

a carbon atom having a double bond to one atom other than carbon;

an aromatic carbocyclic ring or a heterocyclic ring.

CH2=CH-O-CH2-CH2-NH-COO-CH2-CH2-OH are classified in group C08F 16/28;

CH2=CH-CO-CH=CH2 are classified in group C08F 16/36;

CH2=CH-C6H4-Cl are classified in group C08F 12/18.

Examples: Polymers of

Block polymers

Polymers formed by polymerization of monomers on to a macromolecule having groups capable of inducing the formation of new polymer chains bound at one or both ends of the starting macromolecule, or by polymerization using successively different catalyst types or successively different monomer systems without deactivating the intermediate polymer.

Condensation polymers

Polymers in which water or some other simple molecule is eliminated from two or more monomer molecules as they combine to form the polymer or crosslinks between polymer chains. These polymers are generally in subclass C08G.

Copolymers

Usually denotes polymers of two chemically distinct monomers, and sometimes denotes terpolymers containing more than two types of monomer unit.

Graft polymers

Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerizing monomers on to preformed polymers or on to inorganic materials. Such preformed polymers could be rubbers, polysaccharides, condensation polymers, homopolymers or copolymers of the addition polymer type.

Homopolymers

Polymers resulting from the polymerisation of a single monomer or polymer with a single type of repeating unit.

Repeat(ing) unit

The unit in an addition polymer which is repeated throughout the molecule; for example in polyethylene the repeat unit is:

–CH2-CH2-.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following abbreviations are often used:

ABS

Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene copolymer

AIBN

Azoisobutyronitrile (initiator)

AMMA

Acrylonitrile-methyl-methacrylate copolymer

AMPS

Acrylamidomethylpropanesulfonic acid

BR

Butadiene rubber

CTFE

Chloro-trifluoroethylene

DVB

Divinyl benzene

EAA

Ethylene-acrylic acid copolymer

EPDM

Ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer

EPR

Ethylene-propylene rubber

EVOH

Ethylene-vinyl alcohol copolymer

HDPE

High-density polyethylene

HEMA

Hydroxyethyl methacrylate

LDPE

Low-density polyethylene

LLDPE

Linear low-density polyethylene

PAN

Polyacrylonitrile

PE

Polyethylene

PMMA

Polymethyl methacrylate

PP

Polypropylene

PS

Polystyrene

PTFE

Polytetrafluoroethylene

PVA

Polyvinyl alcohol or polyvinyl acetate

PVAC

Polyvinyl acetate

PVC

Polyvinyl chloride

PVOH

Polyvinyl alcohol

PVP

Polyvinyl pyrrolidone

SAN

Styrene-acrylonitrile copolymer

SBR

Styrene-butadiene rubber

SBS

Styrene-butadiene-styrene block terpolymer

TAC

Triallyl cyanurate

C08F 4/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Catalysts in general

B01J

C08F 8/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Crosslinking in general

C08J

C08F 8/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Polymeric products of isocyanates or thiocyanates

C08G

C08F 299/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

In the presence of non-macromolecular monomers

C08F 251/00-C08F 291/00

Involving other reactions

C08G 81/00

C08G - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. condensation polymers, where the polymers are:

Processes for preparing the macromolecular compounds provided for in this subclass.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Relationship with other subclasses of classes C08 and C09

Polysaccharides and their derivatives are classified in subclass C08B.

Treatment and chemical modification of rubbers, including conjugated diene rubbers, are classified in subclass C08C.

Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds (usually known as addition polymers) are classified in subclass C08F.

Derivatives of natural macromolecular polymers, e.g. derived from proteins or vulcanised oils, are classified in subclass C08H.

Working-up, general processes of compounding and after-treatment not covered by this subclass are classified in subclass C08J. These include making solutions, dispersions etc., plasticising, compounding with additives, e.g. colouring or masterbatching, crosslinking, manufacture of articles or shaped materials, chemical treatment or coating of such articles, and recovery or working up of waste materials. However, the following points should be noted:

Use or choice of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic materials as compounding agents are classified in subclass C08K.

Compositions of macromolecular compounds, either with other macromolecular compounds or with other ingredients, including compositions of polysaccharides, rubbers or natural macromolecular compounds, are classified in subclass C08L.

Coating compositions and other polymer compositions for similar uses, e.g. paints, inks, woodstains and printing pastes, are classified in subclass C09D.

Adhesives and adhesive processes are classified in subclass C09J.

Materials for applications not otherwise provided for, or applications of materials not otherwise provided for, are classified in subclass C09K. These include sealing or anti-slip materials, heat-transfer, heat-exchange or heat-storage materials, drilling compositions, luminescent or tenebrescent materials, etching, surface-brightening or pickling materials, antioxidant materials, soil-conditioning or soil-stabilising materials, liquid crystal or fireproofing materials.

Subclasses C08B-C08L are generally function-oriented subclasses in relation to the polymers covered there, while C09D-C09K are application-oriented subclasses in relation to the said polymers.

Multiple classification

Biocidal, pest-repellant, pest-attractant or plant growth regulatory activity of compounds or preparations is further classified in subclass A01P.

Therapeutic activity of compounds is further classified in subclass A61P.

The use of cosmetics or other toilet preparations is further classified in A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Production of polymers using enzymes

C12P

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Catalysts in general (other than polymerization catalysts)

B01J

Chemical apparatus

B01J, B01L

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, group C08G 18/00 takes precedence over all other groups. A further classification is given if the polymers are obtained by reactions forming specific linkages for which an appropriate group is provided.

Within each main group of this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

In groups C08G 61/00-C08G 79/00, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming two different linkages in the main chain are classified only according to the linkage present in excess.

In group C08G 18/00, for the purpose of groups C08G 18/28-C08G 18/69, the addition of water for the preparation of cellular materials is not taken into consideration.

When classifying in group C08G 18/00, it is desirable to add the indexing code of C08G 101/00 relating to manufacture of cellular products.

This subclass also covers compositions based on monomers which form macromolecular compounds classifiable in this subclass. In this subclass:

if the monomers are defined, classification is made in groups C08G 2/00-C08G 79/00, C08G 83/00 according to the polymer to be formed;

if the monomers are defined in a way that a composition cannot be classified within one main group of this subclass, the composition is classified in group C08G 85/00;

if the compounding ingredients are of interest per se, classification is also made in subclass C08K.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Addition polymers

Polymers in which unsaturated monomer molecules join together to form a polymer in which the molecular formula of the repeat unit is identical (except for the double bond) with that of the monomer.

Block polymers

Polymers formed by polymerization of monomers on to a macromolecule having groups capable of inducing the formation of new polymer chains bound at one or both ends of the starting macromolecule, or by polymerization using successively different catalyst types or successively different monomer systems without deactivating the intermediate polymer.

Condensation polymers

Polymers in which water or some other simple molecule is eliminated from 2 or more monomer molecules as they combine to form the polymer or crosslinks between polymer chains.

Copolymers

Usually denotes polymers of 2 chemically distinct monomers, and sometimes denotes terpolymers containing more than 2 types of monomer unit.

Graft polymers

Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerizing monomers on to preformed polymers or on to inorganic materials. Such preformed polymers could be rubbers, polysaccharides, condensation polymers, homopolymers or copolymers of the addition polymer type.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expressions "Polycaprolactam" and "Nylon 6" are often used as synonyms.

In patent documents the expressions "Aramid" and "aromatic polyamide" are often used as synonyms.

In patent documents the following abbreviations are often used:

CPET

Crystallised polyethylene terephthalate

DABCO

1,4-diazabicyclo-2,2,2-octane or triethylene diamine (amine catalyst for PU foams)

DBP

Dibutyl phthalate

DOP

Dioctyl phthalate

HDI

Hexamethylene diisocyanate

IPDI

Isophorone diisocyanate

MDI

Diphenylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate

PBT

Polybutylene terephthalate

PEEK

Polyetheretherketone

PEG

Polyethylene glycol

PEI

Polyetherimide

PEK

Polyetherketone

PEO

Polyethylene oxide

PES

Polyethersulphone

PET

Polyethylene terephthalate

PPS

Polyphenylene sulphide

PPSU

Polyphenylene sulphone

PUR

Polyurethane

TETA

Triethylene tetramine

TDI

Toluene diisocyanate

C08G 12/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Reaction polyamides with aldehydes

C08G 69/50

C08G 16/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

With polynitriles

C08G 69/38

C08G 18/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preparatory processes of porous or cellular materials, in which the monomers or catalysts are not specific

C08J

C08G 18/09 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Use of preformed oligomers

C08G 18/79

C08G 18/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Catalysts in general

B01J

C08G 59/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Low-molecular-weight polyepoxy compounds

C07

C08G 63/46 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

By after-treatment

C08G 63/91

C08G 65/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Polyacetals

C08G 2/00, C08G 4/00

C08H - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Macromolecular products derived from proteins, e.g. protein-aldehyde or casein-aldehyde condensates, products derived from horn, hoofs, hair, skin or leather.

Vulcanised oils, e.g. factice.

Other macromolecular compounds falling within the subclass title, e.g. derived from lignin or lignocellulosic materials.

Processes for preparing the above macromolecular materials.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Multiple classification

Biocidal, pest-repellant, pest-attractant or plant growth regulatory activity of compounds or preparations is further classified in subclass A01P.

Therapeutic activity of compounds is further classified in subclass A61P.

The use of cosmetics or other toilet preparations is further classified in A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Food proteins

A23

e.g.

A23J

Polysaccharides

C08B

Natural rubber

C08C

Graft polymers obtained by polymerizing monomers on to polysaccharides, natural rubbers or derivatives thereof

C08F 251/00, C08F 253/00

Compositions of bituminous materials, e.g. asphalt, tar or pitch

C08L 95/00

Natural resins or their derivatives

C09F

Glue, gelatine

C09H

Working up pitch, asphalt or bitumen

C10C 3/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Factice

Vulcanized oil, used as a substitute for rubber

C08J - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Chemical aspects of processes for treating, compounding, working-up or recovery of macromolecular substances unless the treatment, compounding, working-up or recovery is provided for elsewhere as indicated below in the relationship section.

Chemical features of manufacture, treatment or coating of articles or shaped materials containing macromolecular substances unless the manufacture, treatment or coating is provided for elsewhere as indicated below in the relationship section.

Chemical aspects of working-up of macromolecular substances to porous or cellular articles or materials and after-treatment thereof unless provided for elsewhere as indicated below in the relationship section.

Chemical aspects of recovery or working-up of waste materials, i.e. macromolecular materials (e.g. polymers), solvents and unreacted monomers, unless provided for elsewhere as indicated below in the relationship section.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

C08J covers general processes or treatments that are not already covered by subclasses C08B, C08C, C08F, C08G and C08H.

C08J is residual to subclasses C08B, C08C, C08F, C08G and C08H in relation to after-treatment of macromolecular substances or polymers, and therefore does not cover:

B29 covers mechanical aspects of working up, after-treatment and compounding of plastics or materials in a plastic state. If a process for working up, after-treatment and compounding of plastics contains both chemical and mechanical aspects, it should be classified in both B29 and C08J.

When classifying in this subclass, additional classification(s) are made from subclass C08L, relating to essential or characterising materials used.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Manufacture of semi-permeable membranes for separation processes or apparatus.

B01D 67/00-B01D 71/00

Mechanical aspects of shaping of plastics or substances in a plastic state for the production of porous or cellular articles

B29C, E, B29C 67/20

Mechanical aspects

B29C 35/00

Plasticisers

C08K

Crosslinking agents

C08K

Coating articles of macromolecular substances with metallic materials.

C23C, C25D
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Treatment of macromolecular material specially adapted to enhance its filling properties in mortars, concrete or artificial stone

C04B 16/04, C04B 18/20, C04B 20/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Shaping or working of foodstuffs.

A01J, A21C, A22C, A47J, B02C

Making micro-balloons

B01J 13/02

Layered products, manufacture thereof

B32B

Coating compositions, e. g. paints, varnishes; lacquers; filling pastes; chemical paint or ink removers; inks; correcting fluids; woodstains; pastes or solids for colouring or printing and use of materials therefore.

C09D

Destructive distillation of carbonaceous materials for production of gas, coke, tar or similar materials.

C10B

Processes of working-up tar, pitch asphalt and bitumen and production of pyroligneous acid.

C10C

Cracking hydrocarbon oils, production of liquid hydrocarbon mixtures, e.g. by destructive hydrogenation, oligomerisation, polymerisation; recovery of hydrocarbon oils from oil-shale, oil-sand or gases; refining mixtures mainly consisting of hydrocarbons; reforming naphtha; mineral waxes.

C10G

Manufacture of artificial filaments, threads, fibres, bristles or ribbons.

D01F

Treatment of textiles; laundering; flexible materials not otherwise provided for.

D06

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

expandable

includes expanding, pre-expanded or expanded'

C08J 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Shaping of foodstuffs

A23P

C08J 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Foamed polymeric products of isocyanates or isothiocyanates characterised by the monomers or catalysts used

C08G 18/00

C08K - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Use of inorganic ingredients, e.g. elements, metal compounds or glass, as additives in compositions of macromolecular compounds.

Use of non-macromolecular organic ingredients, e.g. hydrocarbons, heteroatom-containing compounds or organo-metallic compounds, as additives in compositions of macromolecular compounds.

Use of ingredients characterised by shape, e.g. fibres, spheres or particles, as additives in compositions of macromolecular compounds.

Use of pretreated, agglomerated, encapsulated or adsorbed ingredients as additives in compositions of macromolecular compounds.

Use of ingredients of unknown constitution, e.g. undefined reaction products, as additives in compositions of macromolecular compounds.

Use of mixtures of ingredients, e.g. mixtures of organic and inorganic ingredients, as additives in compositions of macromolecular compounds.

Note

All additives characterised by their special use or function (e.g. fillers, reinforcing agents, pigments, stabilisers against light or heat, antioxidants, blowing agents, antibacterial agents, plasticisers, crosslinking agents, flame retardants, lubricants, etc.) are classified in this subclass according to their chemical constitution or structure (e.g. "Silicon-containing inorganic compounds", "Phenols containing keto groups", "Phosphinic compounds, e.g. R2=P(:O)OR' ") irrespective of their special use or function.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass does not cover chemical elements or compounds or their preparation as such, which subject matter is covered by classes C01 (inorganic chemistry), C03 (glass; mineral or slag wool), C04 (artificial stone and ceramics, etc.), C07 (organic chemistry), C09 (dyes, pigments, coatings, paints, polishing compositions, adhesives, etc.), B22, C21, C22, C23 (metals and alloys, etc.) and C25 (electrochemical preparation of elements and compounds; etc.).

The compositions of polymers, resins or rubbers in which the ingredients (additives) are used are classified in C08L.

The use of macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients is classified in C08L.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Disinfectants, pesticides or herbicides

A01N

Pharmaceutical, medical, medicinal, dental, therapeutical or cosmetic compositions

A61K, A61L

Layered products

B32B

Compositions of cements, mortars, concrete or ceramics

C04B

Explosive or thermic compositions

C06B

Use of reinforcing fibrous material in the manufacture of articles or shaped materials containing macromolecular substances

C08J 5/04-C08J 5/10

Organic dyes and pigments; Mordants; Lakes

C09B

Treatment of inorganic materials to enhance their pigmenting or filling properties

C09C

Paints based on inorganic substances, with or without organic additives

C09D 1/00-C09D 1/12

Anti-corrosive paints containing metal dust

C09D 5/10

Paints containing biocides, e.g. fungicides, insecticides, pesticides

C09D 5/14

Magnetisable or magnetic paints or lacquers

C09D 5/23

Electrically-conductive paints

C09D 5/24

Paints containing free metal

C09D 5/38

Use of compounds as anti-settling agents in coating compositions

C09D 7/02

Use of compounds as anti-skinning agents in coating

C09D 7/04

Use of compounds as levelling agents in coating compositions

C09D 7/06

Other additives in coating compositions

C09D 7/12

Chemical paint or ink removers with abrasives

C09D 9/02

Chemical paint or ink removers with surface-active agents

C09D 9/04

Pigment pastes, e.g. for mixing in paints

C09D 17/00

Polishing compositions

C09F, C09G

Electrically-conductive adhesives

C09J 9/02

Non-macromolecular additives in adhesives

C09J 11/02

Inorganic additives in adhesives

C09J 11/04

Organic additives in adhesives

C09J 11/06

Macromolecular additives in adhesives

C09J 11/08

Compositions for sealing or packing joints or covers

C09K 3/10

Compositions for stopping leaks

C09K 3/12

Compositions for drilling of boreholes or wells

C09K 8/00

Soil-conditioning or soil-stabilising materials

C09K 17/00

Lubricating compositions

C10M

Detergent compositions

C11D

Artificial filaments or fibres

D01F

Textile treating compositions

D06M, D06N

Conductors or insulators

H01B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Making microcapsules or microballoons

B01J 13/02

Making fibre-reinforced granules

B29B 9/14

Pretreatment of reinforcements or fillers

B29B 15/08

Releasing, lubricating or separating agents

B29C 33/56

Shaping composites, i.e. plastics material comprising reinforcements or fillers

B29C 70/00

Tyres characterised by the chemical composition

B60C 1/00

Stabilisation of cellulose esters of organic acids

C08B 3/30

Stabilisation of cellulose esters of inorganic acids

C08B 5/08

Preservation of rubber latex

C08C 1/06

Chemical modification of rubber

C08C 19/00

Polymerisation in the presence of compounding ingredients, e.g. plasticisers, dyestuffs, fillers

C08F 2/44

Processes of plasticising macromolecular compounds

C08J 3/18

Processes of compounding polymers with additives, in general

C08J 3/20

Processes of crosslinking, e.g. vulcanising, of macromolecules

C08J 3/24

Anti-oxidant compositions; Compositions inhibiting chemical change

C09K 15/00

Fireproofing of macromolecular materials

C09K 21/14

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, an ingredient is classified in the last appropriate place.

In this subclass:

a mixture of ingredients is classified in the most indented group covering all the essential ingredients of the mixture, e.g.:

a mixture of a monohydroxylic and a polyhydroxylic alcohol C08K 5/05;

a mixture of two polyhydroxylic alcohols C08K 5/053;

a mixture of an alcohol and an ether C08K 5/04;

a mixture of an ether and an amine C08K 5/00;

a mixture of an amine and a metal C08K 13/02;

ammonium salts are classified in the same way as metal salts.

In this subclass, any ingredient of a mixture which is not identified by the classification according to the second rule above, and the use of which is determined to be novel and non-obvious, must also be classified in this subclass according to the first rule above. The ingredient can be either a single compound or a composition in itself.

Any ingredient of a mixture which is not identified by the classification according to the second or third rule above, and which is considered to represent information of interest for search, may also be classified in this subclass according to the first rule above. This can, for example, be the case when it is considered of interest to enable searching of mixtures using a combination of classification symbols. Such non-obligatory classification should be given as "additional information".

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Acyclic

The absence of a ring structure.

Carbocyclic

The presence of a ring or ring system where all ring members are carbons.

Condensed

The presence of two rings that share at least one ring member.

Heterocyclic

The presence of a ring or ring system wherein at least one ring member is not a carbon atom.

Inorganic compound

Compound devoid of a carbon atom and containing a non-metallic element, or a compound containing a carbon atom, and satisfying one of the following criteria:

the compound cannot have a carbon atom having direct bonding to another carbon atom, or

the compound cannot have direct bonding between a carbon atom and a halogen or hydrogen atom, or

the compound cannot have direct bonding between a carbon and a nitrogen atom by a single or double bond.

The following are exceptions to the above and are to be considered as inorganic compounds: compounds consisting of only carbon atoms (e.g. fullerenes), cyanogen, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, metal carbides, phosgene, thiophosgene, hydrocyanic acid, isocyanic acid, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid, unsubstituted carbamic acid, and salts of the previously mentioned acids and which contain the same limitations as to a carbon atom.

Macromolecular compound

Natural or synthetic (co)polymer or resin or rubber

Metal

Any element other than hydrogen, carbon, halogen (fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine and astatine), oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium, phosphorus, silicon, boron, noble gases (helium, neon, argon, krypton, xenon and radon).

Organic compound

Compound satisfying one of the following criteria:

at least two carbon atoms bonded to each other, or

one carbon atom bonded to at least one hydrogen atom or halogen atom, or

one carbon atom bonded to at least one nitrogen atom by a single or double bond.

Exceptions to the above criteria are: compounds consisting of only carbon atoms (e.g. fullerenes), cyanogen, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, metal carbides, phosgene, thiophosgene, hydrocyanic acid, isocyanic acid, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid, unsubstituted carbamic acid, and salts of the previously mentioned acids; these exceptions are considered to be inorganic compounds for classification purposes.

Quinone

Compound derived from compounds containing a six-membered aromatic ring or a system comprising six-membered aromatic rings (which system may be condensed or not condensed) by replacing two or four >CH groups of the six-membered aromatic rings by >C=O groups, and by removing one or two carbon-to-carbon double bonds, respectively, and rearranging the remaining carbon-to-carbon double bonds to give a ring or ring system with alternating double bonds, including the carbon-to-oxygen bonds; this means that acenaphthenequinone or camphorquinone are not considered as quinones.

Synonyms and Keywords

Phr

Parts per hundred parts of rubber

In patent documents the words "compounding ingredient" and "additive" are often used as synonyms.

C08L - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Compositions of macromolecular compounds, either with other macromolecular compounds or with other ingredients, including compositions of polysaccharides, rubbers or natural macromolecular compounds.

The use of macromolecular substances as compounding ingredients.

The above compositions and uses may involve macromolecular substances obtained by reactions which may or may not involve only carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds and compositions.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Relationship with other subclasses of class C08 and C09

Subclasses C08B to C08L are generally function-oriented subclasses in relation to the polymers per se, while C09D to C09K are application-oriented subclasses in relation to the said polymers.

Polysaccharides per se and their derivatives are classified in C08B.

Treatment and chemical modification of rubbers, including conjugated diene rubbers, are classified in C08C – however synthesis of rubbers and treatment or chemical modification of non-rubbers are classified in subclasses C08F or C08G.

Macromolecular compounds per se obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds (usually known as addition polymers) are in C08F. Compositions based on monomers of such polymers are also in C08F.

Macromolecular compounds per se obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds (usually known as condensation polymers) are classified in C08G. Compositions based on monomers of such polymers are also classified in C08G.

Derivatives of natural macromolecular polymers per se, e.g. derived from proteins or vulcanised oils, are classified in C08H.

Working-up, general processes of compounding and after-treatment are covered by subclass C08J. These include making solutions, dispersions etc., plasticising, compounding with additives, e.g. colouring or masterbatching, crosslinking, manufacture of articles or shaped materials, chemical treatment or coating of such articles, making porous, cellular or foamed materials, and recovery or working up of waste materials.

Use or choice of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic materials as compounding agents are classified in C08K, any macromolecular components are classified in C08L.

Coating compositions and other polymer compositions for similar uses, e.g. paints, inks, woodstains and printing pastes, are classified in C09D.

C09G covers the application of the compositions of C08L when used as polishes.

Adhesives and adhesive processes are classified in C09J.

Materials used in applications not otherwise provided for, are classified in C09K. These include sealing or anti-slip materials, heat-transfer, heat-exchange or heat-storage materials, drilling compositions, luminescent or tenebrescent materials, etching, surface-brightening or pickling materials, antioxidant materials, soil-conditioning or soil-stabilising materials, liquid crystal or fireproofing materials.

Multiple classification

Application of macromolecular compositions as biocides, pest-repellants, pest-attractants, or plant growth activity regulators is further classified in subclass A01P.

Therapeutic activity of macromolecular compounds is further classified in subclass A61P.

The use of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations is further classified in subclass A61Q.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Artificial filaments or fibres

D01F

Treatment of textiles

D06L-D06Q
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Application of macromolecular compositions as pesticides or herbicides

A01N

Application of macromolecular compositions as pharmaceutical compositions or cosmetics

A61K

Application of macromolecular compositions as explosive compositions

C06B

Application of macromolecular compositions in coating compositions

C09D

Application of macromolecular compositions in adhesive compositions

C09J

Application of macromolecular compositions in lubricants

C10M

Detergents

C11D

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Liquid crystal compositions

C09K 19/00

Layered products

B32B

Electrolytic processes, e.g. electrophoresis

C25

Special rules of classification

In this subclass:

The macromolecular component which is present in the highest proportion by weight is classified first.

If two or more components are present in equal weight, then each is classified.

If such a component is an addition polymer containing two or more monomers, it is classified according to the monomer present in the greatest amount.

If such a component is a condensation polymer contains two or more different types of linkages, it is classified according to the linkage present in the greatest amount.

Multiple classification

The following multiple classification rules apply in this subclass:

Any macromolecular components not identified by the classification above, and where the use of such components is determined to be novel and non-obvious, must be classified as "invention information".

Any macromolecular components not identified by the classifications above, and where the use of such macromolecular components is considered to represent information of interest for search, may also be classified as "additional information".

Examples:

A blend of 80 parts polyethylene and 20 parts polyvinyl chloride would be classified first in C08L 23/06. Classification in C08L 27/06 as invention information is done if the use of PVC is novel and non-obvious, otherwise classification in C08L 27/06 as additional information may be done if deemed of interest for search.

A blend of 60 parts polyethylene-co-propylene (55 parts ethylene, 45 parts propylene) and 40 parts polyvinyl alcohol is classified first as a copolymer of ethylene because the copolymer is present in the greatest amount even though the proportion of ethylene in the whole blend is lower than that of polyvinyl alcohol.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Addition polymers

Polymers in which unsaturated monomer molecules join together to form a polymer in which the molecular formula of the repeat unit is identical (except for the double bond) with that of the monomer.

Aliphatic radical

Means an acyclic or non-aromatic carbocyclic carbon skeleton which is considered to be terminated by every bond to:

an element other than carbon;

a carbon atom having a double bond to one atom other than carbon;

an aromatic carbocyclic ring or a heterocyclic ring.

Examples: Polymers of

CH2=CH-O-CH2-CH2-NH-COO- CH2 - CH2-OH are classified in group C08F 16/28;

CH2=CH-CO-CH=CH2 are classified in group C08F 16/36;

CH2=CH-C6H4-Cl are classified in group C08F 12/18.

Block polymers

Polymers formed by polymerization of monomers on to a macromolecule having groups capable of inducing the formation of new polymer chains bound at one or both ends of the starting macromolecule, or by polymerization using successively different catalyst types or successively different monomer systems without deactivating the intermediate polymer.

Condensation polymers

Polymers in which water or some other simple molecule is eliminated from 2 or more monomer molecules as they combine to form the polymer or crosslinks between polymer chains.

Copolymer

Usually denotes a polymer of 2 chemically distinct monomers, and sometimes denotes a terpolymer containing more than 2 types of monomer unit.

Graft polymers

Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerizing monomers on to preformed polymers or on to inorganic materials. Such preformed polymers could be rubbers, polysaccharides, condensation polymers, homopolymers or copolymers of the addition polymer type.

Homopolymers

Polymers resulting from the polymerisation of a single monomer or polymer with a single type of repeating unit.

Repeat(ing) unit

The unit in an addition polymer which is repeated throughout the molecule; for example in polyethylene the repeat unit is:

–CH2-CH2-

Rubber

a. Natural or conjugated diene rubbers;

b. Rubber in general.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following abbreviations are often used:

ABS

Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene copolymer

AIBN

Azoisobutyronitrile (initiator)

AMMA

Acrylonitrile-methyl methacrylate copolymer

AMPS

Acrylamidomethylpropanesulfonic acid

BR

Butadiene rubber

CTFE

Chloro-trifluoroethylene

DVB

Divinylbenzene

EAA

Ethylene-acrylic acid copolymer

EPDM

Ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer

EPR

Ethylene-propylene rubber

EVOH

Ethylene-vinyl alcohol copolymer

HDPE

High-density polyethylene

HEMA

Hydroxyethyl methacrylate

LLDPE

Linear low-density polyethylene

PAN

Polyacrylonitrile

PEEK

Polyetherether ketone, also named polyetheresterketone

PEI

Polyethylenimine

PMMA

Polymethyl methacrylate

PPE

Polyphenylene ether

PPO

Polyphenylene oxide or polypropylene oxide

PPS

Polyphenylene sulphide

PTFE

Polytetrafluoroethylene

PUR

Polyurethane

PVA

Can mean polyvinyl alcohol or polyvinyl acetate

PVAC

Polyvinyl acetate

PVOH

Polyvinyl alcohol

PVP

Polyvinyl pyrrolidone

SAN

Styrene-acrylonitrile copolymer

SBR

Styrene-butadiene rubber

SBS

Styrene-butadiene-styrene block terpolymer

TAC

Triallyl cyanurate

C08L 89/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Foodstuff preparations

A23J 3/00

C08L 91/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Polishing compositions, ski waxes

C09G

Soaps, detergent compositions

C11D

C08L 93/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Polishing compositions

C09G

C08L 93/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

French polish

C09F

C09D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Coating compositions, e.g. paints, varnishes, lacquers. This includes paints, varnishes or lacquers characterized by their physical nature or by the effects produced; examples of these are emulsion paints, powdery paints, thixotropic paints, antifouling or underwater paints, luminous paints, electrically-conductive paints, thermosensitive paints, paints providing wrinkle, crackle, orange-peel or multicolour effects, camouflage paints, radiation-absorbing paints, pearl essence, paints for electrophoretic applications or for flame-spraying, etc..

Coating compositions based on polysaccharides or their derivatives, based on rubbers or their derivatives, based on natural or unspecified macromolecular compounds or their derivatives, or based on organic macromolecular compounds, obtained by (or obtained otherwise than by) reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds.

Coating compositions based on inorganic substances or on organic non-macromolecular compounds having at least one polymerisable carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bond.

Filling pastes.

Chemical paint or ink removers.

Inks, e.g. printing inks or writing inks.

Correcting fluids, e.g. fluid media for correction of typographic errors by coating.

Woodstains.

Pencil-leads, crayon compositions or chalk compositions.

Pastes or solids for colouring or printing, e.g. pigment pastes.

Use of materials for the above-mentioned compositions, including the use of anti-settling or anti-skinning agents or other additives.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In cases where a coating composition contains an organic non-macromolecular compound but is not based on that compound, and such a compound is of interest, classification could be made in subclass C08K or as an additive in group C08J 3/00 (e.g. C08J 3/24 for crosslinking agents) or C09D 7/12. This may be in addition to classification in C09D 101/00-C09D 201/00.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Cosmetics

A61K

Processes for applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces, in general

B05D

Staining wood

B27K 5/02

Glazes or vitreous enamels

C03C

Natural resins, French polish, drying-oils, driers, turpentine, per se

C09F

Polishing compositions other than French polish, ski waxes

C09G

Adhesives or use of materials as adhesives

C09J

Materials for sealing or packing joints or covers

C09K 3/10

Materials for stopping leaks

C09K 3/12

Processes for the electrolytic or electrophoretic production of coatings

C25D
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Duplicating or marking methods; sheet materials for use therein

B41M 5/00

Coating of mortars, concrete, artificial stone or natural stone

C04B 41/00

Treatment of inorganic materials other than fibrous fillers used as pigments or fillers

C09C

Chemical coating e.g. by solid state diffusion of metallic or non-metallic elements into metallic material surfaces; coating with metallic material characterised only by the composition of the metallic material

C23C 30/00

Textile-treating compositions

D06M

Dyeing or printing processes for textiles

D06P

Coating processes in photomechanical, e.g. lithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces

G03F 7/16

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Layered products

B32B

Organic macromolecular compounds

C08

Organic dyes or closely-related compounds for producing dyes, mordants or lakes

C09B

Preparation of glue or gelatine

C09H

Soaps or detergent compositions

C11D

Paper-making

D21

Photosensitive materials

G03F 7/004

Conductors, insulators

H01B

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, coating compositions, containing specific organic macromolecular substances are classified only according to the macromolecular substance, non-macromolecular substances not being taken into account.

Example: a coating composition containing polyethene and amino-propyltrimethoxysilane is classified in group C09D 123/06.

However, coating compositions containing combinations of organic non-macromolecular compounds having at least one polymerisable carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bond with prepolymers or polymers other than unsaturated polymers of groups C09D 159/00-C09D 187/00 are classified according to the unsaturated non-macromolecular component in group C09D 4/00.

Example: a coating composition containing polyethene and styrene monomer is classified in group C09D 4/00.

Aspects relating to the physical nature of the coating compositions or to the effects produced, as defined in group C09D 5/00, if clearly and explicitly stated, are also classified in this subclass.

Coating compositions characterised by other features, e.g. additives, are classified in group C09D 7/00, unless the macromolecular constituent is specified.

In this subclass, coating compositions comprising two or more macromolecular constituents are classified according to the macromolecular constituent or constituents present in the highest proportion, i.e. the constituent on which the composition is based. If the composition is based on two or more constituents, present in equal proportions, the composition is classified according to each of these constituents.

Example: a coating composition containing 80 parts of polyethene and 20 parts of polyvinylchloride is classified in group C09D 123/06. A coating composition containing 40 parts of polyethene and 40 parts of polyvinylchloride is classified in groups C09D 123/06 and C09D 127/06.

In groups C09D 101/00-C09D 201/00, any macromolecular constituent of a coating composition which is not identified by the classification according to Note (3) after the title of subclass C09D, and the use of which is determined to be novel and non-obvious, must also be classified in a group chosen from groups C09D 101/00-C09D 201/00.

Any macromolecular constituent of a coating composition which is not identified by the classification according to Note (3) after the title of subclass C09D or the Note above, and which is considered to represent information of interest for search, may also be classified in a group chosen from groups C09D 101/00-C09D 201/00. This can for example be the case when it is considered of interest to enable searching of coating compositions using a combination of classification symbols. Such non-obligatory classification should be given as additional information.

In groups C09D 123/00-C09D 149/00, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a copolymer is classified according to the major monomeric component.

In groups C09D 165/00-C09D 185/00, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, coating compositions based on macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming two different linkages in the main chain are classified only according to the linkage present in excess.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Aliphatic radical

An acyclic or a non-aromatic carbocyclic carbon skeleton which is considered to be terminated by every bond to:

an element other than carbon;

a carbon atom having a double bond to one atom other than carbon;

an aromatic carbocyclic ring or a heterocyclic ring.

Use of materials for coating compositions

The use of known or new polymers or products.

Rubber

Includes:

natural or conjugated diene rubbers; or

rubber in general (for a specific rubber, other than a natural rubber or a conjugated diene rubber, see the group provided for coating compositions based on such macromolecular compounds.

Filling pastes

Materials used to fill up the holes or cavities of a substrate in order to smooth its surface prior to coating.

C09D 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Artists' paints

C09D 5/06

C09D 189/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Foodstuff preparations

A23J 3/00

C09D 191/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Soaps, detergent compositions

C11D

C09F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Natural resins, French polish, drying-oils, driers or turpentine per se.

Obtaining, purification, or chemical modification of natural resins, e.g. oleo-resins.

Obtaining spirits of turpentine.

Obtaining drying-oils.

Chemical modification of drying oils, e.g. oxidising, voltolising; Apparatus therefor.

Compounds to be used as driers (siccatives).

Preparation of French polish.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

The preparation of synthetic oil by polymerisation is classified in C08F and C08G.

The modification of drying-oils by copolymerisation is classified in C08F.

The polycondensation of drying-oils is classified in C08G.

Resin soaps are classified in C11D.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Vulcanised oils, e.g. factice

C08H 3/00

Compositions of natural resins

C08L 93/00

Polishing compositions

C09G 1/00

Thickening of hydrocarbon oils or fatty oils by voltolising

C10G 71/02

Chemical modification of oils

C11C 3/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Drying-oil

Unsaturated fatty oil, such as linseed oil, tung oil, poppy seed oil, perilla oil and walnut oil, that becomes hard, tough and elastic upon exposure to the air when spread into a thin film.

French polishing

Wood finishing technique for wooden furniture that results in a very high gloss, deep colour and tough surface; it consists of applying many thin coats of shellac using a rubbing pad.

Natural resin

Water-insoluble mixtures of compounds derived from trees, especially conifers, e.g. gum, tall oil rosin, pine tar, pitch, shellac.

Siccative

Drying agent; a substance that promotes drying, e.g. linseed or flax seed oil.

Turpentine

Resinous exudate or extract obtained from coniferous trees, particularly those of the genus Pinus.

Voltolising

Subjecting oils to treatment with an electric discharge.

C09J - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Adhesives and adhesive processes (but see below for adhesive processes), including adhesives characterized by their physical nature or by the effects produced;

Adhesives based on polysaccharides or their derivatives, based on rubbers or their derivatives, based on natural or unspecified macromolecular compounds or their derivatives, or based on organic macromolecular compounds, obtained by (or obtained otherwise than by) reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds;

Adhesives based on inorganic substances or on organic non-macromolecular compounds having at least one polymerisable carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bond;

Adhesives in the form of films or foils, including releasable films;

Heat seal adhesives and hot melts;

Use of materials as adhesives;

Other features of adhesives, e.g. additives for adhesives.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass is residual in respect of adhesive processes. Please see the "References relevant to classification in this subclass (places in relation to which this subclass is residual)" section, below, for details of other places for classifying some adhesive processes.

In cases where an adhesive contains an organic non-macromolecular compound but is not based on that compound, and such a compound is of interest, classification could be made in C08K or as an additive in C08J 3/00 or C09J 11/02. This may be in addition to classification in C09J 123/00-C09J 149/00.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Electrically conductive adhesives specially adapted for use in therapy or testing in vivo

A61K 50/00

Adhesive bandages, dressings or absorbent pads

A61L 15/16

Surgical adhesives

A61L 24/00

Adhesives on the basis of non specified organic macromolecular compounds used as bonding agents in layered products

B32B

Labelling fabrics or comparable materials or articles with deformable surface using adhesives and thermo-activatable adhesives respectively

B65C 5/02, B65C 5/04

Preparation of glue or gelatine

C09H

Adhesive labels, tag tickets or similar identification or indication means

G09F 3/10
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Joining of preformed parts; Apparatus therefor using adhesives

B29C 65/48

Layered products characterised by the relation between layers, i.e. products essentially comprising layers having different physical properties or products characterised by the interconnection of layers where one or both layers has adhesive or inter-reactive properties

B32B 7/10

Layered products characterised by the relation between layers, i.e. products essentially comprising layers having different physical properties or products characterised by the interconnection of layers using adhesives

B32B 7/12

Cling foils

C08J 5/00

Bonding of a preformed macromolecular material to the same or other solid material such as metal, glass, leather, e.g. using adhesives

C08J 5/12

Using adhesives in the production of multi-layer textile fabrics

D06M 17/00
Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Devices for applying liquids, e.g. adhesives, to surfaces, including wood surfaces, to be joined

B05B, B05C, B27G 11/00

Processes for applying liquids or other fluent materials, e.g. adhesives, to surfaces in general

B05D

Bonding of non-plastics to plastics or bonding substances in a plastic state in general

B29C

Joining glass to glass or to other materials

C03C 27/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Polishing compositions, ski waxes

C09G

Containers, packaging elements or packages for web or tape-like material, e.g. dispenser for dispensing tape

B65D 85/67

Soaps, detergent compositions

C11D

Connecting constructional elements or machine parts by sticking or pressing them together, e.g. cold pressure welding

F16B 11/00

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, adhesives containing specific organic macromolecular substances are classified only according to the macromolecular substance, non-macromolecular substances not being taken into account.

Example: an adhesive containing polyethene and amino-propyltrimethoxysilane is classified in group C09J 123/06.

However, adhesives containing combinations of organic non-macromolecular compounds having at least one polymerisable carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bond with prepolymers or polymers other than unsaturated polymers of groups C09J 159/00-C09J 187/00 are classified according to the unsaturated non-macromolecular component in group C09J 4/00.

Example: an adhesive containing polyethene and styrene monomer is classified in group C09J 4/00.

Aspects relating to the physical nature of the adhesives or to the effects produced, as defined in group C09J 9/00, if clearly and explicitly stated, are also classified in this subclass.

Adhesives characterised by other features, e.g. additives, are classified in group C09J 11/00, unless the macromolecular constituent is specified.

In this subclass, adhesives comprising two or more macromolecular constituents are classified according to the macromolecular constituent or constituents present in the highest proportion, i.e. the constituent on which the composition is based. If the composition is based on two or more constituents, present in equal proportions, the adhesive is classified according to each of these constituents.

Example: an adhesive containing 80 parts of polyethene and 20 parts of polyvinylchloride is classified in group C09J 123/06. An adhesive containing 40 parts of polyethene and 40 parts of polyvinylchloride is classified in groups C09J 123/06 and C09J 127/06.

In groups C09J 101/00-C09J 201/00, any macromolecular constituent of an adhesive which is not identified by the classification according to Note (3) after the title of subclass C09J, and the use of which is determined to be novel and non-obvious, must also be classified in a group chosen from groups C09J 101/00-C09J 201/00.

Any macromolecular constituent of an adhesive which is not identified by the classification according to Note (3) after the title of subclass C09J or the Note above, and which is considered to represent information of interest for search, may also be classified in a group chosen from groups C09J 101/00-C09J 201/00. This can for example be the case when it is considered of interest to enable searching of adhesives using a combination of classification symbols. Such non-obligatory classification should be given as "additional information."

In groups C09J 123/00-C09J 149/00, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a copolymer is classified according to the major monomeric component.

In groups C09J 165/00-C09J 185/00, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, adhesives based on macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming two different linkages in the main chain are classified only according to the linkage present in excess.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Aliphatic radical

"Aliphatic radical" means an acyclic or a non-aromatic carbocyclic carbon skeleton which is considered to be terminated by every bond to:

an element other than carbon;

a carbon atom having a double bond to one atom other than carbon;

an aromatic carbocyclic ring or a heterocyclic ring.

"Use of materials as adhesives"

This means the use of known or new polymers or products.

Rubber

Includes:

natural or conjugated diene rubbers; or

rubber in general (for a specific rubber, other than a natural rubber or a conjugated diene rubber, see the group provided for adhesives based on such macromolecular compounds).

C09J 189/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Foodstuff preparations

A23J 3/00

C09K - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

The use of materials for applications not provided for elsewhere, e.g. sealing materials, drilling fluids.

The use of materials in general having specific properties, not provided for elsewhere, e.g. anti-static properties, anti-oxidation properties.

Materials selected for uses or applications not provided for elsewhere.

All entries in this subclass relate to specific properties (e.g. C09K 3/16 relates to materials with anti-static properties) or specific applications of materials (e.g. C09K 17/00 relates to soil-conditioning or soil-stabilizing materials), except for main group C09K 3/00 itself, which is the residual place for classifying materials with properties or applications for which no entries exist in C09K itself nor elsewhere in IPC.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

materials or their applications or uses for which entries are available elsewhere in IPC.

Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Applications of materials relating to agriculture, foodstuffs, medical or cosmetic preparations,

A

e.g. preparations for medical, dental, or toilet purposes

A61K

Applications of materials relating to physical or chemical processes in general,

B

e.g. sorbent compositions or catalysts

B01

Chemical treatment of wood or similar materials

B27K

Pure chemistry, which covers compounds and their methods for preparation:

inorganic chemistry

C01

organic chemistry

C07

organic macromolecular compounds and their compositions

C08

Coating compositions, e.g. paints

C09D

Fuels

C10L

Applications of materials relating to fibrous materials, textiles or paper

D

Applications of materials relating to photography, cinematography and analogous techniques

G03

Applications of materials relating to electric or electronic elements

H

Selection of materials for their conductive, insulating, or dielectric properties

H01B

Selection of materials for electrochemical generators, e.g. batteries

H01M

Selection of materials for piezo-electric materials

H01L 41/16

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Solid sorbent compositions

B01J 20/00

Materials for treatment of water, waste water, or sewage

C02F

Fertilisers,

C05

e.g. mixtures of soil-conditioning or soil-stabilising materials with fertilisers characterised by their fertilising activity

C05G

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Materials

include compounds, compositions, mixtures and preparations

C09K 3/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Places in relation to which this group is residual:

Filling pastes

C09D 5/34

C09K 3/10 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Filling pastes

C09D 5/34

C09K 3/14 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Manufacture of abrasive or friction articles or shaped materials, containing macromolecular substances

C08J 5/14

C09K 3/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Rendering particulate materials free flowing, in general, e.g. making them hydrophobic

B01J 2/30

Thawing or antifreeze materials used in liquids for heat-transfer, heat-exchange or heat-storage or for the production of heat or cold other than by combustion, e.g. radiator liquids

C09K 5/00

C09K 3/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Aerosol containers

B65D 83/14

C09K 3/32 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Materials for treatment of water, waste water, or sewage

C02F

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes for making harmful chemical substances harmless, or less harmful, by effecting a chemical change in the substances

A62D 3/00

Solid sorbent compositions

B01J 20/00

C09K 5/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Thawing or antifreeze materials for application to surfaces

C09K 3/18

Inhibiting corrosion by liquids

C23F 11/00

C09K 8/02 - Definition fr

Special rules of classification

In groups C09K 8/03-C09K 8/38, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

C09K 8/50 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Compositions for consolidating loose sand or the like around wells

C09K 8/56

C09K 8/54 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Inhibiting corrosion of metallic materials by using inhibitors in general

C23F 11/00

C09K 8/56 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Soil-conditioning materials or soil-stabilising materials

C09K 17/00

Compositions for plastering borehole walls

C09K 8/50

C09K 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Photosensitive materials for photographic purposes

G03C

C09K 11/08 - Definition fr

Special rules of classification

In groups C09K 11/54-C09K 11/89, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, materials are classified in the last appropriate place; however, activating constituents of the luminescent materials are disregarded for classification purposes

C09K 11/65 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Containing carbon, in organic compounds

C09K 11/06

C09K 13/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Places in relation to which this group is residual:

Etching of glass

C03C 15/00

Etching of natural stone, artificial stone or ceramics

C04B 41/52, C04B 41/72, C04B 41/91

Etching or brightening of metallic material

C23F, C23G 1/00, C25F 1/00

Special rules of classification

In groups C09K 13/02-C09K 13/12, a composition is classified in the last appropriate place.

C09K 15/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Places in relation to which this group is residual:

Anti-oxidant compositions or compositions inhibiting chemical change incorporated in:

foodstuffs

A21D, A23

in macromolecular compositions

C08

in liquid fuels or lubricants

C10

in fats, fatty substances, fatty oils or waxes

C11B 5/00

in detergents

C11D

in pickling compositions for metallic materials

C23G

Corrosion inhibiting compositions for metallic materials

C23F 11/00

Special rules of classification

In this group, a metal salt of an organic compound is classified as that compound.

In groups C09K 15/02-C09K 15/34, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a composition is classified in the last appropriate place.

C09K 15/34 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Plant

Any of a kingdom (Plantae) of multicellular eukaryotic mostly photosynthetic organisms typically lacking locomotive movement or obvious nervous or sensory organs and possessing cellulose cell walls.

C09K 17/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Mixtures of soil-conditioning or soil-stabilising materials with fertilisers characterised by their soil-conditioning or soil-stabilising activity.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Mixtures of soil-conditioning or soil-stabilising materials with fertilisers characterised by their fertilising activity

C05G

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fertilisers

C05

Soil-stabilising materials specially adapted for boreholes or wells

C09K 8/00

Consolidating by placing solidifying or pore-filling substances in the soil

E02D 3/12

Special rules of classification

For the purpose of classification in this group, the presence of fertilisers in the composition is not taken into account.

In groups C09K 17/02-C09K 17/40, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, materials are classified in the last appropriate place.

In this group, the indexing codes C09K 101/00-C09K 109/00 relating to the use or the intended effect of the soil-conditioning or soil-stabilising materials are used.

C09K 19/00 - Definition fr

Special rules of classification

In groups C09K 19/02-C09K 19/52, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place

Mixtures containing two or more liquid crystal compounds covered individually by the same one of groups C09K 19/04-C09K 19/40 are classified only in that group.

If liquid crystal components of the mixtures classified in groups C09K 19/42-C09K 19/50 are of importance as such, they should also be classified according to the compounds in groups C09K 19/04-C09K 19/40.

C09K 21/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Places in relation to which this group is residual:

Fireproofing materials for use in particular applications, e.g.:

For fireproofing wood

B27K

Of polymers

C08

Of textiles

D06M

Of paper

D21H

Fireproof paints

C09D 5/18

Special rules of classification

In groups C09K 21/02-C09K 21/14, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, materials are classified in the last appropriate place.

C10B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Retorts or coke ovens and details thereof, such as heating of coke ovens, doors or closures therefor, devices for charging or discharging coke ovens and mechanical treatments of coal charges, cooling or quenching coke, safety devices and other details.

Carbonising or coking processes, including pyrolysis and other methods of destructive distillation of solid carbonaceous materials, using direct heating (including the partial combustion of the material to be treated) and/or indirect heating (e.g. external combustion).

Destructive distillation specially adapted for particular types of solid raw material or for materials in special form (such as cellulose-containing materials, powdered coal, oil shale or bituminous rocks, synthetic polymeric materials e.g. tyres).

Coking mineral oils, bitumen, tar etc. with solid carbonaceous materials.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

The processes and apparatus of this subclass are generally directed to producing products that are gaseous or solid at ambient temperatures. Exceptions to this statement are shown below.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Cracking oils

C10G

Underground gasification of minerals

E21B 43/295
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Recovery or working-up of waste materials of organic macromolecular compounds or compositions based thereon by dry heat-treatment to obtain partially depolymerised materials

C08J 11/10

Working up tar, pitch, asphalt or bitumen by techniques including distillation and/or heat-treatment; production of pyroligneous acid

C10C

Wet carbonising of peat

C10F 5/06
Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Pyrolysis of sludge

C02F 11/10

Production of liquid hydrocarbon mixtures from rubber or rubber waste

C10G 1/10

Plant characterized by more than one engine delivering power external to the plant, the engines being driven by different fluids, the engine cycles being thermally coupled, combustion heat from one cycle being used to heat the fluid in another cycle

F01K 23/06

Plant characterized by the engines using gaseous fuel generated in the plant from solid fuel, e.g. wood

F02B 43/08

Gas turbine plant using a separate gas producer for gasifying the solid or pulverulent fuel before combustion

F02C 3/28

Incineration of waste; Incinerator constructions with pretreatment by pyrolysis or gasifying stage

F23G 5/027

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Destructive distillation

The process of pyrolysis conducted in a distillation apparatus to allow the volatile products to be collected. An example is tar making from pinewood slices (which are rich in terpenes), which are heated in an airless container causing the material to decompose, leaving charcoal and turpentine as by-products.

Coke

A solid, high in carbon content, and structurally in the non-graphitic state, derived from the pyrolysis of organic material (especially low-ash, low-sulphur bituminous coal) which has passed, at least in part, through a liquid or liquid-crystalline state during the carbonization process. The volatile constituents of the coal (including water, coal gas and coal-tar) are driven off by baking in an airless oven at temperatures as high as 2000 degrees C.

Coking

The transformation of coal or heavy oil into coke.

Carbonisation

The conversion of an organic substance into carbon or a carbon-containing residue through pyrolysis or destructive distillation.

Pyrolysis

The chemical decomposition of organic materials by heating in the absence of oxygen or any other reagents, except possibly steam.

C10C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Working-up of tar, pitch, asphalt or bitumen, including use of techniques such as distillation, heat-treatment, water removal or extraction with selective solvents.

Production of pyroligneous acid.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This application-related subclass covers techniques specially adapted to working up of tar, pitch, asphalt or bitumen, or the production of pyroligneous acid, even though some of the techniques per se are covered by subclasses such as C10B, C10G. For example, coking bitumen, tar or the like is covered by C10B 55/00.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Obtaining hydrocarbon oils

C10G

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Coumarone resins

C08F 244/00

Compositions of bituminous materials

C08L 95/00

Coating compositions based on bituminous materials, e.g. asphalt, tar, pitch

C09D 195/00

Obtaining natural resins or turpentine

C09F

Adhesives based on bituminous materials, e.g. asphalt, tar, pitch

C09J 195/00

Making carbon filaments by decomposition of organic filaments

D01F 9/14

Machines for road construction or repair

E01C

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Tar

Tar is a black thermo-plastic material produced by the destructive distillation of coal – sometimes referred to as coal tar. Is also a residue in the manufacture of coal gas and coke. May also be derived from plants such as pine trees.

Pitch

Pitch is the name of a large number of highly viscous liquids which appear solid. Pitch may be made from petroleum or plant sources. Petroleum-derived pitch is also known as bitumen whereas plant-derived pitch is known as resin. Pitch derived from plant resin however is known as rosin.

Tar and pitch are often used interchangeably. However, pitch is considered to be more solid whilst tar is considered to be more liquid.

Asphalt

Asphalt is a sticky, black and highly viscous liquid or semi-solid that is present in crude petroleum and in some natural deposits sometimes termed asphaltum. In US terminology asphalt (or asphalt cement) is the carefully refined residue from the distillation process of selected crude oils. Outside of the US, the product is called bitumen.

Bitumen

Bitumen is a mixture of organic liquids that are highly viscous, black, sticky, entirely soluble in carbon disulfide and composed primarily of highly condensed polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons.

Pyroligneous acid

Pyroligneous acid, also called wood vinegar, is a dark liquid produced by the destructive distillation of wood. Its principal components are acetic acid and methanol. It was once used as a commercial source for acetic acid.

Synonyms and Keywords

Pyroligneous acid

Wood vinegar

C10F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Drying, dewatering or working up of peat, including drying using presses, band-presses, rolls, centrifuges etc., including drying or dewatering in the field.

Drying or dewatering of peat combined with a carbonisation step for producing turfcoal.

Working-up of peat, e.g. involving disintegration, moulding, briquetting etc.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Baling or bundling peat

B65B 27/12

Extracting wax from peat

C10G

Obtaining fibres from peat

D01B 1/50

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Destructive distillation of peat

C10B 53/00

Obtaining peat; Machines therefor

E21C 49/00

Drying in general

F26B

C10G - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Production of liquid hydrocarbon mixtures from oil-shale, oil-sand or non-melting solid carbonaceous materials (e.g. wood, coal), from oxides of carbon (e.g. Fischer-Tropsch processes), from oxygen-containing organic materials (e.g. fatty acids or fatty oils) or from gases (e.g. natural gas).

Distillation, dewatering or demulsification of hydrocarbon oils.

Catalytic or non-catalytic cracking of hydrocarbon oils in the absence of hydrogen.

Refining of hydrocarbon oils in the absence of hydrogen.

Reforming naphtha.

Hydrotreatment processes involving refining, cracking or other treatment of hydrocarbon oils in the presence of hydrogen or hydrogen generating compounds

Production of liquid hydrocarbon mixtures from lower carbon number hydrocarbons, e.g. oligomerisation or polymerisation to make longer carbon chains.

Multi-step processes for treating hydrocarbon oils in the presence or absence of hydrogen.

Working up of normally gaseous mixtures of undefined composition obtained from cracking processes.

Treatment of hydrocarbon oils or fatty oils for lubricating purposes, including thickening by voltolisation.

Recovery or refining of mineral waxes, e.g. montan wax.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass covers the production or treatment of normally liquid hydrocarbon mixtures. The production or treatment of normally solid or gaseous carbonaceous materials is covered by subclasses C10B, C10C, C10F, C10J and C10K.

The borderline between C10G 2/00, C10L 3/06 and C07C 1/02 is not entirely clear in respect of the production of hydrocarbons from oxides of carbon (using processes such as the Fischer-Tropsch process starting from synthesis gas or syngas). There are references from C07C 1/02 to the 2 other placed mentioned, but some multiple classification exists in this area.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Mechanical winning of oil from oil-shale, oil-sand or the like

B03B

Cracking mainly to hydrogen or synthesis gas

C01B

Preparation of individual hydrocarbons or mixtures thereof of definite or specified constitution, including by cracking or pyrolysis of hydrocarbon gases

C07C

Compositions essentially based on waxes

C08L 91/00

Chemical modification of drying-oils by voltolising

C09F 7/04

Cracking to produce cokes

C10B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Distillation in general

B01D

Destructive distillation of oil-shale

C10B 53/06

Lubricating compositions

C10M

Inhibiting corrosion or incrustation in general

C23F

Protection of pipes against corrosion or incrustation

F16L 58/00

Special rules of classification

In this subclass:

groups C10G 9/00-C10G 49/00 are limited to one-step processes;

combined or multi-step processes are covered by groups C10G 51/00-C10G 69/00;

refining or recovery of mineral waxes is covered by group C10G 73/00.

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meanings indicated:

"in the presence of hydrogen" or "in the absence of hydrogen" mean treatments in which hydrogen, in free form or as hydrogen generating compounds, is added, or not added, respectively;

"hydrotreatment" is used for conversion processes as defined in group C10G 45/00 or group C10G 47/00;

"hydrocarbon oils" covers mixtures of hydrocarbons such as tar oils or mineral oils.

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Cracking

Cracking is the process whereby complex organic molecules such as heavy hydrocarbons are broken down into simpler molecules (e.g. light hydrocarbons) by the breaking of carbon-carbon bonds in the precursors. The rate of cracking and the end products are strongly dependent on the temperature and presence of any catalysts.

Refining

Refining is the process of purification of a substance. The term is usually used of a natural resource that is almost in a usable form, but which is more useful in a purer form. For instance, most types of natural petroleum will burn straight from the ground, but they will burn poorly and quickly clog an engine with residues and byproducts. The term "refining" is broad and may include more drastic transformations. The refining of liquids is often accomplished by distillation or fractionation.

Reforming (catalytic)

Thermal or catalytic reforming is a chemical process used to convert naphtha boiling range feedstocks, typically having low octane ratings, into high-octane liquid products called reformates which are components of high-octane gasoline (also known as petrol). The process represents the total effect of numerous simultaneous reactions, such as dehydrogenation, isomerisation, cracking and polymerisation.

Synonyms and Keywords

Cat-cracking

Catalytic cracking

C10H - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods and apparatus for production of acetylene by wet methods, including arrangements for water feed and carbide feed; high-pressure acetylene generators; details of acetylene generators, e.g. carbide cartridges, carbide compositions, safety devices, sludge removal.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Purification of acetylene

C07C 7/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Manufacture of acetylene by methods not comprising carbides

C07C 11/24

Gas burners in association with a gaseous fuel source, e.g. an acetylene generator

F23D 14/28

Valves, cocks, taps in general

F16K

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Wet methods for acetylene production

Traditionally acetylene is manufactured from calcium carbonate (limestone) and coal. The calcium carbonate is first converted into calcium oxide and the coal into coke, then the two are reacted together to form calcium carbide and carbon monoxide:

CaO + 3C → CaC2 + CO

Calcium carbide (calcium acetylide) and water are then reacted by any of several methods to produce acetylene and calcium hydroxide, by a reaction discovered by Friedrich Wöhler in 1862.

CaC2 + 2H2O → Ca(OH)2 + C2H2

Synonyms and Keywords

Acetylene

Ethyne, C2H2, H-C≡C-H

C10J - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Processes or apparatus for production of fuel gases by carburetting air or other gases without pyrolysis, including controlling supply of air or liquid, temperature, humidity and other parameters.

Processes or apparatus for production of combustible gases containing carbon monoxide (including producer gas, wood gas, town gas, synthesis gas (syngas), manufactured gas and water gas) from solid carbonaceous materials. This includes fixed-bed gasification of lump fuel, gasification of granular or pulverulent fuels in suspension, gasification using molten salts or metals, carburetting by pyrolysis of carbonaceous material in the fuel bed and carburetting by pyrolysis of carbonaceous material in a carburettor.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Production of synthesis gas from liquid or gaseous hydrocarbons, and the synthesis gas per se, are covered by group C01B 3/00.

Destructive distillation processes, e.g. carbonisation or coking, and excluding gasification processes (see Glossary), are covered by subclass C10B. Combinations of gasification and destructive distillation are covered by group C10J 3/58.

Other gaseous fuels, including natural gas, substitute natural gas or synthetic natural gas (SNG) and liquefied petroleum gas (LPG), are covered by group C10L 3/00.

Purifying or modifying the chemical composition of combustible gases containing carbon monoxide is covered by subclass C10K.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Underground gasification of minerals

E21B 43/295
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Plants with an integrated combined cycle, having more than one engine delivering power externally to the plant

F01K 23/06

Plant characterised by the engines using gaseous fuel generated in the plant from solid fuel

F02B 43/08

Gas turbine plant with separate fuel gasifiers

F02C 3/28

Carburettors for supplying combustible mixtures to internal combustion engines

F02M

Incineration of waste with pyrolysis or gasification as pre-treatment

F23G 5/027

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Carburetting

Carburetting air or gas generally comprises passing it in contact with liquid fuel and thereby mixing the air/gas and fuel. This often involves lowering the air pressure e.g. in a venturi.

Destructive distillation

The process of pyrolysis conducted in a distillation apparatus to allow the volatile products to be collected. An example is tar making from pinewood slices (which are rich in terpenes), which are heated in an airless container causing the material to decompose, leaving charcoal and turpentine as by-products.

Gasification

Gasification is somewhat similar to pyrolysis and confusion between these terms is common. Gasification is a partial oxidation process that converts materials such as coal, biomass or plastic waste into a gaseous mixture of carbon monoxide and hydrogen (also known as synthesis gas) by reacting the raw material at high temperatures with controlled amounts of oxygen and/or steam. See also the entry for pyrolysis.

Producer gas

A gas mixture containing carbon monoxide (CO), hydrogen (H2), carbon dioxide (CO2) and nitrogen (N2). In the USA, producer gas is a generic term referring to wood gas, town gas or syngas. In the UK, producer gas, also known as suction gas, means a fuel gas made from coke or other carbonaceous material. Air is passed over the red-hot fuel and carbon monoxide is produced in an exothermic reaction which reads 2C + O2 → 2CO. The nitrogen in the air remains unchanged and dilutes the gas, so it has a low calorific value. The gas may be used to power gas turbines which are suited to fuels of low calorific value.

Pyrolysis

The chemical decomposition of organic materials by heating in the absence of oxygen or any other reagents, except possibly steam. Pyrolysis is somewhat endothermic and the products can be gases, liquids (e.g. light crude oil from depolymerisation of organic waste) and/or solids (e.g. coke and volatiles produced by coking coal). See also the entry for gasification.

Synthesis gas (syngas)

A gas mixture that contains varying amounts of carbon monoxide (CO) and hydrogen (H2) generated by the gasification of a carbon-containing material to a gaseous product with a heating value (but less than half the energy density of natural gas). When used as a fuel, it is produced by gasification of coal or municipal waste by the following reactions: C + O2 → CO2; CO2 + C → 2CO; C + H2O → CO + H2. The name comes from the gas's use as an intermediate in creating synthetic natural gas (SNG) and in producing ammonia or methanol.

Town gas

Also known as coal gas, and contains hydrogen (H2), carbon monoxide (CO), carbon dioxide (CO2), methane (CH4), nitrogen (N2) and volatile hydrocarbons. It is made by blowing air and steam over an incandescent fuel bed, usually of coke or coal. The words "coal gas" could also be used to mean gas made by the destructive distillation of coal. The gas was used inter alia for lighting before the advent of electric lighting, and for heating and cooking before natural gas became widely available.

Water-gas

A mixture of carbon monoxide (CO) and hydrogen (H2) produced by passing steam over red-hot coke using the endothermic reaction C + H2O → CO + H2. This product had a lower calorific value than coal gas so the gas was often passed through a heated retort into which oil was sprayed; the resulting mixed gas was called carburetted water gas.

Wood gas

The product of thermal gasification of biomass (e.g. coal, wood chips, sawdust, charcoal) in a gasifier or wood gas generator. It is the result of a high temperature reaction (> 700 degrees C) where carbon reacts with steam or a limited amount of air producing carbon monoxide (CO), carbon dioxide (CO2), hydrogen (H2) and methane (CH4). It can be filtered and used to power internal combustion engines, gas turbines, Stirling engines or fuel cells.

Synonyms and Keywords

Producer gas

Wood gas, town gas, syngas (in USA)

Producer gas

Suction gas (in UK)

Wood gas

Holzgas, air gas, blue gas

Coal gas

Town gas

C10K - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Purifying combustible gases containing carbon monoxide, e.g. synthesis gas, e.g. by dust removal, condensing non-gaseous materials, washing, adsorption using solids such as active carbon; including regeneration of purifying material.

Modifying the chemical composition of combustible gases containing carbon monoxide to produce an improved fuel, e.g. by altering the calorific value, by reducing the carbon monoxide content (e.g. to zero), by catalytic treatment or by mixing with gases.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Isolation of hydrogen from mixtures containing hydrogen and carbon monoxide

C01B 3/50

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Gas washers

B01D 47/00

Chemical processes such as purification of gases or modification of the chemical composition thereof, applied to compositions other than combustible gases containing carbon monoxide

B01D 53/00, B01J 19/00

Isolation of inorganic compounds from gaseous mixtures which may include carbon monoxide

C07C, C01B

Processes of modifying the properties of distillation gases inside an oven

C10B 57/18

Natural gas; Synthetic natural gas obtained by processes not covered by C10G, C10K 3/02 or C10K 3/04

C10L 3/06

C10K 3/00 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Calorific value

Thermal energy content

C10L - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Compositions which react chemically, usually with oxygen in air, to produce heat in controllable amounts or which are dispersed in air for explosive combustion in an engine or which produce light along with heat upon combustion, i.e. liquid carbonaceous fuels, gaseous fuels, natural gas, synthetic natural gas, liquefied petroleum gas, solid fuels and fuels produced by solidifying fuels

Treatment of fuels to improve their combustion

Use of additives to fuels or fires for particular purposes, e.g. for reducing smoke development, for minimising corrosion or incrustation, for facilitating soot removal or for improving the octane number or the low temperature properties of the fuel

Fire-lighters, i.e. easily-combustible compositions or shaped products which are designed to initiate the combustion of a larger body of fuel and methods or apparatus for their manufacture

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Explosives or thermic compositions, e.g. fuels for rocket engines intended for reaction with an oxidant other than air

C06B

Fuels for generating pressure gas, e.g. for airbags or for propulsion of rockets

C06D 5/00

Cracking hydrocarbon oils, production of liquid hydrocarbon mixtures, e.g. by destructive hydrogenation, oligomerisation or polymerisation, recovery of hydrocarbon oils from oil-shale, oil-sand, or gases, refining mixtures mainly consisting of hydrocarbons and to reforming of naphta

C10G

Mineral waxes

C10G

Production of producer gas, water-gas, synthesis gas from solid carbonaceous materials, or mixtures containing these gases or carburetting air or other gases

C10J

Purifying or modifying the chemical compositions of combustible gases containing carbon monoxide

C10K
Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Fuels for generating pressure gas, e.g. for rockets

C06D 5/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Synthesis gas produced by decomposition of gaseous or liquid organic compounds, e.g. hydrocarbons

C01B 3/22

Hydrocarbons per se

C07C

Cracking or pyrolysis of hydrocarbon gases to individual hydrocarbons or mixtures thereof of definite or specified constitution

C07C

Destructive distillation of carbonaceous materials for producing of gas, coke, tar, or similar materials

C10B

Lubricating compositions

C10M

Candles

C11C

Arrangements or devices for supplying additives to fuels in combustion engines, e.g.

F02, F02M 25/00

Vessels for containing or storing compressed, liquefied or solidified gases

F17C

Liquefying gases or gaseous mixtures by pressure and cold treatment

F25J

Nuclear reactor fuels

G21C 3/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Fire-lighter

easily-combustible composition or shaped product which is designed to initiate the combustion of a larger body of fuel, e.g. briquettes mainly consisting of charcoal

C10L 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preparation of liquid fuel to be fed to combustion apparatus

F23K 5/08

C10L 1/10 - Definition fr

Special rules of classification

In this group:

in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate place

if an additive is a mixture of compounds, classification is made for each compound of interest

a metal salt or an ammonium salt of a compound is classified as that compound, e.g. a chromium sulfonate is classified as a sulfonate in group C10L 1/24 and not in group C10L 1/30

C10L 5/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Drying or working of peat, e.g. briquetting

C10F

Solid fuels produced by solidifying fluid fuels

C10L 7/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Briquetting presses

B30B 11/00

Preparation of lump or pulverulent fuel for delivering to combustion apparatus

F23K 1/00

C10L 10/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Use of binders for briquetting solid fuels

C10L 5/10

Use of additives to improve the combustion of solid fuels

C10L 9/10

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Additives for liquid carbonaceous fuels characterised by their chemical nature

C10L 1/10

Arrangements of devices for supplying chemicals to fire

F23J 7/00

C10L 11/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Matches, manufacture thereof

C06F

Igniters in general, e.g. lighters containing fuel for cigarettes

F23Q

C10M - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Lubricating compositions, including liquid and non-liquid compositions and compositions based on inorganic materials, lubricant compositions containing more than 10% water.

Use of chemical substances either alone or as ingredients in a lubricating composition, including the nature of the base materials, thickeners and additives (which may be detergents, dispersants, antiwear compounds, friction modifiers, antioxidants, sludge inhibitors, etc.).

Working up used lubricants to recover useful products.

Preparation or chemical after-treatment of lubricating compositions.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Lubricant compositions specially adapted for certain particular applications (e.g. mould release agents, well-drilling compositions etc.) are classified in other subclasses – see the section "References relevant to classification in this subclass".

The use of known lubricants for relevant purposes is classified in the corresponding place, e.g. the use in harvesters or mowers is classified in A01D 69/12.

Subclass C10N is an indexing subclass associated with this subclass, and is for indexing features that are of interest in disclosures classified in this subclass, e.g. properties, uses or special modifications of lubricating compositions.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Production of hydrocarbon oils from lower carbon number hydrocarbons for lubricating purposes, e.g. by oligomerisation

C10G 50/02
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Mould release agents for separating metals after moulding

B22C 3/00

Mould release agents for separating plastics or substances in a plastic state, after moulding

B29C 33/56

Mould release agents for separating glass after moulding

C03B 40/02

Well-drilling compositions

C09K 8/02

Textile lubricating compositions

D06M 11/00, D06M 13/00, D06M 15/00

Immersion oils for microscopy

G02B 21/33

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Treatment of hydrocarbon oils or fatty oils for lubricating purposes, by methods other than cracking, reforming, refining or hydrotreatment

C10G 71/00

Lubricating devices, arrangements or systems (use of particular substances in particular apparatus or conditions)

F16N, A21D 8/08, B21C 9/00, H01B 3/18

Care of lubricants, e.g. storage, physical treatments, dilution e.g. with fuels

F16N 35/00-F16N 39/00

Special rules of classification

1. In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place. Thus, a compound having an aromatic ring is classified as aromatic regardless of whether the substituent(s) of interest are on the ring or on an aliphatic part of the molecule.

2. In this subclass:

a. metal or ammonium salts of a compound are classified as that compound;

b. salts or adducts formed between two or more organic compounds are classified according to all compounds forming the salt or adduct, if of interest;

c. a specified compound, e.g. phenols, acids, substituted by a macromolecular hydrocarbon radical is classified as that compound;

d. base- materials or thickeners or additives consisting of a mixture for which no specific main group is provided are classified in the most indented group covering all essential constituents of the mixture, for example,

a base- material mixture of ketone and amide group C10M 105/00;

a base- material mixture of ketone and ether group C10M 105/08;

an additive mixture of long and short chain esters group C10M 129/00;

an additive mixture of short chain aliphatic and aromatic carboxylic acids group C10M 129/26;

e. except for aqueous lubricating compositions containing more than 10% water, which are classified separately, classification is made according to the type of ingredient or mixture of types of ingredient (base- material, thickener or additive) which characterises the composition.

Attention is drawn to the fact that a mixture of essential ingredients characterised by only one of its components, rather than by the mixture as a whole, is not classified as a mixture, e.g., a lubricating composition consisting of:

a known base- material and a new additive is classified only in the "additive" part of the classification scheme;

a known base- material with both a thickener and a further additive as essential ingredients, which may be individually known or not, is classified as a mixture of thickener and additive;

a known base- material with a combination of additives as essential ingredients, which may be individually known or not, is classified in the appropriate place for the additive mixture.

3. Any part of a composition which is not identified by the classification according to Rules 1 and 2 above, and which itself is determined to be novel and non-obvious, must also be classified in the last appropriate place. The part can be either a single ingredient or a composition in itself.

4. Any part of a composition which is not identified by the classification according to Rules 1 to 3 above, and which is considered to represent information of interest for search, may also be classified in the last appropriate place. This can, for example, be the case when it is considered of interest to enable searching of compositions using a combination of classification symbols. Such non-obligatory classification should be given as "additional information".

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Lubricant

A lubricant is a composition, often in liquid form, that is introduced between two moving surfaces to reduce the friction and wear between them, usually by providing a protective film which allows the touching surfaces to be separated, thus lessening the friction between them. Lubricants are often organic liquids such as mineral oils (e.g. used as motor oils), but can also be non-liquid lubricants including grease, powders, dry graphite, PTFE, molybdenum disulphide, tungsten disulfide, etc. In addition to reducing friction and wear, lubricants can also transfer heat, carry away contaminants and debris, transfer power and prevent corrosion and rust.

"Lubricant" or "lubricating composition" includes cutting oils, hydraulic fluids, metal drawing compositions, flushing oils, slushing oils, or the like.

Synonyms and Keywords

Lube oil

Lubricating oil

C10N - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

This subclass constitutes an indexing scheme associated with subclass C10M, relating to lubricating compositions.

metals as such or in a compound (indexed according to Groups 1-8 of the Periodic Table), present in a lubricating composition;

the properties of the lubricant composition or constituents thereof ;

the use or application of the lubricant composition ;

the form in which the lubricant composition is applied ;

chemical modification by after- treatment of lubricant constituents;

special methods of preparation of lubricant compositions;

special pretreatment of the material to be lubricated.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

All documents indexed in this subclass must also have been classified in subclass C10M.

Synonyms and Keywords

"lubricant" or "lubricating composition" includes cutting oils, hydraulic fluids, metal drawing compositions, flushing oils, slushing oils, corrosion inhibition oils, or the like;

"aliphatic" includes "cycloaliphatic".

C10N 40/20 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Essential removal

Near complete removal

C11B - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Essential oil

A concentrated, hydrophobic liquid containing volatile aromatic compounds from plants

C11C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods and apparatus for preparation of fatty acids from fats, fatty oils, or waxes; compositions thereof, e.g. alpha-eleostearic acid, alpha-linolenic acid, etc.

Refining the fatty acids; methods and apparatus therefor

Fats, oils, or fatty acids by chemical modification of fats, oils, or fatty acids obtained therefrom e.g. ester polyols, fatty acid alkyl esters, epoxidized rape-seed oil; methods and apparatus therefor

Candles; compositions therefor, processes and apparatus for production thereof

Relationship between large subject matter areas

The use of fatty acids, fats, oils or waxes for different purposes should be classified in appropriate application places, e.g. using fatty acids esters of higher fatty acids as emulsifiers should relate to B01F 17/06; using fatty acids as active ingredients for mortars, concrete or artificial stone - to C04B 24/04; using oils, fats, or waxes and derivatives thereof in cosmetics or toilet preparations - to A61K 8/92; using fats, fatty oils, ester type waxes, higher fatty acids, oxidized oils or fats as active ingredients for mortars, concrete or artificial stone - to C04B 24/08; using fatty oil as lubricating composition base - to C10M 101/04.

C07 covers production or working up chemically synthesized substances, e.g. synthetic waxes, whereas subclass C11C covers synthesis of substances from natural materials.

C11B covers the production, purification/refining, recovery from waste material or working up of oils and fats (e.g. animal or vegetable oils). C11B does not cover obtaining fatty acid or chemical modification of fats, oils or fatty acid from fat, fatty oils or waxes, which are covered by C11C.

A23D covers edible oils or fats and compositions thereof, e.g. margarines, shortenings, cooking oils and provides for subject matter relating to working up or preservation of finished products. Obtaining or refining fatty acid or chemically modified fat, oils or fatty acids including edible oils or fats are covered by subclass C11C, e.g. hydrogenating is covered by C11C 3/12.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Sulfonated fats or oils

C07C 309/62

Epoxidised fats

C07D 303/42

Natural vulcanized oils, e.g. factice

C08H 3/00

Recovery of fatty acids from waste materials

C11B 13/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Drying-oils; Methods of obtaining and chemically modifying

C09F

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preparation of carboxylic acids (e.g. fatty acids) other than by hydrolysis of animal or vegetable oils, fats or waxes

C07C 51/00

Saturated fatty acids, per se

C07C 53/00

Unsaturated fatty acids, per se

C07C 57/00

Preparation of carboxylic acid esters

C07C 67/00

Separation, purification, stabilisation, or use of additives associated with the preparation of carboxylic acid esters

C07C 67/48

Esters of carboxylic acids, e.g. fatty acid esters

C07C 69/00

Compositions of oils, fats or waxes; Compositions of derivatives thereof

C08L 91/00

Fuels, additives to fuels

C10L

Lubricating compositions

C10M

Preparation of fats, fatty oils, ester-type waxes, higher fatty acids or oxidized oils or fats using enzymes or microorganisms

C12P 7/64

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Fat

Solid triester of glycerol and (mostly) saturated fatty acids

Fatty acid

Any of a class of aliphatic monocarboxylic acids that form part of a lipid molecule and can be derived from fat by hydrolysis; nearly all fatty acids are built around a series of carbon atoms linked together in a chain of 4 to 28 carbon

Esterification

A chemical reaction resulting in the formation of at least one ester product.

Hydrogenation

Chemical process that adds hydrogen atoms to an unsaturated fat or fatty acid

Isomerisation

Process by which one molecule is transformed into another molecule which has exactly the same atoms, but the atoms are rearranged e.g. A-B-C → B-A-C, usually requiring special conditions of temperature, pressure, or catalysts

Lipid

Any of a group of organic compounds, including the fats, oils, waxes, sterols, and triglycerides, that are insoluble in water but soluble in nonpolar organic solvents, are oily to the touch, and together with carbohydrates and proteins constitute the principal structural material of living cells.

Wax

Any of a group of substances composed of hydrocarbons, alcohols, fatty acids, and esters that are solid at ordinary temperatures. They are similar to fats, but are less greasy and more brittle.

Synonyms and Keywords

FA

Fatty acid

DE

Degree of esterification 

In patent documents the following expressions/words "Fat", "Lipid" and "Triglyceride" are often used as synonyms.

C11D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Detergent compositions based essentially on surface-active compounds, such as anionic, cationic or non-ionic compounds;

Compounding ingredients for such compositions, e.g. compounds such as carbonates, animal products or polymers;

Detergent compositions based essentially on non-surface active compounds, e.g. peroxides, hydrocarbons, enzymes;

Detergent compositions based essentially on soap;

Use of single substances, such as surface-active compounds, as detergents;

Detergent compositions based on more than one type of compound;

Methods of preparing compositions containing mixtures of detergents;

Making soap or soap solutions in general;

Making resin soap or soaps derived from naphthenic acids, and compositions thereof;

Detergent materials or soaps characterised by their physical properties; and

Recovery of glycerol from a saponification liquor.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Chemical paint or ink removers

C09D 9/00

Cleaning or degreasing metallic material by chemical methods other than electrolysis

C23G

Bleaching, dry-cleaning or washing of fibres or fabrics

D06L

Treating fibres or fabrics with chemicals

D06M
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Preparations specially adapted for washing the hair, or for cleaning the teeth or mouth

A61K 8/00, A61Q 5/02, A61Q 11/00

Special washing compositions for cleaning semi-permeable membranes

B01D 65/06

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Disinfectants as such

A01N

Methods or apparatus for disinfection or sterilisation

A61L

Use of substances as emulsifying, wetting, dispersing or foam-producing agents

B01F 17/00

Refining glycerol

C07C 31/22

Polishing compositions

C09G

Special rules of classification

When classifying in the mixture groups of this subclass, any individual ingredient of a composition which is not identified by such classification, and which itself is determined to be novel and non-obvious, must also be classified in groups C11D 1/00-C11D 9/00. The individual ingredient can be either a single substance or a composition in itself.

Any ingredient of a composition which is not identified by the above classification, and which is considered to represent information of interest for search, may also be classified in groups C11D 1/00-C11D 9/00. Such non-obligatory classification should be given as "additional information".

In groups C11D 1/02-C11D 1/94 in groups C11D 3/02-C11D 3/39 in groups C11D 7/02-C11D 7/46 and in groups C11D 9/06-C11D 9/42, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Amphoteric surfactants

Amphoteric surfactants contain both acidic and basic groups in their molecule, and can act as cationic or anionic detergents, depending on the pH of the solution, or as both cation and anion.

Anionic surfactants

Anionic surfactants have a negatively-charged surface-active ion. An example is sodium alkylbenzene sulfonate.

Cationic surfactants

Cationic surfactants (also known as invert soaps) are a type of ionic synthetic surfactant in which the surface-active part of the molecule is the positively-charged cation. Typical are the quaternary ammonium salts such as cetrimide, benzalkonium chloride, domiphen bromide and cetyl pyridinium bromide; all have bactericidal activity.

Compounding ingredients

The non-surface-active ingredients in a detergent composition, e.g. binders and water-softening agents.

Detergents

Detergents are basically any cleaning materials. Such materials may or may not contain surfactants. The term "synthetic detergent" is also used as a synonym for "surfactant" (excluding soaps, which are not considered synthetic), which is a compound, or a mixtures of compounds, whose molecules have two distinct regions – one that is hydrophilic and has an affinity for water, and another that is hydrophobic, with little (if any) affinity for water. These compounds can aid in the solubilisation of hydrophobic compounds in water. See examples below of particular types of surfactant (detergent).

Non-ionic surfactants

Non-ionic surfactants are synthetic surface active agents which are such that the molecules do not ionise in aqueous solution. Typical are the surfactants based on condensation products of ethylene oxide with a hydrophobe.

Resin soap

A yellow soap containing resin, used for bleaching. It is made by adding a certain quantity of resin (rosin or colophony), as much as 50 % and more of the fat employed, to the mass in the soap boiler towards the end of the process.

Soaps

Soaps have the same properties as those mentioned above for surfactants, but in general soaps are not considered as synthetic detergents. Soap is a particular type of surfactant derived from oils and fats, and is created through the saponification process whereby the ester linkage in a vegetable oil or fat is hydrolytically cleaved using an alkali (NaOH or KOH), yielding glycerol and crude soap.

Soaps usually consist of the alkaline salts of fatty acids, chiefly palmitic, stearic or oleic acids. Soft soaps contain the potassium salts, whereas the sodium salts are hard soaps. Metallic soaps include water-insoluble compounds of fatty acids with bases of copper, aluminium, lithium, calcium etc. Soaps are examples of anionic surfactants. Synthetic detergents have generally superseded soap as a laundry aid.

Surface-active compounds/agents (surfactants)

Substances which have the effect of reducing the surface tension of a solvent, an example being a detergent or soap dissolved in water. These substances, also known as wetting agents, contain a combination of polar (hydrophilic) and non-polar (hydrophobic) parts which serve to bind oil and water together. They locate at the phase boundary between the water phase and the organic phase, or if there is no room there, they will congregate together and form micelles.

Both synthetic detergents and soaps are surfactants.

Surfactants

See "Surface-active compounds/agents".

C11D 13/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

By slicing

C11D 13/24

C11D 19/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Refining glycerol

C07C 31/22

C12C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Raw materials used in preparing beer (e.g. malt, hops), and treatment thereof.

Preparation of wort.

Fermentation processes for beer.

Processes for producing special kinds of beer.

Brewing devices.

Beer per se.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

C12H deals with "Pasteurisation, sterilisation, preservation, purification, clarification, ageing of alcoholic beverages or removal of alcohol therefrom".

Post-fermentation treatment such as carbonation is subject matter of this subclass but is classified in C12H when combined with subject matter of that subclass.

In this subclass, it is desirable to add the indexing codes of subclass C12R.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Preparation of malt for use as foodstuffs

A23L

Cleaning of raw materials, e.g. fruit and vegetables

A23N

Containers with means for effervescing potable liquids

B65D 85/73

Processes for removing alcohol to render alcohol-free or low alcohol drinks

C12H 3/00

Pitching or depitching machines, or cellar tools

C12L

Propagating yeasts

C12N 1/14

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Separation of solids from liquids in general

B01D

Ethanolic fermentation for non-beverage purposes

C12P 7/06

Special rules of classification

Main group C12C 13/00 is residual for apparatus not covered by a single previous group, except in the case of "Brew kettles" which are classified here as the apparatus rather than within the preparation groups.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Beer

The term beer includes alcoholic drinks produced by the fermentation of sugars derived from grains of barley, wheat, sorghum, maize or rice.

Brew kettles

Apparatus in which the wort is boiled.

Caramel/black malt

Malt which has been sufficiently heated to caused sugars to caramelize.

Fermentation

Process whereby yeast converts sugar to ethyl alcohol.

Germ

The germ is the shoot which has started to grow from a grain.

Immobilized yeast

The yeast is absorbed on a static material instead of being dispersed throughout the liquid.

Low alcohol

This is beer which has a lower alcohol content than would be expected from complete fermentation of the beer. Beers which are low calorie and low alcohol are classified as low alcoholbeers.

Malt

Malt is the term used for partially germinated and subsequently dried grains in which part of the starch has been converted to sugar.

Mash

Mash is a mixture of malt and water. Mashing refers to the process of extracting the sugars from the grains by soaking, often at elevated temperature.

Pitching

This is the process of adding yeast to the wort.

Steeping

Soaking the grains in water primarily to stimulate germination.

Wort

Wort is the liquid part of the mash which is left after removal of the grains.

Synonyms and Keywords

In older documents "malt" is sometimes called by its full title "malted barley".

"Black malt" and "chocolate malt" are synonyms and are also known as "caramel" or "caramel malt" in older documents.

Secondary sources of starch/sugar are often termed "adjuncts", e.g. the wheat in wheat beer.

In this subclass, the terms "wort" and "beerwort" are interchangeable and thus can be considered as synonyms.

"Brew kettles" are also known as "coppers".

"Low alcohol" in several countries has a legal meaning distinct from its usage here. "Reduced alcohol", "dealcoholized", "dealcoholized", are alternate keywords.

Water when used in brewing is often termed "liquor" in older documents.

C12G - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Wine per se.

Processes used in the preparation of wine.

Other alcoholic drinks per se.

Processes used in the preparation of other alcoholic drinks.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

While subclass C12H deals with pasteurisation, sterilisation, preservation, purification, clarification, ageing of alcoholic beverages or removal of alcohol therefrom, subclass C12G includes deacidifying wine, preventing winestone precipitation or flavouring to simulate ageing.

In this subclass, it is desirable to add the indexing codes of subclass C12R.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Beer; Preparation thereof

C12C

Processes for removing alcohol to render alcohol-free or low alcohol drinks

C12H 3/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Generic equipment and processes for separation of solids from liquids

B01D

Generic distillation processes or apparatus

B01D 3/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Dégorgeage

Process for removing yeast which has settled in the neck of a bottle or on a specially formed closure.

Desulfiting

Process for the removal of excess sulfur dioxide.

Fermentation

Process whereby yeast converts sugar to ethyl alcohol.

Immobilized yeast

The yeast is absorbed on a static material instead of being dispersed throughout the liquid.

Must

Juice extracted from grapes.

Pompage

Pumping

Sulfiting

Process for adding sulfur dioxide (SO2).

Wine

This includes fortified wines such as Sherry, Port or Madeira, but does not include barley wine which is a synonym for beer used in older documents.

Winestone

Crystals of potassium bitartrate precipitated from the wine.

Synonyms and Keywords

"Dégorgeage" and "degorgement" are the same process, dégorgeage is the term used in French, whilst degorgement is the term used in English. As a keyword "degorge" or "disgorge" are also used as verbs.

Agitation prior to removal of yeast is often termed "remuage".

In the context of removal of yeast, dead yeast is often known as "lees" or "sediment".

"Traditional method", "Champagne Method" and "Méthode Champenoise" are all the same method.

Other keywords for "winestone" are potassium tartrate, potassium bitartrate, cream of tartar, and, in older documents, wine diamonds.

"Low alcohol" in several countries has a legal meaning distinct from its usage here. "Reduced alcohol", "dealcoholized", "dealcoholized", are alternate keywords.

Sulfur and derivative words have an alternate spelling sulphur, e.g. "sulphiting", "desulphiting".

C12H - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Pasteurisation, sterilisation, preservation, purification, clarification or ageing of alcoholic beverages.

Removal of alcohol from alcoholic beverages to obtain alcohol-free or low-alcohol beverages.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Beer per se, brewing of beer, fermentation processes and post fermentation treatments for beer are classified in subclass C12C.

While subclass C12C deals with the process of making beer with a low alcohol content, C12H includes the process of removal of alcohol from beer to obtain low-alcohol or alcohol-free beer.

Wine, other alcoholic beverages and their preparation are classified in subclass C12G.

While subclass C12G deals with deacidifying wine, preventing winestone precipitation or flavouring to simulate ageing, C12H includes pasteurisation, sterilisation, preservation, purification, clarification, ageing of alcoholic beverages or removal of alcohol therefrom.

When classifying in this subclass, classification is also made in group B01D 15/08 insofar as subject matter of general interest relating to chromatography is concerned.

It is desirable to add the indexing codes of subclass C12R for micro-organisms which are considered to be of interest for search.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Recovery of by- products of wine or beer other than low-alcohol beverages

C12F 3/06

Deacidification of wine

C12G 1/10

Prevention of winestone precipitation

C12G 1/12

Simulation of ageing by flavouring

C12G 3/06

Preparation of alcoholic beverages other than wine or beer by varying the composition of fermented solutions

C12G 3/08

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preservation of foods or foodstuffs, in general

A23L 3/00

Distillation or rectification of fermented solutions to obtain pure alcohol

B01D 3/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Adsorption

Capability of all solid substances to attract to their surfaces molecules of gases or solutions with which they are in contact.

Clarification

Removal of the suspended material during aging.

Lagering

Ageing or ripening of the beer by storing. During lagering, fermentation and clarification take place.

Sulfiting

Process for adding sulfur dioxide (SO2).

C12M - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus for enzymology or microbiology in which in particular:

Apparatus specially adapted to employ micro-organisms or enzymes as "reactants" or biocatalysts.

Apparatus for enzymology or microbiology of both the laboratory and industrial scale.

Tissue, human, animal or plant cell, or virus culture apparatus.

Specific apparatus provided for in this subclass include fermentation apparatus, apparatus for the treatment of micro-organisms or enzymes with electrical or wave energy, mutation or genetic engineering apparatus, inoculators or samplers, measuring or testing apparatus.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Physical or chemical apparatus in general are classified in class B01.

Controlling or regulating apparatus in general is classified in subclass G05.

In subclasses C12M-C12Q, and within each of these subclasses, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

The codes of subclass C12R are only for use as indexing codes associated with subclasses C12C-C12Q, so as to provide information concerning the micro-organisms used in the processes classified in these subclasses.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Installations for fermenting manure

A01C 3/02

Preservation of living parts of humans or animals

A01N 1/02

Brewing apparatus

C12C

Producing methane by anaerobic treatment of sludge

C02F 11/04

Fermentation apparatus for wine

C12G

Apparatus for preparing vinegar

C12J 1/10

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

In this subclass, viruses, undifferentiated human, animal, or plant cells, protozoa, tissues, and unicellular algae are considered as micro-organisms.

In this subclass, unless specifically provided for, undifferentiated human, animal or plant cells, protozoa, tissues and unicellular algae are classified together with micro-organisms. Sub-cellular parts, unless specifically provided for, are classified with the whole cell.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Enzyme

Proteinaceous material which causes a chemical change in a starting material without being consumed in the reaction

Micro-organism

Comprises single-celled organisms such as bacteria, actinomycetales or single-celled fungi, e.g. yeasts; for the purposes of classification, this term also includes viruses, undifferentiated human, animal or plant cells, protozoa, tissues and unicellular algae.

C12M 3/00 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Plant

Any of a kingdom (Plantae) of multicellular eukaryotic mostly photosynthetic organisms typically lacking locomotive movement or obvious nervous or sensory organs and possessing cellulose cell walls.

C12N - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Micro-organisms (e.g. protozoa, bacteria, fused plant cells, hybridomas, viruses, animal cells or tissue, stem cells, tumour cells) and enzymes or proenzymes and compositions containing micro-organisms and enzymes or proenzymes.

Processes for preparing, activating, inhibiting, separating, or purifying enzymes.

Treatment of micro-organisms or enzymes with electrical or wave energy.

Processes of reproducing, maintaining, or preserving microorganisms or compositions thereof.

Processes of preparing or isolating a composition containing micro-organisms.

Preparing mutants and screening processes therefor.

Processes of fusing two or more cells to each other.

Recombinant DNA-technology including:

Media for supporting or sustaining the growth of micro-organisms.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In subclasses C12M-C12Q, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate subclass of subclasses C12M-C12Q.

Multiple classification

Biocidal, pest repellant, pest attractant or plant growth regulatory activity of compounds or preparations containing micro-organisms and enzymes is further classified in subclass A01P.

Therapeutic activity of compounds containing micro-organisms, single cell proteins, or enzymes, is further classified in subclass A61P.

Uses of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations containing micro-organisms or enzymes are further classified in subclass A61Q.

It is desirable to add the indexing codes of subclass C12R for micro-organisms which are considered to be of interest for search.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Nucleic acids not used in recombinant technology and their chemical preparation

C07H 21/00

Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes or micro-organisms; Compositions therefor; Preparing such compositions

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

New breeds of multicellular plants, e.g. transgenic plants, and processes of obtaining these plants

A01H

New breeds of multicellular animals, e.g. transgenic animals, and processes of obtaining these animals

A01K 67/00

Compositions and use of the compositions and compounds for preservation of bodies of humans or animals or parts thereof

A01N 1/00

Compositions and use of the compositions and compounds for preservation of plants or parts thereof

A01N 3/00

Biocides, pest repellents or attractants or plant growth regulators containing micro-organisms, viruses, microbial fungi, enzymes, fermentates, or substances produced by, or extracted from, micro-organisms or animal material

A01N 63/00

Bakery products which may contain micro-organisms or enzymes

A21D 10/00, A21D 13/00

Foods or foodstuffs containing micro-organisms or enzymes

A23

Body treating or pharmaceutical preparations containing micro-organisms or enzymes

A61K

Medicinal preparations containing nucleic acids

A61K 31/7088

Medicinal preparations containing genetic material which is inserted into cells of the living body to treat genetic diseases; Gene therapy

A61K 48/00

Bandages, dressings or absorbent pads for physiological fluids containing micro-organisms

A61L 15/36

Bandages, dressings or absorbent pads for physiological fluids containing enzymes

A61L 15/38

Biological compost

C05F 9/04

Organic fertilizers containing added bacterial cultures, mycelia or the like

C05F 11/08

Enzyme containing detergent compositions

C11D

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preservation of living parts of humans or animals

A01N 1/02

Food compositions

A21, A23

Chemical aspects of, or use of materials for, bandages, dressings, absorbent pads or surgical articles

A61L

Compositions, characterized by the use of bacteria, which are used to enhance recovery of hydrocarbons from underground formations

C09K 8/582

Preparing polynucleotides using enzymes or micro-organisms

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, with the exception of group C12N 5/07, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

In this subclass, viruses, human, animal, or plant cells, protozoa, tissues, and unicellular algae are considered as micro-organisms.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Antisense

DNA or RNA composed of the complementary sequence to the target DNA/RNA

Aptamers

Oligonucleotide molecules that bind a specific target molecule.

CpG-motifs

Cytosine-Phosphate-Guanine motifs; a cytosine is directly followed by a guanine in the DNA sequence; methylation of cytosine in CpG- motifs negatively regulates gene expression.

Enzyme

Proteinaceous materials, which cause a chemical change in a starting material without being consumed in the reaction.

Genetic Engineering

Technology used to alter the hereditary apparatus or gene structure of a living cell so that the cell can produce more or different chemicals, or perform completely new functions.

Germ cell

Reproductive cells of the body, specifically, either egg or sperm cells.

Maintaining

Supporting or sustaining growth or metabolic activity of micro-organisms.

Micro-organism

Comprises single-celled organisms such as bacteria, actinomycetales or single-celled fungi, e.g. yeasts; for the purposes of classification, this term also includes viruses, human, animal or plant cells, protozoa, tissues and unicellular algae.

Multipotent stem cell

A stem cell with the ability to give rise to multiple cell types belonging to one particular embryonic germ layer, the endoderm, the mesoderm or the ectoderm.

Mutation

Any change that alters the sequence of bases along the DNA thereby changing the genetic material of a microorganism.

NK cell

Natural killer cell

Non-coding nucleic acid sequence

Nucleic acid sequence which does not contain instructions for making proteins.

Pluripotent stem cell

A stem cell with the ability to differentiate into cells of at least two of the three embryonic germ layers, the endoderm, the mesoderm and the ectoderm.

Preserving

Rendering micro-organisms reversibly dormant.

Proenzyme

An enzyme precursor

Progenitor cell

A parent cell that gives rise to a distinct cell lineage by a series of cell divisions.

Recombinant DNA Technology

Techniques for cutting apart and splicing together pieces of DNA from the same or different sources.

Single-cell protein

Protein derived from microorganisms, usually bacteria or yeast, that are cultivated on a suitable medium and then harvested and processed for use as a food for livestock or humans. For example, blue-green bacterium Spirulina is processed and sold as a protein-rich health food.

Stem cell

Cells capable of renewing themselves through mitotic cell division as well as differentiating into a diverse range of specialized cell types. The term covers adult stem cells as well as embryonic stem cells (ES) as derived from blastocysts.

Totipotent stem cell

A stem cell with the ability to generate a whole organism autonomously; totipotent mammalian cells thus can differentiate into all three somatic lineages (endoderm or mesoderm or ectoderm), the germ line and extra embryonic tissues such as the placenta.

Vector

ADNA sequence (e.g., plasmid, phage DNA) which may be employed to introduce a foreign gene into a host cell and is able to replicate autonomously in the host cell.

C12N 1/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Culture of multi-cellular plants

A01G

C12N 1/38 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Essential growth factor

Indispensable growth factor

C12N 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preparation of malt

C12C 1/00

C12P - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Processes wherein the product (compound or composition) is synthesised by a biochemical transformation of matter performed by using enzymes or micro-organisms.

Processes of separating enantiomers (optical isomers) from a racemic mixture by using enzymes or micro-organisms.

Explanatory Note:

This subclass covers both major and minor chemical modifications.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In subclasses C12M to C12Q , in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate subclass of subclasses C12M to C12Q.

If a particular reaction is considered of interest, it may also be classified in the relevant chemical compound class, e.g. C07, C08.

It is desirable to add the indexing codes of subclass C12R for micro-organisms which are considered to be of interest for search.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Treating dough with micro-organisms

A21D 8/04

Processes for treating foods or foodstuffs with micro-organisms

A23

Production of methane by anaerobic treatment of sludge

C02F 11/04

Preparation of fertilisers characterized by a composting step

C05F 17/00

Fermentation processes for beer production

C12C 11/00

Fermentation processes for wine making

C12G 1/00

Fermentation processes for preparing alcoholic beverages other than wine and beer

C12G 3/00

Pasteurisation, sterilisation, preservation, purification, clarification, ageing of alcoholic beverages involving enzymes

C12H 1/15

Removal of alcohol from alcoholic beverages

C12H 3/00

Preparing vinegar by fermentation of starting materials

C12J

Processes of preparing enzymes

C12N 9/00

DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification

C12N 15/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Methods of preparing compounds without using enzymes or micro-organisms

C01, C07, C08

Methods for enhanced recovery of hydrocarbons using bacteria

E21B 43/22

Special rules of classification

In the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

Group C12P 1/00 covers general processes using micro-organisms or enzymes for preparing compounds or compositions and processes using micro-organisms or enzymes for producing compositions and compounds not sufficiently identified to be classified in groups C12P 3/00 to C12P 37/00. Compounds identified only by their empirical formulae are not considered to be sufficiently identified to be classified in groups C12P 3/00 to C12P 37/00.

In this subclass, sub-cellular parts of micro-organisms, unless specifically provided for elsewhere, are classified with the whole cell

In this subclass:

metal or ammonium salts of a compound are classified as that compound.

compositions are classified in the relevant compound groups.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Micro-organism

Comprises single-celled organisms such as bacteria, actinomycetales or single-celled fungi, e.g. yeasts; for the purposes of classification, this term also includes viruses, human, animal or plant cells, protozoa, tissues and unicellular algae.

C12P 5/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Producing methane by anaerobic treatment of sludge

C02F 11/04

C12P 7/54 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Vinegar

C12J

C12P 19/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

2-ketogulonic acid

C12P 7/60

C12P 19/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Non-biological hydrolysis of starch

C08B 30/00

C12P 21/06 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Preparing foodstuffs by protein hydrolysis

A23J 3/00

C12Q - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Processes in which there is a direct or indirect qualitative or quantitative measurement or test of a material which contains enzymes or micro-organisms or processes in which a material containing enzymes or micro-organisms is used to perform a qualitative or quantitative measurement or test, e.g. testing for antimicrobial activity or cholesterol, geomicrobiological testing.

In vivo or in vitro or in silico measuring or testing processes involvingnucleic acid e.g. nucleic acid hybridisation including PCR (Polymerase Chain Reaction).

Compositions or test papers containing micro-organisms or enzymes which can be used to detect or identify a chemical compound or composition, e.g. paper strips for the testing of blood sugar.

Compositions or test papers distinguished by the use of indicators which can be used to detect or identify the presence of micro-organisms or enzymes.

Processes of making such test compositions.

Processes involvingenzymes or micro-organisms in which a process parameter is measured and that or another process parameter is varied in response to such measurement, i.e. condition responsive control.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Controlling or regulating in general is classified in G05.

In subclasses C12M-C12Q, and within each of these subclasses, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

The codes of subclass C12R are only for use as indexing codes associated with subclasses C12C-C12Q, so as to provide information concerning the micro-organisms used in the processes classified in these subclasses.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Measuring or testing apparatus with condition measuring or sensing means, e.g. colony counters

C12M 1/34

Apparatus for condition-responsive control processes

C12M 1/36

Observation of the progress or of the result of processes specified in this subclass by any of the methods specified in groups G01N 3/00-G01N 29/00

G01N

Immunoassay

G01N 33/53

Immunoassay with enzyme label

G01N 33/535

Immunoassay with the carrier being a biological cell or cell fragment

G01N 33/554

Immunoassay for micro-organisms

G01N 33/569

Immunoassay for venereal diseases

G01N 33/571

Immunoassay for enzymes and isoenzymes

G01N 33/573

Immunoassay for cancer

G01N 33/574

Immunoassay for hepatitis

G01N 33/576

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Micro-organisms per se

C12N 1/00

Human, animal or plant cells per se

C12N 5/00

Viruses per se

C12N 7/00

Enzymes per se

C12N 9/00, C12N 11/00

Investigating or analysing materials by determining their chemical or physical properties

G01N

Investigating or analysing biological material

G01N 33/48-G01N 33/98

Chemical analysis involving blood sugar, e.g. galactose

G01N 33/66

Chemical analysis involving proteins, peptides and amino acids

G01N 33/68

Chemical analysis involving lipids, e.g. cholesterol

G01N 33/92

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, in absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

In this subclass, test media are classified in the appropriate group for the relevant test process.

In this subclass, viruses, undifferentiated human, animal or plant cells, protozoa, tissues and unicellular algae are considered as micro-organisms.

In this subclass, unless specifically provided for, undifferentiated human, animal or plant cells, protozoa, tissues and unicellular algae are classified together with micro-organisms. Sub-cellular parts, unless specifically provided for, are classified with the whole cell.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Enzyme

Proteinaceous material which causes a chemical change in a starting material without being consumed in the reaction.

Involving

when used in relation to a substance, includes the testing for the substance as well as employing the substance as a determinant or reactant in a test for a different substance.

Micro-organism

Single-celled organisms such as bacteria, actinomycetales or single-celled fungi, e.g. yeasts; for the purposes of classification, this term also includes viruses, undifferentiated human, animal or plant cells, protozoa, tissues and unicellular algae.

Nucleic acid

comprises nucleic acids as in vitro compounds as well as sub-cellular parts in vivo like chromosome territories within the nucleus, plasmids, gene sequences, genetic information, mutations, polymorphisms such as SNPs, in silico base sequences, aptamers (ligand binding nucleic acids) and ribozymes (catalytic active RNA molecules).

C12R 1/94 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Plant

Any of a kingdom (Plantae) of multicellular eukaryotic mostly photosynthetic organisms typically lacking locomotive movement or obvious nervous or sensory organs and possessing cellulose cell walls.

C13B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Reducing the size of material from which sugars are to be extracted; Presses and knives therefor,

Production and purification of sugar juices, e.g. juices derived from beet, cane or maple,

Expressing water from material from which sugars have been extracted,

Evaporators or boiling pans specially adapted for sugar juices; Evaporating, or boiling sugar juices,

Crystallisation; Crystallising apparatus; Separating crystals from mother liquors,

Extraction of sucrose from molasses; Extraction apparatus,

Drying sugar,

Cutting machines, combined cutting , sorting, and packing machines specially adapted for sugar, or

Sugar products, i.e. physical forms of sugar, such as powdered, lump or liquid sugar; Working-up of sugar.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Chemically synthesised sugars or sugar derivatives are classified in C07H

Naturally-occuring saccharides, other than sucrose, are classified in C13K

Preparation of cellulose derivatives are classified in C08B 1/00-C08B 17/00.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Harvesting of sugar beets

A01D 11/02, A01D 13/00, A01D 25/00

Harvesting of sugar-cane

A01D 45/10

Tapping of tree-juices

A01G 23/10

Tapping-spouts, Receptacles for juices

A01G 23/14

Sweetmeats, Confectionery

A23G 3/00

Foods containing carbohydrate syrups, sugars, sugar alcohols or starch hydrolysates

A23L 1/09

Extraction of starch

C08B 30/02, C08B 30/04

Pressing water from starch-extracted material

C08B 30/10

Fermentation or enzyme-using processes for preparing compounds containing saccharide radicals

C12P 19/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Boiling apparatus

B01B

Separation

B01D

Crushing, pulverizing, or disintegrating in general

B02C

Centrifuges

B04B

Hand-held cutting tools not otherwise provided for

B26B

Cutting in general

B26D

Presses in general

B30B

Storing in general

B65D

Obtaining or extracting cellulose for the purpose of making paper

D21C

Drying in general

F26B

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Aldose

An aldose is a monosaccharide (a simple sugar) containing one aldehyde group per molecule and having a chemical formula of the form Cn(H2O)n (n≥3).

With only 3 carbon atoms, glyceraldehyde is the simplest of all aldoses.

Aldoses isomerise to ketoses in the Lobry-de Bruyn-van Ekenstein transformation. Aldose differs from ketose in that it has a carbonyl group at the end of the carbon chain whereas the carbonyl group of a ketose is in the middle; this fact allows them to be chemically differentiated through Seliwanoff's test.

Disaccharide

A disaccharide is a sugar (a carbohydrate) composed of two monosaccharides.

‘Disaccharide’ is one of the four chemical groupings of carbohydrates (monosaccharide, disaccharide, oligosaccharide and polysaccharide).

Hexose

A hexose is a monosaccharide with six carbon atoms having the chemical formula C6H12O6.

Ketose

A ketose is a sugar containing one ketone group per molecule.

With 3 carbon atoms, dihydroxyacetone is the simplest of all ketoses and is the only one having no optical activity. Ketoses can isomerise into an aldose when the carbonyl group is located at the end of the molecule. Such ketoses are reducing sugars.

Monosaccharide

Monosaccharides (from Greek monos: single, sacchar: sugar) are the most basic unit of carbohydrates. They consist of one sugar and are usually colorless, water-soluble, crystalline solids. Some monosaccharides have a sweet taste. Examples of monosaccharides include glucose (dextrose), fructose, galactose, xylose and ribose. Monosaccharides are the building blocks of disaccharides such as sucrose (common sugar) and polysaccharides (such as cellulose and starch).

Oligosaccharide

An oligosaccharide is a saccharide containing less than six monosaccharides. The name derived from the Greek oligos, meaning "a few".

Pentose

A pentose is a monosaccharide with five carbon atoms.

Polysaccharide

Polysaccharides are polymers containing more than five monosaccharides joined together by glycosidic bonds. They are therefore very large, often branched, macromolecules. They tend to be amorphous, insoluble in water and have no sweet taste.

When all the monosaccharides in a polysaccharide are the same type, the polysaccharide is called a homopolysaccharide, but when more than one type of monosaccharide is present, they are called heteropolysaccharides.

Examples include storage polysaccharides such as starch and glycogen and structural polysaccharides such as cellulose and chitin.

Saccharose

Synonym for sucrose

Sucrose

Sucrose (common name: table sugar, also called saccharose) is a disaccharide of glucose and fructose, with the molecular formula C12H22O11. Its systematic name is α-D-glucopyranosyl- (1↔2)-β-D-fructofuranoside (ending in "oside", because it's not a reducing sugar).

Sugar

Sugar is a class of edible crystalline water-soluble carbohydrates that vary widely in sweetness and typically are optically active, including the mono-, di- and oligosaccharides (e. g. sucrose, lactose, and fructose). Sugar as a basic food carbohydrate primarily comes from sugar cane and from sugar beet, but also appears in fruit, honey, sorghum, sugar maple (in maple syrup), and in many other sources. It forms the main ingredient in much candy.

In non-scientific use, the term sugar refers to sucrose (also called "table sugar" or "saccharose") — a white crystalline solid disaccharide. In this informal sense, the word "sugar" principally refers to crystalline sugars.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following expressions/words "saccharose" and "sucrose" are often used as synonyms.

C13K - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Saccharides obtained by hydrolysis of naturally-occurring di-, oligo- or polysaccarides,

Glucose; Glucose-containing syrups,

Invert sugar; Separation of glucose or fructose from invert sugar,

Lactose,

Maltose,

Fructose,

Other naturally-occurring mono-, di- and oligosaccharides, or

Production and crystallisation methods.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Carbohydrate syrups or sugar in foods or foodstuffs is classified in A23L 1/09.

Chemically synthesised sugars or sugar derivatives are classified in C07H.

Polysaccharides are classified in C08B.

Malt is classified in C12C.

Production of sucrose is classified in C13B.

Obtaining or extracting cellulose for the purpose of making paper is classified in D21C.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Preserving or chemical ripening of fruits or vegetables with sugar

A23B 7/08

Sweetmeats, confectionery

A23G 3/00

Manufacture of fodder

A23K 1/12

Animal feeding stuff from vegetable matter

A23K 1/14

Cosmetics or similar toilet preparations containing sugars

A61K 8/60

Medical preparations containing sugars

A61K 31/70

Artificial sweetening agents

A23L 1/22, A23L 1/236

Modifying nutritive qualities of food, dietetic products

A23L 1/29

Fermentation or enzyme-using processes for preparing compounds containing saccharide radicals

C12P 19/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Aldose

An aldose is a monosaccharide (a simple sugar) containing one aldehyde group per molecule and having a chemical formula of the form Cn(H2O)n(n≥3).

With only 3 carbon atoms, glyceraldehyde is the simplest of all aldoses.

Aldoses isomerise to ketoses in the Lobry-de Bruyn-van Ekenstein transformation. Aldose differs from ketose in that it has a carbonyl group at the end of the carbon chain whereas the carbonyl group of a ketose is in the middle; this fact allows them to be chemically differentiated through Seliwanoff's test.

Disaccharide

A disaccharide is a sugar (a carbohydrate) composed of two monosaccharides.

'Disaccharide' is one of the four chemical groupings of carbohydrates (monosaccharide, disaccharide, oligosaccharide and polysaccharide).

Hexose

A hexose is a monosaccharide with six carbon atoms having the chemical formula C6H12O6.

Ketose

A ketose is a sugar containing one ketone group per molecule.

With 3 carbon atoms, dihydroxyacetone is the simplest of all ketoses and is the only one having no optical activity. Ketoses can isomerise into an aldose when the carbonyl group is located at the end of the molecule. Such ketoses are reducing sugars.

Monosaccharide

Monosaccharides (from Greek monos: single, sacchar: sugar) are the most basic unit of carbohydrates. They consist of one sugar and are usually colorless, water-soluble, crystalline solids. Some monosaccharides have a sweet taste. Examples of monosaccharides include glucose (dextrose), fructose, galactose, xylose and ribose. Monosaccharides are the building blocks of disaccharides such as sucrose (common sugar) and polysaccharides (such as cellulose and starch).

Oligosaccharide

An oligosaccharide is a saccharide containing less than six monosaccharides. The name derived from the Greek oligos, meaning "a few".

Pentose

A pentose is a monosaccharide with five carbon atoms.

Polysaccharide

Polysaccharides are polymers containing more than five monosaccharides joined together by glycosidic bonds. They are therefore very large, often branched, macromolecules. They tend to be amorphous, insoluble in water and have no sweet taste.

When all the monosaccharides in a polysaccharide are the same type, the polysaccharide is called a homopolysaccharide, but when more than one type of monosaccharide is present, they are called heteropolysaccharides.

Examples include storage polysaccharides such as starch and glycogen and structural polysaccharides such as cellulose and chitin.

Saccharose

Synonym for sucrose

Sucrose

Sucrose (common name: table sugar, also called saccharose) is a disaccharide of glucose and fructose, with the molecular formula C12H22O11. Its systematic name is α-D-glucopyranosyl- (1↔2)-β-D-fructofuranoside (ending in "oside", because it's not a reducing sugar).

Sugar

Sugar is a class of edible crystalline water-soluble carbohydrates that vary widely in sweetness and typically are optically active, including the mono-, di- and oligosaccharides (e. g. sucrose, lactose, and fructose). Sugar as a basic food carbohydrate primarily comes from sugar cane and from sugar beet, but also appears in fruit, honey, sorghum, sugar maple (in maple syrup), and in many other sources. It forms the main ingredient in much candy.

In non-scientific use, the term sugar refers to sucrose (also called "table sugar" or "saccharose") — a white crystalline solid disaccharide. In this informal sense, the word "sugar" principally refers to crystalline sugars.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following expressions/words "saccharose" and "sucrose" are often used as synonyms.

C14B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Mechanical methods for the production of leather, skins or hides, e.g. shaving, hammering or drying.

Mechanical treatment of leather, skins or hides, e.g. milling, punching, cutting, shredding or finishing the edges.

Special leathers, e.g. composite leathers.

Making leather belts or strips, e.g. driving belts.

Mechanical treatment of furs, e.g. shearing, cutting or finishing.

Hand tools specially adapted for the manufacture of leather or furs.

Splitting and cutting of intestines and apparatus therefor.

Apparatus and details thereof for the production and treatment of skins, hides, furs or leather.

Leathers obtained by mechanical treatment or processing.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Composite leathers with one or more layers of plastics material

B32B 9/02

Chemical aspects of pasting processes

C14C 7/00

Mechanical or pressure cleaning of hides

D06G
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Scalding, scraping, dehairing or singeing of animals after slaughtering

A22B 5/08

Cleaning or cutting intestines during processing of meat

A22C 17/00

Machines for cutting-out or stamping-out leather for shoe parts, e.g. soles

A43D

Equipment or tools for saddlery

B68C

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Footwear made of animal fibres

A43B 1/02

Details of machines for cutting, perforating or stamping-out in general

B26D

Making articles from leather

B68F

Chemical treatment of skins, hides or leather

C14C

Felting apparatus

D04H 17/00

Bleaching leather or furs

D06L 3/00

Artificial leather

D06N 3/00-D06N 3/18

Processes of dyeing leather or furs

D06P

Driving belts per se, made of leather

F16G 1/02

V-belts per se, made of leather

F16G 5/02

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Composite leather

Leather, permanently fitted together by assembling pieces.

Fur

The body hair of non-human mammals, also known as the pelage.

Hide

Body covering or skin of an animal.

Leather

Animal hide or skin, which has been tanned. Tanning is a chemical treatment that makes hides and skins durable by preventing decomposition.

Pasting process

An industrial process for stretching and drying wet skins which have been glued (pasted) on a plane surface.

Pelt

The skin of an animal with hair, fur, or wool still attached.

Special leather

Leathers fitted together in some way by assemblying pieces.

Technical leather

A leather that withstands tough wear and tear and is used, for instance, in the automotive and aviation industries (e.g. belts).

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the words "clicking" and "punching" are often used as synonyms.

C14C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Chemical treatment of hides or skins prior to tanning, e.g. curing or unhairing; compositions therefor.

Tanning of hides or skins; compositions therefor; recovering tanning agents from leather.

Degreasing of leather; compositions therefor.

Chemical aspects of pasting processes; compositions therefor.

Impregnating leather for preserving, waterproofing, making heat resistant or similar purposes; compositions therefor.

Chemical surface finishing of leather, e.g. applying abrasion resistant coating; compositions therefor.

Products that can be obtained by chemical treatment of skins, hides or leather; special kinds of leather, e.g. vellum, and chemical manufacture thereof; compositions therefor.

Apparatus for chemical treatment or washing of skins, hides or leather; processes of washing skins, hides or leather.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

With the chemical methods covered by subclass C14C, skins are processed to leather or leather is preserved. In contrast to this, bleaching of leather or furs is covered by D06L. General and special processes of dyeing leather or furs are provided for in subclass D06P.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Footwear made of animal fibres

A43B 1/02

Making articles from leather

B68F

Adhesives and adhesive processes

C09J

Mechanical treatment of hides, skins or leather

C14B

Mechanical aspects of pasting processes

C14B 1/60

Treating textile materials by liquids, gases or vapours, e.g. impregnating, washing

D06B

Artificial leather

D06N 3/00-D06N 3/18

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Fur

The body hair of non-human mammals, also known as the pelage.

Hide

Body covering or skin of an animal.

Leather

Animal hide or skin, which has been tanned.

Pasting process

An industrial process for stretching and drying wet skins, which have been glued (pasted) on a plane surface before.

Pelt

The skin of an animal with hair, fur, or wool still attached.

Tanning

A chemical treatment for animal hides or skins, making them soft and durable by preventing decomposition.

Technical leather

A leather that withstands tough wear and tear and is used, for instance, in the automotive and aviation industries (e.g. belts).

C14C 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Chamois tanning

C14C 3/14

C22B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Metallurgical or chemical processes for producing or recovering metals from metal compounds, ores, metalliferous waste or scrap metal and for refining metal. Included in this subclass are processes drawn to:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

C22B covers the treatment, e.g. the decarburization, of metalliferous material for purposes of refining. C21C, C21D and C22F provide for decarburization of metal for modifying the physical structure of ferrous and nonferrous metals or alloys, respectively.

C22B also possesses groups for obtaining metals including obtaining metals by chemical processes, and obtaining metal compounds by metallurgical processes. Thus, for example, group C22B 11/00 covers the production of silver by reduction of ammoniacal silver oxide in solution, and group C22B 17/00 covers the production of cadmium oxide by metallurgical process. Furthermore, although compounds of arsenic and antimony are classified in C01G, production of the elements themselves is covered by C22B, as well as the production of their compounds by metallurgical processes.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Working metallic powder; manufacture of articles from metallic powder; making metallic powder or suspensions thereof

B22F 9/00

Flotation of ores

B03D

Processing of pig iron, e.g. refining, manufacture of wrought iron or steel; producing sponge iron by direct reduction

C21B, C21C

Electrolytic production or refining of metals

C25C

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Casting of metals

B22D

Coating material with metallic material

C23C

Furnaces, retorts, sintering apparatus

F27B

Obtaining metal compounds by non-metallurgical processes

C01G

e.g. purifying zinc oxide

C01G 9/02

Processes of non-metallurgical separating of materials

B01D

Destroying solid waste or transforming solid waste into something useful or harmless

B09B 3/00

Special rules of classification

When classifying in group C22B 3/00, the nature of any metal which is considered to represent information of interest for search may also be classified in the main groups only of C22B 11/00-C22B 25/00 in group C22B 19/34 or in any of groups C22B 26/00-C22B 61/00. This can, for example, be the case when it is considered of interest to enable searching for extraction of specific metals or their compounds. Such non-obligatory classification should be given as "additional information".

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Carburizing

Treatment of a metal with an externally supplied source of carbon resulting in the chemical reaction or diffusion of the carbon into the metal.

Decarburization

Treatment of a metal to remove carbon therefrom.

Hydrometallurgy

A generic term for processes involving solution in water or other liquid in which metalliferous material or metal is treated to prepare metal, to purify or to refine metal, or to prepare intermediate materials more suitable for use in preparing metal (e.g. extracting, leaching, beneficiating, etc.).

Leaching

Extraction by dissolving soluble constituents from insoluble materials. Either the extracted solution or the insoluble material may contain the desired metalliferous material from which metal is obtained.

Pyrometallurgy

A generic term for processes carried out at relatively high temperatures, usually in furnaces, in which metalliferous material or metal is treated to prepare metal, to purify or to refine free metal, or to prepare intermediate materials more suitable for use in preparing metal (e.g. smelting, roasting of ores, etc.).

Reducing

Changing from a higher to a lower oxidation state such as, for example, from the ferric to the ferrous state, viz.: Fe3+ + e- → Fe2+ or to the elemental state.

Refining

Purification of metal by removal of impurities therefrom.

Roasting

The treatment of an ore or concentrate with heat and causing partial or full oxidation of the reactive species present in the ore or concentrate to facilitate metal extraction.

Slag

A vitreous mass that separates from fused metals during smelting or refining of metalliferous material.

Smelting

Treatment of metalliferous material, typically a metal sulfide ore or concentrate, with sufficient heat to cause melting of the sulfide mineral(s) in the ore or concentrate such that a molten metal sulfide phase is formed.

Synonyms and Keywords

The term "working-up" is sometimes used to connote the pre-treatment of ores or concentrates such as by consolidation.

The term "beneficiating" is sometimes used to connote processes of enrichment of ores and concentrates such as by leaching.

The term "indurating" is sometimes used to connote the heat-treatment of ores or concentrates such as by forming hardened pellets of metalliferous material.

The term "cementation" used in connection with hydrometallurgic processes refer to the precipitation of metalliferous material from solution.

C22B 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Furnaces, sintering apparatus

F27B

C22B 4/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric heating elements

H05B

C22C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Ferrous and non-ferrous alloys, including radioactive alloys, cermets and master alloys. This subclass also covers amorphous alloys and alloys containing fibres or filaments.

Manufacture of alloys such as by processes of removing material from alloys to produce alloys of different constitution.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

C22C provides for ferrous and non-ferrous metals or alloys having a specified physical structure, e.g. microstructure, resulting from heat treatment or physical deformation. Processes for changing the physical structure of ferrous and non-ferrous metals or alloys by heat treatment or physical deformation are provided for in C21D and C22F, respectively.

C22C also provides for processes of removing material from alloys to produce alloys of different constitution, however C21D provides for removal of material by decarburization of ferrous alloys to make malleable, and C22F provides for removal of material by decarburization of non-ferrous metals or alloys.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Powder metallurgical apparatus or processes, not specifically modified for making alloys

B22F

Rods, electrodes, materials or media, for use in soldering, welding or cutting

B23K 35/00

Ceramic products containing shaped metallic materials

C04B 35/74

Electrolytic production or refining of metals

C25C

Single crystals or homogeneous polycrystalline material with defined structure, e.g. directionally solidified

C30B 29/00

Magnets

H01F

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Flints

C06C 15/00

Processing of pig iron, e.g. refining, manufacture of wrought iron or steel

C21C

Coating material with metallic material; cementation (carburizing, nitriding, etc.) processes

C23C

Special rules of classification

In this subclass the phrase "based on" requires at least 50% by weight of the specified constituent or of the specified group of constituents.

In groups C22C 21/14-C22C 21/18 groups C22C 30/02-C22C 30/06 and groups C22C 37/00 and C22C 38/00, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, an alloy is classified in the last appropriate place.

For main groups C22C 47/00 and C22C 49/00, indexing in groups C22C 101/00-C22C 121/00 may also be useful for subject matter relating to the nature of the fibrous materials contained in metal-fibrous composites.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Alloy

A composition of plural elements at least one of which is a free metal. Also includes material containing any combination of fibres, filaments, whiskers and particles, e.g. carbides, diamond, oxides, borides, nitrides or silicides, or other metal compounds, e.g. oxynitrides or sulfides, embedded in a metallic matrix.

Amorphous

Possessing no regular crystalline arrangement of atoms.

Cermet

Material containing any combination of fibres, filaments, whiskers, and particles, e.g. carbides, diamond, oxides, borides, nitrides, silicides, or other metal compounds, e.g. oxynitrides or sulfides, embedded in a metallic matrix.

Master alloy

A mixture or alloy of elements which are to be added to a charge or molten metal in order to provide a desired composition, deoxidize the molten metal or provide a fine grain size, etc.

Refining

Purification of metal by removal of impurities therefrom.

C22C 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Powder-metallurgical apparatus or processes, not specially modified for making alloys

B22F

C22C 33/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Working metallic powder

B22F

C22F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Processes for changing the physical structure of non-ferrous metals and non-ferrous alloys. Included in this subclass are processes drawn to:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Subclass C21D provides for processes of modifying the physical structure of ferrous metals or alloys, general devices for heat treatment of ferrous or non-ferrous metals or alloys, and making ferrous metals or alloys malleable by decarburization, tempering or other metallurgical treatments. C22C provides for ferrous and non-ferrous metals or alloys that may have a specified physical structure, e.g. microstructure, resulting from heat treatment or physical deformation.

Subclass C22F provides for decarburization of non-ferrous metal and non-ferrous alloys to modify the physical structure thereof. Subclass C22B covers the decarburization of metalliferous material for purposes of refining.

Group C23F 17/00 provides for surface treatment of metallic material involving at least one process provided for in class C23 and at least one process covered in the present subclass (C22F).

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Powder metallurgical apparatus or processes, not specifically modified for making alloys

B22F

Heat treatment, e.g. annealing, quenching, tempering, adapted for particular metallic articles; furnaces therefor

C21D 9/00

Electrolytic production or refining of metals

C25C

Single crystals or homogeneous polycrystalline material with defined structure; production thereof

C30B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Casting of metals

B22D

Processing of pig iron, e.g. refining, manufacture of wrought iron or steel

C21C

General methods or devices for heat treatment, e.g. hardening, quenching, tempering

C21D 1/00

Removing material from alloys to produce alloys of different constitution

C22C 3/00

Coating material with metallic material; cementation (carburizing, nitriding, etc.) processes

C23C

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Aging (or ageing)

A process in which the hardness or strength of a metal alloy having a constituent in supersaturated solid solution is increased over time as the constituent precipitates out as a secondary phase containing the constituent. When occurring at room temperature the process is termed "natural aging", while a process that occurs when subjecting the metal alloy to elevated temperature is termed "artificial aging". Aging for a longer time than that corresponding to maximum strength or hardness at the particular temperature is termed "over-ageing".

Alloy

A composition of plural elements at least one of which is a free metal. Also includes material containing any combination of fibres, filaments, whiskers and particles, e.g. carbides, diamond, oxides, borides, nitrides or silicides, or other metal compounds, e.g. oxynitrides or sulfides, embedded in a metallic matrix.

Hardening

The increase in resistance to deformation.

Normalizing

A process of heating metallic material above its critical temperature and cooling in air thereby establishing a fine uniform grain size and improving the micro-structural uniformity.

Quenching

The rapid cooling of metallic material either from elevated temperature to room temperature or cooling of metal to sub-ambient temperature.

Tempering

Involves the heating of a previously quenched or normalized metallic material to an elevated temperature, and then cooling under suitable conditions to obtain the desired mechanical properties.

Synonyms and Keywords

The term "aging" (or "ageing") is also termed precipitation hardening or strengthening.

C22F 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus for mechanical working of metal

B21, B23, B24

C22F 1/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Adjusting the composition of the atmosphere

C21D 1/76

C23C - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Casting B22D, B29, e.g.

B22D 19/08, B22D 23/04

With a reactive gas

C23C 8/00

C23C 16/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Solid state diffusion

C23C 8/00-C23C 12/00

C23C 18/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Solid state diffusion

C23C 8/00-C23C 12/00

C23C 20/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Solid state diffusion

C23C 8/00-C23C 12/00

C23F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods, compositions and apparatus for etching of metallic materials by chemical means.

Regeneration of etching compositions, including apparatus for regenerating etching agents.

Methods, compositions and apparatus for chemical polishing (brightening) of metals.

Other non-mechanical processes for removing metallic material from surfaces, e.g. by plasma or sputter etching, and compositions therefor.

Simultaneous chemical and mechanical removal of metallic material from surfaces.

Inhibiting corrosion of metallic material by applying inhibitors to the surface in danger of corrosion.

Inhibiting corrosion of metallic material by adding inhibitors to the corrosive agent.

Inhibiting corrosion of metals by anodic or cathodic protection.

Other methods of preventing corrosion, e.g. by removing the corrosive agent from the medium or rendering it non corrosive by neutralizing it.

Inhibiting incrustation.

Corrosion and incrustation inhibitors per se.

Other apparatus for executing the methods mentioned above as far as they are specially adapted for treating metallic material.

Multi-step processes for surface treatment of metallic material involving at least one process provided for in class C23 and at least one process covered by subclass C21D or C22F or class C25.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Protective layers or coating compositions or methods of applying them are not classified in this subclass but in the appropriate places, e.g. B05, B44, C09D, C10M, C23C.

Mechanical devices or constructional features of particular articles for inhibiting incrustation are not classified in this subclass but in the appropriate places, e.g. in group F16L 58/00 for inhibiting incrustations in pipes or pipe fittings.

Articles characterised by being made of materials selected for their properties of resistance to corrosion or incrustation are not to be classified in this subclass but in the appropriate places for such articles, e.g. in group F01D 5/28 for turbine blades.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Working of metal by electro-erosion

B23H

De-surfacing by applying flames

B23K 7/00

Working metal by laser beam

B23K 26/00

Adding scale preventives or removers to water

C02F 5/00

Electrolytic etching or polishing

C25F
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Preventing formation of scale in cooking vessels

A47J 36/42

Producing decorative effects by removing surface-material, e.g. by engraving or by etching

B44C 1/22

Mechanical methods for preventing fouling in hull protection

B63B 59/04

Preventing incrustations during destructive distillation of carbonaceous materials

C10B 43/14

Inhibition or prevention of corrosion or incrustation during processing of hydrocarbons

C10G 7/10, C10G 9/16, C10G 75/02

Use of additives to fuels or fires for minimising corrosion or incrustation

C10L 10/04

Adding corrosion inhibitors to lubricants

C10M, C10N 30/12

Adding corrosion inhibitors to pickling solutions

C23G

Preventing incrustation in pipes

F16L 58/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Methods for preventing fouling

B08B 17/00

Manufacture of printing surfaces

B41C

Surface treatment of glass by etching

C03C 15/00, C03C 25/68

Etching of natural or artificial stone or ceramics

C04B 41/53, C04B 41/72, C04B 41/91

Polishing compositions

C09G

Etching, surface-brightening or pickling compositions in general

C09K 13/00

In situ inhibition of corrosion in boreholes or wells

E21B 41/02

Photomechanical reproduction

G03F

Discharge tubes with the provision for introducing objects or materials to be exposed to the discharge, e.g. for plasma treatment

H01J 37/00

Chemical or electrical treatment, e.g. etching, of semiconductor bodies

H01L 21/306

Manufacture of printed circuits

H05K

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Alloys

include:

metallic composite materials containing a substantial proportion of fibres or other somewhat larger particles;

ceramic compositions bonded by free metal, containing free metal bonded to carbides, diamond, oxides, borides, nitrides or silicides, e.g. cermets, or other metal compounds, e.g. oxynitrides or sulfides, other than as macroscopic reinforcing agents.

Applying corrosion inhibitors

Applying corrosion inhibitors to a metallic surface layer is not considered to be applying a protective coating.

Corrosion

Deterioration of a metallic material due to a change of valence state caused by reactions with its environment.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expression "encrustation" is sometimes used with the meaning " incrustation".

In patent documents the expression "chemical polishing" is often used with the meaning "brightening".

C23F 11/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Compositions for in situ inhibition of corrosion in boreholes or wells

C09K 8/54

Inhibiting or prevention of corrosion during processing of hydrocarbons

C10G 7/10, C10G 75/02

Use of additives to fuels or fires for minimising corrosion

C10L 10/04

Adding corrosion inhibitors to lubricants

C10M, C10N 30/12

Adding corrosion inhibitors to pickling solutions

C23G

Special rules of classification

In the range C23F 11/12-C23F 11/18, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, a compound is classified in the last appropriate place

C23F 17/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Coating for obtaining at least two superposed coatings by combinations of methods provided for in subclasses C23C and C25C or C25D

C23C 28/00

C25B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Electrolytic or electrophoretic processes for the production of inorganic compounds, non metals or organic compounds.

Cells or assemblies of cells and their constructions.

Electrodes, diaphragms.

Operating or servicing of cells.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

- Multi-step processes for surface treatment of metallic material involving at least one process provided for in class C23 and at least one process provided for in class C25 are classified in group C23F 17/00.

- Compounds of particular interest are also classified in the relevant classes, C01 (inorganic chemistry), C07 (organic chemistry) and C08 (organic macromolecular compounds).

- The electrolytic or electrophoretic purification of materials is classified according to the nature of the liquid in the relevant places, e.g. A01K 63/00, C02F 1/46, C25B 15/08, C25D 21/16, C25F 7/02.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Treatment of water, waste water, or sewage by electrochemical means, e.g. electrolysis electrodes therefor

C02F 1/46

Separation or purification of peptides, e.g. of proteins , by electrophoresis

C07K 1/26

Inhibiting corrosion of metals by anodic or cathodic protection

C23F 13/00

Single crystal growth

C30B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Making harmful compounds harmless by subjecting to electrochemical processes, electrodialysis

A62D 3/11

Gas separation, using electrochemical methods

B01D 53/32

Separation, other than separation of solids, by electrophoresis

B01D 57/02

Electrodialysis, electroosmosis

B01D 61/42

Catalysts

B01J

Processes employing the direct application of electric energy (i.e. electrochemical processes); Apparatus therefor

B01J 19/08

Separation of hydrogen or hydrogen containing gases from gaseous mixtures

C01B 3/50

Carbon masses

C01B 31/00, C04B 35/52

Electrochemical processes or apparatus for generating energy

H01M

Electrodes for fuel cells

H01M 4/86

Membranes and other details of fuel cells

H01M 8/02, H01M 8/10

Electrochemical sensors

G01N 27/26

Special rules of classification

Classification is made according to the last place priority.

C25B 9/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrical connections in general

H01R

C25B 15/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Controlling or regulating in general

G05

C25B 15/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Working of metal by the action of a high concentration of electric current

B23H

C25C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Production, recovery or refining of metals by electrolysis of solutions or melts, e.g. of aluminium with devices for feeding or crust breaking, electrolytes

Production, recovery or refining of metal powders or porous metal masses from solutions or melts

Constructional parts or assemblies of cells, i.e. electrodes, diaphragms

Operating or servicing of cells.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Multi-step processes for surface treatment of metallic material involving at least one process provided for in class C23 and at least one process provided for in class C25 are classified in group C23F 17/00

Compounds of particular interest are also classified in the relevant classes, C01 (inorganic chemistry), C07 (organic chemistry) and C08 (organic macromolecular compounds).

The electrolytic or electrophoretic purification of materials is classified according to the nature of the liquid in the relevant places, e.g. A01K 63/00, C02F 1/46, C25B 15/08, C25D 21/16, C25F 7/02

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Treatment of water, waste water, or sewage by electrochemical means, e.g. electrolysis electrodes therefor

C02F 1/46

Inhibiting corrosion of metals by anodic or cathodic protection

C23F 13/00

Single crystal growth

C30B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Catalysts comprising metals

B01J 21/00, B01J 23/00

Processes for preparing catalysts

B01J 37/00

Refining molten metal during a continuous casting process

B22D 11/116

General processes of refining metals

C22B 9/00

Multistep processes for surface treatment of metallic material

C23F 17/00

Electrodes, membranes for fuel cells

H01M 4/86, H01M 8/10

Special rules of classification

Classification is made according to the last place priority.

C25D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Electroforming products like tubes, wires, moulds, and electroforming done by electrophoresis.

Joining workpieces by electrolysis.

Electroplating baths, electrolytic baths from melts, ionic liquids, electroplating processes, pretreatment or after treatment of work-pieces and electroplating characterized by the article coated. , e.g. tubes, wires, mirrors, semiconductors

Electrolytic coating other than with metals.

Electrolytic coating by surface reaction, i.e.. forming conversion layers, e.g. anodisation, phosphatising.

Electrophoretic coating methods

Electrolytic or electrophoretic production of coating containing embedded materials, e.g. particles, whiskers, wires.

Apparatus for electrolytic coating of objects, e.g. electrodes, tanks, containers

Electrolytic coating plants.

Processes for servicing or operating cells for electrolyting coating., i.e. heating cooling, filtering, regeneration of process solutions

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Multi-step processes for surface treatment of metallic material involving at least one process provided for in class C23 and ate least one process provided for in class C25 are classified in C23F 17/00.

Coating for obtaining at least two superposed coatings by combination of methods provided for in subclasses C23C and C25D are classified in C23C 28/00.

The electrolytic or electrophoretic purification of materials is classified according to the nature of the liquid in the relevant places, e.g. A01K 63/00, C02F 1/46, C25B 15/08, C25D 21/16, C25F 7/02.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Laminating metals

B32B 15/00

Treatment of water, waste water, or sewage by electrochemical means, e.g. electrolysis

C02F 1/46

Inhibition of corrosion by anodic or cathodic protection

C23F 13/00

Compositions for electrophoretic coating, e.g. electrografting

C09D 5/44

Single crystal growth

C30B
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Metallising textiles

D06M 11/83

Decorating textiles by locally metallising

D06Q 1/04

Manufacturing printed circuits by metal deposition

H05K 3/18

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Lacquering

B44D

Apparatus for continuously conveying articles into bath

B65G 49/02

Electroless plating

C23C 18/00

Multi-step processes for surface treatment of metallic material

C23F 17/00

Electrolytic etching, polishing, brightening

C25F

Electrochemical methods of analysis

G01N 27/26

Synonyms and Keywords

anodic oxidation

anodisation, electrochemical conversion coating

C25D 11/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Lacquering

B44D

C25D 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus for continuously conveying articles into baths

B65G, B65G 49/00

C25D 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus for continuously conveying articles into baths

B65G, B65G 49/00

Electric devices, see the relevant places

H01B, H02G

C25D 21/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Controlling or regulating in general

G05

C25F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Electrolytic cleaning, degreasing, pickling, descaling, etching or polishing;

Electrolytic stripping of metallic layers or coatings;

Constructional parts, or assemblies therefor, of cells for electrolytic removal of material from objects, servicing or operating.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Multi-step processes for surface treatment of metallic material involving at least one process provided for in class C23 and at least one process provided for in class C25 are classified in C23F 17/00.

The electrolytic or electrophoretc purification of materials is classified according to the nature of the liquid in the relevant places, e.g. A01K 63/00, C02F 1/46, C25B 15/08, C25D 21/16, C25F 7/02.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Treatment of water, waste water or sewage by electrochemical means, e.g. electrolysis

C02F 1/46

Inhibiting corrosion of metals by anodic or cathodic protection

C23F 13/00

Constructional parts, or assemblies thereof, of cells for both electrolytic coating and electrolytic removal

C25D 17/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Processes specially adapted fro treatment of semiconductors or solid state devices, e.g. electrolytic etching

H01L 21/306, H01L 21/465

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrochemical machining combined with mechanical working or electrolytic grinding (by the action of a high concentration of electric current)

B23H

Lapping machines using both abrasive substances and the application of electrical current

B24B 37/00

Multistep processes for surface treatment of metallic material

C23F 17/00

Electrochemical methods of analysis

G01N 27/26

Special rules of classification

Classification is made according to the last place priority rule.

C30B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Single crystals or homogeneous polycrystalline material with a defined structure; production thereof. Included in this subclass are processes and apparatus drawn to:

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Formation of diamonds using ultra-high pressure

B01J 3/06

Zone-refining of metals or alloys

C22B

Casting of metals, casting of other substances by the same processes or devices

B22D

Modifying the physical structure of metals or alloys

C21D, C22F

Production of semiconductor devices or parts thereof; semiconductor devices characterized by their crystalline structure or particular orientation of the crystalline planes

H01L
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Separation by crystallisation in general

B01D 9/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Separation by crystallisation in general

B01D 9/00

Grinding, polishing of crystals

B24B

Cleaving of stone or stone-like materials, e.g., brick, concrete, not provided for elsewhere

B28D 1/32

Mechanical fine working of gems, jewels, crystals

B28D 5/00

Coating by vacuum evaporation, by sputtering or by ion implantation of the coating material

C23C 14/00

Chemical coating by decomposition of gaseous compounds, without leaving reaction products of surface material in the coating

C23C 16/00

Investigating or analysing biological crystals

G01N 33/48

Photonic crystals

G02B, G02F

Special rules of classification

The preparation of single crystals or a homogeneous polycrystalline material with defined structure of particular materials or shapes is classified in the group for the process as well as in group C30B 29/00.

An apparatus specially adapted for a specific process in classified in the appropriate group for the process. Apparatus to be used in more than one kind of process is classified in group C30B 35/00.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Amorphous

Description of a solid material not having long-range crystalline lattice structure.

Crystal

Description of a solid material having long-range order of atoms or molecules arranged in a regularly-repeating lattice structure.

Defined structure

The structure of a solid material with grains which are oriented in a preferential way or have larger dimensions than normally obtained.

Epitaxy

The formation of a crystalline layer on a substrate in such a manner that the formed crystal bears a definite crystallographic relationship to the substrate.

Eutectic

Description of a mixture or solution containing two or more phases at a composition that has the lowest melting point and where the phases simultaneously crystallize from solution at this temperature.

Homogeneous polycrystalline material

A solid material with crystal particles, all of which have the same chemical composition.

Lattice

An ordered arrangement of atoms or molecules within a solid material.

Oriented crystal

A polycrystalline structure in which the grains are generally aligned in a preferential direction such as obtained in columnar growth.

Seed

A material, usually itself a small single-crystal, upon which a single-crystal is grown, the seeded crystal growth proceeding by the alignment of atoms or molecules or clusters into a thermodynamically favored arrangement determined by the nature of the seed.

Single-crystal

Description of a solid material having long-range order of atoms or molecules in a regularly-repeating lattice structure. Also includes twin crystals and a predominantly single crystalproduct.

Superlattice

A single-crystal having an internal structure of more than two layers, each layer having a composition different from the next adjacent layer.

Twin crystal

A crystalline material in which the adjoining crystalline lattices have a mirror-image symmetrical relationship, the interface between the adjoining crystals being termed the twin plane.

Zone melting

Description of a process in which a crystallized body is formed by melting a zone of a starting material with subsequent cooling and crystallisation while either the zone or the starting product is displaced so that all or part of the starting material is converted into the crystallized body.

Synonyms and Keywords

The term "grains" is used to describe crystalline regions in a solid material, each grain generally being a single crystalline region. The terms "whiskers" and "needles" are also descriptive of discrete solid crystalline particles of generally elongated shape.

C30B 13/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Induction coils

H05B 6/36

C30B 13/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Controlling or regulating in general

G05

C30B 29/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Alloys

C22C

C30B 31/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Controlling or regulating in general

G05

C30B 33/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Grinding, polishing

B24

Mechanical fine working of gems, jewels, crystals

B28D 5/00

C40B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods of making libraries, e.g. combinatorial synthesis;

In silico or virtual conception of libraries; in silico or virtual libraries;

Chemical or biological libraries and modifications thereof, i.e. chemically, biologically or physically modified;

Methods of screening libraries or subsets thereof for a desired activity or property, e.g. binding ability;

Methods specially adapted for identifying the exact nature, e.g. chemical structure of a particular library member;

Apparatus specially adapted for use in combinatorial chemistry or library technology to identifylibrary members, to screen libraries or to synthesize libraries; integrated apparatus specially adapted for performing any combination of these three tasks;

Tags or linkers specially adapted for use in combinatorial chemistry or library technology;

Other process or products specially adapted for combinatorial chemistry or libraries.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Individual library members are classified in the appropriate places elsewhere in the IPC, e.g. in Section C, according to established procedure (see paragraphs 100 and 101 of the Guide). Subject matter that has a wider utility and may also be used outside combinatorial chemistry, e.g. solid supports and linkers of general utility in solid phase synthesis, general reagents, is classified in the appropriate places elsewhere in the IPC, e.g. Section C.

Methods or apparatus covered by this subclass are also classified for their biological, chemical, physical or other features in the appropriate places in the IPC, if such features are of interest, e.g.

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, at each level of indentation, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the first appropriate place.

When classifying in this subclass, additional classifications are made for subject matter which is considered invention information or is considered of interest for search purposes.

Unless otherwise stated, in silico or virtual libraries are classified in main-group C40B 40/00 (or its subgroups) as if they were physically existing entities.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Array

Set of compounds maintained in a specified spatial distribution e.g. in the wells of a 96-well plate, in pins held in a rack or at the tip of optical fibers arranged in a bunch.

Biochemical method

Process involving the use of microorganisms, enzymes, vectors or antibodies.

Chemical Evolution Process

Process using in vitro selection systems that evolve to enrich mixtures of chemical compounds in those components having selected properties. The terminology "directed molecular evolution" is commonly employed when the process is applied to mixtures of macromolecules (e.g. RNA aptamers). Selected compounds are then amplified ("copied") using biochemical methods (e.g. enzymatic reverse transcription of RNA aptamers to DNA, PCR amplification and finally retranscription to RNA); This concept has been adapted to organic chemistry and opened a new branch of combinatorial chemistry named "dynamic combinatorial chemistry" wherein the enrichment in the (usually low-molecular weight) compounds having a selected property results from the equilibration process that carries out a preferential destruction and recycling of unselected compounds.

Coding/encoding

Strategy whereby a surrogate analyte is associated with each member of a library in order to record its structure and/or the reaction sequence used for its preparation. This is usually achieved by the use of tags/labels attached to the particles of solid support on which the library members are assembled.

Combinatorial library

A set of compounds (a library) prepared by combinatorial synthesis. May consist of a collection of pools or sub-libraries.

Combinatorial synthesis

Combinatorial synthesis is the preparation of sets of diverse entities by the combination of sets of chemical building blocks, e.g. reagents.

Contained in

A library contained in a microorganism, a cell or a vector is a library the members of which are present in the respective biochemical, e.g. in a plasmid.

Decoding

Method enabling the determination of the structure of a library member and/or the reaction sequence leading to its preparation, consisting in "reading" (e.g. determining the structure of) a surrogate analyte (code, tag, label) associated with said library-member.

Deconvolution

Process consisting of fractionating (normally by resynthesis, or by elaborating a partial library) a pool with some level of the desired activity to give a set of smaller pools. See also iterative deconvolution.

Directed Molecular Evolution

Directed Molecular Evolution is a process for enriching a library in members having a property or activity of interest. It involves cycles of taking a library, subjecting it to a screen to select for the desired property or activity, amplifying the "hits" to provide the starting library for the subsequent cycle.

"Mutations" may be introduced at the amplification stage in order to increase the diversity of the library. This subject matter involves aspects of creating and screening libraries.

Displayed by

A library displayed by a microorganism is a library present at the surface of such a microorganism, e.g. of a bacteria. See for example Nature Biotechnology (1997), 15, pages 29-34: "Display of heterologous proteins on the surface of microorganisms: from the screening of combinatorial libraries to live recombinant vaccines.

Dynamic Library

Collection of compounds (in solution) in dynamic equilibrium (i.e. constantly changing). If the composition of the library is altered by the presence of a target which selectively binds certain library members, then shifting of the equilibrium will lead to an increase in the amount of those components which bind to the target with relatively high affinity. A dynamic library contains all the potentially possible combinations of the components undergoing dynamic random connection, whether these combinations are or are not actually present in the conditions used. It is a virtual library. A real entity is generated in the presence of the target.

Fluorous Synthesis

Approach for solution phase synthesis which takes advantage of the ability of highly fluorinated groups to partition out of aqueous and most organic solutions into a third phase consisting in a fluorinated solvent. The fluorinated side chain can act as a soluble support for synthesis.

Identifying

Determining the exact nature, e.g. chemical structure or sequence listing, of a particular library member or of a particular subset of library members.

In silico library

A library which has no physical existence, being constructed solely in electronic form or on paper. It is one type of virtual library. The building blocks required for such a library may not exist, and the chemical steps for creating such a library may not have been tested. These libraries are used in the design and evaluation of possible libraries.

"Integrated" apparatus

Apparatus specifically designed for performing at least two different operations, e.g. synthesis and screening.

Iterative deconvolution

Method for the identification of active library members consisting in repeating the deconvolution strategy a certain number of times. Usually the initial library is divided into non-overlapping subsets. The subsets are tested (screened) separately, and the one with the greatest activity is identified. This subset is re-synthesized as a collection of simpler subsets which are tested for activity. The process is repeated until a unique library-member with (ideally) a high level of activity is identified.

Library

A library is a created collection of a plurality of compounds, microorganisms or other substances. The collection is useful as a test vehicle for determining which of its members or its subsets of members possess activities or properties of interest. A library might for example exist as:

a solution

a physical admixture

an ordered or unordered array

a plurality of members present on a support and affixed thereto, e.g. by chemical bonding, by physical attractive forces or by coating.

Liquid-phase synthesis

In the context of C40B, this wording covers both solution phase syntheses (i.e. reactions involving only one liquid phase) as well as syntheses in multiple liquid phase systems (i.e. involving more than one liquid phase). The latter concern for instance syntheses performed on a liquid macromolecular compound such as PEG (polyethylene glycol), on dendrimers, or wherein a fluorocarbon phase is present in the system (fluorous synthesis).

Microorganisms

bacteria, actinomycetales, fungi (e.g. yeast), virus, human, animal, or plant cells, tissues, protozoa or unicellular algae.

Particular attachment method

Specific method of attachment focusing on the way molecules are bound to the solid or liquid support, e.g. by means of electrostatic interactions, formation of covalent bonds by cycloaddition reactions or by irradiation.

Resin capture

Method consisting in contacting the reaction medium with a solid support after a reaction performed in solution, in order to attach the reaction product to the resin and thus collect it easily.

Safety-Catch Linker

A linker which is cleaved by performing two different reactions instead of only one, thus providing greater control over the timing of compound release. In practice, the resin is "activated" before the actual cleavage takes place (e.g. cleavage by nucleophilic displacement of a previously alkylated sulfonamide resin).

Screening

Determining whether a library contains a member or members which have a particular property or activity of interest.

Solid-phase synthesis

Synthetic process wherein the reactions are performed on a solid support, usually in the presence of a solvent, i.e. wherein one or more library building blocks are bound to a solid support (e.g. polymer, resin, glass beads) during library creation.

Solid support

Insoluble, functionalized, polymeric material to which library members or other reagents may be attached (often via a linker) allowing library members to be readily separated (by filtration, centrifugation, etc.) from excess reagents, soluble reaction by-products or solvents.

Solution-phase synthesis

Synthesis performed in solution, i.e. wherein the reactants and reagents are all soluble in the reaction medium (irrespective of the fact that, for instance, a supported catalyst is used during the reaction). It is also called "synthesis in solution".

Traceless Linker

Linker which does not leave any residue on the cleaved compound, i.e. which is replaced by a hydrogen atom.

Virtual library

A library which has no physical existence. This terminology encompasses two different types of libraries: in silico libraries and dynamic libraries.

D01B - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Plant

Any of a kingdom (Plantae) of multicellular eukaryotic mostly photosynthetic organisms typically lacking locomotive movement or obvious nervous or sensory organs and possessing cellulose cell walls.

D01H - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Finishing or dressing of filaments, yarns, threads, cords, ropes, or the like

D02J

D01H 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Drafting arrangements

D01H 5/00

Twisting arrangements

D01H 7/00

D01H 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Drafting arrangements

D01H 5/00

Twisting arrangements

D01H 7/00

D01H 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Drafting arrangements

D01H 5/00

Twisting arrangements

D01H 7/00

D01H 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Drafting arrangements

D01H 5/00

Twisting arrangements

D01H 7/00

D01H 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Drafting arrangements

D01H 5/00

Twisting arrangements

D01H 7/00

D04H - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Non-woven fabrics formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres;

Non-woven fabrics formed wholly or mainly of yarns or like filamentary material of substantial length;

Non-woven fabrics formed of mixtures of relatively-short fibres and yarns or like filamentary material of substantial length;

Non-woven pile fabrics;

Other non-woven fabrics;

Felting apparatus;

Needling machines.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Some of the non-woven fabrics can also be regarded as "layered products" within the meaning of subclass B32B, and further classification in that subclass should be considered in accordance with the notes thereto.

In cases where the making of non-woven fabrics involves the use of particular chemical compounds or compositions, e.g. for treating or bonding fibres, filaments, or yarns, further classification in other appropriate subclasses should also be considered.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Non-woven fabrics having an intermediate or external layer of a different kind, e.g. of woven fabric

B32B
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Filtering material for liquid or gaseous fluids

B01D 39/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Formation of filaments, threads, or the like

D01D 5/00

Carding

D01G

Lap-forming devices

D01G 25/00

Curling or crimpling of fibres, filaments, or yarns

D02G 1/00

Weaving

D03

Knitting

D04B

Braiding

D04C

Net-making

D04G

Sewing

D05B

Tufting

D05C

Finishing non-woven fabrics

D06

Paper web-making by wet methods

D21F, D21H

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Non-woven fabrics

Fabrics formed wholly or partly of textile material by processes comprising operations other than the weaving, knitting, braiding, lacing, or knotting of yarns, threads, or filaments for which provision is made in other subclasses of section D. This expression includes felts, cotton-wool and wadding.

Composite fibres

Conjugated fibres that are manufactured by composite spinning of two or more kinds of immiscible resins, of which the resins form such phase structures as side-by-side, sheath-core, sea-island, wood grain pattern, multi-layered, radial or mosaic in the cross section surface vertical to the fibre axis.

Mixed fibres

Mixture of two or more kinds of fibres made of different substances.

Fleece

Fabric composed of a foundation layer with a thick, soft nap or pile, in which any type of fabric, including a knit or a woven fabric, can be incorporated as a foundation layer. A fleece should be treated as a single layer, not as a layered product.

Pile

Upright loop or nap raised from the surface of fabrics.

D04H 1/02 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Wadding

A heap of voluminous and low-density fibre for use as fillers in furniture or quilting.

D04H 1/32 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Synthetic pulp

Synthetic pulp typically comprised of a thermoplastic polymer such as polyolefins or some polyamides and having a structure resembling wood pulp. That is, the synthetic pulp has a micro-fibrillar structure comprised of micro-fibrils exhibiting a high surface area as contrasted with the smooth, rod-like morphology of synthetic short staple fibers. For example, see WO2006/124426 A1 (page 9, lines 1 through 20).

D04H 1/407 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Absorbing substances

Absorbing substances cover water-absorbing agents such as water-absorbing polymer, deodorant or humidity absorbing agents such as activated carbon.

D04H 1/413 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Granules

Granules cover, for example, those having antibiotic properties or granular substances with flame retardant properties.

D04H 1/4242 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Carbon fibres

Carbon fibres are a kind of inorganic fibre. Polyacrylonitrile (PAN) -based, pitch-based or rayon-based Carbon fibers are included.

D04H 1/4274 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Non-woven fabrics which are composed of the fibres obtained and reused by cutting or fibreizing wastes or garnets, and which are also included in the scope of the upper group, namely, formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres and formed from fleeces or layers composed of fibres without existing or potential cohesive properties insofar as this use has no preponderant influence on the consolidation of the fleece.

D04H 1/4374 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Non-woven fabrics which are composed of mixture of different kind of webs, including multi-layered non-woven fabrics in which layers are made continuously and each layer is composed of different kind of fibres, and which are also included in the scope of the upper group, namely, formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres and formed from fleeces or layers composed of fibres without existing or potential cohesive properties insofar as this use has no preponderant influence on the consolidation of the fleece.

D04H 1/4391 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Non-woven fabrics characterized by the shape of used fibres, for example, modified cross-section fibres or crimped fibres on which specific crimps are given, and which are also included in the scope of the upper group, namely, formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres and formed from fleeces or layers composed of fibres without existing or potential cohesive properties insofar as this use has no preponderant influence on the consolidation of the fleece.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Characterised by the shape of yarns or filaments

D04H 3/018

D04H 1/498 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Multi-layered non-woven fabrics which are entangled by needling or like operations, and which are also included in the scope of the upper group, namely, formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres and formed from fleeces or layers composed of fibres without existing or potential cohesive properties. Example is shown below.

D04H0001498000

D04H 1/559 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Multi-layered non-woven fabrics using bonding fibres in which layers are made continuously, and which are also included in the scope of the upper group, namely, formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres and formed from fleeces or layers composed of fibres without existing or potential cohesive properties.

D04H 1/593 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Multi-layered non-woven fabrics using chemical or thermoplastic bonding agents in which layers are made continuously, and which are also included in the scope of the upper group, namely, formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres and formed from fleeces or layers composed of fibres without existing or potential cohesive properties. Example is shown below.

D04H0001593000

D04H 1/70 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Characterised by the method of forming fleeces or layers, e.g. reorientation of yarns or filaments

D04H 3/02

D04H 1/76 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Characterised by the method of forming fleeces or layers, e.g. reorientation of yarns or filaments, otherwise than in a plane

D04H 3/07

D04H 3/018 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Non-woven fabrics characterized by the shape of used yarns or like filamentary material, for example, modified cross-section yarns or like filamentary material or crimped yarns or like filamentary material on which specific crimps are given, and which are also included in the scope of the upper group, namely, formed wholly or mainly of yarns or like filamentary material of substantial length.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Characterised by the shape of fibres

D04H 1/4391

D04H 3/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Characterised by the method of forming fleeces or layers, e.g. reorientation of fibres

D04H 1/70

D04H 3/033 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Non-woven fabrics to which the means for changing the orientation of yarns or like filamentary material are given after the formation of yarns or like filamentary material, and which are also included in the scope of the upper group, namely, formed wholly or mainly of yarns or like filamentary material of substantial length.

D04H 3/07 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Characterised by the method of forming fleeces or layers, e.g. reorientation of fibres, otherwise than in a plane

D04H 1/76

D04H 3/105 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Needling machines

D04H 18/00

D04H 5/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Needling machines

D04H 18/00

D06F 61/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Smoothing by cold rolling

D06F 45/00

D06F 63/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Smoothing by cold rolling

D06F 45/00

D06F 65/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Smoothing by cold rolling

D06F 45/00

D06F 67/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Smoothing by cold rolling

D06F 45/00

D06F 69/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Smoothing by cold rolling

D06F 45/00

D06F 71/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Smoothing by cold rolling

D06F 45/00

D06F 73/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Smoothing by cold rolling

D06F 45/00

D06F 75/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Smoothing by cold rolling

D06F 45/00

D06F 77/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Smoothing by cold rolling

D06F 45/00

D06F 79/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Smoothing by cold rolling

D06F 45/00

D06F 81/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Smoothing by cold rolling

D06F 45/00

D06F 83/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Smoothing by cold rolling

D06F 45/00

D06F 85/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Smoothing by cold rolling

D06F 45/00

D21C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Pretreatment of the finely-divided materials before digesting, e.g. with water, acid reacting compounds, alkaline reacting compounds, oxygen-generating compounds and physical methods for facilitating impregnation.

Pulpingcellulose-containing materials; e.g. sulfate processes, other features of pulping processes.

Other processes for obtaining cellulose, e.g. cooking cotton linters; working-up other than mechanical of waste-paper.

Digesters.

After-treatment of cellulosepulp, e.g. of wood pulp, or cotton linters; e.g. washing, removal of fats, resins, pitch, or waxes, bleaching, de-watering other than in general.

Regeneration of pulp liquors, e.g. treatment of pulp gases, recovery of the heat content of the gases, deodorisation, concentrating spent liquor by evaporation other than evaporating and distillation, combustion of pulp liquors.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

D21B covers fibrous raw materials or their mechanical treatment;

D21D covers treatment of the materials before passing to the paper-making machine;

D21F covers paper-making machines and methods of producing paper thereon;

D21H covers pulp compositions;

C08B covers polysaccharides and derivates thereof;

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Mechanical treatment of waste paper by dry methods

D21B 1/08

Mechanical treatment of waste paper by wet methods, by the use of steam or other means

D21B 1/32
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a large system:

Evaporating

B01D 1/00

Distillation

B01D 3/00

Drying solid materials or objects by removing liquid therefrom

F26B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cellulose as gelling or thickening agents in food

A23L 1/0534

Filtration material of cellulose

B01D 39/18

Semi-permeable membrane of cellulose

B01D 71/10

Moulding material of cellulose

B29K 1/00

Treatment of water, waste water, sewage or sludge to be treated from the paper or cellulose industry

C02F 103/28

Use of cellulosic materials as fillers for mortars, concrete or artificial stone

C04B 16/02

Compositions of mortars, concrete or artificial stone, containing only organic binders, e.g., cellulosic waste liquor

C04B 26/24

Peptides immobilised on cellulose

C07K 17/12

Lignin; Modified lignin; High-molecular-weight products derived therefrom

C08H 7/00

Macromolecular compounds derived from lignocellulosic materials

C08H 8/00

Compositions of cellulose, modified cellulose, or cellulose derivatives

C08L 1/00

Coating compositions based on cellulose

C09D 101/00

Obtaining, purification or chemical modification of natural resins

C09F 1/00

Destructive distillation of cellulose-containing material

C10B 53/02

Production of fats or fatty oils

C11B 1/00

Processes using or culture media containing cellulose or hydrolysates thereof

C12N 1/22

Processes using or culture media containing waste sulfite liquor

C12N 1/24

Ethanol produced as by- product or from waste or cellulosic material substrate

C12P 7/06

Glucose by saccharification of cellulosic material

C13K 1/02

Obtain filaments or fibers for spinning

D01C

Monocomponent artificial filaments of cellulose or cellulose derivatives

D01F 1/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

bagasse

fibre remaining after the extraction of the sugar-bearing juice from sugarcane

Cellulose

structural component of the primary cell wall of green plants. It is an organic compound with the formula (C6H10O5)n and is the major constituent of paper, paper-board, and card stock and of textiles made from cotton, linen, and other plant fibres.

linings

material that covers the inner surface of something.

cotton linters

fine, silky fibres which adhere to the seeds of the cotton plant after ginning and are traditionally used in the manufacture of paper and as a raw material in the manufacture of cellulose.

pulp

lignocellulosic fibrous material prepared by chemically or mechanically separating cellulose fibres from wood, fibre crops or waste paper.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following terms "pulp", "wood pulp", "pulpwood" and "bagasse" are often used as synonyms. Also, these terms can be used as keywords.

D21C 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Obtaining fibres for spinning

D01C

D21F 1/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Production of wire-cloths

B21F

D21F 1/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Suction rolls

D21F 3/10

D21F 1/68 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hydrocyclones

B04C

D21H 11/12 - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Plant

Any of a kingdom (Plantae) of multicellular eukaryotic mostly photosynthetic organisms typically lacking locomotive movement or obvious nervous or sensory organs and possessing cellulose cell walls.

E01C - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Constructing the road bed

E02D, E02F

E01D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Spanning structures (e.g. railway bridges) for allowing traffic (e.g. pedestrians, automobiles, trains) to travel across naturally occurring obstructions (e.g. gorges, bodies of water) or over man-made obstacles (e.g. roads, canals). Each spanning structure including obstruction or obstacle traversing structure that provides a passageway for traffic and links or is held up by:

Spanning structures used for purposes other than carrying traffic (e.g. aqueducts) that are structurally similar to spanning structures for traffic and traverse the same types of obstructions and obstacles.

Specially adapted components for use in spanning structures (e.g. suspension cable clamps).

Accessories or ancillary devices specially adapted for use with spanning structures (e.g. drawbridge gates that are actuated when the span moves).

Methods specially adapted for constructing spanning structures (e.g. specially adapted bridge erecting or assembling techniques).

Methods specially adapted for restoring damaged (e.g. replacing dilapidated decking) or structurally augmenting (e.g. strengthening existing component to allow increased traffic load) existing spanning structures.

Methods specially adapted for demolishing or dismantling spanning structures.

Apparatus specially adapted for constructing, restoring, augmenting, or demolishing spanning structures.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Highways or trackways for toys that may include bridges

A63H 18/00

Model railway bridges

A63H 19/34

Arrangement of ship-based onboard ramps or gangways

B63B 27/14

Bridges extending between terminal buildings and aircraft for embarking or disembarking passengers

B64F 1/305

Loading ramps

B65G 69/28

Supports that may include structure for spanning a road and supporting electric lines or communication cable going to overhead road signs or traffic signals

E01F 9/011

Floating tunnels or submerged bridge-like tunnels

E02D 29/067

Laying or reclaiming pipes; Repairing or joining pipes on or under water

F16L 1/00

Supports for pipes, cables or protective tubing

F16L 3/00

Floating power or information cables

H01B 7/12

Overhead installations of electric lines or cables

H02G 7/00

Installations of electric cables or lines in or on the ground or water

H02G 9/00

Installations of electric cables or lines in or upon bodies of water that are supported by floats

H02G 9/12

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Constructions in general and structures which are not restricted to walls

E04B 1/00

Wrecking of buildings in general

E04G 23/08

Towers, masts, poles and methods of erecting such structures

E04H 12/00

Flexible rubber or plastic pipes that are buoyant

F16L 11/133

Pipeline systems for gases, liquids, or viscous products

F17D 1/00

Demolition of tall structures

F42D 3/02

E03C 1/266 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Disintegrating apparatus in general

B02C

E04B - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Layered materials, layered products in general

B32B

E04C - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Layered materials, layered products in general

B32B

E04D - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Layered materials, layered products in general

B32B

E04F - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Layered materials, layered products in general

B32B

E04G - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Layered materials, layered products in general

B32B

Forms or shutterings forming part of the construction

E04B, E04C

E04G 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Scaffolding in general

E04G 1/00

E04G 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Scaffolding in general

E04G 1/00

E04G 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Scaffolding in general

E04G 1/00

E04G 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Scaffolding in general

E04G 1/00

E04G 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Scaffolding in general

E04G 1/00

E04G 19/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Scaffolding in general

E04G 1/00

E04H - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Layered materials, layered products in general

B32B

E05B - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Locking doors simultaneously in passenger vehicles

E05B 65/36

E05B 55/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For passenger doors

E05B 65/20

E05B 57/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For passenger doors

E05B 65/20

E05B 59/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For passenger doors

E05B 65/20

E05B 61/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For passenger doors

E05B 65/20

E05C 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hasps

E05C 19/08

Hook fastenings

E05C 19/10

E05C 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hasps

E05C 19/08

Hook fastenings

E05C 19/10

E05C 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hasps

E05C 19/08

Hook fastenings

E05C 19/10

E05F - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For safeguarding bank teller windows

E05G 5/00

For interconnected louvres

E06B 7/086

For blinds or roll-type closures

E06B 9/00

E21B 47/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Processes or apparatus for collecting data about drilled or lined boreholes.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Monitoring pressure or flow of drilling fluid

E21B 21/08

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Geophysical logging

G01V

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Borehole

An unlined shaft drilled into the ground, typically for the purposes of extracting water, crude oil or natural gas this is often referred to as the wellbore.

E21B 47/001 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for monitoring boreholes or wells located under water, e.g. under the sea.

E21B 47/002 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus using images obtained by electrical, optical, acoustical or other methods, e.g. using a camera for observation.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Photographing internal surfaces, e.g. of pipes

G03B 37/00

Closed circuit television systems

H04N 7/18

E21B 47/003 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Measuring depth of borehole or well

E21B 47/04

Measuring diameter of borehole or well

E21B 47/08

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring volumes in general

G01F

E21B 47/005 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for tracking or examining the extent or integrity of the plugging or consolidating material.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring temperature at borehole or well

E21B 47/07

E21B 47/007 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for determining the tensile or compressive force per cross-sectional area acting upon a pipe string or casing.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Locating blocked portions of pipes

E21B 47/09

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring stress in general

G01L

E21B 47/008 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for collecting data about borehole equipment for lifting fluids to the surface, e.g. for the detection of the condition wherein the well fluid production rate is lower than the rate at which the pump withdraws fluid from the borehole.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Control of pumps

F04D 15/00, F04D 27/00

E21B 47/009 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Controls or safety measures for pumps

F04B 49/00

E21B 47/01 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for mounting a data collection instrument upon a boring tool, boring tool string or cable-carried tool; Devices for shielding down-hole data collection instruments from damage.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Flexible centering means

E21B 17/10

Setting or locking tools in boreholes or wells

E21B 23/00

E21B 47/013 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices modified to mount a data collection instrument upon a boring tool.

E21B 47/017 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for shielding the data collection device against thermal effect, vibration, pressure, debris or the like.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cooling or insulating arrangements for boreholes or wells

E21B 36/00

E21B 47/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for Measuring the inclination or orientation of boreholes or wells.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Clinometers or direction meters in general

G01C

E21B 47/022 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for finding the slant or the path of the borehole utilizing, the Earth’s magnetic field.

E21B 47/0224 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for finding the slant or path of the borehole using a shockwave that propagates through the planet or waves that transmit sound.

E21B 47/0228 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for finding the slant or path of the borehole or well by using electromagnetic energy.

E21B 47/0232 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for finding the slant or path of the borehole or well where the source of electromagnetic energy or sensor is on or over the planet’s surface.

E21B 47/0236 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for finding the slant or path of a borehole or well using a body suspended from a fixed point so as to swing freely under the action of gravity, with the body having an indicator to show slant.

E21B 47/024 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for measuring the inclination or orientation of down-hole tools.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

E21B 47/022 takes precedence.

E21B 47/026 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for measuring the inclination (i.e. dip) or orientation (i.e. strike) of a drilled stratum, e.g. by using a specially adapted compass (e.g. a Brunton compass).

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus for obtaining oriented cores

E21B 25/16

Formation testing

E21B 49/00

E21B 47/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring depth in general

G01B

Measuring liquid level in general

G01F

E21B 47/047 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

E21B 47/053 takes precedence.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring temperature in general

G01K

Measuring pressure in general

G01L

E21B 47/07 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Using thermal measurements for locating fluid leaks, intrusions, or movements of borehole fluids

E21B 47/103

E21B 47/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring diameter in general

G01B

E21B 47/09 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring depth at borehole or well

E21B 47/04

Measuring borehole or well diameter

E21B 47/08

E21B 47/092 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for determining the whereabouts or position of objects in a borehole or well using magnetic attraction/repulsion force irregularities.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Investigating materials by investigating magnetic variables

G01N 27/72

E21B 47/095 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for determining the whereabouts or position of objects in a borehole or well by measuring distortion or blurring of a sonic signal.

E21B 47/098 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for determining the whereabouts or position of objects in a borehole or well by taking a physical imprints of the objects to allow analysis of depressions or apertures.

E21B 47/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for determining if the pipes are sufficiently fluid-tight to prevent leakage or ingress of liquid or gas;

Processes or apparatus for detecting unwanted fluids flowing from the formation into the borehole;

Processes or apparatus for detecting the presence and properties of production fluids in the borehole.

Processes or apparatus for determining well debit or flow rate.

E21B 47/103 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring borehole or pipe temperature

E21B 47/06

E21B 47/107 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus including measuring sound waves.

E21B 47/11 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Using detectable material (e.g. dye inert gas, halocarbons, carbon dioxide, radioactive isotopes) or radioactivity (e.g. natural gamma radiation) to locate fluid leaks, intrusions or movements in the borehole/well

E21B 47/113 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus using measurement of electric parameters such as electrical resistance or voltage drop or measuring of electrical parameters e.g. voltage drop or utilizing measurements of the infrared, visible or ultraviolet part of the spectrum of electromagnetic radiation.

E21B 47/117 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Investigating fluid-tightness of structures by using fluid or vacuum

G01M 3/02

E21B 47/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus in which an information or control signal is sent to or from equipment located in the borehole over an information transmission link, for the purpose of measuring while boring.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Remote signaling in general

G08C

E21B 47/125 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus in which the transmission link is through the ground.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

E21B 47/13 takes precedence.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Magnetic or electric prospecting

G01V 3/00

Electronic transmission systems in which the earth is the medium

H04B 13/02

E21B 47/13 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Magnetic or electric prospecting

G01V 3/00

Electronic transmission in general

H04B

E21B 47/135 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Light guides, e.g. optical fibres

G02B 6/00

Optical transmission in general

H04B 10/00

E21B 47/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus wherein the measuring signal is transmitted via a tubular conduit in the borehole.

E21B 47/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus wherein the measuring signal is transmitted through the liquid or gas in the borehole e.g. drilling mud, fracturing fluid, production fluid.

E21B 47/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus wherein there is selective interruption of the flow of mud through the drill string causing a continuous wave to be generated which may be modulated in amplitude, frequency or phase.

E21B 47/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus wherein a valve is used which releases mud from the drill pipe to the annulus, using a pressure-releasing flow regulator.

E21B 47/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus including a valve that interrupts or limits flow within the drill pipe using a circulation limiting regulator.

E21B 47/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Recording in connection with measuring in general

G01D

Recording seismic data

G01V 1/24

Recording data of measuring magnetic field characteristic of the earth

G01V 3/36

Information storage in general

G11

E21C - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Methods or apparatus for obtaining oil, gas, water, soluble or meltable materials or a slurry of minerals from well

E21B 43/00

E21D - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pressure galleries, galleries specially adapted to house pressure water conduits

E02B 9/06

Sewers

E03F

F01L 1/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Valve-gear specially for steam engines or specially for other machines or engines with variable fluid distribution

F01L 15/00-F01L 35/00

F01L 3/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Valve-gear specially for steam engines or specially for other machines or engines with variable fluid distribution

F01L 15/00-F01L 35/00

F01L 5/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Valve-gear specially for steam engines or specially for other machines or engines with variable fluid distribution

F01L 15/00-F01L 35/00

F01L 7/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Valve-gear specially for steam engines or specially for other machines or engines with variable fluid distribution

F01L 15/00-F01L 35/00

F01L 9/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Valve-gear specially for steam engines or specially for other machines or engines with variable fluid distribution

F01L 15/00-F01L 35/00

F01L 11/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Valve-gear specially for steam engines or specially for other machines or engines with variable fluid distribution

F01L 15/00-F01L 35/00

F01L 13/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Valve-gear specially for steam engines or specially for other machines or engines with variable fluid distribution

F01L 15/00-F01L 35/00

F01M - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Lubrication of machines or engines in general, where the lubrication system, or device for lubricating parts of the machine or engine, does not form part of the structure of the machine or engine.

Pressure lubrication, e.g. using pressure from pumps, crankcase pressure or the like to circulate the lubricant; including provision of lubricant passageways in crankshafts or conecting rods.

Lubrication specially adapted for engines with crankcase compression of fuel/air mixtures, or for engines in which lubricant is contained in fuel, combustion air or fuel/air mixture (e.g. two-stroke engines).

Heating, cooling or controlling temperature of lubricant.

Lubrication means facititating engine starting, e.g. by conditioning or heating the lubricant.

Lubrication means specially adapted for facilitating the running-in or breaking-in of machines or engines.

Lubricating means having other significant or pertinent characteristics, e.g. introducing additives to lubricant, using fuel as lubricant, dip, splash or drip lubrication, non-pressurised lubrication.

Details, parts or accessories of lubricating, including controlling lubricant level or pressure, arrangement of lubricant conduits, purifying lubricant, filling or draining lubricant.

Indicating or safety features, e.g. to render machine or engine inoperative or idling on lubricant pressure failure.

Crankcase ventilating or breathing, e.g. breather valves or inlet air filters.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Lubricating in general is covered by F16N. F01M is an application-oriented subclass in relation thereto, in respect of machines and engines as defined in the glossary below.

Lubricating subject-matter proper to F01M is classified there irrespective of its stated application, unless the classifiable features are peculiar to its stated application, in which case the subject-matter is classified only in the relevant subclass of classes F01-F04.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Arrangement of lubricant coolers in engine cooling systems

F01P 11/08
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Lubrication of steam engines

F01B 31/10

Lubrication of rotary-piston or oscillating-piston machines or engines

F01C 21/04

Lubrication of non-positive displacementmachines or engines, e.g. steam turbines

F01D 25/18

Lubrication of gas-turbine plants

F02C 7/06

Lubrication of cylinders of combustion engines

F02F 1/20

Lubrication of pumps for elastic fluids

F04B 39/02

Lubrication of rotary-piston or oscillating-piston pumps for elastic fluids

F04C 29/02

Lubrication of non-positive displacementpumps

F04D 29/04

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring fluid-pressure in general

G01L

Fluid level indicators in general

G01F 23/00

Crankshafts, connecting rods per se

F16C

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Lubrication

Apparatus, arrangements or methods for introducing or applying a thin layer of a discrete lubricant between two or more relatively-moving adjacent solid surfaces of a device or apparatus, for the specific purpose of reducing friction, heat or wear between the adjacent surfaces.

Lubricant

Any fluid (e.g. water, oil), fluent material (e.g. particulate graphite), semi-fluid material (e.g. oil with thickener), or semisolid material (e.g. grease), or any mixture of such types of substance, which is used for the specific purpose of lubrication.

Engine

A device for continuously converting fluid energy into mechanical power. Thus, this term includes, for example, steam piston engines or steam turbines per se, or internal-combustion piston engines, but it excludes single-stroke devices.

Pump

A device for continuously raising, forcing, compressing or exhausting fluid by mechanical or other means. Thus, this term includes fans or blowers. This term also includes methods of operation, unless otherwise specifically provided for.

Machine

A device which could equally be an engine or a pump, but not a device which is restricted to an engine or one which is restricted to a pump.

Positive displacement

The way the energy of a working fluid is transformed into mechanical energy, in which variations of volume created by the working fluid in a working chamber produce equivalent displacements of the mechanical member transmitting the energy, the dynamic effect of the fluid being of minor importance, and vice-versa.

Non-positive displacement

The way the energy of a working fluid is transformed into mechanical energy, by transformation of the energy of the working fluid into kinetic energy, and vice-versa.

Working fluid

The driven fluid in a pump or the driving fluid in an engine. The working fluid may be in a gaseous state, i.e. compressible, or liquid. In the former case coexistence of two states is possible.

F01M 11/03 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Filters

B01D

F01M 11/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Separating in general

B01D

F01P 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cylinders, pistons, valves, fuel injectors, sparking-plugs, or other engine or machine parts, modified to facilitate cooling, see the relevant classes for such parts

F01P 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cylinders, pistons, valves, fuel injectors, sparking-plugs, or other engine or machine parts, modified to facilitate cooling, see the relevant classes for such parts

F02B - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Carburettors, fuel-injection apparatus

F02M

Apparatus for performing such pretreatments or additions

F02M

Apparatus for generating fuel, e.g. gas, see the relevant classes, e.g.

C10

Aspects predominantly concerning such devices, see the relevant classes for the devices

F02B 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Characterised by use of gaseous or solid fuels

F02B 43/00, F02B 45/00

F02B 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Characterised by use of gaseous or solid fuels

F02B 43/00, F02B 45/00

F02B 33/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements of such pumps or other auxiliary apparatus on engine

F02B 67/00

Combined engine and pump control, control dependent on variables other than those generic to pump

F02D

F02B 35/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements of such pumps or other auxiliary apparatus on engines

F02B 67/00

Combined engine and pump control, control dependent on variables other than those generic to pump

F02D

F02B 37/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements of such pumps or other auxiliary apparatus on engines

F02B 67/00

Combined engine and pump control, control dependent on variables other than those generic to pump

F02D

F02B 39/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements of such pumps or other auxiliary apparatus on engines

F02B 67/00

Combined engine and pump control, control dependent on variables other than those generic to pump

F02D

F02B 47/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus for performing such pretreatments or additions

F02M

F02B 49/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus for performing such pretreatments or additions

F02M

F02B 51/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus for performing such pretreatments or additions

F02M

F02B 61/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Aspects predominantly concerning such devices, see the relevant classes for the devices

F02B 63/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Aspects predominantly concerning such devices, see the relevant classes for the devices

F02B 65/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Aspects predominantly concerning such devices, see the relevant classes for the devices

F02D - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Automatic controllers for prime movers, in general

G05D

F02D 1/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Peculiar to engines characterised by their use of non-liquid fuels, pluralities of fuels, or non-fuel substances added to the combustible mixtures

F02D 19/00

Peculiar to supercharged engines

F02D 23/00

F02D 3/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Peculiar to engines characterised by their use of non-liquid fuels, pluralities of fuels, or non-fuel substances added to the combustible mixtures

F02D 19/00

Peculiar to supercharged engines

F02D 23/00

F02D 7/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Peculiar to engines characterised by their use of non-liquid fuels, pluralities of fuels, or non-fuel substances added to the combustible mixtures

F02D 19/00

Peculiar to supercharged engines

F02D 23/00

F03B 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Adaptations of machines or engines for special use

F03B 13/00

Controlling

F03B 15/00

F03B 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Adaptations of machines or engines for special use

F03B 13/00

Controlling

F03B 15/00

F03B 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Adaptations of machines or engines for special use

F03B 13/00

Controlling

F03B 15/00

F03B 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Adaptations of machines or engines for special use

F03B 13/00

Controlling

F03B 15/00

F03B 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Adaptations of machines or engines for special use

F03B 13/00

Controlling

F03B 15/00

F04B 1/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pumps for raising fluids from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 3/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pumps for raising fluids from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 5/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pumps for raising fluids from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 7/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pumps for raising fluids from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 9/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pumps for raising fluids from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 11/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pumps for raising fluids from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 13/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pumps for raising fluids from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 15/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pumps for raising fluids from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 17/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pumps for raising fluids from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 19/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pumps for raising fluids from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 23/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pumps for raising fluids from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 25/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For raising fluid from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 27/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For raising fluid from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 31/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For raising fluid from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 33/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For raising fluid from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 35/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For raising fluid from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 37/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For raising fluid from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 39/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For raising fluid from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04B 41/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For raising fluid from great depths

F04B 47/00

F04C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Pumps with rotary or oscillating pistons for liquids, for elastic fluids, or for combination of liquid and elastic fluid.

Positive displacement machines, i.e. devices which could be equally an engine or pump, with rotary or oscillating pistons for liquids only.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Related subclasses F01C and F04C cover the same type of apparatus using rotary or oscillating pistons for positive displacement. The distinguishing characteristic used for classifying the machines, i.e. devices which could be equally be an engine or pump, is the working fluid used. Machines with rotary or oscillating pistons for working fluids containing elastic fluids, e.g. a combination of liquids and elastic fluids are classified in F01C. If only liquid is used as working fluid for these machines with rotary or oscillating pistons they are classified in F04C. However, devices with rotary or oscillating pistons that are only pumps, i.e. cannot be used as engines, are classified in F04C, irrespective of the working fluid.

F04B covers machines or pumps with reciprocating pistons, or other kinds of positive displacement mechanisms with the exception of rotary or oscillating piston type machines or pumps.

Subject matter like cyclically operating valves, lubricating or cooling are classified in subclasses F01L, F01M, F01P irrespective of their stated application, unless their novel and non-obvious features are peculiar to their application, in which case they are classified only in the relevant subclass of F04. The subclasses F01L, F01M, F01P do not cover pump or machine features per se.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Positive displacement machines for liquids, or pumps in which the working-fluid is displaced by one or more reciprocating pistons or by flexible working members

F04B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Rotary-piston or oscillating piston machines for elastic fluids

F01C

Rotary-piston or oscillating piston machines for liquids and elastic fluids

F01C

Cyclically operating valves for machines or engines

F01L

Lubrication of machines or engines in general

F01M

Gas-flow silencer or exhaust apparatus for machines or engines in general

F01N

Cooling of machines or engines in general

F01P

Combustion engines with pumps for charging

F02B 33/34, F02B 53/08

Fluid pressure actuators

F15B

Rotary fluid gearing using pumps and motors of the volumetric type for conveying rotary motion

F16H

Sealing in general

F16J

Means for thermal insulation in general

F16L

Refrigeration machines, plants or systems

F25B

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Pump

means a device for continuously raising, forcing, compressing, or exhausting fluid by mechanical means

Machine

means a device that could equally be both an engine and a pump and not a device which is restricted to an engine or one which is restricted to a pump

Positive displacement pumps

pumps using pistons or other mechanical members to displace a working fluid in a working chamber, the dynamic effect on the fluid being of minor importance

Positive displacement engines

the energy of a working fluid is transformed into mechanical energy, in which variations of volume created by the working fluid in a working chamber produce equivalent movement of mechanical members, e.g. pistons transmitting the energy, the dynamic effect of the fluid being of minor importance

Oscillating piston machine

means a positive-displacement machine in which a fluid-engaging, work-transmitting member oscillates, e.g. a vane piston swinging back and forth about a fixed axis

Reciprocating piston

means a fluid-engaging, work-transmitting member of an reciprocating-piston type machine or pump that slides alternately back and forth usually along a straight line or path

Rotary piston

means a fluid engaging, work-transmitting member of a rotary-piston machine or pump that can completely rotate about a fixed axis or about an axis moving along a circular or similar orbit when operating, e.g. rotor having vanes or teeth

Rotary piston machine

means a positive-displacement machine in which a liquid-engaging, work-transmitting member rotates about a fixed axis or about an axis moving along a circular or similar orbit, e.g. machine with a rotor having vanes or teeth

Cooperating members

means the "oscillating piston" or "rotary piston" and another member, e.g., the working-chamber wall, which assists in the pumping action or machine's action

Movement of the cooperating members

is to be interpreted as relative, so that one of the "cooperating members" may be stationary, even though reference may be made to its rotational axis, or both may move

Teeth or tooth equivalents

include lobes, projections or abutments

Internal axis type

means that the rotational axes of the inner and outer co-operating members remain at all times within the outer member, e.g., in a similar manner to that of a pinion meshing with the internal teeth of a ring gear

Working fluid

means the driven fluid in a pump or driving or driven liquid in a machine. The working fluid can be in a compressible, gaseous state, e.g. steam, called elastic fluid, a liquid state, or a state where there is coexistence of elastic fluid and liquid state

F04C 29/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Of machines or engines in general

F01M

Separation in general

B01D

F04C 29/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Of machines or engines in general

F01P

Heat insulation in general

F16L 59/00

F04C 29/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Gas-flow silencers or exhaust apparatus for machines or engines in general

F01N

F15B - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Systems peculiar to the control of a particular machine or apparatus covered in a single other class, see the class for such machine or apparatus

F16B - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Horseshoe nails

A01L 7/10

Nails for footwear

A43B 23/20

Thumb-tacks

B43M 15/00

Screws or bolts for railway sleepers

E01B 9/10

For building constructions

E04B 1/38

For hand railings

E04F 11/18

For fencing

E04H 17/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Manufacture of threaded fastening means

B21H, B21K, B23G

Screw mechanisms

F16H

F16C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Shafts (e.g. telescopic shafts);

Flexible shafts;

Mechanical means for transmitting movement in a flexible sheathing (e.g. Bowden cables);

Crankshafts or elements specially adapted for use in crankshafts such as:

Connecting-rods or links pivoted at both ends that function in a similar manner to connecting-rods;

Pivots and pivotal connections (e.g. ball-joints);

Rotary engineering elements (e.g. rolls, drums or discs) other than gearing, coupling, clutch or brake elements;

Bearings such as:

Parts or details of bearings such as:

Specially adapted methods or apparatus for assembling together several separately formed components into a structure covered by this subclass (e.g. apparatus for assembling together crankshafts).

Relationship between large subject matter areas

F16Cis a general function-orientated place.

Application-orientated places for this subject matter are provided elsewhere in the IPC – see below.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Piston-rods, i.e. rods rigidly connected to the piston

F16J 7/00

Control cables for flexible medical endoscopes

A61B 1/005

Control cables for flexible technical endoscopes

G02B 23/24
Connecting-rods

Connecting-rods for driving wheels of railway locomotives

B61C 17/10

Pivotal connection of pistons with connecting-rods

F16J 1/14
Shafts, crank shafts

Arrangement or mounting of transmissions in vehicles characterised by arrangement, location, or type of main drive shafting, e.g. cardan shaft

B60K 17/22

Axle-boxes for rail vehicles

B61F 15/00

Propeller shafts or paddle-wheel shafts for ships

B63H 23/34
Flexible shafts

Flexible shafts in dental machines

A61C 1/18
Mechanical means for transmitting movement in a flexible sheathing

Control cables for change-speed gearing control

B60K 20/02

Control cables for actuating brakes

B60T 7/08, B60T 11/04

Control cables for brake-actuating mechanisms specially adapted for cycles

B62L 3/02

Control cables for gearing speed-change mechanisms specially adapted for cycles

B62M 25/02
Pivots and pivotal connections

Arrangements of steering linkage connections

B62D 7/16

Hinges for doors, windows, or wings

E05D
Rotary engineering elements other than gearing, coupling, clutch or brake elements

Guide rollers in feeding webs

B65H 27/00

Calender rolls, bearings therefor

D21G 1/02

Flywheels

F16F 15/30

Correcting- or balancing-weights or equivalent means for balancing rotating bodies

F16F 15/32

Rotary drums or rollers for heat-exchange or heat-transfer apparatus

F28F 5/02
Applications of bearings

Bearings for agricultural machines

A01B 71/04

Bearings for threshing machines

A01F 12/58

Bearings for drawers for furniture

A47B 88/00

Adaptation of roll bearings for metal-rolling mills

B21B 31/07

Bearings for movable or adjustable work or tool supports

B23Q 1/25

Hubs for vehicles

B60B 27/00

Axle units; Parts thereof

B60B 35/00

A mountings for shafting in vehicles

B60K 17/24

Bearings for connecting-rods for driving wheels of railway locomotives

B61C 17/10

Axle-boxes for rail vehicles with roller, needle, ball or journal bearings

B61F 15/00

Bearings for steering heads

B62K 21/06

Spindle-bearings for spinning or twisting arrangements

D01H 7/12

Bearings or hinges of bridges

E01D 19/04

Bearings allowing movement of building constructions

E04B 1/36

Bearings specially adapted for roller shutters or for roller blinds

E06B 9/174, E06B 9/50

Bearings for drill bits

E21B 10/22

Arrangement of bearings in rotary-piston machines or engines

F01C 21/02

Arrangement of bearings in non-positive displacement machines or engines

F01D 25/16

Arrangement of bearings in gas-turbine plants

F02C 7/06

Bearings for joint couplings

F16D 3/00

Bearings for gyroscopes

G01C 19/16

Bearings or suspensions for moving parts of measuring instruments

G01D 11/02

Arrangements of bearings in weighing apparatus

G01G 21/02

Testing of bearings

G01M 13/04

Arrangements of bearings in instruments for measuring electric variables

G01R 1/10

Arrangements of bearings for apparatus for measuring time integral of electric power or current

G01R 11/12

Bearings for clockwork

G04B 31/00

Shock-damping bearings for watches or clocks

G04B 31/02

Bearings in dynamo-electric machines

H02K 5/15, H02K 5/16

Structural association with bearings of dynamo-electric machines

H02K 7/08

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Rotary coupling elements, e.g. intermediate discs of couplings

F16D 3/00, F16D 3/78, F16D 3/79

Axially displaceable couplings

F16D 3/06

Universal joints for transmitting rotary motion

F16D 3/16

Rotary clutch elements, e.g. clutch discs or plates

F16D 13/00, F16D 13/38, F16D 13/64

Rotary brake elements, e.g. brake discs

F16D 65/00, F16D 65/12

Rubber springs with stiff outer sleeve and inner sleeve or pin

F16F 1/38

Crank gearings

F16H 21/18

Crank gearings with adjustment of throw

F16H 21/20

Camshafts

F16H 53/02

Rotary gearing elements, e.g. gears, sprockets, pulleys

F16H 55/00, F16H 55/17, F16H 55/30, F16H 55/36

Generation or transmission of movements for final actuating mechanisms within change-speed- or reversing-gearings with at least one movement being transmitted by a cable

F16H 61/36

Supports for apparatus with ball-joint heads

F16M 11/14

Hinges for spectacles

G02C 5/22

Magnetic levitation devices.

H02N 15/00

Making machine elements

B21K 1/00

Making specific metal objects by operations not covered by a single other subclass than B23Por a group in subclass B23P

B23P 15/00
Making parts of bearings

Making parts of bearings, sleeves, cages for bearings or the like by punching of metal or by working or processing of sheet metal or metal tubes, rods or profiles without essentially removing material

B21D 53/10, B21D 53/12

Rolling of rings, balls or rollers

B21H 1/12, B21H 1/16

Forging or pressing of rings, balls, rollers or cages for bearings

B21K 1/02, B21K 1/05

Casting of bearing shells

B22D 15/02

Smoothing or roughening of bearing surfaces

B23P 9/00

Hand tools for inserting or withdrawing sleeves or bearing races

B25B 27/06

Producing bushes for bearings from plastics

B29D 33/00

Indexing scheme associated with subclass B29C(shaping or joining of plastics)

B29L 31/04

Heat treatment, e.g. annealing, hardening, quenching, tempering, adapted for rings or bearing races

C21D 9/40

Alloys

C22C

Electroplating of bearings

C25D 7/10

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Rotary engineering element

Any engineering element, other than a rotating element used in gearing, clutches, couplings or brakes, which rotates so far as its features are affected only by the fact that it rotates.

Bearing

A component of a machine or mechanism that is positioned between two relatively movable elements of the machine or mechanism and that has a surface formed for sliding or rolling contact with these elements when they move relative to each other for the sole function of reducing the friction that would otherwise result from their relative movement.

Connecting-rod or link pivoted at both ends

A reciprocating or oscillating elongated member of a machine or mechanism that is intended to be pivotally connected to and positioned between two relatively movable elements of the machine or mechanism for the purpose of transmitting force or conveying motion between the elements when it reciprocates or oscillates.

Crankshaft

A shaft with one or more cranks for turning reciprocating or oscillating motion into rotary motion.

Flexible shaft

An elongated member, normally a cylindrical rod, that is bendable along its length and rotates about its longitudinal axis to transmit torque or convey motion.

Bowden cable

A control cable consisting of an elongated member enclosed within a housing and that is bendable along its length and shifts along its longitudinal axis relative to its housing to transmit motion or force.

Roll, drum, disc

An element of a machine or mechanism in the form of a roller that has a generally curved surface that contacts work and revolves about its axis when the work shifts relative to it.

Shaft

An elongated member, normally a cylindrical rod, that rotates about its longitudinal axis to transmit torque or convey motion from a gear or other rotary body supported by it to another part of its machine or mechanism.

Synonyms and Keywords

connecting-rod

conrod, con rod, piston rod

sliding bearing

sliding contact bearing, slide bearing, plain bearing, gliding bearing, friction bearing, hydrodynamic bearing, fluid dynamic bearing

anti-friction bearing

antifriction bearing, roller bearing, rolling bearing, rolling contact bearing, ball bearing, needle bearing, rolling elements bearing

linear bearing

linear motion guide

Bowden cable

control cable

F16C 3/03 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Axially displaceable couplings

F16D 3/06

F16C 3/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Elastic connecting-rods

F16C 7/04

F16C 3/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Adjustable crank mechanisms

F16H 21/20

F16C 9/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bearings adjustable for play in general

F16C 25/00

F16C 11/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Rubber springs with stiff outer sleeve and inner sleeve or pin

F16F 1/38

F16C 11/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Supports for apparatus with ball-joint heads

F16M 11/14

F16C 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Pulleys

F16H 55/00

F16C 27/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Construction of units comprising rigid inner and outer members with rubber or the like between them

F16F 1/38

F16C 29/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preventing relative movement between machine parts in general

F16B, F16B 1/00

F16C 33/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Of interest apart from the surface itself

F16C 27/06

F16C 33/72 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sealings in general

F16J

F16C 35/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Elastic or yielding supports

F16C 27/00

F16C 35/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hand-tools for inserting or withdrawing sleeves or ball races

B25B 27/06

F16D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Systems of clutches or couplings for transmitting rotation used within a mechanism of general utility.

Combinations of a clutch and a brake used within a mechanism of general utility.

Combinations of a coupling for transmitting rotation from one element to another and a brake used in conjunction with each other in a mechanism of general utility.

Combinations of a coupling for transmitting rotation from one element to another and a clutch used in conjunction with each other in a mechanism of general utility.

Couplings per se of general utility for transmitting rotation that include the following types:

Clutches per se of general utility that include the following types:

The following types of clutch components and features related to clutches:

Brakes per se of general utility that include the following types:

The following types of brake components and features related to brakes:

Friction linings in general:

Other types of couplings for transmitting rotation, clutches or brakes that are not provided for in another subclass of the IPC.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

F16D is a general function-orientated place.

Application-orientated places for this subject matter are provided elsewhere in the IPC – see below.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Electrodynamic brake systems for vehicles in general

B60L 7/00

Vehicle brake control systems

B60T

Conjoint control of vehicle sub-units of different type or different function, e.g. when at least one sub-unit is a clutch or a brake

B60W

Fluid gearings

F16H 39/00, F16H 41/00, F16H 43/00

Combinations of fluid gearings with clutches or couplings

F16H 45/00

Combinations of mechanical gearings with fluid clutches

F16H 47/00

Differential gearings, e.g. with freewheels or other clutches

F16H 48/00

Dynamo-electric brakes, e.g. of the Eddy-current hysteresis type

H02K 49/00

Clutches or holding devices using electrostatic attraction, e.g. using Johnson-Rahbek effect

H02N 13/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:
Couplings

Couplings for metal-rolling mills

B21B 35/14

Couplings for drilling rods

E21B 17/02

Attachment of marine propellers on shafts

B63H 23/34
Clutches

Clutches of harvesters or mowers for grass, cereals or other crops

A01D 69/08

Clutches in dental machines for boring or cutting

A61C 1/18

Clutches specially adapted for presses

B30B 15/12

Arrangement or location of clutches in vehicles

B60K 17/02

Arrangement or mounting of control devices for main transmission clutches in vehicles

B60K 23/02

Cycle brakes controlled by back-pedalling

B62L 5/00

Details of rotary fluid gearing of the hydrokinetic type

F16H 41/24

Clutches for apparatus for transmitting or receiving coded digital information

H04L 13/04
Brakes

Brakes of harvesters or mowers for grass, cereals or other crops

A01D 69/10

Brakes for threshing machines

A01F 12/58

Brakes for swings

A63G 9/22

Brakes specially adapted for presses

B30B 15/10

Braking devices for ribbon-feed devices in selective printing mechanisms

B41J 33/52

Brakes peculiar to rail vehicles

B61H

Braking mechanisms for hand carts

B62B 5/04

Braking mechanisms for children's carriages or perambulators

B62B 9/08

Braking mechanisms for animal-drawn vehicles

B62C 7/00

Cycle brakes

B62L

Braking devices for lifting or hoisting gear

B66D 5/00

Brakes for electric motors, generators, or dynamo-electric converters

H02P 3/04

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Actuator

A component of a mechanism that causes movement of a motion-conveying component or motion-inhibiting component but does not itself directly convey or inhibit motion.

Brake

A mechanism with at least one component that is moved by an actuator to selectively or automatically engage or stop a member with respect to a stationary part.

Clutch

A mechanism with at least two relatively movable components that are selectively or automatically engaged with each other by control means, e.g. an actuator, to transmit mechanical power or convey motion from a first member to a second member or disengaged by control means to stop transmitting mechanical power or conveying motion.

Coupling for transmitting rotation

A mechanism that transmits torque or conveys rotary motion from a first shaft to a second shaft or other rotating member and that either does not include relatively moving components or, if it has relatively moving components, the components move without the use of control means.

Synonyms and Keywords

Slack adjuster

Wear compensation mechanism, automatic adjuster, automatically adjusting device, automatic adjustment device, self-adjustment device

Freewheel clutch

One-way clutch

F16D 1/095 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

for connecting two abutting shafts

F16D 1/02

F16D 3/223 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Universal joints in which flexibility is produced by means of rolling connecting parts, one coupling part entering a sleeve of the other coupling part and connected thereto by rolling members whereby the rolling members are being guided in grooves in both coupling parts.

F16D 3/2233 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Universal joints where the rolling members are being guided in grooves on both coupling parts. The projection of the groove lines forming a S curve with an inflection point, see inner contour of part (12) and outer contour of part (16) in the figure.

F16D0003223300

F16D 3/2237 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Universal joints where the rolling members are being guided in grooves on both coupling parts. In the projection these grooves are composed of radii and straight lines, see groove line (11b) and (12b) in the figure.

F16D0003223700

F16D 3/224 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Universal joints where the rolling members are being guided in grooves in both coupling parts, and the groove centre-lines of each coupling part are lying on a sphere with the same centre.

F16D0003224000

F16D 3/2245 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Universal joints where the rolling members are being guided in grooves in both coupling parts, the groove centre-lines are lying on spheres and the centres of these spheres (D1, G1) are offset from the joint centre (E1)

F16D0003224500

F16D 3/82 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Similar clutches

F16D 25/04

F16D 13/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Similar freewheel clutches

F16D 41/20

Similar brakes

F16D 49/02

F16D 13/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Similar brakes

F16D 49/00

F16D 13/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Similar brakes

F16D 51/02

F16D 13/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Similar brakes

F16D 51/00

F16D 13/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Similar brakes

F16D 53/00

F16D 13/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Similar brakes

F16D 55/00

F16D 25/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements or mounting of clutches in vehicles

B60K 17/02

F16D 33/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mounting of such means in vehicles

B60K 23/02

F16D 33/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Applicable also to fluid gearing

F16H 41/24

F16D 49/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Similar clutches

F16D 13/10

F16D 49/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Similar clutches

F16D 13/08

F16D 51/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Similar clutches

F16D 13/14

F16D 51/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Similar clutches

F16D 13/12

F16D 53/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Similar clutches

F16D 13/20

F16D 55/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Similar clutches

F16D 13/38

F16D 65/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Similar members for clutches

F16D 13/58

F16D 67/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Combinations of couplings and clutches

F16D 47/02

F16D 69/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Clutching elements

F16D 13/60

F16D 71/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Means for securing members after operation

F16B 1/02

F16G - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Belts, e.g. V-belts, cables, ropes or chains that are specially adapted for transferring power/force from an input point to an output point to move or drive at least one mechanical part.

The belts, cables, ropes or chains being either

Chains, e.g. hauling- or hoisting-chains, that are not specially adapted for transferring power/force.

Fittings and attachments primarily intended to be connected to or used with the above types of belts, cables, ropes or chains. These include:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Subclass F16G does not cover the following methods or apparatus for making or permanently assembling chains or chain elements:

Hooks in general are to be classified in group F16B 45/00 and hooks for cranes in group B66C 1/34.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Endless conveyor belts

B65G 15/30
Making of belts

Producing belts of plastics

B29D 29/00

Making driving belts of leather

C14B 9/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:
Belts

Gearings using endless flexible members

F16H 7/00, F16H 9/00

Belts specially adapted for gearings with variable ratio by using endless flexible members

F16H 9/24

Preventing or carrying off electrostatic charges

H05F
Making of belts

Woven fabrics designed to make specified articles

D03D 1/00
Chains

Gearings using endless flexible members

F16H 7/00, F16H 9/00

Chains specially adapted for gearings with variable ratio by using endless flexible members

F16H 9/24
Fastenings for ropes or cables

Straining wire in general

B21F 9/00

Attachment of ropes or cables to drums or barrels of winding mechanisms

B66D 1/34

Cable clamps for suspension bridge cables

E01D 19/16

Rope clamps in earth drilling

E21B 19/12

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ropes or cables

Ropes or cables in general

D07B

Fastening equipment for ropes on ships

B63B 21/04

Adaptations of ropes or the like on ships

B63B 21/20
Fastenings for ropes or cables

Arrangements for ropes or cables for connection to elevator cars or cages

B66B 7/08

Ground anchors

E02D 5/80

Anchoring devices for prestressed members

E04C 5/00
Chains

Fastening equipment for chains on ships

B63B 21/04

Adaptations of chains or the like on ships

B63B 21/20

Hooks or eyes in general

F16B 45/00

Traction chains for conveyors

B65G 17/38, B65G 19/20

Making of chains by mechanical metal-working without essentially removing material or by punching metal

B21L

Making of chains by casting

B22D 25/02

Making of chains by shaping or joining of plastics or by shaping of substances in a plastic state, in general

B29C, B29L 31/12

F16G 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Anchoring devices for buildings

E04C 5/12

Ground anchors

E02D 5/80

F16G 11/12 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Straining wire in general

B21F 9/00

F16G 11/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Crane hooks

B66C 1/34

Hooks or eyes in general

F16B 45/00

F16G 13/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Specially adapted to gearings with variable gear-ratio

F16H 9/24

F16G 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hooks in general

F16B 45/00

F16H - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Varying the speed ratio of driving or feeding mechanisms of machine tools

B23Q 5/12, B23Q 5/46

Conjoint control of drive units for vehicles

B60W

Cycle transmissions

B62M

Marine propulsion

B63H

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fluid actuators

F15B

F16H 21/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Combinations of gearings of different types

F16H 37/00

F16H 23/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Combinations of gearings of different types

F16H 37/00

F16H 25/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Combinations of gearings of different types

F16H 37/00

F16H 48/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

cooling or lubricating of differential gearings

F16H 57/04

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement or mounting of differential gearing in vehicles

B60K 17/16

Arrangement or mounting of a transfer gear in vehicles for driving both front and rear wheels having a transfer gear

B60K 17/34

Arrangement or mounting of control devices for differential gearing of vehicle

B60K 23/04

Special rules of classification

When classifying in this group, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in all appropriate places.

F16H 48/05 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Combinations of several interconnected differential sets, for example a combination of a right-and-left differential with a center differential (such a relationship as between "center differential unit 14" and "front differential unit 12" in the figure below).

F16H0048050000

F16H 48/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Differentials having cams, for example, in between the two output members as seen in the figure below ("Output rotary members 12B, 13B" are output members and "cam groove 31 and balls 15" comprise the cam mechanism).

F16H
F16H

F16H 48/19 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Those differentials that divide one input into two outputs without using planet gears but by using two linked clutches (see "clutches 21, 25" in the figure below).

F16H0048190000

F16H 48/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Clutches

F16D

F16H 48/24 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Clutches

F16D

F16H 48/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Differentials, the differential action of which is suppressed by utilizing the function of fluid viscosity, etc. such as, for example, viscous clutches (see the figure below).

F16H0048260000

F16H 48/27 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Differentials, the differential action of which is suppressed by fluid pressure that is generated, for example, by internal pumps actuated by the difference of rotation numbers between two outputs (see the figure below).

F16H0048270000
F16H0048270000

F16H 48/28 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Differentials, the differential action of which is suppressed in response to a difference in torque that is generated between two outputs.

F16H 48/285 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Differentials, the differential action of which is suppressed by, for example, meshing reaction forces of helical gears that are arranged in parallel axes, by way of the said helical gears being pushed against the casing of the differentials (see the figure below).

F16H0048285000

F16H 48/29 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Differentials, the differential action of which is suppressed by, for example, meshing reaction forces of helical gears or worms that are arranged in orthogonal axes, by way of the said helical gears or worms being pushed against the casing of the differentials (see the figure below).

F16H0048290000

F16H 48/295 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Differentials, in which the engaging power of a pilot clutch is amplified by using a cam, for example, and thereby, to have a main clutch engaged (see "pilot clutch 33","cam mechanism 35" and "main clutch 39" in the figure below).

F16H0048295000

F16H 48/32 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Differentials, the differential action of which is suppressed by, for example, fluidic actuators that are controllable from outside of the differential (see the figure below).

F16H0048320000

F16H 48/36 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Those differentials that are intentionally made to have different rotation numbers between two outputs for the purpose of improving the turning performance or controlling the yaw motion of vehicles (see the figure below).

F16H0048360000

F16H 48/38 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Those differentials that are characterised by such component parts as gear wheels, casings, washers, shafts, bearings or carriers.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

The outer casing comprising the differential and supporting input and output shafts

F16H 57/037

F16H 48/40 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Casings that accommodate the differential mechanism internally and are rotated by the power from the input shaft (see number 120 in the sample figure below).

F16H0048400000
F16H0048400000

F16H 57/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Monitoring wear or stress of gearing elements;

Gearboxes; Mounting gearing therein;

Features relating to lubrication or cooling;

General details of gearings with members having orbital motion;

Arrangements for adjusting or for taking-up backlash not provided for elsewhere.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

General details of screw-and-nut gearing

F16H 25/00

General details of fluid gearing

F16H 39/00-F16H 43/00

F16H 57/01 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices attached to the gearbox or gearing for:

informing of the end of life cycle;

informing of the timing for triggering maintenance or parts replacement;

monitoring wear or stress of gearing elements.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Testing of gearing or of transmission mechanisms

G01M 13/02

F16H 57/02 - Definition fr

Special rules of classification

When classifying in this group, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in all appropriate subgroups.

F16H 57/021 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Shafts ; Bearings

F16C

F16H 57/022 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

For compensating misalignment of axes of toothed gearings without orbital motion

F16H 1/26

For compensating misalignment of axes of planetary gears

F16H 1/48

F16H 57/023 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods and procedures for mounting or installing gearing elements or shafts in gearboxes.

Methods for mounting or installing gearing elements by using tools, e.g. guide members, jigs, or the like.

F16H 57/025 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means for supporting gearboxes or attaching them to other devices in order to prevent the casing from being moved due to reaction forces or torques produced by the gearing, e.g. torque arms (see the figure below).

F16H0057025000

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Mounting of transmissions in vehicles

B60K 17/00

F16H 57/029 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Gearboxes characterised by means for preventing escape of liquids (e.g. lubrication oil) or gases.

Gearboxes characterised by means for preventing ingress of liquids, gases, dust or the like.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sealings

F16J 15/00

F16H 57/033 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

A group of similar gearboxes based on the same design, e.g. being available in different sizes.

A group of gearboxes which comprises a combination of several standardised units and which can meet various requirements by altering the combination of such units.

(see the figures below)

F16H0057033000

F16H 57/035 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Gearings for conveying rotary motion by endless flexible members

F16H 7/00, F16H 9/00

F16H 57/037 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Housing components of gearboxes for accommodating differential gearings, which housing components are usually not intended to revolve with the differential gearings, e.g. housing 1 in the figure below.

F16H0057037000

(US 2007/0167269 A1)

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Rotating cases for differential gearings

F16H 48/40

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Differential gearings

F16H 48/00

F16H 57/038 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Gearboxes for accommodating differential gearings

F16H 57/037

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Toothed gearings comprising conical gears

F16H 1/14

Toothed gearings having helical, herring-bone, or like teeth

F16H 1/18

F16H 57/039 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Toothed gearings comprising worm and worm-wheel

F16H 1/16

F16H 59/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Varying the speed ratio of driving or feeding mechanisms of machine tools

B23Q 5/12, B23Q 5/46

Conjoint control of drive units for vehicles

B60W

Cycle transmissions

B62M

Marine propulsion

B63H

F16H 61/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Varying the speed ratio of driving or feeding mechanisms of machine tools

B23Q 5/12, B23Q 5/46

Conjoint control of drive units for vehicles

B60W

Cycle transmissions

B62M

Marine propulsion

B63H

F16H 61/40 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices or systems to vary the transmission ratio of hydrostatic gearing or control the hydraulic power transmission between a pump and a motor having no specific entry in the following subgroups;

Arrangements or mountings of the control apparatus on the hydrostatic gearing.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hydrostatic gearings comprising integrated control parts (valves) or accessories

F16H 39/02, F16H 39/04

F16H 61/4008 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for controlling pressure not specific for the high or low working pressures;

Control of differential pressure.

F16H 61/4017 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for limiting a maximum pressure in the hydrostatic high pressure conduits;

Check valves, relief valves, regulating valves.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Automatic control by changing the capacity of a pump or a motor for limiting the high pressure to avoid overload

for preventing overload, e.g. high pressure limitation

F16H 61/478

F16H 61/4026 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for regulating or limiting pressure in the hydrostatic low pressure conduits;

Check valves, relief valves, regulating valves in low pressure conduits.

F16H 61/4035 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for regulating the circuit flow;

Pulsing stop valves, orifice valves or variable restrictions in the conduits.

F16H 61/4043 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for connecting high pressure conduits with low pressure conduits;

Control circuits characterised by features related to the bypass valves.

F16H 61/4052 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for varying the bypass flow, e.g. for implementing a starting clutch of the hydrostatic transmission;

Variable orifice valves.

F16H 61/4061 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for changing the rotational direction of the motor by exchanging the supply conduits;

Change-over valves, crossing valves for exchanging the conduits.

F16H 61/4069 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for interrupting communication between pump and motor;

Stop valves, shut-off valves;

Pump output closing valves or plates;

Intermediate position of change-over valve.

F16H 61/4078 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for connecting the hydrostatic conduits with external sources or consumers, e.g. linear motor actuators of working circuits;

Switching valves and controls therefore.

F16H 61/4096 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for controlling the charging or discharging of accumulators from the high or low pressure conduits;

Arrangements of high or low pressure accumulators;

Check valves, one way valves between hydrostatic circuit and accumulators.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hybrid vehicles with regenerative braking using fluid accumulators

B60K 6/12

F16H 61/4104 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for connecting the hydrostatic low pressure conduits with the exhaust or sump;

Flushing valves for leaking the circuit to enable replenishing.

F16H 61/4131 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for feeding the hydrostatic circuits without use of a charging pump;

Aspiration from sump or non pressurized reservoirs.

F16H 61/4139 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Pumps and controls for charging the hydrostatic circuit with fluid;

Auxiliary pumps driven by input shaft feeding the low pressure conduits.

F16H 61/4148 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for switching between closed loop and open loop circuits;

Specific features or arrangements of the open loop circuits.

Special rules of classification

This subgroup is also given as a multiple classification or as additional information.

F16H 61/4157 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for limiting the pump over-speed when the motor functions as pump;

Control of friction brakes in hydraulic motors;

Restrictions in circuits, changing pump or motor capacity for braking purposes.

F16H 61/4165 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for controlling the oil or hydraulic fluid temperature, also by heating, e.g. after start when temperature is low;

Devices for controlling oil levels;

Controlling the cooling of housings of pumps or motors;

Details of the lubrication circuits, control of lubricating pressures.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Features relating to lubrication or cooling for general gearings

F16H 57/04

F16H 61/4174 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for removing trapped air in hydrostatic circuits, e.g. breathers therefor.

F16H 61/4183 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for damping the pressure oscillations, e.g. by using restrictions or accumulators;

Devices for cancelling cavitation, detection of cavitation.

F16H 61/4192 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fail-safe devices;

Detection of minimum oil level in the sump;

Detection of oil leakages in the circuits.

F16H 61/42 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Control the displacement of a pump and a motor having no specific entry in the following subgroups;

Conjoint actuation of pump and motor.

F16H 61/421 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Electro-hydraulic valves for regulating the pressure of the hydraulic actuator;

Linear solenoid valves, pulse width modulated valves.

F16H 61/423 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Purely hydraulic valves for regulating the pressure of the hydraulic actuator;

Hydraulic servo assisted shifting, hydraulic actuators therefor.

F16H 61/425 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Electric motors for adjusting displacement;

Electrically assisted shifting actuation.

F16H 61/427 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Mechanical linkages between manually actuated levers or pedals and shifting means.

F16H 61/431 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Electro-hydraulic valves for regulating the pressure of the hydraulic actuator;

Linear solenoid valves, pulse width modulated valves.

F16H 61/433 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Purely hydraulic valves for regulating the pressure of the hydraulic actuator;

Hydraulic servo assisted shifting, hydraulic actuators therefor.

F16H 61/435 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Electric motors for adjusting displacement;

Electrically assisted shifting actuation.

F16H 61/437 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Mechanical linkages between manually actuated levers or pedals and shifting means.

F16H 61/438 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Control of a pump discharging in two opposite directions by swinging displacement;

Control of a motor rotating in opposite directions by swinging displacement.

F16H 61/439 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices to hold a pump in a nearly zero discharge position;

Devices to control a motor in a free-wheel or zero torque position by maintaining a nearly zero displacement.

F16H 61/44 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Control of multiple pumps or motors having no specific entry in the following subgroups.

F16H 61/444 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for switching an additional pump or motor to the hydrostatic circuit;

Bypass devices for shunting a motor in a series connection of motors.

F16H 61/448 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Circuits comprising pumps or motors mounted on same shaft.

F16H 61/452 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for switching between a series connection and a parallel connection of pumps and motors.

F16H 61/456 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices for controlling the balance of torques or speeds between several motors or pumps.

F16H 61/46 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Regulation of an output requirement not specified in the following subgroups;

Regulating methods not specific for a particular output parameter.

F16H 61/462 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Closed loop or open loop control to set a target speed ratio between input and output;

Automatic speed ratio change by comparing two input variables for example output speed versus throttle opening.

F16H 61/465 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Closed loop or open loop control to set a target input speed or acceleration;

Limitation of maximum input speed;

Detection of input speed by using for example input shaft pump flow.

F16H 61/468 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Closed loop or open loop control to set a target input torque;

Limitation of maximum input torque;

Detection of input torque by using for example pump output pressure.

F16H 61/47 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Closed loop or open loop control to set a target output speed or acceleration

Limitation of maximum output speed

Detection of output speed by using for example output shaft governors

F16H 61/472 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Closed loop or open loop control to set a target output torque;

Limitation of maximum output torque;

Detection of output torque by using for example motor input pressure.

F16H 61/475 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Closed loop or open loop control to set a target input or output power;

Limitation of maximum input or output power.

F16H 61/478 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements for preventing transmission breakage;

Limitation of maximum pressure by regulation of pump capacity.

F16H 63/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Varying the speed ratio of driving or feeding mechanisms of machine tools

B23Q 5/12, B23Q 5/46

Conjoint control of drive units for vehicles

B60W

Cycle transmissions

B62M

Marine propulsion

B63H

F16L - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Special adaptations of pipe joints for use with water-closet bowls

E03D 11/13

F16N - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Constructional modifications of parts of machines orapparatus for the purposes of lubrication.

Devices for supplying lubricant, e.g. oil or grease, from a stationary or movable reservoir to the machine or member to be lubricated, or for supplying lubricant by manual action or by a hand-positioned nozzle with lubricant under pressure.

Lubricating-pumps.

Lubrication using substances other than oil or grease.

Lubrication characterised by the use of particular lubricants in particular apparatus or conditions.

Lubrication of apparatus working in extreme conditions.

Details of lubricators or lubrication systems, e.g reservoirs, conduits, check valves, distributing equipment, collecting or draining lubricant, cleaning.

Safety devices for indication or detection of undesired conditions, or use of devices responsive to conditions in lubricating arrangements or systems.

Care of lubricants, e.g. storage, transfer.

Conditioning lubricants, e.g. by heating, cooling, filtering, diluting.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

F16N is the general or function-oriented subclass for lubrication subject-matter, but there are many application-oriented places in the Classification where subject-matter for specially-adapted forms of lubrication can be found – see the references below. Lubrication specially adapted to machines orapparatus provided for in a single other class is covered by the relevant class for that machine orapparatus.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Lubricating compositions; Selection of particular substances as lubricants

C10M

Processes for applying liquids or other fluent materials to a surface, to obtain an anti-friction surface

B05D 5/08

Manufacture of articles or materials containing macromolecular substances and having reduced friction

C08J 5/16
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Lubrication of harvesters or mowers

A01D 69/12

Lubrication of mandrels for metal tube rolling mills

B21B 25/04

Lubrication of rolls for metal rolling mills

B21B 27/06

Lubrication of tools for machines for working metal without removing material

B21D 37/18

Lubricating during forging or pressing

B21J 3/00

Lubrication of moulds for continuous casting of metals

B22D 11/07

Lubrication of milling-cutters

B23C 5/28

Lubrication of metal saws

B23D 59/02, B23D 59/04

Lubrication of machine-tools

B23Q 11/10, B23Q 11/12

Lubrication of portable power-driven percussive tools

B25D 17/26

Lubrication of hair-clippers or dry-shavers

B26B 19/40

Lubrication of band saw blades for wood or the like

B27B 13/12

Arrangements or adaptations of lubricating systems or devices in vehicles

B60R 17/00

Lubrication of cable systems for railways

B61B 12/08

Lubrication systems for railway locomotives

B61C 17/08

Axle-box lubrication for railway rolling-stock

B61F 17/00

Lubrication of rail or wheel flanges of railways

B61K 3/00

Vehicle endless-track units with lubrication means

B62D 55/092

Lubrication of cycles

B62J 31/00

Lubrication of conveyers

B65G 45/02

Lubrication of ropes, cables or guides of elevators

B66B 7/12

Lubrication of spindles of machines for spinning or twisting threads or fibres

D01H 7/20

Lubrication of knitting-machines

D04B 35/28

Lubrication of sewing-machines

D05B 71/00

Lubrication of embroidering-machines

D05C 13/04

Lubrication of switches for railways

E01B 7/26

Lubricating devices for locks

E05B 17/08

Lubricating arrangements for hinges

E05D 11/02

Lubricating details of roller drill bits for earth drilling

E21B 10/22

Lubrication of rotary-piston or oscillating-piston machines orengines asasdas

F01C 21/04

Lubrication of non-positive displacement machines or engines, e.g. steam turbines

F01D 25/18

Lubrication of machines or apparatus working under extreme conditions, at high temperature, of turbines

F02C

Lubrication of gas-turbine plants

F02C 7/06

Lubrication of cylinders of combustion engines

F02F 1/20

Lubrication of evacuating pumps

F04

Lubrication of pumps for elastic fluids

F04B 39/02

Lubrication of rotary-piston or oscillating-piston pumps for elastic fluids

F04C 29/02

Lubrication of non-positive displacement pumps

F04D 29/04

Lubrication of flexible shafts

F16C 1/24

Lubrication of sliding-contact bearings

F16C 33/10

Lubrication of ball or roller bearings

F16C 33/66

Lubrication of springs

F16F 1/24

Lubrication of transmissions

F16H 57/04

Oil separators for separating oil from exhaust steam

F22G

Lubrication of refrigerating machines

F25B

Lubrication of smallarms or ordnance

F41A 29/04

Lubrication of clocks

G04B 31/08

Lubrication of rotary anodes of X-ray tubes

H01J 35/10

Lubrication of rotary current collectors, distributors or interrupters

H01R 39/56

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Storage containers; draining equipment for liquid containers

B65

Lubrication of machines or engines in general, including internal-combustion engines

F01M

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Lubrication

Apparatus, arrangements or methods for introducing or applying a thin layer of a discrete lubricant between two or more relatively-moving adjacent solid surfaces of a device or apparatus, for the specific purpose of reducing friction, heat or wear between the adjacent surfaces.

Lubricant

Any fluid (e.g. water, oil), fluent material (e.g. particulate graphite), semi-fluid material (e.g. oil with thickener), or semisolid material (e.g. grease), or any mixture of such types of substance, which is used for the specific purpose of lubrication.

F16N 7/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Thermostats

G05D

F16N 7/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mist lubrication

F16N 7/32

F16N 7/32 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Splash lubrication

F16N 7/26

F16N 7/34 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Atomising devices in general

B05B

F16N 13/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Separate distributing equipment

F16N 25/00

F16N 15/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bearings working in water

F16C

F16N 21/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Junctions in general

F16L

F16N 23/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Check valves in general

F16K

F16N 27/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Liquid meters

G01F

F16N 27/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Multiple-way valves

F16K

Metering cocks

G01F

F16N 39/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Heat-exchangers in general

F28

F16N 39/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Heat-exchangers in general

F28

F16N 39/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Filters in general

B01D

Magnetic separators

B03C 1/00

F21H - Definition

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Light generating aspects of lighting apparatus that utilize as their light source a particular shaped body that illuminates when heated (i.e. it becomes incandescent) by a separate flame or by the combustion of distinct material (e.g. the burning of oil, wax, or gasoline that does not form part of the particularly shaped bodies) that are not specifically provided elsewhere.

Particularly shaped bodies per se intended to be utilized as light source in lighting devices or lighting apparatus when heated by a separate flame or by the combustion of distinct material to cause them to illuminate. The particularly shaped bodies being either in the form of incandescent mantles or having configurations of different shape than that of incandescent mantles. The particularly shaped bodies are not intended to be consumed by the flame or combustion while normally giving off light.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Fastening incandescent mantles or other incandescent bodies to lamp parts; Suspension devices for incandescent mantles or other incandescent bodies

F21V 19/06

Arrangements of incandescent mantles or other incandescent bodies on burners

F21V 36/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Burners in general

F23D

Electric incandescent lamps

H01K

Masers, lasers

H01S

Light emitting diodes

H01L 33/00

Electric discharge tubes or discharge lamps

H01J

Electric arc lamps

H05B 31/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Incandescent mantle

A device comprising a lace-like hood or envelope of thin, porous, refractory material that glows when it is positioned in a flame or otherwise heated by distinct combustible material

Light source

The entity (e.g. mantle) that generates light for a lighting device or apparatus

F21K - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

The following light sources per se:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass is a residual place for light sources not otherwise provided for.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Electric incandescent lamps

H01K

Masers, lasers

H01S

Semiconductor devices adapted for light emission

H01L 33/00, H01L 51/50-H01L 51/56

Elöectric arc lamps

H05B 31/00

Electroluminescent light sources

H05B 33/00

Candles

C11C 5/00

Electric discharge tubes or discharge lamps

H01J

Incandescent mantles; other incandescent bodies heated by combustion

F21H

Fireworks

F42B 4/00

Photographic flash units

G03B 15/03

Explosive or thermic compositions

C06B

Luminescent materials

C09K 11/00

Selection of luminescent materials for light screens

F21V 9/16

Using a radioactive source to excite a material into luminescence

G21H 3/02, H01J 65/06

Light pointers

G02B 27/20

Burners

F23D

Special rules of classification

If the disclosure gives no indication as to whether it relates to electrical means or not, it should be classified as if it were in fact electric.

F21L - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Lighting devices, lighting apparatus, or systems of lighting devices or apparatus which are specially adapted to be carried, e.g. by hand, or otherwise transported from place to place, e.g. on wheeled supports, in order to provide illumination as where required. The light source of the lighting devices or lightning apparatus may be either electrically powered (e.g. supplied with electric batteries, electric cells, electric generators, or flexible cables for electric mains connections) or non-electrically powered (e.g. combustible torches, flares, or gas lanterns and miner’s hand-lamps).

Details and components specially adapted to be used for carrying or transporting lighting devices, lighting apparatus, or systems of lighting devices or apparatus.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

The borderline between subclasses F21L and F21S is defined by the words "portable" and "fixed", not by "movable" and "non-movable". For example lighting devices or systems used in the operation of vehicles, e.g. headlights, which are fixed on the vehicle and move together with the vehicle when it is travelling are considered to be non-portable since they are components of the vehicle that are fixed relative to the remainder of the vehicle at a permanent location. Such lighting devices are classified in subclass F21S.

However, a lighting device transported by a vehicle between locations and used for lighting purposes not related to their vehicle’s operation is classified in F21L.

Functional features or details of lighting devices or systems are classified in subclass F21V.

Class F21 provides for the physical arrangements of light sources in general and subclass F21L provides for lighting devices having an electric or non-electric light source in an arrangement that is specially adapted to be portable or easily transported.

Non-electric lighting devices are classified in groups F21L 17/00-F21L 26/00 only if a special adaptation to the use of a non-electric source is of interest. If there is no such special adaptation, classification is made in a relevant general place.

In this subclass, it is desirable to add the indexing codes of subclass F21W in order to indicate the uses or applications of lighting devices, and of F21Y in order to indicate the form of the light sources of lighting devices.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Lighting devices or systems for fixed installation, e.g. vehicle lighting or for use essentially at a permanent location

F21S
Examples of Places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Structural combinations of lighting devices with other articles, not otherwise provided for

F21V 33/00

Light pointers

G02B 27/20

Illuminating scene or taking photographs

G03B 15/02

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Light source

The entity (e.g. light bulb, gas mantle, combustible charge) that generates light for a lighting device or apparatus.

The light source of the lighting devices or lighting apparatus may be electrically powered (e.g. power is supplied by electric batteries, electric cells, electric generators, flexible cables for electric mains constructions), non-electrically powered (e.g. power is created by combustible fuels, triboluminescence) or a naturally occurring source of light (e.g. sunlight).

F21S - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Lighting devices, lighting apparatus, or systems of lighting devices or apparatus which are specially adapted for fixed installation relative to the places at or articles on which they are installed. The installation can be at an immobile location such as the wall or the ceiling of a building (e.g. ceiling light) or on a mobile article having a primary purpose other than the transport of the lighting device or system such as a passenger vehicle (e.g. car lighting);

Lighting devices, lighting apparatus, or systems of lighting devices or apparatus which are specially adapted for use at a permanent location for a prolonged period of time (e.g. free-standing floor or table lamps);

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Non-electric lighting devices or systems are classified in groups F21S 11/00-F21S 15/00 only if a special adaptation related to the use of a non-electric light source is of interest. If there is no such special adaptation, classification is made in a relevant general place. When patent documents disclose only general-purpose lighting devices or light sources proper for class F21, e.g., a lamp, they are classified based upon their claimed or fully disclosed features, and when this is not possible, they are classified within the group for electric lighting devices or sources that otherwise covers their invention information.

Class F21 provides for the physical arrangements of light sources in general and subclass F21S provides for lighting devices having an electric or non-electric light source in an arrangement that is intended for stationary use and not specially adapted to be portable or easily transported.

The borderline between subclasses F21L and F21S is defined by the words "portable" and "fixed", not by "movable" and "non-movable". For example lighting devices or systems used in the operation of vehicles, e.g. headlights, which are fixed on the vehicle and move together with the vehicle when it is travelling are considered to be non-portable since they are components of the vehicle that are fixed relative to the remainder of the vehicle at a permanent location. Such lighting devices are classified in F21S.

However, a lighting device transported by a vehicle between temporary use locations where it is used for lighting purposes not related to their vehicle’s operation is classified in F21L.

Functional features or details of lighting devices or systems are classified in F21V.

In this subclass, it is desirable to add the indexing codes of subclass F21W in order to indicate the uses or applications of lighting devices, and of F21Y in order to indicate the form of the light sources of lighting devices.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or icorporated in a larger system:

Lights for cultivation in receptacles, forcing frames, greenhouses

A01G 9/20

Aquaria

A01K 63/06

Catching insects

A01M 1/04, A01M 1/08

Baker’ ovens

A21B 3/10

Shop windows or showcases

A47F 11/10

Toy vehicles

A63H 17/28

Model railways

A63H 19/20

Railway vehicles

B61D 29/00

Railway light signal

B61L 5/18

Points, form signals, or gates

B61L 9/00

Cycles

B62J 6/00

Ships

B63B 45/00

Aircraft

B64D 47/02

Sewing machines

D05B 79/00

Road surface markings

E01F 9/053

Locks or keys

E05B 17/10

Structural combinations of lighting devices with other articles, not otherwise provided for

F21V 33/00

Air conditioning systems

F24F 3/056

Outlets for directing air into rooms or spaces combined with lighting fixtures

F24F 13/078

Cooling or freezing apparatus

F25D 27/00

Furnaces, kilns, ovens or etorts

F27D 21/02

Illuminating scene for taking photographs

G03B 15/02

Traffic lights

G08G 1/095

Illuminated signs

G09F 13/00

Aircraft advertising

G09F 21/10, G09F 21/14

Advertising on ships

G09F 21/20

Lighting of aerials

H01Q 1/06

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement of signaling or lighting devices, the mounting or supporting thereof or circuits therefore, for vehicles in general

B60Q

Candle holders

F21V 35/00

Combustion apparatus

F23

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Light source

The entity (e.g. mantle) that generates light for a lighting device or apparatus.

The light source of the lighting devices or lighting apparatus may be electrically powered (e.g. power is supplied by electric batteries, electric cells, electric generators, flexible cables for electric mains constructions), non-electrically powered (e.g. power is created by combustible fuels, triboluminescence) or a naturally occurring source of light (e.g. sunlight).

F21S 8/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement of signalling or lighting devices, the mounting or supporting thereof or circuits therefor, for vehicles in general

B60Q

F21V - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Functional features or details of lighting devices or systems of lighting devices, e.g.:

Lighting devices combined with articles having a primary function unrelated to lighting that are not otherwise provided for.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Details of non-electric lighting devices or systems are classified in groups F21V 35/00-F21V 37/02 only if a special adaptation related to the use of a non-electric light source is of interest. If there is no such special adaptation, classification is made in a relevant general place, e.g. in F21V 21/00 for suspending arrangements.

In this subclass, it is desirable to add the indexing codes of subclass F21W in order to indicate the uses or applications of lighting devices, and of F21Y in order to indicate the form of the light sources of lighting devices.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Fishing nets

A01K 75/02

Fishing baits

A01K 85/01

Walking Sticks or umbrellas

A45B 3/02

Bags, purses or the like

A45C 15/06

Toilet or cosmetic powder containers

A45D 33/32

Shaving mirrors

A45D 42/10

Suction cleaners

A47L 9/30

Medical instruments for examining body cavities or tubes

A61B 1/00

Clubs

A63B 15/02

Balls

A63B 43/06

Roller skates or skate boards

A63C 17/26

Tops

A63H 1/24

Toy vehicles

A63H 17/28

Spanners, wrenches, screwdrivers

B25B 23/18

Hair clippers or dry shavers

B26B 19/46

Acessoires for razors

B26B 21/46

Typewriters or selective printing machines

B41J 29/19

Writing implements

B43K 29/10

Life-buyos, life-belts, lifejackets

B63C 9/20

Apparatus for transferring liquids

B67D 7/86

Locks or keys

E05B 17/10

Night sights

F41G 1/35

Levels

G01C 9/32

Compasses

G01C 17/24

Microscopes

G02B 21/06

Magnifying glasses

G02B 25/02

Optical instruments

G02B 27/34

Spectacles

G02C 11/04

Liquid crystals

G02F 1/13357

Electrochromic cells

G02F 1/157

Cameras

G03B 15/03

Advertising or display means on roads or walls

G09F 19/22

Aircraft advertising

G09F 21/10, G09F 21/14

Illuminated advertising on or in specific articles

G09F 23/04

Indicating lamps in circuit-breaker switches

H01H 73/14

Indicating lamps in fuses

H01H 85/32

Coupling devices with built-in light bulbs

H01R 13/717

Fastening electric light sources solely by the coupling device

H01R 33/00

Illuminating of telephone substation equipment

H04M 1/22

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Optical elements or systems in general

G02B

Light guides per se, structural details of arrangements of light guides with other optical elements

G02B 6/00

Luminescent materials per se

C09K 11/00

Luminescent light devices per se

H05B 33/00

Arrangements of signaling or lighting devices, the mounting or supporting thereof or circuits thereof for vehicles in general

B60Q

Stands for supporting apparatus or articles in general

F16M 11/00

Electric circuits per se

H05B 37/00-H05B 43/00

Safety devices in general

F16P

Electric protective circuit arrangements per se

H02H 7/00

Storing length of cable in general

B65H

Air-treatment or air-conditioning systems with air-flow over lighting fixtures, e.g. for the purpose of using or dissipating the heat therefrom

F24F 3/056, F24F 13/078

Cooling arrangements structurally associated with electric lamps

H01J 61/52, H01K 1/58

Special rules of classification

Details of non-electric lighting devices or systems are classified in groups F21V 35/00-F21V 37/02 only if a special adaptation related to the use of a non-electric light source is of interest. If there is no such special adaption, classification is made in a relevant general place, e.g. in F21V 21/00 for suspending arrangements.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Light source

The entity (e.g. light bulb, gas mantle,, combustible charge) that generates light for a lighting device or apparatus.

The light source of the lighting devices or lighting apparatus may be electrically powered (e.g. power is supplied by electric batteries, electric cells, electric generators, flexible cables for electric mains constructions), non-electrically powered (e.g. power is created by combustible fuels, triboluminescence) or a naturally occurring source of light (e.g. sunlight).

F21V 7/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cooling by other means, e.g. fluid

F21V 29/00

F21V 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

By means of a combination of two or more elements covered by a single one of main groups

F21V 1/00-F21V 11/00

F21V 15/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

In general

F16F 15/04

F21V 21/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement of signalling or lighting devices, the mounting or supporting thereof or circuits therefor, for vehicles in general

B60Q

Stands for supporting apparatus or articles in general

F16M 11/00

F21V 23/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric circuits per se

H05B 39/00

F21V 25/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

In general

F16P

Protective circuit arrangements per se

H02P 7/00

F21V 27/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Storing lengths of cable in general

B65H

F21W - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Lighting devices, lighting apparatus, or lighting systems that are combined with other specific articles (e.g. cabinets) or structures (e.g. home roofs) or that are used to illuminate specific types of articles or structures (e.g. roadways, pools) having a primary purpose other than lighting. The following exemplify the types or articles or structures with which the lighting devices, lighting apparatus, or lighting systems are commonly associated or the purposes for which they are commonly used:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

F21W is an indexing scheme associated with subclasses F21L, F21S and F21V. In these subclasses particular uses or applications of lighting devices cannot be indicated by classification. Uses or applications are instead indicated by indexing in this subclass. Documents can only be indexed in this subclass if they are first classified in F21L, F21S or F21V.

Uses or applications that are fully identified by classification in another class should not be indexed again in this subclass.

F21Y - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

The general shape or appearance (e.g. point-like, elongated type, planar type) of the various light sources used within lighting devices, lighting apparatus, or systems of lighting devices or apparatus.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Subclass F21Y is an indexing scheme associated with subclasses F21L, F21S and F21V. In these subclasses the shape or appearance of the light sources of different lighting devices are normally not indicated by classification symbols. These features of light sources are instead indicated by indexing in this subclass. Documents can only be indexed in this subclass if they are first classified in subclass F21L, F21S or F21V.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Light source

The entity (e.g. light bulb, gas mantle, combustible charge) that generates light for a lighting device or apparatus.

The light source of the lighting devices or lighting apparatus may be electrically powered (e.g. power is supplied by electric batteries, electric cells, electric generators, flexible cables for electric mains constructions), non-electrically powered (e.g. power is created by combustible fuels, triboluminescence) or a naturally occurring source of light (e.g. sunlight).

F22B - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Chemical or physical apparatus for generating gases

B01J

Generating combustion products of high pressure or high velocity

F23R

Water heaters not for steam generation

F24H, F28

Cleaning of internal or external surfaces of heat-transfer conduits, e.g. water tubes of boilers

F28G

F22G - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cleaning of internal or external surfaces of heat-transfer conduits, e.g. water tubes of boilers

F28G

F23B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

General function-oriented aspects of methods and apparatus for combustion of solid fuel wherein the main body of fuel is either

and wherein the combustion does not involve liquid or gaseous fuels, or pulverulent fuel burned in suspension.

The solid fuel can be in the form of lumps or pieces (e.g. coal, briquettes or firewood) or pulverulent or granulated (e.g. coal powder, wood pellets or wood chips)

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Relationship between this subclass and application subclasses of class F23

Subclass F23G (Cremation furnaces; Consuming waste by combustion) is to be seen as an application place in relation to the function-oriented aspects of this subclass. In case of doubt, classification should be made in both subclasses, or in both F23G and detail subclasses of class F23.

Classification is made in this subclass if the method or apparatus is

Classification is made in F23G if a method or apparatus is specially adapted for combustion of any of the following types of substances:

Subclass F23R (Generating combustion products of high pressure or high velocity), especially group 5/00, is also to be seen as an application place in relationship to this subclass. Classification is made in F23R if the apparatus or method is specially adapted for generating combustion products of high pressure or high velocity.

Relationship between this subclass and other application places

Combustion of solid fuel is often used for purpose of heating or performing different operations. Apparatus for combustion of solid fuel can be self-contained devices, but are often part of, or used in connection with, heat-consuming apparatus, such as heating boilers. This subclass is therefore related to several places providing for uses of heat. In many of these fields the solid fuel combustion apparatus can be considered a detail of a bigger entity. A non-exhaustive list of examples of such classes or subclasses will be found under the heading "Informative references" below.

Combinations of combustion apparatus with other apparatus, where the combustion apparatus can be seen as a detail of the complete apparatus (for example of a steam boiler), are classified as a whole, in the place for the other apparatus. Additional classification is made in this subclass only if features relating to the combustion apparatus per se are of interest apart from its application.

Relationship between this subclass and detail subclasses of class F23

Subclasses F23H-F23Q are to be seen as detail places in relation to this subclass. Classification is made in this subclass if the apparatus as a whole is of interest or if a detail is of use only for a particular type of combustion apparatus and not specifically provided for in any of subclasses F23H-F23Q. If a detail of a combustion apparatus is of interest, classification is made in the relevant subclass providing for such matter.

Relationship between this subclass and places for gasification or destructive distillation

C10B covers destructive distillation of carbonaceous material for production of gas, coke, tar or similar matter.

C10J covers production of combustible gases containing carbon monoxide from solid carbonaceous fuels.

Classification is made in these subclasses if the combustible substances produced, e.g. gases or coke, are burned in an apparatus separate from the gasification or distillation apparatus.

Classification is made in this subclass if complete combustion takes place in the same apparatus as the gasification, for example in different parts of the same combustion chamber or in an afterburner immediately connected to a primary combustion chamber.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Combustion of both solid fuel and fluid fuel, simultaneously or alternately

F23C 1/00, F23D 17/00

Combustion of solid fuel suspended in a stream of air, e.g. combustion in fluidised beds or combustion of pulverised fuel using burners where the fuel is transported into the combustion chamber by an air stream

F23C, F23D 1/00

Combustion of solid fuel suspended in a liquid, e.g. combustion of coal-water slurry

F23C, F23D

Combustion of fuels that are solid at room temperatures, but burned in melted form, e.g. candle wax

C11C 5/00, F23C, F23D
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Baking ovens

A21B

Cooking apparatus

A47J

Lighting

F21

Generating steam

F22B

Combustion specially adapted for waste or low grade fuel

F23G

Domestic stoves or ranges for cooking or local heating

F24B, F24C

Domestic heating systems or space-heating systems

F24D

Heating of fluids, e.g. air or water

F24H

Drying

F26B

Heat treatment of material or articles

F27

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Places for details of general applicability for combustion apparatus

Grates, cleaning or raking of grates

F23H

Removal or treatment of combustion products (e.g. flue gases) or combustion residues (e.g. ash)

F23J

Feeding fuel

F23K

Supplying air or other non-combustible liquids or gases (e.g. water or steam)

F23L

Constructional details of combustion chambers, not otherwise provided for

F23M

Regulating or controlling combustion

F23N

Ignition

F23Q
Other places

Chemical or biological purification of waste gases

B01D 53/34

Chemical or physical processes or apparatus in general

B01J

Heat-producing reactions of chemical substances, other than combustion (e.g. of hydrogen peroxide and methane, or iron oxide and aluminium)

C, F24J

Combustionapparatus using fluid fuel or solid fuel suspended in air

F23C

Burners for fluid fuel or solid fuel suspended in air

F23D

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, the first place priority rule is applied, i.e. at each hierarchical level, classification is made in the first appropriate place

In this subclass methods are classified in the groups that cover the apparatus used. Methods that are of general applicability are classified in group F23B 90/00.

When classifying in the advanced level in this subclass it is desirable to add the indexing codes of groups F23B 101/00-F23B 103/02.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

air

a mixture of gases containing free oxygen and able to promote or support combustion

primary air

air supplied to the burning fuel in order to liberate combustible gases

secondary air

air supplied to the combustible gases liberated by the primary air in order to complete their combustion. The term "secondary air" covers "tertiary air" etc.

ash

means any solid combustion residues, for example remaining in the fuel bed or suspended in the flue gases

Burner

a device by which fluid fuel or solid fuel suspended in air is passed to a combustion space where it burns to produce a self-supporting flame

combustion

means the direct combination of oxygen gas (e.g. in air) and a burnable substance

combustion chamber

a chamber in which fuel is burned to establish a self-supporting fire or flame and which surrounds that fire or flame

combustion zone

the part of the apparatus where the reaction takes place between air and fuel

flue gases

any gaseous products of combustion

grate

a perforated surface (e.g. a grid) which supports or delimits a bed of burning fuel and serves to supply primary air

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expression/word "boiler" is often used with the meaning "combustion apparatus", even when heating of water or other liquids is of no interest

In patent documents the expression/word "burner" is often used with the meaning "combustion apparatus", and not in the restricted meaning defined above.

F23B 10/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Combustion apparatus including two or more combustion chambers in which one of the combustion chambers works as a secondary combustion chamber

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Waste or low grade fuel incinerators with separate secondary combustion chamber

F23G 5/16

Combustion methods or apparatus adapted for combustion of waste gases or noxious gases, e.g. exhaust gases

F23G 7/06

Combustion apparatus using fluent fuel with two or more combustion chambers in series connection

F23C 6/04

F23B 20/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Portable or movable incinerators for waste

F23G 5/40

F23B 30/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Waste incinerators having rotating drums

F23G 5/20

Revolving cylindrical grates per se

F23H 9/02

F23B 30/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Travelling grates per se

F23H 11/00

F23B 30/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Grates with movable bars per se

F23H 7/00, F23H 9/00

F23B 40/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Pneumatic feeding arrangements per se

F23K 3/02

Spreader stokers per se

F23K 3/18

F23B 40/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Under-feed arrangements per se

F23K 3/10

F23B 50/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Over-feed arrangements per se

F23K 3/16

Stoves with fuel storage in hoppers

F24B 1/08, F24B 1/16

F23B 80/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for conducting smoke or fumes per se

F23J 11/00

Flue gas circulation on or around stoves

F24B 5/00

F23B 80/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Baffles or deflectors for combustionproducts per se

F23M 9/00

F23B 90/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ignition in general

F23Q

Controlling combustion

F23N

F23B 90/04 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Combustion apparatus including separate secondary combustion chambers

F23B 10/02

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Waste or low grade fuel incinerators with secondary combustion

F23G 5/14

Combustion methods or apparatus adapted for combustion of waste gases or noxious gases, e.g. exhaust gases

F23G 7/06

Supplying secondary air

F23L 9/00

F23B 90/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Among combustion methods including secondary combustion, those involving gasificationor pyrolysis in a reductive atmosphere in the primary zone, and, involving combustion in an oxidative atmosphere in the secondary zone.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Combustion methods or apparatus adapted for waste or low grade fuel including pyrolising or gasifying as pretreatment

F23G 5/027

Destructive distillation of carbonaceous materials

C10B 53/00

F23B 90/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Combustion apparatus using fluent fuel in which combustion takes place in the presence of catalytic material

F23C 13/00

Combustion methods or apparatus adapted for combustion of waste gases or noxious gases, e.g. exhaust gases, in which combustion takes place in the presence of catalytic material

F23G 7/07

F23C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

General function-oriented aspects of methods and apparatus for combustion of

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Relationship between this subclass and application subclasses of class F23

F23G (Cremation furnaces; Consuming waste by combustion) is to be seen as an application place in relation to the function-oriented aspects of combustion covered by this subclass. In case of doubt, classification should be made in both subclasses, or in both F23G and detail subclasses of class F23.

Classification is made in F23C if the methods or apparatus are

Classification is made in F23G if the methods or apparatus are specially adapted for combustion of the following types of substances:

F23R (Generating combustion products of high pressure or high velocity) is also to be seen as an application place in relationship to this subclass.

Classification is made in F23R if the apparatus or method is specially adapted for generating combustion products of high pressure or high velocity.

Relationship between this subclass and other application places

Combustion is often used for the purpose of heating or performing different operations. Apparatus for combustion can be self-contained devices, but are often part of, or used in connection with, heat-consuming apparatus, such as heating boilers. This subclass is therefore related to several places providing for uses of heat. In many of these fields the combustionapparatus can be considered a detail of a bigger entity. A non-exhaustive list of examples of such classes or subclasses will be found under the heading "Informative references" below.

Combinations of combustion apparatus with other apparatus, where the combustion apparatus can be seen as a detail of the complete apparatus (for example of a steam boiler), are classified as a whole, in the place for the other apparatus. Additional classification is made in this subclass only if features relating to the combustion apparatus per se are of interest apart from its application.

Relationship between this subclass and detail subclasses of class F23

Subclass F23D covers burners per se, as defined in the section "Glossary" below. Classification is made in F23C if the subject matter to be classified, in addition to a burner, includes further features that are of interest, such as a particular form of combustion chamber or a particular arrangement of burners in a combustion chamber. Air supply means that are arranged in immediate connection with the fuel-feeding conduit of a burner, for example concentric with it, should be considered to be part of the burner. Means for feeding air otherwise than in immediate connection with the fuel-feeding conduit of a burner are classified in F23C or F23L, for example arrangements for feeding secondary air at points distant from a burner.

Subclasses F23J-F23Q are to be seen as detail places in relation to this subclass. Classification is made in this subclass if the apparatus as a whole is of interest, or if a detail is of use only for a particular type of combustion apparatus and not specifically provided for in any of subclasses F23J-F23Q. If a detail of a combustion apparatus is of interest, classification is made in the relevant subclass providing for such matter.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Burners

F23D

Candles

C11C 5/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Baking ovens

A21B

Cooking apparatus

A47J

Gas turbine plants

F02C

Lighting

F21

Generating steam

F22B

Combustion specially adapted for waste or low grade fuel

F23G

Generating combustion products of high temperature or high pressure

F23R

Domestic stoves or ranges for cooking or local heating

F24C

Domestic heating systems or space-heating systems

F24D

Heating of fluids, e.g. air or water

F24H

Drying

F26B

Heat treatment of material or articles

F27

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Places for details of general applicability for combustion apparatus

Removal or treatment of combustion products (e.g. flue gases) or combustion residues (e.g. ash)

F23J

Feeding fuel

F23K

Supplying air or other non-combustible liquids or gases (e.g. water or steam)

F23L

Constructional details of combustion chambers, not otherwise provided for

F23M

Regulating or controlling combustion

F23N

Ignition

F23Q
Other places

Chemical or biological purification of waste gases

B01D 53/34

Chemical or physical processes or apparatus in general

B01J

Heat-producing reactions of chemical substances, other than combustion (e.g. of hydrogen peroxide and methane, or iron oxide and aluminium)

C, F24J

Combustion using solid fuel only

F23B

Special rules of classification

In this subclass methods are classified in the groups that cover the apparatus used.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

air

a mixture of gases containing free oxygen and able to promote or support combustion

primary air

air supplied to the burning fuel (e.g. together with the fuel) in order to liberate combustible gases

secondary air

air supplied to the combustible gases liberated by the primary air in order to complete their combustion. The expression "secondary air" covers "tertiary air" etc.

Burner

a device by which fluid fuel or solid fuel suspended in air is passed to a combustion space where it burns to produce a self-supporting flame. A burner includes the means for feeding air that are arranged in immediate connection with a fuel feeding conduit, for example concentric with it.

combustion

the direct combination of oxygen gas, e.g. in air, and a burnable substance

combustion chamber

a chamber in which fuel is burned to establish a self-supporting fire or flame and which surrounds that fire or flame

combustion zone

the part of an apparatus where the reaction takes place between air and fuel

Synonyms and Keywords

CFB

Circulating fluidised bed

CWS

Coal-water slurry

EHC

Electrically-heated catalyst

FBN

Fuel bound nitrogen

HC

Hydrocarbons

NOx

Nitrous oxides

PFBC

Pressurised fluidised bed combustion

SOx

Sulfur oxides

UHC

Unburned hydrocarbons

In patent documents the expression/word "boiler" is often used with the meaning "combustion apparatus", even when heating of water or other liquids is of no interest

In patent documents the expression/word "burner" is often used with the meaning "combustion apparatus", and not in the restricted meaning defined above

F23C 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Waste incinerators having supplementary heating by gaseous or liquid fuel

F23G 5/12

F23C 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements or dispositions of combustionapparatus in steam boilers

F22B 31/00

Arrangement or mounting of burners in fluid heaters

F24H 9/18

F23C 6/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Heat supply in steam boilers by installation of two or more combustionapparatus

F22B 31/04

Waste incinerators with secondary combustion in a separate combustion chamber

F23G 5/16

Water heaters having plural combustion chambers

F24H 1/46

F23C 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Combustion apparatus using solid fuel with means for returning combustion products or flue gases

F23B 70/00, F23B 80/02

F23C 10/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Chemical or physical processes according to "fluidised-bed" technique in general

B01J 8/24

Waste incinerators having a fluidised bed

F23G 5/30

Fluidised bed furnaces or other similar apparatus for heat treatment of materials or articles

F27B 15/00

F23C 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Incinerators for waste gases or noxious gases in which combustion takes place in the presence of catalytic material

F23G 7/07

Combustion chambers for generating combustionproducts of high pressure or high velocity, characterised by the use of catalytic means

F23R 3/40

F23C 13/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Catalysts per se

B01J 21/00-B01J 38/00

F23C 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Intermittent or explosive combustion chambers for generating combustionproducts of high pressure or high velocity

F23R 7/00

F23D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Burners, i.e. devices by which fluid fuel, or solid fuel suspended in air, is passed to a combustion space where it burns to produce a self-supporting flame, for example burners in which:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass is the main function-oriented place for burners. Classification is always made in this subclass if the subject matter is of general interest for burners.

Burners are used in many fields where heat is generated or used. Burners per se are only classified in these application fields if they are specially adapted for a specific application, for example coating by flame spraying. Examples of application fields can be found in the section "References relevant to classification in this subclass" below. In case of doubt, classification should be made both in this subclass and the application field.

Classification is made in F23C if the subject matter to be classified, in addition to a burner, includes further features of a combustion apparatus, such as a particular form of combustion chamber or a particular arrangement of burners in a combustion chamber.

Feeding air

Air supply means that are arranged in immediate connection with the fuel-feeding conduit of a burner, for example concentric with it, are considered to be part of the burner. Means for feeding air otherwise than in immediate connection with the fuel-feeding conduit of a burner, for example arrangements for feeding secondary air at points distant from a burner, are classified in F23C 7/00 or F23L.

Control of combustion, methods of combustion

With the exception of devices or methods that are specially adapted to particular types of burners, for example the matter of the following groups:

This subclass does not cover control of combustion, which is covered by F23N, or methods of combustion, which are covered by F23C.

Catalytic combustion

With the exception of radiant gas burners using catalysis for flameless combustion, which is covered by F23D 14/18, this subclass does not cover the combustion of fluid fuels in the presence of catalytic material, which is covered by F23C 10/01, F23C 13/00 and F23G 7/07.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Candles

C11C 5/00

Combustion in a fluidised bed of fuel or other particles

F23C 10/00

Apparatus in which combustion takes place in pulses influenced by acoustic resonance in a gas mass

F23C 15/00

Igniting of burners

F23Q
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Flame throwers for destroying noxious animals or plants

A01M 15/00

Bakers’ ovens

A21B 1/00

Cooking devices, e.g. travelling cookers or barbecues

A47J 36/00, A47J 37/00

Soldering

B23K 1/00, B23K 3/00

Gas flame welding or cutting

B23K 5/00

Cutting, scarfing, or desurfacing by applying flames

B23K 7/00

Using burners in chemical vapour deposition

C23C 16/453

Heating boreholes or wells with burners

E21B 36/02

Using burners for regenerating exhaust gas filters

F01N 3/025

Gas-turbine plants

F02C

Jet-propulsion plants

F02K

Using burners for ignition of internal combustion engines

F02P 19/00

Incandescent mantles

F21H

Non-electric portable lighting devices

F21L 17/00-F21L 27/00

Non-electric non-portable lighting devices

F21S 13/00-F21S 19/00

Arrangements of mantles or other incandescent bodies on lighting burners

F21V 36/00

Details of lighting devices employing combustion as light source

F21V 37/00

Steam boilers

F22B

Arrangement of burners in combustion apparatus

F23C 5/00

Methods or apparatus specially adapted for combustion of waste or low-grade fuels. e.g. waste oil, waste liquors or waste gases

F23G

Lighters containing fuel

F23Q 2/00

Ignition using burners

F23Q 9/00, F23Q 13/00

Generating combustion products of high pressure or high velocity, e.g. gas turbine burners

F23R

Stoves or ranges for liquid or gaseous fuels

F24C

Fluid heaters having heat-generating means, e.g. heating boilers

F24H

Arrangement of burners in fluid heaters

F24H 9/18

Arrangement of burners in furnaces or ovens for heat treatment

F27B

Using burners for cleaning heat exchangers

F28G 11/00

Flame-throwers for attack or defence

F41H 9/02

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Spraying or atomising apparatus in general; Nozzles in general

B05B

Fuels

C10H-C10L

Pressure vessels for gases

F17C

Methods or apparatus for combustion using fluid fuel in general

F23C

Air supply specially adapted for combustion of fluid fuels

F23C 7/00

Arrangement of devices for supplying chemicals to fire

F23J 7/00

Feeding liquid or gaseous fuel to combustion apparatus

F23K

Supply of air or non-combustible liquids or gases to combustion apparatus in general

F23L

Details of combustion chambers, e.g. linings, doors or baffles

F23M

Regulating or controlling combustion in general

F23N

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Air

a mixture of gases containing free oxygen and able to promote or support combustion

Primary air

air supplied to the burning fuel (e.g. together with the fuel) in order to liberate combustible gases

Secondary air

air supplied to the combustible gases liberated by the primary air in order to complete their combustion. The expression "secondary air" covers "tertiary air" etc.

Burner

a device by which fluid fuel or solid fuel suspended in air is passed to a combustion space where it burns to produce a self-supporting flame. A burner includes the means for feeding air that are arranged in immediate connection with a fuel feeding conduit, for example concentric with it.

Combustion

the direct combination of oxygen gas, e.g. in air, and a burnable substance

Combustion chamber

a chamber in which fuel is burned to establish a self-supporting fire or flame and which surrounds that fire or flame

Combustion space

the zone downstream of the fuel (and, where applicable, air) outlet where the reaction takes place between air and fuel

Pilot flame

a small flame that is lit or kept alight in order to provide ignition to a more powerful burner.

Retention flame

a small flame that is kept alight in order to maintain the uninterrupted operation of a more powerful burner

Torch

a burner fired with fuel gas and oxygen and specially adapted to apply heat to a workpiece, for example for use in welding, cutting or brazing

F23D 3/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Candles per se

C11C

F23D 11/38 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Nozzles in general

B05B

F23D 14/48 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Nozzles in general

B05B

F23D 14/56 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Scarfing by applying flames

B23K 7/00

F23D 14/68 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Filtering

B01D

Moistening combustionair in general

F23L 7/00

F23D 14/72 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Protection or supervision of pipe-line systems

F17D 5/00

F23D 14/74 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preventing flame lift-off

F23D 14/74

F23D 14/82 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Preventing flashback or blowback

F23D 14/82

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preventing flashback or blowback in gas feed lines

A62C 4/02

F23D 23/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement or mounting of burners

F23C 5/00

For industrial furnaces

F27

F23G - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods or apparatus specially adapted for combustion of the following substances:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Relationship with general function-oriented places in class F23

This subclass is to be seen as an application place in relation to the function-oriented aspects covered by F23B (Combustionapparatus using only solid fuel) and F23C (Combustionapparatus using fluid fuel or solid fuel suspended in air).

Classification is made in F23B or F23C if the method or apparatus is

If methods or apparatus covered by this subclass are also of general interest for combustion of "normal" commercial fuels classification should also be made in other subclasses of F23. The decision on whether an apparatus is specially adapted or not is sometimes not easy to decide. In doubtful situations classification should therefore always be made in both this subclass and other subclasses of F23.

Relationship between this subclass and detail subclasses of class F23

Subclasses F23D and F23H-F23Q are to be seen as general detail places in relation to this subclass. Classification of details of apparatus in this subclass should be restricted to inventions that are clearly specially adapted for methods or apparatus that are covered by the subclass. If a detail of an apparatus is specifically covered in a group of F23D or F23H-F23Q, classification should be made in that group and not in this subclass.

Relationship between this subclass and other application places

Combustion is often used for purpose of heating or performing different operations. This subclass is therefore related to many places providing for uses of heat. In many of these fields the combustion apparatus can be considered a detail of a bigger entity. A non-exhaustive list of examples of such classes or subclasses will be found under the heading "Informative references".

Relationship between this subclass and places for gasification or destructive distillation

Classification is made in these places if the combustible substances produced, e.g. gas or coke, are burned in an apparatus separate from the gasification or distillation apparatus.

Classification is made in this subclass if complete combustion takes place in the same apparatus as the gasification, for example in different parts of the same combustion chamber or in an afterburner immediately connected to a primary combustion chamber.

Relationship between this subclass and class B09

These subclasses only cover matter that is not completely covered by this subclass. Examples of such matter are processes that include a combustion step in combination with other steps that together form a process for disposal of waste or reclamation of contaminated soil.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Incinerating radioactive waste

G21F 9/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Disposal of solid waste

B09B

Reclamation of contaminated soil

B09C

Gas turbine plants

F02C

Generating steam

F22B

Generating combustion products of high temperature or high pressure

F23R

Domestic stoves or ranges for local heating or cooking

F24B, F24C

Apparatus for heat treatment of materials or articles

F27B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Places for details of general applicability for combustion apparatus

Grates, cleaning or raking of grates

F23H

Removal or treatment of combustion products (e.g. flue gases) or combustion residues (e.g. ash)

F23J

Feeding fuel

F23K

Supplying air or other non-combustible liquids or gases (e.g. water or steam)

F23L

Constructional details of combustion chambers, not otherwise provided for

F23M

Regulating or controlling combustion

F23N

Ignition

F23Q
Other places

Chemical means for combating harmful chemical agents or for making them harmless

A62D 3/00

Chemical or biological purification of waste gases

B01D 53/34

Chemical or physical processes or apparatus in general

B01J

Gathering of domestic or like refuse

B65F

Treatment of water, waste water, sewage or sludge

C02F

Destructive distillation of carbonaceous material for production of gas, coke, tar or similar matter

C10B

Production of combustible gases containing carbon monoxide from solid carbonaceous fuels

C10J

Fuels, treatment of fuels

C10L

Regeneration of pulp liquors by combustion

D21C 11/12

Combustion of "normal" commercial fuels

F23B, F23C

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

air

a mixture of gases containing free oxygen and able to promote or support combustion

primary air

air supplied to the burning fuel in order to liberate combustible gases

secondary air

air supplied to the combustible gases liberated by the primary air in order to complete their combustion. The expression "secondary air" covers "tertiary air" etc.

Burner

a device by which fluid fuel or solid fuel suspended in air is passed to a combustion space where it burns to produce a self-supporting flame. A burner includes the means for feeding air that are arranged in immediate connection with a fuel feeding conduit, for example concentric with it.

combustion

the direct combination of oxygen gas, e.g. in air, and a burnable substance

combustion chamber

a chamber in which fuel is burned to establish a self-supporting fire or flame and which surrounds that fire or flame

combustion zone

the part of a combustion apparatus where the reaction takes place between air and fuel

fuel

any combustible material that can be burned, regardless of whether the main purpose of burning it is for releasing energy therefrom or for disposing of it or rendering it less harmful

waste

an undesired material that can be consumed by combustion for the primary purpose of disposing of it or rendering it less harmful, and not solely for releasing energy therefrom

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expression "boiler" is often used instead of "combustion apparatus", even when heating of water or other liquids is of no interest.

In patent documents the expression "burner" is often used instead of "combustion apparatus" and not in the restricted meaning defined in the glossary above.

In patent documents the following abbreviations are often used:

CFB

Circulating fluidised bed

EHC

Electrically heated catalyst

FBN

Fuel-bound nitrogen

HC

Hydrocarbons

NOx

Nitrous oxides

PFBC

Pressurised fluidised bed combustion

SOx

Sulfur oxides

UHC

Unburned hydrocarbons

F23G 5/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Incineration of specific waste

F23G 7/00

F23G 5/027 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Destructive distillation of carbonaceous materials

C10B 53/00

F23G 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Burners in general, burner details

F23D

F23G 7/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Exhaust apparatus for machines, engines in general or internal combustionengines

F01N

F23L - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Supply of air or non-combustible gases or liquids to combustion apparatus in general, for example:

Special adaptations of valves or dampers for controlling combustionair supply or flue gas draught in combustion apparatus in general

Methods or devices for inducing draught in combustion apparatus, for example exhaust fans or exhaust induction apparatus

Tops for chimneys or ventilation shafts

Terminals for flues

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Combustion apparatus

This subclass is the general place for methods and apparatus for supply of air to combustion apparatus.

The incorporation of air supply means as an integrated part of an entire combustion apparatus, for example the disposition of primary and secondary air ports in relation to other components, is classified in the place for the combustion apparatus as a whole, in F23B, F23C or F23G.

Air supply means that are arranged in immediate connection with the fuel-feeding conduit of a burner (for example concentric with it) are considered to be part of the burner, and are thus classified in F23D. Other means for feeding air that are specially adapted for combustion of liquid fuel, gaseous fuel or pulverised fuel suspended in air are classified in F23C 7/00 or F23C 10/20.

Blast-producing, draught-inducing

This subclass is an application-oriented place for the arrangement of fans, inductors or other pumps in combustion apparatus for the purpose of inducing blast or draught. The integration of such devices in systems for control of combustion, for example together with sensors and actuators, is covered by F23N.

Fans and other pumps per se are classified in class F04, for examples see the section "Informative references" below.

Valves and dampers

This subclass is an application-oriented place for valves and dampers that are specially adapted for controlling air supply or draught of combustion apparatus. The integration of such devices in systems for control of combustion, for example together with sensors and actuators, is covered by F23N.

Valves or dampers that are specially adapted for controlling air supply or draught of domestic stoves are classified in F24B or F24C, for examples see the section "References relevant to classification in this subclass" below.

Valves and dampers in general are classified in F16K.

Heating of combustion air

This subclass is an application-oriented place for the heat exchange apparatus that is specially adapted for use in combustion apparatus for the purpose of heating combustionair. Heat exchangers in general are classified in class F28, for examples see the section "Informative references" below.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Returning flue gases to the combustion chamber of combustion apparatus for solid fuel

F23B 80/02

Returning flue gases to the combustion chamber of combustion apparatus for liquid or gaseous fuel or pulverised solid fuel suspended in air

F23C 9/00

Grates for combustion apparatus

F23H

Supplying chemicals to fires

F23J 7/00

Firebridges for delivery of air or steam to combustion apparatus

F23M 3/04

Cooling of casings, lining or walls of combustion chambers

F23M 5/08

Doors specially adapted for combustion chambers

F23M 7/00

Baffles or deflectors in air inlets of combustion chambers

F23M 9/02

Baffles or deflectors for air or combustion products with air-supply passages

F23M 9/04
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Steam generators

F22B

Air supply specially adapted for combustion apparatus for liquid, gaseous or pulverised fuel

F23C 7/00

Supply of fluidisation air for fluidised bed combustion apparatus

F23C 10/20

Burners

F23D

Burners where spraying of liquid fuel is induced by a gaseous medium

F23D 11/10

Gas burners specially adapted for use with means for pressurising the combustionair

F23D 14/34

Regulating or controlling air supply or draught

F23N 3/00

Systems for regulating or controlling combustion

F23N

Air inlet arrangements for combustion chambers for generating combustion products of high pressure or high velocity, e.g. for gas turbine combustion chambers

F23R 3/04

Draught control dampers for solid fuel stoves with open fires

F24B 1/189

Air supply in solid fuel stoves with open fires

F24B 1/19

Hoods for solid fuel stoves with open fires

F24B 1/195

Combustion-air or flue gas circulation in or around solid fuel stoves

F24B 5/00

Stoves for combustion of gaseous or liquid fuels, or for two or more different fuels

F24C

Fluid heaters, e.g. water or air heaters for central heating

F24H

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Positive displacement air pumps in general

F04B

Fans in general

F04D

Jet pumps in general

F04F 5/00

Valves in general

F16K

Methods or apparatus for combustion using solid fuel

F23B

Methods or apparatus for combustion using fluid fuel

F23C

Domestic stoves or ranges for solid fuels

F24B

Air humidification

F24F 6/00

Air flow control members for ventilation or air conditioning

F24F 13/08

Heat exchangers in general

F28C, F28D, F28F

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Air

a mixture of gases containing free oxygen and able to promote or support combustion

Primary air

air supplied to the burning fuel (e.g. together with the fuel) in order to liberate combustible gases

Secondary air

air supplied to the combustible gases liberated by the primary air in order to complete their combustion. The expression "secondary air" covers "tertiary air" etc.

Burner

a device by which fluid fuel or pulverised solid fuel suspended in air is passed to a combustion space where it burns to produce a self-supporting flame. A burner includes the means for feeding air that are arranged in immediate connection with a fuel feeding conduit, for example concentric with it.

Combustion

the direct combination of oxygen gas, e.g. in air, and a burnable substance

Combustion chamber

a chamber in which fuel is burned to establish a self-supporting fire or flame and which surrounds that fire or flame

Firebridge

a low wall separating the fuel bed from adjacent flue gas passages in apparatus for combustion of solid fuel, for example in reverberatory furnaces or fire-tube boilers

Flue gases

any gaseous products of combustion

Grate

a perforated surface (e.g. a grid) which supports or delimits a bed of burning solid fuel and serves to supply primary air

F23Q - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus or methods specially adapted for providing the heat, spark or flame required to start combustion of a fuel. Such apparatus can itself be a combustion apparatus (e.g. a cigarette lighter or a pilot flame) that is provided with ignition arrangements of its own.

Pilot flame igniters with interlock to main fuel supply.

Arrangement of catalytic igniters in combustion apparatus.

Arrangements for effecting ignition from a location that is remote from the combustion apparatus to be ignited, e.g. for combustion apparatus that is difficult or dangerous to access.

Testing of ignition installations.

Devices for extinguishing flames, e.g. for blowing-out or snuffing candle flames.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass is primarily intended for classification of ignition devices or extinguishing devices per se.

In relation to other subclasses that cover combustion apparatus (e.g. F23B, F23C, F23D, F23G, F23R, F24B and F24C) this subclass is a detail place. This means that classification is made in this subclass if an ignition or extinguishing device is novel or non-obvious in itself. The incorporation or arrangement of an ignition or extinguishing device in a combustion apparatus is normally classified in the place for the combustion apparatus as a whole, e.g. in F23C or F24C. In such cases the type of ignition apparatus can be indicated by additional information classification in this subclass, if it is of interest for searching. The exception to this principle is the arrangement of catalytic igniters in combustion apparatus, which is classified in group F23Q 11/00 of this subclass.

Main group F23Q 2/00 of this subclass covers "lighters containing fuel". These lighters can themselves in most cases be regarded as combustion apparatus. Features of such lighters that are of general interest for different types of combustion apparatus should be classified in relevant general places, such as F23D.

This subclass covers devices or systems where ignition is directly initiated by the start of fuel supply to a combustion apparatus. Systems or methods for starting or stopping combustion that involve manipulation of fuel and air feed in connection with the operation of an ignition or extinguishing device, or that are responsive to a sensed condition of a combustion apparatus, are normally classified in F23N. The exception to this principle is pilot flame igniters with interlock to main fuel supply, which are classified in group F23Q 9/08 of this subclass.

This subclass covers glowing plugs for compression-ignition (e.g. diesel) engines. Other ignition for internal combustion engines is covered by subclass F02P.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Devices for igniting matches

A24F 29/00

Hand fire extinguishers

A62C 11/00-A62C 25/00

Chemical igniters, e.g. catalytic igniters

C06C 9/00

Flints

C06C 15/00

Matches

C06F 5/00

Fire-lighters

C10L 11/00

Candles with incorporated means (e.g. impregnated wicks) for self-extinguishing

C11C 5/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Cigars or cigarettes with lighting devices

A24D 1/08

Extinguishing devices for cigars or cigarettes

A24F, A24F 13/18, A24F 19/14

Combinations of lighters and smokers requisites

A24F, A24F 15/10, A24F 15/18, A24F 19/10

Time-controlled igniting mechanisms for cooking-vessels

A47J 36/32

Charcoal igniting devices for barbecues or the like

A47J 37/07

Fire extinguishing specially adapted for particular objects or places

A62C 3/00

Arrangements for igniting thermal or catalytic exhaust converters

F01N 3/38

Ignition of light sources using charges of combustible material

F21K 5/12

Arrangement or mounting of ignition devices in stoves or ranges for gaseous fuel

F24C 3/10

Arrangement or mounting of ignition devices in stoves or ranges for liquid fuel

F24C 5/14

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fire-fighting

A62C

Fire-extinguishing compositions; Use of chemical substances in extinguishing fires

A62D 1/00

Explosive or thermic compositions

C06B

Detonating or priming devices; Fuses

C06C

Pyrophoric compositions

C06C 15/00

Ignition of internal-combustion engines in general

F02P

Gas burners with provision for a retention flame

F23D 14/26

Details for lighting devices

F21V

Methods or apparatus for combustion using only solid fuel

F23B

Methods or apparatus for combustion using fluid fuel or solid fuel suspended in air

F23C

Burners

F23D

Cremation furnaces; Consuming waste by combustion

F23G

Safety arrangements for combustion chambers

F23M 11/00

Regulating or controlling combustion

F23N

Generating combustion products of high pressure or high velocity, e.g. gas turbine combustion chambers

F23R

Domestic stoves or ranges for solid fuels; Implements for use in connection with stoves or ranges

F24B

Stoves or ranges for gaseous or liquid fuels

F24C

Ignition arrangements for blasting

F42D 1/04

Spark gaps; Sparking plugs

H01T

Electric heating, e.g. ohmic resistance heating

H05B, H05B 3/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Pilot flame

A small flame that is lit or kept alight in order to provide ignition to a more powerful burner.

Retention flame

A small flame that is kept alight in order to maintain the uninterrupted operation of a more powerful burner.

Fire lighter

An element that either consists of combustible material or absorbs liquid fuel, and is intended for use in a fire-place or the like for simplifying the ignition of solid fuel.

F23Q 2/173 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Valves in general

F16K

F23Q 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Specially adapted for internal-combustion engines

F02P 15/00

F23Q 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Catalytic igniters per se

C06C

F23Q 25/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For cigarettes

A24F

F23R - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Combustion chambers that are specially adapted for generation of gaseous combustion products of high pressure or high velocity, and therefore suitable for use as a source of motive power rather than merely a source of heat. Examples of such special adaptations are:

Methods of combustion in combustion chambers that are specially adapted for generation of combustion products of high pressure or high velocity.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass is to be seen as an application place in relation to the function-oriented aspects covered by other subclasses of F23. If a method or apparatus is of general interest for combustion it should be classified in other subclasses of F23, for example subclasses F23C(Methods or apparatus for combustion using fluent fuel) and F23D(Burners). If a detail is of general interest for combustion apparatus it should also be classified in other subclasses of F23, for example subclasses F23K(Feeding fuel to combustion apparatus) or F23N(Regulating or controlling combustion). It is sometimes difficult to decide whether an apparatus or a detail is specially adapted or not. In doubtful situations classification should therefore be made in both this subclass and other subclasses of F23.

This subclass covers the configuration of single combustion chambers or flame tubes, or the mutual (for example annular) arrangement of several combustion chambers or flame tubes. The incorporation or arrangement of combustion chambers within a power plant is classified in the place for the power plant as a whole, for example in subclasses F02C(Gas-turbine plants) or F02K(Jet-propulsion plants).

When the control of the combustion is integrated in the control system of an entire power plant it is classified in the place for the control system as a whole, for example in groups F02C 9/00 or F02K 3/08.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Fluidised bed combustion chambers specially adapted for operation at superatmospheric pressures

F23C 10/16
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Combined gas-turbine and steam-turbine plants

F01K 23/00

Gas-turbine plants

F02C

e.g.

F02C 3/14, F02C 5/02

Combustion-product positive-displacement engine plants

F02G

Jet-propulsion plants

F02K

e.g.

F02K 3/10

Combustion chambers for rocket engine plants, i.e. plants carrying both fuel and oxidant therefor

F02K 9/00

Starting of engines by supplying pressure fluid generated directly by combustion

F02N 9/02

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Generation of pressure gas by chemical means

C06D 5/00

Gas turbines

F01D

Combustion chambers for internal-combustion engines, combustion in internal-combustion engines

F02B

Cooling of gas turbine plants

F02C 7/12

Mounting or supporting of gas turbine plants, accommodating heat expansion or creep in gas turbine plants

F02C 7/20

Arrangement of seals in gas turbine plants

F02C 7/28

Cylinders for combustion engines

F02F 1/00

Supplying combustion engines in general with combustible mixtures or constituents thereof

F02M

Steam generation using combustion under pressure substantially exceeding atmospheric pressure

F22B 1/22

Methods or apparatus for combustion using fluent fuel in general

F23C

Air supply to combustion chambers in general

F23C 7/00, F23L

Burners in general

F23D

Feeding fuel to combustion apparatus in general

F23K

Details of combustion chambers in general

F23M

e.g. walls

F23M 5/00

Regulating or controlling combustion in general

F23N

Igniting

F23Q

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Flame tube

The portion of a combustion chamber downstream of the zone where fuel and primary air are mixed.

F24B - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Protecting plants by heating in gardens, orchards or forests

A01G 13/06

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bakers' ovens

A21B

Cooking devices other than ranges

A47J

Combustion apparatus in general

F23

F24C - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Protecting plants by heating in gardens, orchards or forests

A01G 13/06

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bakers' ovens

A21B

Cooking devices other than ranges

A47J

Combustion apparatus in general

F23

F24F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods and apparatus for air-conditioning, i.e. the supply of air to rooms or spaces by means which provide for the treatment of the air in at least two of the following ways:

Methods and apparatus for humidification of air for rooms or spaces

Methods and apparatus for supplying air or extracting air from rooms or spaces, either by forced movement (for example by fans) or by natural effects (for example convection)

Methods and apparatus for circulating air within rooms or spaces, either by forced movement (for example by fans) or by natural effects (for example convection)

Methods and apparatus for use of air currents for screening, for example of entrances of buildings or of areas where particular operations are performed

Use of energy recovery systems in air conditioning, ventilation or screening

Details, for example control arrangements, safety arrangements, ducting arrangements or air flow control members, which are specially adapted for the methods or apparatus specified above

Relationship between large subject matter areas

As regards air-conditioning, air-humidification and ventilation, this subclass is an application-oriented place that covers methods or apparatus for these processes when specially adapted for rooms or spaces that are primarily intended as dwelling or working-spaces for human beings.

Air-treatment or ventilation that is specially adapted for particular processes or for other particular environments, for example for industrial processes or for housing of animals, is covered in the places for those processes or environments. For examples of such places see the section "Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system" below.

With the exception of humidification, this subclass does not cover the mere treatment of air being supplied to, extracted from, or circulated within, rooms or spaces. Such treatment of air in general, for example heating, cooling, heat-exchange or filtering, is covered in several different places of the IPC, see for example the entries under "Informative References" below.

This subclass does not cover elements or apparatus in general for transporting air or for regulating air flow, for example fans, ducts or valves. Such elements and apparatus are covered in several different places in the IPC, see for example the entries under "Informative References" below.

This subclass does not cover ventilation of garments or furniture or other devices, which is covered by the places for those devices, for example classes A41-A47 for garments and furniture and class H01 for electrical devices.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Removing dirt or fumes from areas where they are produced

B08B 15/00

Vertical ducts for carrying away waste gases from buildings

E04F 17/02

Tops for ventilating shafts; Terminals for flues

F23L 17/02

Removing cooking fumes

F24C 15/20
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Ventilating arrangements for forage silos

A01F 25/22

Devices for ventilating greenhouses

A01G 9/24

Ventilation in animal husbandry

A01K

Controlling humidity in incubators for poultry

A01K 41/04

Treatment rooms with artificial climate for medical purposes

A61G 10/02, A61G 13/00

Devices for reconditioning breathing air in sealed rooms

A62B 11/00

Devices for ventilating gas-proof shelters

A62B 13/00

Containers or portable cabins for affording breathing protection with devices for reconditioning the breathing air or for ventilating

A62B 31/00

Dust-free rooms or enclosures for laboratories

B01L 1/04

Ventilation, air-conditioning, or cooling, specially adapted for passenger or goods spaces of vehicles

B60H

Air curtains at doors or windows of vehicles

B60J 9/04

Ventilation of driving cabins or engine rooms of locomotives or motor railcars

B61C 17/04

Heating, cooling, ventilating, or air-conditioning, specially adapted for rail vehicles

B61D 27/00

Adaptations of ventilation, cooling, heating, or air-conditioning for submarines or other underwater vessels

B63G 8/36

Arrangements of ventilation, heating, cooling, or air-conditioning specially adapted for ships or other waterborne vessels

B63J 2/00

Arrangements or adaptations of air-treatment apparatus for crew, passenger or freight spaces in aircraft

B64D 13/00

Arrangements or adaptations of devices for treatment of the atmosphere in cosmonautic vehicles

B64G 1/46

Drying cabinets or drying chambers having heating or ventilating means

D06F 58/10

Special arrangement or operation of ventilating devices in lavatories

E03D 9/04

Drying building constructions in general or keeping them dry, e.g. by air vents

E04B 1/70

Special adaptations of floors for incorporating ventilation ducts

E04B 5/48

Ceilings having means for ventilation

E04B 9/02

Ventilation of roof coverings

E04D 13/17

Ventilation of tents

E04H 15/10

Ventilation in doors or windows

E06B 7/02

Ventilation of mines or tunnels

E21F 1/00

Cooling or drying of air in mines or tunnels

E21F 3/00

Arrangements for supplying or controlling air or gases for drying solid materials or objects

F26B 21/00

Cooling, ventilating or heating of electric apparatus

H05K 7/20

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Disinfecting or sterilising of air

A61L

Filtering, washing or drying of gases

B01D

Mixing gases with vapours or liquids in general

B01F 3/02

Transportable units for separating dispersed particles from air by electrostatic effect

B03C 3/32

Spraying

B05B, B05D

Production of ozone

C01B 13/10

Heat, sound or noise insulation, absorption, or reflection

E04B 1/74

Air-ducts or air channels in buildings

E04F 17/04

Chimney stacks or similar ducts

E04H 12/28

Fans in general, details of fans

F04D

Pumping installations for air

F04D 25/08, F04D 29/00

Valves in general

F16K

Pipes in general, joints, fittings or supports therefor

F16L

Noise absorbers for ducting

F16L 55/02

Thermal insulation for ducting

F16L 59/00

Devices for venting or aerating enclosures in general

F16K 24/00

Devices for conducting smoke or fumes, e.g. flues

F23J 11/00

Domestic stoves

F24B, F24C

Hot air central heating systems

F24D 5/00

Air heaters having heat generating means

F24H 3/00

Refrigeration in general, details of refrigeration systems

F25B

Combined heating and refrigeration systems

F25B 29/00

Production, working, storing or distribution of ice

F25C

Cold rooms

F25D

Heat exchange apparatus in general, details of heat exchangers

F28C, F28D, F28F

Measuring temperature or quantity of heat in general

G01K

Testing apparatus not otherwise provided for

G01M

Control of flow in general

G05D 7/00

Control of humidity in general

G05D 22/00

Control of temperature in general

G05D 23/00

Ion sources

H01J 27/02, H01J 37/08

Arrangements for cooling, heating or ventilation of semiconductor or other solid state devices

H01L 23/34, H01L 31/024

Generating ions to be introduced into non-enclosed gases

H01T 23/00

Arrangements in telecontrol or telemetry systems in general

H04Q 9/00

Special rules of classification

Air-humidification as auxiliary treatment in air-conditioning, i.e. in units wherein the air is also either cooled or heated, is covered by groups F24F 1/00 or F24F 3/14, while air-humidification per se, e.g. "room humidifiers", is covered by group F24F 6/00.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Air-conditioning

Supply of air to rooms or spaces by means which provide for the treatment of the air in at least two of the following ways:

Heating

Cooling

Any other kind of treatment, e.g. humidification

Ventilation

Supply of air to rooms or spaces, extraction of air from rooms or spaces, or circulation of air within rooms or spaces

F24H - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Protecting plants by heating in gardens, orchards or forests

A01G 13/06

Heating, cooling or ventilating devices

B60H 1/00

Heating, cooling, ventilating or air-conditioning

B61D 27/00

Arrangements of ventilation, heating, cooling or air-conditioning

B63J 2/00

Arrangements or adaptations of air-treatmentapparatus for aircraft crew or passengers, or freight space

B64D 13/00

F27B - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Specially adapted for bakery ovens

A21B

Specially adapted for glass melting furnaces

C03B

Specially adapted for coke or gas-making apparatus

C10B, C10J

Specially adapted for apparatus for cracking hydrocarbons

C10G

Specially adapted for blast furnaces

C21B

Specially adapted for converters for making steel

C21C

Specially adapted for furnaces for heat treatment of metal

C21D

Furnaces for electroslag or arc remelting of metals

C22B 9/00

Enamelling ovens

C23D

F28D - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement or mounting of heat-exchangers in air-conditioning, air-humidification or ventilation

F24F 13/30

F28F - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangement or mounting of heat-exchangers in air-conditioning, air-humidification or ventilation

F24F 13/30

F41C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Smallarms means a firearm which is generally held with one or both hands for firing.

Smallarms in the sense of man-portable firearms, i.e. a weapon capable of launching a projectile by confined deflagration of a pyrotechnic propellant, such as pistols, rifles, shotguns or the like, and details and accessories that are unique to smallarms

Pistols:

Shoulder-fired smallarms:

Other types of smallarms:

Parts of smallarms:

Miscellaneous attachments for smallarms; accessories:

Means for wearing or carrying smallarms

Relationship between large subject matter areas

In addition to the classification of the smallarm as whole in subclass F41C the functional details of these weapons should be classified in the relevant groups of subclass F41A. F41A is added to F41C if the functional feature is a part of invention, for example F41A 3/76, F41A 9/27, F41A 15/02, F41A 3/58, F41A 19/41, F41A 5/06, F41A 11/04, F41A 23/02.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Arrangement of guns on vessels

B63G 1/00

Arrangement of military equipment in aircraft

B64D 7/00

Weapons for projecting missiles without use of explosive or combustible propellant charge

F41B
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Pistols or machine guns operated without detonators

A63H 5/04

Pistols for shooting bolts into concrete constructions, metal walls or the like

B25C

Hand-held nailing tools operated by combustion pressure generated by detonation of a cartridge

B25C 1/10

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Spades per se

A01B 1/02

Slaughtering pistols

A22B 3/02

Supports for articles placed thereon in general

F16M 11/00, F16M 13/00

Functional features or details common to both smallarms and ordnance, mountings therefor

F41A

Thrusting or cutting weapons per se

F41B 13/00

Rocket launchers adapted to be carried by a person, e.g. bazookas

F41F 3/045

Sighting devices

F41G 1/00

Armour shields per se

F41H 5/06

Shields for smallarms

F41H 5/12

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Machine gun

firearm with a long rifled barrel capable of sustained firing in full automatic mode, the projectiles are fed form a belt or a high capacity magazine can be fitted or portable

Submachine gun

short, light weight machine gun, designed to fire pistol cartridges

Rifle

shoulder fired firearm with a long rifled barrel. Rifles can be capable for firing with magazine fed projectiles in single shot mode (repeater rifle) or in semi automatic and full automatic mode (assault rifle)

Carbine

short shoulder fired firearm, originally for cavalry use

Shotgun

smooth booth bore shoulder fired firearm for firing shot at a relatively short distance

Under-barrel grenade launcher

firearm for launching grenades, can be an auxiliary firearm attach to a primary firearm, usually single shot

Synonyms and Keywords

-"machine carbine", "submachine gun" and "automatic firearm;

-"shotgun", "scattergun" and "peppergun";

-"repeater rifle" and "repeating rifle".

F41C 3/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Specially adapted for underwater use

F41C 9/06

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For slaughtering or stunning animals

A22B

F41C 3/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sealing aspects

F41A 3/76

Using a revolving drum magazine for feeding revolver-type guns, other than revolvers

F41A 9/27

Extractors or ejectors therefor

F41A 15/02

F41C 7/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Specially adapted for underwater use

F41C 9/06

F41C 7/11 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hinge-frame revolvers

F41C 3/16

Breech mechanisms therefor

F41A 3/58

Cocking mechanisms therefor

F41A 19/41

F41C 23/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Articulated or collapsible guns

F41A 11/04

F41C 23/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Pump-action guns

F41C 7/02

F41C 27/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Signal pistols

F41C 3/02

F41C 27/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Thrusting or cutting weapons, other than bayonets

F41B 13/00

F41H 11/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices or systems for clearing an area or a path through a minefield area of anti-personnel or anti-tank land mines or clearing an area of unexploded ordnance devices (UXO) or improvised explosive devices (IED) by removal of the unexploded mines, by destruction without detonation of said mines by external influence such as for example mechanical means, laser beams, magnetic fields or water-jets or by causing forced detonation of said mines by external influence such as for example mechanical means, laser beams, magnetic fields or water-jets.

Devices or systems for the detection of anti-personnel or anti-tank land mines or unexploded ordnance devices (UXO) or improvised explosive devices (IED).

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Destruction or dismantling ammunition

F42B 33/06

Rendering explosive charges harmless

F42D 5/04

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

unexploded ordnance

means explosive weapons (bombs, bullets, shells, grenades, land mines, naval mines, etc.) that did not explode when they were employed and still pose a risk of detonation

improvised explosive device

means a homemade bomb constructed and deployed in ways other than in conventional military action. It may be constructed of conventional military explosives, such as an artillery round, attached to a detonating mechanism.

demining or mine-clearing

means the process of removing land mines from an area

booby-trap

means a disguised improvised explosive device having often some form of bait designed to lure the victim towards it

Synonyms and Keywords

AP

Anti-personnel

AT

Anti-tank

EOD

Explosive Ordnance Disposal

IED

Improvised Explosive Device

IEDD

Improvised Explosive Device Disposal

PFC

Projectile Forming Charge

HE

High Explosive

RC

Radio Controlled/ Remote Controlled

UXO

UneXploded Ordnance

In patent documents the following expressions/words "mine", "UXO" and "IED" are often used as synonyms.

In patent documents the expression/word "demining" is often used instead of "mine-clearing" which is used in the classification scheme of this group.

F41H 11/13 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems or methods specific for or dedicated to the detection of landmine, unexploded ordnance devices (UXO) or improvised explosive devices (IED) lying on the surface, buried in the soil or otherwise hidden from normal view.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Detecting buried masses or objects

G01V

F41H 11/132 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems that use the senses of animals to detect mines for example by smell.

Systems that use discoloration or proliferation of certain plant or flora varieties when brought into the vicinity of landmine

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Detection of landmine by chemical analyzer systems

F41H 11/134

F41H 11/134 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems using chemical analyzer systems to detect the presence of explosive compounds or compositions, possibly in combination with other tell-tale land mine component vapours.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Investigating or analysing materials by their chemical or physical properties

G01N

F41H 11/136 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems or methods using physical properties of landmine or structure/properties of surrounding soil to detect land mines, unexploded ordnance devices (UXO) or improvised explosive devices (IED), e.g. by using heat signature, metal-detection, radiation absorption or emission.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Investigating or analyzing materials by their chemical or physical properties

G01N

Detecting buried masses or objects

G01V

F41H 11/138 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems or methods for mechanically locating mines buried in the soil, said systems not being mounted on vehicles

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for detecting avalanche victims

A63B 29/02

Mechanical mine detection systems mounted on vehicles

F41H 11/16

Detecting buried masses or objects

G01V

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

prod

means stick-like implement for detecting mines by insertion in the soil

F41H 11/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems or methods for clearing land mines by covering a path or area by means of a flexible linear-, ladder- or carpet-shaped container containing an explosive charge or charges, which container is caused to cover said mined area and has initiating means for causing land mines to be activated by the blast wave resulting from the detonation of said explosive charges.

Rigid tube-like systems filled with explosives, i.e. bangalore torpedo systems.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Line carrying missiles

F42B 12/68

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fuel-Air explosives

F42B 12/52

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

bangalore torpedo

means a rigid tube or pipe of length filled with an explosive; sections of such tube or pipe connectable to neighbouring similar sections

snake

means a flexible hose filled with explosives

thermobaric charge

means a fuel-air explosive charge

viper

means rocket propelled mine clearing snake or hose system

Synonyms and Keywords

FAE

Fuel-air explosive

In patent documents the following expressions/words "FAE", "Fuel-Air explosive" and "thermobaric" are often used as synonyms.

F41H 11/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Self-propelled vehicles dedicated to the clearing of land mines and self-propelled vehicles that have permanent or temporary fittings so that they can also, beside their normal task, be used for clearing land mines.

Mine-clearing devices or systems for clearing land mines that can be attached to non-dedicated vehicles on a pre-determined or on ad-hoc basis.

Sacrificial or decoy remote controlled vehicles that are have no land mine clearing systems per-se but are intended to activate or trigger the detonation of a land mine or IED.

Sacrificial or decoy systems attachable to a self-propelled vehicle.

Systems or vehicles using a vehicle mounted disruptor to neutralize land mines, UXOs or IEDs with a high pressure water jet, e.g. "wheel barrow" type robotic systems or using vehicle mounted devices for destroying land mines, UXOs or IEDs contactless by means of rays, beams or waves of radiation, heat, sound etc.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Armoured vehicles

F41H 7/02

Armour protection for vehicles against mine attacks

F41H 7/04

Synonyms and Keywords

EMP

electro-magnetic pulse

F41H 11/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems or methods attached to or intrinsic part of self-propelled vehicles using elements which linearly, nearly vertically impact a localized/limited ground area with a stamping element like a foot or hammer.

Systems or methods attached to or intrinsic part of self-propelled vehicles using a rotary flail system with chain mounted ground pounding/impacting means attached to a motor-driven rotating drum located on the front of the vehicle.

F41H 11/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems or methods that penetrate the top of the soil layer and remove a part of said top soil layer to reach a land mine in order to activate it, to destroy the housing of the land mine without activating it or to remove the land mine un-activated from the soil.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Vehicles for agriculture or forestry

A01

Vehicles for construction of roads

E01

Vehicles for dredging or soil-shifting

E02F

F41H 11/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems or methods using excavation buckets to remove limited amounts (batches) of soil in which landmine are assumed or proven to be present, said buckets being specially designed to be blast resistant, e.g. grid buckets.

These systems are normally not intended to activate a land mine but rather collect it intact for sub-sequent disposal.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Construction of roads

E01

Dredging

E02F 3/00

F41H 11/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems or methods that cut through the upper soil and create linear furrows similar to agricultural ploughs. These systems are intended to bring buried landmine to the surface and turn them aside out of the path of the plough or ploughs. They may activate the landmine or damage them without causing detonation.

These systems may be either vehicle wide to create a vehicle wide path or be mounted in front of the vehicle tires or tracks to create a safe passage for this specific vehicle only.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Agricultural ploughs

A01B

Construction of roads

E01

Graders

E02F 3/00

F41H 11/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems or methods using rotary ground penetrating elements consisting of a rotary drum or cage having a horizontal rotary axis perpendicular to the direction of travel of the vehicle, said drum or cage being externally driven to rotate, said drum or cage having teeth or other ground cutting elements, which are evenly spread over its entire cylindrical surface, for cutting though the soil top layer and removing, damaging without activation or activating land mines in said soil, e.g. tiller-type systems.

The direction of rotation of said drum or cage may be counter to the direction of travel to throw the soil and the objects therein to the front of the vehicle, or with the direction of travel to throw the soil and the objects therein into a collecting unit behind the cutting drum.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tillers in agriculture and forestry

A01B 33/02

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

tiller

rotary ground working implement with horizontal axis perpendicular to the direction of travel

F41H 11/28 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems or methods specifically designed to collect or push/brush/sweep land mines aside intact and avoid actuation of land mines as much as possible.

Systems or methods to remove land mines form vulnerable surfaces like roads and runways without damaging same.

Systems or methods employing gripper arms to pick up land mines, e.g. "wheel-barrow" type robotic systems.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Ground moving or soil shifting equipment

E02F

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for removing undesired matter from roads or fields

E01H

F41H 11/30 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems or methods using heavy rollers or wheels or drums that are pushed or towed across the surface of the soil substantially in front or to the rear of the vehicle, causing activation of the land mines by causing a gradually rising ground pressure or surface load.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Construction of surfaces for roads, sport grounds etc.

E01C

F41H 11/32 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Systems or methods for protecting valuable units or constructions by triggering or actuating land mines by simulating a genuine target in shape, size or other physical properties. These expendable systems do not have any mine-clearing systems of their own other than acting as a lure.

Systems or methods for attracting the attention of the sensors of a land mine and leading said attention away from the genuine target.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Camouflage, concealment or disguise

F41H 3/00

Targets for imitating vehicles

F41J 1/08

Active targets transmitting electromagnetic waves

F41J 2/00

Synonyms and Keywords

IR

Infra-red

EM

electro-magnet

F41J 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bullet traps or bullet decelerators for rifle grenades

F42B 30/06

G01B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Instruments and methods for measuring

Relationship between large subject matter areas

The general subject matters of measuring linear dimensions, distances, or angles is covered by several subclasses besides G01B:

G01C Measuring distances, levels, or bearings, surveying; navigation; gyroscopic instruments, photogrammetry or videogrammetry.

G01S radio direction finding; radio navigation; determining distance or velocity by use of radio waves; locating or presence detecting by use of the reflection or reradiation of radio waves; analogous arrangements using other waves.

When propagation effects of waves are relevant for such measurements G01S is in general the appropriate subclass.

For measuring ground distance between points in geodesy, surveying, and navigation G01C is the appropriate subclass when no radio waves are used or when propagation effects of waves other than radio waves are not relevant.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Measuring human body, see the relevant places, where such exist, e.g.

A41H 1/00, A43D 1/02, A61B 5/103

Measuring appliances combined with walking-sticks

A45B 3/08

Measuring methods or devices specially adapted for metal-rolling mills

B21B 38/00

Measuring, gauging or adjusting equipment for machines for working metal or other material

B23B 25/06

Measuring or gauging equipment specially adapted for grinding or polishing operations

B24B 33/06, B24B 49/00

Combinations of measuring devices with writing-implements

B43K 29/08

Devices for metering predetermined lengths of running material

B65H 61/00

Measuring devices for spinning or twisting machines

D01H 13/32

Measuring devices for determining the length of threads in sewing machines

D05B 45/00

Devices for checking, measuring, recording existing surfacing of roads or like structures, e.g. profilographs

E01C 23/01

Measuring diameter of boreholes or wells

E21B 47/08

Geodetical, nautical or aeronautical measuring, surveying, rangefinding

G01C

Photogrammetry or videogrammetry

G01C 11/00

Investigating or analysing particle size, investigating or analysing surface area of porous material

G01N 15/00

Radio direction-finding, determining distance or velocity by use of propagation effects, e.g. Doppler effect, propagation time, of radio waves, analogous arrangements using other waves

G01S

Measuring length or roll diameter of film in cameras or projectors

G03B 1/60

Methods or arrangements for converting the position of a manually-operated writing or tracing member into an electrical signal

G06K 11/00

Measuring elapsed travel of recording medium in recording or playback equipment, sensing diameter of record in autochange gramophones

G11B

Means structurally associated with electric rotary current collectors for indicating brush wear

H01R 39/58

Indicating consumption of electrodes in arc lamps

H05B 31/34

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sorting according to dimensions

B07

Marking textile materials; Marking in combination with metering or inspection

D06H 1/00

Transducers not specially adapted for a specific variable

G01D 5/00

Methods or apparatus for determining the capacity of containers or cavities, or the volume of solid bodies

G01F 17/00

Measuring force or stress, in general

G01L 1/00

Testing static or dynamic balance of machines or structures; testing structures or apparatus not otherwise provided for

G01M

Investigating or analyzing surface structures in atomic ranges using scanning-probe techniques

G01Q 10/00-G01Q 90/00

Geophysical measuring

G01V

Combinations of measuring devices with means for controlling or regulating

G05

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, the groups are distinguished by the means of measurement which is of major importance. Thus the mere application of other means for giving a final indication does not affect the classification.

Machines operated on similar principles to the hand-held devices specified in this subclass are classified with these devices.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Propagation effects

are relevant if the outcome of a measurement depends on the actual value of a physical quantity characterising the propagation of the wave, i.e. its wavelength, frequency, velocity, or phase. The mere presence or direction of a wave are not considered a propagation effect or to contribute to a propagation effect. To put it in another way, propagation effects are irrelevant, if the radiation may be looked upon as a beam of radiation whose wave nature can be ignored. Examples of measurements where propagation effects are relevant include e.g. measurements of propagation time, phase difference, phase delay, measurements using the Doppler effect, or interference.

G01C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Compasses in general;

Gyroscopes and other turn-sensitive devices, e.g. optical gyrometers using the Sagnac effect;

Optical rangefinders;

Instruments and methods for

Combined measuring devices for measuring two or more variables of movement, e.g. distance, speed, acceleration;

Manufacturing, calibrating, maintaining such instruments.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

The general subject matters of determining length, distance, height, level, direction, movement or angle is covered by several subclasses besides G01C:

G01B for measuring length, thickness, or similar linear dimensions, measuring angles; measuring areas; measuring irregularities of surfaces or contours (of individual objects).

G01P for measuring linear or angular speed, acceleration, deceleration, or shock; indicating presence, absence, or direction of movement.

G01S for radio direction finding; radio navigation; determining distance or velocity by use of radio waves; locating or presence detecting by use of the reflection or reradiation of radio waves; analogous arrangements using other waves (by use of propagation effects - e.g. Doppler effect, propagation time).

When propagation effects of waves are relevant for such measurements G01S is in general the appropriate subclass.

For measuring ground distance between points in geodesy, surveying, and navigation or for measuring distance traversed on the ground by any moving objects including e. g. vehicles, or persons G01C is the appropriate subclass when no radio waves are used or when propagation effects of waves other than radio waves are not relevant.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Measuring liquid level

G01F

Traffic control systems

G08G

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements of nautical instruments or navigational aids for ships

B63B 49/00

Marking of navigation routes for ships other than with buoys

B63B 51/00

Arrangements or adaptations of instruments for aircrafts

B64D 43/00

Aiming means with range finders

F41G 3/00

Measuring acceleration, deceleration, shock by making use of gyroscopes

G01P 15/14

Arrangements or instruments for measuring magnetic variables (measuring intensity or direction of magnetic fields, other than the earth's field, in general)

G01R 33/00

Measuring magnetic field characteristics of the earth, e.g. declination, deviation for purposes other than navigation, surveying

G01V 3/00

Rangefinders coupled with focussing arrangements of cameras

G03B 13/20

Stereoscopic photography

G03B 35/00

Photographing extended surfaces, e.g. surveying cameras

G03B 37/00

Taximeter

G07B 13/00

Registering or indicating the working of vehicles

G07C 5/00

Traffic control systems for road vehicles involving transmission of navigation instructions to the vehicle

G08G 1/0968

Maps, globes

G09B

Models or demonstration devices for surveying

G09B 25/06

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Navigation

means determining the position and course of land vehicles, ships, aircraft, and space vehicles

Propagation effects

are relevant if the outcome of a measurement depends on the actual value of a physical quantity characterising the propagation of the wave, i.e. its wavelength, frequency, velocity, or phase. The mere presence or direction of a wave are not considered a propagation effect or to contribute to a propagation effect. To put it in another way, propagation effects are irrelevant, if the radiation may be looked upon as a beam of radiation whose wave nature can be ignored. Examples of measurements where propagation effects are relevant include e.g. measurements of propagation time, phase difference, phase delay, measurements using the Doppler effect, or interference.

G01C 1/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Measuring angles in compasses

G01C 17/00

G01C 1/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Artificial horizons per se

G01C 15/14

G01C 1/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tilt compensation in general

G12B

G01C 1/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Periscopes in general

G02B 23/08

G01C 3/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Rangefinders coupled with focusing arrangements of cameras

G03B 13/20

G01C 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Levels indicating inclination at a single point

G01C 9/00

G01C 5/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Regulation of direction in general

G05D 3/00

Tilt compensation in general

G12B 5/00

G01C 5/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Barometers per se

G01L

G01C 7/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Survey of wells

E21B 47/00

G01C 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cameras combined with surveying instruments, e.g. with theodolites

G01C 1/00, G01C 3/00, G01C 5/00, G01C 9/00

Surveying cameras

G03B 37/00

G01C 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Determining existence or flow of underground water

G01V 9/02

G01C 15/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tilt compensation in general

G12B 5/00

G01C 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For geophysical or prospecting purposes

G01V 3/00

G01C 19/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bearings in general

F16C

G01C 19/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Applicable to instruments in general

G01D 11/20

G01C 19/32 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Indicating or recording measured values in general

G01D 7/00, G01D 9/00

G01C 19/60 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements for measuring magnetic resonance in general

G01R 33/20

G01C 19/66 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ring lasers in general

H01S 3/083

G01C 21/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Marking of navigation route for ships

B63B 51/00

G01C 22/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Counting mechanisms per se

G06M

G01D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Measuring not specially adapted for a specific variable

Apparatus or arrangements for measuring not specially adapted for a specific variable covered by a single other subclass.

Measuring arrangements or apparatus giving results other than momentary value of a variable, and not specially adapted for a variable covered by a single other subclass, e.g.

Measuring arrangements with provision for special purposes, e.g.

Component parts of said measuring apparatus or arrangements.

Testing or calibrating said measuring apparatus or arrangements.

Transferring or transducing arrangements not specially adapted for a specific variable

Means for transferring the output of a sensing member.

Measurement transducers not specially adapted for a specific variable and not provided for elsewhere, i.e. means for converting the output of a sensing member to another variable where the form or nature of the sensing member does not constrain the means for converting, e.g. encoders.

Indicating or recording measured values not specially adapted for a specific variable

Apparatus or arrangements for indicating or recording the results of measurements, not specially adapted for variables covered by a single other subclass, e.g. general recording by stylus and paper roll.

Component parts of said indicating or recording apparatus or arrangements.

Testing or calibrating said indicating or recording apparatus or arrangements.

Tariff meters

Apparatus or arrangements for tariff metering in general.

Component parts of tariff metering apparatus or arrangements.

Testing or calibrating tariff metering apparatus or arrangements.

Measuring or testing not otherwise provided for

Measuring or testing not otherwise provided for.

Apparatus or arrangements for measuring two or more variables not covered by a single other subclass.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

G01Dcovers measuring arrangements, or arrangements for indicating, recording or transducing measurements not specially adapted for a specific variable covered by a single other subclass. Therefore when the variable is specified and covered by a single other subclass of G01, classification should be directed to that subclass.

For example, classification should be directed to G01Dfor measuring arrangements giving the RMS value of a unspecified variable, or signalling that a predetermined value of a unspecified variable has been exceeded. Instead, when the variable under consideration is specified (e.g. a voltage, liquid level or temperature), and a single other subclass exists that covers measurements of that variable (e.g. G01R, G01For G01Krespectively) then classification should be directed to that subclass.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Measuring not specially adapted for a specific variable

Measuring root mean square [RMS] values of currents or voltages

G01R 19/02
Tariff meters

Tariff metering apparatus in taxi's, i.e. taximeters

G07B 13/00

Apparatus actuated by coins, cards or the like with meter-controlled dispensing of liquid, gas, or electricity

G07F 15/00
Tariff meters

Tariff meters for measuring the time integral of electric power or current, e.g. electric consumption

G01R 11/56

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring not specially adapted for a specific variable

Bearings

F16C

Stands or supports in general

F16M

Arrangements for signalling that a level of liquid has been exceeded

G01F 23/00

Arrangements for signalling that a value of temperature has been exceeded

G01K 3/00
Transferring or transducing arrangements not specially adapted for a specific variable

Instruments for converting a single current or a single voltage into a mechanical displacement

G01R 5/00

Transmission systems for measured values

G08C

Coding, decoding or code conversion, in general

H03M

Wireless communication networks

H04W
Indicating or recording measured values not specially adapted for a specific variable

Recording apparatus specially adapted for electrocardiography

A61B 5/0432

Arrangements of instruments specially adapted for vehicles; Dashboards

B60K 35/00, B60K 37/00

Aircraft indicators

B64D 45/00

Registering or indicating the working of vehicles

G07C 5/08

Displaying in general

G09F

Recording in a way which requires playback through a transducer

G11B

Indicating elements of instruments not otherwise provided for

G12B 11/00
Tariff meters

Mechanical counters

G06M
Measuring or testing not otherwise provided for

Testing structures or apparatus not otherwise provided for

G01M

G01D 1/16 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Product

Mathematical operation

G01D 1/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements for signalling that a level of liquid has been exceeded

G01F 23/00

Arrangements for signalling that a value of temperature has been exceeded

G01K 3/00

G01D 4/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Tariff meters for measuring the time integral of electric power or current

G01R 11/56

G01D 4/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For mechanical counters

G06M 1/28

G01D 4/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mechanical counters

G06M

G01D 5/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Specially adapted for high-voltage or high-current measuring arrangements

G01R 15/04, G01R 15/14

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For converting a single current or a single voltage into a mechanical displacement

G01R 5/00

Measuring currents or voltages using digital measurement techniques

G01R 19/25

Transmission systems for measured values, control or similar signals, e.g. electrical signals

G08C, G08C 19/00

G01D 11/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bearings in general

F16C

G01D 11/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Supports specially adapted for a set of instruments in general

F16M

G01F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus or methods for measuring the volume flow or mass flow of fluids or fluent solid materials.

Apparatus or methods for metering by volume.

Apparatus or methods for measuring the capacity of containers or cavities, or the volume of solid bodies, fluids or fluent solid materials.

Level indicators.

Details, accessories, testing or calibrating of the apparatus as described.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Measuring linear dimensions to determine volume

G01B
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Milk flow sensing devices in milking machines or devices

A01J 5/01

Food containers with dispensing devices for dispensing a certain quantity of powdered or granulated foodstuffs

A47G 19/34

Apparatus for making beverages having water-level controls

A47J 31/56

Measuring blood flow

A61B 5/026, A61B 8/06

Metering media introduced into the human body, e.g. drip meters

A61M 5/168

Controlling the quantity of fluent-solid material fed into a container during packaging by volumetric measurement

B65B 1/36

Controlling the quantity of plastic material, semi-liquids, liquids, or mixed solids and liquids, fed into a container during packaging by volumetric measurement

B65B 3/30

Separating measured quantities from supply by volume measurement

B65B 37/20

Bottling liquids or semi-liquids with provision for metering the liquids to be introduced, e.g. when adding syrups

B67C 3/20

Arrangements of liquid volume meters or volume-flow meters in liquid-delivering apparatus, e.g. for retail sale purposes

B67D 7/16

Measuring liquid level in wells

E21B 47/04

Indicating devices for lubricant level

F01M 11/12

Measuring intake air flow to generate a control signal for control of supply of combustible mixture in combustion engines

F02D 41/18

Proportioning devices in lubricating systems

F16N 27/00

Arrangements for measuring the quantity of conveyed product in pipe-lines

F17D 3/18

Adaptation of level indicators to, or mounting on, steam boilers

F22B 37/78

Controlling water feed or water level for steam generation

F22D 5/00

Rainfall or precipitation gauges

G01W 1/14

Apparatus actuated by coins, cards or the like with meter-controlled dispensing of liquid or gas

G07F 15/00

Reactor-coolant flow measuring or monitoring in nuclear reactors; Moderator- or coolant-level detecting devices in nuclear reactors

G21C 17/032, G21C 17/035

Accumulators combined with arrangements for measuring, testing, or indicating condition, e.g. level or density of the electrolyte

H01M 10/48

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Filters

B01D

Burettes or pipettes

B01L 3/02

Weighing a continuous stream of material during flow

G01G 11/00

Measuring pressure

G01L

Measuring speed of fluids, e.g. of air stream

G01P 5/00

Determining a distance or velocity using sonar, radar or lidar techniques

G01S

Control of flow; Control of level; Control of ratio

G05D 7/00, G05D 9/00, G05D 11/00

Alarm devices

G08B

Electric switches operated by change of liquid level, e.g. float switches, or by a change of fluid flow

H01H 35/18, H01H 35/24

G01F 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring speed of flow

G01P 5/00

Indicating presence or absence of flow

G01P 13/00

G01F 1/46 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Specially adapted for measuring speed of fluids

G01P 5/165

G01F 1/712 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring speed by using correlation detection means in general

G01P 3/80, G01P 5/22

G01F 1/76 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Weighing a continuous stream of material during flow

G01G 11/00

G01F 3/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Diaphragms or bellows therefor

G01F 15/16

G01F 11/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Diaphragms or bellows therefor

G01F 15/16

G01F 11/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

With measuring chambers which expand or contract during measurement

G01F 11/02

G01F 15/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Filters in general

B01D

G01F 23/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

In wells

E21B 47/04

Adaptation to, or mounting on, steam boilers

F22B 37/78

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Alarm devices

G08B

G01F 23/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring pressure in general

G01L

G01F 23/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Weighing in general

G01G

G01F 23/30 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Switches operated by floats

H01H 35/18

G01G - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus or methods for weighing whereby balancing is effected by fluid action, magnetic means, electrostatic means or the like, e.g.:

Conveyer-belt weighers.

Apparatus or methods for automatic feed or discharge for weighing-out batches of material, or for check-weighing of material dispensed into removable containers.

Apparatus or methods for weighing material of special form or property.

Weighing apparatus or methods adapted for special purposes, e.g.

Details or accessories of the weighing apparatus described.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Measuring of forces is classified in groups G01L 1/00 and G01L 5/00. The borderline between subclass G01Gand subclass G01Lshould be determined based on whether the features relevant for classification are focussed on the force sensor or on the weighing device.

Packaging articles is classified in subclass B65B whereas apparatus for conveying articles are classified in subclass B65G The borderline between subclass G01Gand subclasses B65B, B65Gshould be determined on whether the features relevant for classification are focused on packaging/conveying or on weighing.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Determining weight by measuring volume

G01F
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Weighing devices specially adapted for threshing machines

A01F 12/50

Weighing devices combined with diagnosing apparatus

A61B 5/107

Walking-sticks combined with weighing appliances

A45B 3/08

Grading or sorting solid materials by dry methods according to weight

B07B 13/08

Sorting according to weight

B07C 5/16

Weighing cut product in combination with cutting

B26D 7/30

Arrangements of weighing machines on vehicles

B60P 5/00

Brake regulation responsive to vehicle weight

B60T 8/18

Controlling the quantity of fluent-solid material fed or discharged in a container during packaging by weighing

B65B 1/32

Check-weighing of filled containers or receptacles

B65B 1/46

Controlling the quantity of plastic material, semi-liquids, liquids, or mixed solids and liquids, fed or filled in a container during packaging by weighing

B65B 3/28

Separating measured quantities from supply by weighing

B65B 37/18

Incorporation of weighing devices in cranes

B66C 13/16

Measuring mass flow of a fluid or a fluent solid material

G01F 1/76

Indicating or measuring level by measurement of weight, e.g. to determine the level of stored liquefied gas

G01F 23/20

Analysing materials by weighing

G01N 5/00

Investigating density or specific gravity of materials; Analysing materials by determining density or specific gravity

G01N 9/00

Measuring gravitational fields or waves, or gravimetric prospecting using balances

G01V 7/08

Ratio control of two or more flows by sensing weight of individual components

G05D 11/04

Weighing devices combined with franking apparatus

G07B 17/00

Testing of coins by weight

G07D 5/04

Coin-freed apparatus for controlling dispensing of fluids, semi-liquids or granular material from reservoirs by weight

G07F 13/04

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Safety devices for limiting or indicating a lifting force

B66F 17/00

Indicating devices for soil-shifting machines

E02F 9/26

Bearings

F16C

Shock-absorbers

F16F

Measuring force in general

G01L 1/00

Measuring force adapted for special purposes

G01L 5/00

Control of flow

G05D 7/00

Data processing equipments

G06F 19/00

Counting

G06M

Cash registers

G07G 1/00

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following words "scale", "balance", and "weighing device"are often used as synonyms.

G01G 5/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Pressure gauges per se

G01L

G01G 11/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Control of flow

G05D 7/00

G01G 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Packaging aspects

B65B

G01G 19/08 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Arrangements on vehicles

B60P 5/00

G01G 19/14 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Incorporation of weighing devices in cranes

B66C 1/40, B66C 13/16

G01G 19/22 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Ratio control of two or more flows by sensing weight

G05D 11/04

G01G 21/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bearings per se

F16C

G01G 21/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Shock-absorbers per se

F16F

G01H - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus or methods for the measurement, or measurement in combination with generation, of mechanical vibrations or the like, and particularly for the measurement of:

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Determining unbalance by oscillating the body to be tested and converting vibrations due to unbalance into electric variables

G01M 1/22

Vibration testing of structures

G01M 7/02

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves; Visualisation of the interior of objects by transmitting ultrasonic or sonic waves through the object

G01N 29/00

Systems using the reflection or reradiation of acoustic waves, e.g. sonar systems

G01S 15/00

Sonar systems designed for mapping or imaging

G01S 15/89

Seismology; Seismic or acoustic prospecting or detecting

G01V 1/00

Manufacture of electromechanical resonators by processes which include measurement of frequency with consequential modification of the resonator

H03H 3/007

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Generating or transmitting mechanical vibrations in solids without measurement

B06B

Measuring distance, levels or bearings; Navigation; Gyroscopic instruments; Photogrammetry or videogrammetry

G01C

Measuring pressure of a fluid or fluent solid material

G01L 7/00-G01L 19/00

Acousto-optical devices

G02F 1/11, G02F 1/33

Obtaining records by techniques analogous to photography using ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves

G03B 42/06

Musical instruments

G10B-G10H

Generating or transmitting mechanical vibrations in fluids without measurement

G10K

Arrangements for producing a reverberation or echo sound in fluids

G10K 15/08

Speech analysis or synthesis; Speech recognition

G10L

Piezo-electric, electro-strictive or magneto-strictive elements

H01L 41/00

G01H 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring absorption of vibrations in a material

G01N

Arrangements for producing a reverberation or echo sound in fluids

G10K 15/08

G01J - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Photometry, e.g. photographic exposure meters, per se (covered by G01J 1/00).

Spectrometers and spectroscopy, e.g. measurement of the spectral content of incident light and spectroscopic methods used in this process (covered by G01J 3/00).

Colorimetry (covered by G01J 3/00).

Polarimeters and polarimetry, e.g.  passive measurement of the state of polarisation of incident light (covered by G01J 4/00).

Measurement of temperature by optical means, e.g. remote detection of infrared radiation, non-contact measurement (covered by G01J 5/00).

Measurement of the velocity of light (covered by G01J 7/00).

Measurement of optical phase differences, e.g. wave-front or coherence measurements (covered by G01J 9/00).

Measurement of the wavelength of incident light (covered by G01J 9/00).

Measurement of the characteristics of optical pulses (covered by G01J 11/00).

Detection of the presence or absence of infra-red, visible, or ultra-violet light, not otherwise provided for.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

G01J relates in general to the passive optical detection per se of the quantities referred to in the Definition Statement. Arrangements or methods in a specific related field are to be found in their environment.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Non-optical measurement of temperature

G01K

Semiconductor devices sensitive to light

H01L 27/14, H01L 31/00, H01L 51/42
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Measuring length, thickness or similar linear dimensions by optical means; Instruments therefor

G01B 11/00, G01B 9/00

Investigating or analysing materials by optical means, e.g. by ellipsometry

G01N 21/00

Prospecting or detecting by optical means

G01V 8/00

Controlling or varying light intensity, spectral composition or exposure time in photographic printing apparatus

G03B 27/72

Exposure in photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces

G03F 7/20

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus for testing or examining the human eyes

A61B 3/00

Colour determination, selection, or synthesis in painting or artistic drawing, e.g. use of colour tables

B44D 3/00

Indicating or recording measured values in general

G01D

Testing of optical apparatus

G01M 11/00

Sunshine-duration recorders

G01W 1/12

Optical elements, systems or apparatus, e.g. filters, gratings, lenses

G02B

Control of light by devices or arrangements the optical operation thereof is modified by changing the optical properties of the medium of the devices or arrangements

G02F 1/00

Control of light, e.g. intensity, colour, phase

G05D 25/00

Mass spectrometers

H01J 49/00

Thermoelectric elements per se

H01L 35/00, H01L 37/00
Light sources

Lighting

F21

Discharge lamps

H01J 61/00, H01J 63/00, H01J 65/00

Electric incandescent lamps

H01K

Semiconductor devices for light emission, e.g. LED's

H01L 27/15, H01L 33/00, H01L 51/50

Lasers

H01S 3/00, H01S 5/00

Electric arc lamps

H05B 31/00

Electroluminescent light sources

H05B 33/00

G01J 1/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Regulation of light intensity

G05D 25/00

G01J 1/32 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Regulation of light intensity

G05D 25/00

G01J 3/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Gratings per se

G02B

G01J 4/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Investigating or analysing materials by measuring rotation of plane of polarised light

G01N 21/21

G01J 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Photometry in general

G01J 1/00

Spectrometry in general

G01J 3/00

G01J 5/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Thermoelectric elements per se

H01L 35/00, H01L 37/00

G01J 5/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Indicating or recording measured values in general

G01D

G01J 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices or arrangements for controlling the phase of light beams

G02F 1/01

G01J 9/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Using interferometers for measuring optically the linear dimensions of objects

G01B 9/02

G01K - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus or methods for measuring temperature, i.e. thermometers. The following types of thermometers are therefore covered, the list being non exhaustive:

Testing or calibrating of thermometers.

Apparatus or methods for measuring quantity of heat, i.e. calorimeters.

Testing or calibrating of calorimeters.

Thermally-sensitive elements not otherwise provided for.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Subclass G01K covers temperature measurements per se, except when performed by radiation pyrometry, in which case the subject matter is classified in subclass G01J.

When temperature measurements are used for the investigation of material properties (e.g. flaw detection), that subject matter falls under the scope of G01N 25/00.

For subject matter relating to sensing temperature changes for compensating measurements of other variables or for compensating readings of instruments for variations in temperature, see G01D or relevant subclass for variable measured.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Radiation pyrometry

G01J 5/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Measuring temperature of human body parts for diagnostic purposes

A61B 5/01

Heat-sensitive devices for control of fire-fighting equipment

A62C 37/00

Heat-sensitive sheets for use in thermography

B41M 5/00

Measuring temperature specially adapted to boreholes or wells

E21B 47/06

Arrangements of temperature sensing elements for regulating or controlling in gas turbines

F01D 17/08

Use of thermally-sensitive elements in systems controlling or regulating combustion

F23N 5/02-F23N 5/14

Flow measurement by thermal means

G01F 1/68

Investigating or analysing materials by use of thermal means, e.g. by calorimetry

G01N 25/00, G01N 25/20

Meteorology; Indication of human comfort

G01W 1/00, G01W 1/17

Temperature control

G05D 23/00

Fire alarms

G08B 17/00-G08B 19/00

Thermally-sensitive members for thermally-actuated switches

H01H 37/00

Temperature sensing in car batteries

H01M 10/48

Control or measuring devices, e.g. for temperature of metal, in the art of manufacture of metal sheets, wires, rods, tubes or profiles

B21C 31/00

Arrangement of indicating or measuring devices, e.g. for temperature or viscosity of the fused mass, in the art of casting of metals

B22D 2/00

Measuring, controlling or regulating of temperature in injection moulding

B29C 45/78

Indicating devices concerning coolant temperature, in the art of cooling of machines, engines, or internal-combustion engines

F01P 11/16

Structural combination of nuclear reactor elements with sensitive instruments for measuring temperature

G21C 17/112

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Thermometer holders specially adapted to veterinary purposes

A61D 13/00

Ambient temperature regulation specially adapted to passengers or goods spaces in vehicles

B60H 1/00

Heating in general

F24B, F24C, F24D

Sensing temperature changes for compensating measurements of other variables or for compensating readings of instruments for variations in temperature

G01D

Bimetallic elements

G12B 1/02

Compensating for the effects of temperature on instruments

G12B 7/00

Thermistors, i.e. thermo-resistors

H01C 7/00-H01C 7/04

Electrolytic temperature-sensitive devices

H01G 9/21

Peltier elements

H01L 23/38

Semiconductor or solid-state thermo-electric or thermo-magnetic devices

H01L 35/00, H01L 37/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Thermometer

Includes thermally-sensitive elements not provided for in other subclasses.

Synonyms and Keywords

TTI

Time Temperature Integrator

PTAT

Proportional To Absolute Temperature

CTAT

Complementary To Absolute Temperature

NTC/PTC

Negative/Positive Temperature Coefficient

RTD

Resistance Temperature Detector

3-wire / 4-wire RTD's

Resistive temperature detectors with additional lead wire for compensation purposes

OTDR

Optical Time Domain Reflectometry

FBG

Fiber Bragg Grating

SAW/BAW

Surface/Bulk Acoustic Wave

HVAC

Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning

TAT/SAT

Total/Static Air Temperature (in aircrafts)

G01K 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring temperature using thermo-electric elements

G01K 7/02

G01K 5/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Of vapour arising from a liquid

G01K 11/02

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Thermally-sensitive members for thermally-actuated switches

H01H 37/00

G01K 5/32 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Pressure-measuring devices in general

G01L

G01K 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring electric or magnetic variables

G01R

G01K 7/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Thermo-electric or thermo-magnetic devices per se

H01L 35/00, H01L 37/00

G01K 7/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Resistive elements per se

H01C, H01L

G01K 7/34 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Capacitors per se

H01G

G01K 7/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Magnetic elements per se

H01F

G01K 11/12 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Heat-sensitive sheets for use in thermography

B41M 5/00

G01K 11/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring density in general

G01N 9/00

G01K 17/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Measuring temperature by calorimetry

G01K 3/00-G01K 11/00

Investigating or analysing materials by thermal means

G01N 25/00

G01K 17/12 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Product

Mathematical Operation

G01L - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus or methods for measuring force, stress, torque or the like, and particularly:

Apparatus or methods for measuring fluid pressure, and particularly:

Apparatus or methods for measuring, indicating or recording:

Vacuum gauges.

Testing or calibrating of the apparatus as described.

Details or accessories of the apparatus as described.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

For subject matter relating to sensing pressure changes for compensating measurements of other variables or for compensating readings of instruments for variations in pressure, see subclass G01D or other relevant subclasses for the variable measured.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Weighing

G01G
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Measuring blood pressure for diagnostic purposes

A61B 5/02

Measuring fluid pressure within the human body other than blood pressure for diagnostic purposes

A61B 5/03

Measuring muscular strength or the force of a muscular blow for diagnostic purposes

A61B 5/22

Measuring tension, compression or roll-force specially adapted for metal-rolling mills

B21B 38/06, B21B 38/08

Devices for measuring, signalling, controlling, or distributing tyre pressure specially adapted for being mounted on vehicles

B60C 23/00

Applications of tensometers to sewing machine elements

D05B 47/06

Measuring pressure in boreholes or wells

E21B 47/06

Levelling between separate points or surveyors' levels by using barometric means

G01C 5/06

Measuring volume flow, mass flow or volume of fluid by measuring pressure or differential pressure

G01F 1/34, G01F 1/88, G01F 22/02

Measuring or indicating level of liquid or fluent material by measurement of pressure

G01F 23/14

Weighing apparatus wherein the balancing is effected by fluid action, with means for measuring the pressure imposed by the load on a liquid

G01G 5/04

Testing of engines by monitoring pressure in cylinders or fluid ducts

G01M 15/08-G01M 15/09

Meteorology

G01W 1/00

Converting a pattern of forces into electrical signals

G06K 11/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Torque indicators in wrenches or screwdrivers

B25B 23/14

Application of tension indicators for adjusting or controlling tension in filamentary material

B65H 59/40

Tyre-inflating valves

B60C 29/00

Supplying air for tyre inflation

B60S 5/04

Devices for indicating tension in warp or cloth

D03D 49/18

Indicating lubricant pressure in machines

F01M 1/20

Indicating coolant pressure in machines or engines

F01P 11/18

Special adaptations of indicating, measuring, or monitoring equipment for the filling or discharging of vessels

F17C 13/02

Embedding pads or other sensitive devices in paving or other road surfaces

E01F 11/00

Measuring the deformation in a solid by mechanical strain gauges

G01B 5/30

Measuring the deformation in a solid by resistance strain gauges

G01B 7/16

Measuring the deformation in a solid by optical strain gauges

G01B 11/16

Measurement of mechanical vibrations or ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves

G01H

Testing steering behaviour of vehicles

G01M 17/06

Investigating strength properties of solid materials by application of mechanical stress

G01N 3/00

Devices characterised by the determination of the variation of atmospheric pressure with height to measure the vertical components of speed

G01P 3/62

Scanning-probe techniques using atomic force microscopy

G01Q

Hollow bodies deformable or displaceable under pressure, e.g. Bourdon tubes, bellows

G12B 1/04

Switches operated by change of fluid pressure

H01H 35/24

Controllable semiconductor devices by variation of applied mechanical force, e.g. of pressure

H01L 29/84

Dynamo-electric clutches; Dynamo-electric brakes

H02K 49/00

G01L 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring deformation of bodies as a result of stress by using gauges

G01B

Measuring fluid pressure

G01L 7/00-G01L 21/00, G01L 27/00

G01L 1/18 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Resistance strain gauges for measuring linear expansion or contraction

G01B

G01L 1/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Resistance strain gauges for measuring linear expansion or contraction

G01B

G01L 3/24 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring velocity per se

G01P

G01L 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring pressure of a fluent medium

G01L 7/00-G01L 21/00

Measuring rapid changes of pressure in steam, gas, or liquid

G01L 23/00

G01L 5/20 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

In balancing

G01M

G01L 5/24 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Arrangements in wrenches or screwdrivers

B25B 23/14

G01L 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring tyre pressure or the pressure of other inflated bodies

G01L 17/00

Vacuum gauges

G01L 21/00

Hollow bodies deformable or displaceable under internal pressure per se

G12B 1/04

G01L 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Vacuum gauges

G01L 21/00

G01L 17/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Specially adapted for mounting on vehicles or tyres

B60C 23/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connection of valves to inflatable elastic bodies

B60C 29/00

G01L 21/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tubes therefor

H01J 41/02

G01L 23/32 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus for recording steady or quasi-steady pressure

G01L 19/08

G01M - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

The scope of the subclass G01M is so broad that a detailed description of the subject matter appropriate for this place is correctly possible only at the main group level.

The user is referred to the IPC definitions for the individual main groups of G01M which follow hereinafter. The following list is intended to assist the user.

Testing characterised by the objects investigated:

Machines or machine parts – see definitions for G01M 1/00, G01M 9/00, G01M 10/00, G01M 13/00, G01M 15/00, G01M 17/00

Structures – see definitions for G01M 1/00, G01M 3/00, G01M 5/00, G01M 7/00

Apparatus not provided elsewhere – see definitions for G01M 11/00, G01M 99/00

Testing characterised by the properties investigated:

Balance – see definition for G01M 1/00

Fluid tightness – see definition for G01M 3/00

Elasticity, deflection – see definition for G01M 5/00

Vibration resistance – see definition for G01M 7/00

Aerodynamic properties – see definition for G01M 9/00

Hydrodynamic properties – see definition for G01M 10/00

Optical properties – see definition for G01M 11/00

Relationship between large subject matter areas

G01N covers investigating, i.e. testing or determining, the properties of materials, as opposed to testing or determining the properties of structures or apparatus, machine parts, which is covered by G01M.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Calibrating

means ascertaining the quality of a measuring or testing device, or checking, adjusting graduations of measuring or testing device

Monitoring

means maintain a continuous or periodical watch (human or instrumental) on, to enable action to be taken or initiated, or a signal to be given, if undesired conditions occur

Investigating

means testing or determining.

Testing

means determination of the presence, quality, or genuineness of object to be tested.

G01M 1/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Methods and apparatus for:

Determining and compensating static or dynamic unbalance of machine or structures.

Determining the moment of inertia of machines or structures.

Static balancing of machines or structures.

Determining position of center of gravity of machines or structures.

Combined machines or devices for both determining and correcting unbalance of machines or structures.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

G01H covers the combination of generation and measurement of mechanical and other vibrations while subclass G01M covers determining unbalance by oscillating or rotating the body to be tested.

G01R covers instruments for measuring electrical variables, which can be used for balancing machines or devices but not specially adapted for this purposes.

H04R covers electromechanical transducers producing acoustic waves or variations of electric variables (current or voltage) while G01M covers determining unbalance by converting vibrations due to unbalance into electric variables.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

None

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Balancing rotary bowls of centrifuges

B04B 9/14

Means for holding wheels or parts thereof

B60B 30/00

Determining vessel properties with respect to stability or balance

B63B 9/08

Equipment to decrease pitch, roll, or like unwanted vessel movements; Apparatus for indicating vessel attitude

B63B 39/00

Aircraft stabilization not otherwise provided for

B64C 17/00

Centring the rotor within the stator; Balancing the rotor

H02K 15/16

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Counterweights; Attaching or mounting same

F16F 15/28

Correcting- or balancing-weights or equivalents means for balancing rotating bodies, e.g. vehicle wheels

F16F 15/32

Measuring vibrations in general

G01H

Measuring electrical variables in general

G01M

Control of mechanical oscillations

G05D 19/00

Microphones or like acoustic electromechanical transducers

H04R

G01M 1/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Counterweights

F16F 15/28

G01M 1/32 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Correcting-weights per se

F16F 15/32

G01M 3/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Investigating fluid-tightness of structures, e.g. cables, tubes, pipes, welds, pipe joints, seals, valves, containers, radiators, by using, e.g. fluid or vacuum, infrasonic, sonic, or ultrasonic vibrations, light or by using electric means, e.g. by observing electric discharges.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Leakage-indicating devices for large containers

B65D 90/50

Preventing, monitoring or locating loss in the pipe-line

F17D 5/02

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Detecting or repairing leaks in apparatus using semi-permeable membranes

B01D 65/10

Testing for leaks in apparatus for blow-molding

B29C 49/80

Leakage detectors for rocket-engineplants

F02K 9/54

Investigating the permeability, pore volume, or surface area of porous materials

G01N 15/08

Investigating the presence of flaws or irregularities of material by mechanical methods

G01N 19/08

Investigating the presence of flaws, defects or contamination by the use of optical means

G01N 21/88

Investigating the presence of flaws by the use of microwaves

G01N 22/02

Investigating the presence of flaws by wave or particle radiation, e.g. X-rays

G01N 23/18

Investigating the presence of flaws by the use of thermal means

G01N 25/72

Investigating the presence of flaws by the use of electric, electro-chemical or magnetic means

G01N 27/00

Investigating the presence of flaws by the use of ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves

G01N 29/04

Leakage detection for insulated conductors or cables characterised by their form

H01B 7/32

G01M 5/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Investigating the elasticity of structures, e.g. deflection of bridges, aircraft wings, e.g. testing elastic properties of bodies or chassis, e.g. torsion-testing.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

G01B covers apparatus, which can be used for investigating the elasticity of structures but not specially adapted for this purposes, e.g. strain gauges.

G01H covers measurement of mechanical vibrations in general.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Group G01M 9/00 takes precedence over groups G01M 5/00 and G01M 7/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Building aspects

E

Strain gauges

G01B

Investigating the ductility of materials

G01N 3/28

Measuring speed of fluids, e.g. of air stream; Measuring speed of bodies relative to fluids, e.g. of ship, of aircraft

G01P 5/00

G01M 7/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Vibration testing or shock testing of structures.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

G01B covers apparatus, which can be used for investigating the elasticity of structures but not specially adapted for this purposes, e.g. strain gauges.

G01H covers measurement of mechanical vibrations in general.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Group G01M 9/00 takes precedence over groups G01M 5/00 and G01M 7/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Building aspects

E

Strain gauges

G01B

Investigating the ductility of materials

G01N 3/28

Measuring speed of fluids, e.g. of air stream; Measuring speed of bodies relative to fluids, e.g. of ship, of aircraft

G01P 5/00

G01M 9/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Aerodynamic testing and arrangements therefore.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

G01B covers apparatus, which can be used for investigating the elasticity of structures but not specially adapted for this purposes, e.g. strain gauges.

G01H covers measurement of mechanical vibrations in general.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Group G01M 9/00 takes precedence over groups G01M 5/00 and G01M 7/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Building aspects

E

Strain gauges

G01B

Investigating the ductility of materials

G01N 3/28

Measuring speed of fluids, e.g. of air stream; Measuring speed of bodies relative to fluids, e.g. of ship, of aircraft

G01P 5/00

G01M 10/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Hydrodynamic testing and arrangements therefore, e.g. means for studying the flow of fluid about the object to be tested.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

G01B covers apparatus, which can be used for investigating the elasticity of structures but not specially adapted for this purposes, e.g. strain gauges.

G01H covers measurement of mechanical vibrations in general.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Group G01M 9/00 takes precedence over groups G01M 5/00 and G01M 7/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Building aspects

E

Strain gauges

G01B

Investigating the ductility of materials

G01N 3/28

Measuring speed of fluids, e.g. of air stream; Measuring speed of bodies relative to fluids, e.g. of ship, of aircraft

G01P 5/00

G01M 11/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Testing of optical apparatus, e.g. testing of optical properties (measuring refractive power, geometrical properties or aberrations, material or chromatic transmission properties, the optical modulation transfer function of optical apparatus and etc.) or mechanical properties. Testing structures by optical methods not otherwise provided for.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This group is residual place for classifying testing of optical devices or apparatus not provided for in any other subclass of the IPC. Testing of particular optical devices or apparatus is often covered by the respective subclass provided for that optical devices or apparatus. Testing of optical devices or apparatus is classified in G01M 11/00 only if there is no appropriate place for that subject matter elsewhere.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Places in relation to which this group is residual

Devices for testing or checking weapon sighting devices

F41G 1/54

Devices for testing or checking aiming and laying means

F41G 3/32

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring arrangements characterised by the use of optical means

G01B 11/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means

G01N 21/00

Optical elements, systems or apparatus

G02B

G01M 13/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Testing of machine parts, such as: sealing rings, gearings, power-transmitting couplings or clutches, power-transmitting endless, e.g. belts, chains, bearings.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

G01L covers instruments which can be used for testing of machine parts (gearing, transmission mechanisms), of steering or rolling behavior of vehicles, e.g. measuring efficiency, steering angles, steering forces, but not specially adapted for this purposes.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for measuring, signalling, controlling, or distributing tyre pressure or temperature, specially adapted for mounting on vehicles

B60C 23/00

Monitoring or diagnostic devices for exhaust-gas treatment apparatus

F01N 11/00

Indicating or supervising devices of internal-combustion engines

F02B 77/08

Running-in of internal-combustion engines

F02B 79/00

Controlling combustion engines

F02D

Rocket-engineplants characterised by specially adapted arrangements fortesting or measuring

F02K 9/96

Apparatus for testing, tuning or synchronising carburettors, e.g. carburettor flow stands

F02M 19/01

Testing fuel-injection apparatus

F02M 65/00

Testing of ignition installations peculiar to internal-combustion engines

F02P 17/00

Testing of ignition installations of combustion apparatus

F23Q 23/00

Devices for determining the value of power, e.g. by measuring and simultaneously multiplying the values of torque and revolutions per unit of time, by multiplying the values of tractive or propulsive force and velocity

G01L 3/24

Measuring wheel side-thrust

G01L 5/20

Measuring the force applied to control members, e.g. control members of vehicles, triggers

G01L 5/22

Determining the characteristic of torque in relation to revolutions per unit of time

G01L 5/26

Testing brakes

G01L 5/28

Devices or apparatus for measuring tyre pressure or the pressure in other inflated bodies

G01L 17/00

Devices for detecting or indicating knocks in internal-combustion engines

G01L 23/22

Devices for measuring pressure in inlet or exhaust ducts of internal- combustion engines

G01L 23/24

Means for indicating positions of pistons or cranks of internal-combustion engines by measuring pressure

G01L 23/30

Testing or calibrating of apparatus for measuring force, torque, work, mechanical power, or mechanical efficiency

G01L 25/00

Testing or calibrating of apparatus for measuring fluid pressure

G01L 27/00

Pressure-testing

G01N 3/12

Investigating machinability by cutting tools; Investigating the cutting ability of tools

G01N 3/58

G01M 15/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Testing of engines, e.g. by monitoring different engine parameters: pressure, temperature, velocity, vibration, and power, detecting misfire, exhaust gases, combustion flame.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

G01L covers instruments which can be used for testing of machine parts (gearing, transmission mechanisms), of steering or rolling behavior of vehicles, e.g. measuring efficiency, steering angles, steering forces, but not specially adapted for this purposes.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for measuring, signalling, controlling, or distributing tyre pressure or temperature, specially adapted for mounting on vehicles

B60C 23/00

Monitoring or diagnostic devices for exhaust-gas treatment apparatus

F01N 11/00

Indicating or supervising devices of internal-combustion engines

F02B 77/08

Running-in of internal-combustion engines

F02B 79/00

Controlling combustion engines

F02D

Rocket-engine plants characterised by specially adapted arrangements for testing or measuring

F02K 9/96

Apparatus for testing, tuning or synchronising carburettors, e.g. carburettor flow stands

F02M 19/01

Testing fuel-injection apparatus

F02M 65/00

Testing of ignition installations peculiar to internal-combustion engines

F02P 17/00

Testing of ignition installations of combustion apparatus

F23Q 23/00

Devices for determining the value of power, e.g. by measuring and simultaneously multiplying the values of torque and revolutions per unit of time, by multiplying the values of tractive or propulsive force and velocity

G01L 3/24

Measuring wheel side-thrust

G01L 5/20

Measuring the force applied to control members, e.g. control members of vehicles, triggers

G01L 5/22

Determining the characteristic of torque in relation to revolutions per unit of time

G01L 5/26

Testing brakes

G01L 5/28

Devices or apparatus for measuring tyre ressure or the pressure in other inflated bodies

G01L 17/00

Devices for detecting or indicating knocks in internal-combustion engines

G01L 23/22

Devices for measuring pressure in inlet or exhaust ducts of internal-combustion engines

G01L 23/24

Means for indicating positions of pistons or cranks of internal-combustion engines by measuring pressure

G01L 23/30

Testing or calibrating of apparatus for measuring force, torque, work, mechanical power, or mechanical efficiency

G01L 25/00

Testing or calibrating of apparatus for measuring fluid pressure

G01L 27/00

Pressure-testing

G01N 3/12

Investigating machinability by cutting tools; Investigating the cutting ability of tools

G01N 3/58

G01M 15/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Monitoring or diagnostic devices for exhaust-gas treatment apparatus

F01N 11/00

Indicating or supervising devices of internal-combustion engines

F02B 77/08

Running in of internal-combustion engines

F02B 79/00

Controlling combustion engines

F02D

Apparatus for testing, tuning or synchronising carburettors, e.g. carburettor flow stands

F02M 19/01

Testing fuel-injection apparatus

F02M 65/00

Testing internal-combustion engine ignition, e.g. timing

F02P 17/00

Devices for determining the value of power, e.g. by measuring and simultaneously multiplying the values of torque and revolutions per unit of time, by multiplying the values of tractive or propulsive force and velocity

G01L 3/24

Determining the characteristic of torque in relation to revolutions per unit of time

G01L 5/26

Devices for detecting or indicating knocks in internal-combustion engines

G01L 23/22

Devices for measuring pressure in inlet or exhaust ducts of internal combustion engines

G01L 23/24

Means for indicating positions of pistons or cranks of internal-combustion engines by measuring pressure

G01L 23/30

G01M 15/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Rocket-engine plants characterised by specially adapted arrangements for testing or measuring

F02K 9/96

G01M 17/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Testing of machine parts, such as: sealing rings, gearings, power-transmitting couplings or clutches, power-transmitting endless, e.g. belts, chains, bearings.

Testing of engines, e.g. by monitoring different engine parameters: pressure, temperature, velocity, vibration, and power, detecting misfire, exhaust gases, combustion flame. Testing of different parts of vehicles, e.g. wheels, tyres, endless-tracks, suspension, or of damping as a part of wheeled or endless-traced vehicles or suspension, axles, wheels suspension, or of axles as a part of railway vehicles.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

G01L covers instruments which can be used for testing of machine parts (gearing, transmission mechanisms), of steering or rolling behavior of vehicles, e.g. measuring efficiency, steering angles, steering forces, but not specially adapted for this purposes.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for measuring, signalling, controlling, or distributing tyre pressure or temperature, specially adapted for mounting on vehicles

B60C 23/00

Monitoring or diagnostic devices for exhaust-gas treatmentapparatus

F01N 11/00

Indicating or supervising devices of internal-combustion engines

F02B 77/08

Running-in of internal-combustion engines

F02B 79/00

Controlling combustion engines

F02D

Rocket-engine plants characterised by specially adapted arrangements for testing or measuring

F02K 9/96

Apparatus for testing, tuning or synchronising carburettors, e.g. carburettor flow stands

F02M 19/01

Testing fuel-injection apparatus

F02M 65/00

Testing of ignition installations peculiar to internal-combustion engines

F02P 17/00

Testing of ignition installations of combustion apparatus

F23Q 23/00

Devices for determining the value of power, e.g. by measuring and simultaneously multiplying the values of torque and revolutions per unit of time, by multiplying the values of tractive or propulsive force and velocity

G01L 3/24

Measuring wheel side-thrust

G01L 5/20

Measuring the force applied to control members, e.g. control members of vehicles, triggers

G01L 5/22

Determining the characteristic of torque in relation to revolutions per unit of time

G01L 5/26

Testing brakes

G01L 5/28

Devices or apparatus for measuring tyre pressure or the pressure in other inflated bodies

G01L 17/00

Devices for detecting or indicating knocks in internal-combustion engines

G01L 23/22

Devices for measuring pressure in inlet or exhaust ducts of internal- combustion engines

G01L 23/24

Means for indicating positions of pistons or cranks of internal-combustion engines by measuring pressure

G01L 23/30

Testing or calibrating of apparatus for measuring force, torque, work, mechanical power, or mechanical efficiency

G01L 25/00

Testing or calibrating of apparatus for measuring fluid pressure

G01L 27/00

Pressure-testing

G01N 3/12

Investigating machinability by cutting tools; Investigating the cutting ability of tools

G01N 3/58

G01M 17/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring steering angles

G01B

Measuring steering forces

G01L

G01M 99/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

This group is residual place for classifying testing of structures or of apparatus, not provided for elsewhere.

Testing of particular devices or apparatus is often covered by the respective subclass provided for that devices or apparatus. Testing of particular devices or apparatus is classified in G01M 99/00 only if there is no appropriate place for that subject matter elsewhere.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Testing of membranes or membrane apparatus

B01D 65/10

Testing of parachutes

B64D 21/00

Testing characteristics of the spark in internal combustion engine ignition

F02P 17/12

Testing, calibrating, or compensating of compasses

G01C 17/38

Testing or calibrating of weighing apparatus

G01G 23/01

Testing or calibrating of thermometers

G01K 15/00

Testing or calibrating calorimeters

G01K 19/00

Arrangements fortesting electric properties; Arrangements for locating electric faults; Arrangements for electrical testing characterised by what is being tested not provided for elsewhere

G01R 31/00

Testing or calibrating meteorological apparatus

G01W 1/18

Testing correct operation of photographic apparatus or parts thereof

G03B 43/00

Monitoring; Testing of fusion reactors

G21C 17/00

Testing or measuring during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices

H01L 21/66

Testing of electrical properties of sparking plugs

H01T 13/60

Calibration or testing of analogue/digital or digital/analogue converters

H03M 1/10

Monitoring; Testing of line transmission systems

H04B 3/46

Monitoring; Testing of relay systems

H04B 3/46

Diagnosis, testing or measuring for television systems or their details

H04N 17/00

Monitoring arrangements; Testing arrangements of acoustic electromechanical transducers

H04R 29/00

G01N - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

The scope of the subclass G01N is so broad that a detailed description of the subject matter appropriate for this place is correctly possible only at the main-group level, e.g. G01N 21/00.

Provisions that are valid at a general level (e.g. of a kind appropriate to more than one of the main groups) are provided in the sections that follow.

The user is otherwise referred to the IPC definitions for the individual main groups of G01N, which follow hereinafter. The following list is intended to assist the user.

Investigating or analysing with emphasis to the properties investigated

Mechanical strength

G01N 3/00

Density, specific gravity

G01N 9/00

Flow, viscosity, plasticity

G01N 11/00

Surface, boundary or diffusion effects

G01N 13/00

Characteristics of particles and porous materials

G01N 15/00

Resistance to weather, to corrosion, or to light

G01N 17/00

Friction, adhesive force

G01N 19/00
Investigating or analysing with emphasis to the methods or means used

Mechanical stress

G01N 3/00

Weighing

G01N 5/00

Measuring pressure or volume of gas

G01N 7/00

Scanning-probe techniques

G01N 13/00

Mechanical

G01N 19/00

Optical

G01N 21/00

Magnetic resonance, spin effects

G01N 24/00

Microwaves

G01N 22/00

Other wave or particle radiation

G01N 23/00

Thermal

G01N 25/00

Electric, electrochemical, magnetic

G01N 27/00

Sonic

G01N 29/00

Separation into components

G01N 30/00

Chemical means for non-biological materials

G01N 31/00

Chemical means for biological materials

G01N 33/50

Immunological testing

G01N 33/50

Other specific methods

G01N 33/00
Others

Sampling, preparing

G01N 1/00

Specific materials

G01N 33/00

Automatic analysis

G01N 35/00

Details

G01N 37/00

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Apparatus fully provided for in a single other subclass, see the relevant subclass, e.g. chemical or physical apparatus for general laboratory use, which is covered by B01L.

Analysis as an integrated step of a process should be classified with the process, insofar as the process is fully provided for in another subclass. For example, analysis of water as integrated step of water treatment process is classified in subclass C02F.

Sensing humidity changes for compensating measurements of other variables or for compensating readings of instruments for variations in humidity, see G01D or the relevant subclass for the variable measured.

Testing or determining the properties of structures, e.g. apparatus, machine parts etc, is classified in the relevant subclass for the structure being tested, as opposed to investigating, i.e. testing or determining (see Glossary), the properties of materialsamples, which is classified in this subclass. In this regard, G01M is the residual place for classifying testing of structures not covered elsewhere.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Apparatus for enzymology or microbiology

C12M

Measuring or testing processes, other than immunoassay (which is covered by G01N 33/53), involving enzymes or micro-organisms

C12Q
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Measuring for medical or veterinary diagnosis on the human or animal body, e.g. measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, radiation diagnosis, or acoustic examination of body cavities or body tracts

A61B, A61D

Investigation, e.g. sampling, of foundation soil or ground water in-situ

E02D 1/00

Monitoring or diagnostic devices for exhaust-gas treatment apparatus

F01N 11/00

Measuring, investigating or testing electric or magnetic properties of materials (see also IPC definition for subgroup G01N 33/50)

G01R

Determining sensitivity, graininess, or density of photographic materials

G03C 5/02

Testing component parts of nuclear reactors

G21C 17/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Separating components of materials in general

B01D

Chemical or physical processes, e.g. catalysis, colloid chemistry; their relevant apparatus

B01J

Separation of solid materials from solid materials using wet methods, or using pneumatic tables or jigs

B03B, B03D

Separation of solid materials from solid materials or fluids using magnetic or electrostatic methods, or using high-voltage electric fields

B03C

Separation of solid materials from solid materials or fluids using sieving, screening, sifting, gas currents, or other dry methods

B07B

Combinatorial chemistry; Libraries

C40B

Systems for direction-finding, navigation, locating, presence-detecting using the reflection or reradiation of radio waves, or analogous arrangements using other waves, e.g. radar, sonar, or lidar systems

G01S

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Investigating

Means testing or determining

Materials

Means either solid, or liquid, or gaseous media, e.g. the atmosphere

Sample

Means material separated from a bulk material or an assembly of items for the purpose of investigating its properties

G01N 1/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Devices for withdrawing samples of material. Samples may be taken from e.g. bulk material, from flowing streams, or from collections of discrete items.

Devices for manipulating samples and transferring them to an analysis site.

Preparing specimens for investigation, and related apparatus.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Sampling from the human or animal body for medical or veterinary diagnosis

A61B, A61D

Apparatus for enzymology or microbiology, e.g. inoculator or sampler

C12M

Sampling of foundation soil or groundwater in-situ

E02D 1/00

Sampling of soil or well fluids, specially adapted to earth drilling or wells

E21B 49/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Containers or dishes for laboratory use, e.g. laboratory glassware

B01L 3/00

Details of nuclear or X-radiation measuring instruments, e.g. collecting or conveying of samples

G01T 7/00

G01N 1/10 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Liquid or fluent state

designates the state of materials which can flow, e.g. liquids, including solutions, dispersions and suspensions, as well as semi-liquids, pastes, melts, particulate materials – gases being excluded

G01N 1/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Obtaining samples of soil or well fluids

E21B 49/00

G01N 3/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Stressing of materials not only below but also beyond the elastic limit, e.g. until breaking occurs.

Application of mechanical stress:

Testing apparatus and sample holders used in such investigations.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Testing or determining the elasticity, or vibration-testing, or shock-testing of structures, e.g. apparatus, machine parts etc, is classified in G01M, as opposed to investigating, i.e. testing or determining, the strength properties of materialsamples, which is classified in this group.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Investigating properties of materials by mechanical methods

G01N 19/00

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Use of mechanical means for measuring roughness or irregularity of surfaces, or for measuring deformation in a solid, e.g. mechanical strain gauge

G01B 3/00, G01B 5/28, G01B 5/30

Use of electric or magnetic means for measuring roughness or irregularity of surfaces, or for measuring deformation in a solid, e.g. resistance strain gauge

G01B 7/16, G01B 7/34

Use of optical means for measuring roughness or irregularity of surfaces, or for measuring deformation in a solid, e.g. optical strain gauge

G01B 11/16, G01B 11/30

Measuring stress in general, e.g. by strain gauges

G01L 1/00

Investigating elasticity of structures, e.g. deflection of bridges, aircraft wings

G01M 5/00

Vibration-testing or shock-testing of structures

G01M 7/00

Investigating or analysing surface structures in atomic ranges using scanning-probe techniques, e.g. atomic force microscopy (ATM)

G01Q 10/00-G01Q 90/00

G01N 3/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Investigating fluid tightness of structures

G01M 3/00

G01N 3/32 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Generating mechanical vibrations in solids

B06B

Generating mechanical vibrations in fluids

G10K

G01N 5/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Analysing materials by weighing.

Analysing materials by absorbing or adsorbing components of a material and determining change of weight of the adsorbent, e.g. for determining moisture content.

Analysing materials by removing a component, e.g. by evaporation, and weighing the remainder.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Investigatingdensity or specific gravity of materials; analysing materials by determining density or specific gravity

G01N 9/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Weighing

G01G

G01N 7/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Analysing materials by measuring the pressure or volume of a gas or vapour, like:

Analysing materials by measuring the pressure or volume of a gas or vapour by the use of other means than those mentioned above.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Measuring volume

G01F 17/00, G01F 19/00, G01F 22/00

Measuring fluid pressure

G01L 7/00-G01L 23/00

G01N 9/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Measurement of density or specific gravity (see Glossary) by direct methods, like:

Determination of density or specific gravity from a related property of the material, e.g. by observing the transmission of wave or particle radiation through the material.

Deducing other properties of the material from its density.

Determining the apparent density of granular solid materials.

Instruments for investigatingdensity.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Checking density of materials to be filled

B65B 1/42

Indirect mass flowmeters, e.g. measuring volume flow and density

G01F 1/86

Measuring volume

G01F 17/00, G01F 19/00, G01F 22/00

Weighing

G01G

Measuring temperature by using measurements of density

G01K 11/28

Ratio control by sensing density of mixture

G05D 11/06

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Density

means mass per unit volume

Specific gravity

is the density of a substance divided by the density of water (since the latter is 1 gr/cm3, specific gravity is the same number as density but without any units)

G01N 11/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Investigating or analysing flow properties of materials, like:

Analysing materials by determining flow properties.

Instruments for investigating or analysing flow properties of materials.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. blood viscosity, for medical or veterinary diagnosis

A61B 5/145

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Investigatingpermeability of porous materials

G01N 15/08

Specific methods of analysis of viscous liquids

G01N 33/26

Specific methods of analysis of biological materials

G01N 33/48

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Measuring volume, volume flow, or liquid level

G01F

Measuring fluid pressure

G01L 7/00, G01L 23/00

Control of flow

G05D 7/00

Control of viscosity

G05D 24/00

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Viscosity

The resistance of a fluid to a change in shape, or movement of neighbouring portions relative to one another. Viscosity denotes opposition to flow. The reciprocal of the viscosity is called the fluidity, a measure of the ease of flow.

Plasticity

Ability of certain solids to flow or to change shape permanently when subjected to stresses of intermediate magnitude between those producing temporary deformation, or elastic behaviour, and those causing failure of the material, or rupture.

G01N 13/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Investigating properties of interfaces between solids and fluids or between different fluids, like:

Investigating surface structures in the atomic range by scanning-probe techniques, including:

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Investigating or analysing surface structures in atomic ranges using scanning-probe techniques and by measuring secondary emission

G01N 23/22

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Investigatingporosity or surface area of porous materials

G01N 15/08

Thermodynamic interactions between different phases of the same substance

G01N 25/02

Investigating medicinal preparations

G01N 33/15

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Measuring roughness or irregularity of surfaces, or measuring deformation in a solid

G01B

Details of scanning-probe apparatus, in general

G01Q 10/00-G01Q 90/00

Electron microscopy in general

H01J 37/00

G01N 15/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Determining characteristics of particles, particulate material, or particle suspensions, e.g. of blood cells. Such characteristics include e.g. particle size distributions or sedimentation.

Analysis of porous material, e.g. determining its permeability, pore volume, or surface area.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Identification of micro-organisms

C12Q

Investigating concentration of particle suspensions by weighing

G01N 5/00

Investigating particle size or size distribution by measuring osmotic pressure

G01N 7/10
Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Investigating particle size or size distribution by filtering

B01D

Investigating particle size or size distribution by sifting

B07B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Permeability

Capacity of a porous material to transmit a fluid.

Porosity

is the fraction of the volume of an apparent solid that is actually empty space

G01N 15/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Investigating particle size or size distribution by filtering

B01D

Investigating particle size or size distribution by sifting

B07B

G01N 17/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Investigating resistance of materials to atmospheric or chemical agents, or their resistance to light.

The detection of fouling.

Specially adapted electrochemical means used in such investigations.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Investigating resistance to wear or abrasion

G01N 3/56

Investigating resistance to rapid heat changes

G01N 3/60

Measuring wear by the use of optical means

G01N 21/00

Detection of fouling by measuring thermal conductivity

G01N 25/18

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of electrochemical means

G01N 27/26

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Methods or apparatus for cathodic or anodic protection

C23F 13/00

Measuring roughness or irregularity of surfaces, or measuring deformation in a solid

G01B

Investigating fluid tightness of structures

G01M 3/00

G01N 19/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Measuring:

Instruments, e.g. hygrometers, for measuring the properties listed above.

Investigating by removal of material, e.g. spark-testing.

Detecting presence of flaws or irregularities.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Investigating strength properties of solid materials by application of mechanical stress

G01N 3/00

Analysing materials by weighing, e.g. weighing small particles separated from a gas or liquid

G01N 5/00

Analysing materials by measuring the pressure or volume of a gas or vapour

G01N 7/00

Investigatingdensity or specific gravity of materials; analysing materials by determining density or specific gravity

G01N 9/00

Investigating flow properties of materials, e.g. viscosity, plasticity; analysing materials by determining flow properties

G01N 11/00

Investigating surface or boundary effects, e.g. wetting power; investigating diffusion effects; analysing materials by determining surface, boundary, or diffusion effects

G01N 13/00

Investigating characteristics of particles; investigatingpermeability, pore-volume, or surface-area of porous materials

G01N 15/00

Investigating resistance of materials to the weather, to corrosion, or to light

G01N 17/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Determination of friction coefficient between road and wheel without additional sensors; application of friction determinations to the control of vehicle braking

B60T

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Use of mechanical means for measuring roughness or irregularity of surfaces, or for measuring deformation in a solid, e.g. mechanical strain gauge

G01B 3/00, G01B 5/30

Investigating elasticity of structures, e.g. deflection of bridges, aircraft wings

G01M 5/00

Vibration-testing or shock-testing of structures

G01M 7/00

G01N 19/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Use of mechanical means for measuring roughness or irregularity of surfaces, or for measuring deformation in a solid, e.g. mechanical strain gauge

G01B 5/28

G01N 21/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical radiation, i.e. from vacuum-ultraviolet to far-infrared radiation, with a wavelength typically of 0.1-100 micrometres (µm), or by visual inspection

Arrangements or apparatus for facilitating the optical investigation, e.g. cuvettes.

Systems in which incident light is modified in accordance with the properties of the material investigated, e.g. spectral properties of the material.

Systems in which the material investigated is excited whereby it emits light or causes a change in wavelength of the incident light, e.g. photo-luminescence, thermo-luminescence or electro-luminescence.

Systems in which material is subjected to a chemical reaction, the progress or the result of the reaction being optically investigated, e.g. chemo-luminescence.

Visual inspection, e.g. for investigating the presence of flaws, defects or contamination.

Investigating or analysing materials by using other optical effects than those mentioned above.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Investigation of spectral properties of light per se, or measurements of the properties of materials where spectral properties of light are sensed and primary emphasis is placed on creating, detecting or analysing the spectrum, is classified in G01J 3/00, as opposed to investigating, i.e. testing or determining, the properties of materialsamples by the use of optical means, where primary emphasis is given to the materials, which is classified in this group.

Testing or determining the properties of structures, e.g. apparatus, machine parts etc, by the use of optical means is classified in the relevant subclass for the structure being tested, as opposed to investigating, i.e. testing or determining, the properties of materialsamples by the use of optical means, which is classified in this group. In this regard, G01M 11/00 is the residual place for classifying testing of optical apparatus, or testing of structures by optical methods not covered elsewhere.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Investigating strength properties of solid materials by application of mechanical stress

G01N 3/00

Analysing materials by weighing, e.g. weighing small particles separated from a gas or liquid

G01N 5/00

Analysing materials by measuring the pressure or volume of a gas or vapour

G01N 7/00

Investigatingdensity or specific gravity of materials; analysing materials by determining density or specific gravity

G01N 9/00

Investigating flow properties of materials, e.g. viscosity, plasticity; analysing materials by determining flow properties

G01N 11/00

Investigating surface or boundary effects, e.g. wetting power; investigating diffusion effects; analysing materials by determining surface, boundary, or diffusion effects

G01N 13/00

Investigating characteristics of particles; investigatingpermeability, pore-volume, or surface-area of porous materials

G01N 15/00

Investigating resistance of materials to the weather, to corrosion, or to light

G01N 17/00

Investigatingmaterials by mechanical methods

G01N 19/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Investigation of spectral properties of light per se, or measurements of the properties of materials where spectral properties of light are sensed and primary emphasis is placed on creating, detecting or analysing the spectrum, providing that the properties of the materials to be investigated are of minor importance

G01J 3/00

Contactless testing of electronic circuits using optical radiation

G01R 31/308

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Specific materials

G01N 33/00

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Chemical or physical apparatus for general laboratory use, e.g. glassware, including sample holders

B01L, B01L 3/00

Use of optical means for measuring roughness or irregularity of surfaces, or for measuring deformation in a solid

G01B 9/00, G01B 11/00

Photometry, i.e. measuring intensity of light regardless of its wavelength or polarization

G01J 1/00

Measuring polarization of light

G01J 4/00

Optical radiation pyrometry

G01J 5/00

Measuring force or stress by measuring variations of optical properties of material when it is stressed, e.g. by photo-elastic stress analysis

G01L 1/24

Testing of optical apparatus, elements and systems; testing structures by optical methods not otherwise provided for (see also Relationship between large subject matter areas, above)

G01M 11/00

Systems for direction-finding, navigation, locating, presence-detecting using the reflection or reradiation of light waves, e.g. lidar systems

G01S 17/00

Prospecting or detecting by the use of optical means

G01V 8/00

Optical elements of measuring instruments, e.g. microscopes

G02B, G02B 21/00

Image analysis

G06T 7/00

G01N 21/05 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Handling fluid samples

G01N 1/10

G01N 21/07 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Centrifuges

B04B

G01N 21/51 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Checking containers for cleanliness

B08B 9/46

G01N 21/53 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Alarm devices actuated by smoke

G08B 17/10

G01N 21/67 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Spark gaps

H01T

G01N 21/84 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Testing currency

G07D

G01N 21/90 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Checking containers for cleanliness

B08B 9/46

G01N 21/956 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Contactless testing of electronic circuits using optical radiation

G01R 31/308

G01N 22/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of microwave radiation, i.e. with a wavelength typically of sub-millimetre or more.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Investigating strength properties of solid materials by application of mechanical stress

G01N 3/00

Analysing materials by weighing, e.g. weighing small particles separated from a gas or liquid

G01N 5/00

Analysing materials by measuring the pressure or volume of a gas or vapour

G01N 7/00

Investigatingdensity or specific gravity of materials; analysing materials by determining density or specific gravity

G01N 9/00

Investigating flow properties of materials, e.g. viscosity, plasticity; analysing materials by determining flow properties

G01N 11/00

Investigating surface or boundary effects, e.g. wetting power; investigating diffusion effects; analysing materials by determining surface, boundary, or diffusion effects

G01N 13/00

Investigating characteristics of particles; investigatingpermeability, pore-volume, or surface-area of porous materials

G01N 15/00

Investigating resistance of materials to the weather, to corrosion, or to light

G01N 17/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of nuclear magnetic resonance, electron paramagnetic resonance or other spin effects

G01N 24/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Use of wave or particle radiation for measuring roughness or irregularity of surfaces, or for measuring the deformation in a solid

G01B 15/00

Microwave transmitting aerials (radiators) or receiving aerials

H01Q

G01N 23/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of wave radiation of very short wavelength (high energy), i.e. with a wavelength typically of a few nanometres or less, e.g. X-rays, including synchrotron radiation.

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of particle radiation, e.g. neutrons, ions or electrons.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Investigating strength properties of solid materials by application of mechanical stress

G01N 3/00

Analysing materials by weighing, e.g. weighing small particles separated from a gas or liquid

G01N 5/00

Analysing materials by measuring the pressure or volume of a gas or vapour

G01N 7/00

Investigatingdensity or specific gravity of materials; analysing materials by determining density or specific gravity

G01N 9/00

Investigating flow properties of materials, e.g. viscosity, plasticity; analysing materials by determining flow properties

G01N 11/00

Investigating surface or boundary effects, e.g. wetting power; investigating diffusion effects; analysing materials by determining surface, boundary, or diffusion effects

G01N 13/00

Investigating characteristics of particles; investigatingpermeability, pore-volume, or surface-area of porous materials

G01N 15/00

Investigating resistance of materials to the weather, to corrosion, or to light

G01N 17/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Apparatus for medical or veterinary radiation diagnosis on the human or animal body, e.g. combined with radiation therapy equipment

A61B 6/00
Places in relation to which this group is residual:

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means, i.e. using infra-red, visible, or ultra-violet light

G01N 21/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of microwaves

G01N 22/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefore

G01N 35/00

Use of wave or particle radiation for measuring roughness or irregularity of surfaces, or for measuring the deformation in a solid

G01B 15/00

Measuring force or stress by the use of wave or particle radiation

G01L 1/25

Measurement of nuclear or X-radiation

G01T

Prospecting or detecting by the use of nuclear radiation, e.g. of natural or induced radioactivity

G01V 5/00

Image analysis

G06T 7/00

Nuclear reactors

G21C

Protection against X-radiation, gamma radiation, corpuscular radiation ;treating radioactively contaminated material

G21F

Techniques for handling particles or electromagnetic radiation not otherwise provided for ; gamma- or X-ray microscopes

G21K

Electric discharge tubes or discharge lamps, e.g. X-ray tubes, electron microscopy

H01J 35/00

X-ray technique

H05G

G01N 23/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electron microscopes

H01J

G01N 23/207 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Spectrometry of detected or measured radiation intensity

G01T 1/36

G01N 23/225 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electron or ion-beam tubes for microprobe analysis

H01J 37/00

G01N 24/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Investigating or analysing materials by using:

Investigating or analysing materials by using other spin effects than those mentioned above.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Measuring for medical or veterinary diagnosis on the human or animal body involving electronic (EMR) or nuclear (NMR) magnetic resonance, e.g. magnetic resonance imaging (MRI)

A61B 5/055

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Arrangements or instruments for measuring magnetic resonance effects using NMR, EPR, or other spin-effect

G01R 33/20

Prospecting or detecting by the use of EMR or NMR

G01V 3/00

Image analysis

G06T 7/00

G01N 25/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Thermal and calorimetric analysis of materials.

Thermography.

Investigating:

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Investigating strength properties of solid materials by application of mechanical stress

G01N 3/00

Analysing materials by weighing, e.g. weighing small particles separated from a gas or liquid

G01N 5/00

Analysing materials by measuring the pressure or volume of a gas or vapour

G01N 7/00

Investigatingdensity or specific gravity of materials; analysing materials by determining density or specific gravity

G01N 9/00

Investigating flow properties of materials, e.g. viscosity, plasticity; analysing materials by determining flow properties

G01N 11/00

Investigating surface or boundary effects, e.g. wetting power; investigating diffusion effects; analysing materials by determining surface, boundary, or diffusion effects

G01N 13/00

Investigating characteristics of particles; investigatingpermeability, pore-volume, or surface-area of porous materials

G01N 15/00

Investigating resistance of materials to the weather, to corrosion, or to light

G01N 17/00

Investigatingmaterials by mechanical methods

G01N 19/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means, i.e. using infra-red, visible, or ultra-violet light

G01N 21/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of microwaves

G01N 22/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of other wave or particle radiation, e.g. X-rays or neutrons

G01N 23/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Optical radiation pyrometry

G01J 5/00

Measuring temperature or quantity of heat; thermally-sensitive elements not otherwise provided for

G01K

G01N 25/72 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

By investigating thermal conductivity

G01N 25/18

G01N 27/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Investigating non-electric or non-magnetic properties of materials by using electric or magnetic methods.

Investigating by electrochemical means, e.g.:

Instruments, e.g. hygrometers, for measuring non-electric or non-magnetic properties.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Measuring or investigating electric or magnetic properties of materials is classified in G01R, as opposed to investigatingmaterials by electric or magnetic means, which is classified in this group.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Investigating strength properties of solid materials by application of mechanical stress

G01N 3/00

Analysing materials by weighing, e.g. weighing small particles separated from a gas or liquid

G01N 5/00

Analysing materials by measuring the pressure or volume of a gas or vapour

G01N 7/00

Investigatingdensity or specific gravity of materials; analysing materials by determining density or specific gravity

G01N 9/00

Investigating flow properties of materials, e.g. viscosity, plasticity; analysing materials by determining flow properties

G01N 11/00

Investigating surface or boundary effects, e.g. wetting power; investigating diffusion effects; analysing materials by determining surface, boundary, or diffusion effects

G01N 13/00

Investigating characteristics of particles; investigatingpermeability, pore-volume, or surface-area of porous materials

G01N 15/00

Investigating resistance of materials to the weather, to corrosion, or to light

G01N 17/00

Investigatingmaterials by mechanical methods

G01N 19/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means, i.e. using infra-red, visible, or ultra-violet light

G01N 21/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of microwaves

G01N 22/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of other wave or particle radiation, e.g. X-rays or neutrons

G01N 23/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of nuclear magnetic resonance, electron paramagnetic resonance or other spin effects

G01N 24/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of thermal means

G01N 25/00

Measuring or investigating electric or magnetic properties of materials (see also Relationship between large subject matter areas, above)

G01R
Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Medical or veterinary diagnosis on the human or animal body using electric or magnetic means

A61B 5/05

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Chemical or physical processes, e.g. catalysis, colloid chemistry; their relevant apparatus, for electrochemical processes or apparatus in general

B01J 19/00

Use of electric or magnetic means for measuring roughness or irregularity of surfaces, or for measuring deformation in a solid

G01B 7/00

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Involving polarography

G01N 27/48

Investigating or analysing materials by separation into components using adsorption, absorption or similar phenomena or using ion-exchange, e.g. chromatography

G01N 30/00

Immunoelectrophoresis

G01N 33/561

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Electric or magnetic prospecting or detecting; measuring magnetic field characteristics of the earth, e.g. declination, deviation

G01V 3/00

Particle spectrometers

H01J 49/00

Processes or means (e.g. batteries) for the direct conversion of chemical into electrical energy, e.g. galvanic primary cells, or standard cells

H01M, H01M 6/00

G01N 27/06 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Measuring electric resistance of fluids

G01R 27/22

G01N 27/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Regulating

G05D

G01N 27/26 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Investigating resistance to corrosion

G01N 17/00

Immunoelectrophoresis

G01N 33/561

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrochemical processes or apparatus in general

B01J

Investigating or analysing materials by separation into components using adsorption, absorption or similar phenomena or using ion-exchange

G01N 30/00

Standard cells

H01M 6/28

G01N 27/60 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

By investigating capacitance

G01N 27/22

G01N 27/92 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Testing of articles or specimens of solids or fluids for dielectric strength or breakdown voltage

G01R 31/12

G01N 29/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Investigating or analysing materials by using sound waves (also called acoustic waves).

Visualisation of the interior of solid objects by using sound waves, e.g. acoustic microscopy.

Instruments, e.g. probes, for investigating or analysing by use of sound waves.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Investigating strength properties of solid materials by application of mechanical stress

G01N 3/00

Analysing materials by weighing, e.g. weighing small particles separated from a gas or liquid

G01N 5/00

Analysing materials by measuring the pressure or volume of a gas or vapour

G01N 7/00

Investigatingdensity or specific gravity of materials; analysing materials by determining density or specific gravity

G01N 9/00

Investigating flow properties of materials, e.g. viscosity, plasticity; analysing materials by determining flow properties

G01N 11/00

Investigating surface or boundary effects, e.g. wetting power; investigating diffusion effects; analysing materials by determining surface, boundary, or diffusion effects

G01N 13/00

Investigating characteristics of particles; investigatingpermeability, pore-volume, or surface-area of porous materials

G01N 15/00

Investigating resistance of materials to the weather, to corrosion, or to light

G01N 17/00

Investigatingmaterials by mechanical methods

G01N 19/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means, i.e. using infra-red, visible, or ultra-violet light

G01N 21/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of microwaves

G01N 22/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of other wave or particle radiation, e.g. X-rays or neutrons

G01N 23/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of nuclear magnetic resonance, electron paramagnetic resonance or other spin effects

G01N 24/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of thermal means

G01N 25/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of electric, electro-chemical, or magnetic means

G01N 27/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Medical or veterinary diagnosis on the human or animal body using ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves, e.g. examination of body cavities or body tracts

A61B 8/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Specific materials

G01N 33/00

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Generating mechanical vibrations in solids

B06B

Use of ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic vibrations for measuring roughness or irregularity of surfaces, or for measuring the deformation in a solid

G01B 17/00

Measuring or indicating of mechanical vibrations or ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves

G01H

Systems for direction-finding, navigation, locating, presence-detecting using the reflection or reradiation of acoustic waves, e.g. sonar systems

G01S 15/00

Prospecting or detecting by the use of seismic or acoustic means

G01V 5/00

Obtaining records by techniques analogous to photography using ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves

G03B 42/06

Control of mechanical oscillations

G05D 19/00

Image analysis

G06T 7/00

Generating mechanical vibrations in fluids

G10K

G01N 30/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Investigating or analysing materials by separation into components using adsorption, absorption or similar phenomena or using ion exchange, e.g. field-flow fractionation, chromatography and related techniques.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Investigating strength properties of solid materials by application of mechanical stress

G01N 3/00

Analysing materials by weighing, e.g. weighing small particles separated from a gas or liquid

G01N 5/00

Analysing materials by measuring the pressure or volume of a gas or vapour

G01N 7/00

Investigatingdensity or specific gravity of materials; analysing materials by determining density or specific gravity

G01N 9/00

Investigating flow properties of materials, e.g. viscosity, plasticity; analysing materials by determining flow properties

G01N 11/00

Investigating surface or boundary effects, e.g. wetting power; investigating diffusion effects; analysing materials by determining surface, boundary, or diffusion effects

G01N 13/00

Investigating characteristics of particles; investigatingpermeability, pore-volume, or surface-area of porous materials

G01N 15/00

Investigating resistance of materials to the weather, to corrosion, or to light

G01N 17/00

Investigatingmaterials by mechanical methods

G01N 19/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means, i.e. using infra-red, visible, or ultra-violet light

G01N 21/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of microwaves

G01N 22/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of other wave or particle radiation, e.g. X-rays or neutrons

G01N 23/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of nuclear magnetic resonance, electron paramagnetic resonance or other spin effects

G01N 24/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of thermal means

G01N 25/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of electric, electro-chemical, or magnetic means

G01N 27/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves; visualisation of the interior of objects by transmitting ultrasonic or sonic waves through the object

G01N 29/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Specific materials

G01N 33/00

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Separating components of materials in general

B01D, B01D 15/00, B01D 53/02, B01D 53/04

Chemical or physical processes (e.g. catalysis, colloid chemistry) or their relevant apparatus, e.g. solid sorbent compositions in general, or ion-exchange in general

B01J, B01J 20/00, B01J 39/00, B01J 41/00

Separation of solid materials from solid materials using wet methods, or using pneumatic tables or jigs

B03B, B03D

Separation of solid materials from solid materials or fluids using magnetic or electrostatic methods, or using high-voltage electric fields

B03C

Separation of solid materials from solid materials or fluids using sieving, screening, sifting, gas currents, or other dry methods

B07B

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Conditioning

means the adjustment or control of environmental parameters, e.g. temperature or pressure

G01N 31/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Investigating non-biological materials by the use of:

Investigating the properties of materials specially adapted for use in processes covered by subclass B23K (namely: soldering or unsoldering; welding; cladding or plating by soldering or welding; cutting by applying heat locally, e.g. flame cutting; working by laser beam) which is classified in the group G01N 31/12 (investigating using combustion). (See note (3) after the title of G01N.)

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Testing the effectiveness or completeness of sterilisation procedures without using enzymes or micro-organisms (involving enzymes or micro-organisms C12M, C12Q)

A61L 2/28

Apparatus for enzymology or microbiology

C12M

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Systems in which material is subjected to a chemical reaction, the progress or the result of the reaction being optically investigated

G01N 21/75-G01N 21/83

Investigating or analysing biological material by chemical analysis

G01N 33/50

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes or micro-organisms

C12Q 1/00

Combinatorial chemistry; Libraries

C40B

Special rules of classification

The observation of the progress of the reactions as covered by groups G01N 31/02-G01N 31/22 by any of the methods specified in groups G01N 3/00-G01N 29/00, if this observation is of major importance, is classified in the relevant group covering the method.

G01N 31/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Burettes in general

B01L 3/02

G01N 33/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Investigating or analysing materials, i.e. either solid, liquid or gaseous media, insofar as the material object of the investigation or analysis is of major importance.

Investigating or analysing materials by methods specifically adapted to the object of the analysis.

Investigating or analysing materials by a combination of pre-treatment and analysis, specifically adapted to the object of analysis.

Investigating or analysing biological material (covered by group G01N 33/48), e.g. blood (in vitro) or urine, including chemical analysis (see definition of subgroup G01N 33/50).

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Analysis as an integrated step of a process should be classified with the process, insofar as the process is fully provided for in another subclass. For example, analysis of water as integrated step of water treatment process is classified in subclass C02F.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Determining the germinating capacity of seeds

A01C 1/02

Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. gas concentration within the blood, pH-value of blood, for medical or veterinary diagnosis

A61B 5/145

Apparatus for enzymology or microbiology

C12M

Measuring or testing processes, other than immunoassay (which is covered by G01N 33/53), involving enzymes or micro-organisms

C12Q

Investigation of foundation soil or ground water in-situ

E02D 1/00
Places in relation to which this group is residual:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Investigating strength properties of solid materials by application of mechanical stress

G01N 3/00

Analysing materials by weighing, e.g. weighing small particles separated from a gas or liquid

G01N 5/00

Analysing materials by measuring the pressure or volume of a gas or vapour

G01N 7/00

Investigatingdensity or specific gravity of materials; analysing materials by determining density or specific gravity

G01N 9/00

Investigating flow properties of materials, e.g. viscosity, plasticity; analysing materials by determining flow properties

G01N 11/00

Investigating surface or boundary effects, e.g. wetting power; investigating diffusion effects; analysing materials by determining surface, boundary, or diffusion effects

G01N 13/00

Investigating characteristics of particles; investigatingpermeability, pore-volume, or surface-area of porous materials

G01N 15/00

Investigating resistance of materials to the weather, to corrosion, or to light

G01N 17/00

Investigatingmaterials by mechanical methods

G01N 19/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means, i.e. using infra-red, visible, or ultra-violet light

G01N 21/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of microwaves

G01N 22/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of other wave or particle radiation, e.g. X-rays or neutrons

G01N 23/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of nuclear magnetic resonance, electron paramagnetic resonance or other spin effects

G01N 24/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of thermal means

G01N 25/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of electric, electro-chemical, or magnetic means

G01N 27/00

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves; visualisation of the interior of objects by transmitting ultrasonic or sonic waves through the object

G01N 29/00

G01N 33/50 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood (in vitro), urine.

Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods.

Use of compounds or compositions for colorimetric, spectrophotometric or fluorometric investigation, e.g. use of reagent paper.

Immunological testing, including immunoassay or materials therefor.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

New peptides or new DNA or its corresponding mRNA, encoding for the peptides, and their use in measuring or testing processes should be classified in subclass C07K or in group C12N 9/00 according to the peptides, together with the appropriate classification relating to their use in diagnostics.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Measuring or testing processes, other than immunoassay (which is covered by G01N 33/53), involving enzymes or micro-organisms

C12Q
Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. gas concentration within the blood, pH-value of blood, for medical or veterinary diagnosis

A61B 5/145

Apparatus for enzymology or microbiology

C12M

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Automatic analysis; handling materials therefor

G01N 35/00

Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies for therapeutic purposes

A61K 39/00

Chemical or physical apparatus for general laboratory use

B01L

Nano-structures, e.g. nano-chips

B82B

Peptides

C07K

Enzymes, pro-enzymes or compositions thereof per se

C12N 9/00

Combinatorial chemistry; Libraries

C40B

Special rules of classification

In groups G01N 33/52-G01N 33/96, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Involving

When used in relation to a material includes the testing for the material as well as employing the material as a determinant or reactant in a test for a different material.

G01N 33/58 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For testing in vivo

A61K 51/00

G01N 33/60 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tracers

G21H 5/02

G01N 35/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Automated apparatus of general applicability in laboratory analytical methods.

Automated clinical laboratory equipment not limited to specific methods.

Methods of operating such apparatus in automatic analysis.

Handling samples and reagents in automatic analysers. Fluid samples may flow along a tube system, or be carried in individual containers.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Analysis performed directly on the human or animal body for medical or veterinary diagnosis

A61B, A61D

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sampling; preparing specimens for investigation

G01N 1/00

Specific methods of analysis of biological materials

G01N 33/48

Chemical or physical processes, e.g. catalysis, colloid chemistry, or their relevant apparatus, for chemical processes in general, including automatic synthesis

B01J 19/00

Chemical or physical apparatus for general laboratory use, e.g. glassware, heating apparatus

B01L, B01L 3/00, B01L 7/00

Program-control systems for automatic apparatus

G05B 19/00

Digital computing or data processing specially adapted for specific functions or for specific applications

G06F 17/00, G06F 19/00

G01N 37/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

This group is meant as a residual place in the subclass G01N, i.e. for classifying details of methods or apparatus for analysing materials not fully covered by any of the other main groups.

G01P - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Means to measure linear or angular rate of change of position of solid bodies or fluid mediums (speed, velocity);

Means to measure rate of change of linear or angular speed or velocity (acceleration, deceleration, shock) of solid bodies or fluid mediums;

Means to indicate or record movement of solid bodies or fluid mediums (presence, absence or direction); and

Means to test or calibrate apparatus or devices covered by this subclass.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Combined measuring devices measuring two or more variables of movement, e.g. distance, speed, acceleration

G01C 23/00

Measuring volume flow or mass flow

G01F

Measuring the velocity of ultrasonic, sonic (sound) or infrasonic waves

G01H

Measuring velocity of light

G01J 7/00

For determining direction or velocity of solid objects by reflection or reradiation of radio or other waves and based on propagation effects, e.g. Doppler effect, propagation time, direction of propagation

G01S

Measuring speed of nuclear or X-radiation

G01T
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Measuring or recording blood flow

A61B

Monitoring speed or acceleration of electrically-propelled vehicles

B60L 3/00

Vehicle optical or lighting devices adapted to indicate speed

B60Q 1/54

Control, warning or like safety means along the route or between vehicles or vehicle trains

B61L 23/00

Measuring acceleration of gravity

G01V 7/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Determining position or course in navigation, measuring ground distance in geodesy or surveying

G01C

Mechanical means for transferring the output of a sensing member; Means for converting the output of a sensing member to another variable where the form or nature of the sensing member does not constrain the means for converting; Transducers not specially adapted for a specific variable

G01D 5/00

Measuring torque

G01L 3/00

Testing structures or apparatus not otherwise provided for

G01M

Instruments for indicating weather conditions by measuring two or more variables, e.g., humidity, pressure, temperature, cloud cover, wind speed

G01W 1/02

Measuring short time intervals

G04F

Systems for control of linear speed, angular speed, acceleration or deceleration, e.g. governors

G05D 13/00

Devices for counting moving objects in general

G06M

Registering or indicating the working conditions of vehicles

G07C 5/00

G01P 1/07 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Indicating working conditions of vehicles

G07C 5/00

G01P 1/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Registering working conditions of vehicles

G07C 5/00

G01P 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Counting mechanisms

G06M

G01P 3/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Governors

G05D 13/00

G01P 3/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Gyrometers using the Sagnac effect, i.e. rotation-induced shifts between counter-rotating electromagnetic beams

G01C 19/64

G01P 3/42 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring electric or magnetic values in general

G01R

G01P 3/62 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring pressure in general

G01L

G01P 5/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring speed of rotating shafts

G01P 3/00

G01P 5/175 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Analogue computers therefor

G06G 7/57

G01P 7/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Inertial navigation, i.e. calculating position or speed aboard the object being navigated, by integration of speed or acceleration

G01C 21/16

G01P 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Counting moving objects

G06M 7/00

Electric switches

H01H

G01P 15/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Gyroscopes per se

G01C 19/00

G01Q - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Scanning probes, i.e. devices having at least a tip of nanometre sized dimensions that scans or moves over an object surface, typically at a distance of a few angstroms or nanometres, monitoring some interaction between the tip and the surface, e.g. monitoring the generation of a tunnelling current.

Techniques or apparatus involving the use of scanning probes.

The following subjects are therefore covered, the list being non-exhaustive:

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, the first place priority rule is applied, i.e. at each hierarchical level, classification is made in the first appropriate place.

G01Q 10/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Actively controlling the movement or the location of the scanning probe tip relative to the object surface.

G01Q 10/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Generating movement of the scanning probe tip relative to the object surface at a scale larger than the resolution of the scanning probe microscope.

G01Q 10/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Generating movement of the scanning probe tip relative to the object surface of a size comparable to the resolution of the scanning probe microscope.

G01Q 10/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Electronic means for locating or stabilizing the movement of the scanning probe tip relative to the object surface.

G01Q 20/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Methods or apparatus to monitor the movement of the probe.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Monitoring the movement or position of the probe with active control thereof

G01Q 10/00

G01Q 20/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Monitoring the movement of the probe by means of light-sensitive/responsive devices.

G01Q 20/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Probes comprising in their structure means for detecting a signal to control/monitor their movements, e.g. piezoelectric gauges.

G01Q 30/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Devices or methods to assist or improve the analysis or investigation.

G01Q 30/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

An analysing or investigating device, different from a scanning probe microscope, for assisting or improving the master scanning probe techniques or apparatus.

G01Q 30/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

A programmable device that stores, retrieves, processes or displays data for assisting or improving the scanning probe techniques or apparatus.

G01Q 30/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

A programmable device wherein the data information is used to correct or fix the performance of the SPM.

G01Q 30/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means to adjust or control parameters, e.g. temperature, pressure or humidity, of a working environment condition inside the chamber containing the sample being studied.

G01Q 30/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means to adjust or control the temperature of the sample chamber, e.g. a cryostat or heater that allows SPM to be performed at low or high temperatures.

G01Q 30/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means to adjust or control parameters, e.g. pressure or compositions, of the fluid environment inside the sample chamber. The fluid environment can be in liquid or gas state.

G01Q 30/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means to adjust or control parameters of the liquid environment, e.g. water or other liquid chemical, inside the sample chamber.

G01Q 30/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means to adjust or control a vacuum condition inside the sample chamber, e.g. pumping means.

G01Q 30/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means to prevent SPM from being disturbed by a condition outside the scanning probe microscope, e.g. vibration, temperature or pressure.

The SPM is protected as a whole under the adverse condition. For example, a specific housing or arrangement to eliminate external vibrations to assure the stability of the microscope, or shielding that protects it from electromagnetic fields.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Environmental regulation means for sample chamber

G01Q 30/08

Regulations/error compensation means integrated in the probe

G01Q 70/04

G01Q 30/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods or devices to perform mechanical operations on a sample in the scanning probe microscope for analysis or investigation, e.g. tweezers, cutting means.

G01Q 40/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Methods or apparatus used to adjust or rectify a SPM device, e.g. the probe itself, to a desired standard.

G01Q 40/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Structure with nanometric resolution used for correcting or fixing the performance of the SPM device before its utilization, e.g. grating with a known line separation, and related manufacture.

G01Q 60/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Methods or apparatus for which the type of interaction between the scanning probe tip and the sample surface is specified.

G01Q 60/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods or apparatus involving two or more different types of interactions between the scanning probe tip and the sample surface, e.g. cantilever-type SPMs other than AFM which are explicitly built for AFM performances.

The device can contain either one probe or more than one probe to perform different types of SPM over the sample.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices containing array of tips with similar performance function

G01Q 70/06

G01Q 60/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods or apparatus wherein the two monitored interactions are tunnelling current (STM) and the attractive or repulsive force between the probe and the sample surface (AFM).

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Specific STMs

G01Q 60/10

Specific AFMs

G01Q 60/24

G01Q 60/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods or apparatus wherein the two monitored interactions are near-field light emitted from the sample surface (SNOM) and the attractive or repulsive force between the probe and the sample surface (AFM)

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Specific SNOMs

G01Q 60/18

Specific AFMs

G01Q 60/24

G01Q 60/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods or apparatus wherein the two monitored interactions are the magnetic force between the sample and the probe (MFM) and the attractive or repulsive force between the probe and the sample surface (AFM).

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Specific MFMs

G01Q 60/50

Specific AFMs

G01Q 60/24

G01Q 60/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods or apparatus for SPM wherein the monitored interaction is the tunnelling current between the tip and the sample, which are in very close proximity but not actually in physical contact.

G01Q 60/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

STM or apparatus therefor wherein the local electronic state of surface is analysed or investigated.

G01Q 60/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

STM or apparatus therefor wherein the electric potential distribution on the sample is analysed or investigated.

G01Q 60/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

STM probes, their manufacture, or related instrumentation, e.g. holders.

G01Q 60/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods or apparatus for SPM wherein the monitored interaction is the near-field light emitted or reflected from the object surface.

G01Q 60/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

SNOM or apparatus therefor wherein the near-field light to be monitored is the emission radiation from a sample surface excited by an electromagnetic wave.

G01Q 60/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

SNOM probes, their manufacture or related instrumentation, e.g. holders.

G01Q 60/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods or apparatus for SPM wherein the monitored interaction is the short range repulsive or long range attractive force between the probe and atoms of the sample surface.

G01Q 60/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

AFM or apparatus therefor wherein the force monitored is the shear force between the probe and atoms of the sample surface.

G01Q 60/28 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

AFM or apparatus therefor wherein the force monitored is the adhesion force that tends to keep the probe in contact with the sample surface.

G01Q 60/30 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

AFM or apparatus therefor wherein the force monitored is an electric interaction affected by the electric potential distribution on the sample surface, e.g. Kelvin probe microscopy and Scanning Maxwell stress microscopy.

G01Q 60/32 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

AFM or apparatus therefor wherein the probe is a vibrating cantilever, or is mounted on a vibrating cantilever.

G01Q 60/34 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

AFM or apparatus therefor wherein tip of probe touches periodically the sample surface.

G01Q 60/36 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

AFM or apparatus therefor wherein the probe is, or is mounted on, a static (i.e. vibrationless) cantilever.

G01Q 60/38 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

AFM probes, their manufacture, or their related instrumentation, e.g. holders.

G01Q 60/40 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

AFM probe that is made of a material that conducts electric charges.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Conductive probes that perform the function of STM probes

G01Q 60/04, G01Q 60/16

G01Q 60/42 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

AFM or apparatus therefor wherein specific particles are added to the tip to give it another characteristic, e.g. specific chemical receptor for biochemical analysis.

G01Q 60/44 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods or apparatus for SPM wherein the monitored interaction is the ion flow between the probe tip and the sample surface.

G01Q 60/46 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods or apparatus for SPM wherein the monitored interaction is the electrical capacity between the probe tip and the sample surface.

G01Q 60/48 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

SCM probes, their manufacture, or their related instrumentation, e.g. holders.

G01Q 60/50 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods or apparatus for SPM wherein the monitored interaction is the magnetic force between the probe tip and the sample surface.

G01Q 60/52 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

MFM or apparatus therefor wherein a spin magnetic moment is induced by a specific magnetic field frequency.

G01Q 60/54 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

MFM probes, their manufacture, or their related instrumentation, e.g. holders.

G01Q 60/56 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

MFM probe tips that are coated with some material with specific magnetic property.

G01Q 60/58 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods or apparatus for SPM wherein the monitored interaction is the heat or temperature of the sample surface.

G01Q 60/60 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods or apparatus for SPM wherein the monitored interaction is the Faraday current generated by an electrochemical reaction.

G01Q 70/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

General aspects of SPM probes, their manufacture or their related instrumentation, insofar as these probes are not specially adapted to a single particular type of SPM technique covered by group G01Q 60/00 and subgroups.

G01Q 70/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

General aspects of SPM probe holders.

G01Q 70/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

General SPM probe holders with integrated means to adjust the probe to correct for errors caused by temperature variations or vibrations.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Error compensation in general

G01Q 30/06

Protection of the scanning probe microscope in general

G01Q 30/18

G01Q 70/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

General SPM probes wherein multiple tips of similar characteristics form a line or a matrix.

G01Q 70/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Specific characteristics of general SPM probes.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Process of probe fabrication

G01Q 70/16

G01Q 70/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Specific physical form, degree of slope or angle of the tip in a general SPM probe.

G01Q 70/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

General SPM probes having a nano-sized tube such as Carbon nano-tube.

G01Q 70/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Specific choice of materials for general SPM probes or components thereof. For example, where a cantilever or a coating on the tip is made of some material that gives a particular property to the scanning probe.

G01Q 70/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Manufacture aspects of general SPM probes.

G01Q 70/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

General SPM probes, wherein specific particles are added to the tip to give it another characteristic, e.g. specific chemical receptor for biochemical analysis.

G01Q 80/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Specific applications, different from SPM, of scanning-probe techniques.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Manufacture or treatment of micro-structures

B81C

Manufacture or treatment of nano-structures

B82B 3/00

Recording or reproducing information using near-field interaction

G11B 9/12, G11B 11/24, G11B 13/08

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Specific SPM techniques, apparatus therefor or components thereof, e.g. probes

G01Q 60/00

General aspects of SPM probes

G01Q 70/00

G01Q 90/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Scanning-probe apparatus or techniques not otherwise provided for.

G01R - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Measuring electric variables or properties

Measuring electric variables directly, e.g. electromechanical instruments (see Glossary of terms) where the measured electric variables directly affect the indication of the measured value.

Measuring electric variables by derivation from other electric variables, i.e. arrangements (see Glossary of terms) involving circuitry to obtain an indication of a measured value by deriving, calculating or otherwise processing electric variables, e.g. by comparison with another value.

Measuring or investigating electric properties of materials.

Electric testing of analogue or digital electric devices, apparatus or networks, or measuring their characteristics.

Indicating presence or sign of current or voltage.

The following technical subjects are therefore covered, the list being non-exhaustive:

Measuring magnetic variables or properties

Measuring magnetic variables.

Measuring or investigating magnetic properties of materials.

The following technical subjects are therefore covered, the list being non-exhaustive:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Investigating electric variables or properties

This subclass covers measuring or investigating electric properties of materials, whereas measuring or investigating non-electric or non-magnetic properties of materials by the use of electric means is covered by group G01N 27/00.

Investigating magnetic variable or properties

This subclass also covers, under group G01R 33/00, measuring or investigating magnetic properties of materials, whereas measuring or investigating non-magnetic or non-electric properties of materials by the use of magnetic means is covered by group G01N 27/72.

In particular, group G01R 33/20 covers measuring magnetic variables/properties by using magnetic resonance, e.g. NMR, EPR or other spin effects, whereas investigating or analysing materials by using such spin effects is covered by group G01N 24/00.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Indicating correct tuning of resonant circuits

H03J 3/12
Measuring electric variables or properties

Medical diagnosis by electric means, e.g. by measuring bioelectric currents or voltages, or the impedance of a part of the body

A61B 5/04, A61B 5/05, A61B 5/053

Monitoring electric consumption of electrically-propelled vehicles

B60L 3/00

Investigating non-electric or non-magnetic properties of materials by the use of electric means

G01N 27/00

Electric prospecting or detecting

G01V 3/00

Measuring atmospheric potential differences, e.g. due to electrical charges in clouds

G01W 1/16
Measuring magnetic variables or properties

Medical diagnosis by means of magnetic fields, e.g. involving ESR, NMR or MRI

A61B 5/05, A61B 5/055

Ascertaining earth’s true or magnetic north for navigation or surveying purposes

G01C 17/00

Magnetic resonance gyrometers

G01C 19/60

Investigating or analysing materials by using NMR, EPR (i.e. ESR) or other spin effects

G01N 24/00

Investigating non-electric or non-magnetic properties of materials by the use of magnetic means

G01N 27/72

Measuring direction or magnitude of the magnetic earth’s field; Magnetic prospecting or detecting, e.g. well logging involving NMR

G01V 3/00
Electrical testing characterised by what is being tested not provided for elsewhere (group G01R 31/00)

Electric testing of control systems

G05B 23/02

Testing computers during standby operation or idle time

G06F 11/22

Testing of switches in structural association with the switches themselves

H01H

Testing discharge tubes during manufacture

H01J 9/42

Testing or measuring semiconductors or solid state devices during manufacture or treatment

H01L 21/66

Accumulators with integrated arrangements for testing condition

H01M 10/48

Testing of A/D or D/A conversion

H03M 1/10

Testing line transmission systems

H04B 3/46

Testing arrangements of data switching networks

H04L 12/26

Testing arrangements of telephone substation equipments

H04M 1/24

Testing of television systems or details thereof

H04N 17/00

Testing arrangements of loudspeakers, microphones or similar electromechanical transducers

H04R 29/00

Testing lamps structurally associated with light source circuit arrangements for detecting lamp failure

H05B 37/03

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring electric variables or properties

Electrotherapy

A61N 1/00

Measuring not specially adapted for a specific variable

G01D

Tariff metering apparatus

G01D 4/00

Measuring temperature based on the use of electric elements directly sensitive to heat

G01K 7/00

Systems for regulating electric variables

G05F 1/00, G05F 5/00

Image data processing or generation

G06T

Monitoring of signal or alarm line circuits, e.g. signalling of line faults

G08B 29/06

Electric switches; Emergency protective devices

H01H

Cathode-ray tubes

H01J 31/00

Thermo-electric solid state devices

H01L 35/00, H01L 37/00

Emergency protective circuit arrangements

H02H

Circuit arrangements for charging, or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries

H02J 7/00

Methods or apparatus specially adapted for manufacturing, assembling, maintaining or repairing dynamo-electric machines

H02K 15/00

Generation of oscillations

H03B

Modulation

H03C

Frequency discriminators; Phase discriminators

H03D

Amplifiers

H03F

Impedance networks, e.g. resonant circuits; Resonators

H03H

Tuning resonant circuits; Selecting resonant circuits

H03J

Pulse technique

H03K

A/D or D/A conversion

H03M 1/00

Housings for electric apparatus

H05K

Screening of electric apparatus or components against electric fields

H05K 9/00

Arrangements for monitoring manufacture of assemblages of electric components

H05K 13/08
Measuring magnetic variables or properties

Magnetotherapy

A61N 2/00

Measuring not specially adapted for a specific variable

G01D

Measuring temperature based on the use of magnetic elements directly sensitive to heat

G01K 7/36

Systems for regulating magnetic variables

G05F 7/00

Image data processing or generation

G06T

Superconducting magnets

H01F 6/00

Magnets

H01F 7/00

Thermo-magnetic solid state devices

H01L 35/00, H01L 37/00

Devices using galvano-magnetic or similar magnetic effects, e.g. Hall effect

H01L 43/00

Aerials

H01Q

Screening of electric apparatus or components against magnetic fields

H05K 9/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

measuring properties

can also be interpreted as investigating properties

instruments or measuring instruments

means electro-mechanical measuring mechanisms

arrangements for measuring

means apparatus, circuits, or methods for measuring

Synonyms and Keywords

EPR

electron paramagnetic resonance

ESR

electron spin resonance

NMR

nuclear magnetic resonance

MRI

magnetic resonance imaging

MRS

magnetic resonance spectroscopy

NQR

nuclear quadrupole resonance

G01R 1/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Details of a kind applicable to measuring arrangements not specially adapted for a specific variable

G01D 11/00, G01D 13/00

G01R 1/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Terminals in general

H01R

Terminal strips or boards

H02B

Casing, cabinets or drawers for electrical apparatus

H05K

G01R 1/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

End pieces for leads

H01R 11/11

G01R 1/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bearings in general

F16C

G01R 1/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Magnets in general

H01F

G01R 1/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Instrument transformers per se

H01F 38/20

G01R 1/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Voltage or current isolation using transformers

G01R 15/18

G01R 1/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Overload-protection arrangements in general

H02H

G01R 1/38 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Circuits

G01D 3/02

G01R 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Vibration galvanometers

G01R 9/02

G01R 5/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring effective values of currents or voltages using thermoconverters

G01R 19/03

G01R 5/28 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Combined with radiation detector

G01T

G01R 7/12 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Product

Mathematical operation

G01R 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Other arrangements for measuring time integral of electric power or current

G01R 22/00

G01R 11/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Applicable to electric measuring instruments in general

G01R 1/00

G01R 11/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bearings in general

F16C

G01R 11/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ferraris instruments

G01R 5/20

G01R 11/56 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tariff metering in general

G01D 4/00

G01R 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Display by mechanical displacement only

G01R 5/00, G01R 7/00, G01R 9/00

Recording frequency spectrum

G01R 23/18

G01R 13/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Counters

G06M

Analogue/digital conversion in general

H03M 1/00

G01R 13/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cathode-ray tubes

H01J 31/00

G01R 13/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Circuits for generating pulses, e.g. sawtooth waveforms

H03K 3/00

G01R 13/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements for controlling intensity of ray or beam, e.g. for modulation

H01J 29/52

G01R 13/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electronic switches

H03K 17/00

G01R 13/34 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sample-and-hold arrangements

G11C 27/02

G01R 13/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cathode-ray tubes

H01J 31/00

G01R 13/38 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Such measuring systems per se

G01R 5/00, G01R 7/00, G01R 9/00

G01R 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Details of instruments

G01R 1/00

Measuring leads, measuring probes

G01R 1/06

Overload protection arrangements

G01R 1/36

Circuits for correcting the transfer function

G01D 3/02

G01R 15/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Voltage dividers

G01R 15/04

G01R 17/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Automatic comparison or re-balancing arrangements

G01R 17/02

G01R 17/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Automatic comparison or re-balancing arrangements

G01R 17/02

G01R 19/165 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Circuits with regenerative action, e.g. Schmitt trigger

H03K 3/00

Threshold switches

H03K 17/30

G01R 19/25 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements for displaying measured electric variables in digital form

G01R 13/02

G01R 19/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Modifications of instruments to indicate the maximum or the minimum value reached in a time interval

G01R 1/40

G01R 19/32 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Modifications of instruments for temperature compensation

G01R 1/44

G01R 21/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices using galvano-magnetic or similar magnetic effects, e.g. Hall effect

H01L 43/00

G01R 22/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Monitoring electric consumption of electrically-propelled vehicles

B60L 3/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electromechanical arrangements therefor

G01R 11/00

G01R 23/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Frequency discriminators

H03D

G01R 23/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring time intervals

G04F

G01R 23/09 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Radiation-measuring instruments in which pulses generated by a radiation detector are integrated

G01T 1/15

G01R 23/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Generation of oscillations by beating unmodulated signals of different frequencies

H03B 21/01

G01R 23/173 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Panoramic receivers per se

H03J 7/32

G01R 25/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring power factor

G01R 21/00

Measuring position of individual pulses in a pulse train

G01R 29/02

Phase discriminators

H03D

G01R 25/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring time intervals

G04F

G01R 27/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring vessels, electrodes therefor

G01N 27/07

G01R 29/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Of amplitude

G01R 19/00

Of repetition rate

G01R 23/00

Of phase difference of two cyclic pulse trains

G01R 25/00

Monitoring pattern of pulse trains

H03K 5/19

G01R 29/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Calibrating instrument transformers

G01R 35/02

G01R 29/24 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrostatic instruments

G01R 5/28

Indicating presence of current

G01R 19/15

Arrangements for measuring time integral of electric power or current

G01R 22/00

G01R 31/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring leads, measuring probes

G01R 1/06

Indicating electrical condition of switchgear or protective devices

H01H 71/04, H01H 73/12, H02B 11/10, H02H 3/04

G01R 31/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring number of turns, transformation ratio, or coupling factor

G01R 29/20

G01R 31/07 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Means for indicating condition of fuse structurally associated with the fuse

H01H 85/30

G01R 31/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sectionalized protection of cable or line systems

H02H 7/26

G01R 31/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measurement of impurity content of materials

G01N

G01R 31/28 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Testing computers during standby operation or idle time

G06F 11/22

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Testing for short-circuits, discontinuities, leakage or incorrect line connection

G01R 31/02

Checking static stores for correct operation or testing static stores during standby or offline operation

G11C 29/00

G01R 31/327 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Structural association with switches

H01H

G01R 31/333 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Means for detecting the presence of an arc or discharge in switching devices

H01H 9/50, H01H 33/26

G01R 31/34 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Testing electric windings

G01R 31/06

Methods or apparatus specially adapted for manufacturing, assembling, maintaining or repairing dynamo-electric machines

H02K 15/00

G01R 31/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Circuit arrangements for charging, or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries

H02J 7/00

G01R 31/44 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Structurally associated with light source circuit arrangements for detecting lamp failure

H05B 37/03

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Discharge lamps

G01R 31/24

G01R 33/02 - Definition

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Measuring direction or magnitude of the earth’s field for navigation or surveying

G01C

For prospecting, for measuring the magnetic field of the earth

G01V 3/00

G01R 33/381 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electromagnets per se

H01F 7/06

G01R 33/3815 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Superconductive magnets

H01F 6/00

G01R 33/383 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Permanent magnets per se

H01F 7/02

G01R 33/387 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Screening

G01R 33/42

G01R 33/42 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Screening in general

H05K 9/00

G01S - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods or apparatus for determining positions, directions and distances by use of radio waves.

Methods or apparatus for determining velocities of solid objects/bodies by use of radio waves, unless the body is moving relative to some fluid and the influence of the streaming medium on the wave propagating therein is measured.

Methods or apparatus for locating solid objects/bodies, or detecting their presence by use of reflection or reradiation of radio waves.

Methods or apparatus for navigation by use of radio waves (attention is drawn to the limited scope of the term navigation, given below in the section Glossary of Terms).

Analogous methods or apparatus using other waves than radio waves, e.g. infrared, visible or ultraviolet light, or acoustic waves. Certain restrictions and priorities apply as regards other subclasses (see sections "Relationships between larger subject matter areas" and "References relevant to classification in this subclass" below).

Radar, Lidar, Sonar systems in general and specially adapted for specific applications if not specifically designed for geophysical use.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

The general subject matters direction-finding, navigation, determining distances, or velocities, locating, or presence-detecting are covered by several subclasses besides G01S: G01B, G01C, G01P, G01V.

G01S necessarily requires the use of waves (attention is drawn to the section "Glossary of terms").

Therefore, the use of static or time-varying fields that do not obey a wave equation is not sufficient for subject matter to be classified in G01S.

G01S specially emphasizes radio waves. Thus, this subclass is always the appropriate place when radio waves are used for determining directions, bearings, or distances. It is also always appropriate when radio waves are used for determining velocities of solid objects or bodies as well as for locating such bodies or detecting their presence. It is also always appropriate for navigation by using radio waves (attention is drawn to the limited scope of the term navigation, given below in the section "Glossary of terms").

As regards the use of other waves than radio waves, the part "analogous arrangements using other waves" of the title requires careful consideration of G01B, G01C, G01P, and G01V which all cover the use of such waves for the measuring of similar variables like distance, velocity, direction, or location.

When propagation effects of waves are relevant (see definition below in the section "Glossary of terms") G01B, G01C, and G01P all refer to G01S as being the appropriate place; however, there are some exceptions where propagation effects are relevant but the subject matter is classified elsewhere (see section "References relevant to classification in this subclass" below).

It is to be noted that this emphasis on propagation effects does not preclude subject matter from being classified in G01S when propagation effects are irrelevant to that subject matter.

Radar, Sonar, Lidar, or analogous systems specifically designed for geophysical use are classified in G01V. However, they are also classified in G01S if they are of general interest.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Measuring a linear dimension of an object

G01B

Measuring distances by optical means between spaced objects when propagation effects are irrelevant

G01B 11/14

Passive optical systems for measuring distances in line of sight or transverse to line of sight, respectively

G01C 3/00, G01C 5/00

Passive triangulation systems using a parallactic triangle

G01C 3/10, G01C 3/22, G01C 3/24, G01C 3/26

Navigation not using radio waves when propagation effects are not relevant; navigation beyond position fixing, determining velocity of a vehicle or craft or its direction of velocity

G01C 21/00

Determining velocities by optical means when propagation effects are not relevant

G01P 3/36

Determining presence, absence, or direction of movement

G01P 13/00

Prospecting by optical means; detecting the presence of objects or masses by optical means, e.g. by interruption of beams, i.e. light barriers

G01V 8/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Measuring volume flow of fluids or fluid solids by propagation effects of electromagnetic or other waves

G01F 1/66

Measuring direction or velocity of flowing fluids or of solid bodies relative to fluids using propagation effects of waves

G01P 5/00

Radar, Sonar, Lidar, or analogous systems specifically designed for geophysical use

G01V

Active systems for generating focusing signals

G02B 7/28

Navigation systems for traffic control purposes, i. e. systems in which the navigation is not performed autonomously by or in the vehicles, but where the vehicles are guided by instructions transmitted to them

G08G

Proximity switches

H03K 17/945, H03K 17/965

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring linear dimensions, e.g. length, thickness, and distances between spaced objects

G01B

Measuring distances, levels, bearings; surveying; navigation

G01C

Measuring acoustic waves per se

G01H

Measuring light per se

G01J

Investigating materials by optical radiation, microwaves or acoustic waves

G01N

Measuring linear or angular speed, indicating presence, absence, or direction of movement

G01P

Detecting masses or objects by methods not involving reflection or reradiation of radio, acoustic, or other waves; prospecting

G01V

Optical systems

G02B

Control of position, course, altitude or attitude

G05D

Detecting the presence of objects for the purpose of counting them

G06M 7/00, G06M 11/00

Traffic control systems; anti-collision systems

G08G

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Waves, wave motion

is the mechanism by which energy is transported without the transfer of matter. Waves may be either electromagnetic waves, which do not require a medium to propagate, or mechanical waves, which require a medium, e.g. acoustic waves. Waves are most easily defined in mathematical terms as obeying a so-called wave equation.

Propagation effects

are relevant if the outcome of a measurement depends on the actual value of a physical quantity characterising the propagation of the wave, i.e. its wavelength, frequency, velocity, or phase. The mere presence or direction of a wave are not considered a propagation effect or to contribute to a propagation effect. To put it in another way, propagation effects are irrelevant, if the radiation may be looked upon as a beam of radiation whose wave nature can be ignored. Examples of measurements where propagation effects are relevant include e.g. measurements of propagation time, phase difference, phase delay, measurements using the Doppler effect, or interference.

Navigation

is in this subclass limited to position fixing, or determining the velocity or direction of velocity of vehicles or crafts or their distance from other objects.

Reflection, reradiation

means the general physical phenomenon that propagating waves are being scattered by any object, body or target in their path. Scattering can be elastic (i.e. the frequencies of the incoming and outgoing waves are the same) or inelastic (i.e. the respective frequencies are different). Other properties of the wave may change as well. Reflection can be specular or diffuse depending on surface properties of the scattering object. Reradiation further includes the mechanism characteristic of a transponder, i.e. receiving a wave and then transmitting an answering wave.

Transponder

means an arrangement which reacts to an incoming interrogating or detecting wave by emitting a specific answering or identifying wave.

Active systems

means systems comprising an artificial source for emitting waves. The propagating waves interact with at least one object and are eventually detected by the system. The interaction may consist in e.g. a reflection.

Passive systems

means systems detecting waves that are not emitted by the measuring system itself (e.g. by the sun).

Object

an entity that is not part of the measuring device.

G01S 1/72 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Signalling devices

G08B

G01S 1/76 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sound focusing or directing using electrical steering of transducer arrays, e.g. beam steering, in general

G10K 11/34

G01S 3/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For geophysical measurement

G01C

G01S 3/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Providing directional parameters for interacting aerial units

H01Q 21/29

G01S 3/68 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Radar cathode-ray tube indicators providing co-ordinated display of distance and direction

G01S 7/10

G01S 3/802 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sound-focusing or directing using electrical steering of transducer arrays, e.g. beam steering, in general

G10K 11/34

G01S 5/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Radar indicators providing co-ordinated display of direction and distance

G01S 7/10

G01S 5/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sonar indicators providing co-ordinated display of direction and distance

G01S 7/62

G01S 7/03 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

TR boxes

H01J 17/64

Waveguides or resonators or other devices of the waveguide type

H01P

Aerials

H01Q

Basic electronic circuitry, e.g. generation of oscillations, modulation, demodulation, amplification, pulse technique

H03

Impedance networks, resonators

H03H

G01S 7/292 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Doppler systems

G01S 13/50

G01S 7/499 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring polarisation of light

G01J

G01S 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Direction-finders

G01S 3/00

G01S 13/524 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Coherent receivers

G01S 7/288

G01S 17/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Passive systems using a parallactic triangle

G01C 3/10, G01C 3/22, G01C 3/24, G01C 3/26

G01S 17/48 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Passive systems using a parallactic triangle

G01C 3/10, G01C 3/22, G01C 3/24, G01C 3/26

Active systems for automatic generation of focusing signals

G02B 7/32

G01S 19/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Satellite radio beacon positioning systems including receivers and elements cooperating therewith.

Determination of position, velocity or attitude using signals transmitted by such systems.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Satellite radio beacon positioning systems, of which GPS is the best known exponent, is a widely used technology.

This group and its subgroups, with the exception of the subgroups G01S 19/14-G01S 19/19 (see below), are the "function-places" for such technology.

Subgroups G01S 19/14-G01S 19/19 are "application-places for (GPS) receivers" insofar as they cover special characteristics of the (GPS) receivers, or specific constraints imposed on the receivers, so that they can adapt to the specific application. These subgroups do not cover the mere indication of the possible uses of a general GPS receiver.

The decision as to whether to classify in these groups will depend on the extent to which the invention relates to the core subject of these groups. Patent documents which deal with GPS merely as a "black box" to provide positioning information for use by the application, would not normally be classified in these groups.

Known applications of the technology are in the fields of surveying, navigation, network management, anti-theft and abduction and location based services – as listed in the section "Examples of places..." below.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Apparatus for physical training, sports

A63B

Fittings or systems for preventing or indicating unauthorised use or theft of vehicles

B60R 25/00

Surveying

G01C 15/00

Navigation

G01C 21/00

Electronic time-pieces for aspects of time-setting or synchronization

G04G 5/00, G04G 7/00

Alarms responsive to a single specified undesired or abnormal operating condition

G08B 21/00

Alarm systems in which the location of the alarm condition is signalled to a central station, e.g. fire or police telegraphic systems

G08B 25/00

Traffic control systems for road vehicles

G08G 1/00

Service making use of the location of users or terminals

H04W 4/02

Locating users or terminals for network management purposes

H04W 64/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transmission systems for measured values

G08C

Aerials

H01Q

Automatic control of frequency or phase; synchronisation

H03L 7/00

Transceivers

H04B 1/38

Spread spectrum techniques in general using direct sequence modulation (DSM)

H04B 1/707

Printed circuits; casing or constructional details of electric apparatus

H05K

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Cooperating elements

designates additional elements or subsystems, including receivers of other users, which interact or communicate with the receiver or the satellite positioning system

Time-stamped message

designates a message encoded with time of transmission for use in determining the signal travel time

Synonyms and Keywords

AGPS

Assisted (or aided) GPS

DGPS

Differential GPS

IMU

Inertial Measurement Unit

INS

Inertial Navigation System

LAMBDA

Least-squares AMBiguity Decorrelation Adjustment

GLONASS

Global Orbiting Navigation Satellite System

GPS

Global Positioning System

G01T - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods and instruments for measurement and detection of X-radiation, gamma radiation, corpuscular radiation, cosmic radiation, or neutron radiation.

Recording of movements or tracks of particles.

Details of instruments for measuring of X-radiation, gamma radiation, corpuscular radiation, cosmic radiation, or neutron radiation.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Apparatus for radiation diagnosis or therapy in medical and veterinary science are classified in A61B 6/00 or A61N 5/00. The borderline between G01T and A61B should be determined based on whether the apparatus is purely medical or the feature is more of a general technical nature.

There exists a certain overlap between X-radiation and UV-radiation, where measurement of UV-radiation is generally classified in G01J.

Nuclear magnetic resonance is classified in G01R 33/20, G01N 24/00 or A61B 5/055.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Radiation analysis of materials, mass spectrometry

G01N

Electric discharge tubes for analysing radiation or particles

H01J 40/00, H01J 47/00, H01J 49/00

Construction of ionisation chambers

H01J 47/02

Spark chambers

H01J 47/14

Semiconductor detectors per se

H01L 31/00

Secondary-electron-emitting electrodes in general

H01J 1/32
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Prospecting by the use of nuclear radiation, natural or induced

G01V 5/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring exposure time to X-rays

H05G 1/28

Photosensitive materials or processes for photographic purposes

G03C

Pulse rate meters in general

G01R 23/02

Applying radioactive material to the body

A61M 36/00

Radio isotopes

G21G 4/00

Tracers

G21H 5/00

Counters per se

G06M, H03K

Computerised tomographs

A61B 6/03

Nuclear magnetic computer tomography

G01R 33/20, G01N 24/00, A61B 5/055

Nuclear magnetic resonance.

G01R 33/20, G01N 24/00, A61B 5/055

Radiation pyrometry using electric radiation detectors which use the ionisation of gases

G01J 5/36

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of nuclear magnetic resonance, electron paramagnetic resonance or other spin effects

G01N 24/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

measuring

attention is drawn to the Notes following the title of class G01

Corpuscular radiation

a stream of atomic or subatomic particles which may be charged positive or negative, or be uncharged

G01T 1/175 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Converters

H02M

G01T 1/185 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Construction of ionisation chambers

H01J 47/02

G01T 1/24 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Semiconductor detectors per se

H01L 31/00

G01T 1/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Secondary-electron-emitting electrodes in general

H01J 1/32

G01T 1/29 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Scintigraphy

G01T 1/164

G01T 3/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Semiconductor detectors per se

H01L 31/00

G01V - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods and apparatus for geophysical purposes such as

Prospecting or detecting of masses or objects in general, e.g. by seismic, electric, magnetic, gravimetric, or optical means, or by the use of nuclear radiation;

Measuring gravitational fields or waves in general, e.g. gravitational forces between two bodies, or gravitational waves of cosmic origin;

Manufacturing, calibrating, cleaning, or repairing such apparatus;

Tags attached to, or associated with, an object, in order to enable detection of the object.

In this subclass, the geophysical methods apply both to the earth and to other celestial objects, e.g. planets.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

The general subject matters locating or detecting of masses or objects are covered by several subclasses besides G01V: G01S, G01C.

This subclass covers radar, sonar, lidar or analogous systems specifically designed for geophysical use. Radar, sonar, lidar or analogous systems, or details of such systems, if of general interest, are also classified in subclass G01S.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Means for indicating the location of accidentally buried, e.g. snow-buried, persons

A63B 29/02

Locating or presence-detecting by the use of radio, acoustic or other waves involving reflection and reradiation of waves

G01S

Burglar, theft, or intruder alarms actuated by interference with electromagnetic radiation or fields.

G08B 13/18, G08B 13/24
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Detecting or locating foreign bodies for diagnostic, surgical or person-identification purposes

A61B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Survey of boreholes or wells

E21B 47/00

Investigating or analysing earth materials by determining their chemical or physical properties

G01N

Measuring electric or magnetic variables in general, other than direction or magnitude of the earth's field

G01R

Magnetic resonance arrangements in general

G01R 33/20

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

tags

means arrangements cooperating with a detecting field, e.g. near field, and designed to produce a specific detectable effect; "tags" also means active markers or labels capable of generating a detectable field; tags are not to be confused with transponders (cf Glossary of G01S).

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expressions "electronic label" or "electronic marker" is often used instead of "tag" which is used in the classification scheme of this subclass.

G01V 1/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Blasting in general

F42D 3/06

Nuclear explosives

G21J

G01V 1/157 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Spark gaps, discharge apparatus, not otherwise provided for

H01T

G01V 1/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring vibrations

G01H

Measuring acceleration or shock

G01P

Microphones or like acoustic electromechanical transducers

H04R

G01V 1/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Signal-transmitting systems in general

G08C

Electric transmission systems

H04B

G01V 1/24 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transforming one recording into another

G01V 1/32

G01V 3/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For navigation, for surveying

G01C

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

By optical means

G01V 8/00

G01V 3/08 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Measuring the magnetic field characteristics of the earth

G01V 3/40

G01V 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring nuclear radiation

G01T

G01V 7/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Balances in general

G01G

G01V 8/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Photogrammetry or videogrammetry

G01C 11/00

Measurement of characteristics of light

G01J

Optical scanning systems

G02B 26/10

Semiconductor devices sensitive to light

H01L 31/00

G01V 8/10 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Counting of objects carried by a conveyer

G06M 7/00

Detecting movement of traffic to be counted or controlled

G08G 1/01

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Signalling or calling arrangements

G08B

Proximity switches

H03K 17/945, H03K 17/965

G01V 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Signs, labels

G09F

G01W - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Measurement of certain ambient atmospheric conditions.

Adaptations of balloons, missiles, or aircrafts for meteorological purposes.

Radiosondes.

Devices for predicting weather conditions.

Weather houses or similar ornamental devices for indicating humidity.

Sunshine-duration recorders.

Rainfall or precipitation gauges.

Measuring atmospheric potential differences, e.g. due to electrical charges in clouds.

Catathermometers for measuring "cooling value" related either to weather conditions or to comfort of other human environment.

Testing or calibrating meteorological apparatus.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Instruments for measuring single physical variables, e.g. temperature, pressure or wind speed, should be classified in the appropriate subclasses of class G01, e.g. G01K, G01Lor G01P whereas G01Wshould be used for the classification of instruments specializing or combining those measurements for the purpose of deducing, indicating or forecasting weather conditions or meteorological information.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Radar, sonar, lidar or analogous systems, designed for meteorological use

G01S 13/95, G01S 15/88, G01S 17/95

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Influencing weather conditions in horticulture, cultivation, forestry or watering

A01G 15/00

Heating, cooling or ventilating devices in vehicles

B60H 1/00

Balloons in general

B64B 1/40

Dispersing fog in general, e.g. on roads or on airfields

E01H 13/00

Self-propelled or guided missiles for carrying measuring instruments

F42B 15/08

Measuring volume

G01F

Measuring temperature

G01K

Measuring pressure

G01L 7/00-G01L 15/00

Measuring intensity of sunshine

G01J 1/00, G01J 5/00

Measuring humidity, e.g. hygrometers

G01N, G01N 19/10

Measuring speed of fluids, e.g. wind speed

G01P 5/00

Indicating direction of fluid movement, e.g. by weather vane

G01P 13/02

Measuring potential differences

G01R 19/00, G01R 29/00

Alarms responsive to formation or anticipated formation of ice

G08B 19/02

Alarms responsive to calamitous events, e.g. tornados

G08B 21/10

Transmission systems for measured values

G08C

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Meteorology

includes measurement of certain ambient atmospheric conditions

Synonyms and Keywords

CAT

Clear Air Turbulence

G01W 1/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transmission systems for measured values

G08C

G01W 1/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring intensity of sunshine

G01J 1/00, G01J 5/00

G01W 1/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring volume in general

G01F

G01W 1/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring potential differences in general

G01R 19/00, G01R 29/00

G02B - Definition

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Essential

Fundamental

G02C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

The following optical and non-optical categories of eyewear:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Groups A61F 9/02 and A61F 9/04 cover goggles or eye-masks (eye-shields) as forms of protective eyewear worn to prevent particulates or chemicals from striking the eyes, and not having the features of vision correction or protection against high levels of visible and ultraviolet light, which are normally associated to spectacles. Typical examples of goggles covered by these groups are goggles worn while welding, drilling or sawing. Goggles for swimming are covered by A63B 33/00, whereas diving masks are covered by B63C 11/12.

This subclass covers instead spectacles or goggles insofar they have features of vision correction or protection. Sunglasses are covered by this subclass; insofar they protect the eye against high levels of visible and ultraviolet light.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Optical parts characterized by the material

G02B 1/00

Heating arrangements specially adapted for transparent or reflecting areas

H05B 3/84
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Trial frames for optician's use

A61B 3/04

Goggles for swimming

A63B 33/00

Diving masks, including those having corrective lenses

B63C 11/12

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Helmet visors having means to avoid fogging or misting, or having cleaning means

A42B 3/22

Cases for telescopes or binoculars

A45C 11/08

For means to examine the eyes

A61B 3/00

Goggles or eyeshields not having the same features as spectacles

A61F 9/00

Devices for inserting contact-lenses

A61F 9/00

Means to grind the edges of lenses using spectacles as a template

B24B 9/14

Positioning or marking of lenses

B24B 13/005

Tools for grinding lenses

B24B 13/02-B24B 13/06

Surface treatment of glass

C03C 15/00-C03C 23/00

Simple or compound lenses

G02B 3/00

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following expressions/words:

* "spectacles" and "eyeglasses"

* "eye-shields" and "eye-masks"

are often used as synonyms.

G02C 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Lenses therefor

G02C 7/00

Lens assemblies or monocles supported by walking-sticks

A45B 3/00

G02C 5/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Pivotal connections in general

F16C 11/00

G02C 7/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Disinfection or sterilization of contact lenses

A61L 12/00

G02C 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Spectacle cases

A45C 11/04

G02C 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Producing spectacle frames from plastics or from substances in a plastic state

B29D 12/02

G02F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Devices or arrangements for the control of light beams, wherein the operation of said devices or arrangements is modified by changing the optical properties of the medium of said devices or arrangements by influence or control of physical parameters, where

The following optic elements are therefore covered, the list being not exhaustive:

Non-linear optics, i.e. devices or arrangements in which the electric or magnetic field component of the light beam influences the optical properties of the medium.

Control of light beams by electromagnetic waves, e.g. radio waves, or by electrons or other elementary particles.

Optical analogue/digital converters, i.e. devices performing the digitalisation of an optical analogue signal, insofar these converters are based in substantial manner on elements which are provided for under the bullets above.

Demodulating light.

Transferring the modulation of modulated light, i.e. transferring the information from one optical carrier of a first wavelength to a second optical carrier of a second wavelength.

Frequency changing of light, e.g. by quantum counters.

Optical logic elements.

Optical bistable devices, i.e. devices exhibiting two different optical output states for a same optical input value.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Group G02B 26/00 covers optical devices or arrangements for controlling light using movable or deformable elements, as opposed to subclass G02F that covers devices or arrangements involving a modification or control of the optical properties of the medium of said devices or arrangements.

Group G05D 25/00 covers control of light in general, e.g. by using electric or mechanical means, as opposed to subclass G02F that covers devices or arrangements involving a modification or control of the optical properties of the medium of said devices or arrangements.

Group G09F 9/35 covers indicating arrangements in which characters are formed on a support by combining individual liquid crystal elements, as opposed to group G02F 1/13 that covers devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, phase, polarization or colour based on liquid crystals. Classification should be given in G09F 9/35 when the emphasis is on the indicating aspects, and in the relevant subgroups of G02F 1/13 when the emphasis is on the devices or arrangements aspects of the liquid crystal cells involved.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Lasers using stimulated Brillouin or Raman effect

H01S 3/30
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Optical computing devices

G06E

Modulators for heads used in optical recording or reproducing

G11B 7/125

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Liquid crystal materials

C09K 19/00

Non-portable lighting devices in general

F21S

Features or details of lighting devices, e.g. use of light guides

F21V

Optical transfer means between sensing member and indicating or recording part in connection with measuring

G01D 5/26

Testing of optical apparatus

G01M 11/00

Optical devices, systems or arrangements per se

G02B

Control of light in general, e.g. by using electric means

G05D 25/00

Optical recording associated with non-optical reproducing, or optical reproducing associated with non-optical recording

G11B 11/00

Digital static stores using optical elements

G11C 13/04

Modulation of electromagnetic waves

H03C 7/00

Transmission systems employing light

H04B 10/00

Optical multiplex systems

H04J 14/00

Pictorial communication, e.g. television

H04N

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following abbreviations are often used:

AMLCD

Active Matrix Liquid Crystal Display

G-H

Guest-Host

IPS-LCD

In Plane Switching Liquid Crystal Display

LCD

Liquid Crystal Display

MQW

Multiple Quantum Well

PALC (display)

Plasma Addressed Liquid Crystal (display)

PDLC

Polymer Dispersed Liquid Crystal

SEED

Self Electro-optic Effect Device

SHG

Second Harmonic Generation

SLM

Spatial Light Modulator

STN-LC

Super-Twisted Nematic Liquid Crystal

TFT-LCD

Thin Film Transistor Liquid Crystal Display

TN-LC

Twisted Nematic Liquid Crystal

G02F 1/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Indicating arrangements in which characters are formed on a support by combining individual liquid crystal elements

G09F 9/35

Control of light sources

H01S 3/10, H01S 5/06, H05B 33/08, H05B 35/00-H05B 43/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Thermometers using change of colour or translucency

G01K 11/12

Thermometers using changes in fluorescence

G01K 11/32

Light guide devices

G02B 6/00

Optical devices or arrangements using movable or deformable elements for controlling light independent of the light source

G02B 26/00

Control of light in general

G05D 25/00

Visible signalling systems

G08B 5/00

Control arrangements of circuits for display devices other than cathode-ray tube type, e.g. control circuits for LCD's or electrochromic displays

G09G 3/00

G02F 1/01 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Polarizing elements per se

G02B 5/30

G02F 1/13 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Liquid crystal materials

C09K 19/00

G02F 1/29 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Lasers provided with means to change the location from which, or the direction in which, laser radiation is emitted

H01S 3/101

G02F 1/35 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Lasers using stimulated Brillouin or Raman effect

H01S 3/30

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Optical bistable devices

G02F 3/02

G02F 2/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Control of the emitted radiation in laser devices

H01S 3/10, H01S 5/06

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring characteristics of light, e.g. intensity, spectrum

G01J

Photoelectric discharge tubes

H01J 40/00

Semiconductor devices sensitive to light, e.g. photodetectors

H01L 31/00

Demodulation of electromagnetic waves, or transferring modulation of electromagnetic waves from one carrier to another

H03D 9/00

G02F 2/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Luminescent materials

C09K 11/00

G02F 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric-pulse generators using opto-electronic devices as active elements

H03K 3/42

Logic circuits using opto-electronic devices

H03K 19/14

G03B 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Details common to cameras only

G03B 7/00-G03B 17/00

Details common to projectors only

G03B 21/00, G03B 23/00

Details common to printers only

G03B 27/00

G03B 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Details common to cameras only

G03B 7/00-G03B 17/00

Details common to projectors only

G03B 21/00, G03B 23/00

Details common to printers only

G03B 27/00

G03B 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Details common to cameras only

G03B 7/00-G03B 17/00

Details common to projectors only

G03B 21/00, G03B 23/00

Details common to printers only

G03B 27/00

G03C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Photosensitive materials for photographic purposes, including multicolour photosensitive materials or diffusion transfer photosensitive materials

Packages of films for inserting into cameras

Wrapping materials for light-sensitive plates, films, or papers

Photographic processes, including multicolour photographic processes

Diffusion transfer processes for photographic purposes

Photographic agents, including multicolour photographic agents

Diffusion transfer agents for photographic purposes

Regeneration of photographic processing agents, including multicolour photographic processing agents

Stereo-photographic processes or similar processes

Auxiliary processes in photography

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Subclass G03C covers the combination of cinematographic processes and sound-recording, whereas subclass G11B covers sound-recording per se.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Photographic processes characterised by the use or manipulation of apparatus classifiable per se in subclass G03B

G03B
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Photographic emulsion plates or blocks in which tracks of nuclear particles are made visible by after-treatment

G01T 5/10

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Organic dyes or closely-related compounds for producing dyes

C09B

Tenebrescent materials

C09K 9/00

Photomechanical production of textured or patterned surfaces; Materials or originals therefor; Apparatus specially adapted therefor

G03F

Electrography; Electrophotography; Magnetography

G03G

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Emulsion

Dispersion, i.e. a distribution of finely divided particles in a medium

Optical

Applies to visible light, but also to ultraviolet radiation or infrared radiation

Photosensitive composition

Photosensitive substance, e.g. silver halide, and, if applicable, binder or additives

Photosensitive material

Photosensitive composition, e.g. emulsion, the base carrying it, and, if applicable, auxiliary layers

G03C 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Compositions for photosensitive glass

C03C 4/04

G03C 1/047 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preparation of gelatine

C09H

G03C 1/498 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Thermography

B41M 5/26

G03C 1/675 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds with photosensitivity-increasing substances for the photomechanical production of textured or patterned surfaces

G03F 7/028

Photosensitive macromolecular compounds which are rendered insoluble or differentially wettable, applicable to the photomechanical production of textured or patterned surfaces

G03F 7/038

G03C 1/695 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Azides per se

C07D 499/40

Azides used as photosensitive material in the photomechanical production of textured or patterned surfaces

G03F 7/008

G03C 1/705 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Materials comprising photoresists applicable to the photomechanical production of textured or patterned surfaces

G03F 7/004

G03C 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Wrapping materials, in general

B65D 65/00, B65D 75/00

G03C 5/17 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Conversion screens for the conversion of the spatial distribution of X-rays or particle radiation into visible images

G21K 4/00

G03C 11/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Auxiliary processes in photography characterized by apparatus used

G03D 15/00

G03C 11/24 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrolytic recovery of metals by electrolysis of solutions

C25C 1/00

G03D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Liquid processing apparatus, with or without immersion

Washing apparatus, with or without immersion

Gas processing apparatus

Diffusion development apparatus

Reversal processing apparatus

Other processing apparatus or accessories therefor

Apparatus for treating processed material

Dark-room arrangements or portable dark-rooms

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Cameras with both developing and finishing apparatus

G03B 17/50
Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Exposure apparatus for contact printing adapted to be combined with processing apparatus

G03B 27/30

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Spraying apparatus; Atomising apparatus; Nozzles

B05B

Apparatus for applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces, in general

B05C

Processes for applying liquids or other fluent materials to surfaces, in general

B05D

Photosensitive materials for photographic purposes; Photographic processes; Auxiliary processes in photography

G03C

Apparatus specially adapted for photomechanical production of textured or patterned surfaces

G03F

Electrographic, electrophotographic, or magnetophotographic methods or apparatus

G03G

G03D 3/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mixing

B01F

G03D 13/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Containers for storage or transport of articles or materials, in general

B65D

G03D 15/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Drying solid materials or objects by removing liquid therefrom

F26B

G03D 15/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cutting, in general

B26D

G03D 15/10 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Means for mounting individual pictures to be projected, e.g. frame for transparency

G03B 21/64

G03F 1/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Patterned radiation modifying products that are chemically defined and have been patterned to modify radiation during imaging (e.g., masks, photomasks, reticles), preparation of such patterned radiation modifying products, similar or like products that function as mask blanks or specialized substrates, per se, for preparing such patterned radiation modifying products, processes of preparing such mask blanks or specialized substrates, per se (when not provided for elsewhere), pellicles, per se or pellicles in combination with patterned radiation modifying products, processes of preparing such pellicles (when not provided for elsewhere), containers that are specially adapted therefor, or processes of preparing the same (when not provided for elsewhere).

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrography; electrophotography

G03G

Photomechanical process; apparatus; photosensitive material, e.g., photoresist, in general

G03F 7/00

Use of photoresist structures for special production processes, e.g.:

Producing decorative effects

B44C

Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or parts thereof

H01L 21/00

Printed circuits; details of electric apparatus; manufacture of electrical components, in general

H05K

Holographic processes or apparatus

G03H

Special rules of classification

In this main group, at each hierarchical level, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the first appropriate place.

G03F 1/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of main group G03F 1/00 in which the radiation modifying products are either patterned masks for imaging by charged particle beam (CPB) radiation (e.g., by electron beam), mask blanks therefor, or specialized substrates for preparing such patterned masks; and the processes of preparing are directed to preparation of such patterned masks for imaging by charged particle beam (CPB) radiation, preparation of mask blanks therefor, or preparation of specialized substrates therefor.

G03F 1/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of main group G03F 1/00 in which the radiation modifying products are either patterned masks for imaging by radiation of 100 nanometers or shorter wavelength (e.g., X-ray masks, extreme ultraviolet (EUV) masks), mask blanks therefor, or specialized substrates for preparing such patterned masks; and the processes of preparing are directed to preparation of such patterned masks for imaging by radiation of 100 nanometers or shorter wavelength (e.g., X-ray masks, extreme ultraviolet (EUV) masks), preparation of mask blanks therefor, or preparation of specialized substrates therefor.

G03F 1/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of main group G03F 1/00 in which the radiation modifying products are either patterned phase shift masks (PSM’s), PSM blanks therefor, or specialized substrates for preparing such patterned PSM’s; and the processes of preparing are directed to preparation of such patterned PSM’s, preparation of PSM blanks therefor, or preparation of specialized substrates therefor.

(1) Note. In this subgroup, the phase shift mask (PSM) has a phase shift (PS) transmissive or reflective region that provides a different effective optical path length for illumination exiting the PS region than that of another (usually adjacent non-PS) region, so that exiting illumination from these separate regions are at different phases from each other. When the phase difference between adjacent PS and non-PS regions is 180 degrees, destructive interference is maximized for the exiting illumination between these regions, causing minimum combined diffracted light intensity, which results in a darkened projected light intensity that improves resolution when exposing a photosensitive layer (such as a photoresist).

(2) Note. For a transmissive PSM, the phase shift (PS) region is usually produced by selective addition of a transparent PS layer that increases the effective thickness of a transmissive substrate or by selective etching to create a recess that decreases the thickness of the transmissive substrate, each of which provides exiting illumination that differs in phase from illumination exiting another unchanged region of the transmissive substrate. However, the difference in phase at the phase shifting region can also be produced by selective doping or implantation of particular ions into the transmissive substrate to selectively change the refractive index or other optical characteristic of the transparent substrate, altering the passage of illuminated light exiting from the phase shifting region relative to light exiting from another (non-PS) region of the transmissive substrate for the PSM.

G03F 1/28 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of subgroup G03F 1/26 in which the phase shift mask (PSM) has three (3) or more different transmissive or reflective portions thereon that provide three (3) or more diverse phases of exiting illumination (e.g., tri-tone PSM for 0°, 90°, and 180° phases); and in which the process of preparing is directed to preparation of such a patterned PSM.

G03F 1/29 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of subgroup G03F 1/26 in which the phase shift mask (PSM) has an absorber region with an adjacent clear narrow ridge that produces phase shifted exiting illumination (180 degrees out of phase) with respect to non-phase shifted illumination exiting a non-phase shifted clear region of a transparent substrate, where the absorber region represents a pattern to be reproduced (rim PSM or outrigger PSM); and in which the process of preparing is directed to preparation of such a rim PSM or an outrigger PSM.

G03F 1/30 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of subgroup G03F 1/26 in which the phase shift mask (PSM) has alternating diverse phase clear regions separated by an absorber region that represents a pattern to be reproduced, where the absorber region is usually in the form of absorber lines separated by alternating phase shift (PS) spaces and non-phase shift (non-PS) spaces in repeating sequence across a major surface of the PSM (e.g., Levenson-Shibuya PSM, etc.); and in which the process of preparing is directed to preparation of such an alternating PSM (alt-PSM).

G03F 1/32 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of subgroup G03F 1/26 in which the phase shift mask (PSM) has an attenuating region that produces phase shifted exiting illumination at a different phase from that produced by a non-attenuating clear region of the attenuating PSM (e.g., PSM having semi-transparent phase shift portion, halftone PSM); and in which the process of preparing is directed to preparation of such an attenuating PSM (att-PSM).

(1) Note. In this attenuating PSM (att-PSM, halftone PSM), the attenuating or halftone region is partially transmissive and provides a phase shift (PS) in exiting illumination. The degree of PS and the transmissiveness of the att-PS region depends on the material and thickness of the att-PS region, as well as depending on the wavelength of the illumination. Such an att-PS region or a halftone PS region can be formed by adding an appropriate material at a suitable thickness, reducing the thickness of a previously formed layer (whether a supporting substrate of the att-PSM or an additional layer thereon), or other post-treatment of an att-PSM portion (such as selective doping or ion implantation).

(2) Note. An att-PS region can be created by sufficiently reducing the thickness of a normally opaque absorber layer material, such as a thin layer of chromium (Cr) often called "leaky chrome".

G03F 1/34 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of subgroup G03F 1/26 in which the phase shift mask (PSM) has at least two clear regions directly adjacent to each other that produce different phases (usually 180 degrees apart) to create a phase edge between these diverse clear regions in corresponding portions of exiting illumination, where the phase edge represents a pattern to be reproduced (e.g., chromeless PSM, etc.); and in which the process of preparing is directed to preparation of such a phase edge PSM.

Note. In this subgroup, such a phase edge PSM can be without any opaque region (as a chromeless PSM). Alternatively, the phase edge PSM is permitted to include an opaque region or an absorber region, such as at the peripheral border of this phase edge PSM to avoid unwanted artifacts that might otherwise be produced in a common photoresist layer by step-and-repeat exposures from this phase edge PSM. However, this phase edge PSM must still have at least one unobstructed phase edge between two directly adjacent clear regions that produce exiting illumination having different phases (e.g., at 0° and 180°, etc.), where the phase edge represents a pattern to be reproduced, as described above.

G03F 1/36 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of main group G03F 1/00 in which the patterned radiation modifying products are masks, where the mask has a pattern that includes a proximity correction feature or a changed dimension of a printing feature for improving a resulting printed pattern formed thereby (e.g., enhancing sub-resolution sized patterns, reducing side-lobe formation between closely spaced patterns); and in which the processes of preparing are directed to preparation of such masks having proximity correction features (e.g., optical proximity correction [OPC] design processes).

(1) Note. Proximity correction addresses problems resulting from the miniaturization of patterns for radiation modifying masks, which typically results in degradation of the pattern, with the degradation not being uniform between sorts of pattern such as, for example, a line-and-space pattern, an isolated pattern, etc.

(2) Note. The proximity correction features can be sub-resolution patterns (e.g. serifs, assist bars) or modified patterns (e.g. biased) to compensate for optical proximity effects in a basic layout of a mask pattern. Alternatively, the proximity correction features can be dummy patterns, which are placed in a vacant region of a mask pattern to reduce inhomogeneous processing due to proximity effects.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Adapting basic layout or design of a mask to a lithographic process requirement for preparation of masks without proximity correction features

G03F 1/70

Computer-aided design in general

G06F 17/50

G03F 1/38 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of main group G03F 1/00 in which the patterned radiation modifying products are masks having auxiliary features, where the mask possesses some structure in addition to that used for imaging and this structure is used for subsidiary purposes; and in which the processes of preparing are directed to preparation of such masks having auxiliary features.

Note. For example, the subsidiary purposes may be for alignment of the mask within an exposure apparatus, for testing of the mask, for protecting the mask, or for improving an image obtained from the mask.

G03F 1/50 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of main group G03F 1/00 in which the radiation modifying products are mask blanks for producing patterned masks; and in which the processes of preparing are directed to preparation of such mask blanks.

G03F 1/52 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of main group G03F 1/00 in which the radiation modifying products have a reflector that functions as a mirror to deflect incident radiation.

Note. The reflector can be a particular material that is chemically defined. Alternatively, the specified reflector can have a specific shape, a particular thickness, or a given internal microstructure (such as a reflector that was subjected to a particular heat treatment to relieve internal stress).

G03F 1/54 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of main group G03F 1/00 in which the radiation modifying products have an absorber (e.g., of opaque material) which functions to absorb incident radiation.

(1) Note. The absorber can be a particular opaque material that is chemically defined (e.g., tantalum (Ta), gold (Au), chromium (Cr), carbon (C), molybdenum silicide (MoSi)). Alternatively, the absorber can have a specific pattern (e.g., an unresolvable grid pattern leading to a grey tone mask, a gradient mask), a particular thickness (e.g., making the absorber region semi-transparent to provide only 20% transmittance for incident radiation at a target wavelength for imaging), or a given internal structure (e.g., multilayer absorber, ion implanted opaque layer to change an optical property for absorbing more incident radiation).

(2) Note. Excluded from this subgroup are attenuating phase shift masks (PSMs) having PS regions created by sufficiently reducing the thickness of a normally opaque absorber layer material, such as a thin layer of chromium (Cr) often called "leaky chrome".

G03F 1/60 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of main group G03F 1/00 in which the radiation modifying products or similar products have a substrate defined by a particular material, a given structure, or a stated property, making the substrate especially suited (e.g., in a patterned mask, in a mask blank therefor) for use in radiation imaging.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Layered products characterized by the non-homogeneity or physical structure of a layer

B32B 5/00

G03F 1/62 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of main group G03F 1/00 in which the pellicles, per se, or the pellicles in combination with radiation modifying products, provide protection for a patterned mask by excluding foreign matter (e.g., solid particles of dust) that would otherwise degrade proper imaging from the patterned mask (e.g., pellicle assembly having membrane on support frame).

Note. In this subgroup, the pellicle often includes a thin transparent layer (such as a transparent flexible membrane) attached to a rigid frame to hold the thin transparent layer at a specified distance away from the mask pattern so that foreign matter collecting on the outside of the pellicle will not be in the range of focus during imaging, in order to avoid degradation of the resulting imaged pattern produced from the mask. Alternatively, the pellicle can be a hard self-supporting layer, having a specified thickness and transparency, that is formed on the patterned mask. In either case, the pellicle still protects the mask, to which the pellicle is attached, from dust adhering on the mask pattern that would otherwise occur during imaging of the mask without any benefit of the pellicle.

G03F 1/64 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of subgroup G03F 1/62 in which the pellicles have special frames (e.g. structure or material), including bonding means for the pellicle frame, which establishes a bond between the frame and a pellicle membrane or between a frame and a substrate of a radiation modifying product.

Note. In this subgroup, the bonding means often includes an adhesive layer. Alternatively, the bonding means can include a structure that provides a physical attachment.

G03F 1/66 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of main group G03F 1/00 in which the containers are specially adapted for holding, protecting, or transporting of masks, mask blanks, or pellicles as defined therein; and the processes of preparing such containers (when not provided for elsewhere).

G03F 1/68 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of main group G03F 1/00 in which the preparation processes for preparing radiation modifying products and similar or like products include particular preparation steps, specific manufacturing methods, or given design steps for preparing these products, but which preparation processes are not specifically provided for in the previous subgroups.

G03F 1/70 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of subgroup G03F 1/68 in which the preparation processes are for adapting basic layout of patterned radiation modifying products to a lithographic process requirement, which include methods for adapting, modifying or correcting of basic patterns for a radiation mask used for photomechanical production of textured or patterned surfaces (e.g. second iteration correction of mask pattern for imaging).

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Proximity correction layout or design processes for preparation of masks with proximity correction features, e.g. OPC features

G03F 1/36

Computer-aided design in general

G06F 17/50

G03F 1/72 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of subgroup G03F 1/68 in which the preparation processes for preparing patterned radiation modifying products include methods for repair or correction of mask defects. e.g., by removing excess part defects or filling in missing part defects.

G03F 1/76 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of subgroup G03F 1/68 in which the processes for preparing patterned radiation modifying products include patterning of masks by imaging.

Note. Typically, this imaging to pattern the mask is accomplished by selectively exposing and developing a photosensitive layer (e.g., a photoresist layer on a mask blank) for defining a pattern therein that is used to form the resulting patterned mask.

G03F 1/80 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of subgroup G03F 1/68 in which the processes for preparing patterned radiation modifying products include an etching step to selectively remove material from a mask or a mask blank.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Etching metallic material by chemical means

C23F 1/00

G03F 1/82 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter of subgroup G03F 1/68 in which the processes for preparing radiation modifying products and similar or like products include performing operations that are ancillary to the manufacture or the design methods for these products, but which ancillary operations (as auxiliary processes) are not specifically provided for in the previous subgroups (e.g. cleaning or inspecting).

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cleaning in general

B08B

Testing of optical apparatus

G01M 11/00

Methods or arrangements for reading or recognizing printed or written characters or for recognizing patterns

G06K 9/00

G03H - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Means for producing a record of the phase and amplitude information of a wave-front, which information can be used to reconstruct the wave-front or means to reconstruct the original wave-front from a record containing the phase and amplitude information of the wave-front.

Holographic processes or apparatus using electromagnetic waves, acoustic waves or other electromagnetic waves or subatomic particles for obtaining holograms; processes or apparatus for obtaining images from them.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Holograms used as optical elements

G02B 5/32

Analogue computers performing mathematical operations with the aid of optical elements

G06E 3/00

Arrangements for recognition printed or written characters using holographic masks

G06K 9/76
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Interferometers using holographic techniques

G01B 9/021

Holograms used for marking record carriers

G06K 19/16

Holograms using for recording or reproducing of information on carriers, e.g. holographic storage

G11B 7/0065, G11C 13/04

Television signal recording using holographic recording

H04N 5/89

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Producing stereoscopic or other three-dimensional effects

G02B 27/22

Diffraction-grating systems

G02B 27/44

Systems using moire fringes

G02B 27/60

Optical logic elements

G02F 3/00

Stereo-photography

G03B 35/00

Photosensitive materials or processes photographic purposes

G03C

Apparatus for processing exposed photographic materials

G03D

Hologram used as mask in microlithography process

G03F 7/20

Arrangements for performing computing

G06G 7/12

Digital computing or data processing equipment or methods, specially adapted for specific functions

G06F 17/00, G06F 19/00

General purpose image data processing

G06T 1/00

Three dimensional (3D) image rendering and modeling

G06T 15/00, G06T 17/00

Construction of electron microscopes

H01J 37/26

Systems for obtaining stereoscopic television images

H04N 13/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Rainbow hologram or Benton hologram

is micro-relief structure consisting from multiple numbers of micro-dimensional grooves . The rainbow hologram separates out components wavelengths of white light and sends them in different directions, so that the viewer sees the image by light of only one wavelength.

Multiplex hologram

is produced by combining a large number of photographs in a holographic manner.

Synonyms and Keywords

CGH

Computer-generated hologram

G03H 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Producing stereoscopic or other three-dimensional effects

G02B 27/22

Systems using moire fringes

G02B 27/60

G03H 1/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Using electric digital computers

G06F, G06T

G03H 1/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Analogue computers

G06G, G06G 7/19

G03H 1/34 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Product

Mathematical operation

G03H 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Construction of electron microscopes

H01J 37/26

G04R - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electronic time-pieces integrated with input or output devices using radio waves

G04G 21/04

G04R 20/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tuning resonant circuits

H03J

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

GPS

Global Positioning System

Call sign

in broadcasting or radio communications, designates a transmitting station. A call sign can be formally assigned by a government agency or informally adopted by individuals or organizations

DCF77

designates the call sign broadcast from Mainflingen, about 25 km south-east of Frankfurt am Main, Germany.

The call signDCF77 stands for D=Deutschland (Germany), C=long wave signal, F=Frankfurt, 77=frequency: 77.5 kHz

JJY40, JJY60

designates the call sign broadcast from Mount Otakadoya (in Fukushima prefecture, Japan) at 40 kHz and from Mount Hagane (in Saga prefecture, Japan) at 60 kHz

MSF60

designates the call sign broadcast from Anthorn (UK) at 60 kHz with a range up to 1500 km, which covers all of UK

WWVB

designates the call sign of the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology's (NIST) radio station in Fort Collins, Colorado, that transmits carrier and time code (no voice) on 60 kHz (low frequency [LF] band), and which is used for synchronising radio-controlled clocks throughout the North America

GSM

Global System for Mobile communications, originally from the French Groupe Spécial Mobile

AM/FM

Amplitude Modulation / Frequency Modulation

UMTS

Universal Mobile Telecommunications System

3G

International Mobile Telecommunications-2000 (IMT-2000), better known as 3G or 3rd Generation

RDS

Radio Data System

G04R 60/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Structural details or housings of electronic time-pieces

G04G 17/00

G05G 1/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Knobs, handles, pedals or other like devices used to regulate or guide the operation of a machine, apparatus or system.

The fitting together or relative disposition of these devices.

Means for showing the place occupied by these devices.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Joysticks in general

G05G 9/047

Steering wheels for motor vehicles

B62D
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Controlling members specially used for programme control

G05G 21/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Means for preventing, limiting or returning the movements of parts of a control mechanism

G05G 5/00

Providing "feel", e.g. means to create a counterforce

G05G 5/03

Inhibiting the generation or transmission of noise

G05G 25/02

G05G 1/01 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The relative disposition of knobs, handles, pedals and other like devices used to regulate or guide the operation of a machine, apparatus or system.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Double foot control, e.g. for instruction vehicles

G05G 1/34

Mounting units comprising an assembly with two or more pedals

G05G 1/36

G05G 1/015 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Means for showing the status of the input member, e.g. the place occupied by knobs, handles or other like devices.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Means for continuously detecting pedal position

G05G 1/38

Means for detecting position through tactile feedback

G05G 5/03

G05G 1/32 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices which minimize the possibility of the pedal mechanism or its linkage to the controlled member harming, hurting, damaging, or impairing of the user in the event of a collision or other accident.

G05G 1/323 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices wherein, in the event of a collision or other accident, the linkage between the pedal and the controlled member is caused to be disrupted, e.g. by breaking or bending the connecting rod.

G05G 1/327 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices wherein, in the event of a collision or other accident, the pedal becomes dislodged from its mounting arrangement, e.g. by breaking or bending of the pedal support.

G05G 1/34 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements wherein a single device e.g. a brake or an accelerator or a clutch is controllable through two separate and distinct pedals as, e.g. for use in instructional vehicles where both a student and a teacher can alternatively or simultaneously control the device.

G05G 1/36 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Mounting arrangements wherein a single supporting unit supports two or more pedals, each of which controls a different device so as, e.g. to facilitate the mounting of the multiple pedal assembly as a single unit.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Double foot controls, e.g. for instructional vehicle

G05G 1/34

G05G 1/38 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Pedals including means, e.g. electronic means, to provide uninterrupted feedback to the control system, related device or the operator of the place occupied by the pedal at that moment.

G05G 1/40 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices which allow for the pedals to be brought to a more true and effective relative position with respect to the users foot.

G05G 1/42 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Pedals which move linearly, e.g. by sliding.

G05G 1/44 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Pedals which rotate about a fixed axis, e.g. pivot.

G05G 1/445 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Pedals which rotate about an axis which is located midway between the extremities of the pedal.

G05G 1/46 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices particularly concerned with the transmission of the pedal movement to the machine, apparatus, or system being regulated or guided.

G05G 1/48 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Pedals having a special friction-increasing surface to prevent the operator's foot from sliding off.

Devices connected to a pedal which present the foot-engaging surface closer to the user.

Other accessory devices connectable to a pedal.

G05G 1/483 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Pedals having means to prevent the operator's foot from sliding off, e.g. a friction-increasing surface.

G05G 1/487 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices connected to a pedal which provide an additional foot engaging surface.

G05G 1/50 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The process of making pedals.

Pedals which are distinguished by the constituents, or material of which they are composed.

G05G 1/54 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Knobs, handlesor other like devices which:

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Extensions specifically adapted for use with pedals

G05G 1/487

G05G 1/56 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Knobs, handles, pedals or other like which are uniquely modified to be put into mechanical action or motion through the use of a separate instrument.

G05G 1/60 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices used to either direct or support the foot of the user.

G05G 1/62 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices used to either direct or support the arm of the user.

G05G 5/03 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Devices which improve the user's ability to know that a knob, handle, pedal or other like device which is at a particular position through sensory feedback, e.g. by using detents.

Other devices which provide to the user tactile feedback of the position of a knob, handle, pedal or other like device usually by generating a variable amount of counterforce.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Arrangements for indicating the position of controlling members through other than tactile sensory feedback

G05G 1/015

G06E - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

All devices in which at least one computing function is performed by optical means. Optical computer is a device that uses the light beams, rather than electric current, to perform digital or analogue computations.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

If other aspects, for example mechanical, fluid pressure or electrical computing, are of interest, classification is also made in the relevant subclass for such aspects, e.g. G06C, G06D.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Digital storage using optical elements

G11C 13/04

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Light guides

G02B 6/00

Optical logic elements per se

G02F 3/00

Synthesising holograms

G03H

Computer systems based on biological models using optical means

G06N 3/067

Recording or reproducing by optical means

G11B 7/00

Devices consisting of a plurality of solid state components, including light sensitive semiconductor components, formed in or on a common substrate

H01L 27/14

Semiconductor devices sensitive to infra-red, light, UV radiation and adapted for the conversion of the such energy into electrical energy

H01L 31/00

Semiconductor devises adapted for light emission

H01L 33/00

Logic circuits using opto-electronic devices

H03K 19/14

Transmission systems using electromagnetic waves of optical range

H04B 10/00

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following expressions/words "optic computer" and "photonic computer" are often used as synonyms.

G06F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Electrical arrangements or processing means for the performance of any automated operation using empirical data in electronic form for classifying, analyzing, monitoring, or carrying out calculations on the data to produce a result or event.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Programme-control systems

G05B 19/00

Digital computers in which all the computation is effected mechanically

G06C

Computers in which a part of the computation is effected hydraulically or pneumatically

G06D

Computers in which a part of the computation is effected optically

G06E

Computer systems based on specific computational models

G06N

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Self-contained input or output peripheral equipment

G06K

Impedance networks using digital techniques

H03H

Computer displays

G09G

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Handling

includes processing or transporting of data.

Data processing equipment

An association of an electric digital data processor classifiable under group G06F 7/00, with one or more arrangements classifiable under groups G06F 1/00-G06F 5/00 and G06F 9/00-G06F 13/00.

G06F 1/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Details not covered by groups G06F 3/00-G06F 13/00 and G06F 21/00.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Architectures of general purpose stored programme computers

G06F 15/76

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Micro-programme loading

G06F 9/24

Instrument details

G12B

Special rules of classification

In order for a computing arrangement using a table to be classified in group G06F 1/03, the table must contain function values of the desired or an intermediate function, not merely coefficients.

G06F 3/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer;

Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Furniture aspects

A47B 21/00

Typewriters

B41J

Conversion of physical variables

F15B 5/00

Keyboard switches per se

H01H 13/70

Sampling per se

H03K 17/00

Electronic switches characterised by the way in which the control signals are generated

H03K 17/94

Coding, decoding or code conversion, in general

H03M

Analogue/digital conversion, in general

H03M 1/00

Coding in connection with keyboards or like devices in general

H03M 11/00

Transmission of digital information

H04L

Input arrangements in regulating or control systems

G05B

Automatic curve followers per se

G06K 11/02

Devices for converting the position of a manually-operated writing or tracing member into an electrical signal

G06K 11/06

Arrangements for producing a permanent visual presentation of the output data

G06K 15/00

Image acquisition

G06T 1/00

G06F 3/01 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Input arrangements, or combined input and output arrangements, for interaction between user and computer.

Particularly, said input arrangements include those based on the interaction with the human body, e.g.

G06F 3/033 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Pointing devices displaced or positioned by the user such as

Related accessories such as

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This group covers pointing devices displaced or positioned by the user or related accessories, whereas input arrangements based on the interaction with the human body are covered by the group G06F 3/01.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Digitisers characterised by the transducing means

G06F 3/041

G06F 3/048 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter where the focus is on the way the user can interact with the displayed data, usually by means of pointing devices, irrespective of the type of data treated by the software application or the type of device embedding data processing capability.

As to the design of an interaction technique, this is most commonly determined by one or more of three factors, also in combination:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

GUIs are widely used to interact with any type of software application (e.g. operating system, word-processing or information retrieval applications, spreadsheets, etc.) executed on a general-purpose computer or on a specific device (e.g. car navigation system, telephone, photocopy machine).

Documents mentioning or implying the presence of a standard GUI in the context of the disclosure of a specific software application or a specific device capable of processing data related to its specific function, should be in general classified in the appropriate subclasses related to those software applications or specific devices.

G06F 3/0489 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The use of keyboard keys dedicated to specific functions, e.g. <Scroll Lock>, <Home>, <PgUp> keys, as well as the use of specific combinations of keyboard keys, e.g. <Ctrl>+<A>, <Ctrl>+<C>, whereby the "+" means that the two keys have to be pressed together.

G06F 3/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Control of display in general

G09G

G06F 5/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Methods or arrangements for data conversion without changing the order or content of the data handled.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Coding, decoding or code conversion, in general

H03M

G06F 7/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Methods or arrangements for processing data by operating upon the order or content of the data handled.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Logic circuits

H03K 19/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Sorting of postal letters

B07C

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Half or full adders

G06F 7/501

According to the content of the data

G06F 7/06, G06F 7/22

Instruction execution

G06F 9/30

Information retrieval

G06F 17/30

Conveying record carriers from one station to another

G06K 13/02

Comparing pulses

H03K 5/22

EXCLUSIVE-OR circuits

H03K 19/21

Conversion to or from floating-point codes

H03M 7/24

Parallel/series conversion or vice versa

H03M 9/00

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Individual record carriers

Designates physically distinct carriers carrying digital information, e.g. sheets, cards.

G06F 9/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Arrangements for programme control, e.g. control unit.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Programme control for peripheral devices

G06F 13/10

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Address translation

G06F 12/00

G06F 11/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Error detection;

Error correction;

Monitoring.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Methods or arrangements for verifying the correctness of marking on a record carrier

G06K 5/00

Error detection, correction or monitoring in information storage based on relative movement between record carrier and transducer

G11B 20/18

Error detection, correction or monitoring in static stores

G11C

Error detection, correction or monitoring in control mechanisms

G05B

Testing of digital circuits

G01R 31/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Monitoring patterns of pulse trains

H03K 5/19

Coding, decoding or code conversion, for error detection or error correction, in general

H03M 13/00

Digital transmission of data

H04L

Special rules of classification

Implementation details of particular digital data processing techniques applied to error detection, error correction or monitoring are classified in the relevant subgroups of G06F.

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Fault

Physical defect, imperfection, or flaw that occurs within some hardware component, or logical defect of a piece of software. Essentially, the definition of a fault, as used in the fault tolerance community, agrees with the definition found in the dictionary. Faults may be permanent, transient or intermittent.

Error

The logical manifestation of a fault, observable in terms of incorrect instructions of or corrupted data in a (computer) system. E.g. a fault in a DRAM cell will never be observed if the memory location is never accessed. Specifically, an error is a deviation from accuracy or correctness.

Failure

The incorrect functioning of a system as perceivable by a user or the system's environment as a consequence of an error. A failure is the non-performance, the untimely performance or the performance in a subnormal quantity or quality of some action that is due or expected.

Redundant hardware

Additional hardware for performing the same function as another hardware part, provided that in faultless operation you could renounce on either hardware parts of the system without loosing functionality.

Data representation

A physical or logical encoding (scheme) for data, which allows the latter to be processed, stored or transmitted by a machine.

Redundancy in data representation

A representation of data using more resources than strictly necessary to encode the desired information such that in the error free situation one could renounce to some of said resources without loosing information.

Redundancy in operation

Performing (a set of) operations more than once, or performing sequentially different implementations of a particular function, or performing additional operations which (allow to) restore a system in a state from which its correct operation can be resumed after a failure.

Normal operating mode

The operation of a system or software once it is deployed and provides the desired service as opposed to its development, maintenance, test or idle time.

Fault masking

Hiding the presence of an fault to the user or the environment of a (computer system by means of some sort of redundancy such that the perceived system functionality is not affected.

Active fault masking

Taking particular actions (e.g. reconfiguration, failover) not performed in the error free situation to mask a fault.

Passive fault masking

When a system operates such that no particular action is necessary to mask a fault because all necessary operations are constantly performed independently of the presence of a fault (e.g. majority voting).

Monitoring

Observing and/or measuring parameters or status of a running system.

Mirrored data

Two copies of the data where it is supposed that both copies contain the same data at any moment.

Backed up data

The second copy of the data reflects the data of the first copy at a particular moment.

G06F 12/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Accessing, addressing or allocating within memory systems or architectures.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Digital input or output to record carriers, e.g. to disc storage units

G06F 3/06

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Information storage in general

G11B, G11C

G06F 12/14 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Security arrangements for protecting computers or components thereof, programs or data against unauthorised activity

G06F 21/00

G06F 13/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Interconnection of, or transfer of information or other signals between, memories, input/output devices or central processing units.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Interface circuits for specific input/output devices

G06F 3/00

Multi-processor systems

G06F 15/16

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transmission of digital information in general

H04L

Synchronisation in transmission of digital information in general

H04L 7/00

Selecting

H04Q

G06F 15/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Digital computers in general;

Data processing equipment in general.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Details

G06F 1/00-G06F 13/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Neural networks for image data processing

G06T

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Interface circuits for specific input/output devices

G06F 3/00

Multi-programming arrangements

G06F 9/46

Transmission of digital information in general, e.g. in computer networks

H04L, H04L 12/00

Memory protection

G06F 12/14

Memory access priority

G06F 13/18

Interface switching circuits

G06F 13/40

Selecting

H04Q

...

G06F 17/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Digital computing or data processing equipment or methods, specially adapted for specific functions.

G06F 17/17 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

None

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated into a larger system:

Interpolation for numerical control

G05B 19/41

G06F 17/21 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Systems for composing machines

B41B 27/00

G06F 19/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Special constructions of computers to permit or facilitate use in specific applications;

Non-structural adaptations of computers to a specific application, e.g. computing methods.

Special rules of classification

G06F 17/00 takes precedence.

G06F 19/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods or systems for genetic or protein related data processing in computational molecular biology.

Bioinformatics methods or systems where digital data processing is inherent or implicit, but not explicitly mentioned.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

In silico methods of screening virtual chemical libraries

C40B 30/02

In silico or mathematical methods of creating virtual chemical libraries

C40B 50/02

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Medical diagnosis

A61B 5/00

Manufacture of microarrays, DNA chips

B01J 19/00, C12M 1/34

PCR apparatus per se

B01L 7/00, C12M 1/38

Macromolecular X-ray crystallographic or NMR structures per se

C07K 14/00

Genetic engineering involving nucleic acids

C12N 15/00

Chemical reactions involving the use of microarrays, DNA chips

C12Q 1/68

Sequencing using PCR

C12Q 1/68

Gel electrophoresis apparatus per se

G01N 27/447

Sequencing using electrophoresis

G01N 27/447

Sequencing using chromatography

G01N 30/00

Sequencing using mass spectrometry

G01N 33/68

Pattern recognition

G06K 9/00

Computer input/output arrangements

G06F 3/00

Computer architectures or program control

G06F 9/00

Information retrieval, databases per se

G06F 17/30

Computer systems using neural network models per se

G06N 3/02

Computer systems using knowledge representation per se, e.g. expert systems

G06N 5/02

Computer systems using probabilistic models per se

G06N 7/00

Finding positions and orientations in microarray images by image processing

G06T 7/00

Mass spectrometry apparatus per se

H01J 49/00

Special rules of classification

In this group, the first place priority rule is applied, i.e. at each hierarchical level, classification is made in the first appropriate place.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

data mining

discovery and analysis of patterns within a vast amount of genetic or protein-related data

data visualisation

generation and/or display of graphical representations of genetic and protein-related data

domain

domain of a protein is an element of the overall molecular structure that is self-stabilising and often folds independently of the rest of a polypeptide chain

drug targeting

drug design strategy aiming at optimising the properties of a medicinal compound, based on the 3-dimensional structure of a target, for delivery to a particular tissue or organ in the body

fragment assembly

method by which linear portions of sequence information are assembled to obtain full length gene sequence data

functional genomics

experimental analyses aiming at assessing the function of genes in determining traits, physiology and/or development of an organism, making use of computational and high-throughput technologies

gene expression

process by which proteins are made or transcribed from the instructions encoded in DNA

gene expression profiling

determination of the pattern of genes expressed, i.e. transcribed, under specific circumstances or in a specific cell line

gene finding

method of searching genomic DNA sequences to identify open reading frames which encode proteins

genome annotation

allocation of functions to individual genes in the genome

genotype

genetic makeup or profile of an organism with respect to a trait

genotyping

analysis of an organism's genotype

haplotype

set of one or more polymorphisms (sequence variations) that may be found at a particular genetic location on the same chromosome

homology

indication of the amount of similarity between two sequences; homology determinations can include allowance for gaps, insertions, deletions and mismatches between the aligned sequences

linkage disequilibrium

tendency of alleles located close to each other on the same chromosome to be inherited together

microarray

plurality of nucleic acid probes attached to a substrate, which form an ordered pattern

molecular structure

2-dimensional or 3-dimensional arrangement of atoms, groups of atoms or domains in nucleic aids, proteins, peptides and amino acids

motif

specific nucleotide or amino acid sequence pattern

noise correction model

model that accounts for non-signal data, such as for microarrays: optical noise, quality control problems and cross hybridisation

ontology

classification methodology for formalising a subject’s knowledge in a structured and controlled vocabulary

orthologue

homologous sequence found in different species and derived from a common ancestor

paralogue

homologous sequence in the same organism derived from gene duplication

pedigree

family tree describing the occurrence of heritable traits across generations

phylogenetic tree

tree-like graphical representation of phylogenetic relationships

phylogeny

reconstruction of an evolutionary development and history of a species or higher taxonomic grouping of organisms; typically represented as a phylogenetic tree; methods for creating phylogenetic trees

population genetics

study of genetic variation and genetic evolution of populations

probe design and optimisation for microarrays

designing and selecting (i) optimal, highly specific probes, e.g. oligonucleotides, cDNA, fragments for hybridisation experiments with microarrays and (ii) optimal sets of probes, e.g. oligonucleotides, cDNA, to be chemically attached to a solid support to form an array

programming tools or database systems

computer software to assist programming procedures within bioinformatics and database systems for managing genetic/ protein-related data

protein folding

process by which a polypeptide chain folds into a specific 3-dimensional structure

proteomics

large-scale study of the functions of proteins and their interactions with other molecular entities in a biological system

sequence comparison

process of comparing nucleic or amino acid sequences, generally by a linear alignment in such a way that equivalent positions in adjacent sequences are brought into the correct alignment with each other by introducing insertions in suitable positions, in order to identify similarities and/or differences amongst the compared sequences

sequencing by hybridisation

DNA sequencing technique in which an array of short sequences of nucleotides is brought in contact with a solution of a target DNA sequence, a biochemical method determines a subset of probes that bind to the target sequence and a combinatorial method is then used to reconstruct the DNA sequence from the spectrum

SNP

single nucleotide polymorphism: a DNA sequence variation that involves a change in a single nucleotide and is commonly present in a part of a population

structure alignment

form of alignment to establish structural and functional equivalences between two or more proteins based on their secondary or tertiary structures

syntenic regions

corresponding regions in a species to an observed grouping of genes in the same order and on the same chromosome in another species

systems biology

simulation and mathematical modelling of relationships and interactions between molecular entities in sub-cellular systems integrating genetic and/or protein-related data to describe the dynamic behaviour of, for example, protein-protein/protein-ligand interactions, regulatory networks and metabolic networks

taxonomy

classification of organisms to show their evolutionary relationships to other organisms

G06F 19/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Simulation or mathematical modelling of relationships and interactions between molecular entities on a subcellular level, integrating genetic and/or protein-related data to describe the dynamic behaviour of protein-protein/protein-ligand interactions, regulatory or metabolic networks.

Mere mention of modelling or simulation is not sufficient to classify in this group. In such cases, see the other subgroups of group G06F 19/10 following this one in the scheme.

G06F 19/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Analysis of orthologous, paralogous, syntenic or taxonomic relationships.

Generation of pedigrees and phylogenetic trees.

Mere mention of evolutionary data is not sufficient to classify in this group. In such cases, see the other subgroups of group G06F 19/10 following this one in the scheme.

G06F 19/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Structural architecture of proteins, peptides, amino acids and nucleic acids and the prediction thereof.

Processes including structural alignment, protein folding, domain topology, molecular modelling, receptor-ligand modelling, docking methods, structural-functional relationships and drug targeting using structure data, as well as two- and three-dimensional structure prediction and/or analysis.

The structure types include secondary, tertiary and quaternary structures.

Mere mention of structural data is not sufficient to classify in this group. In such cases, see the other subgroups of group G06F 19/10 following this one in the scheme.

G06F 19/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Assessment of the function of genes and proteins in determining traits, physiology and/or development of an organism, making use of computational and large scale, high-throughput technologies.

Genotypic-phenotypic associations, including genotyping and genome annotation, linkage disequilibrium analysis and association studies, population genetics, alternative splicing and Short Interfering RNA design (siRNA, RNAi).

Binding site identification, mutagenesis analysis, protein-protein or protein-nucleic acid interactions.

Mere mention of gene or protein function is not sufficient to classify in this group. In such cases, see the other subgroups of group G06F 19/10 following this one in the scheme.

G06F 19/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Analysis of gene expression information. This includes microarray analysis, gel electrophoresis analysis and sequencing by hybridisation. Further covered technologies include probe design and probe optimisation, microarray normalisation, expression profiling, noise correction models, expression ratio estimation.

Mere mention of hybridisation or gene expression is not sufficient to classify in this group. In such cases, see the other subgroups of group G06F 19/10 following this one in the scheme.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This group does not cover base calling or sequencing methods per se. These are covered by the relevant places listed under section Informative References for group G06F 19/10.

G06F 19/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Comparison of sequence information, wherein the sequences are nucleic acids or amino acids. The comparisons include methods of alignment, homology identification, motif identification, SNP (Single-Nucleotide Polymorphism) discovery, haplotype identification, fragment assembly, gene finding.

Mere mention of sequence data is not sufficient to classify in this group. In such cases, see the other subgroups of group G06F 19/10 following this one in the scheme.

G06F 19/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Discovery and/or analysis of patterns within a vast amount of genetic or protein-related data, wherein the emphasis is placed on the method of analysis and is largely independent of the type of bioinformatic data. Covered methods include bioinformatic pattern finding, knowledge discovery, rule extraction, correlation, clustering and classification.

Multivariate analysis of protein or gene-related data, e.g. analysis of variances (ANOVA), principal component analysis (PCA), support vector machines (SVM).

G06F 19/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Visual representations specifically adapted to bioinformatic data, wherein the emphasis is placed on the method of visualisation and is largely independent of the type of bioinformatic data. Visualisation of bioinformatic data specifically includes, for example, graphics generation, map display and network display.

G06F 19/28 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Computer software specifically adapted to assist programming procedures within bioinformatics and database systems specifically adapted for managing bioinformatic data. This includes ontologies, heterogeneous data integration, data warehousing, computing architectures.

G06F 21/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Security arrangements for protecting computers or their components, programs and data against unauthorised activity, e.g. intrusion into a computer, computer malware detection and handling, authentication, unauthorised use of data, dishonest alteration of data, theft of secret data.

In particular, the following subjects are covered:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This group covers security arrangements for local platforms.

Classification should be directed to groups H04L 9/00-H04L 9/32 when the subject is secret or secure communication involving the use of encryption.

Furthermore, classification should be directed to group H04L 29/06 when network involvement or protocols are of relevance.

Finally classification should be directed to group H04W 12/00 when security or authentication arrangements in wireless communication networks are of relevance.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Address-based protection against unauthorised use of memory

G06F 12/14

Record carriers for use with machines and with at least a part designed to carry digital markings

G06K 19/00

Preventing unauthorised reproduction or copying of disk-type recordable media

G11B 20/00

Digital watermarking on images

H04N 1/32

Protection in video systems or pay television

H04N 7/16

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric safety arrangements in control or regulating systems

G05B 9/02

Electric programme-control in control or regulating systems

G05B 19/02

Programme control, executing machine-instructions, program loading or initiating in general, task interaction, specific resource access rights

G06F 9/00

Error detection, error correction, monitoring

G06F 11/00

Protecting identification code in record carriers

G06K 19/073

Data processing adapted for administrative, commercial, managerial, supervisory or forecasting purposes

G06Q

Dispensing apparatus actuated by coded identity card or credit card

G07F 7/08

Complete banking systems

G07F 19/00

Alarms or alarm systems

G08B 13/00-G08B 31/00

Equipment anti-theft monitoring by a central station

G08B 26/00

Ciphering apparatus

G09C

Information storage based on relative movement between record carrier and transducer

G11B

Arrangements for conditional access to broadcast information using cryptography

H04H 60/23

Secret or secure communication, e.g. including authentication means

H04L 9/00-H04L 9/32

Data switching networks

H04L 12/00

protocols or architecture for network security

H04L 29/06

Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents

H04N 1/00

Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television, video on demand

H04N 21/00

Security arrangements, e.g. access security or fraud detection; authentication in wireless communication networks

H04W 12/00

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

content

means any intellectually created work whose copyright is to be safeguarded

G06K - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods or arrangements for reading or recognizing printed or written characters or for recognizing patterns, e.g. fingerprints; for graph-reading or for converting the pattern of mechanical parameters into electrical signals; for printing of data in the shape of alphanumeric or other characters from a record carrier; for verifying the correctness of markings on a record carrier; for sensingrecord carriers; and for marking the record carrier in digital fashion.

Arrangements for producing a permanent visual presentation of the output data.

Column-detection devices.

Conveying record carriers from one station to another, e.g. from stack to punching mechanism.

Record carriers for use with machines and with at least a part designed to carry digital markings.

Information retrieval from punched cards designed for manual use or handling by machine, and apparatus for handling such cards, e.g. marking or correcting.

Arrangements for preparing the data output from a computer for printing, e.g. computer or network printers insofar as they are involved in outputting the result of a computation, like a document.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Printing per se

B41J
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Postal sorting

B07C

Hand-held input or output devices for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by a digital computer, e.g. light-pens, joysticks, mice or trackballs

G06F 3/033

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transponders powered by received radio waves, e.g. passive transponders

G01S 13/75

Tags attached to, or associated with, an object, in order to enable detection of the object

G01V 15/00

Responders; Transponders

H04B 1/59

Near-field transmission systems using transceiver

H04B 5/02

Special rules of classification

G06K 17/00 covers methods or arrangements for effecting co-operative working between equipments covered by two or more main groups G06K 1/00-G06K 15/00.

G06K 9/00 takes precedence over G06K 7/00.

G06K 19/00 takes precedence over G06K 21/00.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

record carrier

means a body, such as a cylinder, disc, card, tape, or wire, capable of permanently holding information, which can be read-off by a sensing element movable relative to the recorded information or by electrical contacting or non-contacting means

data

is a synonym for information

G06K 1/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Marking on cards, tapes, sheets, tickets or the like insomuch as the digital marking method or arrangements are specially adapted, e.g.:

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Working by laser beam

B23K 26/00

Perforating or punching in general

B26F 1/00

Printing in general

B41J

Printing data from a record carrier, e.g. interpreting or printing-out from a magnetic tape

G06K 3/02

Methods or arrangements for sensingrecord carriers

G06K 7/00

Recording by magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier

G11B 5/00

Recording by optical means, e.g. recording using thermal beam of optical radiation

G11B 7/00

Transmission of digital information

H04L

G06K 3/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Translating markings on a record carrier into printed data on the same record carrier.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Printing, duplicating, marking or copying processes

B41M

Transferring data from one type of record carrier on to another type of record carrier, e.g. from magnetic tape to punched card

G06K 1/18

G06K 5/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

verifying forming a part of the marking action

verifying the alignment of markings

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Testing patterns on paper currency, securities, bonds, or similar valuable papers to determine their identity or genuineness

G07D 7/20

Verification of coded identity or credit cards in mechanisms actuated by them

G07F 7/12

G06K 7/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Sensingrecord carriers by, e.g.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Methods or arrangements for marking the record carrier in digital fashion

G06K 1/00

Methods or arrangements for reading or recognising printed or written characters or for recognisingpatterns, e.g. fingerprints

G06K 9/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for scanning or checking printed matter for quality control

B41F 33/00

Transponders powered by received radio waves, e.g. passive transponders

G01S 13/75

Tags attached to, or associated with, an object, in order to enable detection of the object

G01V 15/00

Error detection or correction by redundancy in data representation, e.g. by using checking codes

G06F 11/08

Reproducing by mechanical sensing

G11B 3/00

Scanning arrangements

H04N 1/04

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

sensing

reading the content of the record carrier

G06K 9/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

The (computerised) recognition of specific patterns.

General (computerised) recognition functions such as extracting features, clustering, classifying or matching patterns, segmenting images, or separating (signal or image) sources.

Image acquisition specially adapted for specific patterns, e.g. fingerprint or iris sensors.

Image pre-processing, e.g. image thinning, noise filtering.

Means (e.g. specially adapted user interface) for correcting errors produced by computerised pattern recognition; means for assisting humans in presenting patterns (e.g. positioning a finger) for computerised recognition.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Methods or arrangements for graph-reading or for converting the pattern of mechanical parameters, e.g. force or presence, into electrical signals

G06K 11/00

Speech recognition

G10L 15/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Detecting, measuring or recording for diagnostic purposes

A61B 5/00

Identification of persons by non-computerised means, e.g. finger-printing (developing latent fingerprints with chemicals)

A61B 5/117

Postal sorting

B07C 3/10

Input arrangements for interaction between user and computer

G06F 3/01

Devices for testing patterns on paper currency, securities, bonds, or similar valuable papers to determine their identity or genuineness

G07D 7/20

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Programme-controlled manipulators

B25J 9/00

Testing machines or structures

G01M

Investigating or analysing materials by determining their chemical or physical properties

G01N

Radar and similar techniques

G01S

Processing or analysis of tracks of nuclear particles

G01T 5/02

Geophysics

G01V

Optical elements, systems, or apparatus

G02B

Photomechanical production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. for printing, for processing of semiconductor devices

G03F

Control or regulating systems in general

G05B

Optical analogue correlation

G06E 3/00

Comparing digital values

G06F 7/02

Learning machines

G06F 15/18

Fourier, Walsh or analogous domain transformations

G06F 17/14

Digital correlation

G06F 17/15

Handling natural language data

G06F 17/20

Information retrieval

G06F 17/30

Computer-aided design

G06F 17/50

Digital computing for specific applications

G06F 19/00

Security arrangements

G06F 21/00

Analogue correlation

G06G 7/19

Computer systems based on specific computational models

G06N

Data processing for business purposes, logistics, stock management

G06Q

Image data processing or generation, in general

G06T

Intruder alarms using image scanning and comparing means

G08B 13/194

Traffic control systems for road vehicles

G08G 1/00

Labels, tag tickets or similar identification or indication means

G09F 3/00

Semiconductor devices

H01L

Impedance networks, e.g. resonant circuits; resonators

H03H

Coding or decoding in general

H03M

Line transmission systems and Wireless Data Communication

H04B

Wireless Data Communication

H04L, H04W

Secret or secure communication

H04L 9/00

Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents, e.g. facsimile transmission

H04N 1/00

Studio circuitry

H04N 5/222

Closed circuit television systems

H04N 7/18

Systems for the transmission of television signals using bandwidth reduction

H04N 7/26

Special rules of classification

G06K 9/58 takes precedence over groups G06K 9/38-G06K 9/54.

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

recognising

detecting, identifying, labelling, authenticating, inspecting, tracking or the like by functions such as segmentation, feature extraction or selection, source separation, clustering, matching, classification or by other signal, image or statistical processing

pattern

data having a characteristic structure

feature extraction

deriving descriptive data, e.g. statistical principal components or image shape characteristics, from one or more patterns

clustering

grouping patterns according to their similarity or closeness

G06K 11/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Automatic curve followers using an auxiliary scanning pattern.

Devices for converting the position of a manually operated writing or tracing member into an electrical signal.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Graph-reading or converting the pattern of mechanical parameters, e.g. force or presence, into electrical signals combined with character or pattern recognition

G06K 9/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Feelers for copying devices on machine tools

B23Q 35/00

Hand-held input or output devices for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by a digital computer, e.g. light-pens, joysticks, mice, or trackballs

G06F 3/033

Systems for transmitting the position of an object with respect to a predetermined reference system, e.g. tele-autographic system

G08C 21/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Accessories for games using an electronically generated display

A63F 13/02

Arrangements for measuring areas

G01B

Measuring force

G01L

G06K 13/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Conveying cards, e.g.

Conveying punched tapes, e.g.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Conveying record carriers combined with another operation, e.g. with reading

G06K 17/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Card-filing arrangements, e.g. card indexes or catalogues or filing cabinets

B42F 17/00

Transport devices in general

B65G

Handling thin or filamentary material, e.g. sheets, webs or cables, in general

B65H

Information storage based on relative movement between record carrier and transducer

G11B

Driving, starting or stopping record carriers of filamentary or web form; Driving both such record carriers and heads; Guiding such record carriers or containers therefor; Control thereof; Control of operating function

G11B 15/00

G06K 15/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Producing a permanent visual presentation of the output information, e.g. using printers or plotters.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Printing or plotting combined with another operation, e.g. with conveying

G06K 17/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Receipt-giving machines

G07G 5/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Printers per se

B41J

Plotters per se

B43L 13/00

G06K 17/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Reading combined with writing of identification or authentication codes on record carriers.

Reading of codes combined with conveying of carriers.

G06K 19/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Punched cards.

Cards provided with conductive marks, printed circuits or chips, e.g.

Record carriers carrying digital markings of different kinds, e.g. one marking being sensed by optical means and the other by magnetic means, e.g.:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This main group does not cover record carriers adapted for controlling specific machines, such as in B23Q (details, components, or accessories for machine tools), D03C (shedding mechanisms; pattern cards or chains; punching of cards; designing patterns), G10F (automatic musical instruments), H04L (transmission of digital information); printing, duplicating, marking, or copying processes B41M, file cards B42F, record carriers in general G11B.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Transponders powered by received radio waves, e.g. passive transponders

G01S 13/75

Tags attached to, or associated with, an object, in order to enable detection of the object

G01V 15/00

Protection against unauthorized use of computer memory

G06F 12/14

Mechanisms activated by coded credit or identity cards for the purpose of vending or hiring goods or services

G07F 7/08

Verification of coded identity or credit cards in mechanisms actuated by them

G07F 7/12

Arrangements activated by coded cards for dispensing or receiving money and posting such transactions to existing accounts, e.g. ATM’s (automatic teller machines)

G07F 19/00

Using a coded card to authorize calls from a telephone set

H04M 1/675

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Holders, etuis or cases for credit cards or the like

A45C 11/18, A45C 11/24

Details, components, or accessories for machine tools, e.g. arrangements for copying or controlling; machine tools in general, characterized by the construction of particular details or components; combinations or associations of metal working machines, not directed to a particular result

B23Q

Printing, duplicating, marking or copying processes; colour printing

B41M

Identity, credit, cheque or like information-bearing cards as printed matter of special format or style not otherwise provided for

B42D 15/10

File cards

B42F 19/00

Shedding mechanisms; pattern cards or chains; punching of cards; designing patterns

D03C

Labels, tag tickets or similar identification or indicating means

G09F 3/00

Automatic musical instruments

G10F

Record carriers in general

G11B

Erasable programmable read-only memories

G11C 16/00

Responders; Transponders

H04B 1/59

Transmission of digital information, e.g. telegraphic communication

H04L

G06K 21/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Detection or correction of errors by rescanning patterns

G06K 9/03

Checking correct operation of card-conveying mechanisms

G06K 13/06

Record carriers for use with machines and with at least a part designed to carry digital marking

G06K 19/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tools for perforating in general

B26F

G06M - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

In machines for making cigarettes

A24C 5/32

In machines for shaping metal without removing material

B21C 51/00

In printing machines or presses

B41F 33/02

In office copying machines

B41L 39/02

Of axles of rail vehicles

B61L 1/16

In packaging machines

B65B 65/08

Of objects conveyed through a pipe or tube

B65G 51/36

Entry or exit registers

G07C 9/00

G06Q - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Data processing systems or methods that are specially adapted for managing, promoting, or practicing commercial or financial activities.

Systems or methods not involving significant data processing (see definition for group G06Q 90/00) and specially adapted for managing, promoting, or practicing commercial or financial activities, provided that

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, the first place priority rule is applied, i.e. at each hierarchical level, classification is made in the first appropriate place.

When classifying in groups G06Q 10/00-G06Q 40/00, systems or methods that are specially adapted for a specific business sector must also be classified in group G06Q 50/00, when the special adaptation is determined to be novel and non-obvious. By way of example, a method for billing which involves significant data processing and is specially adapted in a non-obvious way to the electricity-supply sector, should be classified in both G06Q 30/00 and G06Q 50/00.

Attention is drawn to the special rules of classification valid under group G06Q 90/00.

G06Q 10/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Data processing systems or processes specially adapted for either the governing or management of an organization, enterprise or employees.

The following subjects are therefore covered, the list being non-exhaustive:

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Billing, shopping or e-commerce per se

G06Q 30/00

Electronic finance per se

G06Q 40/00

Programme-control systems

G05B 19/00

Arrangements for programme control, e.g. control unit

G06F 9/00

Data processing specially adapted for complex mathematical operations

G06F 17/10

Data processing specially adapted for text/word processing or form filling

G06F 17/21

Computer-aided design

G06F 17/50

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Security arrangements for protecting computers or components thereof, programs or data against unauthorised activity

G06F 21/00

Time recorders for work

G07C 1/00

Secure communication, e.g. by cryptography

H04L 9/00

Protocols for controlled communication

H04L 29/06

Special rules of classification

When classifying in groups G06Q 10/00-G06Q 40/00, systems or methods that are specially adapted for a specific business sector must also be classified in group G06Q 50/00, when the special adaptation is determined to be novel and non-obvious. By way of example, a method for billing which involves significant data processing and is specially adapted in a non-obvious way to the electricity-supply sector, should be classified in both G06Q 30/00 and G06Q 50/00.

G06Q 10/04 - Definition fr

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Group G06Q 10/04 covers mathematical methods for optimization or forecast purpose specially adapted to as administrative/business application or context.

Group G06F 17/11 covers mathematical methods for solving generic mathematical optimization problems. Likewise, group G06F 17/18 covers mathematical methods for analysing generic time series data for forecasting/extrapolation purposes.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

General mathematical methods for optimization or forecast purposes

G06F 17/11, G06F 17/18

G06Q 20/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Data processing systems or processes specially adapted to implement procedures for fulfilling a financial obligation or debt.

Complete systems involving payment protocols, e.g.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This group covers "payment protocols" with the meaning explained in the Glossary below.

It does not cover then generic network protocols, e.g. internet protocols, which are instead classified in H04L 29/06, but it covers those network/secure protocols specially adapted for payments, which may be of lower layer or be security oriented.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Billing, shopping or e-commerce per se

G06Q 30/00

Electronic finance, e.g. home-banking, online-banking, electronic funds transfer (EFT) systems per se

G06Q 40/00

Automatic teller machines (ATMs)

G07F 19/00

Protocols for controlled communication

H04L 29/06
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Billing or payment related to telephone services

H04M 15/00

Billing or payment related to wireless services

H04W 4/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mechanisms actuated by coded identity card, credit card or IC card

G07F 7/08

Electronic cash registers (ECR)

G07G 1/12

Secure communication, e.g. by cryptography

H04L 9/00

Special rules of classification

When classifying in groups G06Q 10/00-G06Q 40/00, systems or methods that are specially adapted for a specific business sector must also be classified in group G06Q 50/00, when the special adaptation is determined to be novel and non-obvious. By way of example, a method for billing which involves significant data processing and is specially adapted in a non-obvious way to the electricity-supply sector, should be classified in both G06Q 30/00 and G06Q 50/00.

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Payment protocol

A procedure that allows executing a payment between a merchant, a bank, a user and sometimes a third party; the procedure usually including authorization and authentication of all parties involved.

Electronic wallet

A software application managing all kind of personal information, e.g. data for completing online forms. This term is often used to indicate an electronic purse (see below).

Electronic purse

A software application managing electronic currency.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expression/word "electronic money", "virtual money", "tokens" are often used instead of "electronic currency" which is used in the classification scheme of this group.

G06Q 20/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Rating, charging or billing services for wireless communication networks, e.g. rating or charging for added value services, insofar as these services are billed by the network operator

H04W 4/24

G06Q 20/32 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Payment architectures, schemes or protocols characterised by the use of specific wireless devices.

The following are examples of the subject-matter covered by this group:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Group G06Q 20/32 relates to the use of specific wireless devices for payment architectures, schemes or protocols.

Group H04W 4/24 relates to rating, charging or billing services for wireless communication networks. This includes rating/charging for added value services, m-commerce, payment transactions using prepaid calling cards, SIM cards or the mobile phone itself, insofar as these services are billed by the network operator.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Rating, charging or billing services for wireless communication networks, e.g. rating or charging for added value services, insofar as these services are billed by the network operator

H04W 4/24

G06Q 20/34 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Record carriers for use with machines, carrying digital markings and with conductive marks, printed circuits or semiconductor circuit elements, e.g. credit or identity cards

G06K 19/067

Using coded cards in telephones

H04M 1/675

G06Q 30/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Data processing systems or processes specially adapted for the marketing, promoting, buying or selling of goods or services, billing models.

The following subjects are therefore covered, the list being non-exhaustive:

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Delivery of the goods bought in an electronic shopping environment, e.g. logistic

G06Q 10/08, G06Q 50/12

Electronic payment

G06Q 20/00

Electronic finance, e.g. buying, selling or trading of financial instruments like stocks, options or futures per se

G06Q 40/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Billing or payment related to telephone services

H04M 15/00

Billing or payment related to wireless services

H04W 4/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Advertising in general

G09F

Secure communication, e.g. by cryptography

H04L 9/00

Protocols for controlled communication

H04L 29/06

Special rules of classification

When classifying in groups G06Q 10/00-G06Q 40/00, systems or methods that are specially adapted for a specific business sector must also be classified in group G06Q 50/00, when the special adaptation is determined to be novel and non-obvious. By way of example, a method for billing which involves significant data processing and is specially adapted in a non-obvious way to the electricity-supply sector, should be classified in both G06Q 30/00 and G06Q 50/00.

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Electronic commerce or e-commerce

Any of buying, selling, marketing or servicing of products or services over computer networks

G06Q 40/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Data processing systems or processes specially adapted for financial applications, e.g. management of monetary assets.

Data processing systems or processes specially adapted for management of a binding contract to indemnify a party against a specific loss in exchange for a paid premium.

The following subjects are therefore covered, the list being non-exhaustive:

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Electronic payment or payment aspects of banking applications

G06Q 20/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Buying, selling or trading of goods or services

G06Q 30/06

Secure communication, e.g. by cryptography

H04L 9/00

Protocols for controlled communication

H04L 29/06

Special rules of classification

When classifying in groups G06Q 10/00-G06Q 40/00, systems or methods that are specially adapted for a specific business sector must also be classified in group G06Q 50/00, when the special adaptation is determined to be novel and non-obvious. By way of example, a method for billing which involves significant data processing and is specially adapted in a non-obvious way to the electricity-supply sector, should be classified in both G06Q 30/00 and G06Q 50/00.

G06Q 50/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

The following business sectors, the list being non-exhaustive:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Health care related subject matter specially adapted for administrative, commercial, financial, managerial, supervisory or forecasting purposes is classified in G06Q 50/00, while subject matter for other purposes, such as processing of medical or biological data for scientific purposes is classified in G06F 19/00.

Special rules of classification

When classifying in groups G06Q 10/00-G06Q 40/00, systems or methods that are specially adapted for a specific business sector must also be classified in group G06Q 50/00, when the special adaptation is determined to be novel and non-obvious. By way of example, a method for billing which involves significant data processing and is specially adapted in a non-obvious way to the electricity-supply sector, should be classified in both G06Q 30/00 and G06Q 50/00.

G06Q 50/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Machine control in manufacturing

G05B 19/00

G06Q 50/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Teaching equipment

G09B

G06Q 50/24 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Database structure and information retrieval

G06F 17/30

G06Q 90/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Systems or methods not involving significant data processing specially adapted for managing, promoting, or practicing commercial, financial, supervisory or forecasting activities, provided that

The following subjects are therefore covered, the list being non-exhaustive:

Special rules of classification

When classifying systems or methods as in the definition in this group, additional classification may be made in the most closely related group of this or any other subclass, if the classification gives information about the application of the systems or methods that could be interest for search. Such non-obligatory classification must be given as "additional information".

G06Q 99/00 - Definition fr

G06T - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Processor architectures or memory management for general purpose image data processing.

Geometric image transformations.

Image enhancement or analysis.

Image coding.

Two-dimensional image generation.

Three-dimensional image rendering, modelling or manipulation for computer graphics.

Animation.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Photogrammetry or videogrammetry

G01C 11/00

Computer-aided design

G06F 17/50

Reading or recognising printed or written characters or recognising patterns, e.g. fingerprints

G06K 9/00

Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like

H04N 1/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus for radiation diagnosis

A61B 6/00

Aspects of games using an electronically generated display having two or more dimensions

A63F 13/00

Holographic processes or apparatus using light, infra-red, or ultra-violet waves for obtaining holograms or for obtaining an image from them; Synthesising holograms

G03H 1/00, G03H 1/08

Simulators for teaching or training purposes

G09B 9/00

Displaying; Advertising; Signs; Labels or Name-plates; Seals

G09F

Measuring, by optical means, length, thickness or similar linear dimensions, angles, areas, irregularities of surfaces or contours

G01B 11/00

Traffic control systems for road vehicles

G08G 1/00

Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators characterised by the display of individual graphic patterns using a bit-mapped memory

G09G 5/36

Television cameras

H04N 5/225

Television systems; Colour television systems

H04N 7/00, H04N 11/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

2D

means two-dimensional

3D

means three-dimensional

Synonyms and Keywords

CAD

Computer-Aided Design

DCT

Discrete Cosine Transform

GUI

Graphical User Interface

LCD

Liquid Crystal Display

AR

Augmented Reality

MR

Mixed reality

VR

Virtual Reality

G06T 11/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Generating or modifying a displayable 2D object or shape.

Drawing from basic elements, e.g. lines, circles or charts.

Filling a planar surface by adding surface attributes, e.g. colour or texture.

Editing figures and text; Combining figures or text.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Input arrangements or combined input and output interaction between user and computer

G06F 3/01

Digital computing or data processing equipment or methods, specially adapted for text processing

G06F 17/21

G06T 13/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Displaying a sequence of images of artwork or model positions in order to create the effect of movement in a scene.

Animation of data presenting a 3D or 2D image model or object.

Animation of characters exhibiting lifelike motions or behaviours.

Animation of images associated with natural phenomena.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Morphing techniques per se

G06T 3/00

3D modelling for computer graphics

G06T 17/00

G06T 15/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Generating a displayable image from a 3D model or 3D data set. A 3D data set may include "voxel" data.

Rendering an image in a style intended to look like a painting or drawing.

Applying or mapping surface details or colour patterns to a 3D geometry or model.

Functional or operational structures of 3D image rendering systems.

Rendering a 3D image by tracing rays from viewpoint through each pixel to a visible point on an object.

Rendering an image of a 3D object using a set of 2D images of it.

Determining which surfaces of a graphic object are visible from a certain viewpoint and optionally removing them.

Determining intensity or colour on a surface of an object based on interaction of light with the object.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Data representation or description of 3D objects

G06T 17/00

Stereoscopic television systems; details thereof

H04N 13/00

Synonyms and Keywords

IBR

Image Based Rendering

Voxel

blend of the words Volume and Pixel, stands for "volume element"

Z-Buffer

Depth Buffer

G06T 17/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Generation of a data representation of a shape of a 3D object before any rendering attempt. The data representation of a shape of a 3D object may include a mathematical representation or data structure.

Modelling of 3D geographical data.

Modelling using volumes, wire-frame elements or surfaces.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Moulding by stereo-lithography. i.e. physical 3D modelling

B29C 67/00

Finite element method or analysis

G06F 17/50

Models for scientific, medical, or mathematical purposes, e.g. full-sized devices for demonstration purposes; Models for other purposes

G09B 23/00, G09B 25/00

Maps; Plans; Charts; Diagrams, e.g. route diagrams

G09B 29/00

G06T 19/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Manipulating a 3D model or image for computer graphics.

Editing 3D models or images.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Visualisation of the interior of objects by transmitting ultrasonic or sonic waves through the object

G01N 29/00

Interaction techniques for graphical user interfaces, e.g. interaction with windows, icons or menus

G06F 3/048

Digital computing or data processing equipment or methods, specially adapted for text processing

G06F 17/21

G07B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Machines for printing and issuing tickets

Machines for issuing pre-printed tickets

Details of, or auxiliary devices for, ticket-issuing machines

Holders providing direct manual access to tickets

Taximeters

Arrangements or apparatus for collecting fares, tolls or entrance fees at one or more control points

Franking apparatus

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Punching or perforating pliers

B26F 1/36

Turnstiles with registering means

G07C 9/02

Handling of coins or of paper currency or similar valuable papers

G07D

Mechanisms actuated by objects other than coins to free or to actuate vending, hiring; Coin or paper currency dispensing or refunding apparatus

G07F 7/00

Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services

G07F 17/00

Parking meters per se

G07F 17/24

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Printing machines or presses

B41F

Output mechanism for digital computers in which all the computation is effected mechanically

G06C 11/00

G07B 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Marking record carriers in digital fashion by punching

G06K 1/02

G07B 11/09 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Refuse receptacles in general

B65F 1/00

G07B 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring distances

G01C

Time-interval measuring

G04F

G07D 1/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Coin-actuated mechanisms or interlocks with change-giving

G07F 5/24

G07F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus freed (actuated) by coins or tokens or objects other than coins, including paper currency, coded cards or credit cards, as well as radio frequency identification (RFID) cards, for the purpose of vending, hiring or dispensing any of articles, facilities or services.

Complete banking systems, or apparatus freed (actuated) by coded cards or credit cards, for the purpose of dispensing or receiving money and posting such transactions to existing accounts, e.g. automatic teller machines (ATM), or points of sale (POS).

Details of the coin-freed or paper currency-freed apparatus of the type quoted above, including:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass does not cover constructions or details of apparatus which includes, or is combined with, coin-actuated mechanisms but is not specially adapted or modified for use therewith. Such constructions or details are covered by the relevant subclass for the particular apparatus.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Handling, e.g. sorting or testing, coins or paper currencies, apart from coin-freed or paper currency-freed mechanisms

G07D
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Using a coded card, e.g. smart card carrying an integrated chip, to authorise calls from a telephone set

H04M 1/675

Coin-freed or check-freed prepayment telephone systems

H04M 17/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Coins in general, e.g. manufacture

A44C

Purses, money-bags, or wallets

A45C 1/00

Paying counters for shops, bars, supermarkets or the like

A47F 9/02

Gaming or amusement machines, without coin or card collection

A63D, A63F

Credit or identity cards in printed format

B42D 15/10

Arrangements of devices for controlling, indicating, metering or registering quantity or price of liquid transferred

B67D 7/08

Safes

E05G

Tariff metering apparatus

G01D 4/00

Record carriers for use with machines and with at least a part designed to carry digital markings in the form of printed circuits, magnetic bands, holograms, contact-less communication circuits, e.g. credit cards, identity cards, RFID-transponder cards

G06K 19/067, G06K 19/10

Payment schemes, architectures or protocols, which involve data processing

G06Q 20/00

Commerce, e.g. marketing, shopping, billing, auctions or e-commerce, which involves data processing

G06Q 30/00

Machines for printing and issuing tickets, without coin or card activation

G07B 1/00

Arrangements or apparatus for collecting fares, tolls, or entrance fees at one or more control points

G07B 15/00

Parking meters, e.g. parking disks, without coin or card activation

G07C 1/30

Turnstiles with entry or exit registering means, without coin or card activation

G07C 9/02

Apparatus for receiving coins or paper currencies without posting such transactions to existing accounts, e.g. money depositing machines

G07D 11/00

Cash registers; supermarket procedures

G07G

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Coins

covers also tokens or the like.

Freed

is a synonym for actuated.

Dispensing

is a synonym for delivering.

Synonyms and Keywords

ATM

Automatic Teller Machine

PIN

Personal Identification Number

POS

Point Of Sale

In patent documents the following expressions/words

"freed", "actuated", "activated" and "operated";

"banking machine" and "ATM";

"IC" and "chip"

are often used as synonyms.

G07F 5/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Interlocks

G07F 5/26

G07F 5/24 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Coin-changing mechanisms per se

G07D

G07F 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Handling coins or paper currencies apart from coin-freed or like apparatus

G07D

G07F 7/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For producing a coded signal for use together with coded identity cards

G07F 7/10

G07F 11/48 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Articles supported on pivotally-mounted flaps or shelves in magazines

G07F 11/06

G07F 11/60 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Endless belts or like conveyers

G07F 11/58

G07F 13/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Dispensing discrete articles per se

G07F 11/00

G07F 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tariff-metering apparatus in general

G01D 4/00

G07F 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Prepayment telephone systems

H04M 17/00

G07F 17/24 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for checking parking time

G07C 1/30

G07F 17/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Television subscription systems

H04N 7/16

G07F 17/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Recording or playback apparatus

G11B

G07F 19/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Handlingcoins or paper currencies apart from coin-freed or like apparatus

G07D

Mechanisms actuated by coded identity cards or credit cards

G07F 7/08

G08C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

In the context of transmission systems for measured values, control signals or the like:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

H04B covers the transmission of information-carrying signals, in general, the transmission being independent of the nature of the information. G08C refers to transmission systems specially adapted for measured values, control signals or the like. H04L covers transmission of signals having been supplied in digital form and includes telegraphic communication. The borderline between H04L and G08C lie on whether subject mater is digital transmission techniques per se (H04L) or the transmission system combined with measurement or control (G08C).

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Fluid pressure transmission systems

F15B

Mechanical means for transferring the output of a sensing member

G01D 5/00

Mechanical control systems

G05G
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Devices for measuring tyre pressure or temperature, specially adapted for vehicles mounted on the wheel or tyre

B60C 23/04

Means for transmitting measuring-signals from a borehole or a well to the surface e.g. for logging while drilling

E21B 47/12

Transmitting seismic signals to recording or processing apparatus

G01V 1/22

Radiosondes for meteorological purposes

G01W 1/08

Signalling or calling systems

G08B

Order telegraph systems

G08B 9/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring for diagnostic purposes

A61B 5/00

Remote-control arrangements specially adapted for toys, e.g. for toy vehicles

A63H 30/00

Measuring arrangements giving results other than momentary value of variable

G01D

Indicating or recording devices, for measuring volume or volume flow, e.g. for remote indication

G01F

Devices or apparatus for measuring force, stress, torque, work, mechanical power, mechanical efficiency or fluid pressure

G01L

Arrangements for measuring electric or magnetic variables

G01R

Systems involving sampling of the variable controlled

G05B

Position control in general

G05D

Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer

G06F 3/00

Error detection; Monitoring on computers

G06F 11/00

Methods or arrangements for graph-reading or for converting the pattern of mechanical parameters, e.g. force or presence, into electrical signals

G06K 11/00

Individual entry or exit registers

G07C 9/00

Displaying; Advertising; Signs, Labels or name-plates; Seals

G09F

Generating electric pulses

H03K

Coding, decoding or code conversion, in general

H03M

Monitoring for transmission systems in general

H04B 17/00

Preventing or correcting errors in digital transmission systems

H04L 1/00

Monitoring for digital data switching networks

H04L 12/26

LAN networks, e.g. for home automation purposes

H04L 12/28

Metering arrangements for telephonic communication

H04M 15/00

Special aspect of "selecting", i.e. arrangements in telecontrol or telemetry systems for selectively calling a substation from a main station

H04Q 9/00

Controlling of electric light sources in general

H05B 37/02

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Transmission

The dispatching, for reception elsewhere, of a signal, message, or other form of information

Tele-autographic system

System which transmits the handwriting

Wireless

Relating to a system of communication that doesn’t use hardwired connections

G08C 13/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transferring the output of a sensing member to measuring arrangements giving results not yielding momentary value

G01D 1/00

Systems for control of position involving comparison between actual and desired values

G05D 3/00

G08C 13/02 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Product

Mathematical operation

G08C 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Multiplex transmission in general

H04J

G08C 19/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Analogue/digital conversion per se

H03M 1/00

G08C 19/38 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Dynamo-electric machines per se

H02K

G08C 21/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Converting the pattern of mechanical parameters, e.g. force or presence, into electrical signals

G06K 11/00

G08G - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Traffic control; traffic monitoring.

Identification of traffic offenders.

Anti-collision systems.

Navigation systems wherein the calculation of the navigation route takes into account traffic situation. The navigation route can be carried out onboard or offboard.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Subclass G08G covers arrangements, located in land, water, air or space vehicles or on the ground, for controlling road vehicles, marine craft or aircraft within a traffic environment, e.g. anti-collision systems.

This subclass does not cover arrangements for the control of position, course, altitude or attitude of land, water, air or space vehicles, not being specific to a traffic environment, e.g. automatic pilots, unmanned vehicles, which are covered by group G05D 1/00.

Radar or analogous systems, sonar systems or lidar systems specially adapted for traffic control or anti-collision systems are covered by specific groups of subclass G01S (see below).

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Guiding railway traffic, ensuring the safety of railway traffic

B61L

Radar or analogous systems, sonar systems or lidar systems specially adapted for traffic control

G01S 13/91, G01S 15/88, G01S 17/88

Radar or analogous systems, sonar systems or lidar systems specially adapted for anti-collision purposes

G01S 13/93, G01S 15/93, G01S 17/93

Control of position, course, altitude or attitude of land, water, air or space vehicles, not being specific to a traffic environment, e.g. automatic pilots

G05D 1/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Navigation, i.e. determining the position and course of land vehicles, ships, aircrafts or space vehicles

G01C 21/00

Combined instruments indicating more than one navigational value

G01C 23/00

Head-up displays

G02B 27/01

Pattern recognition

G06K 9/00

Image analysis

G06T 7/00

Maps, route diagrams

G09B 29/00

Services making use of the location of users or terminals, specially adapted for wireless communication networks

H04W 4/02

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

fleet

designates (land, water, air or space) vehicles belonging to a group for a specific purpose and monitored by a common central station

G08G 1/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Arrangements, located in vehicles or on the ground, for controlling road vehicles within a traffic environment, e.g. anti-collision systems.

Traffic signal control.

Traffic lights per se.

Vehicle position monitoring for fleet management.

Management of passenger vehicles circulating according to a fixed time schedule, e.g. buses, trains or trams.

Indication of free spaces in parking areas.

Platooning, i.e. the control of the admission or release of vehicles to or from a platoon (a synonym for "convoy", see Glossary). This includes the organisation of vehicles within platoons, involving an exchange of information between the control system and the vehicles, i.e. the number of vehicles, acceptance or refusal of new vehicles in the platoon, and where in the platoon the new vehicle may be inserted.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Group B60W 30/00 covers drive control systems using conjoint control of vehicle sub-units for road vehicles under the drive of a human being, whereby the control is of single vehicles. Examples are: drive control systems for predicting or avoiding probable or impending collision otherwise than by control of a particular sub-unit, covered by group B60W 30/08; cruise control, covered by group B60W 30/14; and cruise control of distance between vehicles, e.g. keeping a distance to preceding vehicle, covered by B60W 30/16.

This group covers traffic lights per se (under G08G 1/095). Mechanical aspects of light devices for fixed installations are covered by group F21S 8/00, advertising or display means on roads are covered by group G09F 19/22, circuits arrangements for electric light sources in general are covered by group H05B 37/00.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Arrangement of road signs or traffic signals

E01F 9/00

Road pricing or congestion charging of vehicles or vehicle users

G07B 15/06

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Safety devices for propulsion-unit control, specially adapted for or arranged in vehicles

B60K 28/00

Vehicle fittings for automatically controlling vehicle speed

B60K 31/00

Arrangements or adaptations of optical signalling or lightning devices

B60Q 1/00

Optical viewing arrangements for cars

B60R 1/00

Arrangements or fittings on vehicles for protecting or preventing injuries to occupants or pedestrians in case of accidents or other traffic risks

B60R 21/00

Vehicle fittings for preventing or indicating unauthorised use or theft of vehicles

B60R 25/00

Vehicle brake control system

B60T

Road vehicle drive control systems for predicting or avoiding probable or impending collision otherwise than by control of a particular sub-unit

B60W 30/08

Road vehicle cruise control

B60W 30/14

Cruise control of distance between road vehicles, e.g. keeping a distance to preceding vehicle

B60W 30/16

Steering controls

B62D 1/00

Light devices intended for fixed installation

F21S 8/00

Registering or indicating the working of vehicles

G07C 5/00

Parking meters

G07F 17/24

Advertising or display means on roads

G09F 19/22

Circuits arrangements for electric light sources in general

H05B 37/00

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

convoy, platoon

means a group of vehicles which is controlled as a whole by exchange of data or information between the vehicles themselves (i.e. inter-vehicle communication) or with one or more external sources (i.e. central source or distributed sources)

G08G 1/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Pads or other sensitive devices responsive to passage of vehicles

E01F 11/00

G08G 1/09 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Indicating arrangements for variable information by selection or combination of individual elements

G09F 9/00

G08G 1/123 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transmission of navigation instructions to vehicles

G08G 1/0968

G08G 3/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Arrangements, located in marine craft or in the sea, for controlling marine craft within a traffic environment, e.g. anti-collision systems.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Marking of navigational route

B63B 51/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Buoys specially adapted for marking a navigational route

B63B 22/16

G08G 5/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Arrangements, located in aircraft or on the ground, for controlling aircraft within a traffic environment.

Automatic landing aids.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Landing aids fitted in or to aircraft; safety measures fitted in or to aircraft to prevent collision with earth’s surface

B64D 45/04

Visual or acoustic landing aids on the ground or on aircraft-carrier decks

B64F 1/18

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Meteorology

G01W 1/00

Airborne radio transmission systems

H04B 7/185

Airborne wireless networks

H04W 84/06

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

air traffic control (ATC)

is a service provided by ground-based controllers who direct aircraft on the ground and in the air

G09B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus or methods for educational or teaching purposes, e.g.:

Simulators for teaching or training purposes.

Teaching, or communicating with, the blind, deaf or mute.

Models, e.g.:

Planetaria or globes; Maps; Plans; Charts; Diagrams, e.g. route diagrams.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass does not cover generic computer-based simulators, i.e. simulators which merely demonstrate or illustrate the function of an apparatus or of a system by means involving computing without specific adaptation due to pedagogical constraints, and therefore cannot be regarded as teaching or training devices. Such generic computer-based simulators are covered by class G06, if no provision exists elsewhere.

This subclass does not cover components of simulators, if identical with real devices or machines, which are covered by the relevant subclasses for these devices or machines.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Simulators for teaching or training purposes

Simulating cosmonautic conditions, e.g. for conditioning crews

B64G 7/00

Teaching or practice apparatus for gun-aiming or gun-laying

F41G 3/26

Computer-based simulators

G06C, G06T

Analogue computers for flight simulators

G06G 7/72
Education or teaching in general

Abacus

G06C 1/00
Models

Dental articulators

A61C 11/00

Models in the nature of toys, e.g. model railways

A63H

Models of scenic effects, e.g. trees or rocks, for stage purposes

A63J 13/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Digital computers

G06F

Image data processing or generation

G06T

Displaying in general

G09F
Education or teaching in general

Exercising apparatus for developing or strengthening the muscles or joints of the body by working against a counterforce, with or without measuring devices

A63B 21/00

Exercising apparatus specially adapted for particular parts of the body

A63B 23/00

Puzzle-games

A63F 9/00

Talking dolls or toys

A63H 3/28

Devices for psychotechnics or testing reaction times, e.g. for vehicle drivers

A61B 5/16

Printed matter of special format or style not otherwise provided for

B42D 15/00

Articles for writing or drawing upon; Accessories or aids for writing or drawing

B43L

Metronomes

G04F 5/02

Hand-manipulated computing devices

G06G 1/00

Data processing specially adapted for administration or management, e.g. human management, scheduling, allocating time

G06Q 10/00

Data processing specially adapted for commerce, e.g. user profile, evaluation or surveying

G06Q 30/00

Aids for music

G10G

Video conference systems

H04N 7/15
Simulators for teaching or training purposes

Devices for psychotechnics or testing reaction times, e.g. for vehicle drivers

A61B 5/16

Fire fighting accessories

A62C 99/00

Amusement arrangement creating illusion of travel

A63G 31/16

Games using electronically generated display

A63F 13/00
Teaching, or communicating with, the blind, deaf or mute

Devices or methods for replacing direct visual or auditory perception by another kind of perception

A61F 9/08, A61F 11/04

Typewriters for printing in Braille or with keyboards specially adapted for use by blind or disabled persons

B41J 3/32

Audible indication of meter readings

G01D 7/12

Clocks or watches for blind persons

G04B 25/02

Interface arrangements for digital computers

G06F 3/00

Reading or recognising printed or written characters

G06K 9/00

Tactile signalling systems

G08B 6/00

Speech analysis or synthesis; Speech recognition

G10L

Speech recognition using non-acoustical features, e.g. position of the lips

G10L 15/24

Telephone sets with features to facilitate their use, e.g. for blind people

H04M 1/247
Planetaria; Globes; Maps; Plans; Charts; Diagrams

Devices for holding or supporting maps

A47B 97/02

Map printing process

B41M 3/02

Printed matter of special format or style not otherwise provided for

B42D 15/00

Sheets temporarily attached together; Filing appliances

B42F

Structuring or formatting of map data specially adapted for navigation in a road network

G01C 21/32

Optical projection apparatus

G03B

Systems involving transmission of navigation instructions to the vehicle having a display in the form of a map

G08G 1/0969

Railway or like time or fare tables; Indicating or reading aids therefor

G09D 1/00

G09B 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Puzzle-games

A63F 9/00

Advertising or displaying in general

G09F

G09B 1/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sheets temporarily attached together by rings or coils

B42F 3/00, B42F 5/00

G09B 1/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Without special support

G09B 1/40

G09B 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrically-operated

G09B 7/00

Advertising or displaying in general

G09F

G09B 3/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Masks

G09B 17/02

G09B 3/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Having one set of answers common to a plurality of questions

G09B 3/12

G09B 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Working with questions and answers

G09B 7/00

Simulators

G09B 9/00

Advertising or displaying in general

G09F

G09B 5/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Reading and recognising printed or written characters

G06K 9/00

Sound-recording or reproducing

G11B

G09B 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mechanically-operated

G09B 3/00

Computing arrangements

G06F

G09B 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For the use of weapons

F41G 3/26

G09B 9/052 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for psychotechnics, e.g. for vehicle drivers

A61B 5/16

G09B 11/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Templets for drawing purposes

B43L 13/20

G09B 13/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For teaching music

G09B 15/08

G09B 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Metronomes

G04F 5/02

G09B 15/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For teaching typing

G09B 13/00

Exercising apparatus for developing or strengthening the muscles for physical training

A63B 21/00

Exercising apparatus specially adapted for particular parts of the body

A63B 23/00

G09B 15/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For teaching typing

G09B 13/02

G09B 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Teaching lip-reading

G09B 21/06

G09B 19/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Abacus

G06C 1/00

G09B 19/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Simulators

G09B 9/02

G09B 21/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices or methods for replacing direct visual or auditory perception by another kind of perception

A61F 9/08, A61F 11/04

Audible indication of meter readings or of colour

G01D 7/12

Watches for blind persons

G04B 25/02

Methods or arrangements for reading or recognising printed or written characters

G06K 9/00

Speech analysis, speech recognition

G10L

G09B 21/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Typewriters for Braille

B41J 3/32

G09B 29/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for holding or supporting maps

A47B 97/02

For computing purposes

G06G 1/14, G06G 1/16

Display boards

G09F

G09B 29/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Optical projection apparatus

G03B

G09B 29/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Relief models

G09B 25/06

G09C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Apparatus or methods for ciphering or deciphering whereby a given sequence of signs (e.g. an intelligible text) is transformed into an unintelligible sequence of signs by transposing the signs or groups of signs or by replacing them by others according to a predetermined system.

Typewriters specially adapted for ciphering or deciphering cryptographic text.

Other apparatus or methods for ciphering or deciphering, e.g. involving the concealment or deformation of graphic data such as designs, written or printed messages.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Secret communication

H04K 1/00

Arrangements for conditional access to broadcast information or to broadcast-related services using cryptography

H04H 60/23

Secret digital communication

H04L 9/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Holographic processes

G03H

Marking record carriers

G06K 1/00-G06K 3/00

Recognizing patterns or reading or recognizing printed or written characters

G06K 9/00

General purpose image data processing

G06T 1/00

Information storage based on relative movement between record carrier and transducer

G11B

Coding, decoding or code conversion, in general

H03M

Pictorial communication

H04N

Security means for wireless communication

H04W 12/00

G09C 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Typewriters characterised by the purpose for which they are constructed

B41J 3/00

G09C 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Changing, amusing, or secret pictures

B44F 1/10

G09D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Railway tables or similar time/fare tables.

Indicating or reading aids for said tables.

Perpetual calendars.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Calendar blocks in printed format

B42D 5/04

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Indicating positions or identities of vehicles or vehicle trains

B61L 25/02

Clockwork-driven calendars

G04B

Railway or similar time/fare tables incorporating maps or route diagrams, e.g. railway routing charts

G09B 29/00

Display devices in general

G09F

G09D 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Indicating or recording positions or identities of vehicles or vehicle trains

B61L 25/02

G09F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Cardboard or like show-cards or foldable or flexible material (see Definition of group G09F 1/00).

Labels, tag tickets, or similar identification or indication means, Seals; Postage or like stamps (see Definition of group G09F 3/00).

Means for displaying samples (see Definition of group G09F 5/00).

Signs, name or number plates, letters, numerals, or symbols; Panels or boards (see Definition of group G09F 7/00).

Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements (see Definition of group G09F 9/00).

Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the complete information is permanently attached to a movable support which brings it to the display position (see Definition of group G09F 11/00).

Illuminated signs; Luminous advertising (see Definition of group G09F 13/00).

Boards, hoardings, pillars, or like structures for notices, placards, posters, or the like (see Definition of group G09F 15/00).

Flags; Banners; Mountings therefor (see Definition of group G09F 17/00).

Advertising or display means not otherwise provided for (see Definition of group G09F 19/00).

Mobile visual advertising (see Definition of group G09F 21/00).

Advertising on or in specific articles, e.g. ashtrays, letter boxes (see Definition of group G09F 23/00).

Audible advertising (see Definition of group G09F 25/00).

Combined visual and audible advertising or displaying, e.g. for public address (see Definition of group G09F 27/00).

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

traffic control systems

G08G

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

sign

designates a mark or indication serving to make something recognisable, where the information presented is non-varying information, even if it is flashing; by way of example it covers advertising hoardings, or luminous, or light reflecting, safety arrangements

G09F 1/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Cardboard or similar show-cards of foldable or flexible material for information or advertising.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

printed matter of special format or style not otherwise provided for

B42D 15/00

G09F 3/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Labels, tag tickets, or similar identification or indication means.

Seals.

Postage or similar stamps.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

tags attached to, or associated with, an object, in order to enable detection of the object

G01V 15/00

labels specially adapted for being applied to, or incorporated in, record carriers and not intended for visual display simultaneously with the playing-back of the record carrier

G11B 23/40

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

horticulture; cultivation of vegetables

A01G 1/00

medals or badges

A44C 3/00

identification of persons, e.g. finger-printing, foot-printing, impression techniques

A61B 5/117

making paper labels

B31D 1/02

layered products

B32B

identity, credit, cheque or like information bearing cards in printed matter format

B42D 15/10

sheets temporarily attached together

B42F

fixing seals on documents

B43M 1/00

apparatus or processes for labelling or tagging

B65C

use of seals in packages

B65D 55/06

labelling fabrics by sewing

D05B 3/20

locks giving indication of unauthorised unlocking with destructible seal closures

E05B 39/02

record carriers for use with machines and with at least a part designed to carry digital markings

G06K 19/00

G09F 5/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Means for displaying samples, e.g. portable cases, cards or books.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

showcases or show-cabinets with arrangements for continuously or intermittently moving the merchandise

A47F 3/08

packages comprising articles attached to cards, sheets, or webs for removal therefrom

B65D 73/00

G09F 7/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Signs (see Glossary after G09F).

Panels or boards for presentation of non-varying information or advertising.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

cardboard or like show-cards of foldable or flexible material

G09F 1/00

indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements

G09F 9/00

indicating arrangements for variable information in which the complete information is permanently attached to a movable support which brings it to the display position

G09F 11/00

illuminated signs, board or panels

G09F 13/00

boards, hoardings, pillars or the like for notices, placards, posters or the like

G09F 15/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this group is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Vehicle registration number plates

B60R 13/10

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

horticulture; cultivation of vegetables

A01G 1/00

upright bodies, e.g. marker posts or bollards; supports for road signs

E01F 9/011

joining sheets or plates to one another or to strips or bars parallel to them

F16B 5/00

G09F 9/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

indicating arrangements for variable information in which the complete information is permanently attached to a movable support which brings it to the display position

G09F 11/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

micro-structural devices comprising flexible or deformable elements, e.g. comprising elastic tongues or membranes

B81B 3/00

light guides

G02B 6/00

displays based on interference in an adjustable optical cavity

G02B 26/00

displays based on the rotation of particles under the influence of an external field, e.g. gyricons, twisting ball displays

G02B 26/02

displays based on reflecting micro-mechanical devices, e.g. micro-electromechanical system (MEMS) mirrors, deformable mirror devices (DMD)

G02B 26/08

head-up displays

G02B 27/01

other optical systems or other optical apparatus for producing stereoscopic or other three-dimensional effects

G02B 27/22

liquid crystal displays (LCD)

G02F 1/13

displays based on electrochromic elements

G02F 1/15

displays based on electrophoresis

G02F 1/167

abacus

G06C 1/00

arrangements for transferring data from a digital processing unit to an output display device

G06F 3/14

slide rules

G06G 1/00

arrangements or circuits for control of indicating devices using static means to present variable information

G09G

incandescent panels comprising a number of separate incandescent bodies

H01K 9/00

cathode ray tubes

H01J 31/00

plasma display panels

H01J 11/00, H01J 17/49

semiconductor devices with at least one potential-jump barrier or surface barrier, specially adapted for light emission, e.g. LED

H01L 27/15, H01L 33/00

organic light emitting devices, e.g. OLED displays or PLED displays

H01L 27/32, H01L 51/50

pictorial communication, e.g. television

H04N

electroluminescent light sources

H05B 33/00

display consisting of a printed circuit board carrying a matrix of single LED

H05K 3/30

G09F 11/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the complete information is permanently attached to a movable support which brings it to the display position, e.g. displaying by rotating drums, flexible sheets or endless belts.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements

G09F 9/00

showcases or show-cabinets with arrangements for continuously or intermittently moving the merchandise

A47F 3/08

G09F 13/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Illuminated signs (see Glossary after G09F) boards or panels.

Luminous advertising, e.g. by fireworks.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements

G09F 9/00

indicating arrangements for variable information in which the complete information is permanently attached to a movable support which brings it to the display position

G09F 11/00

mobile visual advertising

G09F 21/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

designs or pictures characterised by special or unusual light effects

B44F 1/00

luminescent materials

C09K 11/00

light sources using luminescence

F21K

fireworks

F42B 4/00

structural association of illumination devices with liquid crystal panels

G02F 1/13357

arrangements or circuits for control of indicating devices using static means to present variable information

G09G

G09F 15/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Boards, hoardings, pillars, or like structures for notices, placards, posters, or the like.

G09F 17/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Flags, banners, or mountings therefor.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

devices specially adapted or mounted for storing and repeatedly paying-out and re-storing lengths of material

B65H 75/34

flagpoles (as fixed construction)

E04H 12/32

G09F 19/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Advertising or displaying not covered by the other groups of this subclass, e.g.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

displaying or advertising in general

G09F 1/00-G09F 17/00, G09F 21/00-G09F 27/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

dolls or the like in the nature of toys

A63H

special designs or pictures characterised by unusual light effects

B44F 1/00

projection apparatus

G03B 21/00

visible signalling systems using smoke, fire, or coloured gases

G08B 5/40

G09F 21/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Advertising in mobile visual form, e.g.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

combined visual and audible advertising

G09F 27/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

kites

B64C 31/06

aircraft adaptations for dispensing pamphlets or similar advertising matter from aircrafts

B64D 1/02

aircraft adaptations for sky-writing

B64D 1/20

G09F 23/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Advertising specially adapted for being placed on/in, or combined with, specific articles, e.g. tableware.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

advertising on or in vehicles, ships, aircrafts or the like, i.e. mobile visual advertising

G09F 21/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

containers, packaging-elements, or packages, with auxiliary means or provisions for displaying articles or materials

B65D

G09F 25/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Advertising in audible form.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

combined visual and audible advertising

G09F 27/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

sound-recording or reproducing in general

G11B

public address systems

H04R 27/00

G09F 27/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Combinations of visual and audible advertising or displaying, e.g. for public address.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

mobile visual advertising

G09F 21/00

audible advertising

G09F 25/00

public address systems

H04R 27/00

G09G - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Arrangements or circuits for processing control signals to achieve the display, e.g. for the reception, storage, regeneration, coding, decoding, format manipulation, addressing of control signals.

Solution of problems of displays by means of their control, i.e. control for which features of a display are relevant, e.g. to compensate for varying pixel behaviour, which may lead to non-uniformity in the display.

Improvements of the control of displays, i.e. where the functionality of controlling a display is relevant, e.g. selective brightness adaptation for lowering energy consumption of the display, possibly after image analysis.

The visual effect in the indicating means using the static means may be produced by the generation of an image on a screen, e.g. indirectly by scanning an electron beam onto a luminescent screen, directly by controlled light sources, by projection of light from controlled light sources or light modulators onto characters, symbols, or elements thereof drawn on a support, or by electric, magnetic, or mechanic control of the parameters of light rays from an independent source.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

With regard to subclass H04N (pictorial communication, e.g. television) and subclass G06T (image data processing or generation, in general), this subclass covers electronic control of display characterized by the display device itself, whereas it does not cover:

With regard to group G06F 9/00, this subclass does not cover software modules, e.g. software driver modules for the display, or their interaction, such as interaction between software modules related to the display of windows or interaction between a software driver module for the display and the operating system (covered by G06F 9/00).

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Display devices per se, structural details of the indicating devices, such as panels or tubes per se, or assemblies of individual light sources, which are covered by the relevant (sub)groups listed below:

Micro-structural devices comprising flexible or deformable elements , e.g. displays comprising elastic micro-tongues or membranes

B81B 3/00

Optical devices or arrangements using movable or deformable optical elements for controlling the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light, e.g. switching, gating, modulating, e.g. displays based on interference in an adjustable optical cavity

G02B 26/00

Optical devices or arrangements using movable or deformable optical elements for controlling the intensity of light, e.g. displays based on the rotation of particles under the influence of an external field, e.g. twisting microsphere displays (gyricons®)

G02B 26/02

Optical devices or arrangements using movable or deformable optical elements for controlling the direction of light, e.g. displays using a reflecting micromechanical device, like a MEMS mirror, DMD

G02B 26/08

Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour of light arriving from an independent light source based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells

G02F 1/13

Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour of light arriving from an independent light source based on electrochromic elements, e.g. electrochromic displays

G02F 1/15

Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour of light arriving from an independent light source based on electrophoresis, e.g. electrophoretic displays

G02F 1/167

Projectors and projection type viewers adapted for projection of either still pictures of motion pictures

G03B 21/12

Digital output to display device

G06F 3/14

Indicating arrangements being the ends of optical fibres for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements

G09F 9/305

Indicating arrangements being incandescent filaments for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements

G09F 9/307

Cathode ray tubes

H01J 31/00

Indicating arrangements being gas discharge devices for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements, e.g. plasma display panels

G09F 9/313

Plasma display panels

H01J 11/00, H01J 17/49

Indicating arrangements being semiconductor devices for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements, e.g. light emitting diode displays

G09F 9/33

Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state component formed in or on a common substrate, specially adapted for light emission, e.g. light emitting diode displays

H01L 27/15

Solid state devices using organic materials as the active part specially adapted for light emission, e.g. displays using OLED or PLED

H01L 51/50

Indicating arrangements being liquid crystals for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements, e.g. liquid crystal displays

G09F 9/35

Electroluminescent light sources

H05B 33/00

Assembling printed circuits with electric components, e.g. with resistor, displays consisting of a printed circuit board carrying a matrix of single LEDs

H05K 3/30
The following subject-matter is also not covered:

Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof

H04N 1/00

Scanning details of television systems

H04N 3/00

Projection arrangements for image reproduction

H04N 5/74

Projection devices for colour picture display

H04N 9/31

Details of colour television systems

H04N 9/00

Colour television systems

H04N 11/00

Stereoscopic television systems

H04N 13/00, H04N 15/00

Circuit arrangements for electric light sources in general

H05B 37/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Diagnosis; Surgery, Identification

A61B

Arrangement or adaptations of instruments in vehicles

B60K 35/00

Equipment for fitting in or to aircraft

B64D

Lighting in general

F21

Combined instruments indicating more than one navigational value, e.g. for aircraft

G01C 23/00

Arrangements for displaying electric variables or waveforms

G01R 13/00

Cathode-ray oscilloscopes

G01R 13/20

Optical scanning systems

G02B 26/10

Indicating of time by visual means

G04B 19/00, G04C 17/00, G04G 9/00

Image data processing or generation, in general

G06T

Visible signalling arrangements or devices

G08B 5/00

Traffic control systems

G08G

display, advertising, signs

G09F

Digital stores in which the information is moved stepwise, e.g. shift registers

G11C 19/00

Circuits in pulse counters for indicating the result

H03K 21/18

Coding, decoding or code conversion, in general

H03M

Reproducing a picture or pattern using electric signals representing parts thereof and produced by scanning an original

H04N

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

indicating device

display device

to present

to display

variable information

information with variable content

static means to display information

means not using movement of macroscopic parts for information build-up, e.g. displays using LCDs, LEDs, DMDs, ... for image build-up

Synonyms and Keywords

CRT

Cathode Ray Tube

LCD

Liquid Crystal Display

AC-PDP

Alternate Current Plasma Display Panel

DC-PDP

Direct Current Plasma Display Panel

LED

Light Emitting Diode

OLED

Organic Light Emitting Diode

MEMS

Micro Electro-Mechanical System

DMD

Digital Micro Mirror Device

G09G 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cathode-ray oscilloscopes

G01R 13/20

Television

H04N

G09G 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Optical scanning systems in general

G02B 26/10

G09G 3/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Using cathode-ray tubes with phosphor screens

G09G 1/00

G09G 3/2807 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Control arrangements or circuits for the discharge activation of luminous gas-discharge panels by signals whose frequencies are substantially higher than those used normally, as determined (e.g.) by panel structures, number of pixels, sub-frame arrangements.

G09G 3/296 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements of power supply units or energy saving circuitries (normally including capacitors and/or coils) connected to the electrodes to produce the necessary waveforms for the different driving phases.

Such arrangements are distinguished from other arrangements of functional units such as shift registers for scanning, memories and circuitry for managing sub-frames etc., which do not directly affect said waveforms and control the display at a higher level. These other arrangements are typically more distant from the electrodes than the arrangements covered by this group.

G09G 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Image data processing or generation, in general

G06T

G10B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

General design of organs, harmoniums, or like wind-actuated musical instruments.

Details or accessories thereof.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Non-musical aspects of musical toy instruments

A63H 5/00

Mouth organs

G10D 7/12

Accordions or concertinas; Keyboards therefor

G10D 11/00

Automatic wind actuated instruments

G10F 1/12

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Musical toys per se

A63H

Keyboards or keys for pianos, harpsichords, spinets or similar stringed musical instruments with one or more keyboard

G10C 3/12

Wind musical instruments, e.g. flutes, ocarinas, oboes, clarinets, bagpipes, saxophones, trumpets; general design, details and accessories therefor

G10D 7/00, G10D 9/00

Aids for music; Supports for musical instruments

G10G 5/00

Other separate auxiliary devices or accessories

G10G 7/00

Electrophonic musical instruments; Instruments in which the tones are generated by electromechanical means or electronic generators, or in which the tones are synthesised from a data store

G10H

Electronic organs

G10H 5/00

Computer organs

G10H 7/00

G10C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

General design of pianos, harpsichords, spinets or similar stringed musical instruments with one or more keyboards.

Details and accessories thereof.

Combinations of said musical instruments with other musical instruments, e.g., bells or xylophones.

Methods or tools specially adapted for the manufacture or maintenance thereof.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Non-musical aspects of musical toy pianos

A63H 5/00

Automatic pianos with or without keyboards

G10F 1/02, G10F 1/04

Combination instruments whose one part is an automatic piano

G10F 1/22

Details or accessories of automatic pianos

G10F 5/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Musical toys per se

A63H

Stringed musical instruments, e.g. violins, harps, mandolins, guitars, banjos or zithers, general design, details or accessories

G10D 1/00, G10D 3/00

Automatic stringed musical instruments other than pianofortes

G10F 1/16

Independent players for keyboard instruments

G10F 3/00

Aids for music; Supports for musical instruments

G10G 5/00

Other separate auxiliary devices or accessories

G10G 7/00

Electrophonic musical instruments; Instruments in which the tones are generated by electromechanical means or electronic generators, or in which the tones are synthesised from a data store

G10H

G10D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

General design of stringed musical instruments, e.g., violins, harps, mandolins, guitars, banjos or zithers;

Details of, or accessories for, stringed musical instruments, e.g., slide-bars;

General design of wind-actuated musical instruments, e.g., flutes, ocarinas, oboes, clarinets, bagpipes, saxophones, trumpets or mouth-organs;

Details of, or accessories for, wind-actuated musical instruments;

Accordions, concertinas or the like; Keyboards therefor;

Percussion musical instruments;

Details of, or accessories for, percussion musical instruments;

Combinations of different musical instruments not involving pianos, harpsichords, spinets or similar stringed musical instruments that have one or more keyboards;

Musical instruments not provided for elsewhere in class G10.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Non-musical aspects of musical toy instruments

A63H 5/00

Organs or harmoniums

G10B

Pianos, harpsichords, spinets or similar stringed musical instruments with one or more keyboards

G10C

Combinations of pianos, harpsichords, spinets or similar stringed musical instruments with one or more keyboards with other musical instruments

G10C 5/00

Automatic musical instruments

G10F

Automatic stringed musical instruments other than pianofortes

G10F 1/16

Automatic wind-actuated instruments

G10F 1/12

Automatic percussion musical instruments

G10F 1/08

Electrophonic musical instruments; Instruments in which the tones are generated by electromechanical means or electronic generators, or in which the tones are synthesised from a data store

G10H

Whistles

G10K 5/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Musical toys per se

A63H

Aids for music; Supports for musical instruments

G10G 5/00

Other separate auxiliary devices or accessories

G10G 7/00

Sound-producing devices not regarded as musical instruments

G10K

Bells

G10K 1/00

G10F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Automatic musical instruments, e.g., pianofortes, musical boxes, carillons and barrel organs.

Independent players for keyboard instruments.

Details or accessories thereof

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Non-musical aspects of musical toy instruments

A63H 5/00

Arrangements for the associated working of recording or reproducing apparatus with automatic musical instruments

G11B 31/02

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Musical toys per se

A63H

Organs, harmoniums or like wind actuated musical instruments

G10B

Pianos, harpsichords, spinets or similar stringed musical instruments with one or more keyboards

G10C

Stringed musical instruments; Wind musical instruments; Accordions or concertinas; Percussion musical instruments; Musical instruments not otherwise provided for

G10D

Aids for music; Supports for musical instruments

G10G 5/00

Other separate auxiliary devices or accessories

G10G 7/00

Electrophonic musical instruments; Instruments in which the tones are generated by electromechanical means or electronic generators, or in which the tones are synthesised from a data store

G10H

G10G - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Musical aids, e.g., means for the representation of music, chord or note indicators for keyboards or fingerboards, means for transposing or transcribing music.

Recording music in notation form, e.g., recording the mechanical operation of a musical instrument.

Support means for musical instruments.

Other auxiliary devices or accessories, e.g., separate holders for resin or strings, conductor’s batons and tuning forks or like devices.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Music stands

A47B

Non-musical aspects of musical toy instruments

A63H 5/00

Metronomes

G04F 5/02

Teaching music

G09B 15/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Luggage

A45C 5/00

Carrying harnesses

A45F 3/14, A45F 5/00

Musical toys per se

A63H

Page turners

B42D 9/04

Containers specially adapted to protect contents from mechanical damage

B65D 81/02

Stands

F16M 11/00

Controlling humidity

F26B 21/08

G11B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Recording or playback of information by relative movement between a record track and a transducer, the transducer directly producing, or being directly actuated by, modulation in the track being recorded or played-back, and the extent of modulation corresponding to the signal being recorded or played-back;

Apparatus and machines for recording or playback, and parts thereof, such as heads;

Record carriers for use with such apparatus and machines;

Associated working of other apparatus with such apparatus and machines.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Recording measured values in a way that does not require playback through a transducer

G01D 9/00

Recording or playback apparatus using mechanically marked tape, e.g. punched paper tape, or using unit records, e.g. punched or magnetically marked cards

G06K

Transferring data from one type of record carrier to another type of record carrier

G06K 1/18

Guiding cards or sheets

G06K 13/00

Record carriers for use with machines and with at least a part designed to carry digital markings

G06K 19/00

Details of scanning-probe apparatus

G01Q 10/00-G01Q 90/00

Circuits for coupling output of reproducer to radio receiver

H04B 1/20

Loudspeakers, microphones, gramophone pick-ups or like acoustic electromechanical transducers or circuits therefor

H04R
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Associated working of cameras or projectors with sound-recording or -reproducing means

G03B 31/00

Substation equipment for recording telephonic conversations or messages for absent subscribers

H04M 1/65

Television signal recording

H04N 5/76, H04N 9/79

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Working of plastics; working of substances in a plastic state in general

B29

Layered products in general

B32B

Thermography

B41M 5/26

Containers, packaging elements or packages, specially adapted for particular articles or materials

B65D 85/00

Storing webs, tapes or filamentary material in general

B65H 75/00

Coating metallic material; coating material with metallic material; coating by vacuum evaporation, by sputtering, by ion implantation or by chemical vapour deposition, in general

C23C

Measuring electric or magnetic properties

G01R

Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarization or direction of light

G02F

Photosensitive materials or processes for photographic purposes

G03C

Electrography; electrophotography; magnetography

G03G

Holographic processes or apparatus

G03H

Electric digital data processing

G06F

Printing of data from record carriers

G06K 3/00

Arrangements for producing a permanent visual presentation of the output data

G06K 15/00

Arrangements or circuits for control of indicating devices using static means to present variable information

G09G

Static stores

G11C

Selection of magnetic materials; thin magnetic films

H01F

Thin magnetic films

H01F 10/00

Semiconductor lasers

H01S 5/00

Coding, decoding or code conversion, in general

H03M

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

record carrier

means a body, such as a cylinder, disc, card, tape, or wire, capable of permanently holding information, which can be read-off by a sensing element movable relatively to the record carrier

head

includes any means for converting sinusoidal or non-sinusoidal electric wave-forms into variations of the physical condition of at least the adjacent surface of the record carrier, or vice versa

near-field interaction

means a very short distance interaction using scanning-probe techniques, e.g. quasi- contact or evanescent contact between head and record carrier

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the terms "head" and "pickup" are often used as synonyms.

G11B 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Recording by cutting or deforming using laser beam

G11B 7/00

Recording by cutting or deforming using electron beam

G11B 9/10

G11B 3/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Styli

G11B 3/44

G11B 3/58 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Brushes

A46B

Cleaning in general

B08B

G11B 3/70 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes involving a single technical art, in general, and for which provision exists elsewhere, see the relevant places, e.g.

B29D 17/00

G11B 5/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Timing or synchronising arrangements

G11B 27/10

G11B 5/465 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Demagnetisation in general

H01F 13/00

G11B 5/627 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Constructional features

G11B 23/26

G11B 5/70 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Base layers per se

G11B 5/73

G11B 5/84 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Processes involving a single technical art, in general, and for which provision exists elsewhere, see the relevant places, e.g. B29, C23, C25D for painting, shaping, evaporation coating and galvanizing in general

B29, C23, C25D

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus or processes for applying homogeneous magnetic films to substrates in general

H01F 41/14

G11B 7/085 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Controlling the position or direction of light beams, i.e. deflection

G02F 1/29

G11B 7/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Details of optical transducer assembly of recording or reproducing system;

Means for protecting the optical transducer assembly from environmental hazards such as dust intrusion or sudden impacts;

Optical beam sources therefor, e.g. laser light source and power control thereof;

Optical detectors therefor,

Means for guiding optical beams;

Apparatus or processes for manufacturing optical transducer assembly.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Disposition or mounting of head elements within housing or with provision for moving of light source, optical beam or detector, irrelevant to the transducing method

G11B 7/08
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Associated working of cameras or projectors with sound-recording or -reproducing means

G03B 31/00

Sound-recording combined with cinematography

G03C 5/14

Subtractive cinematographic processes combined with sound-recording

G03C 7/24

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Head

includes any means for converting sinusoidal or non-sinusoidal electric wave-forms into various of the optical condition of at least the adjacent surface of the record carrier, or vice versa

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the terms "head" and "pickup" are often used as synonyms.

G11B 7/1245 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electro-optic deflection; acousto-optic deflection

G02F 1/29, G02F 1/33

G11B 7/125 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Optical modulators; for controlling the intensity, phase or direction of light

G02B 26/00

G11B 7/126 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Control of laser output parameters; control of semiconductor laser output parameters

H01S 3/10, H01S 5/06

Stabilisation of laser output parameters; stabilisation of semiconductor laser output parameters

H01S 3/13, H01S 5/068

G11B 7/127 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Lasers; semiconductor lasers

H01S 3/00, H01S 5/00

G11B 7/128 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electro-optic, magneto-optic or acousto-optic modulators

G02F 1/00

Optical modulators

G02B 26/00

G11B 7/13 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Optical detectors

G01J

Demodulating light, transferring the modulation of modulated light, frequency changing of light

G02F 2/00

G11B 7/1353 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Diffraction gratings

G02B 5/18

Holograms used as optical elements

G02B 5/32

Grating systems

G02B 27/44

Holograms

G03H

G11B 7/1365 - Definition fr

Special rules of classification

In this group, integrated combinations of a refractive element, such as a coating element or phase plate, with another element, such as a lens, e.g. US 2009 0257338, WO 2006 048818, EP 1 855 274 are classified in this group and in other appropriate groups for the other element.

G11B 7/1374 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Optical objectives

G02B 9/00

G11B 7/1376 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Collimators

G02B 27/30

G11B 7/1381 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Optical diaphragms

G03B 9/02

G11B 7/1387 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Near-field optical probes

G01Q 60/18

G11B 7/1392 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Optical systems for aberration correction

G02B 27/00

Objective lenses for reducing geometrical aberration

G02B 13/18

G11B 7/1395 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Beam splitting or combining systems

G02B 27/10

G11B 7/1398 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Optical diaphragms

G03B 9/02

G11B 7/24012 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tracks or pits

G11B 7/2407

G11B 7/24015 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

In this group a protection plate also used as the substrate is considered to be a substrate.

G11B 7/24018 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

This group covers only disks in which multiple substrates are provided.

In this group a protection plate also used as the substrate is considered to be a substrate.

G11B 7/24033 - Definition fr

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Attention is drawn to group G11B 11/08, which covers recording on, or reproducing from, the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods or means are covered by different main groups of groups G11B 3/00-G11B 7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B 9/00, and using recording by electric charge or by variation of electric resistance or capacitance.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Recording or reproducing using ferroelectric record carriers

G11B 9/02

Recording or reproducing using record carriers having variable electric resistance

G11B 9/04

Recording or reproducing using record carriers having variable electrical capacitance

G11B 9/06

Recording or reproducing using electrostatic charge injection

G11B 9/08

G11B 7/24047 - Definition fr

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expression/word "board" is often used instead of "substrate" which is used in the classification scheme of this group.

G11B 7/241 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Photosensitive materials per se

G03C 1/00

G11B 7/26 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Processes involving a single technical art and for which provision exists elsewhere, see the relevant places, e.g.

B29D 17/00, G03H

G11B 15/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Brake constructions in general

F16D

G11B 15/54 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Speedometers or tachometers

G01P

G11B 19/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Brake constructions in general

F16D

G11B 19/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Speedometers or tachometers

G01P

G11B 20/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Angle-modulation

H03C

Demodulation of angle-modulated oscillations

H03D

G11B 20/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Pulse modulation or pulse demodulation

H03K

G11B 20/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrical digital data processing

G06F

Speech analysis-synthesis techniques for redundancy reduction

G10L 19/00

Transmission of digital information

H04L

G11B 23/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Storing webs, tapes or filamentary material in general

B65H 75/00

G11B 23/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Sensing such signals

G11B 15/06

G11B 25/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Individual parts of apparatus

G11B 3/00-G11B 23/00, G11B 33/00

G11B 27/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Mixing of video signals

H04N 5/265

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements for sorting or merging computer data on continuous record carriers

G06F 7/22

G11B 27/24 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For controlling purposes

G11B 15/00, G11B 17/00

G11B 31/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Substation equipment for recording telephonic conversations or messages for absent subscribers

H04M 1/65

G11B 33/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Furniture aspects

A47B, A47B 81/06

G21B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Reactors in which energy release is caused by the controlled fusion of atomic nuclei, namely:

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Uncontrollable fusion reactions; applications thereof

G21J

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Controlled fission reactors

G21C

Generating plasma; Handling plasma

H05H 1/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Confinement

Controlled compression of fusion nuclei to overcome their electrostatic repulsion.

Fusion

Combination of two or more nuclei to form a heavier nucleus, a by-product of which is the release of energy.

Thermonuclear

Relating to fusion at high temperatures.

G21C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Nuclear fission reactors

Reactor fuel elements or their assemblies; Selection of substances for use as reactor fuel elements

Moderator or core structure; Selection of materials for use as moderator

Control of nuclear reaction

Emergency protection arrangements structurally associated with the reactor

Shielding structurally associated with the reactor

Pressure vessels; Containment vessels; Containment in general

Cooling arrangements within the pressure vessel containing the core; Selection of specific coolants

Monitoring; Testing

Arrangements for treating, for handling, or for facilitating the handling of, fuel or other materials which are used within the reactor, e.g. within its pressure vessel

Apparatus or processes specially adapted to the manufacture of reactors or parts thereof

Adaptations of reactors to facilitate experimentation or irradiation

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Fusion reactors; hybrid fission-fusion reactors

G21B

Treating radioactively contaminated materials; Decontamination arrangements therefor

G21F 9/00

Nuclear explosives

G21J
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Nuclear power plant

G21D

Control of nuclear power plant

G21D 3/00

Production of electric energy from fusion or fission reactions

G21D 7/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Pressure or containment vessels utilizing sub- or super-atmospheric pressure to effect chemical or physical change of matter

B01J 3/00

Cleaning pipes or tubes using methods or apparatus specially adapted thereto

B08B 9/02

Manipulators

B25J

Heat-transfer or heat-exchange or heat-storage materials

C09K 5/00

Pressure vessels in general

F16J 12/00

Shock-absorbers in general

F16F

Tube joints in general

F16L

Cleaning of internal or external surfaces of heat-exchange or heat-transfer conduits, e.g. water tubes of boilers

F28G

Measurement of nuclear radiation

G01T

Electric or magnetic analogue computers, e.g. simulators, for nuclear physics

G06G 7/54

Pumping arrangements for reactor coolant not otherwise covered by G21C 15/24

G21D

Shielded cells or rooms

G21F 7/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Core

The central region of a reactor containing fuel and moderator elements, where nuclear fission occurs.

Moderator

Material used in a thermal nuclear reactor to reduce the velocity of neutrons produced by nuclear fission in order to facilitate chain reaction.

Shield

Means surrounding a reactor to prevent radiation damage to operators etc.

G21C 11/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Shielding in general

G21F

G21C 13/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Covers for pressure vessels in general

F16J 13/00

G21C 15/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrodynamic pumps

H02K 44/02

G21C 15/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Separation in general

B01D

Steam traps or like apparatus for draining off liquids from enclosures predominantly containing gases or vapours

F16T

G21C 15/22 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Pipes; joints, fittings or supports for pipes in general

F16L

G21C 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Investigating fluid tightness of structures

G01M 3/00

G21D - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Details of nuclear power plant.

Control of nuclear power plant.

Arrangements of reactor and engine in which reactor-produced heat is converted into mechanical energy.

Arrangements for direct production of electrical energy from fusion or fission reactions.

Arrangements to provide heat for purposes other than conversion into electrical energy, e.g. for heating buildings.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Structural combination of fuel element with thermoelectric element

G21C 3/40

Control of nuclear reaction

G21C 7/00

Emergency protection arrangements structurally associated with a reactor; for rapid reduction of reactivity under fault conditions; for suppressing fires

G21C 9/00, G21C 9/02, G21C 9/04

Pumping arrangements for the coolant by means within the reactor pressure vessel

G21C 15/24

Obtaining electrical energy from radioactive sources

G21H 1/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric or magnetic analogue computers, e.g. simulators, for nuclear physics

G06G 7/54

Thermoelectric elements per se

H01L 35/00, H01L 37/00

Electrodynamic pumps

H02K 44/02

Synonyms and Keywords

engine

plant, such as a turbine

engine demand

load

G21F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Shielding characterised by the composition of the material.

Shielding characterised by its physical form, e.g. granules, or shape of the material.

Transportable or portable shielded containers.

Shielded cells or rooms.

Treating radioactively contaminated material; decontamination arrangements therefore.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Use of cosmetics or similar toilet preparations already classified as such in A61K 8/00 when brought into direct contact with the skin (i.e. topical preparations) for affording protection against X-rays or other harmful rays

A61Q 17/04

Radiation protection in cosmonautical vehicles

B64G 1/54

Shielding structurally associated with a reactor

G21C 11/00

Vessels, containers or shields associated with X-ray tubes

H01J 35/16

X-ray producing apparatus involving X-ray tubes; constructional details thereof; control thereof; circuits therefor

H05G 1/00, H05G 1/02, H05G 1/30

Apparatus or processes for producing X-rays, not involving X-ray tubes, e.g. involving generation of a plasma

H05G 2/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Apparatus for radiation diagnosis, e.g. combined with radiation therapy equipment; application or adaptation of safety means therefor

A61B 6/10

Applying radioactive material to the body; shielding of fluid reservoirs therefor, e.g. syringe shielding

A61M 36/08

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Applying radioactive material to, or placing it within, the body

A61M 36/00

Safety devices combined with or specially adapted for manipulators

B25J 19/00

X-ray technique in general

H05G

G21F 3/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Protective clothing or garments in general

A41D 13/00

G21F 7/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Chambers provided with manipulating devices

B25J 21/00

G21F 7/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Glove-boxes in general

B25J 21/02

G21F 7/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Manipulators

B25J

Control or regulating systems in general

G05B

G21F 9/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Separating different isotopes of the same chemical element

B01D 59/00

G21F 9/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Separating different isotopes of the same chemical element

B01D 59/00

G21G - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Arrangements for the conversion of chemical elements, including but not limited to, arrangements using electromagnetic radiation, corpuscular radiation or particle bombardment. Examples include systems for producing radioactive isotopes through neutron bombardment.

Radioactive sources.

Alleged conversion of chemical elements by chemical reaction.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Adaptations of reactors to facilitate experimentation or irradiation. Examples of such adaptations include modification of the reactor core to enable exposure of samples for investigative purposes.

G21C 23/00

Irradiation devices. These typically include arrangements to deliberately subject bodies or materials to ionising radiation in order to take advantage of known effects of the radiation thereon.

G21K 5/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Applying radioactive material to the body

A61M 36/00

Radiation therapy using radioactive sources

A61N 5/10

Conversion of chemical elements by thermonuclear reactions in fusion reactors

G21B

Conversion of nuclear fuel in fission reactors

G21C

Application of radiation from radioactive sources

G21H 5/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo

A61K 51/00

Separation of different isotopes of the same element

B01D 59/00

Handling particles or electromagnetic radiation not otherwise provided for

G21K

Producing neutrons or other subatomic particles, X- or gamma rays:

in fusion reactors

G21B

in nuclear reactors

G21C

by cosmic radiation

G21H 7/00

in accelerators

H05H

X-ray tubes

H01J 35/00

Gamma masers

H01S 4/00

G21G 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Separation of different isotopes of the same element

B01D 59/00

G21G 4/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Producing neutrons or other subatomic particles, X- or gamma rays, in fusion reactors

G21B

In nuclear reactors

G21C

By cosmic radiation

G21H 7/00

In accelerators

H05H

X-ray tubes

H01J 35/00

Gamma masers

H01S 4/00

G21H - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Arrangements for obtaining electrical energy from radioactive sources, e.g. from radioactive isotopes;

Arrangements for direct conversion of radiation energy from radioactive sources into forms of energy other than electrical energy;

Applications of radiation from radioactive sources or arrangements therefor;

Use of effects of cosmic radiation.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Fusion reactors

G21B

Nuclear reactors

G21C

Techniques for handling particles or electromagnetic radiation not otherwise provided for; irradiation devices, gamma- or X-ray microscopes

G21K

Electric discharge tubes or discharge lamps

H01J

Apparatus for generating ions to be introduced into non-enclosed gasses, e.g. into the atmosphere

H01T 23/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Use of radiation to produce mutation in plants

A01H 1/06

Preservation of meat, sausages, fish, eggs, fruit, vegetables or edible seeds by irradiation without heating effect

A23B 4/015, A23B 5/015, A23B 7/015, A23B 9/06

Preservation of milk or milk preparations by irradiation

A23C 3/07

Preservation of non-alcoholic beverages or foodstuffs by irradiation without heating

A23L 2/50, A23L 3/26

Medicinal preparations obtained by treating materials with wave energy or particle radiation

A61K 41/00

Methods or apparatus using radiation for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects other than foodstuffs or contact lenses

A61L 2/08

Radiation therapy; therapy using X-rays, gamma rays or particle-irradiation

A61N 5/00, A61N 5/10

Applying radioactive material to the body

A61M 36/00

Direct application of radiation to physical, chemical or physico-chemical processes in general

B01J 19/08

Use of radiation for separating dispersed particles from gases or vapour, e.g. air, by electrostatic effect

B03C 3/38

Use of radiation for pre-treatment of surfaces to which liquids or other fluent materials are to be applied, or after-treatment of applied coatings

B05D 3/06

Use of radiation in the working of plastics; after-treatment of articles without altering their shape; apparatus therefor

B29C 71/04

Railway trackside devices actuated by radiation and controlled by interaction with a vehicle or train

B61L 1/10

Railway trackside devices using radiation to control devices on a vehicle or train

B61L 3/06

Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation; in addition polymers

C08F 2/46, C08F 2/54, C08G 2/02

Processes for treating or compounding macromolecular substances by wave energy or particle radiation

C08J 3/28

Chemical treatment or coating of shaped articles made of macromolecular substances using wave energy or particle radiation

C08J 7/18

Use of radiation for cracking of hydrocarbon oils

C10G 15/10, C10G 32/04

Use of radiation for reforming naphtha

C10G 35/16

Use of radiation for pasteurisation, sterilisation, preservation, purification, clarification or ageing of alcoholic beverages

C12H 1/06, C12H 1/16

Use of radiation for bleaching fibres, threads, yarns, fabrics, feathers, or made-up fibrous goods, leather or furs

D06L 3/04

Measuring angles, areas, length, thickness or similar dimensions, or irregularities of surfaces or contours, using wave or particle radiation

G01B 15/00

Transducers not specially adapted for a specific variable using wave or particle radiation derived from a radioactive source

G01D 5/50, G01D 5/62

Investigating fluid tightness of structures using radioactive material

G01M 3/20

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of wave or particle radiation

G01N 23/00

Investigating or analysing materials through the ionisation of gases, using wave or particle radiation to ionise a gas

G01N 27/64

Chemical analysis of biological material; immunoassay or bio-specific binding assays involving radioactive-labelled substances

G01N 33/534, G01N 33/60

Geophysics; prospecting or detecting using primary nuclear radiation sources

G01V 5/08

Fire alarms or alarms responsive to explosion, actuated by the presence of smoke or gas detected by an ionisation chamber

G08B 17/11

Carrying off electrostatic charges by means of ionising radiation

H05F 3/06

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measurement of nuclear or X-radiation

G01T

Particle spectrometer ion sources or ion guns using particle bombardment, e.g. ionisation chambers

H01J 49/14

Semiconductor devices sensitive to electromagnetic or corpuscular radiation

H01L 31/00

G21H 1/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Photoelectric discharge tubes not involving the ionization of a gas

H01J 40/00

Tubes for determining the presence, intensity, density or energy of radiation or particles

H01J 47/00

G21H 1/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric discharge tubes or discharge lamps

H01J

G21H 1/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Discharge tubes functioning as thermionic generators

H01J 45/00

Thermoelectric devices comprising a junction of dissimilar materials

H01L 35/00

G21H 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Lasers pumped by high energy nuclear particles

H01S 3/0957

G21H 5/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Preservation of cream, butter and cheese

A23C 13/08, A23C 15/18, A23C 19/097

Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo

A61K 51/00

Introduction of isotopes of elements into organic compounds

C07B 59/00

G21J - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Devices specially adapted to cause or facilitate uncontrollable fission or fusion reactions of atoms of the device and to release the explosive energy created thereby to an area outside the devices.

The peaceful or belligerent use of such devices.

Arrangements for detecting nuclear explosions.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Explosive chemical compositions

C06B

Methods for stimulating production of oil, gas, water, soluble or meltable materials or a slurry of minerals from wells by use of explosives

E21B 43/263

Conventional explosive devices

F42B

So-called "dirty bombs" where conventional explosives are used to dispense radioactive substances

F42B 12/46

Individual measuring devices may be classified as the measuring device per se

G01

Analogue computers for simulating nuclear explosions

G06G 7/54

Controlled fusion reactors

G21B

Controlled fission reactors

G21C

Nuclear power plant

G21D

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Uncontrollable reaction

Any fission or fusion reaction where event initiators (e.g. neutrons in the fission process) are produced in a number greater than required to sustain a chain reaction and where there is no mechanism to selectively moderate the reaction, e.g. a fission reactor where the operator has simply opted not to moderate or has failed to moderate the reaction is not a nuclear explosive device in the context of this subclass.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents, the words "device" and "bomb" are often used as synonyms.

In patent documents, the expressions "thermonuclear bomb", "hydrogen bomb", "H-bomb" and "fusion bomb" are often used as synonyms.

In patent documents, the expressions "A-bomb" and "atom bomb" are often used as archaic synonyms for "fission bomb".

G21K - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Arrangements for handling particles or ionising radiation, e.g. focusing or moderating;

Ionising radiation filters, e.g. X-ray filters;

Conversion screens for the conversion of the spatial distribution of particles or ionising radiation into visible images, e.g. fluoroscopic screens;

Irradiation devices;

Gamma ray or X-ray microscopes.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Investigating or analysing materials by the use of wave or particle radiation, e.g. X-rays or neutrons

G01N 23/00
Places in relation to which this subclass is residual:

Adaptations of reactors to facilitate experimentation or irradiation

G21C 23/00

Electron-optical arrangements in cathode ray tubes or electron beam tubes

H01J 29/46

Discharge tubes with provision for emergence of electrons or ions from the vessel; Lenard tubes

H01J 33/00

Discharge tubes with provision for introducing objects or material to be exposed to the discharge, e.g. for the purpose of examination or processing thereof

H01J 37/00

Electron or ion microscopes with scanning beams

H01J 37/28

Production or acceleration of neutral particle beams, e.g. molecular or atomic beams

H05H 3/00

Direct voltage accelerators; accelerators using single pulses

H05H 5/00

Targets for producing nuclear reactions

H05H 6/00

Details of linear accelerators, magnetic induction accelerators, cyclotrons and magnetic resonance accelerators

H05H 7/00

Linear accelerators

H05H 9/00

Magnetic induction accelerators, e.g. betatrons

H05H 11/00

Magnetic resonance accelerators; Cyclotrons

H05H 13/00

Methods or devices for acceleration of charged particles not otherwise provided for

H05H 15/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Investigating or analysing materials by investigating the ionisation of gases

G01N 27/62

Scanning probe techniques or apparatus; applications of scanning probe techniques, e.g. scanning probe microscopy

G01Q

X-ray apparatus involving X-ray tubes; circuits therefor

H05G 1/00

Apparatus or processes specially adapted for producing X-rays, not involving X-ray tubes, e.g. involving generation of plasma

H05G 2/00

Generating plasma; handling plasma

H05H 1/00

Particle spectrometers or separator tubes

H01J 49/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Ionising radiation

‘Ionising radiation’ consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are sufficiently energetic to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, thus ionising them.

Particle

‘Particle’ means a molecular, atomic or sub-atomic particle

G21K 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Production or acceleration of neutrons, electrically charged particles, or neutral molecular or atomic beams

H05H 3/00-H05H 15/00

G21K 4/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Photographic processes using X-rays; using screens to intensify X-ray images

G03C 5/16, G03C 5/17

In discharge tubes: screens on or from which an image or pattern is formed; luminescent screens

H01J 1/54, H01J 1/62

In cathode ray tubes or electron beam tubes: image conversion tubes or image amplification tubes having an X-ray input and an optical output

H01J 31/50

H01B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Electrical conductors or cables characterised by their conductive material or form including power cables, communication cables or conductors, and superconductors or hyperconductive conductors, cables or transmission lines.

Electrical insulators or insulating bodies characterised by their insulating or dielectric material or form, including capacitor-type insulators.

Apparatus or processes specially adapted for manufacturing conductors or cables.

Apparatus or process specially adapted for manufacturing insulators or insulating bodies.

Apparatus or process for salvaging material from cables.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Superconductors characterized by a ceramic forming technique or ceramic composition

C04B 35/00

Conductive paints

C09D 5/24

Insulating paper

D21H 27/12

Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. coupling

G02B 6/00

Selection of magnetic properties

H01F 1/00

Piezo-electric or electrostrictive materials

H01L 41/00

Waveguides

H01P

Methods or apparatus specifically adapted for removing insulation from conductors

H02G 1/12
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Suspension insulators for trolley lines

B60M 1/16

Storing or paying-out lengths of conductors or cables

B65H 75/34

Insulating rail joints

E01B 11/54

Resistors

H01C

Insulating of windings for manufacturing coils

H01F 41/12

Capacitors

H01G

Devices using superconductivity or hyperconductivity

H01L 39/00

Coaxial lines for handling frequencies considerably beyond the audio range

H01P 3/06

Bus-bar layouts

H02B 1/20

Installations of electric cables or lines, or of combined optical and electric cables or lines

H02G

Details of windings of dynamo-electric machines characterized by the conductor or insulating material

H02K 3/00

Communication line transmission systems

H04B 3/00

Heating elements

H05B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Passages or insulators for nuclear reactors, e.g. for electric cables

G21C 17/116

Selection of piezo-electric or electrostrictive materials

H01L 41/00

Installation of cables or lines, or of combined optical and electric, cables or lines

H02G

Junction boxes

H02G 15/10

Circuit arrangements or systems for supplying of distributing electric power

H02J

Screening of apparatus or components against electric or magnetic fields

H05K 9/00

Special rules of classification

Group H01B 12/00 takes precedence over groups H01B 5/00, H01B 7/00, H01B 9/00 and H01B 11/00.

Cables including at least one electrical conductor together with optical fibers are classified in group H01B 11/22.

H01B 1/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Insert limiting references here...

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Resistors

H01C

Dtails of devices using superconductivity or hyperconductivity, characterised by the material

H01L 39/12

H01B 5/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Aspects of connection with their counterparts

H01R 25/00

Bus-bar layouts

H02B 1/20

Installations of bus-bars

H02G 5/00

H01C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Electrical resistors whose effective value is mechanically adjustable , including such resistors structurally combined with switching arrangements;

Resistors whose effective value is varied non-mechanically such as by temperature, electromagnetic waves, voltage, or current;

Fixed resistors whose effective value is, or is presumed to be, non-variable;

Non- adjustable liquid resistors;

Structural combinations of resistors;

Details of, or for, resistors;

Apparatus or processes for the manufacture of resistors.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Apparatus or processes for filling or compressing insulating material in heating element tubes

H05B 3/52

Resistors with a potential-jump or surface barrier, e.g. field effect resistors

H01L 29/00

Photoresistors and similar semiconductor devices in which radiation controls flow of current through the device

H01L 31/08

Magnetic-field-controlled resistors and similar devices using galvano-magnetic or similar magnetic effects

H01L 43/00

Bulk negative resistance effect devices

H01L 47/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Impedance networks

H03H

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices using superconductivity or hyperconductivity

H01L 39/00

Solid state devices for rectifying, amplifying, oscillating, or switching without a potential-jump barrier or surface barrier

H01L 45/00

Terminals or tapping points in general

H01R

Printed circuits incorporating printed electric components, e.g. printed resistor, capacitor, inductor

H05K 1/16

Printed circuits structurally associated with non-printed electric components

H05K 1/18

Special rules of classification

Variable resistors, the value of which is changed non-mechanically, e.g. by voltage or temperature, are classified in main group H01C 7/00.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Adjustable

Mechanically adjustable

H01F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Fixed and variable transformers including, for example, superconductive or cryogenic transformers; adaptations thereof for specific applications or functions; details thereof.

Fixed and variable inductances; adaptations thereof for specific applications or functions; details thereof.

Electromagnets including, for example, superconductive magnets; details thereof such as coils, cores, yokes, and armatures.

Permanent magnets.

Thin magnetic films.

Magnetic materials.

Apparatus or processes for magnetizing or demagnetizing.

Apparatus or processes specially adapted for manufacturing or assembling devices covered by this subclass.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Magnets used to separate solid materials from other solid materials or fluids

B03C 1/00

Magnetic work holders

B23Q 3/00, B25B 11/00

Apparatus or processes for degaussing ships

B63G 9/06

Lifting magnets

B66C 1/00

Magnets in electric meters

G01R

Devices for demagnetizing parts of clocks and watches

G04D 9/00

Magnetic record carriers

G11B 5/00

Apparatus or processes specially adapted for manufacturing magnetic record carriers

G11B 5/84

Thin-film magnetic stores

G11C

Apparatus or processes for threading magnetic cores in digital storage elements

G11C 5/12

Magnets or electromagnets in relays

H01H

Magnets or electromagnets in dynamo-electric machines

H02K

Methods or apparatus specially adapted for manufacturing, assembling, maintaining or repairing dynamo-electric machines, e.g. forming windings prior to mounting into the machine

H02K 15/00

Arrangements for controlling transformers, reactors or choke coils for the purpose of obtaining a desired output

H02P 13/00

Magnetic amplifiers

H03F

Impedance networks

H03H

Demagnetizing arrangements for color television

H04N 9/29

Acoustic electromechanical transducers having coils or permanent magnets

H04R

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Powder metallurgy

B22F

Iron oxides (not sintered)

C01G 49/02

Ferrite based ceramics

C04B 35/26

Ferrous alloys

C22C

Coating by evaporation or sputtering

C23C 14/00

Refrigeration machines using magnetic effects

F25B 21/00

Magneto-optical devices

G02F 1/09

Sensing record carriers using inductive or magnetic sensors

G06K 7/08

Semiconductor devices with potential-jump barrier or surface barrier controllable by variation of the magnetic field applied to the devices

H01L 29/82

Thermomagnetic devices

H01L 37/00

Magnetostrictive devices

H01L 41/12

Devices using galvano-magnetic or similar magnetic effects

H01L 43/00

Screening of electric apparatus against magnetic fields

H05K 9/00

Special rules of classification

Groups H01F 17/00-H01F 38/00 (with the exception of groups H01F 27/42 and H01F 38/32) cover only structural or constructional aspects of transformers, inductive reactors, chokes or the like. These groups do not cover circuit arrangement of such devices, which are covered by the appropriate functional places.

H01G - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Non-electrolytic, fixed and variable capacitors per se, details thereof, and structural combinations thereof with each other, with electrolytic devices covered by this subclass, or with other electric elements not covered by this subclass where the structure consists mainly of a capacitor.

Electrolytic capacitors, rectifiers, detectors, switching devices, light-sensitive or temperature-sensitive devices per se, details thereof, and structural combinations thereof with each other, with non-electrolytic capacitors or with other electric components not covered by this subclass.

Details common to two or more main types of devices covered by this subclass.

Processes and apparatus for manufacturing the capacitors, rectifiers, detectors, switching devices and light-sensitive or temperature-sensitive devices covered by this subclass.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Selection of specified materials as dielectric

H01B 3/00

Capacitors with potential-jump or surface barrier

H01L 29/00, H01L 51/05
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Indicating or measuring liquid level, or level of fluent solid material by measuring variations of capacity of capacitors

G01F 23/26

Measuring temperature using capacitive elements

G01K 7/34

Thin- or thick-film circuits; Capacitors as a component of an integrated circuit, e.g. stacked capacitors in DRAM's

H01L 27/00

Impedance networks utilizing capacitors

H03H

Printed circuits incorporating printed capacitors

H05K 1/16

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Powder metallurgy

B22F

Layered products

B32B

Compositions of ceramic materials

C04B 35/00

Polymeric films or sheets

C08J 5/18

Electrolytic coating by surface reaction, i.e. forming conversion layers

C25D 11/00-C25D 11/38

Measuring force or stress by measuring variations in capacitance

G01L 1/14

Measuring steady or quasi-steady pressure of a fluid or a fluent solid material by making use of variations in capacitance

G01L 9/12

Investigating or analyzing material by investigating capacitance

G01N 27/22

Measuring capacitance; Measuring dielectric constants

G01R 27/26

Batteries and fuel cells

H01M

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following words "condenser" and "capacitor" are often used as synonyms.

In patent documents the following expressions/words: "supercapacitor", "ultracapacitor", and "electrochemical capacitor" are often used as synonyms for "double-layer capacitor", which is used in the classification scheme of this subclass.

H01G 2/00 - Definition fr

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This group covers details of capacitors that are not provided for in a single one of groups H01G 4/00-H01G 11/00.

For example, encapsulations specific to fixed capacitors are covered by group H01G 4/224, and encapsulations specific to hybrid or EDL capacitors are covered by group H01G 11/78, whereas group H01G 2/10 covers encapsulations where the type of capacitor is unspecified or the encapsulation is generally applicable to several types of capacitors as covered by groups H01G 4/00-H01G 11/00.

H01G 11/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Hybrid capacitors, i.e. capacitors having different positive and negative electrodes; electric double-layer [EDL] capacitors; processes for the manufacture thereof or of parts thereof.

More specifically the following subjects are covered:

Capacitors using combined reduction-oxidation reactions at electrode surfaces or at the interface electrode/electrolyte, e.g. redox arrangement or solion.

Structural combinations, e.g. assembly or connection, of hybrid or EDL capacitors with other electric components, at least one hybrid or EDL capacitor being the main component, or multiple hybrid or EDL capacitors, e.g. arrays or modules, including stacked hybrid or EDL capacitors.

Arrangements or processes for adjusting or protecting hybrid or EDL capacitors e.g. against electric or thermal overloads as well as reformation or processes for removal of impurities.

Electrodes thereof, e.g. characterized by structural features of the materials making up or comprised therein or characterized by their material, e.g. based on carbon, metal oxides, conductive polymers or specially adapted for lithium-ion capacitors.

Other components of hybrid or EDL capacitors covered include separators, electrolytes e.g., solid, liquid, current collectors and terminals.

Cases; housings; encapsulations; mountings including gaskets or sealing and fixing or assembling a hybrid or EDL capacitive element in a housing, e.g. mounting electrodes, current collectors or terminals in containers or encapsulations.

Processes for the manufacture of hybrid or EDL capacitors, or components thereof, including processes specially adapted for the manufacture of the electrodes.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

capacitive deionisation for electrochemical separation

C02F 1/469

measuring capacitance or electric characteristics derived therefrom

G01R 27/26

conversion of DC power input into DC power output using capacitors

H02M 3/06, H02M 3/18

conversion of AC power input into AC power output using capacitors

H02M 5/08

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

carbon or inorganic carbon compounds thereof

C01B 31/00

active carbon compounds

C01B 31/08

compositions of ceramic materials

C04B 35/00

polymeric films or sheets

C08J 5/18

batteries or fuel cells in general

H01M

cases, mountings of batteries

H01M 2/02, H01M 2/10

separators for batteries

H01M 2/14

terminals of a battery

H01M 2/30

carbonaceous material for inserting or intercalating light metals

H01M 4/587

carriers or collectors of a battery

H01M 4/64

Li-accumulators

H01M 10/052

accumulators characterised by the material used as electrolytes

H01M 10/056

hybrid cells, i.e. electrochemical generators having two different types of half-cells, the half-cell being an electrode-electrolyte combination of either a primary, a secondary, or a fuel cell

H01M 12/00

circuit arrangements or systems for supplying or distributing electric power; systems for storing electric energy

H02J

circuit arrangements for charging or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries; with parallel operation in networks using both storage and other dc sources, e.g. providing buffering

H02J 7/00, H02J 7/34

casings for electrical apparatus in general

H05K 5/00

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

electrochemical storage device

means a battery, accumulator or capacitor

collector

means a conductive component in intimate contact with an electrode material in an hybrid or EDL capacitor

electrolyte

refers to a ionic-conducting liquid or solid ensuring electric conduction between electrode active parts or electric double layers, inside hybrid or EDL capacitors

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following expressions/words: "supercapacitor", "ultracapacitor", and "electrochemical capacitor" are often used as synonyms for "hybrid capacitor" and "EDL capacitor", which are used in the classification scheme of this group.

H01G 11/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements, as well as related processes, that can be seen as structurally associated, e.g. integrated therein or structurally coupled with the main component. i.e. hybrid or EDL capacitor structures, for adjusting or protecting such capacitor structures.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Apparatus or devices referring to circuits, sensors or other arrangements for adjusting, e.g. the output or the signal, controlling, converting or otherwise operating an hybrid or EDL capacitor structures are excluded from H01G 11/14 and are covered in the relevant subclass for the specific apparatus or device.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

emergency protective circuit arrangements specially adapted for capacitors, and effecting automatic switching in the event of an undesired change from normal working conditions

H02H 7/16

emergency protective circuit arrangements for limiting excess current or voltages without disconnection

H02H 9/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

circuit arrangements for charging or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries

H02J 7/00

H01H - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Electric switches, i.e. single points of mechanically operable electrical connection (or interruption). Types, details and manufacture thereof.

Relays, i.e. switching devices having contacts which are operated from electric inputs which supply, directly or indirectly, all the mechanical energy necessary to cause both the closure and the opening of the contacts. Types, details and manufacture thereof.

Selectors, i.e. arrays of electric switches which selectively connect some inputs out of a plurality of inputs to some outputs out of a plurality of outputs. Types, details, and manufacture thereof.

Protective devices like: circuit-breaking switches, protective switches, fuses, evaporation devices, details and manufacture thereof. This subclass also covers (in groups H01H 69/00-H01H 87/00) devices for the protection of electric lines or electric machines or apparatus in the event of undesired change from normal electric working conditions, the electrical condition serving directly as the input to the device.

Mechanical structural details of control members of switches or of keyboards such as keys, push-buttons, levers or other mechanisms for transferring the force to the activated elements are classified in this subclass, even when they are used for controlling electronic switches.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Circuit arrangements for the automatic protection of electric lines or electric machines or apparatus in the event of an undesired change from normal working conditions are covered by subclass H02H.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Electronic switching or gating, i.e. not by contact-making or -braking

H03K 17/00

Contact cables

H01B 7/10

Electrolytic self-interrupters

H01G 9/18

Bases, casings, or covers accommodating two or more switching devices or for accommodating a switching device as well as another electric component, e.g. bus-bar, line connector

H02B 1/26

Mechanical details directly producing electronic effects

H03K 17/94
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Switching arrangements for the supply or distribution of electric power

H02B

For telephone communication

H04M 1/26

Keyboards for special applications, see the relevant subclasses or groups, e.g.

B41J, G06F 3/023, H04L 15/00, H04L 17/00, H04M 1/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Overvoltage protection resistors, resistive arresters

H01C 7/12, H01C 8/04

Locking switch parts to prevent operation

H01H 9/28

Centrifugal mercury switches

H01H 29/26

Switching devices of the waveguide type

H01P

Devices for interrupted current collection.

H01R 39/00

Overvoltage arresters using spark gaps

H01T 4/00

Arrangements for locating electric faults; Testing of relays

G01R 31/00

Clocks with attached or built-in means operating any device at preselected times or after preselected time intervals

G04C 23/00

Special rules of classification

Details only described with reference to, or clearly only applicable to, switching devices of a single basic type, are classified in the group appropriate to switching devices of that basic type, e.g. H01H 19/02, H01H 75/04

Details of an unspecified type of switching device, or disclosed as applicable to two or more kinds of switching devices designated by the terms or expressions "switches", "relays", "selectorswitches", and "emergency protective devices", are classified in groups H01H 1/00-H01H 9/00

Details of an unspecified type of switch, or disclosed as applicable to two or more types of switches as defined by groups H01H 13/00-H01H 43/00 and subgroups H01H 35/02, H01H 35/06, H01H 35/14, H01H 35/18, H01H 35/24, and H01H 35/42, all hereinafter called basic types, are classified in groups H01H 1/00-H01H 9/00

Details of an unspecified type of relay, or disclosed as applicable to two or more types of relays as defined by groups H01H 51/00-H01H 61/00, hereinafter called basic types, are classified in group H01H 45/00

Details of an unspecified protective switch or protective relay, or applicable to two or more types of protective devices as defined by groups H01H 73/00-H01H 83/00, hereinafter called basic types, are classified in group H01H 71/00.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Acting or action

means a self-induced, e.g. not manually caused, movement of parts at one stage of the switching. These connotations apply to all parts of the verbs "to operate"; "to actuate", and "to act", and to words derived therefrom, e.g. to "actuation" or "actuating"

Driving mechanism

refers to the means by which an operating force applied to the switch is transmitted to the moving contact or contacts

Key

same as push button

Operating

is used in a broader sense than "actuating"

Push button

means a knob or button that allows the manual operation of a switch in order to e.g. close an electric circuit

Relay

means a switching device having contacts which are operated from electric inputs which supply, directly or indirectly, all the mechanical energy necessary to cause both the closure and the opening of the contacts

Switch

means a single point of mechanically operable electrical connection (or interruption)

Contacts

means the necessary elementary components of a switch that ensure the electrical connection, each switch comprising at least two contacts, and possibly more than two

Selector

means an array of electric switches which selectively connect some inputs out of a plurality of inputs to some outputs out of a plurality of outputs

Switch site

means the physical location where the contacts can touch each other

H01H 1/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

By rolling or wrapping

H01H 1/16

H01H 1/58 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric connections in general

H01R

H01H 1/64 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For arc-extinguishing

H01H 9/30

For mercury contacts

H01H 29/04

H01H 7/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Thermally-actuated switches

H01H 37/00

H01H 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Casings for electrical apparatus in general

H05K 5/00

H01H 9/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Contacts adapted to act as latches

H01H 1/52

By an auxiliary movement of the operating part or of an attachment thereto

H01H 3/20

H01H 9/46 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arcing horns per se

H01T 4/14

H01H 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment of micro-structural devices or systems, e.g. in combination with electrical devices

B81C

H01H 13/02 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Specially adapted for rectilinearly movable switches having operating members associated with different sets of contacts, e.g. keyboards

H01H 13/70

H01H 27/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Switches combined with plug-and-socket connectors

H01R

H01H 29/32 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Operated by direct electrodynamic action

H01H 53/00

H01H 31/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For interlocking with high-tension or heavy-current switches having arc-extinguishing or arc-preventing means

H01H 33/52

H01H 31/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For interlocking with high-tension or heavy-current switches having arc-extinguishing or arc-preventing means

H01H 33/52

H01H 33/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For switches in general

H01H 9/30

H01H 33/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arcing horns per se

H01T 4/14

H01H 33/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For storing energy in a spring motor

H01H 33/40

H01H 35/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Time switches

H01H 43/00

Relays

H01H 45/00-H01H 61/00

Sensing elements for providing continuous conversion of a variable into mechanical displacement

G01

H01H 35/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Wherein the liquid constitutes a contact of the switch

H01H 29/00

H01H 37/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Protective switches with electrothermal release or actuation

H01H 73/00-H01H 83/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrothermal relays operated by electrical input

H01H 61/00

H01H 37/32 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Temperature-responsive elements in general

G01K

H01H 37/74 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For the electrical protection of electric lines or electric apparatus

H01H 73/00-H01H 83/00

H01H 37/76 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Fuses

H01H 85/00

H01H 41/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Switches for telephonic communication

H04M 1/26

H01H 47/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Circuit arrangements for electromagnets in general

H01F 7/18

H01H 50/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cores, yokes, or armatures in general

H01F 3/00

Magnets in general

H01F 7/00

H01H 50/44 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Circuit arrangements

H01H 47/00

Magnetic coils or windings, in general

H01F 5/00

H01H 50/54 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Contacts for switches in general

H01H 1/00

H01H 59/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Clutches in general using the Johnson-Rahbek effect

H02N 13/00

H01H 63/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Details of relays

H01H 45/00

H01H 67/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Details thereof

H01H 63/00

Selecting in general

H04Q

H01H 69/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Manufacture of switches in general

H01H 11/00

Manufacture of relays in general

H01H 49/00

H01H 69/01 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring electric values

G01R

H01H 71/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connections in general

H01R

H01H 73/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connections in general

H01R

H01H 83/18 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Product

Mathematical operation

H01H 85/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Automatic release of protective switches due to fusion of a mass

H01H 73/00-H01H 83/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Disposition or arrangement of fuses on boards

H02B 1/18

H01H 85/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrical connections in general

H01R

H01H 85/165 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrical contacts

H01H 85/143

Fillings

H01H 85/18

H01H 85/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bases, casings for connectors, in general

H01R

H01H 85/25 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Interlocking between casing or protective shutter of a switch and mechanism for operating its contacts

H01H 9/22

H01J - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Devices, i.e. electric discharge tubes or discharge lamps, for producing, influencing, or using a flow of electrons or ions, and having a closed or substantially closed casing containing a chosen gas, vapour, or vacuum, upon the pressure and nature of which the characteristics of the device depend. Examples include devices for controlling, indicating, or switching electric current, counting electric pulses, producing light or other electromagnetic oscillations, such as X-rays, or for separating or analysing radiation or particles.

Details of electric discharge tubes or discharge lamps, including details applicable to both discharge devices and incandescent lamps.

Apparatus or processes specially adapted for the manufacture of electric discharge tubes, discharge lamps, or parts thereof, including apparatus and processes for manufacture applicable to both discharge devices and incandescent lamps.

Recovery of material from discharge tubes or discharge lamps.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

NONE

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Emission spectrometry

G01J 3/443

Spark gaps, including gas-filled spark gaps

H01T

Arc lamps with consumable electrodes

H05B

Particle accelerators

H05H
Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Isotope separation using separate tubes

B01D 59/44

Investigating or analyzing surface structures in atomic ranges using scanning-probe techniques

G01Q 10/00-G01Q 90/00

Investigating or analyzing electrically excited material, e.g. electroluminescence

G01N 21/66

Analyzing materials by investigating the ionization of gases; by investigating electric discharges, e.g. emission of cathode

G01N 27/62

Mass spectrometers specially adapted for column chromatography

G01N 30/72

Contactless testing of electronic circuits using electron beams

G01R 31/305

Electrostatic dosimeters in general

G01T 1/14

Secondary-emission measurement of nuclear or X-radiation

G01T 1/28

Details of scanning-probe apparatus in general

G01Q 10/00-G01Q 90/00

Gas lasers pumped by electric discharges

H01S

Generating ions to be introduced into non-enclosed gases

H01T 23/00

Tubes for generating potential differences by charges carried on a gas stream

H02N

Light sources using a combination of discharge and other kinds of light generation (other than those covered in group H01J 61/96)

H05B 35/00

Generating plasma in general

H05H 1/24

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric incandescent lamps

H01K

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, groups H01J 1/00-H01J 7/00 relate only to:

Details of an unspecified kind of discharge tube or lamp, or

Details mentioned in a specification as applicable to two or more kinds of tubes or lamps as defined by groups H01J 11/00-H01J 17/00, H01J 21/00, H01J 25/00-H01J 27/00, H01J 31/00-H01J 41/00, H01J 47/00-H01J 65/00, hereinafter called basic kinds. A detail only described with reference to, or clearly only applicable to, tubes or lamps of a single basic kind is classified in the detail group appropriate to tubes or lamps of that basic kind, e.g. H01J 17/04.

In this subclass, group H01J 9/00 relates to apparatus or processes specially adapted for the manufacture of electric discharge tubes, discharge lamps, or parts thereof.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Lamp

In this subclass, "lamp" includes tubes emitting visible, ultra-violet or infra-red light.

Spark Gap

A "spark gap" is an enclosed or non-enclosed discharge device having cold electrodes and used exclusively to discharge a quantity of electrical energy in a small time duration.

Spectrometer

An instrument used to disperse radiant energy or particles into a spectrum and measure properties such as wavelength, mass, energy, or index of refraction.

H01K - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Sources of visible, ultra-violet or infra-red radiation consisting of one or more bodies heated to incandescence by electricity, i.e. incandescent lamps, including such lamps for purposes other than general lighting.

Details of electric incandescent lamps, including ancillary devices that are structurally part of the lamp such as optical light modifiers or circuit elements.

Apparatus or processes adapted to the manufacture, installing, removal or maintenance of incandescent lamps or parts thereof.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Details or apparatus or processes for manufacture applicable to both discharge devices and incandescent lamps

H01J

Lamps with light-emitting discharge path and separately-heated incandescent body within a common envelope, e.g. for simulating daylight

H01J 61/96

Lamps with spaced electrodes heated to incandescence by light-emitting discharge, e.g. tungsten arc lamps

H01J 61/98

Electric light sources using a combination of incandescent and other types of light generation

H05B 35/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Functional features or details of lighting devices or systems thereof

F21V

Structural combinations of lighting devices with other articles, not otherwise provided for

F21V 33/00

Incandescent filaments used to form characters in indicating arrangements

G09F 9/307

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Lamp holders

H01R 33/00

Electric lighting not otherwise provided for

H05B

Circuit arrangements for electric light sources in general

H05B 37/00

Circuit arrangements or apparatus for operating incandescent light sources not adapted to a particular application

H05B 39/00

Circuit arrangements for light sources not otherwise provided for

H05B 43/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Lamp

"Lamp" includes tubes emitting ultra-violet or infra-red light.

H01L - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

in general

This includes the following kind of devices:

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Micro-structural devices or systems are classified in subclass B81B, and the processes and apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof are classified in subclass B81C. So, by way of example, micro-electro-mechanical devices (MEMS), containing micro-electronic and mechanical components, are classified in group B81B 7/02, and their manufacture, treatment or assembling in the relevant groups of B81C.

Micro-structural devices or systems working purely electrically or electronically, or related processes or apparatus for the manufacture or treatment thereof are however not covered by B81B or B81C and are classified in section H, for example in the groups of the current subclass H01L.

Micro-structural devices or systems being of other than purely electrical or electronically type, and apparatus or processes for the manufacture or treatment thereof, which are normally classified in the subclasses B81B and B81C, may be also classified in those groups of H01L providing for their structural or functional features, whenever such features are of interest per se.

Nanostructures, which are normally classified in subclass B82B, may be also classified in those groups of H01L providing for their structural or functional features, whenever such features are of interest per se.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Other electrical solid state devices which are not provided for in H01L:

Use of semiconductor devices for measuring

G01

Resistors in general

H01C

Resistors,e.g. non-adjustable resistors from semiconductor material

H01C 7/00

Magnets, inductors, transformers

H01F

Capacitors in general

H01G

Electrolytic devices

H01G 9/00

Batteries, accumulators

H01M

Waveguides, resonators or lines of the waveguide type

H01P

Electrically-conductive connections, current collectors

H01R

Lasers, stimulated emission devices,e.g. semiconductor lasers

H01S, H01S 5/00

Electromechanical resonators

H03H

Loudspeakers, microphones, gramophone pick-ups or like acoustic electromechanical transducers

H04R

Electric light sources in general

H05B

Printed circuits, hybrid circuits, casings or constructional details of electrical apparatus, manufacture of assemblages of electrical components

H05K

e.g. printed circuits and its manufacturing process

H05K 1/00, H05K 3/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Use of semiconductor and other solid state devices:

Containers merely intended for transport or storage of wafers except during manufacture or finishing devices thereon

B65D 85/30, B65D 85/86

Conveying systems for semiconductor wafers except during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components thereon

B65G 49/07

Details of scanning-probe apparatus, in general

G01Q 10/00-G01Q 90/00

Use of semiconductor devices in circuits having a particular application: see particular subclass for the application

Special rules of classification

In subclass H01L, both the process or apparatus for the manufacture or treatment of a device and the device itself are classified, whenever both of these are described sufficiently to be of interest.

Further special rules may occur on maingroup or group level, see relevant Notes on this level.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Assembly

The "assembly" of a device is the building up of the device from its component constructional units and includes the provision of fillings in containers.

Complete Device

A "complete device" is a device in its fully assembled state which may or may not require further treatment, e.g. electro-forming, before it is ready for use but which does not require the addition of further structural units.

Component

A "component" is one electric circuit element of a plurality of elements formed in or on a common substrate.

Container

A "container" is an enclosure forming part of the complete device and is essentially a solid construction in which the body of the device is placed, or which is formed around the body without forming an intimate layer thereon.

Device

The term "device" refers to an electric circuit element; where an electric circuit element is one of a plurality of elements formed in or on a common substrate it is referred to as a "component".

Electrodes

"Electrodes" are regions in or on the body of the device (other than the solid state body itself), which exert an influence on the solid state body electrically, whether or not an external electrical connection is made thereto. An electrode may include several portions and the term includes metallic regions which exert influence on the solid state body through an insulating region, (e.g. capacitive coupling) and inductive coupling arrangements to the body. The dielectric region in a capacitive arrangement is regarded as part of the electrode. In arrangements including several portions only those portions which exert an influence on the solid state body by virtue of their shape, size or disposition or the material of which they are formed are considered to be part of the electrode. The other portions are considered to be "arrangements for conducting electric current to or from the solid state body" or "interconnections between solid state components formed in or on a common substrate", i.e. leads.

Encapsulation

A "encapsulation" is an enclosure which consists of one or more layers formed on the body and in intimate contact therewith.

Integrated Circuit

A "integrated circuit" is a device where all components, e.g. diodes, resistors, are built up on a common substrate and form the device including interconnections between the components.

Parts

The term "parts" includes all structural units which are included in a complete "device".

Solid State Body

The expression "solid state body" refers to the body of material within which, or at the surface of which, the physical effects characteristic of the device occur. In thermoelectric devices it includes all materials in the current path.

Wafer

A "wafer" means a slice of semiconductor or crystalline substrate material, which can be modified by impurity diffusion (doping), ion implantation or epitaxy, and whose active surface can be processed into arrays of discrete devices or integrated circuits.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expression "package" is often used with the meaning "container" and "encapsulation".

H01L 21/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment of devices provided for in groups H01L 31/00-H01L 51/00 or of parts thereof, see these groups

H01L 31/00-H01L 51/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Single-step processes covered by other subclasses, see the relevant subclasses, e.g.

C23C, C30B

Photomechanical production of textured or patterned surfaces, materials or originals therefor, apparatus specially adapted therefor, in general

G03F

H01L 21/26 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Thermal treatment

H01L 21/324

H01L 21/265 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ion-beam tubes for localised treatment

H01J 37/30

H01L 21/31 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Layers forming electrodes

H01L 21/28

H01L 21/3205 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements for conducting electric current within the device

H01L 23/52

H01L 21/425 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Ion-beam tubes for localised treatment

H01J 37/30

H01L 21/469 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Layers forming electrodes

H01L 21/44

H01L 21/48 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Containers, encapsulations, fillings, mountings per se

H01L 23/00

H01L 21/66 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

After manufacture

G01R 31/26

H01L 21/68 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For conveying

H01L 21/677

H01L 21/683 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For conveying

H01L 21/677

H01L 21/98 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Assemblies

H01L 25/00

H01L 23/32 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For printed circuits

H05K

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connectors in general

H01R

H01L 23/42 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Characterised by selection of materials for the device

H01L 23/373

H01L 23/48 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

E.g. leads, terminal arrangements, in general

H01R

H01L 23/538 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mountings

H01L 23/12

H01L 23/60 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

E.g. Faraday shields, in general

H05F

H01L 25/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Generators using solar cells or solar panels

H02N 6/00

Details of complete circuit assemblies provided for in another subclass, e.g. details of television receivers, see the relevant subclass, e.g. H04N

H04N

Details of assemblies of electrical components in general

H05K

H01L 27/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof

H01L 21/70, H01L 31/00-H01L 51/00

Assemblies of electrical components in general

H05K

H01L 29/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof

H01L 21/00

H01L 29/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Including organic materials

H01L 51/00

H01L 31/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Roof covering aspects of energy collecting devices

E04D 13/18

Production of heat using solar heat

F24J 2/00

Measurement of X-radiation, gamma radiation, corpuscular radiation or cosmic radiation with semiconductor detectors

G01T 1/24

Measurement of radiation intensity with resistance detectors

G01T 1/26

Measurement of neutron radiation with semiconductor detectors

G01T 3/08

Couplings of light guides with optoelectronic elements

G02B 6/42

Obtaining energy from radioactive sources

G21H

H01L 31/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Semiconductor devices sensitive to light and adapted for the direct conversion of the light into electrical energy for the purpose of providing electrical energy (not for light detection purposes).

These devices are called normally solar cells or photovoltaic cells.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This group and subgroups do not cover organic light sensitive devices, which are covered by H01L 51/42 as expressed by the limiting reference after H01L 31/00.

This group and subgroups also do not cover electrolytic light sensitive devices, e.g. dye sensitized solar cells, which are covered by H01G 9/20, as expressed by the limiting reference to H01G 9/00 after the sub class title of H01L.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Imager structures consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate

H01L 27/146

Devices in which radiation controls flow of current through the device, e.g. photodetectors

H01L 31/08

Production of heat using solar heat

F24J 2/00

Measurement of X-radiation, gamma radiation, corpuscular radiation or cosmic radiation with semiconductor detectors

G01T 1/24

Measurement of X-radiation, gamma radiation, corpuscular radiation or cosmic radiation with resistance detectors

G01T 1/26

Measurement of neutron radiation with semiconductor detectors

G01T 3/08

Couplings of light guides with optoelectronic elements

G02B 6/42

Arrangement for obtaining electrical energy from radioactive sources

G21H 1/00

Electrochemical current or voltage generators

H01M 6/00, H01M 16/00

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Homojunction

pn junction involving both p and n regions made out of the same material, with the same composition and the same structure (only the doping species change).

Heterojunction

pn junction involving two different materials, the difference lying in the crystal structure and/or the composition (example : p-type amorphous silicon / n-type crystalline silicon)

p-i-n structure

P-N junction with thick intrinsic layer in between, whereby the intrinsic interlayer is the major part of the absorbing layer, i.e. not HIT® solar cells

HIT® solar cells

Heterojunction with Intrinsic Thin-layer, i.e. P-N structures including a very thin intrinsic inter-layer, which is not the absorbing layer of the structure

Tandem solar cell

a plurality of junctions are monolithically stacked on one another (for lateral integration, see H01L 27/142)

Schottky contact

rectifying (non-ohmic) metal/semiconductor contact

Group 14 elements

formerly known as group IVa elements (C, Si, Ge, Sn, Pb)

Conversion devices

light sensitive devices specially adapted for conversion of light into electrical energy, not for the purpose of light detection

MIS

Metal Insulator Semiconductor

Synonyms and Keywords

a-Si, α-Si

amorphous silicon

c-Si

crystalline silicon

mc-Si, muc-Si

microcrystalline silicon

Poly-Si

polycrystalline silicon

PIN, p-i-n

P-N junction with thick intrinsic layer in between

AIBIIICVI compound

I-III-VI compound, chalcogenides, chalcopyrites

CIS

CuInSe2

CIGS

CuInGaSe2

CIGSS

CuInGaSSe

TCO

Transparent conducting oxide

ITO

Indium Tin Oxide

AZO

Aluminum doped Zinc Oxide

GZO

Gallium doped Zinc Oxide

QW

Quantum well

MQW

Multiple Quantum Well

HIT

Heterojunction with Intrinsic Thin-layer

PERL solar cell

Passivated Emitter Rear Locally Diffused solar cell

ARC

Anti-reflective coating

MPPT

Maximum Power Point Tracking

MWT

Metal Wrap Through

FMWT

Front Metal Wrap Through

EWT

Emitter Wrap Through

IBC

Interdigitated Back Contact (solar cells)

H01L 31/058 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Using solar heat in general

F24J 2/00

H01L 31/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Solar cells where the kind of junction is not really specified. If the kind of junction is defined, then the corresponding subgroups are used.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Imager structures consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate

H01L 27/146

Photodetectors

H01L 31/08

Coatings for light sensitive devices

H01L 31/0216

Electrodes for light sensitive devices

H01L 31/0224

Special surface textures

H01L 31/0236

Special rules of classification

All detailed solar cells structures are classified in the group branch of H01L 31/06 and additionally in the relevant classification places covering the important details of the documents (special surface textures - H01L 31/0236, electrodes - H01L 31/0224, passivation layers - H01L 31/0216, antireflection layers - H01L 31/0216, ....).

H01L 31/061 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

So-called "point contact cells" (NB: the contacts must be ohmic).

H01L0031061000

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Devices having potential barriers being of the Schottky type

H01L 31/07

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrodes for light sensitive devices

H01L 31/0224

H01L 31/062 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Photovoltaic devices where the potential barrier consists of a metal-insulator-semiconductor [MIS] structure :

H01L0031062000

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Photodetectors being of the conductor-insulator- semiconductor type, e.g. having a MIS structure

H01L 31/113, H01L 31/119

H01L 31/065 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Photovoltaic devices where the absorbing part of the device has a graded bandgap:

H01L0031065000

Special rules of classification

When classifying in H01L 31/065 (graded bandgap), subject matter related to the junction type is additionally classified in the corresponding other subgroups provided for under H01L 31/06.

Example: Solar cells having a p-i-n structure with a graded band gap intrinsic region, are classified in H01L 31/065 and additionally in H01L 31/075.

H01L 31/068 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Photovoltaic devices where the potential barrier is a p-n junction involving one single material (same composition and same crystal structure) with different dopants (so called "homojunction"). This group covers mostly silicon homojunction p-n solar cells.

Example of bulk silicon solar cell :

H01L0031068000

Example of thin film solar cell :

H01L0031068000

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

p-i-n solar cells

H01L 31/075

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices with potential barriers being only of the PN heterojunction type, e.g. a-Si / c-Si solar cell

H01L 31/072

Photodetectors with p-n-homojunction structure

H01L 31/103

Methods for manufacturing homojunction solar cells

H01L 31/18

Special rules of classification

Amorphous silicon is not considered to be the same material as crystalline silicon, because a-Si and c-Si have a different crystal structure, and a different band gap. An a-Si / c-Si structure is, therefore, considered a heterojunction, which are covered by H01L 31/072.

H01L 31/0687 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Tandem homojunction solar cells, i.e. a plurality of homojunction cells deposited on one another so as to form a single integrated photovoltaic structure, each cell having a different bandgap and thus a different spectral sensitivity. Tunnel junctions between cells usually ensure the electrical connection and the current flow between the cells.

H01L0031068700

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Heterojunctionstandem solar cells

H01L 31/0725

 p-i-ntandem solar cells

H01L 31/076

Tandem solar cells comprising sub-cells each having a different kind of potential barrier

H01L 31/078

solar cells laterally integrated on a common substrate

H01L 27/142

Special rules of classification

III-V (homojunction) tandem solar cells are classified both in H01L 31/0687 and additionally in H01L 31/0693, if all the cells of the tandem structure are III-V homojunction cells.

H01L 31/0693 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Photovoltaic PN homojunction devices including, apart from doping material or other impurities, only AIIIBV compounds, e.g. n-GaAs / p- GaAs.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

III-V heterojunctions solar cells

H01L 31/0735

Special rules of classification

III-V (homojunction) tandem solar cells are classified both in H01L 31/0687 and additionally in H01L 31/0693, if all the cells of the tandem structure are III-V homojunction cells.

H01L 31/07 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Photovoltaic devices where the junction consists of a Schottky barrier (rectifying metal-semiconductor junction).

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Photodetectors with Schottky structure

H01L 31/108

H01L 31/072 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Photovoltaic devices, where the junction consists of a p-n structure involving two different materials (compositionally and/or structurally), thereby forming a so-called heterojunction.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

p-i-n solar cells

H01L 31/075

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Materials of the semiconductor bodies

H01L 31/0256

Heterojunction photodetectors

H01L 31/109

H01L 31/0725 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Tandem heterojunction solar cells, i.e. photovoltaic structures consisting of a plurality of heterojunctions cells (and only heterojunction solar cells) deposited on one another so as to form a single integrated photovoltaic structure, each cell having normally a different bandgap and a different spectral sensitivity.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tandem homojunction solar cells

H01L 31/0687

Tandem solar cells comprising sub-cells each having a different kind of potential barrier

H01L 31/078

solar cells laterally integrated on a common substrate

H01L 27/142

H01L 31/073 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Heterojunction photovoltaic device, wherein the heterojunction barrier consists of two different II-VI compound materials.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

II-VI heterojunction photodetectors

H01L 31/109

H01L 31/0735 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Heterojunction photovoltaic devices, wherein the heterojunction barrier consists of two different III-V compound materials.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

III-V heterojunction photodetectors

H01L 31/109

H01L 31/074 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Heterojunction photovoltaic devices, wherein the heterojunction barrier consists of two different materials, only one of them being silicon or another group IV element or alloy.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Heterojunction comprising only group IV materials

H01L 31/0745, H01L 31/0747

H01L 31/0745 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Heterojunction photovoltaic devices, wherein the heterojunction barrier consists of two different group IV materials (elements or alloys).

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

AIV/BIV heterojunction photodetectors

H01L 31/109

H01L 31/0747 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Heterojunction photovoltaic devices, wherein the heterojunction barrier consists of two group IV materials with different crystal structures (with or without a thin intrinsic interlayer inbetween).

Example HIT® solar cells :

H01L0031074700

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

AIV/BIV heterojunction photodetectors

H01L 31/109

H01L 31/0749 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Heterojunction photovoltaic devices wherein the heterojunction barrier includes at least one I-III-VI compound

H01L 31/075 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Photovoltaic devices wherein the potential barrier consists of a p-i-n structure, the intrinsic layer being the light absorbing layer.

H01L0031075000

NB: most solar cells having p-i-n structure are made of a-Si with a thicker i layer between thinner p and n layers.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Photodetectors with p-i-n structure

H01L 31/105

Special rules of classification

p-n structures including a very thin intrinsic inter-layer, which is not the absorbing layer of the structure, e.g. HIT® solar cells, are considered to be PN heterojunctions, which are covered by group H01L 31/0747.

H01L 31/076 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Tandem p-i-n solar cells, i.e. a plurality of p-i-n structures deposited on one another so as to form a single integrated photovoltaic structure, each cell having normally a different bandgap and therefore different spectral sensitivity.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Tandem solar cells comprising sub-cells each having a different kind of potential barrier

H01L 31/078

solar cells laterally integrated on a common substrate

H01L 27/142

H01L 31/077 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Photovoltaic p-i-n structures wherein at least one of the active layers is crystalline.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Photodetectors with p-i-n structure

H01L 31/105

H01L 31/078 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Tandem solar cells with different junction types, e.g. one p-i-n sub-cell and one heterojunction sub-cell integrated on one another. Normally, all type of tandem solar cells which are not classified in H01L 31/0687, H01L 31/0725 or H01L 31/076).

H01L 31/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Semiconductor devices with at least one potential barrier or surface barrier specially adapted for light emission

H01L 33/00

Amplifiers using electroluminescent element and photocell

H03F 17/00

H01L 31/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes or apparatus specially adapted for manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof in general

H01L 21/00

H01L 33/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Couplings of light guides with optoelectronic elements

G02B 6/42

Electroluminescent light sources per se

H05B 33/00

H01L 35/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Refrigerating machines using electric or magnetic effects

F25B 21/00

Measuring temperature based on thermoelectric or thermomagnetic elements

G01K 7/00

Obtaining energy from radioactive sources

G21H

H01L 35/34 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes or apparatus specially adapted for manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof in general

H01L 21/00

H01L 37/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring temperature based on thermoelectric or thermomagnetic elements

G01K 7/00

Selection of materials for magnetography, e.g. for Curie-point writing

G03G 5/00

H01L 39/24 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes or apparatus specially adapted for manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof in general

H01L 21/00

Magnetic separation of superconductive materials from other materials, e.g. using Meissner effect

B03C 1/00

H01L 41/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for manufacturing a material, product or device which exhibits or changes an electrostatic polarisation when subjected to mechanical stress or which exhibits a mechanical deformation, e.g. tending to produce a deflection, when subjected to electric stress;

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes or apparatus specially adapted for manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof in general

H01L 21/00

H01L 41/23 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for forming enclosures or casings with encapsulants as illustrated in the figures.

H01L0041230000

H01L0041230000
Electrode
H01L0041230000
Encapsulant
H01L0041230000
Base or substrate

H01L 41/27 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for manufacturing multilayered piezo-electric or electrostrictive [PE] parts of the type illustrated.

H01L0041270000

H01L0041270000
Connection electrodes
H01L0041270000
Individual layer electrodes

H01L 41/29 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Generic processes, or apparatus, for forming electrodes, leads or terminal arrangements for piezo-electric or electrostrictive [PE] devices or parts thereof.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Apparatus or processes specially adapted for manufacturing conductors or cables

H01B 13/00

Fixed capacitors; Processes of their manufacture

H01G 4/00

Electrically-conductive connections; Structural associations of a plurality of mutually-insulated electrical connecting elements; Coupling devices; Current collectors

H01R

Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof

H01L 21/00

H01L 41/293 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for manufacturing connection electrodes of multilayered piezo-electric or electrostrictive [PE] parts, including lead-in or terminal arrangements of the type illustrated.

H01L0041293000

H01L0041293000
Connection electrodes
H01L0041293000
Individual layer electrodes
H01L0041293000
Individual layer and connection electrode combination

Special rules of classification

The integral arrangement of individual layer electrode and connection electrode is classified in both groups H01L 41/293 and H01L 41/297.

H01L 41/297 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for manufacturing individual layer electrodes of multilayered piezo-electric or electrostrictive [PE] of the type illustrated.

H01L0041297000

H01L0041297000
Connection electrodes
H01L0041297000
Individual layer electrodes
H01L0041297000
Individual layer and connection electrode combination

Special rules of classification

The integral arrangement of individual layer electrode and connection electrode is classified in both groups H01L 41/293 and H01L 41/297.

H01L 41/31 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for applying piezo-electric or electrostrictive [PE] parts or bodies onto an electrical element or another base of the types illustrated are included in this group.

H01L0041310000

H01L0041310000
Base or substrate

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Manufacture or treatment of devices consisting of a plurality of solid state components or integrated circuits formed in or on a common substrate or of specific parts thereof; Manufacture of integrated circuit devices or of specific parts thereof

H01L 21/70

Assembly of devices consisting of solid state components formed in or on a common substrate; Assembly of integrated circuit devices

H01L 21/98

Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits

H05K 3/00

Manufacture of assemblies consisting of preformed electrical components

H05K 13/00

H01L 41/311 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Manufacture or treatment of devices consisting of a plurality of solid state components or integrated circuits formed in or on a common substrate or of specific parts thereof; Manufacture of integrated circuit devices or of specific parts thereof

H01L 21/70

Assembly of devices consisting of solid state components formed in or on a common substrate; Assembly of integrated circuitdevices

H01L 21/98

Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits

H05K 3/00

Manufacture of assemblies consisting of preformed electrical components

H05K 13/00

H01L 41/39 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Shaped ceramic products characterised by their composition; Ceramic compositions; Processing powders of inorganic compounds preparatory to the manufacturing of ceramic products

C04B 35/00

Ceramic compositions containing free metal bonded to carbides, diamond, oxides, borides, nitrides, silicides, e.g. cermets, or other metal compounds, e.g. oxynitrides or sulfides, other than as macroscopic reinforcing agents

C22C

Ceramic compositions for piezo-electric or electrostrictive devices or parts

H01L 41/187

H01L 41/47 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Processes or apparatus for manufacturing a material, product or device, which exhibits or changes a magnetization when subjected to mechanical stress or which exhibits a mechanical deformation when subjected to a magnetic field.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid-state devices or of parts thereof in general

H01L 21/00

H01L 43/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices with potential-jump barrier or surface barrier controllable by variation of a magnetic field

H01L 29/82

H01L 43/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Processes or apparatus specially adapted for manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof in general

H01L 21/00

H01L 51/54 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Organic luminescent materials

C09K 11/06

H01M - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

galvanic primary cells and batteries

galvanic secondary cells and batteries

fuel cells and batteries.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrochemical processes or apparatus in general

C25

Semiconductor or other solid state devices for converting light or heat into electrical energy

H01L

H01M 2/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Working of plastics or substances in a plastic state

B29

H01M 2/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Structural combination of accumulators with charging apparatus

H01M 10/46

H01M 2/40 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Auxiliary arrangements or processes, e.g. for control of pressure, for circulation of fluids

H01M 8/04

H01M 4/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrodes for electrolytic processes

C25

Special rules of classification

In classifying electrodes of hybrid cells, the individual half-cells of the hybrid cell are considered separately, e.g. an electrode in the primary half of a primary/fuel type hybrid cell is considered to be a primary-cell electrode covered by H01M 4/06.

H01M 4/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Use of alloy compositions as active materials

H01M 4/38

H01M 4/13 - Definition fr

Special rules of classification

This group does not cover electrodes for accumulators working at high temperatures, e.g. molten sodium electrodes, which subject matter is are classified in group H01M 10/39

H01M 4/485 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

of mixed oxides or hydroxides containing manganese for inserting or intercalating light metals, e.g.LiMn2O4 or LiMn2OxFy

H01M 4/505

of mixed oxides or hydroxides containing iron, cobalt or nickel for inserting or intercalating light metals, e.g. LiNiO2, LiCoO2 or LiCoOxFy

H01M 4/525

H01M 4/82 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Single-step processes

B21D, B22D

H01M 4/92 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Non-porous diffusion electrodes, e.g. palladium membranes, ion exchange membranes

H01M 4/94

H01M 6/00 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Primary cells

electrochemical generators in which the cell energy is present in chemical form and is not regenerated

H01M 6/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Details of non-active parts

H01M 2/00

Details of electrodes

H01M 4/00

H01M 6/16 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

with solid electrolyte

H01M 6/18

H01M 6/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Deferred-action thermal cells

H01M 6/36

H01M 6/36 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Thermoelectric solid state devices

H01L 35/00, H01L 37/00

H01M 6/42 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Printed batteries

H01M 6/40

H01M 8/00 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Fuel cells

electrochemical generators wherein the reactants are supplied from outside

H01M 8/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Details of non-active parts

H01M 2/00

Details of electrodes

H01M 4/00

H01M 8/06 - Definition fr

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Production of reactants per se, see sections B or C.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Regenerative fuel cells

H01M 8/18

H01M 8/20 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Regenerative fuel cells

H01M 8/18

H01M 10/00 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Secondary cells

accumulators receiving and supplying electrical energy by means of reversible electrochemical reactions

H01M 10/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Details of non-active parts

H01M 2/00

Details of electrodes

H01M 4/00

H01M 10/04 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Construction or manufacture of lead-acid accumulators

H01M 10/12

Construction or manufacture of alkaline accumulators

H01M 10/28

Construction or manufacture of accumulators not provided for in groups H01M 10/05-H01M 10/34

H01M 10/38

H01M 10/05 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

working at high temperature

H01M 10/39

Special rules of classification

When classifying in groups H01M 10/05 to H01M 10/0587, the presence of relevant information about the following three aspects (a)-(c) must be verified:

(a) Battery type, i.e. (1) Li-accumulators, (2) Rocking chair Li-accumulators and (3) Accumulators with insertion or intercalation of metals other than lithium

(b) Selection of electrolytes materials

(c) Construction or manufacture.

H01M 10/06 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Semi-lead accumulators

H01M 10/20

H01M 10/30 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Gastight accumulators

H01M 10/34

H01M 10/32 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Gastight accumulators

H01M 10/34

H01M 10/44 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Circuits for charging

H02J 7/00

H01M 10/46 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Circuits for charging

H02J 7/00

H01M 10/48 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Indicating or measuring level of liquid in general

G01F 23/00

Measuring density

G01N

Measuring electric variables

G01R

H01M 10/50 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Control of temperature in general

G05D 23/00

H01M 10/52 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Vent plugs or other mechanical arrangements for facilitating escape of gases

H01M 2/12

H01M 12/00 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Hybrid cells

electrochemical generators having two different types of half-cells, the half-cell being an electrode-electrolyte combination of either a primary, a secondary, or a fuel cell

H01M 12/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Details of non-active parts

H01M 2/00

Details of electrodes

H01M 4/00

H01M 12/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Methods or arrangements for servicing or maintenance

H01M 6/50

H01M 12/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Methods or arrangements for servicing or maintenance, e.g. for charging

H01M 10/42

H01P - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Passive devices which have electrical dimensions comparable with the working wavelength, and which operate at frequencies up to but not including optical frequencies, e.g. microwave, and their manufacture.

Auxiliary devices of waveguide type such as filters, phase shifters, non-reciprocal devices, polarisation rotators.

Tubular waveguides and transmission lines such as strip lines, microstrips, coaxial lines, dielectric waveguides.

Devices for coupling between waveguides, transmission lines or waveguide type devices.

Resonators of the waveguide type.

Delay lines of the waveguide type.

Apparatus or processes specially adapted for manufacturing waveguides, transmission lines, or waveguide type devices.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Waveguides and waveguide type devices are commonly associated with antennas and aerials, these are classified in H01Q.

H01P is concerned with individual circuit components, or basic combinations of them. More complicated networks with lumped impedance elements are classified in H03H.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Devices operating at optical frequencies

G02B

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Networks comprising lumped impedance elements

H03H

Coaxial cables

H01B 11/18

Line connectors

H01R

Cable fittings

H02G 15/00

Quasi-optical devices

H01Q 15/00

Aerials

H01Q

Transit-time tubes

H01J 23/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Auxiliary devices

Devices which perform an operation other than the mere simple transmission of energy.

Waveguide type

As applied to transmission lines, this term includes only high-frequency coaxial cables or Lecher lines, and as applied to resonators, delay lines, or other devices, this term includes all devices having distributed inductance and capacitance.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following abbreviations are often used:

Non-reciprocal devices

Components such as circulators or isolators, using the propagation properties of ferrites.

H01P 1/16 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Linking dissimilar lines or devices

H01P 5/08

H01P 1/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Coupling devices with variable coupling factor

H01P 5/04

H01P 1/20 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Resonators

H01P 7/00

H01P 1/28 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Coupling devices with variable coupling factor

H01P 5/04

H01P 5/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

For introducing or removing wave energy to or from the discharge in transit-time tubes

H01J 23/36

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Non-reciprocal devices

H01P 1/32

H01P 5/08 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Linking lines of the same kind but with different dimensions

H01P 5/02

H01P 7/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Microwave heating devices

H05B 6/64

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Structurally associated with transit-time tubes and interacting with the discharge therein

H01J 23/18

H01P 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Structurally associated with transit-time tubes and interacting with the discharge therein

H01J 23/24

H01P 11/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Manufacture of coaxial cables

H01B 13/00

H01R 12/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Printed connections to, or between, printed circuits

H05K 1/11

Special rules of classification

In this group, a single connector is classified according to its features. When connections are characterised by the coupling of 2 connectors, then classification is given for each of both connectors.When the counterpart of connection is identified, classification is given in H01R 12/70 and subsequent groups. On the other hand, if the subject of connection is not identified but only the mounting of the connector to a printed circuit board is suggested, classification is given in H01R 12/55-H01R 12/58, H01R 12/65-H01R 12/69 and H01R 12/70.

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Connector

Structure containing terminals for a removable connection. Simple "terminal" without a housing is not included.

Direct connection

Irremovable connection of terminals using solder, adhesive, welding, insulation displacement edge, a rivet, a screw, etc.

Flexible printed circuit board

A flexible substrate comprising conductive paths, flat flexible structures with electrically conductive properties like flat or ribbon cables.

Printed circuit board

Either a rigid printed circuit board or a flexible printed circuit board.

Printed wiring board

synonym for printed circuit board

Rigid printed circuit board

A substrate comprising conductive paths and terminals for connection to other devices, the substrate being rigid with limited bending capability.

Terminal

Means for electric connection.

H01R 12/50 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fixed connection between a plurality of printed circuit boards.

H01R 12/51 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fixed connection wherein at least one of the elements to be connected is a rigid printed circuit board (PCB) or like structure.

Fixed connection between a connecting element (e.g. connectors) and a rigid PCB, obtained through structures other than the terminals (e.g. a housing).

Special rules of classification

Fixed connections characterised by terminals are classified in H01R 12/55- H01R 12/58.

H01R 12/52 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fixed connection wherein both the members to be connected together are rigid printed circuit boards.

H01R0012520000

H01R 12/53 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fixed connection for cables mounted on a rigid printed circuit board, the cables having a circular cross section or similar type. Connections with flat or ribbon cables are classified in H01R 12/62.

H01R0012530000

H01R 12/55 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fixed connection for terminals on a rigid printed circuit board characterised by the shape of the terminals or the mounting means of terminals, e.g. edge contact, including the mounting of connectors to the printed circuit board.

H01R0012550000

H01R 12/57 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fixed connection for terminals (including terminals of the connector) mounted directly on the rigid printed circuit board by using soldering, etc.

H01R0012570000

H01R 12/58 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fixed connection for terminals (including terminals of the connector) inserted into holes provided on a rigid printed circuit board.

H01R0012580000

H01R 12/59 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fixed connection wherein at least one of the elements to be connected is a flexible printed circuit board, flat or ribbon cable or like structure.

Fixed connection between a connecting element (e.g. connectors) and a flexible printed circuit board, obtained through structures other than the terminals (e.g. a housing).

Special rules of classification

Fixed connections for flexible printed circuit board characterised by terminals are classified in H01R 12/65- H01R 12/69.

H01R 12/61 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fixed connection directly connecting flexible printed circuit boards, flat or ribbon cables or like structures.

H01R0012610000

H01R 12/62 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fixed connection directly connecting a flexible printed circuit board to a rigid printed circuit board or like structure.

H01R0012620000

H01R 12/63 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fixed connection directly connecting a flexible printed circuit board to other types of cables such as wires.

H01R0012630000

H01R 12/65 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fixed connection characterised by the terminals being directly mounted on a flexible printed circuit board, e.g. edge contact.

H01R0012650000

H01R 12/67 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fixed connection by terminals penetrating the flexible printed circuit board e.g. insulation displacement terminal.

H01R0012670000

H01R0012670000

H01R 12/68 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fixed connection by terminals that are secured to the flexible printed circuit board followed by the step of bending the terminals.

H01R0012680000

H01R 12/69 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Fixed connection by partially deformed terminals connected to conductors of a flexible printed circuit board, e.g. crimping terminals. Excluded are those penetrating the flexible printed circuit board, which are classified in H01R 12/67-H01R 12/68.

H01R0012690000

H01R 12/70 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Connection of printed circuit boards by connectors in a demountable manner.

Special rules of classification

When the identification of the member to be connected by the connectors is not clear in the patent specification or drawings, classification is also given in this group.

In the following groups, classification is given depending on the characteristics of both the member to be connected and the mounting of the connectors involved in the demountable connection to the printed circuit board.

H01R 12/71 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Coupling devices wherein one of the members to be connected is a rigid printed circuit board or like structure, and that are not covered by H01R 12/72-H01R 12/75.

H01R 12/72 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Coupling devices wherein the connector is coupled to the edge or nearby the edge of a rigid printed circuit board or like structure.

Special rules of classification

Coupling devices wherein the mounting of the connector is also a rigid printed circuit board are classified in H01R 12/73.

H01R0012720000

H01R 12/73 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Coupling devices wherein the connector is coupled to the edge or nearby the edge of a rigid printed circuit board or like structure and the mounting of the connector is also a rigid printed circuit board or like structure.

H01R0012730000

H01R 12/75 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Coupling devices wherein one of the members to be connected is a cable other than flat or ribbon cable, and the mounting of the connector is a rigid printed circuit board.

H01R0012750000

H01R 12/77 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Coupling devices wherein one of the members to be connected is a flexible printed circuit board, flat or ribbon cable or like structure.

H01R 12/78 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Coupling devices wherein one of the members to be connected is a flexible printed circuit board or like structure and the mounting of the connector is also a flexible printed circuit board or like structure.

H01R0012780000

H01R 12/79 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Coupling devices wherein one of the members to be connected is a flexible printed circuit board and the mounting of the connector is a rigid printed circuit board or like structure.

H01R0012790000

H01R 12/81 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Coupling devices wherein one of the members to be connected is a cable of other types such as wires and the mounting of the connector is a flexible printed circuit board.

H01R0012810000

H01R 12/82 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

A connector performing the connection by zero insertion force or low insertion force.

H01R0012820000

H01R 12/83 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Coupling device activated by pivoting after the insertion of a connecting terminal by which the connection is made.

H01R0012830000

H01R 12/85 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Coupling device activated by applying certain forces on the contact by some means, e.g. using actuators or screws, that is not covered by H01R 12/87- H01R 12/89.

H01R0012850000

H01R 12/87 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Coupling device that can perform the connection with zero or low insertion force by only inserting a connecting terminal making the connection without any other operation.

H01R0012870000

H01R 12/88 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Coupling device that can perform the connection with zero or low insertion force by activating a pivoting member installed within the housing. If the connection is established automatically by only inserting a connecting terminal, the coupling device is classified in H01R 12/87.

H01R0012880000

H01R 12/89 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Coupling device that can perform the connection with zero or low insertion force by activating a linear motion member installed within the housing.  If the connection is established automatically by only inserting a connecting terminal, the coupling device is classified in H01R 12/87.

H01R0012890000

H01R 12/91 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Coupling device of which the connection is performed through automatic adjustment of the position between the connectors to be connected.

H01R0012910000

H01R0012910000

H01R 13/646 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/00 comprising details of coupling devices particularly adapted to handle high-frequency currents or voltages.

Note: Exclude shielding and coaxial type shielded connectors.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Non-coaxed protective earth or shield arrangements

H01R 13/648-H01R 13/6599

Coaxed connectors specifically adapted for high frequency

H01R 24/40-H01R 24/56

H01R 13/6461 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/646 comprising devices or arrangements for preventing interference in one conductor of a coupling device caused by stray electromagnetic or electrostatic energy from another conductor.

H01R 13/6463 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6461 comprising arrangements in which cross-talk between two pairs of conductors is reduced by the addition of at least one pair of twisted wires, each wire of which is connected to one conductor of each of the pairs of conductors.

H01R 13/6464 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6461 comprising arrangements in which cross-talk between two pairs of conductors is reduced by the addition of a capacitive coupling element between at least one conductor of each pair.

(Examples: US 5439384; US 5152699; 5213522; US 5647768)

H01R 13/6466 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under H01R 13/6464 in which the capacitive coupling element is formed on a substrate or a circuit board.

H01R 13/6467 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6461 in which cross-talk between pairs of conductors is reduced by crossing one conductor of each pair over the other conductor.

H01R 13/6469 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6467 in which at least part of a conductor is mounted on a planar support.

H01R 13/6471 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6461 comprising structural relationships of signal-carrying and ground conductors in a coupling device specifically for reducing cross-talk.

H01R 13/6473 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/646 comprising coupling devices whose impedance is tuned to the impedance of the circuit to which they are connected.

H01R 13/6474 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6473 wherein the impedance of the coupling is tuned by varying the properties of a conductive element within the device, e.g. by varying the shape or material of the conductive element.

H01R 13/6476 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6474 wherein the shape of the conductive element includes a hole.

H01R 13/6477 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6473 wherein the impedance of the coupling is tuned by varying the properties of a dielectric component within the device, e.g. by varying the shape or material of the dielectric component.

H01R 13/648 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Coaxially arranged shields

H01R 24/38

H01R 13/658 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/648 comprising a conductive means for preventing or reducing (a) detrimental effects induced within a connector or contact due to capacitive or inductive coupling with electric or magnetic fields generated from a source outside of the connector or contact, (b) induced electrical interference or signal loss due to capacitive or inductive coupling between mutually insulated contacts within a plural-contact connector, (i.e. reducing cross-talk), or (c) undesirable loss of electrical information or signal due to electrical radiation of signal from connector or contact.

H01R 13/6581 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/658 comprising details of the shape or construction of a shield.

H01R 13/6582 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6581 comprising shielding arrangements including a resilient means on one connector for engaging a mating connector.

H01R 13/6583 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6582 including additional resilient means for electrically connecting the shields of two mating connectors.

H01R 13/6584 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6583 wherein the separate resilient means comprises a conductive material having elastic properties.

H01R 13/6585 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6581 comprising conductive material either (a) formed around but spaced apart from at least a portion of at least one contact, so that the contact is inductively shielded from one or more other contacts, or (b) interposed between two or more contacts, so that the contacts are inductively shielded from one another.

H01R 13/6586 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6585 wherein the shielding material separates two or more assemblies of plural contacts.

H01R 13/6587 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6586 wherein the shield has means to facilitate mounting on a printed circuit board.

H01R 13/6588 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6585 wherein the shield has apertures corresponding to individual contacts.

H01R 13/6589 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6585 wherein the shield includes a conductive wall portion that separates enclosed wires.

(Examples: US 4405187; US 6135817)

H01R 13/659 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6581 wherein the shield encloses two or more connectors.

H01R 13/6591 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/658 including specific features of a connection between the conductive shield and a conductive member of the connector or another component.

H01R 13/6592 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6591 wherein the connection is to an external conductive sheath of an electric cable.

H01R 13/6593 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6592 wherein the shield is comprised of assembled parts.

H01R 13/6594 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6591 wherein the shield is mounted on a printed circuit board and is electrically connected to a conductor on the circuit board.

H01R 13/6595 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6594 wherein the shield is attached to the printed circuit board by a separate element or member.

H01R 13/6596 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6591 including specific features of a connection between the conductive shield and an electrically grounded metal panel.

H01R 13/6597 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6591 including specific features of a connection between the conductive shield and a contact of the connector.

H01R 13/6598 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/658 comprising the composition or properties of the shielding material.

H01R 13/6599 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/6598 comprising a dielectric material having conductive additives or coatings.

H01R 13/66 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/00 comprising details of the structural relationship of a coupling device other than a non-coaxial connector and an electrical component housed within the device.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Coupling devices having concentrically or coaxially-arranged contacts

H01R 24/38-H01R 24/56

H01R 13/68 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/66 wherein the built-in electrical component is a fusible circuit breaker.

H01R 13/684 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/68 wherein the built-in fuse is removable from the coupling device.

H01R 13/688 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/684 wherein the coupling device includes an opening or a removable or repositionable portion which permits access to the built-in removable fuse.

H01R 13/692 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/688 wherein the housing part is rotatable, e.g. threadably connected or hinged, to permit access to the built-in removable fuse.

H01R 13/696 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/68 wherein the built-in fuse is irremovably attached to a contact of the coupling device.

H01R 13/717 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/66 wherein in the built-in electrical component is an electric light source.

H01R 13/719 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/66 comprising coupling devices having built-in electrical components or other features which adapt for use with high frequency alternating currents or voltages.

Synonyms and Keywords

Hereafter, in this group, the term " filter" is used in the sense of a "noise-reducing member".

H01R 13/7193 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/719 wherein the built-in electrical component is a ferrite filter.

H01R 13/7195 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/719 wherein the built-in electrical component consists of a flat, i.e. essentially two-dimensional, filter circuit device, e.g. a PCB with a filter fixed thereon, with apertures to permit engagement of mating contacts.

H01R 13/7197 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subject matter under group H01R 13/719 wherein the built-in electrical component consists of a filter integral with, or fitted onto, at least one connector contact.

H01R 24/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Coupling devices attached to cables or attached to structures

Relationship between large subject matter areas

It is the overall structure of the coupling devices which is classified here, the details are classified in H01R 13/00.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Contact members

H01R 13/02

Securing contact members in or to a base or case; Insulating of contact members

H01R 13/40

Bases; Cases

H01R 13/46

Means for supporting coupling part when not engaged

H01R 13/60

Means for facilitating engagement or disengagement of coupling parts or for holding them in engagement

H01R 13/62

Means for preventing, inhibiting or avoiding incorrect coupling

H01R 13/64

Special adaptation for high-frequency, e.g. structures providing an impedance match or phase match

H01R 13/646

Protective earth or shield arrangements on coupling devices

H01R 13/648

Structural association with built-in electrical component

H01R 13/66

Coupling devices in which a holder is adapted for supporting apparatus to which its counterpart is attached; Separate parts thereof

H01R 33/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

One pole

H01R 101/00

Two poles

H01R 103/00

Three poles

H01R 105/00

Four or more poles

H01R 107/00

Special rules of classification

An indexing code of the groups H01R 101/00-H01R 107/00 should be given to each document.

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Pin

male contact

Socket

female contact

Synonyms and Keywords

USB

Universal serial bus

H01R 24/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/20 comprises cooperating parts having cavities with conducting properties extending into a support structure. At least one of the cavities is connected to an elongated electrical conductor attached to the support structure.

H01R

H01R 24/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/22 comprises cooperating parts having cavities with conducting properties extending into a support structure. At least one of the cavities is connected to an elongated electrical conductor attached to the support structure, whereby the support structure comprises a grounding structure.

H01R

H01R 24/28 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/28 comprises cooperating parts having protruding members with conducting properties extending from a support.

At least one of the protruding members is connected to an elongated electrical conductor.

H01R

H01R 24/30 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/30 comprises cooperating parts having protruding members with conducting properties extending from a support structure and connected to an elongated electrical conductor, whereby one conductor is grounded.

H01R

H01R 24/38 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/38 comprises cooperating parts having a center contact and cylindrical contacts concentrically disposed thereabout.

H01R

H01R 24/40 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/40 comprises cooperating parts having a center contact and cylindrical contacts concentrically disposed thereabout and adapted for signals used for radio transmission.

H01R

H01R 24/42 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/42 comprises cooperating parts for radio transmission having a center contact and cylindrical contacts concentrically disposed thereabout and at least one component, except components covered by H01R 24/46 or H01R 24/48.

H01R

H01R 24/44 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/44 comprises cooperating parts for radio transmission having a center contact and cylindrical contacts concentrically disposed thereabout and means for setting the output impedance of a signal source equal to the input impedance of the load to which it is ultimately connected, usually in order to maximize the power transfer and minimize reflections from the load.

H01R

H01R 24/46 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/46 comprises cooperating parts for radio transmission having a center contact and a cylindrical contact concentrically disposed thereabout and means for interrupting, shorting or bypassing signals carried by the center contact.

H01R

H01R 24/48 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/48 comprises cooperating parts for radio transmission having a center contact and a cylindrical contact concentrically disposed thereabout and means for reducing voltages above its upper design limit (e.g. transient voltages or voltage spikes).

H01R

H01R 24/50 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/50 comprises cooperating parts for radio transmission having a center contact and a cylindrical contact concentrically disposed thereabout, and adapted for mounting on a substrate providing electrically conductive paths.

H01R

H01R 24/52 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/52 comprises cooperating parts for radio transmission having a center contact and a cylindrical contact concentrically disposed thereabout and adapted for mounting on a support except a printed circuit board as in H01R 24/50.

H01R

H01R 24/54 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/54 comprises cooperating parts for radio transmission having a center contact and a cylindrical contact concentrically disposed thereabout and specially adapted as coupling part between two or more counterparts, characterized by the relationship of the counterparts, e.g. different kinds of counterparts, right angle relationship between counterparts, one counterpart connected to a plurality of counterparts.

H01R

H01R 24/56 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/56 comprises a plurality of cooperating parts for radio transmission having a center contact and a cylindrical contact concentrically disposed thereabout, being adapted to connect elongated conductors having a center conductor and a shielding layer with special features.

H01R

H01R 24/58 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/58 comprises coupling parts with contacts disposed serially along a line parallel to the longitudinal axis along which the coupling part engages its mating coupling part.

H01R

H01R 24/60 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/60 comprises coupling parts with contacts disposed serially along a line orthogonal to the longitudinal axis along which the coupling part engages its mating coupling part.

H01R

H01R 24/62 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/62 comprises coupling parts with contacts disposed serially along a surface orthogonal to the longitudinal axis along which the coupling part engages, its mating coupling part being accessible only on one side.

H01R
H01R

H01R 24/64 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/64 comprises coupling parts with contacts disposed serially along a surface orthogonal to the longitudinal axis along which the coupling part engages its mating coupling part, the coupling part has special features for high speed transmissions.

H01R

H01R 24/66 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/66 comprises cooperating parts having protruding members with conducting properties extending from a support attached to a wall of an apparatus or structure.

H01R

H01R 24/68 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/68 comprises cooperating parts having protruding members with conducting properties extending from a portable device.

H01R

H01R 24/70 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/70 comprises cooperating parts having protruding members with conducting properties extending from a support, one of the protrusions on the portable device having grounding means.

H01R
H01R

H01R 24/76 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/76 comprises cooperating parts having recesses with conducting properties extending into a support attached to a wall of an apparatus or structure.

H01R

H01R 24/78 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/78 comprises cooperating parts having recesses with conducting properties extending into a support attached to a wall of an apparatus or structure, one of the recesses having grounding means.

H01R

H01R 24/84 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/84 comprises cooperating parts which are identical in configuration in the interfitting portions thereof.

H01R

H01R 24/86 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The subject matter under H01R 24/86 comprises cooperating parts with electrically mating conductors extending in the same direction about the longitudinal axis along which the cooperating part engages its mating coupling part.

H01R

H01S - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Devices using stimulated emission, for the generation or amplification of coherent electromagnetic waves or other forms of wave energy, e.g. masers, lasers, X-ray lasers, gamma lasers, optical amplifiers.

Constructional details or arrangements, e.g. housings, packages, cooling, electrodes.

Configuration of the resonators, or shape of the active media.

Processes or apparatus for pumping (exciting) said devices.

Such functions as modulating, demodulating, frequency-changing, controlling, or stabilising of said coherent electromagnetic waves, insofar these functions are performed by elements being part of the optical resonators or amplifier's arrangements; this includes particularly:

The special choice or adaptation of materials as active media.

Devices using non-linear amplification effects, e.g. stimulated Raman or Brillouin scattering

Relationship between large subject matter areas

This subclass covers functions as modulating, demodulating, frequency-changing, controlling, or stabilising of coherent electromagnetic waves, insofar these functions are performed by elements being part of the optical resonators or amplifier's arrangements, e.g. inside-cavity harmonic generation. Said functions when performed outside the resonators or amplifier's arrangement, e.g. harmonic generation, are covered by subclass G02F.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Super-luminescent diodes

H01L 33/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Eye surgery using laser

A61F 9/008

Radiation therapy using laser light

A61N 5/067

Sintering by using laser light

B22F 3/105

Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting, boring

B23K 26/00

Joining of preformed parts by using laser light

B29C 65/16

Laser printers

B41J 2/44, B41J 2/455

Ring laser gyrometers; fibre laser gyrometers

G01C 19/66, G01C 19/72

Investigating or analysing colour or spectral properties of materials by using tunable lasers

G01N 21/39

Apparatus specially adapted for photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces

G03F 7/20

Laser heads for recording or reproducing

G11B 7/125

Laser recording associated with non-optical reproducing, or laser reproducing associated with non-optical recording

G11B 11/00

Trimming by laser in the manufacture of resistors

H01C 17/242

Photolithographic processing on semiconductor bodies

H01L 21/027

Transmission systems employing light, e.g. all-optical repeaters

H04B 10/00, H04B 10/291-H04B 10/299

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Coupling light guides with opto-electronic elements

G02B 6/42

Laser speckle optics

G02B 27/48

Control of light beams in general

G02F

Non-linear optics per se

G02F 1/35

Semiconductor devices specially adapted for light emission

H01L 33/00

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Active medium

A medium providing for optical gain by the stimulated emission effect when excited by an excitation (pump) energy source.

Pumping

The process of providing the active medium for excitation energy.

Synonyms and Keywords

LASER

Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation

MASER

Microwave Amplification By Stimulated Emission Of Radiation – also known as Microwave Laser

EDFA

Erbium Doped Fibre Amplifier

SOA

Semiconductor Optical Amplifier

DBR Laser

Distributed Bragg Reflector Laser

DFB Laser

Distributed Feed-Back Laser

In patent documents the following expressions/words:

"active medium", " gain medium" and "lasing medium"

"excitation, and "pump(ing)"

are often used as synonyms.

H02H 3/42 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Product

Mathematical operation

H02K - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Electric generators or motors, i.e. ac or dc continuously rotating, oscillating or linear machines.

Stepping motors, i.e. with rotor rotating step by step.

Torque motors, i.e. machines adapted to exert a torque when stalled.

Machines for transmitting angular displacements, e.g. Synchro, Selsyn.

Machines involving dynamo-electric interaction with a plasma or a flow of conductive liquid or of fluid-borne conductive or magnetic particles, e.g. magnetohydrodynamic (MHD) pumps or generators.

Dynamo-electric converters, e.g. ac/dc converters and vice versa, ac/ac converters, dc/dc converters.

Dynamo-electric clutches or brakes.

Dynamo-electric gears, i.e. dynamo-electric means for transmitting mechanical power from a driving shaft to a driven shaft and comprising structurally interrelated motor and generator parts.

Alleged perpetua mobilia obtained by dynamo-electric means.

Machines not otherwise provided for and based on dynamo-electric interaction.

Structural adaptation of the above mentioned machines for the purposes of their control.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

The subject matter of starting, regulating, electronically commutating, braking, or otherwise controlling the machines covered by this subclass is classified in subclass H02P.

Measuring the electric or magnetic variables involved in the functioning of the machines covered by this subclass is classified in subclass G01R.

Electrical machines specifically developed for generating or transmitting mechanical vibrations are classified in subclass B06B.

Electric machines not belonging to any of the types covered by this subclass are classified in subclass H02N.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Dynamo-electric relays

H01H 53/00

Conversion of dc or ac input power into surge output power

H02M 9/00

Current collectors in general

H01R 39/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Micro-structural devices or systems

B81B

Magnetic circuits or magnets in general

H01F

Special rules of classification

H02K 16/00 takes precedence over groups H02K 17/00-H02K 53/00.

Details only described with reference to, or clearly only applicable to, dynamo-electric machines of a single basic type, are classified in the group appropriate to the dynamo-electric machines of that basic type, e.g. H02K 33/16, H02K 41/03.

Details or arrangements of an unspecified type of dynamo-electric machine, or disclosed as applicable to two or more kinds of dynamo-electric machines, are classified in groups H02K 1/00-H02K 13/00.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Dynamo-electric

refers to the conversion of mechanical energy to electrical energy or vice versa by electromagnetic means.

H02K 1/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Details of the magnetic circuit.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Magnetic circuits for transformers for power supply

H01F

Magnetic circuits for relays

H01H 50/16

H02K 3/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Details of windings.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Coils in general

H01F 5/00

H02K 5/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Casings;

Enclosures;

Supports.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Casings for electric apparatus in general

H05K 5/00

H02K 9/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Systems for cooling or ventilating.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Channels or ducts in parts of the magnetic circuit

H02K 1/20, H02K 1/32

Channels or ducts in or between conductors

H02K 3/22, H02K 3/24

H02K 13/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Supporting or protecting brushes or brush holders in motor casings or enclosures

H02K 5/14

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Current collectors in general

H01R 39/00

H02K 15/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Methods or apparatus specially adapted for manufacturing, assembling, maintaining or repairing dynamo-electric machines.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Manufacture of current collectors in general

H01R 43/00

Insulating windings

H02K 15/10, H02K 15/12

Coil manufacture in general

H01F 41/02

Balancing in general

G01M

H02K 41/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Propulsion systems in which a rigid body is moved along a path due to dynamo-electric interaction between the body and a magnetic field traveling along the path.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Electromagnetic launchers

F41B 6/00

H02K 49/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Dynamo-electric clutches;

Dynamo-electric brakes.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electrically or magnetically actuated clutches or brakes

F16D 27/00, F16D 29/00, F16D 65/28

Magnetic-particle clutches

F16D 37/02

Dynamo-electric brakes adapted for use as dynamometers

G01L

H02M - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Only circuits or apparatus for the conversion of ac or dc input power into ac or dc output power, or the conversion of ac or dc input power into surge output power, or arrangements for control or regulation of such circuits or apparatus.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

The individual electro-technical devices employed when converting electric power are covered by the relevant subclasses, e.g. inductors, transformers H01F, capacitors, electrolytic rectifiers H01G, mercury-vapour rectifying or other discharge tubes H01J, semiconductor devices H01L, impedance networks or resonant circuits not primarily concerned with the transfer of electric power H03H.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Such circuits and apparatus and such control or regulation for digital computers

G06F 1/00

Dynamo-electric converters

H02K 47/00

Controlling transformers, reactors or choke coils, control or regulation of electric motors, generators or dynamo-electric converters

H02P

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Conversion of current or voltage specially adapted for use in electronic time-pieces with no moving parts

G04G 19/02

Systems for regulating electric or magnetic variables in general, e.g. using transformers, reactors or choke coils, combination of such systems with static converters

G05F

Connection or control of one converter with regard to conjoint operation with a similar or other source of supply

H02J

Pulse generators

H03K

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Conversion

In respect of an electric variable, e.g. voltage or current, conversion means the change of one or more of the parameters of the variable, e.g. amplitude, frequency, phase, polarity.

H02M 1/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Details of electric power conversionapparatus for converting dc input power or ac input power into dc output power or ac output power having different electric variables (e.g. voltage or current).

H02M 3/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Electric power conversionapparatus for converting dc input power into dc output power having different electric variables (e.g. voltage or current).

H02M 5/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Electric power conversionapparatus for converting ac input power into ac output power having different electric variables (e.g. voltage or current).

H02M 7/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Electric power conversionapparatus for converting ac input power into dc output power having different electric variables (e.g. voltage or current), or apparatus for converting dc input power into ac output power having different electric variables (e.g. voltage or current).

H02M 9/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Electric power conversionapparatus for converting dc input power or ac input power into output power with sharp changes in electric variables (e.g. voltage or current).

H02P - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Arrangements for

or otherwise controlling:

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Arrangements for starting, regulating, electronically commutating, braking, or otherwise controlling electric machines not otherwise provided for

H02N

Arrangements for controlling electric generators for charging batteries

H02J 7/00

Arrangements for merely turning on an electric motor to drive a machine or device, e.g.: vacuum cleaner, vehicle starter motor

A47L 9/28, F02N 11/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric equipment or propulsion of electrically-propelled vehicles; magnetic suspension or levitation for vehicles; electrodynamic brake systems for vehicles in general

B60L

Structure of the starter switch

H01H

Structure of the mechanical brake

F16D

Structure of the mechanical speed regulator

G05D

Structure of the variable resistor

H01C

Control of linear speed, control of angular speed; control of acceleration or deceleration

G05D 13/00

Systems for regulating electric or magnetic variables using transformers, reactors or choke coils

G05F

Magnets, inductances or transformers structurally associated with motors, generators, dynamo-electric converters, transformers, reactors or choke coils

H01F

Dynamo-electric machines structurally associated with motors, generators, dynamo-electric converters, transformers, reactors or choke coils

H02K

Circuit arrangement or systems for supplying or distributing electric power; systems for storing electric energy, connection or control of one generator, transformer, reactor, choke coil, or dynamo-electric converter with regard to conjoint operation with similar or other source of supply

H02J

Apparatus for conversion between AC and AC, AC and DC or DC and DC and for use with mains or similar power supply systems; conversion of DC or AC input power into surge output power; control or regulation thereof

H02M

Automatic control, starting, synchronisation, or stabilisation of generators of electronic oscillations or pulses

H03L

H02P 29/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Emergency protective circuit arrangements for electric machines involving automatic switching

H02H 7/00

Emergency protective circuit arrangements for electric machines for limiting excess current or voltage without disconnection

H02H 9/00

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Control

Control means influencing a variable in any way, e.g. changing its direction or its value (including changing it to or from zero), maintaining it constant, limiting its range of variation.

Regulation

Regulation means maintaining a variable at a desired value, or within a desired range of values, by comparison of the actual value with the desired value.

H02P 29/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Emergency protective circuit arrangements with automatic interruption of supply, in general

H02H 7/08

Emergency protective circuit arrangements for limiting excess current or voltage without disconnection, in general

H02H 9/00

H03D 3/06 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Product

Mathematical operation

H03K - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

methods, circuits, devices, or apparatus using active elements operating in a discontinuous or switching manner for generating, shaping and manipulating pulse signals

generating stepped pulses or pulses having an essentially finite slope

producing pulses by distorting or combining sinusoidal waveforms

shaping, amplifying and otherwise manipulating pulse signals

modulating pulses with a continuously variable modulating signal, and demodulating pulses which have been so modulated

transforming types of pulse modulation

electronic switching not involving contact-making and breaking

logic circuits handling electric pulses

counting pulses, pulse counters and frequency dividers, pulse counters with step-by-step integration and static storage, pulse counters in which pulses are continuously circulated, pulse counters comprising multi-stable elements

Relationship between large subject matter areas

The modulation and demodulation of pulse trains, for example in Pulse Width Modulation circuits, is covered in subclass H03K.

The modulation and demodulation of sinusoidal signals, for example in AM and FM broadcasting, is covered in subclasses H03C and H03D.

The modulation by digital signals of the frequency, phase or amplitude of a sinusoidal carrier, or carriers, is covered in subclass H04L. Quadrature (I-Q) modulation systems used for the transmission of digital information, e.g. QAM, the effect of which is to modulate a carrier in both amplitude and phase (often in discrete steps, which may be illustrated as a ‘constellation’ of points, each point representing a pair of carrier amplitude and phase values), are covered in subclass H04L.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Measuring pulse characteristics

G01R

Electric discharge tubes or discharge lamps; gas filled tubes; vacuum tubes

H01J

Semiconductor devices; electric solid state devices not otherwise provided for

H01L

Modulating sinusoidal oscillations with pulses

H03C

Demodulation or transference of signals modulated on a sinusoidal carrier

H03D

Discriminator circuits detecting phase difference between two signals by counting or integrating cycles of oscillation

H03D 3/02

Automatic control, starting, synchronizing or stabilization of generators of electronic oscillations or pulses where the type of generator is irrelevant or unspecified

H03L

Coding, decoding or code conversion, in general

H03M

Transmission of digital information; modulated carrier systems

H04L, H04L 27/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Counting mechanisms

G06M

Information storage based on relative movement between record carrier and transducer; using static stores

G11B, G11C

Sample and hold arrangements in electric analogue stores

G11C 27/02

Switches actuated by change of magnetic field or of electric field, e.g. by relative position of magnet and switch; time or time programming switches

H01H 36/00, H01H 43/00

Apparatus for conversion of electric power

H02M

Generation of oscillations by circuits employing active elements which operate in a non-switching manner

H03B

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, where the claims of a patent document are not limited to a specific circuit element, the document is classified at least according to the elements described in the described embodiment.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

‘continuously-variable’ modulating signal

Analogue signals or signals that comprise a number of discrete levels, such as signals produced by counting circuits.

H03K 4/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Generation of supply voltages in combination with electron beam deflection in television scanning systems

H04N 3/18

H03K 4/90 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Synchronising arrangements in time division multiplex systems using pulse stuffing for systems with different or fluctuating information rates

H04J 3/07

Arrangements for synchronizing receiver with transmitter

H04L 7/00

Circuits for synchronizing transmitter and receiver in the transmission or reproduction of documents

H04N 1/36

Synchronisation in television systems

H04N 5/00

Colour synchronisation in television systems

H04N 9/44

Synchronisation arrangements in wireless communication networks

H04W 56/00

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expression/word "colour synchronisation" is often used with the meaning "sub-carrier lock"

H03K 5/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Amplifiers in general

H03F

High frequency amplifiers

H03F 3/189

H03K 5/125 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements for measuring currents or voltages or for indicating presence or sign thereof

G01R 19/00

Arrangements for measuring frequencies; arrangements for analyzing frequency spectra

G01R 23/00

Arrangements for measuring phase angle between a voltage and a current or between voltages or currents

G01R 25/00

H03K 5/13 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring time intervals using electronic timing, e.g. counting means

G04F 1/00

H03K 17/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

In electric printing, selection of a stylus or auxiliary electrode to be supplied with current for transfer to a printing or impression transfer material

B41J 2/405

Sample and hold arrangements in electric analogue stores

G11C 27/02

Switching or interrupting devices in waveguides

H01P

H03K 17/94 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Structural details of switches, relays or selectors and emergency protective devices, their contacts and mechanical operating arrangements; operation by mechanical forces or by a change of physical condition; time programming switches and switches providing a selected number of operations of the contacts

H01H

Keyboards for special applications: see the relevant places

B41J, G06F 3/023, H04L 15/00, H04L 17/00, H04M 1/00

H03M 13/29 - Definition fr

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Product

Mathematical operation

H04B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

The transmission of information carrying signals, the transmission being independent of the nature of the information. Monitoring and testing arrangements and the suppression and limitation of noise and interference.

The user is referred to the IPC definitions of individual main groups of subclass H04B:

Transmission systems characterised by the waveband used for transmission:

Radio waves - see definition for main group H04B 7/00.

Light, infrared waves or corpuscular radiation - see definition for main group H04B 10/00.

Ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves - see definition for main group H04B 11/00.

Transmission systems characterised by the medium used for transmission:

Conductors - see definition for main group H04B 3/00.

Free-space propagation - see definition for main groups H04B 5/00, H04B 7/00, H04B 10/00, H04B 11/00.

Earth or water - see definition for main group H04B 13/00.

Transmission systems characterised by the carrier modulation used for transmission:

Pulse modulation - see definition for main group H04B 14/00.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

If the transmission systems are specially adapted for particular applications classification is also made in subclasses listed in section "Informative references".

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transmission systems for measured values, control or similar signals

G08C

Speech analysis or synthesis

G10L

Coding, decoding or code conversion

H03M

Broadcast communication

H04H

Multiplex communication

H04J

Secret communication

H04K

Transmission of digital information

H04L

Telephonic communication

H04M

Pictorial communication

H04N

Paging systems using radio links (Selecting)

H04Q

Special rules of classification

Transmission systems characterised by the medium used for transmission or by band of employing waves should be classified in groups H04B 3/00, H04B 5/00, H04B 7/00, H04B 10/00, H04B 11/00 or in residual group H04B 13/00.

Transmission systems characterised by the use of carrier modulation or sub-carrier should be classified in group H04B 14/00 and details thereof in group H04B 1/00.

H04B 1/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Details of transmission systems that are general for transmission systems covered by two or more groups H04B 3/00-H04B 13/00.

Details of transmission systems not characterized by the medium used for transmission.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Demodulation or transference of modulation from one carrier to another

H03D

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Spatial arrangements of component circuits in radio pills for living beings

A61B 5/07

Waveguides; Resonators, lines or other devices of the waveguide type

H01P

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Homodyne receiver

A receiver which involves multiplying the modulated received signal by a local oscillator which has the same frequency as that associated with the received signal, so that the received signal will be directly converted into the baseband.

Superheterodyne receiver

A receiver in which the frequency of the incoming signal is reduced in a mixer or frequency changer by heterodyning with another frequency at the local oscillator. (Heterodyning: combining two sinusoidal frequencies radio frequency waves in a non-linear device resulting in sum and difference frequencies).

Synchrodyne receiver

A receiver in which a mixing carrier signal is inserted in exact synchronism with the original carrier at the transmitter. Used for the selective detection of signals coded in a certain way.

H04B 1/69 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Spread-spectrum techniques representing methods by which communication energy generated in a particular bandwidth is deliberately spread in the frequency domain, resulting in a signal with a wider bandwidth.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

With regard to code multiplexing, the borderline between H04B 1/69 and H04J 13/00 should be determined based on whether the features relevant for classification are focused on the code multiplexing aspects or the implementation of the spread-spectrum technique (e.g. details of how the signals are physically transmitted, received and processed).

Documents classified in H04B 1/69 containing aspects of code multiplexing of interest for search, may also be classified in group H04J 13/00.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Code multiplexing

H04J 13/00

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

RAKE

A receiver comprising sub-receivers called fingers wherein each finger detects a single multipath component. The contributions of the fingers can be combined at a later stage.

Synonyms and Keywords

UWB

ultra-wideband

H04B 1/692 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Hybrids of spread spectrum techniques, e.g. frequency hopping/direct-sequence systems, time-hopping/direct-sequence systems.

H04B 1/707 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Direct-sequence spread-spectrum techniques which directly modulate the data being transmitted by a spreading code whose frequency (chip rate) is much higher than the modulated bandwidth of the data signal (symbol rate).

Aspects relating to the codes e.g. types of codes, code generation and code allocation are classified in H04J 13.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Carrier synchronization per se

H04L 7/06

H04B 1/713 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Frequency-hopping spread spectrum techniques which involve transmitting radio signals by switching a carrier among many frequency channels, using a hopping sequence known to both transmitter and receiver.

H04B 1/7163 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Impulse radio spread spectrum which involve an ultra-wideband (UWB) communication system that transmits baseband pulses of very short duration (typically of the order of a nanosecond) with bandwidths that span from near dc to several GHz.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Non-pulse systems which meet the requirements of the FCC mask for UWB communication (e.g. UWB OFDM systems)

H04J 11/00, H04L 27/26, H04L 5/00

H04B 3/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Transmission systems characterized by the medium being electrical conductors (e.g. wires, metal cables) or waveguides.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Alarm systems using power transmission lines

G08B 25/06

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Communication cables or conductors

H01B 11/00

Waveguides; Resonators, lines or other devices of the waveguide type

H01P

Circuit arrangements for providing remote indication of network condition

H02J 13/00

H04B 5/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Transmission systems of a limited range wherein the information signal transmission is inductive or capacitive, rather than electromagnetic, e.g. inductive loop type.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Paging systems in general

G08B

H04B 7/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Radio transmission systems wherein the information signal transmission is by electromagnetic waves other than light or infra-red.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Near-field transmission systems, e.g. inductive loop type

H04B 5/00

Transmission systems employing beams of corpuscular radiation, or electromagnetic waves other than radio waves, e.g. light, infra-red

H04B 10/00

Suppression or limitation of noise or interference

H04B 15/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Diversity systems specially adapted for direction finding

G01S 3/72

Systems using reradiation of radio waves, e.g. secondary radar systems; Analogous systems

G01S 13/74

Aerials

H01Q

Selecting arrangements to which subscribers are connected via radio links

H04W

Synonyms and Keywords

CDMA

Code Division Multiple Access

CDMA - TDMA

Hybrid Code- Time Division Multiple Access

FDMA

Frequency Division Multiple Access

FDMA - TDMA

Hybrid Frequency Time Division Multiple Access

SDMA

Space Division Multiple Access

SSMA

Spread-Spectrum Multiple Access

TDMA

Time Division Multiple Access

H04B 10/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Transmission systems employing electromagnetic waves other than radio waves, e.g. light, infra-red or beams of corpuscular radiation.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Optical elements, systems or apparatus

G02B

Devices or arrangements, the optical operation of which is modified by changing the optical properties of the medium of the devices or arrangements for control of the intensity, color, phase, polarization or directing of light, e.g. switching, gating, modulating or demodulating; Frequency changing Non-linear optics; Optical analogue/digital converters

G02F

Arrangements for handling radiation or particles, e.g. focusing, moderating

G21K 1/00

Optical multiplex systems

H04J 14/00

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Corpuscular radiation

The beams of atomic or subatomic discrete particles, e.g. alpha, neutron, fission fragment or fissionable isotope.

H04B 11/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Transmission systems employing ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Speech analysis or synthesis; Speech recognition

G10L

Telephonic communication

H04M

Loudspeakers, microphones or like acoustic electromechanical transducers

H04R

Stereophonic systems

H04S

H04B 13/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Transmission systems characterised by the medium used for transmission, not provided for in groups H04B 3/00-H04B 11/00, e.g. when the medium is the earth, large mass of water thereon, pipe lines, interior ship sections or other massive objects.

H04B 14/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Transmission systems characterised by the use of a carrier modulation.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Details of transmission systems not characterized by the medium used for transmission

H04B 1/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Demodulation or transference of modulation from one carrier to another

H03D

Coding, decoding or code conversion, in general

H03M

H04B 15/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Reduction or elimination of unwanted disturbances of the information transmission.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Suppression or limitation of noise or interference by means associated with receiver

H04B 1/10

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Structural association with measuring or protective devices or electric components with suppressor for radio interference

H02K 11/00

Screening of apparatus or components against electric or magnetic fields

H05K 9/00

H04B 17/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Methods and apparatus for determining the manner in which a transmission system is functioning or the existence, type and location of any trouble.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Monitoring, testing line transmission systems

H04B 3/46

Equipment for monitoring, testing transmission systems employing electromagnetic waves other than radio waves, e.g. light, infra-red

H04B 10/07-H04B 10/079

H04H - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

arrangements for broadcast or for distribution combined with broadcast;

arrangements specially adapted for receiving broadcast information;

arrangements for broadcast applications with a direct linkage to broadcast information or to broadcast space-time; broadcast-related systems.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Multiplex communication

H04J

Pictorial communication aspects in broadcast systems

H04N

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transmission in general

H04B

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, multi-aspect classification is applied, so that subject matter characterised by aspects covered by more than one of its groups in this subclass, which is considered to represent information of interest for search, may also be classified in each of those groups.

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

broadcast

simultaneous distribution of identical signals to plural receiving stations. The term "broadcast" does not include distribution to receiving stations which is controlled by requests or responses from the receiving stations

broadcast information

all kinds of information distributed by broadcast systems, e.g. broadcast programme

broadcast-related information

information required by services provided via broadcast systems, other than broadcast information

broadcast time

a time when particular broadcast information exists and is available

broadcast channel

a channel via which broadcast information is distributed, e.g. carrier waves, time slots, cables or wireless broadcast service areas

broadcast space

either a set of broadcast channels in which particular broadcast information exists and is available or a geographical area determined by the set of broadcast channels

broadcast space-time

space-time determined by broadcast space and broadcast time in which particular broadcast information exists and is available

broadcast system

a system which consists of transmitter, transponder and receiver for broadcast

broadcast-related system

a system which is directly affected by generation, broadcast, reception or use of broadcast information

broadcast service

a service provided by a broadcast system, i.e. distribution service of broadcast information

broadcast-related service

a service directly provided by broadcast-related systems

"A with a direct linkage to B"

"A directly affects B" or "A is directly affected by B"

Synonyms and Keywords

CATV

Community Antenna Television

EPG

Electronic Programme Guide

FPU

Field Pickup Unit

MATV

Master Antenna Television

MP3

MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3

URL

Uniform Resource Locator

H04H 20/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

- arrangements for broadcast distribution;

- combinations of broadcast distribution arrangements, or combinations of broadcast and non-broadcast distribution arrangements.

H04H 20/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements for a relay specially adapted for broadcast distribution or broadcast programme.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Relay systems for radio transmission in general

H04B 7/14

Repeater circuits for line transmission in general

H04B 3/36

H04H 20/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- the system which substitutes or switches distributed information in real-time at the time of broadcast distribution or of distribution combined with broadcast.

H04H 20/12 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Monitoring of a broadcast-related system

H04H 60/29

H04H 20/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- the system which monitors whether a scheduled broadcast programme has been broadcast or not.

H04H 20/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- the arrangements in which the same information is distributed by plural distribution systems.

H04H 20/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- the system which broadcasts the same information by the plural broadcast systems.

H04H 20/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- the system which broadcasts the same information by broadcast system and non-broadcast system, e.g. mobile communication network.

H04H 20/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements for selecting a distribution system from two or more broadcast systems and/or distribution systems combined with broadcast.

H04H 20/28 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- multiplex communication specially adapted for broadcast distribution.

H04H 20/33 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- the system which requires multiple channels to broadcast plural portions of information simultaneously.

H04H 20/42 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- the arrangement for managing resources, e.g. transmission band width, for a broadcast distribution or for a distribution combined with broadcast distribution.

H04H 20/44 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

A transmitting circuit in general

H04B 1/04

A receiving circuit or a component specially adapted for broadcast

H04H 40/27

H04H 20/46 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- a circuit or a component for broadcast distribution specially adapted for broadcast characterised by a use, a transmission system or broadcast information.

Special rules of classification

The technical subject covered by this group could also be classified to one of the groups (H04H 20/53-H04H 20/86) to clarify specialty of a use, a transmission system or broadcast information.

H04H 20/53 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- the broadcast system specially adapted to a special purpose or broadcast system used in a special situation.

H04H 20/55 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements for broadcast adapted for vehicular traffic information.

H04H 20/61 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements for broadcast within specific areas.

H04H 20/65 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- the system wherein a technical aspect of a broadcast transmission system strongly affects to its broadcast service.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

The system wherein a technical aspect of a non-broadcast transmission system, i.e. a transmission system other than for broadcast, strongly affects its broadcast service or broadcast-related service

H04H 60/76

H04H 20/79 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements in which CATV downlink channels are used as a broadcast transmission path.

H04H 20/81 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Telephonic communication in general

H04M

H04H 20/84 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Power line communication in general

H04B 3/54

H04H 20/86 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements for broadcast distribution of explicitly distinguishable and striking information which plays a very important role to specify a technical subject.

H04H 20/88 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements for broadcast characterised by broadcast information which is stereophony.

H04H 20/95 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- the arrangement for broadcast distribution of information which has a special data format (a format which is not used in an ordinary broadcast specification).

H04H 40/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

- only broadcast-specific receivers.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Receivers in general

H04B 1/06

H04H 40/18 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Receiver circuits in general

H04B 1/16

Circuits or components specially adapted for broadcast distribution

H04H 20/44

H04H 40/27 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- the circuit or component for a broadcast receiver specially adapted for broadcast with characteristic use, transmission system or broadcast information.

Special rules of classification

The technical subject covered by this group could also be classified to one of the groups (H04H 20/53-H04H 20/86) to clarify specialty of a use, a transmission system or broadcast information.

H04H 40/36 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- the circuit or component for communication specially adapted for receiving broadcast information of stereophony.

H04H 60/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

- arrangements for broadcast application which directly affects broadcast information or broadcast space-time;

- arrangements for broadcast application which is directly affected by broadcast information or broadcast space-time;

- broadcast-related system, i.e. other system which is directly affected by generation, broadcast, reception or use of broadcast information.

H04H 60/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements for generating broadcast information;

- arrangements for generating broadcast-related information which directly affects broadcast information or broadcast space-time;

- arrangements for generating broadcast-related information which is directly affected by broadcast information or broadcast space-time;

- arrangements for simultaneous generation of broadcast information and broadcast-related information.

H04H 60/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements for producing a reverberation or echo sound

G10K 15/08

H04H 60/09 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements for device control which directly affects broadcast information or broadcast space-time;

- arrangements for device control which is directly affected by broadcast information or broadcast space-time.

H04H 60/27 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Receivers in general with memory

H04B 1/06

H04H 60/29 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Monitoring of the broadcast system itself

H04H 20/12

Monitoring whether a scheduled broadcast programme has been broadcast or not

H04H 20/14

H04H 60/35 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements for identifying or recognising characteristics which directly affects broadcast information or broadcast space-time;

- arrangements for identifying or recognising characteristics which is directly affected by broadcast information or broadcast space-time.

H04H 60/38 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements for identifying in which range in space or time a certain portion of broadcast information exists.

H04H 60/39 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements for identifying both broadcast time and broadcast space.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Systems characterised by using EPGs

H04H 60/72

H04H 60/41 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements for identifying a set of broadcast channels in which particular broadcast information exists and is available;

- arrangements for identifying a geographical area determined by the set of broadcast channels.

H04H 60/42 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements for identification of a geographical area as broadcast space.

H04H 60/43 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements for identification of a channel set as broadcast space.

H04H 60/44 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- arrangements for identifying broadcast stations with the aim of identifying broadcast space.

H04H 60/56 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- technical subjects covered by H04H 60/29 or H04H 60/35 in which a component for monitoring, identification or recognition especially plays an important role.

Special rules of classification

The technical subject covered by this group could also be classified to one of the groups (H04H 60/29 or H04H 60/35) to clarify the object of monitoring, identification or recognition.

H04H 60/58 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Speech recognition in general

G10L 15/00

Determination or detection of speech characteristics in general

G10L 25/00

H04H 60/59 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Recognizing characters or patterns in general

G06K 9/00

H04H 60/61 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- technical subjects which are covered by H04H 60/29 or H04H 60/35, and are more strongly focused on a use of monitoring, identification or recognition outcome than its process, e.g. an integrated system which consists of (1) a broadcast reception subsystem which receives a broadcast music programme, and monitors broadcast time and a broadcast channel to which a user is tuning in, (2) a broadcast related information retrieving subsystem which firstly identifies numbers a user has listened to by looking up a broadcast database with the broadcast time and the broadcast channel, and secondly identifies compact discs which include the numbers by searching a compact disc information database, and (3) a online compact disc sales subsystem for selling the compact discs which include the numbers to the user over the Internet.

Special rules of classification

The technical subject covered by this group could also be classified to one of the groups (H04H 60/29 or H04H 60/35) to clarify the object of monitoring, identification or recognition.

H04H 60/63 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electronic commerce in general

G06Q 30/00

H04H 60/68 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- explicitly distinguishable and striking information which plays a very important role to specify a technical subject.

H04H 60/72 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Systems characterised by EPG mainly focusing on identifying broadcast space-time

H04H 60/39

H04H 60/74 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- special type of meta-information, which is related to broadcast programme, e.g. title, composer or interpreter of broadcast music.

H04H 60/76 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transmission systems for broadcast

H04H 20/65

H04H 60/78 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- technical subjects characterised by an entity of transmission or reception.

H04H 60/81 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

- technical subjects covered by group H04H 60/76 wherein characteristics of transmission system not for broadcast, e.g. structure of transmission path or network composition of non-broadcast distribution system, acutely affect the technical subject.

H04H 60/91 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Mobile communication networks used for the Internet access

H04H 60/85

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Selective distribution of broadcast; Services to user groups; One-way selective calling services using wireless communication network.

H04W 4/06

H04H 60/94 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Telephonic networks used for the Internet access

H04H 60/84

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Telephonic communication in general

H04M

H04H 60/96 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

CATV networks used for the Internet access

H04H 60/86

H04J - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Multiplex Communication having circuits or apparatus for combining or dividing signals for the purpose of transmitting the signals simultaneously or sequentially over the same transmission path, and monitoring arrangements therefor.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Class H04 Electric communication technique covers electrical communication systems with propagation paths employing beams of corpuscular radiation, acoustic waves or electromagnetic waves. Subclass H04J refers to multiplex communication in general. If the multiplex communication is specially adapted for particular applications classification is made in other subclasses of class H04.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Optical monitoring arrangements, independent of the multiplexing method

H04B 10/07-H04B 10/079

Selecting arrangements for multiplex systems

H04Q 11/00
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Use of multiplexing in transmission systems for measured values, control or similar signals

G08C 15/00

Arrangements for transmission of digital information affording multiple use of the transmission path

H04L 5/00

Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal

H04N 7/08

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Optical elements, systems or apparatus

G02B

Addressing or transmission in computers

G06F 12/00, G06F 13/00

Electronic switching or gating

H03K 17/00

Transmission in general

H04B

Relay systems

H04B 7/14

Broadcast communication

H04H

Data switching networks

H04L 12/00

Modulated-carrier systems

H04L 27/00

Telephonic Communication

H04M

Selecting techniques

H04Q

Stereophonic systems

H04S

Wireless communication networks

H04W

H04J 13/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Code division multiplexing techniques which are related to the division of the communications medium according to codes.

Aspects that are covered include types of codes, generation of codes and allocation of codes to channels.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

With regard to spread-spectrum techniques, the borderline between H04J 13/00 and H04B 1/69 should be determined based on whether the features relevant for classification are focused on the code multiplexing aspects or the implementation of the spread-spectrum technique (e.g. details of how the signals are physically transmitted, received and processed).

Documents classified in H04J 13/00 containing aspects of spectral spreading of interest for search, may also be classified in group H04B 1/69.

With regard to systems that use frequency hopping as a means to divide the communication medium, it has been agreed that that frequency hopping is excluded from H04J 13/00 even if it is used within the context of multiple access. Because the concepts dealt with in H04J 13/00 do not have relevance for FH-CDMA even though frequency hopping can be used for CDMA (i.e. FH-CDMA), this subject-matter is exclusively classified in H04B 1/713.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Details of the signal processing which are covered by systems that use frequency hopping as a means to divide the communication medium

H04B 1/713

MC-CDMA

H04J 11/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Implementation of the spread-spectrum technique

H04B 1/69

Synonyms and Keywords

CDMA

Code Division Multiple Access

MC-CDMA

Multi-carrier Code Division Multiple Access

OVSF

Orthogonal variable spreading factor

H04L - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Transmission of signals having been supplied in digital form, e.g. data transmission, telegraphic communication, or methods or arrangements for monitoring.

As the scope of H04L covers a diversity of subject matter, the user is referred to the definitions for the main groups of H04L. The following list is intended to assist the user.

Systems:

Arrangements of general application:

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Arrangements applicable to telegraphic or telephonic communication

H04M

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Typewriters

B41J

Order telegraphs, fire or police telegraphs

G08B

Visual telegraphy

G08B, G08C

Teleautographic systems

G08C

Ciphering or deciphering apparatus per se

G09C

Coding, decoding or code conversion, in general

H03M

Selecting

H04Q

Spread spectrum techniques in general

H04B 1/69

H04L 1/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the reception of digital information.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Computer systems

G06F

Coin-feed or like apparatus with coded identity card or credit card

G07F 7/08

Diversity Systems for radio transmission systems

H04B 7/02

Error correction or detection in electrical digital data processing

G06F 11/08-G06F 11/20

Codes for error detection or error correction

H03M 13/00

Synonyms and Keywords

ARQ

Automatic Repeat Request

FEC

Forward Error Correction

H04L 5/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Multiplex communication in general

H04J

Conditioning for two-way transmission in general

H04B 3/20

Data switching networks

H04L 12/00

Systems using multi-frequency codes

H04L 27/26

Time-division multiplex systems

H04J 3/00

H04L 7/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Process or apparatus which permit a transmitter and receiver to operate in predetermined timed relationship.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Synchronising in analog television systems

H04N 5/04

Synchronising of generators of electronic oscillations or pulses

H03L

Synchronising in satellite networks

H04B 7/14

Synchronising in digital television systems

H04N 7/00

Synchronising in TDM networks

H04J 3/00

Synchronising in radio or wireless networks

H04B 7/26

Synchronising in computers

G06F 1/00

Synchronising in computer bus systems

G06F 13/00

Synchronising in computer memory, e.g RAM

G11C

H04L 9/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Processes or apparatus which

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Computer systems

G06F

Coin-feed or like apparatus with coded identity card or credit card

G07F 7/08

Arrangements in the transmission path

H04B

Diversity reception in general

H04B 7/02

Arrangements for preventing the taking of data

H04L 12/22

Secret communication

H04K 1/00

Special rules of classification

In group H04L 9/00 to H04L 9/32, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the last appropriate place.

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

RSA

Rivest Shamir Aldeman

H04L 12/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Transfer of information having been supplied in digital form in data switching networks, e.g.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Interconnection of, or transfer of information or other signals between, memories, input/output devices or central processing units

G06F 13/00

Interprocessor communication using networks

G06F 15/173

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Communication control

H04L 29/02

Data transfer characterised by protocol

H04L 29/06

Multiplexing systems in general

H04J

Selecting equipment

H04Q

Conferences, e.g. video conferences

H04N 7/15

Automatic or semi-automatic exchanges

H04M 3/00

Manual exchanges

H04M 5/00

Telephony conferences arrangements

H04M 3/56

Computer aided management of electronic mail

G06Q 10/10

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Circuit switching

A system in which a communication path is physically permanent during the communication.

Packet switching

A system in which information is divided into discrete data units, characterised by a data payload and an address part known as a header part. The data units are able to travel over different communication paths to the destination.

Message switching systems

A system in which a message is sent into a network with the address of its destination added and it is routed to its destination through the network, e.g. electronic mail network systems.

Hybrid switching

Combinations of different switching systems (e.g. packet switching systems and circuit switching systems).

Gateway

Arrangements for connecting between networks having different types of switching systems.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following expressions/words "packet", "cell" and "frame" are often used as synonyms.

H04L 12/70 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Basic functionality of packet switching networks. Namely: routing, flow control, admission control, switching architectures and other general issues on packet data handling.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Error detection or correction

H04L 1/00

Arrangements for packet switching specially adapted for wireless networks

H04W

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

ATM

Asynchronous Transfer Mode

Synonyms and Keywords

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

H04L 12/701 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Methods or arrangements for determining and setting up a connection between endpoints connected to a packet data network.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

H04L 12/701 and H04W 40/00 can be considered as a technical realm for routing. Various aspects of routing are not dependent on the routing being wireless or wire-bound.

For those cases, classification should be done keeping in mind both group branches and the most appropriate mix of symbols should be allocated to the documents.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Communication routing or communication path finding in wireless networks

H04W 40/00

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Path

Physical or logical connection between two distant network endpoints.

Link

Each of the individual segments of a path or route connecting consecutive network nodes.

Routing in wireless networks

Routing arrangements specially adapted for wireless communication

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expression/word "Route" is often used with the meaning "Physical or logical connection between two distant network endpoints".

MPLS

Multiprotocol Label Switching

GMPLS

Generalised Multiprotocol Label Switching

RIP

Routing Information Protocol

OSPF

Open Shortest Path First

IGP

Internal Gateway Protocol

H04L 12/703 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Reactions of the network to route or router failures. Failure can be caused by node or link malfunction. Failure should be considered in its broadest sense, e.g. when a route is unable to provide the requested performance (delay, bandwidth...), the route is considered as faulty. Fault prevention is also covered by this entry.

Synonyms and Keywords

VRRP

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

HSRP

Hot Standby Router Protocol

H04L 12/705 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques for avoiding the endless circulation of a packet in a network due, e.g., to wrong configuration of the routing tables. This entry covers both loop prevention, detection and loop break.

The term "livelock" is used in opposition to "deadlock". In a deadlock situation a data packet gets stuck in a node because of lack of routing information to move further in the network. In a livelock case, the packet moves permanently in the network from node to node without finding the destination. One case of livelock is a loop; this happens when a data packet travels time and again through the same sequence of nodes without reaching the destination.

Some examples:

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Hop counter

Data packet field, normally in the header, used to keep track of the number of nodes through which the packet has travelled.

Synonyms and Keywords

ST

Spanning Tree

TTL

Time to Live

H04L 12/709 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The calculation of several paths between two endpoints and the simultaneous use of said paths. This entry also concerns the selection, setup, maintenance and tear down of the routes. The routes can be used for several purposes: load balancing, security, fail safety, higher aggregate bandwidth... The creation and use of a trunk group is also covered by this entry.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

The purpose or application of the multiple paths should be classified in the corresponding entries elsewhere in the IPC, e.g. documents dealing with the criteria used for load balancing among a plurality of paths should only be classified in H04L 12/803 and not in this subgroup.

H04L 12/711 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The determination of one or more secondary backup route(s) and the switch over from the active route to one of the backup routes in case of failure of the main route.

H04L 12/713 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The selection of one out of several next-hop routers for creating a route. This entry is mostly related to the selection of one out of several access routers.

Some examples:

H04L 12/715 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Hierarchical routing decisions. A routing decision can be made at different layers. Each layer has a different view of the network. This is very much like PNNI routing as used in ATM networks.

H04L0012715000

PNNI specification version 1.0 1996. Figure 4.2

Routing in clustered networks. In this case the network is partitioned in different clusters or domains all at the same hierarchical level. The routing protocol will have to provide intra-cluster and inter-cluster routes. This is very much like routing with BGP protocols, where the clusters are referred to as Autonomous Systems [AS].

H04L0012715000

Special rules of classification

This entry in combination with H04L 12/751 will be used for documents describing how to create the clusters/hierarchy for routing purposes.

Synonyms and Keywords

PNNI

Private Network-to-Network Interface

BGP

Border Gateway Protocol

AS

Autonomous System

H04L 12/721 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

General procedures used in routing algorithms.

Examples are:

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Broadcast or multicast routing

H04L 12/761

H04L 12/723 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The use of routing tags in the header of a data packet. The tags are used instead of the destination address for determining a next hop for the packet. This simplifies table lookup and helps in load balancing (traffic engineering) actions. MPLS is a good example.

Synonyms and Keywords

MPLS

Multiprotocol Label Switching

H04L 12/725 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The use of a QOS vector to determine the most appropriate path. QOS is a traffic contract covering the type of traffic (CBR,VBR, Best effort...) and the network performance required for said traffic (loss ratio, error rate, bandwidth, delay...)

Synonyms and Keywords

SLA

Service Level Agreement

H04L 12/733 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The determination of a path having the minimum number of routers or links in the way to the destination. Minimizing physical path length can also be used as routing condition.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Shortcut finding for shortest path

H04L 12/763

H04L 12/741 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Table lookup operation for next hop determination. The lookup operation yields the output port/interface (of the router) that should be used to reach the next hop (or final endpoint) for a certain destination address contained in the packet header.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Information retrieval in a database

G06F 17/30

Synonyms and Keywords

CIDR

Classless Inter-Domain Routing

Trie

Tree structure for table lookup

H04L 12/751 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Topology determination procedures at network setup and topology update upon changing connectivity conditions. All routers in a network have to be up to date of the connectivity changes between routers. The following actions are classified here.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Topology management for purposes other than routing

H04L 12/24

Connectivity discovery in wireless networks

H04W 40/24

Synonyms and Keywords

LSA

Link State Advertisement

H04L 12/753 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The determination and use of a logical tree calculated from a set of nodes connected according to any other physical or logical topology.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Loop or livelock prevention, e.g. the absence of routing loops in tree topology

H04L 12/705

Synonyms and Keywords

STP

Spanning Tree Protocol

DLS

Distributed Load Sharing

SR

Source Routing

Root node

The upmost node of a tree graph from which all other nodes hang.

Leaf node

Terminal node of a tree not having other nodes hanging from it

H04L 12/761 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements for supporting the routing of broadcast traffic.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements characterized by the transmission system itself, the transmission system being other than for broadcast, e.g. the internet

H04H 60/81

H04L 12/763 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques to reduce the number of intermediate routers in a path between two endpoints. In standard routing methods, each node on the route will calculate the next router on the way to the destination. Shortcut routing is a technique to provide a direct route from the source to the destination, trying to avoid as many intermediate routers as possible.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Minimum hop routing

H04L 12/733

Synonyms and Keywords

NHRP

next hop resolution Protocol

H04L 12/771 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Details of the internal software or hardware structure of a network device for the purpose of routing.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Switch fabric architecture

H04L 12/931

H04L 12/773 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques for switching taking into account layer 3 information but avoiding the use of a layer 3 entity for deciding the output port.

Layer 3 switching is a technique based on the use of routing for the first packet of a communication and then switching for the rest of the packets. The first packet is allocated a label after router table lookup, then the label is linked with the corresponding output port. The rest of the packets are sent with the label and the input port, by checking the label, can quickly relay the packet to the output port without the need of a layer 3 (router) lookup.

This entry covers both the logical part of layer 3 switching and the corresponding router architecture supporting this technology.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Label based routing

H04L 12/723

Use of internal tags for forwarding within a switch

H04L 12/947

Synonyms and Keywords

CSR

cell switch relay

H04L 12/801 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques for reacting to network throughput degradation. The first technique is called Flow Control and is carried out by the source or the destination of a certain communication after degradation is encountered (e.g. modifying the acknowledge window) without intervention of the network. The second technique is Congestion Control and concerns the reactions of the network to general degradation identified by the network (e.g. source quench packet). Both topics are covered by the present entry.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Error recovery

H04L 1/00

Flow control in wireless networks

H04W 28/10

Synonyms and Keywords

TOS

Type of service

SLA

Service Level Agreement

Diff-Serv

IP differentiated services protocol

H04L 12/803 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The connection of two endpoints through a plurality of active paths. The traffic load is distributed among the paths according to predefined criteria. Traffic engineering.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Routing over multiple paths for route fault prevention

H04L 12/709

Simultaneous data transmission over a plurality of networks

H04L 12/903

Balancing over multiple switching planes within a switch

H04L 12/939

H04L 12/805 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The determination of the maximum packet size that can be admitted for transmission in a network domain.

When a packet communication goes through several network domains the source has to determine the maximum packet size that can be accepted by all the domains.

Dynamic adaptation of MTU depending e.g. on network load conditions is also covered by this entry.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Packet assembly and disassembly

H04L 12/951

Synonyms and Keywords

MTU

Maximum Transmission Unit

H04L 12/807 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The adaptation of the acknowledge window used by flow control protocols, e.g. TCP, to the network congestion conditions.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

TCP

Transmission Control Protocol

Synonyms and Keywords

EPD

Early Packet Discard

UDP

User Datagram Protocol

H04L 12/811 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

This is a general entry for the adaptation of the traffic rate of an individual connection to changing network or destination endpoint conditions.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bitrate negotiation at call setup

H04L 12/911

H04L 12/815 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Flow shaping techniques consisting of converting a burst of packets into a sequence of equally spaced packets.

H04L 12/823 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Flow control correcting actions based on packet removal or filtering. Under network congestion circumstances ongoing flows may be removed or individual packets eliminated.

Synonyms and Keywords

RED

Random Early Discard

H04L 12/833 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques for tagging packets in the presence of congestion conditions. The packets are marked with e.g. a discard eligibility [DE] flag. Upon congestion those packets carrying the DE flag set, will e.g. be the first to be discarded.

Synonyms and Keywords

DE flag

Discard Eligibility flag

ECN bit

Explicit Congestion Notification bit

H04L 12/841 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The use of delay performance values in the network nodes or endpoints to determine the flow control actions. Both processing and transmission delays are covered by this entry.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Methods for measuring transmission delay

H04L 12/26

Synonyms and Keywords

RTT

Round Trip Time

H04L 12/853 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Flow control actions specific to real time traffic. Voice traffic (e.g. Skypeâ„¢) or video streaming are examples of the type of traffic to which the flow or congestion control actions are applied.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Selective distribution of video streaming

H04N 21/00

H04L 12/857 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Conversion or translation of e.g. IP TOS values to QOS in either ATM or UMTS.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

UMTS

Universal Mobile Telecommunications System

H04L 12/861 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The basic action of storing incoming packets in the memory of a transit node or endpoint. The packets can be stored in independent buffers or in a queue of buffers according to predefined criteria.

Details about how or where the buffering actions take place.

Special rules of classification

When the queuing strategy is an integral part of the architecture of a switch, the corresponding subgroup in H04L 12/931 should also be given.

Synonyms and Keywords

FIFO

First In First Out

H04L 12/863 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The definition of several queues with different traffic categories. The queues are followed by a scheduler that selects one of the queues according to certain criteria.

H04L0012863000

Synonyms and Keywords

WFQ

Weighted Fair Queuing

WRR

Weighted Round Robin

H04L 12/867 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The allocation of a fair share of the link resources to all queues. The individual share can be e.g. proportional to the QoS of the flow. This entry is used in relation to the sharing of a theoretically unlimited resource among a plurality of queues

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bandwidth aware scheduling

H04L 12/873

Delay aware scheduling

H04L 12/875

H04L 12/869 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Scheduling schemes that are carried out in several steps, e.g. a first step could be related to the type of traffic (e.g. real time, web browsing...) and a second step could apply different priorities to the queues selected in the first step.

H04L0012869000

H04L 12/873 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Scheduling policies that schedule the transmission of the data stored in the queue(s) taking into account the bandwidth required by the data flow.

Another possibility is the optimization of the use of network bandwidth, by scheduling transmissions that neither underutilize nor saturate the transmission medium.

H04L 12/875 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Scheduling schemes that take into account delay constraints of packets, as for example real time packets.

Disciplines in which packets are scheduled according to a system timer (also referred to as virtual time). In this case, the scheduler will compute timestamps which specify when packets should be served. Packets are scheduled in increasing order of the corresponding timestamps.

In general delay sensitive queues are served with higher frequency than e.g. loss sensitive queues.

Calendar queues, , i.e. an ordered structure of bins representing (a) possible value(s) of (a) timestamp(s) in the system. The bins are ordered by increasing value of their timestamps.

When the maximum difference between timestamps of backlogged sessions in the system is bounded, the calendar queue can become a circular queue where the bins can be reused as the time progresses. The bin associated with the minimum value must correspond with the value of the system potential at that time, and the total number of bins must be sufficient to cover the possible range of timestamps. Each bin is implemented as a list of pointers to individual connections. Every time a connection receives a new timestamp, it is linked to the corresponding bin. The calendar queue can be automatically resized i.e. the number of bins and the width of the bins (the number of possible timestamp values of a bin) can be changed depending on the distribution of backlogged connections in the bins.

H04L0012875000

Figure source: " SMART PRIORITY QUEUE ALGORITHMS FOR SELF-OPTIMIZING EVENT STORAGE " by H.A. Bahr et al. published in the journal " Simulation Modelling Practice and Theory" by Elsevier int. Vol. 12, num 1, pages 15-40

H04L 12/877 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The reallocation of unused bandwidth. Unallocated bandwidth after an allocation round can be redistributed to queues still having traffic to send. The unallocated bandwidth can also be used for best effort traffic.

Token banks i.e the method involves assigning tokens to the queues and storing said tokens in a finite capacity bank. The tokens assigned to a queue whose associated bank has reached its maximum capacity are assigned to another queue whose bank is below its capacity. Access to the resources is allowed if the queue has a predetermined number of tokens in its associated bank, otherwise it is denied.

Synonyms and Keywords

ABR

Available Bit Rate

UBR

Unspecified Bit Rate

H04L 12/879 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques for storing packets in the memory of a node or endpoint while awaiting further process. This entry covers both the allocation of storage capacity and the methods of memory management for that purpose

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Descriptor

A data structure that contains the details of how and where a packet has been stored, e.g. packet size, pointers, CRC or detected errors.

H04L 12/883 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques for storing an incoming packet in a sequence of individual buffers. The buffers are organized as a linked list.

H04L0012883000

H04L 12/901 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The selection of the appropriate access point for the use of a network. Several criteria may apply: physical distance, load sharing among different access points, cost .... The selection can be made by the source endpoint or by the network.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Wireless access point and network selection

H04W 48/00

Synonyms and Keywords

ISP

Internet Service Provider

POP

Point of Presence

H04L 12/903 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques for selecting a network among a plurality of different networks available.

H04L0012903000

Multiple selection criteria can be featured, such as bandwidth, delay, etc.

H04L 12/905 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Reactions to network performance evolution by dynamic, e.g. in-call, network selection.

H04L 12/911 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The process of request and allocation/refusal of resources between a source endpoint and the ingress point to a network.

Synonyms and Keywords

CAC

Connection Admission Control

UNI

User-to-Network Interface

H04L 12/915 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Resource reservation along a path that involves several domains. Normally, each domain will have a resource manager that will have to negotiate the resource request with the resource managers in the other domains. Another possibility is that a central resource manager is aware of resource availability in all intermediate domains, and decides the grant/refusal of the request.

H04L0012915000

H04L 12/923 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The techniques for requesting by the network an update of the allocated resources. The network will identify a change in the available resources and will request the source to adapt the negotiated sending rate accordingly.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Bitrate adaptation upon congestion determination

H04L 12/825

H04L 12/925 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques for interacting between the source and destination endpoints with the purpose of reserving resources (e.g. storage resources, processing capacity) for an upcoming communication. The source node will inform the destination about the size of the data that will be sent. The destination node will make the suitable buffer and processing-capacity bookings for handling the data.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Flow control actions using buffer capacity information at the destination endpoint

H04L 12/835

H04L 12/927 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques for taking into consideration the type of information of a communication when negotiating resource allocation at call setup. The allocation request at call setup relates to a communication with certain constraints specific to the type of data to be transferred.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Flow control actions based on the type of traffic

H04L 12/851

H04L 12/931 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Details of an individual network device that characterize the internal switching architecture.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Router architecture

H04L 12/771

Special rules of classification

Some of the actions covered by other subgroups in H04L ( e.g. routing, flow control...) are carried out within a switch for supporting connectivity between input and output ports. In that case the present subgroup should be given in combination with the corresponding entries for the other actions.

H04L 12/933 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Basic architecture of the switch core. The classical architectures are: crossbar, shared memory and shared medium. Hybrid architectures are also classified in this subgroup.

H04L0012933000
H04L0012933000

H04L 12/935 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Actions carried out at the ingress port of a switch. Buffering, integrity control, and the like.

H04L 12/939 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements for redundant organisation of the switching functions. The purpose could be higher aggregated bit rate or fault tolerance.

H04L0012939000

H04L 12/951 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements for converting a file of raw data into a sequence of packets.

Synonyms and Keywords

SAR

Segmentation and Reassembly

PDU

Protocol Data Unit

AAL

ATM Adaptation Layer

H04L 13/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Details of the apparatus or circuits covered by groups H04L 15/00 or H04L 17/00.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Clutches in general

F16

Electronic distributors in general

H03K 17/00

H04L 15/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Apparatus or local circuits for transmitting or receiving dot-and-dash codes, e.g. Morse code.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Teaching apparatus for dot-and-dash codes

G09B

Telegraph tapping keys

H01H 21/86

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Keyboard switches in general

H01H 13/70, H03K 17/94

Coding in connection with keyboards or like devices, in general

H03M 11/00

H04L 17/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Apparatus or local circuits for transmitting or receiving codes wherein each character is represented by the same number of equal-length code elements.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Keyboard switches in general

H01H 13/70, H03K 17/94

Coding in connection with keyboards or like devices, in general

H03M 11/00

H04L 19/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Apparatus or local circuits for a plurality of switching stages working sequentially and independently of the state of subsequent stages that are responsive to transmitted information pulse signals.

H04L 21/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Apparatus or local circuits for devices which print composite information from transmitted pulse signals.

H04L 23/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Apparatus or local circuits for systems other than those covered by groups H04L 15/00 to H04L 21/00.

H04L 25/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Baseband aspects of data transmission, e.g. baseband equalisers.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Circuits in general for handling pulses

H03K

Details in line transmission systems in general

H04B 3/02

Impedance networks per se

H03H

Induction coil interrupters

H01H 51/34

Dynamo-electric generators

H02K

Repeaters in general

H04B

Electronic distributors in general

H03K 17/00

H04L 27/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Passband aspects of data transmission, e.g. modulating and demodulating of signals, arrangements for provision and recovery of carriers.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Modulator circuits in general

H03C

Demodulator circuits in general

H03D

Synonyms and Keywords

OFDM

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex

PSK

Phase Shift Keying

QAM

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

ASK

Amplitude Shift Keying

OOK

On-Off Keying

FSK

Frequency Shift Keying

CPM

Continuous Phase Modulation

H04L 29/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Arrangements, apparatus, circuits or systems, not covered by a single one of groups H04L 1/00-H04L 27/00, e.g.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Interconnection of, or transfer of information or other signals between, memories, input/output devices or central processing units

G06F 13/00

Control of transmission in radio transmission systems

H04B 7/005

Communication control in satellite networks

H04B 7/185

Arrangement for preventing error in the information received

H04L 1/00

Arrangement for secret or secure communication

H04L 9/00

Packet switching systems

H04L 12/70-H04L 12/955

Selecting arrangements to which subscribers are connected via radio links or inductive links

H04W

Selecting arrangements for multiplex systems

H04Q 11/00

H04M - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Telecommunication systems including subscriber equipment and exchanges, e.g.

Telephonic communication systems combined with other electrical systems;

Testing arrangements peculiar to telephonic communication systems.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

With regard to mobile telephony, H04M covers communication systems using wireless extensions, i.e. wireless links without selective communication, e.g. cordless telephones, which are covered by group H04M 1/72, whereas H04W covers communication networks for selectively establishing one or a plurality of wireless communication links between a desired number of users or between users and network equipments, for the purpose of transferring information via these wireless communication links.

With regard to VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol), voice is considered in this context to be a specific form of "digital information". Since the Internet Protocol and IP networks are classified in H04L (H04L 12/00, Data switching networks and H04L 29/02, Communication control), the transmission of voice over IP networks should be classified in H04L.

When VoIP is used to emulate or simulate services, the service, as presented to the user, is still classified in H04M. Any implementation details are however classified in H04L. For example, SPIT and SPAM prevention in VoIP should be classified in H04M 3/436 or H04M 1/663.

VoIP is not covered by any single class, subclass, group or subgroup but rather classified as evolution of existing technologies. Therefore, aspects of VoIP are not only classified in H04M and H04L but also in other classes which have been used for classification of aspects related to telephonic communication, H04M, and transmission of digital information, H04L, such as by the Internet protocol.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Circuits for controlling other apparatus via a telephone cable and not involving telephone switching apparatus

G08B, G08C, G08G

Wireless communication networks

H04W

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Counting mechanisms

G06M

Multiplex transmission between switching centres

H04J

Selecting

H04Q

Transducers

H04R

Information storage based on relative movement between record carrier and transducer

G11B

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Subscriber

General term for a user of terminal equipment, e.g. for the user of a telephone set, or for any equipment used by subscribers, e.g. telephones for public use.

Substation

Subscriber or monitoring equipment which may connect a single subscriber to a line without choice as to subscriber.

Satellite

A kind of exchange the operation of which depends upon control signals received from a supervisory exchange.

Switching centres

Include exchanges and satellites.

Exchange

Synonym for telephone switch

Voice mail system

A centralized system for managing telephone messages for a large group of users.

Synonyms and Keywords

PSTN

Public Switched Telephony Network.

ISDN

Integrated Services Digital Network.

ISUP

ISDN User Part.

SIP

Session Initiation Protocol.

H.323

A standard protocol used for Packet-Based Multimedia Communications Systems.

CTI

Computer telephony integration. A technology that allows interactions on a telephone and a computer to be integrated or co-ordinated. Common application interfaces and protocols for monitoring and controlling calls comprise Computer Supported Telecommunications Applications, CSTA, Java Telephony Application Programming Interface, JTAPI, Telephony Server Application Programming Interface, TSAPI, or Telephony Application Programming Interface, TAPI.

Gatekeeper

A gatekeeper provides a number of services to terminals, gateways and devices, e.g. endpoint registration, address resolution, admission control and user authentication.

Call agent

A call agent handles specific services to users e.g. alert the called party, send and receive voice data.

IMS

IP Multimedia Subsystem. An architectural framework for delivering internet protocol, IP, multimedia to a mobile user.

Softswitch

A central device in a telephone network which connects calls from one phone line to another, e.g. control connections at the junction point between circuit and packet networks.

PBX

Private Branch Exchanges, e.g. for making connections among the internal telephones of a private organization.

xDSL

Digital Subscriber Line. A family of technologies that provides digital data transmission over the wires of a local telephone network.

Party line system

An arrangement in which two or more customers are connected directly to the same link or circuit.

SPAM

The abuse of electronic messaging systems to send unsolicited bulk messages indiscriminately.

SPIT

Spam over Internet Telephony, i.e. unwanted, automatically dialled, pre-recorded phone calls using Voice over Internet Protocol, VoIP.

H04M 1/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers;

Constructional details of telephone sets;

Arrangements for indicating or recording called number or number of calling subscriber at the substation equipment;

Arrangements for answering calls and for recording messages and conversations at the substation equipment;

Substation extension, e.g. cordless telephones;

Arrangements for testing;

User guidance features in telephone sets;

Devices for signalling identity of wanted subscriber, e.g. telephone directories;

Substation equipment including speech amplifiers;

Arrangements for preventing unauthorized or fraudulent calling.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Arrangements for services at the substation equipment are classified here. Arrangements for services at exchanges are classified at H04M 3/00.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Subscriber services or facilities provided at exchanges

H04M 3/00

Prepayment telephone coin boxes

H04M 17/00

Current supply arrangements

H04M 19/08

Terminal devices in mobile radio systems

H04W 88/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

In-vehicle arrangements for holding or mounting articles, e.g. for telephones, radios and TV sets

B60R 11/02

Arrangements for converting discrete items of information into a coded form, e.g. keyboards

G06F 3/023

Interaction techniques for graphical user interfaces between user and computer

G06F 3/048

Digital output to displays?

G06F 3/14

Housing or supporting of instruments or other apparatus

G12B 9/00

Keyboard switches in general

H01H 13/70, H03K 17/94

Casing, cabinets or drawers for electric apparatus

H05K 5/00

H04M 3/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Telephonic communication services, in particular supplementary services specifically adapted for telephonic communication provided by networks comprising any type of switching devices, such as telephone exchanges, telephone switches, softswitches, call agents or and call state control function or control protocols, such as ISDN User part (ISUP), H.323 and SIP;

Telephone exchanges or telephone switches, in particular digital switches which work by connecting two or more digital circuits together, according to a dialed telephone number. This main group covers both switches of Public Switched Telephone Networks, PSTN, and Private Branch Exchanges, PBX;

Application servers for information services, call distribution and queuing services, messaging services and conference services;

Arrangements for providing information services, such as Interactive Voice Response Systems, Voice Portals or Voice Browsers;

Centralised arrangements for answering requiring operator intervention (also referred to as a call centers), usually employing call queuing and call distribution;

Centralised arrangements for recording messages for absent or busy subscribers (also referred to as Voice Mail Systems);

Arrangements for connecting several subscribers to a common circuit (also referred to as Conference Bridges).

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Services or devices which are arranged for use in substation equipment are classified in H04M 1/00, whereas services arranged for use in the exchange are classified in H04M 3/00.

Exchanges in and services specially provided for mobile radio systems are classified in H04W 4/00-H04W 92/00.

Implementation details and protocol details of networks comprising call agents, call controllers and call state control functions and/or employing the H.323 or SIP protocol are classified in H04L 29/06.

Protocol details of call control protocols such as Q.931 and ISDN User part (ISUP) are classified in H04Q.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Selecting arrangements

H04Q 3/00-H04Q 5/00, H04Q 11/00, H04W

Constructional details and the switching fabric of a telephone exchange

H04Q

H04M 5/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Substation equipment in general

H04M 1/00

H04M 7/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Interconnection arrangements between switching centres;

Internet telephony and traditional circuit-switched telephony requiring interworking between the two (see in this respect also ITU-T Recommendation Y.2261, "PSTN/ISDN evolution to NGN").

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Transmission arrangements in general

H04B

H04M 9/00 - Definition

H04M 11/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Telephonic communication systems adapted for combination with other electrical systems e.g. combinations with application servers or physical implementation of xDSL-systems.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Signalling or calling systems not related to signalling or calling in telephonic communications (i.e. not related to the control of telecommunication networks); Order telegraphs; Alarm systems

G08B

Transmission of digital information

H04L

H04M 13/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Arrangements in which two or more customers are connected directly to the same link or circuit.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Substation equipment

H04M 1/00

Exchange equipment, automatic, manual

H04M 3/00, H04M 5/00

Metering arrangements

H04M 15/36

H04M 15/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Metering, rating, charging, accounting, billing, invoicing and recording detailed data;

Administration, specification of accounts or notifications, e.g. special plans, group accounts, card based account or advice of charge and account limits;

VoIP billing, called party billing, calling party billing or and third party billing;

Arrangements for providing free calls or reduced rates, billing when roaming, least cost routing, bidding for cheapest communication price or dynamic tariffing;

Billing fraud detection;

Generation of statistics on called or calling numbers;

Payment of added value services which are charged to the telecommunications operator bill.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Accounting or billing specially adapted for wireless communication networks

H04W 4/24

Usage measurements specially adapted for wireless communication networks

H04W 4/26

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Charging packet based aspects

H04L 12/14

Data processing specially adapted to commerce, e.g. billing

G06Q 30/04

H04M 17/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Prepayment telephone systems, for example prepayment telephone coin boxes;

Disposable prepaid sets;

Coin-freed or check freed systems;

Calling card specifications related to prepayment.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Preventing unauthorized calling from a telephone set by inserting a coded card

H04M 1/675
Examples of places where the subject matter of this class is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Accounting or billing specially adapted for wireless communication networks

H04W 4/24

Usage measurements specially adapted for wireless communication networks

H04W 4/26

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Coin-freed or like apparatus in general

G07F

Mobile subscriber equipment

H04W 88/00

Charging arrangements in digital switching networks

H04L 12/14

H04M 19/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Current supply arrangements for telephone systems.

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Current supply for selection equipment

H04Q 1/28

H04Q - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods, circuits, or apparatus for selectively establishing a connection between a desired number of stations (normally two), or between a main station and a desired number of substations (normally one) for the purpose of transferring information via this connection after it has been established; and

Selective calling arrangements over connections already established.

As the scope of H04Q covers a diversity of subject matter, the user is referred to the IPC definitions for the main groups of H04Q.

The following list is intended to assist the user:

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Electric switches; Relays; Selectors

H01H

Multiplex communication

H04J

Wireless communication networks

H04W

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Cables; Conductors

H01B

Installation of communication cables or lines

H02G

Electronic switches

H03K 17/00

Transmission in general

H04B

Broadcast communication

H04H

Transmission of digital information

H04L

Telephonic communication

H04M

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Satellite

A kind of exchange the operation of which depends upon control signals received from a supervisory exchange.

Subscriber

General term for terminal equipment, e.g. telephone for public use.

Substation

Subscriber or monitoring equipment which may connect a single subscriber to a line without choice as to subscriber.

Switching centres

Include exchanges and satellites.

H04Q 1/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Details of selector switches

H01H 63/00

Cables; Conductors

H01B

Installation of communication cables or lines

H02G

Multiplex systems providing for calling or supervisory signals

H04J 1/00, H04J 3/12

Telephone substation equipment

H04M 1/00

Current supply arrangements for telephone systems

H04M 19/00

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following abbreviations are often used:

MDF

Main Distribution Frame

H04Q 1/30 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Telephone substation equipment

H04M 1/00

H04Q 3/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Intermediate storage means for telegraphic communication

H04L 13/08

Subscriber services provided at exchanges

H04M 3/42

Signaling arrangements

H04Q 1/30

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following abbreviations are often used:

BCSM

Basic Call State Model

SIBBS

Service-Independent Building Blocks

PBX

Private Branch Exchange

H04Q 5/00 - Definition fr

H04Q 9/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Electric programme-control systems

G05B 19/02

Transmission systems for measured values, control signals

G08C

Toy vehicles

A63H 17/00

Electric circuits specially adapted for vehicles

B60R 16/02

Applications of remote control devices for cranes

B66C 13/40

Electric permutation locks

E05B 49/00

Input and output arrangements for digital data processing

G06F 3/00

Individual entry or exit registers

G07C 9/00

Circuit arrangements for providing remote control of switching means in a power distribution network

H02J 13/00

Remote-control of tuned circuits

H03J 9/00

Data switching networks

H04L 12/00

Telephonic communication systems adapted for combination with other electrical systems

H04M 11/00

Receiver circuitry of television systems

H04N 5/44

H04Q 11/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Multiplex systems

H04J

H04W - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Communication networks deploying an infrastructure for mobility management of wireless users connected thereto, e.g. cellular networks, wireless LANs.

Self organizing wireless communication networks, e.g. ad-hoc networks.

Wireless access networks, e.g. Wireless Local Loop.

Said networks are used for selectively establishing one or a plurality of communication links between a desired number of users or between users and network equipments for the purpose of transferring information via these communication links.

Arrangements or techniques for planning, deploying wireless networks.

Arrangements or techniques specially adapted for wireless service provisioning.

Arrangements or techniques specially adapted for wireless network operation.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

broadcast communication

H04H

communication systems using wireless links for non-selective communication, e.g. wireless extensions

H04M 1/72

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

wireless sensing of record carriers

G06K 7/10

transceivers, i.e. devices in which transmitter and receiver form a structural unit and in which at least one part is used for functions of transmitting and receiving

H04B 1/38

spread spectrum techniques in general

H04B 1/69

control of transmission; equalising

H04B 7/00

diversity systems

H04B 7/02

space‑based or airborne stations

H04B 7/185

for communication between two or more posts at least one of which is mobile

H04B 7/26

transmission systems employing electromagnetic waves other than radio waves

H04B 10/00

transmission systems employing sonic, ultrasonic or infrasonic waves

H04B 11/00

multiplex communication

H04J

arrangements for detection or preventing errors in the information received

H04L 1/00

arrangements for synchronising receiver with transmitter

H04L 7/00

data switching networks

H04L 12/00

telephonic communication

H04M

telephonic substation equipment

H04M 1/00

telephonic automatic or semi-automatic exchanges

H04M 3/00

metering arrangements; time controlling arrangements; time- indicating arrangements

H04M 15/00

prepayment telephone systems

H04M 17/00

arrangements using wireless links for the sole purpose of telecontrol or telemetry systems

H04Q 9/00

Special rules of classification

In this subclass, at each hierarchical level, in the absence of an indication to the contrary, classification is made in the first appropriate place.

When classifying in groups H04W 4/00 to H04W 74/00, subject matter relating to system, equipment, interface or protocol, which is considered to represent information of particular interest for search, may also be classified in (the most closely related group of) groups H04W 80/00 to H04W 92/00. Such non-obligatory classification should be given as "additional information".

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Access point

means an equipment providing wireless user access to a backbone network

BSC

Base Station Controller

BTS

Base Transceiver Station

Backbone network

designates equipment(s) for connecting one or several wireless access points to a wired or wireless infrastructure in order to allow communication(s) between users' inside or outside the wireless network

Care-of-address

designates the termination point of a tunnel toward a mobile node, for datagrams forwarded to the mobile node while it is away from home

Communication link

means a physical or logical connection selectively established for the purpose of conveying messages or information between users or networks

Connection

means network resource(s) allocated or reserved for an affiliated user

Connected state

designates the state of a user/terminal having active, i.e. allocated logical traffic/control channel, dormant or suspended, i.e. without allocated logical channels but with maintained service instances It also incorporates context (PDP context), User Plane, Control Plane operations

Control channel

transports control information used to control the function of the network element ("signalling channel", e.g. paging channel, broadcast channel, pilot channel)

Downlink

means the wireless link from a wireless access point or network towards the user or terminal equipment (see also "uplink")

Home network

designates the network performing functions at a permanent location regardless of the location of the user's access point The home network is responsible for subscription information management and for specific services not provided by the serving network; dedicated equipment used therefore is designed by HLR (Home Location Register); also for Home Agent, Home Subscriber Server

Idle state

designates the state of a user/terminal having no active traffic/control channel and no active service instances but being affiliated to the network (see also "Null state")

Mobility binding

designates the association of a home address with a care-of address, along with the remaining lifetime of that association

Mobility management

designates techniques or arrangements allowing operation of, or services to be provided to, a user capable of selecting or changing his point of attachment to the network

Mobile node

designates a host or router that changes its point of attachment from one network or sub-network to another, without changing its home address

Multi-call

means a plurality of communication links established over one or a plurality of networks for transferring information to one user/terminal

Network

means the physical or logical entities involved in providing communication services to users

Null state

designates the state of a user/terminal having no active traffic/control channel and no active service instances

Originating

means a user/terminal acting as a requester for communication towards a wireless access point

Partitioning

means distributing/committing specific resources to a particular/specific network component

Private networks

designates networks owned and operated by non-public authorities

QoS

Quality of Service

Resource allocation

means allocation a resource to a communication

Resource distribution

means committing a resource to an entity for future allocation thereof for communication

RNC

Radio Network Controller

Scheduling

means establishing an order of transmission of communication information based on precedence or priority policies

Serving network

designates the part of the network to which the access point providing user's access is connected. The serving network is responsible for path finding and transport of users data; dedicated equipment used therefore is designed by VLR (Visitor Location Register); also for Foreign Agent, Visiting Subscriber Server

SLA

Service Level Agreement

Subscriber

means an entity recognized and authorized as user

Terminal

means the equipment acting as/or on behalf of a user

Terminating

means a user/terminal specified as a recipient for communication from within or via a wireless network

Traffic channel

transports communication information (user data) to and from one or several users

Uplink

means the wireless link from the user or terminal equipment towards a wireless network or access point (see also "Downlink")

User

means an entity acting as an information source (sender, transmitter, server) or information sink (recipient, receiver, client)

Wireless extension

means equipment using a pre-defined dedicated wireless link

Wireless link

means a communication link established via radio, infra-red, inductive or other electromagnetic radiation

Wireless resource

means a communication link using a specific frequency, time, code or space (or combination thereof)

Zoned, Cellular

designates an infrastructure deployment involving partitioning geographical areas in a plurality of sub-areas (zones, cells) for the purpose of reusing wireless resources

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following expressions/words "Access point (AP)", "Base Station (BS)", "Node B" and "BTS" are often used as synonyms.

H04W 4/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Providing wireless communication services by or via one or a plurality of network equipments to one or a plurality of affiliated user or terminal equipments.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Charging, metering arrangements

H04L 12/14, H04M 15/00, H04M 17/00

Broadcast or conference in data switching networks

H04L 12/18

Message switching systems

H04L 12/58

Telephonic communication systems providing special services or facilities to subscriber

H04M 3/42

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Affiliated

means a user or terminal being recognized by a network and/or authorized to use network resources

H04W 4/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Providing communication services based on location information provided by the user/terminal or determined by the network.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mobility data transfer

H04W 8/08

Access restriction based on user location or mobility data

H04W 48/04

Registration, e.g. affiliation to network; De-registration, e.g. terminating affiliation

H04W 60/00

Locating users or terminals for network management purpose

H04W 64/00

H04W 4/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The services are provided locally to users inside or in close proximity of , e.g. buildings or vehicles

H04W 4/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Allowing a plurality of users or terminals to be included in a single communication.

Delivery of a message signal substantially simultaneously to a plurality of recipients.

Providing services only to a limited group of users.

Special broadcast or group call services, e.g. emergency broadcast, CUG, VPN, PTT, PoC(PTT on Cellular), P2C (Press to Connect).

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Broadcast communication

H04H

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

selective broadcast

means the selective delivery of information to a specified user or group of users by a connection which is normally asymmetric, i.e. which normally transmits from one source to a plurality of recipients

Synonyms and Keywords

CUG

Closed User group

VPN

Virtual Private Network

H04W 4/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Affiliation of a (plurality of) subscribers to an existing group. De-affiliation thereof.

Creation, administration of group associations in a data repository. Transfer, updates thereof.

Assigning ID’s to members of services group (real or logical entities).

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Self-organizing networks, e.g. ad-hoc networks or sensor networks

H04W 84/18

H04W 4/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Communication is established among members of a predefined group by an active user with a talk request over usually a half-duplex channel.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Trunked mobile radio systems

H04W 84/08

Synonyms and Keywords

PoC

Push-on-Call; Push-on-Cellular

P2C

Push-to-Call; Press-to-Connect

PTT

Push-to-Talk

H04W 4/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements for storage of a message signal, retrieval or delivery thereof.

Providing indication or alert to user or terminal of the reception or delivery of

messages.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Message switching systems

H04L 12/58

Notification of users

H04W 68/00

H04W 4/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements whereby the amount of message information is restricted to predetermined levels in order to allow delivery, in a single transmission, over generally a non-traffic channel.

H04W 4/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Special treatment of communication when parties are unreachable, unavailable or busy, e.g. call back.

Redirecting communication for a specified user or terminal to another destination, e.g. call blocking.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Systems providing special services or facilities to subscribers

H04M 3/42

H04W 4/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Modifying the format or nature of transmitted or received information by the network with, e.g. the purpose of adapting delivery to user or terminal, e.g. text to speech.

Synonyms and Keywords

TTY

teletype; speech to text conversion

H04W 4/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Transmission of signalling information, e.g. line identification over a system control channel for the purpose of informing the user.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

signalling information

means information produced and delivered by the network to the user, in order to control operation or inform the user

Synonyms and Keywords

CLID

Caller Line IDentification

H04W 4/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Summoning response to an urgent or hazardous situation.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Alarm systems in which the location of the alarm condition is signalled to a central station, e.g. fire or police telegraphic systems, using wireless transmission systems

G08B 25/10

H04W 4/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Computing a cost of usage or receiving a subscriber payment.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Data processing specially adapted for payment architectures, schemes or protocols, characterised by the use of specific wireless devices

G06Q 20/32

Data processing specially adapted for billing or invoicing

G06Q 30/04

Charging arrangements

H04L 12/14

Metering arrangements

H04M 15/00

Prepayment telephone systems

H04M 17/00

H04W 4/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Determining amount of provided services, e.g. time, number of used network resources, quantity of transferred information.

H04W 8/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Managing data used for controlling network operation or administration.

Storage, updating or transfer of networkmobility data, user or terminalservice data obtained or exchanged by network components.

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

mobility data

means user or terminal affiliation and/or location data

service data

means user or terminal subscription data, e.g. service profiles, status

Synonyms and Keywords

HLR

Home Location Register

VLR

Visitor Location Register

In patent documents the following expressions/words "Home Location Register", "Home Subscriber Server" and "Home Agent" are often used as synonyms

In patent documents the following expressions/words "Visitor Location Register", "Visitor Subscriber Server" and "Foreign Agent" are often used as synonyms.

H04W 8/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Storage, updating of affiliation or location information obtained by the network or exchanged by network components, e.g. roaming. The involved equipments can be an integral part of a system, be shared among several authorities or be part of a public network.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

roaming

means affiliation to a network which is not the home network

H04W 8/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Storage of user or terminal affiliation or location information. The HLR serves normally as reference point for queries, respectively updates of user or terminalmobility data.

H04W 8/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Temporary or semi-permanent storage of user or terminalmobility data for a roaminguser.

H04W 8/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Retrieving and providing affiliation, location information to network components or external parties, e.g. for location dependent services.

H04W 8/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Transfer of mobility data between, normally, HLR and 3rd parties.

H04W 8/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Transfer of mobility data among mobility servers, e.g. for the purpose of sharing the load between mobility servers, or for supporting roaming.

H04W 8/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Transfer of mobility data among communicating users or terminals.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

corresponding node

designates a peer with which a mobile node is communicating. A corresponding node can be either mobile or stationary.

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following expressions/words "corresponding", "correspondent" and "peer " are often used as synonyms

H04W 8/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The transmission of tracking information, i.e. affiliation or location information or the transfer of mobility data, is suspended by the network or the user.

H04W 8/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Subscribed services, preferences.

User or subscriber profiles.

Storage arrangements for said services, preferences or profiles, including dedicated record carriers in, or for use with terminal equipment.

Arrangements for updating or deleting service data in a network database or in subscriber equipment. The update or deletion can be performed by the network, the subscriber or an authorized third party on request.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Registration, e.g. affiliation to network; De-registration, e.g. terminating affiliation

H04W 60/00

H04W 8/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements for transferring all or part of service databetween network databases and subscriber equipment, or between network databases and authorized third parties. The transfer can be performed by the network or authorized third parties on request.

H04W 8/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Storage or updating, in a network component, of information related to condition, physical capabilities or status of terminal equipment, e.g. lost, stolen.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

terminal data

means data characterising the equipment for the purpose of communication, e.g. terminal capabilities or network management, e.g. IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity), ESN (Electronic Serial Number), PIN (Product Identification Number)

H04W 8/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Transfer of information between network and terminal equipment.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Program loading or initiating

G06F 9/445

H04W 8/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Assigning one or a plurality of permanent or temporary addresses to network components (also for services or other logical entities) for the purpose of handling mobility or establishing communications using said addresses.

H04W 8/28 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Assigning in a permanent way address(es) to a user independently of his subscription data.

H04W 8/30 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Ensuring reliability, fault tolerance of network data or restoring network data after accidental loss or network malfunction.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements for maintaining operational condition

H04W 24/04

H04W 12/00 - Definition fr

References relevant to classification in this main group

This main group does not cover:

Security arrangements for protecting computers against unauthorised activity

G06F 21/00

Arrangements for secret or secure communication

H04L 9/00

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

authorisation

means providing access to network resources after consultation of network stored user or terminal data or after checking a user’s credentials

H04W 12/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Providing protection of information, e.g. ciphering, privacy of users, e.g. aliases.

Arrangements for legally authorised parties to access said protected information, e.g. legal interception.

H04W 12/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Issuance of keying material.

H04W 12/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Verifying the identity of a user or network component or network services after consulting network stored user data, checking user’s credentials for allowing use of network.

H04W 12/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Restricting or preventing use of network resources or network services.

H04W 12/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Verifying information received.

H04W 12/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Detecting network intrusion or spoofing; counter-measures therefor.

H04W 16/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Arrangements and techniques for determining traffic capacity for network equipments and/or linking infrastructure.

Distribution of spectral resources at deployment stage, i.e. distributing wireless channels to access points; Re-distribution of said resources during operation on basis of predicted or predefined traffic patterns.

Providing wireless coverage by special arrangements of service areas or shape, e.g. cell structures.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements

H04W 24/00

Network resource management

H04W 28/00

wireless channel allocation

H04W 72/00

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

wireless channel

means a specific frequency, time, spreading code, service area or combination thereof over which communication takes place

distribution of spectral resources

means allocation at deployment stage of wireless channels to access points with the purpose of providing adequate coverage and/or traffic handling capacity

H04W 16/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Distribution, at initial stage of deployment, of spectral resources, e.g. channels among access points in a network.

Defining spectral resources to be re-distributed.

Sizing network equipments or network equipment links for the purpose of handling expected traffic.

H04W 16/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Part of the spectral resources can be re-distributed to the access points in order to autonomously optimize performance using long or short term variations in traffic, i.e. the network does not revert to the original distribution.

H04W 16/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Part of the spectral resources distributed to an access point can be relinquished to adjacent access points to avoid communication drops or regulate traffic load. When no longer needed, the relinquished resources are returned to the original access point.

H04W 16/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The expected traffic load is regulated by controlling the size of a service area by controlling the transmission power of an access point.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hand-off or reselecting arrangements for handling the traffic

H04W 36/22

Transmission power control

H04W 52/04

H04W 16/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Partitioning of all spectral resources is performed autonomously among the access points, normally based on interference limiting criteria.

Dynamic channel distribution as such.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Wireless resource allocation

H04W 72/04

H04W 16/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

All of the available spectral resources are assigned in a fixed manner among the network’saccess points.

Cluster reuse wherein one or more reuse patterns are assigned to at least one access point.

H04W 16/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Service area(s) belonging to different wireless networks have at least one of their allocated spectral resources in common.

Techniques and arrangements for avoiding simultaneous use of the resource, e.g. for selecting interference-free channels in overlap areas.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Local resource management, e.g. allocation of wireless resources based on quality criteria

H04W 72/08

H04W 16/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

One of the networks being of small scale for non-public usage.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Private Base Station

designates a base station owned by a non-public authority and operating within the allocated spectrum of a public licensed system

H04W 16/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Coverage prediction tools or models.

Use of field measurements for network deployment, use of test access points for determining optimal or optimized locations for network deployment.

Arrangements and techniques for providing initial network coverage at network deployment and providing additional coverage at later deployment stage.

H04W 16/20 - Definition

Definition statement

This group covers:

N/A

H04W 16/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements and techniques for predicting equipment or system link capacity or system performance.

H04W 16/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements where wireless coverage is provided by special arrangements of service areas (cells) or shape thereof.

H04W 16/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques and arrangements where the service area is extended by dedicated relaying equipment or remote base station.

H04W 16/28 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The service area is defined by a focused beam in a desired generally variable direction of transmission or reception, e.g. electric antenna tilting or beam forming.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements for changing or varying the orientation or the shape of the directional pattern of the waves radiated from an aerial or aerial system

H01Q 3/00

H04W 16/30 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The service area differs substantially from a normally polygonal or sectorized shape, e.g. the outer borders of the ring are defined by preset values of an access point’s transmission powers.

H04W 16/32 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Partitioning spectral resources among access areas organized into ranks, each subordinate to the one above it.

Macro cell, micro cell overlays.

H04W 24/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Testing or monitoring arrangements specially adapted for wireless networks.

Arrangements for supervising performance of a deployed network.

Arrangements for evaluating current network performance under real or simulated traffic conditions.

System equipment reconfiguration or upgrades in order to improve overall network performance.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Monitoring and testing

H04B 17/00

Arrangements for maintenance or administration

H04L 12/24

Monitoring, testing arrangements

H04L 12/26

Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements for automatic or semi-automatic exchanges

H04M 3/22

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

re-configuration, upgrade

means changing the operational characteristics of the network or network components in order to, generally, improve performance. The re-configuration or upgrade operation is normally performed after a period of monitoring or testing

H04W 24/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

System equipment reconfiguration or upgrades in order to improve overall network performance.

The permanent deployment of additional, i.e. non-planned, equipment or resources for performance improvement.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Service support; network management device

H04W 88/18

H04W 24/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Reliability aspects, stand-by arrangements, back-up or redundant systems or system components in a network.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

For increasing reliability, e.g. using redundant or spare channels or apparatus

H04B 1/74

Arrangements for maintenance or administration in data switching networks

H04L 12/24

H04W 24/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The operational condition of the network is assessed using data generated outside normal operation or by self-testing operation.

H04W 24/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The operational condition of the network is assessed with data collected during normal operation.

H04W 24/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Generating measurement requests to monitoring equipment; collecting/receiving data from reporting equipment.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hand-off or reselecting arrangements

H04W 36/00

Connectivity information management, e.g. connectivity discovery or update

H04W 40/24

H04W 28/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Arrangements or techniques for central control, by a network component, of traffic or admission policies for the purpose of, e.g. ensuring fair use of network resources among users or terminals or guarantying implicit or negotiated service level or quality agreements.

Management of negotiated local resources for further allocation.

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Traffic, admission policy

means pre-established rules or agreements for allocating network resources to services or service requests in order to achieve a predetermined goal

H04W 28/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Avoiding or regulating an actual or potential traffic overload condition.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

flow control

techniques and arrangements to regulate the amount of traffic information in the network

congestion control

techniques and arrangements whereby traffic information is transmitted over alternative transmission paths for balancing the load or when a preferred or desired path is unavailable due to excessive traffic carried over said path

H04W 28/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received

H04L 1/00

H04W 28/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques and arrangements whereby transmission over a wireless link is optimized by e.g. adapting the format of the information, reducing the amount of associated control information, discarding data packets.

H04W 28/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques and arrangements where communication information is transmitted over alternate transmission paths for balancing the load in the system or when a preferred or desired path is unavailable due to excessive traffic carried over said path, e.g. load shedding/sharing involving alternative entities.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Hand-off or reselecting arrangements for handling the traffic

H04W 36/22

Communication route or path selection based on wireless node resources

H04W 40/04

Access restriction based on traffic conditions

H04W 48/06

H04W 28/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques and arrangements to regulate the amount of communication information in the network.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Packet switching systems

H04L 12/70

Local resource management with wireless trafficscheduling

H04W 72/12

H04W 28/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Supervisory or control information is exchanged between equipments involved in information transmission.

H04W 28/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The information is temporarily stored, buffered, queued for transmission.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Buffering or recovering information during reselection

H04W 36/02

H04W 28/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

(Re)negotiating communication parameters of connections involving at least one wireless communication link over which information is to be delivered with a requesting user/terminal from within or outside the system.

Grant or denial of requests from new users/terminals and conditions under which such requests are granted in view of keeping respectively meeting negotiated or implicit requirements for serviced users or terminals.

Establishment of communication parameters through actions other than negotiation, e.g. delegating/commanding the use of pre-established parameters, or determining by a device itself the set of parameters to use.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Local resource management

H04W 72/00

H04W 28/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

(Re)defining the wireless resources to be used to achieve the agreed SLA, QoS etc.

H04W 28/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

(Re)negotiating bandwidth of connection(s) via one or more communication links. The negotiated bandwidth may be provided via one or more communication links.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

bandwidth

means the transmission capacity available for communication as provided by a suitable combination of communication links of predefined capacity

H04W 28/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

(Re)negotiating transmission rate of connection.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

communication rate

means the information rate available for communication provided by a suitable combination of information coding and/or modulation techniques

H04W 28/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Negotiating prior to service or re-negotiating during communication the network resources required in order to achieve the desired service level.

Allowing temporary "graceful degradation" in order to maximize general network capacity.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

graceful degradation

means temporarily providing resources below an agreed service level in order to avoid service disruption

H04W 28/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Reservation of resources in backbone network; reservation of wireless resources to be allocated by local controller.

Reservation based on predicted user or terminal behaviour, e.g. moving direction or speed.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Wireless resource allocation

H04W 72/04

H04W 36/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Transferring on-going connection(s) of a user or terminal in connected state to different network resource(s) or administrative domains with the purpose of avoiding or limiting loss or degradation of said connection(s) due to user mobility, wireless link conditions or system loading. The reselection can take place at the user and/or system initiative based on fixed or agreed criteria and can be performed for all or part of the assigned resources.

(Re)ordering of candidates lists, temporary storage, buffering of connection data during reselection, performing registration, binding or location updates during reselection of network equipments or administrative domains.

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

hand-off

means a change of a radio link while a connection is ongoing (active state) or readily set up although no data are currently transmitted (dormant state)

user mobility

means the user changing his point(s) of attachment in the network(s), e.g. access point due to movement in service areas

registration, binding, location updates

means using system, user or terminal tracking information to detect user mobility

seamless, soft reselection

means a reselection whereby wireless links are temporarily added or deleted in such a manner that the terminal keeps at least one link connected

lossless reselection

means a reselection whereby information loss during reselection is prevented or avoided

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the expressions "handover" and "hand-off" are often used as synonyms

H04W 36/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements for avoiding loss of information transiting in the network during reselection of a, generally, new access point by temporary storage and subsequent delivery to the, generally, new selected access point.

Resending or duplicating of data; temporary suspension of information flow.

H04W 36/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The connection is transferred between access points providing communication in areas of significantly different coverage.

Macrocell/microcell hand-off, with the following features: hand-off within the same network authority and using the same air interface.

H04W 36/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements where wireless communication(s) channel(s) are locally re-arranged without altering the fixed networkconnection(s); e.g. intra-cell hand-off, hand-off between sectors of one access point.

H04W 36/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements where a different access point is normally selected. In case of failure the previous access point can be reselected e.g. intra BSC/RNChand-off.

H04W 36/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements where the reselected access point(s) belongs to a different access controller, e.g. inter BSC/RNChand-off.

H04W 36/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The connection is transferred between serving nodes in the backbone network e.g. inter-MSC, inter-SGSN.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

MSC

Mobile Switching Centre

SGSN

Serving General Packet Radio Service Support Node

H04W 36/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The connection is transferred to a different network or authority, e.g. inter-operator, inter-system hand-off.

H04W 36/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Wireless links are temporarily added or deleted in such a manner that the terminal keeps at least one link connected.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Diversity systems

H04B 7/02

H04W 36/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Transferring connections in order to avoid interference to/from neighbouring cells, e.g. confinement hand-off.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Allocation of wireless resources based on quality criteria

H04W 72/08

H04W 36/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Transferring connections in order to distribute the traffic to neighbouring cells, e.g. load shedding hand-off.

H04W 36/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The reselection is performed in order to meet service level agreements.

H04W 36/28 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The reselection may be performed for selected parts of a plurality of connections of a user or terminal.

H04W 40/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Techniques and arrangements for selectively establishing one or a plurality of communication paths involving at least one wireless path, from information sources to information sinks, over which information is communicated.

Techniques and arrangements for discovering, establishing, maintaining connectivity information among affiliated wireless equipments, e.g. routing lists.

Techniques and arrangements for path selection, path optimisation in network.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Packet switching systems

H04L 12/70

H04W 40/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques and arrangements for selecting, based on predetermined criteria, one or a plurality of communication paths among the available ones.

H04W 40/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Route selection based on available or allocated resources to nodes or terminals, e.g. processing power, buffer capacity, memory.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Local resource management

H04W 72/00

H04W 40/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Route selection based on antenna selection, e.g. selecting one of a plurality of directional antennas.

H04W 40/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Routing performed by adapting transmission power or varying the gain in order to modify the range for avoiding a hop, for reaching a node directly.

H04W 40/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Route selection based on remaining energy or power consumption of the node.

H04W 40/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Route selection based on measured or obtained link quality information.

H04W 40/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Route selection based on e.g. link stability, association stability.

H04W 40/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Route selection based on measured or perceived interference, Carrier to Interference ratio (C/I), or Energy to Noise ratio (E/N).

H04W 40/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Routes calculated beforehand due to predicted change of topology.

H04W 40/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Route selection dependent on the position of source node or destination node (often along with geographical coordinates for routing).

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Registration, e.g. affiliation to network; De-registration, e.g. terminating affiliation

H04W 60/00

Locating users or terminals for network management purposes

H04W 64/00

H04W 40/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Reaching a default gateway (BTS or AP) over an ad-hoc network router.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Terminal device for wireless communication networks adapted for relaying to or from another terminal or user

H04W 88/04

H04W 40/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques and arrangements for establishing neighbour lists of network(s) or relaying or forwarding terminal devices, e.g. routing lists, routing tables; maintaining or updating established neighbour lists to reflect changes in connectivity information, e.g. (relaying or forwarding) terminal leaving or joining the network.

H04W 40/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The nodes announce regularly their routing tables and send a probe packet depending on the situation.

H04W 40/28 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Connectivity information is only exchanged when needed, e.g. on demand routing.

H04W 40/30 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Connectivity information is exchanged on a regular basis, e.g. table driven, systematic/periodic collection, upgrading, and transmission of connectivity information.

H04W 40/32 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Defining the membership to a cluster for routing purpose.

H04W 40/34 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

An already established route is modified to find a better one, e.g. adaptive routing.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Connection manipulation

H04W 76/04

H04W 40/36 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Hand-off triggers the changing of an existing route, e.g. a default gateway can be reached after hand-off with fewer hops.

H04W 40/38 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

A node gets out of reach so the routing tables need to be modified.

H04W 48/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Techniques or arrangements for selecting, by a user or terminal, one or a plurality of networks or access points, for the purpose of requesting affiliation or use of network or access point resources.

Techniques or arrangements for network or access point information delivery, e.g. discovery information delivery.

Techniques or arrangements for preventing user or terminal affiliation.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Registration, e.g. affiliation to network;De-registration, e.g. terminating affiliation

H04W 60/00

Local resource management

H04W 72/00

Wireless channel access, e.g. scheduled or random access

H04W 74/00

H04W 48/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques or arrangements for selectively preventing one or a plurality of users or terminals to affiliate to a selected network or access point, e.g. by jamming broadcast, using barring information.

Preventing or restricting access to service.

Access to network or network services is normally prevented without prior consultation of network stored user data or is based on available terminal data.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Local resource management

H04W 72/00

H04W 48/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Access is prevented or restricted in specific areas, e.g. hospitals, or makes use of user or terminal behaviour information.

Access restriction to avoid influencing systems outside the network.

H04W 48/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Access is prevented or restricted in response to or to avoid a congestion situation, e.g. cell barring.

H04W 48/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Distribution, by network equipment to a user or terminal, of information for the purpose of selecting a network or an access point.

References relevant to classification in this group

This group does not cover:

Signalling during connection

H04W 76/00

H04W 48/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The information is distributed by network equipment or by separate equipment on a channel which is distinct from a network communication or control channel, e.g. bulletin board.

H04W 48/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

using part of/or a networkcontrol channel.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Wireless trafficscheduling using a grant channel

H04W 72/14

Non-scheduled access using an access channel

H04W 74/08

H04W 48/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The information is sent by the network or access point in response to a user query.

H04W 48/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Searching for available networks, access points and/or communication services they provide; receiving provided discovery information.

Storage, updating, processing discovery information, generally at terminal or user equipment.

H04W 48/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Based on processed network information, communication service information, or user defined criteria, one or a plurality of networks is (are) selected for immediate or deferred access or affiliation request.

Selection of an air interface within a network, or the selection of a service.

H04W 48/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Based on processed access point information, or user defined criteria, one or a plurality of access points is (are) selected for immediate or deferred access or affiliation request.

Selection of a cell served by an access point.

H04W 52/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Techniques and arrangements for optimizing network or terminal performance by regulating the amount of power used by a wireless terminal or network equipment.

H04W 52/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques and arrangements in which network information, e.g. sleep, activity timing, is used to minimize power supply consumption, e.g. battery saving.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Battery saving arrangements for cordless telephones

H04M 1/73

Notification of users, e.g. alerting for incoming communication or change of service

H04W 68/00

H04W 52/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques and arrangements for controlling the amount of power to provide adequate wireless link quality.

H04W 52/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Outer loop power control.

Updating the quality target or threshold value used for power control.

H04W 52/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Algorithms specific for power control in the uplink only or downlink only.

H04W 52/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Power values of different channels are related through an offset or gain factor.

H04W 52/22 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Using past power control commands, past power values or information, look-up tables, predicting future states of transmission or calculating statistics.

H04W 52/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Transmission power is based on a wireless path parameter representative of signal quality, e.g. SNR, CIR, RSS, path loss, interferences.

Synonyms and Keywords

SNR

Signal-to-Noise Ratio

CIR

Carrier-to-Interference Ratio

RSS

Received Signal Strength

H04W 52/26 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

TPC taking into account adaptive modulation and coding

H04W 52/28 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

TPC based on mobile position, speed, type of data or priority, user or terminal mode.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

TPC in connection with interruption of transmission

H04W 52/44

TPC during retransmission after error or non-acknowledgement

H04W 52/48

H04W 52/32 - Definition fr

Synonyms and Keywords

In patent documents the following expressions/words "broadcast channel", "beacon channel", "shared channel", "common channel", "control channel", "pilot channel" and "multicast channel" are often used as synonyms

H04W 52/34 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

TPC with constraints in the total amount of available power in the cell, network or access point, base station.

Adjusting the maximum power of the base station.

Distribution of total cell power among different users, sub-channels or sub-carriers, e.g. in OFDM systems.

H04W 52/44 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

TPC during discontinuous transmission (DTX).

Synonyms and Keywords

DRX

Discontinuous Reception

DTX

Discontinuous Transmission

H04W 56/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Techniques and arrangements for establishing or maintaining a predetermined timing relationship between wireless terminal and network equipments or among wireless network equipments.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Synchronising arrangements in time-division multiplex systems

H04J 3/06

Arrangements for synchronising receiver with transmitter

H04L 7/00

H04W 60/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Registering, affiliating an authorized user or terminal to a network with the purpose of providing network services.

Tracking a registered user or terminal by monitoring transmitted information, e.g. location updates, communication information from the user or terminal either in response of a network’s query, trigger event, periodical request or of his own volition, e.g. periodic registration.

H04W 60/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The user or terminal is requested to transmit information at scheduled intervals.

H04W 60/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The information is transmitted upon occurrence of specific events, e.g. change of location or routing area, network query.

Also changing from idle to active mode at terminal in response to such queries.

H04W 60/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Indication to the network, access point, user or terminal that affiliation will cease immediately or in a deferred manner; the indication may include information for maintaining or resuming affiliation.

H04W 64/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Locating user or terminal for the purpose of network management, e.g. hand-off or for providing network services to the user or terminal.

Finding the geo-position of a user or terminal in the network using exclusively measurements on the wireless network links, e.g. delays, angle of arrival or "fingerprints"; the measurements are performed with the equipment normally used for communication(s).

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Radio direction finding, determining distance or velocity by use of radio waves

G01S

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

fingerprint

designates a pre-established combination of measured spectral parameters related to the measurement area or location and used as template with actual measurements

H04W 68/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Notifying one or a plurality of users specified as recipients of an incoming communication or changes in provided services.

Selectively performing notifying in parts of the network, e.g. paging strategies.

Techniques to increase efficiency of the notification channel. The notification uses specific wireless channel(s) reserved/allocated for this purpose.

H04W 68/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques for enhancing notification attempts, e.g. changing the characteristics of the transmitted notification signal or notification channel(s) between unsuccessful attempts such as power increase.

H04W 68/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The notification is performed using several attempts in an order based on user’s habits or recent network interaction data.

Notification based on mobility data, e.g. direction of move, speed.

H04W 68/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The notification is performed using several attempts involving different network areas between unsuccessful attempts.

H04W 68/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The notification is performed using several attempts and increasing the initial area by including surrounding network areas between unsuccessful attempts.

H04W 68/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The incoming communication is notified over the whole network.

H04W 68/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The notification is conducted simultaneously or sequentially in a plurality of networks.

Notification over other subscribed networks when user is unreachable/idle.

H04W 72/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Processing originatinguser or terminal resource requests for the purpose of allocating one or a plurality of wireless resources to the user or terminal.

Allocating one or a plurality of wireless resources in response to a terminatinguser or terminal communication request.

Controlling wireless access requests and wireless resource allocation among contending users or terminals.

Selection of wireless resources by user or terminal.

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

relaying terminal

means terminal equipment (as such covered by H04W 88/02) considered as local access point for the requester

H04W 72/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques and arrangements whereby a wireless resource distributed to an access point is autonomously selected by a user or terminal; preventing other users or terminals from selecting said resource.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Wireless channel access, e.g. scheduled or random access

H04W 74/00

H04W 72/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Allocation of wireless resources of an access point for the purpose of communication with user or terminal.

Allocation of channels to users.

H04W 72/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The wireless resources are allocated in a predetermined order established by the access point; the order relates to the use of the resources, e.g. preferred channels list.

H04W 72/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The wireless resources are allocated on the basis of perceived, measured, or requested quality. Selection of resources to avoid a local interference condition.

H04W 72/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

The wireless resources are allocated on the basis of precedence/priority of the information or priority of the information source/ recipient.

H04W 72/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques or arrangements for:

Wireless multiplexing of several flows into one single stream on the wireless interface. It applies to up- and downlink.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Packet switching systems

H04L 12/70

H04W 72/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

User(s) is/are notified of granted request(s) over a dedicated channel, e.g. downlinkcontrol channel.

H04W 74/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Techniques or arrangements for managing user or terminal access requests.

Techniques or arrangements for arbitration of access between contending users.

H04W 74/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Automatic selection of an access technique, e.g. scheduled or non-scheduled, for the purpose of improving throughput with respect to network, user(s) requirements or channel conditions.

H04W 74/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Users are scheduled for transmission in an orderly fashion generally by a controller or are aware of their scheduled transmission rights.

H04W 74/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Users are individually queried to determine access needs to the wireless media.

H04W 74/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Access request or user data is transmitted independently and/or regardless of other users states.

H04W 76/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Techniques and arrangements for selecting and establishing one or a plurality of communication paths or logical connections, recovering or reconnecting accidentally lost communication paths.

Switching, re-directing, re-routing connection or control function.

De-allocating, re-claiming one or a plurality of established communication resources no longer in use.

Signalling arrangements therefore.

Connection state management, e.g. idle mode.

H04W 76/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques and arrangements for selecting and establishing one or a plurality of communication paths, e.g. multi-call, in the backbone network(s) meeting the implicit or negotiated communication parameters or service level.

Recovering or reconnecting accidentally lost communication paths.

Signalling therefor.

H04W 76/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Switching, re-routing connection or control function in addition to those necessary to establish or maintain connectionbetween users or terminals.

In-connection signalling, notification, connection state transition to and from e.g. hibernation or dormant mode.

H04W 76/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

De-allocating, re-claiming one or a plurality of established communication resources no longer in use.

Signalling therefor.

H04W 80/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Generic data protocols adapted for operation of wireless media and implemented at particular network layers.

The following is a list of the conventional OSI layers covered by the corresponding subgroup of H04W 80/00.

OSI Layer

Layer 2

H04W 80/02

Layer 3

H04W 80/04

Layer 4

H04W 80/06

Layers 5 to 7

H04W 80/08

Layer 5

H04W 80/10

Layer 7

H04W 80/12

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Communication control or communication processing characterised by a protocol

H04L 29/06

H04W 84/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Networks characterized by a specific organisation of wireless access points, network equipments or linking infrastructure thereof.

H04W 84/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Networks with a pre-established organization, i.e. users are normally not responsible for network configuration or management.

H04W 84/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Networks of large scale, e.g. nationwide, using a plurality of hierarchically interconnected selecting equipments for path finding or routing communication(s) within the network from/to a wireless user. The communication(s) can originate or terminate from/in an external network e.g. cellular systems.

H04W 84/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Dedicated systems in which, generally a half duplex communication channel is shared among a predefined group of users.

H04W 84/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Networks of small, local or limited size with a wired or wireless backbone connected to access points, e.g. private, corporate networks.

H04W 84/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Networks in which fixed subscribers have wireless access to a public network. The network does normally not perform mobility management for these subscribers.

Radio concentration equipment for subscriber premises.

H04W 84/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Networks in which wireless subscribers are connected by a Private Branch Exchange (PBX) to other subscribers or to a public network.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Substation extension arrangements, cordless telephones

H04M 1/72

H04W 84/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

User based networks without hierarchical organisation.

Users define network(s), affiliation(s), can elect a regulating authority (master), can act as relaying device on behalf of other users.

Affiliation of users to network(s) and user’s roles in the network(s) can be dynamically changed.

Creation and termination of user defined networks.

H04W 84/20 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques and arrangements to (re-)elect a user as regulating authority based on agreed/negotiated criteria between users.

H04W 84/22 - Definition

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques and arrangements for connection of an ad hoc network to a wired network through an access point.

H04W 88/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Edge equipment to public telephone and data networks, e.g. gateways.

Service support, network management equipment.

Switching or routing equipment in wireless backbone network.

Wireless access network equipment e.g. access point, access controller.

Terminal equipment.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transceivers

H04B 1/38

Data switching networks

H04L 12/00

Substation equipment for telephonic communication

H04M 1/00

Selecting

H04Q

Casings, cabinets or drawers for electric apparatus

H05K 5/00

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

backbone network

designates equipment for connecting one or several wireless access points to a wired or wireless infrastructure in order to allow communication between users inside or outside the wireless network

terminal

means the equipment acting as/or on behalf of a user

H04W 88/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Physical equipment acting as/on behalf of a user

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transceivers, i.e. devices in which transmitter and receiver form a structural unit and in which at least one part is used for functions of transmitting and receiving

H04B 1/38

Substation equipment for telephonic communication

H04M 1/00

H04W 88/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Techniques and arrangements in which a terminal equipment acts as a relay on behalf of a different user/terminal, i.e. forwards user or control information to/from said user/terminal. The information is normally transferred using selectively established wireless communication(s) link(s).

H04W 88/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Terminal equipment for communicating with one or a plurality of different networks using one or a plurality of networkcommunication links.

H04W 88/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Equipments providing wireless coverage and selective access to/from the network, e.g. radio base stations, BTS, Node B.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Transceivers, i.e. devices in which transmitter and receiver form a structural unit and in which at least one part is used for functions of transmitting and receiving

H04B 1/38

Casings, cabinets or drawers for electric apparatus

H05K 5/00

Constructional details common to different types of electric apparatus

H05K 7/00

Cordless telephones

H04M 1/72

H04W 88/10 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

This group covers access points that operate in different systems with different radio interfaces (e.g. analog-digital, WLAN-cellular, GSM900-GSM1800) or for different operators using the same radio interface.

H04W 88/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Equipments for controlling access points, e.g. BSC, RNC.

H04W 88/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Switching or routing equipments for establishing a connection between normally a public network and wireless user e.g. MSC/SGSN.

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Data switching networks

H04L 12/00

Selecting

H04Q

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

MSC

Mobile Switching Centre

SGSN

Serving General Packet Radio Service Support Node

H04W 88/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Edge equipments and interfaces to public telephone or data networks, e.g. GMSC/GGSN.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

GMSC

Gateway Mobile Switching Centre

GGSN

Gateway General Packet Radio Service Support Node

H04W 88/18 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Network equipments specially adapted for wireless network services to user.

H04W 92/00 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This main group covers:

Arrangements for interconnecting network components or networks.

Special equipment or adaptations therefor.

Control and signalling arrangements at interface.

The following is a list of specific interfaces between entities defined by specific standards.

System/standard: entities/ Interface

GSM: BS-BSC/ A-bis

H04W 92/04, H04W 92/12

GSM: BSC-MSC/A

H04W 92/04, H04W 92/14

UMTS: Node B- RNC/ IuB

H04W 92/04, H04W 92/12

UMTS: RNC-MGW/ IuCS

H04W 92/04, H04W 92/14

UMTS: RNC- SGSN/ IuPS

H04W 92/04, H04W 92/14

UMTS: USIM-ME/ Cu

H04W 92/08

UMTS: RNC-RNC/ IuR

H04W 92/22

GSM: HLR-MSC/ B

H04W 92/24

GSM: MSC/VLR-HLR/ D

H04W 92/24

GSM: MSC-EIR/ F

H04W 92/24

GPRS: EIR-SGSN/ Gf

H04W 92/24

GPRS: HLR- SGSN/ Gr

H04W 92/24

GPRS: HLR- GGSN/ Gc

H04W 92/24

Glossary of terms

In this main group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

GSM

Global System for Mobile communications

UMTS

Universal Mobile Telecommunications System

MSC

Mobile Switching Center

MGW

Media Gateway

SGSN

Serving GPRS Support Node

GPRS

General Packet Radio Service

ME

Mobile Equipment

EIR

Equipment Identity Register

USIM

Universal Subscriber Identity Module

H04W 92/02 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Arrangements for interconnecting a plurality of networks. The networks may be either physically or logically separated.

H04W 92/04 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Interfaces like A-bis, IuB, A, IuCS, IuPS

H04W 92/06 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Interfaces between the wireless network and edge equipment of a public fixed telephone or data network.

H04W 92/08 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Interfaces like Cu.

H04W 92/10 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Radio transmission systems for communication between two or more posts, at least one of which is mobile

H04B 7/26

H04W 92/12 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Interfaces between controlled access points and wireless access controlling equipment, e.g. A-bis, IuB.

H04W 92/14 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Interfaces between BSC/RNC and switching/routing equipment of the network, e.g. A, IuCS, IuPS.

H04W 92/16 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Interfaces among access points, between switching/routing equipments, between support/management equipments.

H04W 92/24 - Definition fr

Definition statement

This group covers:

Interfaces between switching/routing equipments and support/management equipment e.g. HLR, VLR, AuC, SMS-C.

Interfaces like B, D, F, Gf, Gr, Gc.

Glossary of terms

In this group, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

AuC

Authentication Centre

SMS-C

Short message Service-Centre

H05B - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Electric heating:

This subclass covers not only the electric elements and circuitry designs but also the electric aspects of their arrangement, where these concern cases of general application. Heating elements used in specific applications are classified in subclasses for those applications.

Electric lighting:

This subclass covers circuits and circuit elements for the above light sources. The above light sources when combined with light sources of a different kind are also covered by this subclass.

This subclass is residual for electric lighting.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Electric heating

Uses of electric heat sources, or apparatus incorporating such heat sources, are too numerous to mention and cover all possible areas of technology. Examples of places where such uses or apparatus can be found include A47J (domestic cooking); B21J, B21K (forging by heat); C21, C22, C23 (metallurgy); F24 (domestic heating and stoves); F27 (furnaces and ovens). See also the references below.

Electric lighting

Uses of electric light sources are also too numerous to mention and cover all possible areas of technology. See indexing schemes F21W and F21Y.

Class F21 covers the material arrangement of parts including electrical elements, i.e. their geometrical or physical position in relation to one another, such as the structures or constructional features of lighting devices incorporating a light source, electric or otherwise.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Heating or cooling appliances for medical or therapeutic treatment

A61F 7/00

Joining of preformed parts by heating of plastics or substances in a plastic state

B29C 65/02

Apparatus for electrothermal treatment of ores or metallurgical products

C22B 4/08

Electron beam or ion beam tubes for localised treatment of objects

H01J 37/30
NB: This subclass is residual for electric lighting. See notes above.

Electric discharge tubes

H01J

Electric discharge lamps

H01J 61/00-H01J 65/00

Circuit elements structurally associated with the lighting element of an electric discharge lamp

H01J 61/56

Electric incandescent lamps

H01K

Semiconductor devices with at least one particular jump barrier or surface barrier, specially adapted for light emission

H01L 27/15, H01L 33/00

Organic light emitting devices (OLED)

H01L 27/32, H01L 51/50

Stimulated-emission devices

H01S

Plasma torches

H05H 1/26

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Measuring of temperature by colorimeter

G01J

H05B 1/02 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Control of temperature in general

G05D 23/00

H05B 6/00 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Radiation therapy

A61N 5/00

H05B 7/11 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Non-insulated conductors or conductive bodies characterized by their form

H01B 5/00

Insulated conductors or cables characterized by their form

H01B 7/00

H05B 7/144 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Circuit arrangements or systems for supplying electric power in general

H02J

H05B 7/148 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Control of position or direction in general

G05D 3/00

Regulating electric power in general

G05F 1/66

H05C - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Electric means, e.g. circuits, specially designed for use in equipment for killing, stunning, enclosing or guiding living beings, including the constructional features of the equipment and arrangements for monitoring the equipment.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Catching, trapping or scaring of animals and apparatus for the destruction of noxious animals or noxious plants are covered by A01M Circuits for this sort of apparatus, used for killing, stunning, enclosing or guiding living beings, are classified in this subclass.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Examples of places where the subject matter of this subclass is covered when specially adapted, used for a particular purpose, or incorporated in a larger system:

Electrified wire fencing for animal husbandry

A01K 3/00

Catching fish in bulk by electrocution

A01K 79/02

Stationary means for catching or killing insects by electric means

A01M 1/22

Apparatus for the destruction of noxious animals, other than insects, by electricity

A01M 19/00

Electric traps for animals

A01M 23/38

Slaughtering or stunning by electric current

A22B 3/06

Weapons with electric stunning means

F41B 15/04

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Devices for protecting plants against animals, birds or other pests

A01G 13/10

Scaring devices for animals

A01M 29/00

Corrals

E04H 17/18

Burglar, theft or intruder alarms triggered by the breaking or disturbance of stretched cords or wires

G08B 13/12

H05C 1/04 - Definition fr

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Mechanical self-interrupters

H01H

Electronic pulse-generators

H03K

H05F - Definition fr

Definition statement

This subclass covers:

Methods or arrangements for preventing the formation of electrostatic charges on bodies or for carrying-off these charges after formation.

Use of naturally-occuring electricity, e.g. lightning and static electricity.

Relationship between large subject matter areas

Spark gaps, sparking plugs and corona discharge devices are classified in subclass H01T.

Electrostatic machines are classified in subclass H02N.

References relevant to classification in this subclass

This subclass does not cover:

Installations of lightning conductors; Fastening thereof to supporting structure

H02G 13/00
Specific applications of methods or arrangements for preventing the formation of static electricity or for carrying off these charges after their formation. For example:

Garments protecting against electric shocks or static electricity

A41D 13/008

Footwear with earthing or grounding means

A43B 7/36

Carrying off electrostatic charges from living beings

A61N 1/14

Electric elements specially adapted for carrying off electrostatic charges from vehicles

B60R 16/06

Static discharge and lightning protection for aircraft

B64D 45/02

Arrangements in large containers

B65D 90/46

Structural protection against electrostatic charges or discharges for semiconductor devices

H01L 23/60

Protective earth or shield arrangements on coupling devices

H01R 13/648

Devices providing for corona discharge

H01T 19/00

Screening of printed circuits or components thereof against electric or magnetic fields

H05K 9/00

Informative references

Attention is drawn to the following places, which may be of interest for search:

Domestic cleaning implements functioning electrostatically

A47L 13/40

Cleaning by electrostatic means

B08B 6/00

Apparatus for electrographic processes using a charge pattern

G03G 15/00

Electrostatic machines

H02N

Glossary of terms

In this subclass, the following terms or expressions are used with the meaning indicated:

Corona discharge or brush discharge

Discharge from a conductor when the potential difference between it and its surroundings exceeds a certain value but is not enough to cause a spark or an arc.

Spark gaps

Enclosed or non-enclosed discharge devices having cold electrodes and used exclusively to discharge a quantity of electrical energy in small time duration.

Coupling devices

Devices having two or more parts specially adapted so as to be capable of ready and repeated physical engagement or disengagement, without the use of a tool for the purpose or establishing or breaking an electrical path.

Electrostatic charge, Static electricity

They are used as synonyms for the electric charge at rest on the surface of an insulator or insulated body.